Music As Loud As My Sister

 

Music as loud as my sister

Whose scream is like nails on a chalkboard

Whose punch is as strong as a rock

Her whisper is as quiet as a mouse                                   

Bugging me is her hobby

Well it should be she’s great at it

She has a dream of becoming a teacher

Who knows how long that’ll last

She likes to cook

And be the center of attention

She says she’ll do gymnastics again

But she‘s been known to be a liar

Music as loud as my sister

 

Mystery Characters

Mystery characters:                   CATERPILLAR ALSO PLAYS JHON

 

Hungry caterpillar: is very quiet most of the time, sly and cautious

 

Store Owner: works in pet store wise and old

 

Mr. Myster: one of the chief detectives and doesn’t know who ate the tart. Very equipped and always walks on tip toes.

 

Ms. Melon:  A detective always keeping an EYE on the look out. has a lumpy voice and scared of caterpillars

 

Jhon: Knows he can help but loves to eat everything has blond hair very thin still in college

 

Time Period: Based in the sixties.

Setting(s):

The House

The Store

 

SHOP KEEPER    

 in  old crunchy voice

Behold, behold my beautiful caterpillar.

Very rare, very old can’t be fed till a month is WHOLE

Very small, but worth sacks of gold,

behold behold this beautiful soul!!!

 

MS.MELON

Oh Mamma! Doesn’t that caterpillar look heavenly

 

MR.MYSTER

Well we do have no pets…

 

MS.MELON

Come on now don’t be a pussy cat, it’s almost supper now and I made carrot soup, so if you want that caterpillar, get it now!

 

MR.MYSTER

Alright, shopkeeper, how much do you want for that dang caterpillar!

 

SHOP KEEPER

Oh this is not for sale, oh no its not!…. UNLESS you have ten sacks of gold for this old lot!  (chuckle chuckle)

 

MR.MYSTER

We’re the town sheriffs “sir,” now hand over that caterpillar or else get ready for…

 

SHOP KEEPER

His eyes grow wide.

Oh just take it take it, don’t be afraid. I’m just a old shopkeeper, I will obey.

 

SHOP KEEPER

But don’t forget, and never forget only feed him once in a year! sigh

 

MR.MYSTER

This is such a cute caterpillar

 

MS.MELON

I wonder why that store keeper told us to feed him once in “a year.”

 

MR.MYSTER

Ya, he’s as skinny as a string!

 

MS.MELON

Why do think two “gulp” sheriffs like us are keepin’ this old caterpillar?

 

MR.MYSTER

Stop scaring me with that glass eye of yours, Ms. Melon, you’re giving me the creeps! Back to the subject. We both deserve a caterpillar worth ten sacks of gold!!!

 

MS.MELON

Oh, I really hope we get that rare double choco cream cake to Molly before tomorrow then maybe she’ll give us that rare two dollar bill she promised me. Ya ya.

 

MR.MYSTER

Come on now, nothing will happen to the cream cake, now let’s get back home.

 

SCENE 2

next day

 

MR.MYSTER

Look at that little thing starin’ at the cream cake. Think ur goin’ get little fella huh huh?

 

CATERPILLAR

Meow…

 

MS.MELON

Awwww! It even purrs!

 

MR.MYSTER

Darlin’, when you’re givin that tart to Molls, don’t get it near me. You know I’m allergic to chocolate. And don’t keep it near little rascal over there, he sure looks HUNGRY.

 

CATERPILLAR

Meow…

 

MR.MYSTER

Oh stop purring at me!

 

MS.MELON

Alrighty, now I just need to head to the butcher to grab fresh apples for the fruit bowl. Like you said, ‘don’t let the caterpillar eat it.’ Now the responsibilities are in your hands so don’t let me see a half eaten tart on the table! And darlin’, turn on the AC, it’s awfully hot in here.

 

CATERPILLAR

Meow…

 

MR.MYSTER

You little…

 

SCENE 3

 

  1. MELON

Alright I’m back!

 

CATERPILLAR

Burp!

 

MS.MELON

Mmmmm…David!!!

 

MR.MYSTER

Huh?!

 

MS.MELON

Where’s the tart?!

 

MR.MYSTER

Ummmm…. in the box? Nervous tone

 

MS.MELON

Doesn’t look like that … Shattered voice

 

CATERPILLAR

BURP!!!!

 

MS.MELON

AHHHHH the caterpillar!!! David! Look! You let the caterpillar eat it didn’t you?

MR.MYSTER

Nooooo…?

 

MS.MELON

Come on and take the caterpillar, he’s going back to the store!!! I knew he was bad luck!

 

MR.MYSTER

Well maybe while I was sleeping it…

 

MS.MELON

SLEEPING?!?!

 

MR.MYSTER

Molly might have come and eat it?

 

MS.MELON

You dumb man, now come along this instant!

 

SHOP KEEPER

Welcome, welcome to all you fellows wearing green, blue pink and yellow! How can I help you on this cloudy day? Want a grown butterfly or a cat scratcher chair?

 

MS.MELON

Our caterpillar pal ate our tart! And now I’m rhyming, thanks alot!

 

SHOP KEEPER

You see, you see it wasn’t this caterpillar. I am wise and old it is not Mr. caterpillar!

I see, I see he almost never eats, I know I know it wasn’t him. I am positive! Though I know who ate the treat, you will find out yourselves for treating ME badly…. glance at Mr.Myster.

 

MR.MYSTER

gulp

 

MR.MYSTER

In a nervous tone

Hey, lets go check Molls maybe she did it.

 

MS.MELON

But how could she do it? That’s impossible! It’s her’s anyway so it’s fine if she did! But if the caterpillar did, I am planning to sew that old man’s store!

 

SHOP KEEPER

Well take the caterpillar! Old fellas, it might be worth gold but it is fairly old and it’s not mine so bye bye!

 

MR.MYSTER

Let’s check Jhon, he might have snuck in through that window you left open yesterday,you know he’s an eater!

 

SCENE 4

 

KNOCK KNOCK

 

JHON

Hello?

 

MS.MELON       say very quickly!

Yes, hello, did you happen to eat the choco cream cake? We think it’s the caterpillar but we’re not sure so lets go, it’s not Jhon, it’s not Jhon, now lets go!  

 

MR.MYSTER     Say in proud tone

Wait Jhon, do you know anything about this fishy case here? My wife over here doesn’t seem to know what she’s saying!

 

MS.MELON

Alright, Jhon spill the peas.

 

MR.MYERS

Well he doesn’t need to tell us EVERYTHING.

 

JHON

Alright alright, I might know something about this chocolate cream cake thief. mouth starts watering. Now, when I was eating a strawberry shortcake this afternoon, I saw a figure through your windows it was tall and, uh, was all black because the windows were closed ya know.

 

MS.MELON

Well…The only two people that were in the house at the scene of the crime were the caterpillar and Mr.Myster. Say fast to slow. But it couldn’t be Mr. Myers because he’s allergic to chocolate.

 

SCENE 4

 

CATERPILLAR

MEOW!!!!!

 

MS.MELON

Wait the caterpillar trying to tell me something…

 

JHON:

The caterpillar???

 

MS.MELON

Yes the caterpillar! He might be small but he’s not brainless!

 

MRT.MYSTER

Hey, wanna start heading back? It’s dark and we don’t need that 2DOLLAR bill do we?

 

JHON:

Well it is pretty hopeless now…

 

CATERPILLAR

M…..E……..O………W!!

 

JHON
Hey what’s that thing doin’ up in your hair Mr.Myster?

 

MS.MELON

Ya wait is that…

 

MR.MYSTER                

irritated and extremely cautious and nervous tone!

What? Come on let’s go in it’s getting REALLY dark outside!!

 

JHON

CHOCOLATE???

 

MR.MYSTER

What?? its probably just that old potato you bought yesterday…

 

MS.MELON

I thought you were allergic to chocolate???

 

MR.MYSTER

Ummmm…

 

JHON

Well we’re not positive yet…Hey what’s that in your pocket is that…

 

Ms. MELON John

Cream!!!???

 

Ms.MELON

sniffs the shirt

 

Ms.MELON John

You did it!!

 

MR.MYSTER

No I didn’t.

 

Jhon

You did it we know already!!

 

MR.MYSTER

I didn’t!!

 

Ms.MELON and John

YOU ATE THE CREAM CAKE!!!

 

Jhon

I see the cream in your shirt!

 

Ms.MELON

I see the chocolate in your hair!

 

Ms.MELON  & JHON

IT WAS YOUU!!!

 

Mr. MYSTER   Say in fast voice and powerful voice

I am so very sorry for eating the double chocolate cream cake we promised to give Molly.That day I was just so very stressed and so very hungry, I couldn’t help but take a small bite- very very small small. It just looked so creamy and chocolatey, my mouth couldn’t take it. I do feel especially bad for lying about being allergic to chocolate! Right away when I found out about that cake I needed to make a excuse, fast. But though I felt guilty 3/4s of the time I knew it was worth it. It was worth it! Because it was so good!  Really good!  Creamy and chocolatey! I deserved it. I really never get presents never ever. And you always are the better one, always always! Everyone always liked you better than me. And once I got that gold watch from the mayor for best hair you said I wasn’t worth it and put in a safe that only you could unlock! Heck! Why should I be apologizing to a greedy woman like you, I shouldn’t right forget the apology!

I’m done!

 

Murders and Friendships

It was all a blur when it happened. It just made me want to know even more. The first thing I remember, I was sitting at a booth in a restaurant called Tables and Chairs, with my mom and dad, and our waiter came over to our table. He took our orders and then walked away. Then my parents started asking me boring questions about what I was going to wear to my cousin’s wedding. I honestly couldn’t care less about that. Suddenly, we heard a scream and everyone was dead silent.

“No one will ever know!” a deep male voice yelled. We couldn’t see this man because he was blocked by all of the fancy chandeliers and table centers.  

Then we heard a gunshot and people frantically started calling 9-1-1 for ambulances and police. Some people just immediately started running out of the restaurant. My mom took me by the hand and rushed me out of Tables and Chairs. My dad followed us, and suddenly the three of us were running home. I was so excited that a boring dinner just turned into a murder, but I was scared of the murderer. I was so curious to learn more. A part of me wanted to run back and learn more, but then I was reminded by the sensible part of my brain that it would be very unsafe. We ran about 20 blocks, but stopped to catch our breath every few minutes. Now I wish we had brought the car so we wouldn’t have had to run this far.

Once we got home I went straight up to my room and started getting ready for bed. Minutes later, my mom came in.

“Sweetie,” she began to say.

“Mom, I told you this before, please don’t call me sweetie.”

“Sorry, honey.”

I rolled my eyes.

“Anyway,” she said, “Tables and Chairs just called and said there was a murder and the person died, and we are welcome to come to the funeral. Personally, I don’t think we needed to know that the person died. we were already scared enough. And I hate funerals! Who would just choose to go to a funeral of a person they don’t even know?!”

My mom was yelling then, and I wasn’t sure why. She was probably just mad about something else.

“It’s okay, Mom,” I said, trying to comfort her. “You can just forget everything that has happened and continue with your life.”

I said this only for her. I was not going to continue on like this. I was going to find out every single detail until I knew the whole story. I get obsessed with mysteries.

“Good night, Mom.”

The next morning was the first day back at school from winter break. I had set up a whole list of questions to ask the people at my school. They included:

  • Were you at Table and Chairs last night? (I didn’t need to explain more about this restaurant because this restaurant was the height of popularity, the exact reason my parents like to go there a lot.)
  • Did you hear anything about a murder?
  • Was anyone you know killed last night?

Of course, no one knew what I was talking about or cared to find out. Even my best friend June said, “Piper, come on. You’re gonna use all your time just to find out the answer to this stupid mystery?”

June and I were very different. She didn’t care about grades, she cared more about popularity. I cared some about grades, but I honestly couldn’t care less about popularity. I devoted my time to things to figuring things like mysteries out, and she spent her time figuring out how she should do her hair and what she should wear to school. I was still very confused about why we were best friends. I guess it was just that we had such different personalities that made us like each other.

“Hey Piper, look at that teacher. Have we seen him before?”

“Maybe he is a new teacher, or he’s on a tour of the school,” I replied.

“But all the teachers are surrounding him and talking to him like he has been here forever!”

“June, he’s probably just a new teacher that the teachers like a lot. How about we go over and talk to him?”

“Okay,” she said with a small hint of caution.

We walked over to him just as he was telling Mrs. Fairfield, the English teacher, about tea..

“Well, Mrs. Fairfield I think that my most valuable lesson about tea is that camomile tea needs to be preheated so that once you start drinking it the minty taste doesn’t diminish as the tea gets colder.”

“Ohohoho,” Mrs. Fairfield chuckled. “That is definitely a valuable lesson. I can’t wait to tell my friends about that at high tea on Sunday.” Mrs. Fairfield had her strange ways and proper attitude.

“Excuse me,” I said as June slowly followed. Another different thing about June and I is that I won’t be afraid to ask questions and say what I think, while June kind of just cowers in the corner. “Excuse me, Mister, but are you new here?”

“Why yes I am! I’m Mr. Rank, your new History teacher! What are your names?”

“I’m Piper and that’s June.”

“Wait but what happened to Mr. Dean? He was so nice,” June said, suddenly gaining up the courage to speak.

“He had to leave on personal terms,” Mr. Rank said a little hesitantly as if he wasn’t sure he should be telling us that.

Then the bell rang and he said, “Well it was nice talking to you, Mrs. Fairfield, and you two,” he said while gesturing at us. “See you in class later!”

“Ugh,” June said to me as we headed up the stairs to science class. “Mr. Dean was like the only teacher I liked! He was so fun and he didn’t get mad if I turned homework in a month late or never turned it in at all. I hope this Mr. Rank guy is as nice as he was.”

Suddenly, we heard a scream coming from Vivian Miller, who then started sobbing hysterically. We started to run toward her to see what had happened.

“What’s wrong? What happened! Do you need some Kleenex?”

Then Ms. Toran, the math teacher who was hovering above Vivian, came over to us and whispered in our ears that her dad had just died, so to just leave her alone. June had a look of surprise and horror on her face while I had a look of intrigue and curiosity on my face.  

Once we got to science class we were given a little talk from Mr. Rodrick about not being late to class. June got all panicky, but I stayed calm. Luckily, Mr. Rodrick didn’t punish people. He was really nice. He wasn’t at all like Coach Haldon who gives crazy punishments. One time there were about ten minutes left of class and some people were whispering while he was giving instructions. He gave each of the people that were whispering ten cones and then they had to walk around the gym and drop one of their ten cones each minute. It was actually really funny.

June went home with me that day so we could study for our math quiz on fractions the next day. She was supposed to stay and study for two hours and have dinner with us and then go home. We were supposed to study for two hours but instead we studied for five minutes and talked for an one hour and 55 minutes.

“Piper, now I kinda get why you want to solve this mystery. Like so many things have happened, it’s kinda crazy!”

“Yeah! Now you get it! I don’t know what the details are so I want to solve the mystery!” I said in my most sarcastic tone.

“Hey I was just tryin’ to be interested,” said June a little defensively.

“Whatever, never mind.” I replied. Then there was kind of an awkward silence between us for a few minutes, and then my mom called for dinner.

“How did your studying go, girls?” my mom asked as she served us some spaghetti with meatballs.

“It was fine,” I said while shoving a forkful of spaghetti in my mouth.

“Oh June!” my mom said as she remembered something. “What are you going to wear to graduation?”

My mom had been pestering me ever since we started fifth grade about what I was going to wear to graduation. Does it really matter? Of course, June had also been thinking about what to wear to graduation since the beginning of fifth grade. My mom and June had similar personalities. It was a little strange.

“Well I think I’m going to wear a floral dress with a pink sweater and white sandals and then put my hair…”

“Hey, you know Mom, I think I’m done with my food. I’m going to go get ready for bed,” I interrupted and started to rise from the table.

“Piper, we have a guest over,” my mom said through gritted teeth.

“It’s fine, Mrs. Andrews, I have to go soon anyway,” June said.

“Okay, well see you some other time!” my mom said a little disappointedly.

“Bye June,” I said with not much enthusiasm.

 

She shut the door, and I went upstairs to go get ready for bed. My mom came in ten minutes later.

“Why were you so rude at dinner?” she inquired.

“Well mom, to tell you the truth, I don’t really think that what you and June were talking about was very interesting. I just don’t care. You know, June and I are kinda growing apart.”

“Really? I think you guys are great friends. I mean, I love talking to June!”

“That’s exactly my point! We are too different! We don’t have enough in common. Whatever mom, I can deal with it.”

“Okay. Well, see you tomorrow. If you um, need anything, I’ll be here. Good night.” My mom said a little cautiously.

“Good. Night.”

The next day at school was a little awkward between June and me. We said hi to each other on the way to class, but we didn’t really talk. Lunch was a whole other story. I was walking through the cafeteria doors, when a girl I hadn’t seen before came toward me.

“Hi, I’m Meg. I’m a little new here. Do you think you could show me around? I heard you trying to solve a mystery, and, well, you seemed like my type of person!” This girl said this at the speed of lightning. She was wearing jeans and a striped t-shirt.

“Hello, I’m Piper. Um, yeah sure I can show you around. You want to eat lunch first?” This girl seemed really nice. I would rather sit with her than with June.

“Yeah sure!” she said excitedly.

“Okay, there is an open table over there,” I said gesturing to a deserted table in the back of the cafeteria..

We walked over to the table and I started telling her about the mystery. The whole entire five minutes I talked, she stared at me with intent eyes. Though I was having a lot of fun with her and we had similar interests, I glanced over at June a couple of times. She occasionally gave me dirty glances, but other times she would look over at me longingly. I felt a little guilty, but I would tell her later that I was just trying to make Meg feel welcome.

“Hey Meg, you want to come over to my house after school?”

“Yeah! Can you show me around the school?”

“Oh, right. Let’s go so we don’t miss the bell.”

As we headed out the door of the lunch room, I motioned to June to call me, and she replied with a nasty glare. If she didn’t call me, I was still going to call her anyway.

First, I showed Meg the gym, and then homeroom, the auditorium, and then the rest of the classrooms. The bell rang, and I headed to History and she headed to English. This was my first History class since Mr. Rank was the new teacher, and I was a little excited.

“Hello class, today we will learn about the American Revolution. Am I correct that this is where you left off?”

“Yes,” the class said in unison. This man was all business and no fun. This man may know answers, but he sure wasn’t going to reveal anything soon.

“Now, who are the four founding fathers blah blah blah…what’s the name of blah blah blah…” I really didn’t pay attention much until the very end when he said, “Class dismissed,” because I wanted to go up to his desk and ask him a question.

“Excuse me Mr. Rank, but could you please tell me what happened to Mr. Dean? I was so close to him, I was just thinking I should maybe write to him and say that we will miss him.” That was mostly improvisation.   

 

To be Continued…

 

Mistress Mary

Mistress Mary quite contrary how does your garden grow? With silver bells and and cockle shells and marigolds all in a row.

 

Mistress Mary very hairy how does your hair grow? With puffy tufts and tons of makeup and it’s all tucked into a bow.

 

Mistress Mary quite wat-ery how does your river flow? With some fish that are a dish for Mistress Mary’s crow.

 

Mistress Mary like a fairy how much does your heart glow? Like a light oh so bright Mistress Mary here you go.

Magedom

Once when Valkyries and wizards still roamed the land and knights and sorcerers still battled vampires and the elemental forces were still kept at bay, there was a boy named Welcam. Since people back then l was the only person who even could hold a bow in his village since all the men were off fighting the wizard that was waging war against them. I guess I should explain what wizards and Valkyries are: they are sorcerers who owe no allegiance to no one and Valkyries are woman knights (knights then could be girls and boys were called by their suit color). No one but the 2nd in command of the knights who owe no allegiance to any one but in battle they followed the gold knight (first in command) and the silver knight followed the gold knight and the bronze knight follows the silver and the gold knight (third in command) but other than that they owed no allegiance to any one.

CHAPTER 1

Will (that’s what everyone called him) and his friend Basil were out hunting (I know I said everyone in his village couldn’t hold a bow). She (Basil is a girl) lives in a cave. After her parents died, she moved out.

She and Will were 17 and they could use a bow the best in the entire mountain range their village was in. He met her when he was out walking and he got close to her cave and got caught in one of her snares that she caught rabbits in. They were both pretty good at the bow, but he was good at tracking animals and she was good at using snares and traps.

This time out hunting in the woods, they were tracking a huge buck and when split equally, it would keep his family and her fed for months each. It was proving very difficult to track. It seemed to know that every snare that Basil had placed and was being very hard to track, so instead of stepping in snow, it would jump from patch of dirt to patch of dirt. When it stopped to drink water, it jumped over the stream first. Then, swallowed a lot and then proceeded to jump in the stream and the stream whisked it down to the bottom, making it faster than if it were running. They had seen it jump in the water and knew where the water ended since they were out there regularly, and used a shortcut to get there. They got to the bottom, it came down with a big splash, and they both loosed arrows at it. Sadly, the splash had made their arrows go off course and the deer escaped.

In its place was a giant eagle. It was as long as your arm span without it’s wings out. They both knew immediately what it was because there were tons of legends about mystical creatures. This was a giant eagle, and they were supposed to be the greatest hunters and very friendly to people. It was eating the last of the buck. She (the hunter was always a girl and the boy was always the protector), seeing Basil and my crushed expressions, motioned for them to get on her back. They climbed on her back and she took off. The pure force of her taking off almost knocked Will off. As it is, it would have knocked Basil off if she had not grabbed the end of the tail at the last second. The tail gently flipped her back up. After that, it was a pretty cool flight. You could see everything, and there was no danger of giant birds coming, since this was the biggest bird in the world. In a few minutes (about three miles away– that’s how fast it went), Will and Basil were in its nest. It flew them through its nest, which was made of stone, so it was sectioned off, and had a nesting area made of sticks, branches, and leaves, a hatching area where all the hatchlings were, a place where they kept all the eggs, and food storage and a dining hall. They are very sophisticated creatures.

But it was the food supply that was most important for Will and Basil. She took them down, grabbed enough meat to last them a year, and still had room to spare in her claws, and started flying back toward the village. As everyone knows, in the myths, giant eagles are a bit prideful, so it flew over Will’s village to enjoy the looks it was given when it was seen. It dropped Basil off in her cave, and me at my house, with equal shares of the meat (just because they are giant eagles doesn’t mean they can’t do math). After Will explained how he got the meat to his mom because all the men, as I already said, are fighting a wizard who is terrorizing the town, which is why they couldn’t go out to trade with other towns for food.

Lollipop!

Once upon a time when Roman and Greek gods still ruled the empire, one god got forgotten. Deep down in the underworld, Hades waited to be recognized. Days turned to weeks. Weeks turned to months. Months turned to years. Years turned to decades. Somewhere in there he got a wife to join him in waiting. Decades turned to centuries. Then in 146 BC he switched forms and traits to become Pluto. Then the waiting began again. Centuries turned to millenia till he noticed something nobody else did, A LOLLIPOP!!! He tasted it. It burned, it burned. Then he saw another a meter away. Then another. Then another. He followed the trail. It went on for one kilometer. At the end he found Proserpina, his queen standing in a beautiful garden surrounded by at least 100 puppies and technicolor flowers in colors he did not know existed, like pink, light blue, rainbow. None of his favorite black, gray, copper, silver.

“Proserpina, what have you done to my beautiful swamp, you’ve made it ugly,” Pluto shouted.

“I’m just making the underworld better than my mother’s domain,” Proserpina replied hotly.

“Proserpina, I understand, nobody understands revenge better than i do, but…” Pluto said reasonably.

“No you don’t understand, nobody will. Now the next thing I need to do is get rid of you,“ Proserpina interrupted.

“Teenagers,” Pluto sighed.

Proserpina snapped her fingers and Cerberus’ middle head picked him up with his teeth and put him in a lollipop prison.

“Not lollipops. Cerberus, how could you. My dog. Not you too.”

Cerberus just growled. He most likely could have broken the cage with his fist easily but he did not want to touch the lollipops. He watched Proserpina plant flowers and cheer in his gloomy home. It brought tears to his eyes. So he waited for her to leave, then brought back a fist and punched the candy bars that kept him imprisoned. He cried out in pain, then followed his wife to the River Styx, where she was ushering the shades over the River Styx.

“What in the name of Pluto are you doing?” Pluto shouted.

“I’m helping the dead escape so this place can be less dreary,” Proserpina replied.

“Why would you do that?”

“Because I’m making it better than my mother’s domain.”

“Forget your mother’s domain! Do you know how many years it will take me to track those guys down?”

“You don’t need to track them down! They can stay up there and make my mother’s domain mindlessly melancholy. And you won’t need to rule over this dreary place anymore because there won’t be any more shades.”

That would be a glorious idea! Pluto thought. I can take over Jupiter in my newfound spare time.

“It’s a deal!” Pluto said. “I don’t want your lollipops anyway. They burn…and they’re scary.”

Proserpina absentmindedly started licking a lollipop, and Pluto trembled and backed away slowly into the overworld.

Pluto didn’t pay attention to his nighttime surroundings because he had a destination in mind: The Pantheon, the headquarters of the gods. As he was walking by the sea, out of the crest of the waves came a young woman with flowing golden hair, sea-green eyes, and a mischievous smile, with a slight resemblance to a mermaid.

“Uncle, you can’t do this,” she begged.

“Who are you?” Pluto asked timidly.

“Aquilina, demigod daughter of Neptune, your niece,” Aquilina said.

“How dare you talk to a god like that,” Pluto said with a new air of confidence.

“A timid god,” Aquilina replied. “We good?”

“Keep talking,” Pluto said.

“You can’t take over the world.”

“Why not?”

“It’s evil.”

“So?”

“You’re not evil.”

“But I need to be noticed.”

“You’ll be noticed for stopping Proserpina.”

“Maybe. But I will, but I’ll be noticed for taking over the world too.”

“Yes but you’ll be hated. It’s your choice,” Aquilina said.

And she disappeared over the crest of the wave. Pluto thought about what she had said. It was his choice. He should take over the world. Revenge on his brother Jupiter, no, he should save the world. He made his choice. He headed for the Pantheon.

Back in the underworld, Proserpina was selling ice cream. Millions of kids came over her lollipop bridge and ate her rainbow sparkly ice cream with fudge bars in the middle. Chiron, who had nothing to do, was sunbathing over the lava in Tartarus, which had been turned into a tropical beach.

“So long, Pluto,” he said, taking a sip of his pina colada in a coconut shell.

Meanwhile, Pluto had reached the Pantheon and had his way blocked by Neptune and his daughter Aquilina. Before Pluto could wave hello, Neptune thrust his trident at Pluto and a gust of water and tuna blasted Pluto in the face.

“What the @#$%!” Pluto cried as he ducked.

When he ducked, his feet slid out from beneath him, and Neptune took the opportunity to throw a whale at him. Pluto watched what he thought was his dying moment, and at the last minute instinctively rolled away. He took off his helm of darkness and shook it so that it transformed into a skull-topped scepter. He hesitated and Neptune took another opportunity to throw a school of piranhas at him. With slight hesitation, Pluto deflected them with his scepter.

He thrust his scepter at Neptune, sending a wave of depression at him.

“My sea, my poor poor sea, it’s gone,” Neptune said, weeping a sea of tears.

“Alright ladies, this beauty contest ends here,” Aquilina said with slight boredom.

“Where was that when he threw a whale at me? As I recall, you were filing your nails.”

Aquilina ignored him. Pluto walked tenderly towards his brother and put his scepter over Neptune’s heart to save him.

Aquilinia interrupted: “Na, na, no, leave him. The sea is mine.”

“B-b-but my brother.”

“My father,” Aquilina interjected as she pulled out a lollipop.

Pluto cringed.

“I’m not afraid of you,” Pluto said as he blasted it out of her hand.

“Can’t let you take over the world,” Aquilina said as she pulled out a celestial bronze sword.

Pluto sighed and put two fingers to his temple.

“What are you doing,” Aquilina asked.

“Sending you a mind message,” Pluto responded.

“No. No you’re not,” Aquilina said.

Pluto sighed again, and came closer to her to whisper something in her ear.

“Then what are we waiting, for let’s go,” she replied running ahead.

“We?” Pluto questioned, shrugged, then followed her.

They charged to the top of the Pantheon, where Pluto stood and raised his scepter and murmured some inaudible words to command the shades back to the underworld.

Jupiter appeared and he and Pluto talked in rapid ancient Latin.

“In English, please,” Aquilina said.

“The underworld’s not so bad. How would you like to be king of the gods?”

“Exactly,” Pluto said. “I like my underworld home. See ya, sucker.”

And with a crack, he was pulled back into the underworld.

When he realized his underworld was a cheery place, Pluto banished Proserpina to Tartarus and raised his scepter, and the underworld immediately transformed back to the gloomy world it once was.

Lili’s Poems

Watermelon!

 

Watermelon, sweet and juicy,

but I get pushy when I ask for some.

That is why I will ask

for none.

 

I need some watermelon,

I can’t take it any more,

so I run down the stairs

into the store.

I pick up some watermelon

and run out the door.

 

As soon as I walk out the door

I smile as if I had a watermelon in my mouth.

I would have even traveled to the south

to get my hands on watermelon.

I once even got banned from a fruit stand

cause I bought all the watermelon.

Her name was Helen and she was really mad

and that is the end of my watermelon tale lads!

 

Apples!

 

I love apples, but I do not like snapple.

Apples grow on the farm where sometimes                             

it’s for the horses dinner.

But I always dive in to save the apples from harm.

So I go to the hen den and get some eggs

from a chicken named Meg. Then I cook the eggs.

Then I go to my reading nook to get a cookbook.

But my eggs were stolen from a pirate with no leg replaced by a peg.

 

So instead of eggs I get strawberries.

Then I mash the strawberries with my boots

And while I’m doing that I hear the owl hoot.

Once I cover the apple with strawberry jam,

I wrap it with some ham.

Sah for strawberries, apples, and ham. Then I run to the shed with my Sah, put up a sign that says something like this, “Sah for sale, Sah for sale, made freshly today!” Never say goodbye to Sah once you have a tasty bite. P.S it’s better than snapple because it’s made out of apples

Beach!

 

Lift my heart at the beach.

Don’t know why I would leave,

as the scorching sun burns my hands,

as I walk in the crystal clear waves,

splashing in my face as the blue sky watches me.

 

As the sea salt breeze blows in my hair                                                        

I fall down

and I land in the white warm sand,

getting tanned as

I stare at the waves,

like it’s a maze

that’s telling me through the wind

to come and swim

 

I get back up on my feet

and walk back towards the beach.

The waves are going up to my waist.

I push through the waves.

I wait until I see that amazing, beautiful big wave.

Once it’s a foot away from me

I jump towards the sand

and let the waves push me.

 

When I get back up

I spin like a whirlpool

then I stop,

fall backwards,

but I don’t hit my head

because the waves caught my back.

Then I saw the most amazing thing!

Right next to the huge palm tree

was a shiny starfish.

I get up,

 

then I know what I want to do

and I throw the starfish in.

I go to the swing,

I leap on top,

and I do what I never would have done before.

I flip!

Left my heart at the beach,

don’t know why I did leave

Life of a Basketball

I’m bounced, thrown, and slammed. Can you guess what I am? It’s a sport I personally hate, only because I am the sport. Yep, I am a basketball. For me, getting a break is known as a timeout, and those last for just 30 seconds to a minute. Here is just one example of my everyday routine:

———-

Wait. Before I get to all the good stuff (or in my case the bad stuff), I have to tell you my name. I am Wilson (Wilson is printed on my stomach, so I guess that’s like a name tag, right?) Alright, enough about me, let’s start!

———-

Right now, all of the basketball players are just holding me in their hands, and I get to see the crowd watching. I never really understood why they have to be here to watch me get abused all day. Anyway, I’m looking at the crowd, and then, I’m looking at the floor. What did I do wrong?! I was just enjoying the view, and I get slammed, or dribbled as these crazy people call it, to the floor!

As I think about what happened just now, I am bounced more, and more, and more! Just stop already! And this is just pregame practice…

———-

This is real game play. The players from both teams line up, while I’m being held in the hand of a guy dressed in black and white. His hands are cold like water put in a freezer (or ice for that matter).

“Can I have a blanket?!” I yell.

And then I realized to them, this is how I sound all the time: “………”

The next thing I know, I’m in the air, which is about the best part of the game. To me, this is like a rollercoaster. To them, it’s “Let’s slap Wilson” time. And slap me they do. I’m slapped so hard that I fly backwards. Why can’t I just have fun? It’s even worse that I don’t know what the teams are, and who to blame for my harm. When will they just stop!? I’m serious this time. I just want to be able to have some peace and quiet every now and then.

Before I land, I fall into the hands of a sweaty person. The game just started and I’m already wet! I don’t even have a bathing suit on! The man holding me bounces me around and around over and over again. I think I’m going to black out!

Finally, he stops. But now, I’m face to face with a guy with a not-so-nice look on his face. He swipes at me repeatedly, and ends up slapping me in the stomach. Hard. Thank God I didn’t just eat.

The man that slapped me picks me up and bounces me hard all the way to the other side of the field (or court, whatever) and takes me into the air with him, and shoves me into a hole. The worst part: The hole doesn’t have a bottom! So, I fall straight to the floor.

Just then, I notice people laughing. They’re actually laughing! They enjoy this? This is absurd!

———-

My routine of black out and bash goes on for a while, 48 minutes if I remember right. Finally, just finally, the game is over. I’m held in the palms of a non-sweaty person (at least some people aren’t half water) and taken to a dark room (I should’ve put in something about me hating the dark when they asked me about myself before I decided to be part of the NBA which stands for National Ball Abuse, I think. Oh wait, they didn’t ask me. They didn’t even give me the choice of being a basketball!). Then, I hear a zip, and I’m shoved into a bag. Wait… I’m shoved into a bag! That is not how this is supposed to end. I am the real winner. Those humans think that they won. But I was really the one who scored the points! I was the one who did all the hard work of not fainting every time I was tossed to the ground! This is completely crazy!

———-

The next day, I see that as I’m on a court that looks pretty important. I see that printed on the floor is a sign that says NBA Finals. What? The National Ball Abuse Finals! I’m in for quite the beating.

Surprisingly, I realize that I’m not being practiced with. Normally, I get played with during the game, but also before. Huh.

Well once the game starts, chaos breaks out. In the first play, someone tries to slam me (just like last time, I have no idea who is playing who), but another person slaps me backwards all the way to the halfway point of the court. OWWWW!!! Can’t there be a single time where I don’t feel like my spine is broken? I guess not.

From that point on, things only get worse. One time someone throws a bad pass, and I fall into someone in the crowd’s drink. I am not supposed to get wet if I remember correctly.

Another time, someone else slams me down so hard, when I bounce to the floor, I go back through the hoop from the bottom. And then, of course, when I land I hit the area right between my eyes. I think I get a bloody nose. Oh wait. I’m just naturally an orange-red color.

By the time the game has come to an end, I can’t feel any part of my body at all.

As I’m held in the hands of the guy dressed in black and white, I notice that confetti is shooting out onto the court, and the team wearing purple is holding up trophies. I have never seen this happen before.

Then, a man in a fancy suit and bowtie walks up to the front of the purple team and announces, “I announce that you are the winners of the NBA Finals.”

I think, “Well, I guess they deserve to win the title of best ball abusers. They really did kill me out there…”

I feel the man in black and white take me into a dark room. “Oh, no,” I think.

Maybe I would prefer that other bag I was stuffed in last time.

I have no other basketball friends, so I pretty much have a single choice. Sleep. I know, I know, it sounds pretty lame compared to what just happened, but what else do I do? You’re probably thinking, “This is what basketballs do all day after games?”

I think, “I’m a ball with no friends in a dark room. Why not sleep?” There’s not much else to do, you’ll find, when you’re me.

Then, I hear, “Come on guys, help me find a basketball. Let’s get some post game practice.”

“Oh, no.” I think. I look around, and notice I am the only basketball in the room. Of course I am. I’ve tried over and over again to stop those humans, but I’ve realized I can’t. I just have to live with all my troubles. That’s my life as a basketball.

 

Lenwood Causes Trouble

Lenwood was arriving at Spank Union and he was greeted by a strange man named Sergeant Ramsbutt. “I will be your sergeant for the next 2 years.”

Lenwood made fun of the sergeant by calling him butt so the sergeant made him do 90 push ups.

Lenwood actually snuck in his ipad and and started play games so all of his fellow cadets later snuck in their electronics over spring break and winter break. Later the Spank Union was in electronic chaos!

The head of Spank Union was very mad at Lenwood and 9999 other cadets. The head said to Lenwood’s parents “We can not help Lenwood he causes to much chaos.” So Spank  Union sent Lenwood back to his home and he was still a troublemaker.

THE

END!

For real this time! No more sequels!

Jay’s Mistake

Buzz… Buzz… Buzz… Jay tried to ignore his alarm clock. He didn’t feel like even opening his eyes because if he did, he would never fall back asleep, not even if he tried to. Every second it got harder to sleep because he was waking up more and more. He closed his eyes as he sat up in his bed, waving his arms around like a sleeping zombie, trying to shut up his alarm clock. It was 6 a.m. on Saturday and he’d forgotten to set off his alarm clock.

“This is gonna be a bad day,” said Jay as he got up from his bed, smacking his hand on his alarm clock. Jay’s know-it-all father then walked into Jay’s room. Jay hated when his 6’3” father gave him advice.

“Jay, I heard you say this is gonna be a bad day, am I wrong?” asked his father, talking like a wise genie. Jay sat there stretching, annoyed at his dumb alarm clock. He was so frustrated he took it off the table next to his bed and chucked it to the floor. Sadly it didn’t break because his floor was carpet. “Jay, why did you do that?” asked his dad.

“This little fellow was keeping me from my beauty sleep,” said Jay, super frustrated.

“Jay, you must learn to control your anger, my son,” said his dad again. “Just remember,” said his dad as he walked out of the room, “Every day may not be good, but something good is in every day.”

You may think Jay is some ninja or spy or something, but no. Jay is just your average 16-year-old living a normal life. Jay took his basketball and shot it into his mini hoop. It went in and out. He chucked it at the hoop so hard it made an echo of noise. Moments later his 8-year-old sister came in.

“You did that on purpose, didn’t you?!” shouted his sister for the third time. It leveled up Jay’s anger for the third time; Jay hated her loud screechy annoying voice.

“Why don’t you just believe me!!” shouted Jay. His sister and him went on and on and on about arguing who did it if it was on purpose or not. Jay and Sydney kept arguing.

“It was SIX O’CLOCK and you couldn’t let a poor little 8-year-old sleep, now could you???” shouted his sister at the very top of her lungs. Jay held back for a second, pretending that he didn’t need to respond — but he did have to.

“I don’t know if you noticed, Sydney, but we’re not poor, we’re millionaires. MULTI-millionaires.” The words sounded way better in Jay’s head.

“Jay, you’re not supposed to be saying that private information to Sydney,” said his parents as they walked in suddenly. All the blood rushed to Jay’s head and Sydney gave Jay an evil smile. Wait, I said that wrong, it was the evil smile she had been giving Jay her whole life.

“It was just, he scared me…I just wasn’t ready for it,” said Sydney, pretending to be worried.

“Oh, it’s okay,” said her mom, hugging her. Sydney was faking. Jay was positive it was a fake because she’d done that her whole life and every time they believed Sydney.

“Sydney, let’s go, and Jay, you’re grounded. You’re staying in your room for the whole day,” said his dad and slammed the door shut. This was really going to be a bad day. But of course, Jay didn’t say that because his father was like a stalker that heard everything he said, but wouldnt walk in if he didn’t say.

Two hours later… Jay was lying on his bed with his body playing dead. His head was flopping down off his bed and he was bored to death. His room stunk. His bed was smack in the middle of the room. He had nothing absolute nothing to do. One of his teachers, the science one, once told him to make boring moments fun. Even if they are boring, YOU have to make them fun. Jay snickered, it sounded like his life-lesson father. He’d been trying to have fun but it was impossible. He was having a little fun playing mini-basketball, but he knew he’d get bored, it happened a little quick though. He asked himself, what would I normally do everyday and maybe I can think of something, but then he realized how boring his life was. He wished for a change, a big one.

A painful twenty minutes passed by Jay, still super-bored. He was so bored. He had tried taking a nap, but too much sun shone through his window. And his bed, his mini-hoop, and closet were basically the only things he had in his room. Jay then thought of an idea. He grabbed two socks and kneeled down on the side of his bed. He pretended to do skits with sock puppets. Every minute was ok, until his imagination spread. He folded shirts up to make a wall that the socks would hide in. One big red sock would be the villain. It was his sister’s sock. He thought, it was funny, she’s the villain in real life. The socks were hiding and fighting, they jumped off a cliff which was the basketball hoop, and then he got more and more clothes and more socks and made it like an army! He stood on his bed and looked at all the different clothes and stuff and in his imagination it was a battlefield masterpiece. Until a villain came in. It wasn’t his sock. It was his parents.

“CLEAN THIS PLACE UP, YOUNG MAN!!!” shouted his parents.

” I’m…just having…a little fun,” said Jay, worried.

“Grounding is not for fun, it’s for disabling! You shall not have fun, you sit there.”

His parents walked out, leaving Jay stunned. He sat at his bed for a little and then sadly picked up all the imagination. The kingdom was destroyed. His parents stomped all over his happiness just because of his dumb little sister.

It was now the fifth hour of his painful grounding. His lunch tasted like jail lunch. He had also asked for snacks but his parents wouldn’t let him. He’d been arguing and arguing to get him to do something. He knew he was acting like a seven-year-old, but it was unfair. His parents watched a movie, but Jay pressed his head to the wall so he kinda heard it. Sydney had been teasing Jay.

“Mom! Dad!” said Jay for the third time.

“WHAT IS IT?!” shouted his parents from their room. Jay hated that.

“Come here!!!” Jay screamed as he sat on his bed. He heard footsteps coming as his mom opened the door. A little joy struck Jay’s head. He knew his mom had a better chance of saying yes than his dad.

“Could I play my iPhone or something”? Asked Jay.

“You know the house rule,” said his mom, giving his iPhone to him. “Only for research,” said his mom.

“Ok,” said Jay as she walked out of his room. He went straight to researching his favorite animal. Sharks.

Another hour passed but it wasn’t painful, it was good. He was researching a mulberry shark. They were 12-16 feet long, a gray fin on the bottom and black on top with white skin. He was still researching when he looked at the clock. It was six already. He was still researching when his mom came in his room. “Jay,” his mom said.

“Yeah,” he responded.

“Your father wanted me to tell you your ground is over and to never do that again.” Jay was so relieved.

“Yes! Thank you,” he said excitedly.

“We’re going to eat dinner at Port’s Barbecue. We want you dressed and ready by 6:20.”

His mom said that as she walked out of the room. Without hesitation, Jay quickly slipped on some clothes from his kingdom that was destroyed. After he was ready he figured he would just shoot some hoops. He did that for a couple of minutes then stepped out of his room for the first time in twelve hours. No bathroom breaks either. “Haven’t seen you in forever,” he said to himself as he walked to the hallway. Sydney heard that.

“Mom!!!” Sydney screamed in her loud annoying voice.

“Jay said that he didn’t want to see me ever!!!” she screamed, and gave Jay an evil smile. His dad walked out of his bedroom. “No Sydney, he didn’t, you tried to get him in trouble.”

said his dad. For once Jay was actually being defended by his parents.

“NO I DIDN’T!!!” she screamed, pretending to cry.

“Sydney Rose Walker, you did too! Go sit in your room, you’re coming to dinner,” snapped his dad as he pointed to Sydney’s room.

“But –” Sydney started to explain.

“Don’t even go there, but you can go in your room.” Her dad shoved her in her room. Jay then gave the evil smile to Sydney. The three of them went to eat dinner as they parked their boat. It was a restaurant where you park your boat and eat.

“Would you guys like dessert?” asked the waiter as she took their food.

“Yes please,” said Jay. “I’ll take three scoops of strawberry ice cream.”

The waiter wrote down the order on her paper and went to get it.

“It will take a half hour,” she said as she left.

“I’m going swimming,” said Jay as he took of his clothes. Don’t worry, there was a swimsuit under it.

“Ok,” his parents said. Jay ran down the stairs to the restaurant and did an epic cannonball in the sea. He was just swimming around doing his own thing until the lifeguard scared the heck out of him.

“OUT OF THE WATER, OUT OF THE WATER NOW! NOW!!!” he kept screaming. Jay’s face was red as he rapidly swam to the shore. There was a little 16-year-old girl screaming. “What is it?” asked Jay to an adult.

“I don’t know,” he said, “but that’s my daughter.” She was screaming until she was pulled underwater with her hand sticking up. Jay saw black, just a little. Jay then thought, it was a mulberry. A mulberry shark. He wasn’t exactly sure because he was still on land, but he went to go see. He knew how to stop them. He didn’t want to be a hero or anything. As he jumped in and swam to rescue the girl, it was for the sake of saving her life.

He was two feet away from her. He was super-scared a shark would jump up and kill him, but he would do it for the little girl who looked like she just went skydiving and landed on rocks. He put his head under water. He saw the girl’s head from the dusty polluted water, he saw a speck of blonde hair and blue eyes.

There was no blood, there was no shark. He could barely see through.

Then he saw a huge thing come charging at the two people of what may have looked like a baby mulberry but still very harmful. That was the shark. Jay knew it had to be the shark.

 

Jay was screaming for his life under water. So was the girl, but it just sounded like bubbles. Jay tugged her arm and pulled her above the water. “Why did you save my life?” she asked from the little breath she had. She was breathing like Jay’s heartbeat, and Jay’s heartbeat was pretty high, knowing there might be a shark.

“Because, why wouldn’t I?” he asked her. He swam as fast as he could but he knew even with a head start and only 60 feet from land, the shark or fish-thing would beat them. He had the girl’s hand; it was almost pitch black so he couldn’t see her, he had to feel her, but then she got pulled under water. A little bit of blood oozed. He no longer felt her.

“Where are you?” said Jay to himself, super-scared. Jay very worried, looked down to see a little fish. There was no shark, everything would be fine. His breath all came back knowing that all that was just a fish when he’d thought they were gonna die. No one else knew it was a fish. The whole beach was screaming in terror.

They were 20 feet from shore as they were swimming to shore. “Why were you drowning?” asked Jay while he was swimming.

“I guess a seaweed was wiggling around and grabbed my foot and tugged down. I was screaming because it was squeezing so hard I couldn’t breathe,” she said as the two went on shore. The whole beach was hugging the two of them. The girl’s father was hugging the girl when he told Jay, “Thanks for saving my daughter,” and Jay’s parents were crying in worry. The TV media was here. They pulled Jay aside along with the girl.

“We are live at Port’s Barbecue with a young man. What’s your name?” the reporter asked. Jay realized he was on live TV, NBC Nightly News. He was famous!

“Jay Walker,” Jay said.

“And you”? Asked the reporter to the girl.

“Veronica Hope,” Veronica said.

“How old are you guys?” asked the reporter. They each said 16. A couple more minutes of answering questions and then the reporter told the rescue story. Jay tried a couple of times to say it wasn’t that or that never happened but the reporter kept talking. The reporter said Veronica drowned and Jay saved her at the last second with a shark charging at her and that the blood on her foot was a baby shark. But it was really seaweed and fish. Big difference, Jay thought. After an hour, Jay went home and after all the drama, on Instagram he went from 200 followers to 200,000 followers. He was mega-famous!

He was a hero for saving her from a fish that was harmless. Still, he’d take what he could get. He wasn’t sure how living like a celebrity would be, though.

It was 11 o’clock when Jay finally got home and started to go to bed. He closed his eyes but heard something outside the window. He slowly got up and opened the blinds.

“What the-?” He looked out and saw cameras flashing and NBC outside. It was the paparazzi! He opened the window.

“Hey! Hey you! Get out,” he kept saying. It took literally twenty minutes for the last one to go away. Jay was starting to wonder, would it be like this all his life?

Sure enough he got up and turned on the TV and when he put on the news, the top story was his rescue. They somehow got a picture. It wasn’t accurate though. It was a shark chasing two people. It looked like animation.

They made it sound like it was Jaws! News flash, that was like 30 years ago.

“I hate being a celebrity!” Jay shouted in anger. His wise father came in. He poked his head through the door and said, “Then why did you become one? Answer that question and ask yourself, was it really worth it?” said his dad, then shut the door.

Jay then asked himself. I saved someone’s life but now my life is ruined. He thought he was being selfish. He thought it was worth it, and barely any people get to be a celebrity so he was going to try to enjoy it.

His sister came in all jealous.

“It should’ve been me!!!” she screamed at Jay. Jay laughed for a second.

“I wish it was you,” said Jay.

“Now you’re just teasing me!!” Sydney screamed. “Mom, dad, Jay’s teasing me!!”

“Sydney, you’re grounded for lying,” his mom said.

“Thank you,” said Jay, gasping.

“I’m not done with you,” said Sydney under her breath. That worried Jay for a second. But if he could save another girl’s life from drowning and saving her from a two-foot fish, he could probably deal with an 8-year-old sister. He just wanted to relax for an hour, because that never happened except for when he got grounded, so he decided to shoot hoops. Sydney knew what he was doing. Right when Jay jumped to do a dunk Sydney opened the door and slammed Jay to the ground. “Ouch,” Jay said.

“Whoops,” Sydney said sarcastically.

“Maybe I can’t handle an 8-year-old sister,” said Jay to himself.

But jay remembered the paparazzi and how the cameras were flashing like a bunch of trees rustling in the wind. Was his sister harder or easier? His mind was so mixed up it might explode. He simply knew this was the beginning of Sydney’s terror of evil. Only the beginning of both situations.

The next day his eyes were opening as slow as a slug’s walk. He finally managed to wake up, but it took him twenty minutes to get out of bed. He put on some clothes and when he opened the door a giant plastic bean bag fell on him. He kept walking and he slipped, and fell on water. He had two scrapes under his mouth and a bruise on his left arm. Sydney then came outside and said sarcastically again, “Whoopsie daisy,” then walked away laughing an evil laugh.

This means war, Jay thought. Jay was thinking about what prank to do on Sydney. It couldn’t be a normal boring one though. It had to be big. It had to put her in her place.

He was still thinking about a half an hour later, his mind still blank. He had decent ideas, like put slime in her cereal, and he was almost going to do that one but he figured that was amauteur hour. He was still thinking. He all of a sudden needed a water. He turned on the sink and green goo came out of the sink into his water. He quickly turned around looking for Sydney to say, “Whoops,” or “My bad,” but she didnt. Jay didn’t even see her. He saw on the bottom of the sink it said in green slime, “whoopsies.” There it was.

Dang, she’s good, Jay thought to himself. Just then the door opened and Sydney walked in. This house was now haunted. Jay quickly ducked down and opened the cabinet under the sink, he had been hiding under the sink and he knew that Sydney knew where he was hiding.

“Ja-ay, I know where you are,” said Sydney in a creepy slow voice.

He looked at the sink. There was a small hole patched up. He took away the tape. Then a line of green slime shot out and Jay thought he would be covered in slime, but he took an empty box, waited for the slime to fill up, and then he patched the hole. He heard Sydney say to herself, “Ha! I bet Jay’s covered in green slime.”

But Jay was going to cover her. He opened the cabinet door and dumped it all over Sydney. Sydney had slime and dumped it on Jay. They were both fighting but Jay was the first to realize that the paparazzi were taking pictures. The whole world was going to know what they just did. This time Jay hoped the reporter would screw up the story.

A day later the prank war was just getting started. Jay put slime in Sydney’s cereal. When Jay sat down on the toilet, water shot up and landed all over the floor (his parents grounded him for an hour). Then Jay’s head popped out of the sink and scared Sydney, but Sydney just turned on the sink water, so that was like a lose-lose and the thing that made Jay surrender was when Sydney told the media all of Jay’s secrets plus pictures of him getting pranked plus the sink head and then Jay just gave in. Sydney had won.

“What do you want, Sydney?” asked Jay as he started to bow down.

“I want your fame,” said Sydney.

“Trust me, I would’ve given it to you by now, but if really want it, do something that stands out,” said Jay.

“Nice advice,” said his dad.

Not him again, Jay thought.

“But Jay’s right. He deserved it, but he regrets it. Your time will come, everybody at least gets a chance,” said his dad. For once Jay agreed with him. “Oh, and were going to Port’s Barbecue,” said his dad. Where it all started, thought Jay.

“Jay what wou,ld you like to eat,” asked the waiter. The waiter knew his name from the news.

“A double cheeseburger with lettuce, ketchup, tomato, olives, and pickles,” said Jay. She took all the orders and went to cook the food. Jay and Sydney went into the water. But it was creepy. The paparazzi popped up from underwater taking pictures.

“Just leave me alone!” shouted Jay. He pushed them back while Sydney was posing. He heard the reporter talking about how this was where it all started. Then for the second time…

“OUT OF THE WATER, OUT OF THE WATER NOW!!!” shouted the lifeguard. Everyone came out except Sydney. It wasn’t a fish. There was a boy screaming and there was a shark fin. This time it was clear there was a shark.

“Sydney, don’t do it!!!” shouted Jay. Sydney was the only one not out of the water.

Sydney was swimming towards the boy ready to be a hero. She was so excited and hyper she thought she might explode. She had reached the boy. “Don’t worry, I will save you,” she said.

“Dont try to be a hero, this is not your time!!!” Jay shouted from the beach. The reporter came up to him.

“Jay, how do you feel about Sydney going out there?” asked the reporter. He grabbed the mic and slammed it to the ground.

“DO YOU NOT SEE WHAT’S GOING ON?!” Jay shouted, knowing he was making more drama.

“Sydney, you’re gonna get yourself killed!!!” shouted Jay. Sydney was then pulled underwater along with the boy.

“Oh no,” Sydney said. She was hoping Jay would know, jump out, and save her. The shark bit her stomach as her life vanished before her eyes. A gallon of blood shot up in the air and the two bodies were floating. After twenty minutes Sydney’s dead body floated to shore. That was the end of Sydney Walker.

“Jay, how do you feel about this?” asked the reporter. Jay tackled the reporter and shoved her face in the sand.

“You idiot,” shouted Jay. He picked up the dead body and started crying. All this because of stupid Veronica Hope…

“Please Sydney,” said Jay on his knees.

“Please come back,” shouted Jay crying. “Jay,” said his dad patting his shoulder. His dad’s stupid annoying voice was actually calming him down. Jay looked around. The whole beach: waiters, employees, customers, families, and party people were gathered around. “Jay, remember what I said,” said his dad. “Every day may not be good but there’s something good in every day.”

Jay felt alone now. He didn’t know why but he missed Sydney’s pranks.

“Curse this dumb restaurant!!!” Jay shouted. He hated it more than Veronica, and with Jay in this mood he now remembered his dad saying, “Is being famous worth it?” For saving her life? Now Jay was angry. It totally wasn’t worth it…

“I’m never, ever, ever coming back to this junk fest,” said Jay. “I hope the same shark comes and eats all the wooden poles to make the restaraunt fall to its place.” He was now calming down and getting ready to leave before anything else happened.

“What are we doing about Sydney’s funeral?” asked Jay. His parents were too sad to answer. Jay said it too quickly. Everything happened too quickly. At the wrong time, for the third time, a guy came out of the trunk, snapping photos.

“WHAT THE HECK MAN, DO YOU NOT SEE WHAT WE’VE BEEN THROUGH?” shouted Jay. He hopped out of his seat, opened the trunk while the car was driving, and threw the guy out the trunk. He got back in his seat and without his parents getting mad they said and Jay agreed that that guy deserved it.

The next day Jay looked on the news and the top story was Sydney’s death. The blood fountain picture was just mean, and when Jay threw the guy out the window and crawled back up, a part of his butt was showing. He was now embarrassed like the slime thing, the sink thing, the bean bag thing, the Sydney thing, the butt thing — TOO MANY THINGS, Jay thought.

He was not angry at his alarm clock for waking him up at 6 o’clock again. He was FURIOUS. He couldn’t stand this dumb thing. “I just want to smash you!” shouted Jay. His dad walked in.

“You must prize your possessions, other-”

Jay cut him off.

“Shut up dad, just shut up!!! All my life you’ve been doing this stupid genie stuff and you haven’t been being a father!!!” shouted Jay. That felt really good.

“Jay, control your anger,” said his dad.

“No!!! YOU control your wisdom, there’s a time and place for everything!” shouted Jay. He had just used his dad’s wisdom. His dad then walked away. He used his dad’s wisdom to solve the problem; maybe using his wisdom would get him out of this celebrity nonsense!

Jay was now set in stone, his plan was ready.

“Ok,” he said as he walked outside looking for people. “Let’s do this.”

It didn’t take long for jay to find a reporter.

“Hi, Jay Walker,” said the reporter.

“Hello.”

Thats all Jay said. The reporter gave him an odd look.

“Ok…” she said slowly.

“Um…how do you feel about Sydney dying?” asked the reporter. Without hesitation, Jay said in five words and words only:

“It is what it is.”

The reporter was shocked. Jay knew the reporter was trying to make drama. Not gonna happen, thought Jay.

“Wow, um, ok,” said the reporter.

“So, um, about that shark,” the reporter began. Jay very quickly cut her off.

“No, it was a fish and seaweed,” said Jay quickly. This time jay had not been cut off.

“Um, no it wasn’t,” said the reporter in protest. Jay without getting angry, without making drama, and without making any news, said, avoiding argument, “I’m hungry, I’m getting a snack.”

He completely ignored the reporter’s requests and he walked back in his house with silence. He immediately saw on the news the top headline, “Walker losing his fame, is he really boring?” Normally Jay would be mad, but he sat on the couch smiling, knowing that maybe less and less people would try to talk to him.

Now everyday he talked like his dad, when one person asked, “How did the day go when Sydney died,” he said every day may not be good but there’s something good in every day. And when the reporters were angry because Jay was refusing to talk to them he began to say, “You must control your anger.”

A few days later he had lost all of his fame. No one now knew who he was, no reporters were on his back like paint on a wall, no nothing. And he also saw Veronica Hope on the news, she was starting to become famous and she said to herself on TV, “I can’t wait to become a celebrity.”

“What a mistake,” Jay said to himself. His dad then walked in the room.

“What are you doing here?” asked Jay.

“I’m just saying I knew you could do it,” said his father.

“What do you mean?” asked Jay,

“All those stupid wisdom things. I was waiting until you used them positively, then I would stop giving them to you,” said his dad.

“Thanks,” said Jay.

“My pleasure,” said his dad when he walked out of the room. Everything was good between him and his dad. Everything was good between him, and fame, and everything was good overall, except for Sydney’s death of course, but now everything just seemed to be going perfect for Jay. Perfect. Well, there was nothing else interesting that happens, so I’m just gonna end the story right here…the end.

 

HMS Biggles

Setting: A Pub

SCENE 1

NARRATORS 1

Hello good chaps. Welcome to the story of HMS Biggles.

NARRATOR 2

A 50 gun strong ship of the line.

NARRATOR 3

Here we go!

NARRATOR 1

By the way we are the narrators.

THOMAS

Another drink please sir.

BARTENDER

Two shillings.

THOMAS

Here you go.

BARTENDER

Thank you and here is your drink.

THOMAS

You’re welcome.

(Takes sip of his drink)

Thanks for the drink by the way.

BARTENDER

You’re welcome.

LUCAS

How you doing chaps? Could I have a drink too?

BARTENDER

Sure thing mate.

LUCAS

(Breathing in, smelling brandy, scotch, and other drinks all over the place.

Sees a group of strong naval officers.)

Blech.

Evening chaps. Best I be leaving now.

(Starts running. Group of seamen chase)

SCENE 2

NARRATOR 1

We don’t have time to show the rest let’s just say he got caught and that is how he became a captain in the navy.

NARRATOR 2

His ship was H.M.S. Biggles, Lucas is the captain of H.M.S. Biggles.  

NARRATOR 3

A 50 gun ship of the line.

NARRATOR 1

We already said that.

NARRATOR 3

I don’t care.

NARRATOR 2

We need to get on with the story.

NARRATOR 1

I agree.

NARRATOR 3

Me too.

NARRATOR 2

His ship was HMS Biggles, Lucas was the captain.

LUCAS

Welcome to the ship. Now, basically, you need to know this. You’re just a normal sailor. You’re on the HMS Biggles, a 200-man, 50-gun strong ship of the line. You see this?

(pointing to one of the cannons.)

This is a 20 pounder. You will see these a lot. Now, for the grand tour.

Scene 3

NARRATOR 1

I volunteered into the navy to fight, thought James, not to hear some old coop rambling about how to run a ship. Besides, I already know this. My father is a sea captain and my mother’s a nurse on a ship. . still I can’t believe it. Me, James Flynn, a sailor on HMS Biggles, possibly the best ship in Her Majesty’s navy.

He stopped thinking and started paying attention to what Lucas was saying.         

LUCAS

I assume you came to the navy to fight our enemy, the Americans.

JAMES

I am an American, sir. I was born in America, but raised in England, sir.

LUCAS

I see. Aren’t you a bit young to be in the navy? Let me guess, you’re ten.

JAMES

Fifteen, sir.

LUCAS

Doesn’t your mother think you’re a bit young?

JAMES

No sir, my mother doesn’t think I’m too young.

LUCAS

And what of your father? Does he think you’re too young to be at sea?

JAMES

My father’s a sea captain, sir.

Narrator 1

And that was that.

James (posing as lookout)

She’s an American privateer–four guns, fifteen pounder cannons. From the looks of it, around a hundred men. Probably an easy capture.

James (To himself)

Our three hundred and seventy-five-manned and fifty-gun Indiaman could easily destroy a small privateer. Still, though, Lucas apparently wanted to capture it. Strange man. Of course, being as it was a privateer, it probably had lots of loot aboard. Maybe that’s why he chose to capture it. The gunners led the attack with shrapnel rounds, violently shaking the ship everywhere. I nearly fell off. Suddenly, the American ship displayed its royals (it put out its fastest sails) and sped towards us. They might be trying to board. Eventually they got to the side of our ship, cutlesses and pistols ready. Marines on our side rushed to the top of the deck and the captain gave the order to repel boarders.

Narrator 1

They tried to board, and within minutes, what seemed like billions of American corpses  were lining the decks of our ships, killed by the barrage fired from the marines.

Narrator 2

The remaining ones on their ship surrendered and the British took it very easily. In total, the British took 12 prisoners and gained a lot of gold found in the hoard of the enemy’s ship and brought the ship back to a British port. The trip back to the port took a couple days, with our men on board the enemy’s ship driving it.

Narrator 3

They were split in half and there was about a hundred fifty men on each ship. Most of the marines stayed on the enemy ship. At port, we restocked. I took leave. We were at at a British territorial island that had many sailors and marines and houses there, but it wasn’t really much like London, where I grew up. For some of my life.

CHAPTER 6

SHORE LEAVE

Narrator 1

James went to his aunt’s house (apparently she lives there, never knew that), had some lunch, slept there for a night, had breakfast, then went back to the ship. They’d finally finished restocking everything, trading in the gold, and delivering the prisoners to the jail. It was almost time to set sail. James climbed aboard and learned that, due to my helping the captain so much, he was being promoted. Now he was just a rank below midshipman. James felt a sudden tinge of joy. He couldn’t wait to tell Lucas, but Lucas seemed sad when James saw him. He said that it was because the bank there wasn’t able to accept most of the gold and that they`d  have to transport it back to Britain.

James

Well, there’s another adventure. Here we go again.

Scene 7

Narrator 1

James woke up with a start.

Narrator 2

He was on his way to England.

Narrator 3

But the door to his room had been slammed open.

Narrator 1

It was Lucas.

Lucas

James! Wake up, wake up! Come and see this.

Narrator 2

There was a small American ship that looked like a tugboat, slowly steaming towards them.

Lucas

Help me wake up everyone on the ship.

James

I’ll climb up and ring the bell that’ll wake up everybody.

Narrator 3

Indeed it did.

Narrator 1

Soon the American tug boat was captured.

Narrator 2

They gained six prisoners.

Narrator 3

They arrived at England shortly after.  

Narrator 1

They had a jolly good time. And James became a rich man from his pay from the navy.

Narrator 2

Years later he became the captain of HMS Biggles after Lucas died in battle.

Narrator 3

But that is a tale for a different time.

Narrator 1

See you next time.

all

The End.

 

Head in a New Dimension

Chapter 1

I fall, a never ending black darkness, swallowing me. No walls, it almost seems like being inside of a shadow. Only just a few seconds did I fall through my grandma’s mysterious door at the top floor, seemingly locked up and never opened. It seemed like the strange disappearance of my parents folded me all into this peculiar nonsense. I had been “carried” off by my grandma. Now when I say carried off, I don’t really mean carried off. I highly doubt my grandma could pick me up, anyway. She hadn’t seemed too worried, though, which in all truth worried me. My grandma lives in the middle of nowhere, bright grassy plains, warm sun and deserted describes it all. I had visited my grandma with my parents before, but it was never as cheery as when I arrived, almost a little TOO cheery for my liking. As my grandma drove in her car, which always looked like it had been ransacked, I had plenty of time to think, most of all what I call WHY questions. Why had my parents disappeared? Why had my  grandma come so suddenly? Questions I don’t have answers to, bubbling and bursting inside of me. I wanted to cry in frustration. I never asked for this anyways…

“Grandma?”

“Yes, dear?”

Why…. I couldn’t bring myself to say anything, I had so many questions that I couldn’t bring myself to ask.  As I look back from this moment, I wish I asked my grandma those questions, but I didn’t know what I was going to get into.

 

A few days after I arrived, I went exploring the house. When I was five, I thought there was secret treasure hidden somewhere. I never found it. Until right then, I suppose. As I explored the top floor I found my treasure. I guess when I was younger, the door had never been there to me. I might have been just too excited and ran past it, my height ignoring the door, which now even seemed to have grown into the house, being a part of it.  As I looked at it now, it seems deserted, like the amount of people surrounding us, but quite the opposite of the setting I was deserted in.  Lonely, it seemed to beckon me. I hoped I wasn’t going to be like Pandora from my Greek myth book, but now I understand what she felt. I only hoped the door wasn’t bad as her fate, unleashing terrors around the world. All the things we wish were never in this world. But yet, at this moment it seemed to be staring at me. It seemed the cottage was holding its breath, the door included, everything staring, everything waiting, watching, a never ending silence. The door was beckoning me, “a quick peek won’t hurt anyone, Phoenix.” Shutting my eyes I shook my head, hearing a voice say that, hoping I was just unconscious or something, hoping I was somewhat ill, but not life threatening. I ran down the stairs, back to the second floor, as a ran into the hallway, I could swear my grandma’s marble dragon that was on the shelf blinked at me. I shivered and kept running, finally approaching my new room. I slammed the door behind me and locked it, plopping down onto the bed. I felt myself breathing hard, my heart beating uncontrollably. Laying down, I tried to control myself, my breathing, and my heart.
“DINNER TIME!” I heard my grandma from the first floor. Carefully, I opened my door and peered outside. Nothing. Quickly I raced down into the kitchen, the smell of pizza entering my nostrils. Then I noticed the spicy smell and grinned. Good, my grandma knows me. I entered the kitchen , eyeing the cup of buffalo sauce.

“Look at you, you look like a starving wolf that’s found some prey, licking your chops.”
“Ha. I’m hungry!”

“Starving, that is.“ My grandma handed me a plate with two slices of pizza with a cup of hot sauce, which I dunked over my pizza. I picked up a slice and bit into it, crust first.
“Crust first? Why?” asked my grandma.
“Because I don’t especially like the crust, which most would call ‘saving the best for last.’”

“Ok. So now I know.”

“Grandma, has anything…strange ever happened here, or is here?”

“….. Strange?? No……..! How’s the pizza?” My grandma started to fidget in her chair, tapping her fingers on the table.

My grandma was trying to avoid the question, but I left it.

“Good.”

That was how that day ended, but my grandma knew something, I knew it.

 

The next morning, my curiosity got ahold of me. I climbed up the staircase cautiously. As I approached the door I held my breath. It seemed even more grown into the house, like by tomorrow it would disappear. “What’s in the door?” I wondered aloud.
“Your destiny, Phoenix.” I screamed and turned around.

Behind me was… the marble dragon… flying?

“WHAT THE… ?!”

“Shh… do not be so loud.” The tiny dragon floated around my head.
“Don’t be so scared, things approach faster than you think.”

“W-who ARE YOU?!”

“Aurora.”

Well that covers SOO much…

“Wait, so did you blink at me yesterday??”

The dragon nodded, “Yes. I wanted to call to you but your grandma was approaching and told me-” the marble dragon stopped short.

“My grandma knows what’s going on?!” I exclaimed.

“Yes. It was just a matter of time. But you have to go in the door.”

“But why?”

“Because you’re needed.”

Needed. I’ve never been truly needed… My parents were independent people… But do I trust this… dragon? No I don’t. Nonsense.
“No.”

“Fine. just open the door and you’ll see how much you’re needed.”

What’s the harm in that, I guess… I opened the door and saw nothing, then felt something shoving me. Hastily, I turned around and saw the dragon pushing me, which I was surprised it could. But it did its job and pushed me through the door…

I fell, a never ending black darkness, swallowing me. No walls, it almost seemed like being inside of a shadow. Closing my eyes tight, I screamed. Hugging my knees to my chest, I opened my eyes and peered into the darkness. No source of light whatsoever. I looked up, trying to find the attic door.

Nothing. I’m afraid. Very, very afraid. But this time there’s no one to say it too. What did this dragon do? Had it been trying to kill me? Why why why…

Soon I began to see light… Now I must have been falling for about an hour and a half. I closed my eyes, once again, completely unprepared, when pain spread through my back, and going into another silent, strange darkness. Where was I now? There was a ground there, but it was also darkness… I wanted to walk away from this nightmare, I wanted to be back home, with my parents, I wanted to be able to close my eyes and be back with my grandma. I stand up, very annoyed with my life. I started to walk forward, then hearing a large swish noise behind me, I turned around. This time I was just too fed up to scream. “BOOOOOOO!” Not expecting a ghost, but I had the feeling I was going to see a stranger, maybe because of the marble dragon situation.

“Why aren’t you scared?” the ghost started to cry, tears going through her and leaking onto the floor. “Hey it’s ok!” I didn’t want to hug her or anything, because I would probably go right through her and make her feel even worse.

“Noooo it’s noooot! Noooobody is ever scared by me!! I doooon’t have any friends!!!!”

Question- what do you say to a crying ghost that has many problems? Well you can only say one thing, I suppose…

“I’ll be your friend.” What are you going to say to a crying ghost that wants a friend?

“Really?!” The ghost immediately stopped crying.

“Yeah.”

“Yaaaaaaayyyyyy!” The ghost started to circle around my head, chanting, “I have a friend, I have a friend! I haaavvveee aaa ffrrriiieeennd!!!!!!!”

“Okkk… What’s your name?” I asked.

“Ululate!”

“Doesn’t that mean-”

“Doooon’t say it! I know!!!!” Ululate means to howl or wail, which this ghost clearly does a lot.

“Ok Ululate, how do we get out of here?” I REALLY hoped she had the answer…

“Doooon’t wooooory, you’re waking up!” Huh?? I felt myself falling, for the THIRD time today!

Blinking I opened my eyes, and saw LIGHT!!! Then opening my eyes, I saw Ululate…
“Ululate??”

“Hii friend!!!” Ughhh…

“Hi…” moaning and groaning, I sat up.

“HIIII!”

“Where are we?”

“We’re in the land of Surda!”

“Whaaa… Is Surda…..”

“You don’t know what Surda is? Surda’s divided into two, one part where the humans and mythical creatures are, which is Surda, and the other half is elven territory!”

“Anything else I need to know?” I wasn’t really paying attention, but maybe if Ululate talked too much she would get bored.

“Well….This world is divided into twooo, unlike your Earth. The goooood part is Surda, and the oooother half is what we call the Evil dooomain…Which you shouldn’t gooo in! And in case you ever see them, the leaders oooof Surda are Sabrina and Alex Bell!”

My parents!

Heart School

CHAPTER 1

Cells

We live inside Abby. We are what protects her from germs. I am Healthia, red blood cell, at your service.

Right now, I’m in the Atrium, one of the four entrances to our school, Heart School. White blood cells have a different school: the brain. White blood cells have a different school because they are different. They’re Abby’s immune system. They fight the germs. We red blood cells keep Abby’s blood healthy, which is a totally different thing. That’s why my name’s Healthia.

The germs are our enemies. They have several schools: Mouth, Nose, Ear, and Cut schools (the cut schools are only temporary). Noticed something? All of the schools are entrances to Abby’s body. That’s how the germs get in.

I’m going to Defense class, which is probably the most dangerous. We get to spy on the germs and figure out what they’re planning.

This time, we’re visiting Mouth School. Abby’s biggest opening in her body is her mouth. All the germs gather there. We hide behind one of Abby’s teeth, and watch little germs gather on her tongue. We learn that the germs are planning to attack the brain. We return to the Heart, and call our own convention. I tell the principal, a red blood cell like me, and the white blood teacher ambassador, who’s visiting the principal, that the germs are planning to attack the white blood cell school. They are shocked. I actually tell the convention the news for them because they are too shocked. I guess they’re stunned because the germs have never decided to attack something as large and important as the brain.

We had a few hours to prepare ourselves and defend the school before the germs attacked. We put up lots of towers and set up lots of guard cells so that we could easily spot the germs when they came. But they never did.

CHAPTER 2

Germs

Our teacher, Mr. Germy, said that we should delay attacking the brain because we had a feeling that red blood cells were spying on us and then we could trick them into thinking we weren’t attacking after all, and when they took their defenses down we could attack then. Oh, I forgot to introduce myself. I’m Germia.

So, anyway, we had a long wait. After days of planning, the big day finally arrived. Mr. Germy said that we should just go with the flow and ride along in the blood. That way, we could poison the blood, too. I think he was stupid. There’s probably blood cells, in Abby’s blood too, and they’re all fighting to keep us away. I don’t really care if we win or lose. Abby is a boring person to invade anyway. The cells make it really hard to invade her, so with every attempt to, we fail, and they mercilessly slaughter more and more of us. Also, Abby got a cold last week (courtesy of my friend Germonia),and she’s still sick, which makes it easier for us, but I like a challenge.

Surprisingly, all of the red blood cells were defending the brain so that none were in the blood to go tell the other cells defending the brain. It was an easy ride. When we got to the brain, we all had to hide against this one green part, because we’re green, and it was SO slimy! We germs are not used to this sort of thing because we are all outsiders, unlike the cells. Abby was born with all of those cells.

Chapter 3        

Cells

The germs never came. I was very surprised, and began to feel ashamed because I was the one that told everybody that they were going to attack the brain, and they’re not attacking it. I go on patrol duty, and I walk around and around and around the brain. It would make the most sense for them to hide in the little green spot which is hearing, but the germs are also green so it makes it hard to see. Finally, I hear a little voice coming from the green section. A germ emerges from it. The germ wants to go away out of Abby. I ask her for her name, but I know we can’t be friends because I’m the defender and she’s the attacker. Still, I get it. Her name is Germia. Germia’s teacher, Mr. Germy, comes out and says, “Germia, what are you doing?”

I yell for other cells. Soon, the germs are surrounded. I don’t want to hurt the germs even though it’s our custom to eat them. I think that we should move them out of the body and then start marching towards Abby’s ear. The surrounded germs and other cells follow. Abby’s ear is sticky with wax. I have to pull myself out of it sometimes. The other cells are being very annoying. They are singing as we march the germs out. And when the germs are out, they are singing as we march back to the brain. After we are safely there, I leave them telling the principal of Heart School and Brain School how I singlehandedly led the germs away. I go back into Abby’s ear canal to make sure none are left behind. All clear. I come back and on the way I notice something green. I hear a little cry for help that I didn’t hear before over the singing. The green thing is a germ and the germ is crying for help. The germ that’s crying for help is Germia. She was left behind, when she was the one who wanted  to go out most. I pull her out of the wax and hide her, and put her in Abby’s right big toe. I think she’ll be safe there. Days pass, but for us it seems like weeks. I bring Germia food every day, but I don’t know what she likes. It turns out that we share a favorite: Kellogg’s Fruity Snacks, Mixed Berry. I get them from Abby’s stomach. It’s gross, but it’s what we eat.

CHAPTER 4

Germs

I was stuck in the ear canal when we were marching out. Then, Healthia found me and hid me in Abby’s big toe. She’s not bad, really, for a cell, but I just wish that I could have gotten out like my teacher and friends.

Healthia brings me food every day. One day, she takes me out and into Heart School. She enrolls me at school, and I paint myself red and changed my name to Cella. I even join Healthia’s dormitory group.

But Healthia acted like she didn’t know me. I didn’t know why. So I went back to the big toe and wiped off all the blood substance (aka paint) and was my normal self again.

When my stomach growled, Healthia wasn’t there with food. I felt I was all alone. So I slowly climbed back up the leg, and into Abby’s stomach, and up into the esophagus and into her mouth. Her lips are closed.

CHAPTER 5

Cells

I feel so betrayed. I go with my friends to our amusement park, which only has one ride. We joined the blood flow and I tried to wash my thoughts about Germia away. We traveled all over Abby’s body, but I was still thinking about Germia.

I stopped making my travels to the big toe, because Germia left. I was heartbroken, well whatever happens to cells, because we don’t have hearts. I thought she was my friend.
Maybe I was wrong.

Maybe she isn’t my friend.

Maybe I shouldn’t’ve trusted her.

Maybe I should’ve listened to the teachers and shouldn’t have even tried to be friends with her.

Still, I can’t help being sad.

We go back to the dormitory because we had class. My next period is a history of humans. It’s my last class of the day, and the only class that’s actually taught in our school. I just passed notes with my friends. It’s finally over and I decide to go look for Germia. I can’t find her, so I go to sleep.

Somebody’s shaking me. I pinch myself and it hurts. I wake up to find that it was all a dream.

CHAPTER 6

Germs

I smell something funny. I realize it’s a cavity on Abby’s tooth. And the cavity is my friend Germania. I wonder why she’s not gone.

She says, “Why did you sleep so late, silly?”

I realize that it must have been a dream.

CHAPTER 7

Cells

I am relieved to know that it was just a dream. I wake up for my first class of the day: Defense class. We go to the Mouth School of the germs and spy on them. After hearing some information, we go back to our school. The white blood cell teacher-ambassador is visiting our principal. I tell them the news, but they’re so shocked that they can’t tell it to our assembly. The news is: the germs will attack the brain. (Yet again!)

Hamburgler

Ronald McDonald wanted all kids to have free burgers. He wanted kids to have a better life than him. He was going to rob the hamburger factory and steal the burger making machine so in his illegal burger factory he can make burgers for free and sell them to kids. Ronald McDonald was a prison escapee and he was already a fugitive. He wanted kids to like him, so that future grownups would like him. The way he would make kids like him is by giving kids free hamburgers.

So he immediately began creating a plan. The first step of his plan would be to go to the burger factory at night, make sure there was nobody inside, and if there was anybody inside he would make a distraction by breaking glass on one side of the factory while entering on the other side. Once he got inside and got near the burger machine, he would incapacitate whoever was inside the burger factory and carefully but quickly take the burger machine into his getaway car, and drive off into the night. When he was about to carry out his plan, he noticed one major flaw to his plan. There was an electric fence around the factory. So he arranged for one of his henchmen to steal a monster truck so he could drive over the electric fence. Then he put his plan in motion.

He drove over the electric fence hearing a scary noise that sounded like nails on a chalkboard. He scaled up to the roof and looked in through one of the windows. He saw two employees and one armed guard. He made a loud thump on the roof by dropping a brick from his hands onto the roof. Then he slid down to look at the window. He looked in the window and saw that the guard had stood in front of the burger making machine while the two employees started to turn on the security systems. While this was happening, he broke the glass and slid onto a catwalk in the factory on the catwalk was a insane hobo. But Rian was not important. From the catwalk he carefully dropped some tear gas through a vent. He knew he would go through all of the vents but he only needed to go through one, the one that was right behind the guard. He covered his nose and mouth and waited until the gas cleared.

He saw that the guard was still there but unconscious. He carefully tied up the guard and gagged him. Unluckily, he had used too much rope swinging down from the catwalk that he didn’t leave enough to tie his gag on, but that was good enough. He carefully placed him facedown. He grabbed the rope and hope he’d brought specifically for hooking onto the hamburger machine, ran outside, tied it to the monster truck, and drove off. Once he was about 100 feet away from the factory, he put it on the monster truck and kept on driving.

When he was back to his lair, he immediately tried to use the burger machine, but it turned out that it had to be connected to a certain WiFi source for it to actually work. He didn’t want to go back, so he fiddled around with it and tried to hack the system. After hours and hours of hopelessly hacking, he got to an almost. He almost figured out that it could be assigned to a network. He found that he’d have to move it around, so he’d have to connect it to a cellular network, but he couldn’t connect it to a cellular network because everything he used was being tracked, and he could only get old electronics.

So he went back to the factory and he looked in all the windows from all angles and saw that inside of it, there was the WiFi generator. So he quickly stole the terminal. He picked it up and ran all the way to his lair. He plugged in the WiFi. It worked. But then another problem was that you also needed to get the buns, the meat, the cheese, the tomato, and all the other toppings you would want.

So we went out on a trip. He rented a farm. He invested on getting lots of tomatoes and meat and everything, but using a fake identity, Hercules Achilles, with the farm. Finally, with all the materials, he rented a 24-wheeler and brought it back to his lair. At his lair he quickly tossed all of the materials in the back storage unit of the lair and he connected it with a pipe to the hamburger machine.

So he invited kids to a building he rented and he used another fake identity, Barney Music, and earned a lot of money giving kids free hamburgers. The parents don’t have to pay him, but they pay him because he’s feeding their kids for free.

Ronald felt like the president needed his burgers. So he started to make a plan to put a burger in the president’s office.His plan was to climb over the fence and peer into the oval office then, he would use the vents to get to the sewer and emerge on the street and drive away. So once he got to the white house he noticed one big flaw there was a taco fight. The ground looked like a dead fish carcass.

Ronald decided to use the sewer. He climbed into the sewer and looked for the pipe named economy, economy was the codename for the white house strangely there was an old pizza box. Ronald entered the vent system looking for the oval office. He was crawling through the vents on his belly pulling himself along with his elbows when he finally reached the oval office and saw a camera, he noticed that the was only one camera and it was only recording the balcony so he elbowed open the grate and placed the burger on the desk and placed a note on the desk with his calling information.

Suddenly the camera faced him and immediately an alarm went off. Secret service immediately blockaded all the doors with over flowing trash cans and started to yell, “Hands on the back of your head and face the wall.” He heard the men enter the office as quick as speeding car he rolled two smoke grenades and quickly but quietly jumped into the vent and escaped into the sewer from there he could sprint, he sprinted as fast as he could. Running all the way to the ladder to the surface. And drove off into the night.

GREEN EYES

GREEN EYES

Hazel eyes aren’t green eyes

A pinch of green is like a tiny morsel of salt, it won’t add to the flavor

Blue eyes with green tops are not included

Nor are color contacts

Usually aren’t gingers

Nine percent of people on this planet have green eyes

Those rare people are intellectual and kind

They are not mutants, they’re just eccentric, unlike people with blue or coffee eyes

Shrieking inside of them is the pain, trying to get out

But it doesn’t come out, ‘cause green eyed people don’t let it

They have a pure liquid of happiness in their necks, trying to parch their throat

Or their stomach trying to pull the strings too tight

But those green-eyed people don’t let it

I have green eyes

I’m a ginger

I’m not intellectual or kind usually

I’m simple

I have pain outside and inside

The pure liquid of happiness parches my throat

My stomach pulls my strings too tight

This all leads me to thinking that I’m not special, I’m just a lost person wisping away in the wind

 

RAT OF THE SUBWAY

I go down the trashy locked staircase every day, where no one has gone for years except for me

I open the door and stumble to the train tracks

Hop over the third rail, something to always remember

Walk ten steps, then I’m safe

Open up the rusty door of the room where you change the tracks

Watch the litter of kittens on track three

Look at the train on track four that’s supposed to go on to track three

Change it

I might’ve lied before, I’m not kind towards people, you don’t have to be kind to people

But you do have to be kind to animals, because they’ve never done anything wrong, and I’m kind towards animals

I realized this when my dad dropped me off at the bookstore and never came back

He did something ungrateful and wrong and that’s why he left me there, so I could lead a better life

The only thing he did wrong to me was to leave me with nobody Other than a grumpy bookstore clerk

 

SAGE

My name is Sabrina Alex Gimry Elworth

If I knew anyone they would call me Sage, not Sabrina

Nobody calls me anything because nobody really wants anything to do with a little girl wandering around by herself

They’re all worried that if they try to help the little girl the parent is going to come and be afraid that they’re going to kidnap her

There is nobody to help me if somebody does kidnap me, except for police

I know you’re probably not going to want to read anymore of this story, because you probably think it’s too sad, but trust me it gets happy

The story of Sabrina is sad, but the story of Sage is happy

 

KIKI

Caramel is a coat of fur that I love, that’s why, when I was little, I was depressed that we got a black cat

I named Kiki after Kiki’s Delivery Service; I used to love those movies

But Kiki is a good cat, always cleans herself, takes care of herself, and is loving

She has black fur on her back, a coat of white fur on her belly, and silver clean white paws

She goes out without me a lot, looking around for food, I don’t care about this because she always comes back

One thing I learned through Kiki is that appearance doesn’t really matter whatsoever, it’s what you do that counts, and Kiki might not look so good, but she is loving

 

TODAY

Today was a generally good day

Actually today was a very good day

I went on the streets asking for money with a sign that said, “MY KITTY, MY FATHER, AND I ARE STRUGGLING TO SURVIVE, PLEASE HELP” (which the part about the father is obviously a lie)

A woman who passes by every day and gives me money says to me today, “Here’s some lunch,” while passing me a thing that looks like a tv dinner but fancier

“Is it poisoned?” I asked.

“No silly, it isn’t poisoned,” she said.

Later that day I opened it

It had chinese sesame chicken, rice, blueberries, and pickles

I dug in, leaving nothing on the plate

 

THE SUN

The sun blanketed me when I woke up in my little apartment in Red Hook

I shoved the cockroaches with my foot and they scurried away under the floorboards

I looked out at the sun

It was flaming hot and looked very orange

The sun is a star and when stars are old they turn orange and start to fade away

The sun will fade away soon

Like this dream in the morning

 

DREAM

I woke up, relieved by not being in my uneasy sleep anymore

I felt a swarm of thoughts buzzing about in the crust of my mind, they all were my dream oriented

I looked in the mirror and realized that I was never Sabrina, I was always Sage

I heard my father calling to me from down the hall, while Kiki stretched out on my blanket covered legs

Strained inside myself I realize that I am real, not in a dream

I wish the dream I just had was a lucid dream so that I wasn’t so scared

But dreams are dreams and people are people and I am not a person who is lost, wisping away in the wind

I am just flowing with the wind

And I am the green-eyed girl  

Going Free

Prologue

(September 1934)

 

I remember. The shouts and yells as we were ushered into the trucks. A man waited with a needle by our truck. Already busy tattooing numbers on the arms of my fellow refugees. The thrum as we packed into the filthy dirty noisy truck like a bunch of pigs, and the open engine making it impossible for anyone to rest. “I want to be free,” I told my mother, and she said, “Time, Jonah, time. Life goes on, and we must follow.”

 

Chapter one: Life ever goes on

(October 1942)

 

It was eight years to that fateful day,  three years before the end of the war, and still as ever I yearned to be free. It was around sundown, and I had returned from hard work, digging trenches for cisterns down the road. I had been on my feet for twelve hours. My body protested. The food here was little more than a scrap of bread that has been nibbled upon and encrusted completely with mold. It tasted awful. As the soldiers briskly walked through the alleyways of the camp, yelling “Nahaufnahme! Standbildaufnahme!” I had been here long enough to know what that meant. “Close up! Lock down!” and every night after evening bell, I remembered my mother’s words to me. Since that fateful moment on the truck, she was transferred to Bergen Belsen. But I remember her words well. Life ever does go on. And that is true even now, because even in the tyranny of the Germans, a boy still grows to become a man.

 

Chapter Two: Dog Days

(October 1942-June 1943)

 

Every day was the same. Every month was the same. Every year was the same. We would rise at around 04:12. We would have a quick breakfast of moldy strawberries and sour orange juice. There was spoiled milk if we wanted it. We were only allowed to spend ten minutes each at the breakfast table. Then we would travel back to the dorms for cold showers. Each person was only allowed 60 seconds under ice cold water. You got five minutes under lukewarm if you pleased the warden. Then it would be off to our backbreaking work. There we would be forced to dig trenches all day, or wade through patches of stinging nettles, and every chance I got I stared at the sky and thought about just how much I wanted to be free. But my mother’s words sustained me. After backbreaking work, all through the day, we were called to return to the meal hall. But before we could eat, we were required to line up. And then the warden decided who would never see the sunlight, but just clouds of red gas. Then it was time. At around 12 hours after we got up, the soldiers shoved us back into our bunks, and once again yelled the ever persistent phrase. “Nahaufnahme! Standbildaufnahme!” There was a buzz and suddenly everything was dark and we found ourselves unable to open the doors or windows, as it was every night. And that was the day, and I didn’t know it then, but salvation was on its way.

 

Chapter Three: New Arrivals

(June 26 1943)

 

That afternoon, we had a very very rare occasion: lunch. Soon we all discovered why. A thrumming could be heard, and the military caravan drove in.  There were trucks and soldiers in blue uniforms, motorcycles with sidecars and jeeps with officers. The caravan stopped and soldiers jumped down from the tailgates of transports, undoing the canvas on the back of the trucks. I heard a few wild yells as berserking prisoners tried to make a break through the now-open gates and into the yard, but there was much gunfire and when the smoke cleared all you could see was bodies twisted in astute and odd directions and positions. Yet another reminder to people already in the camp. Try to escape, and  the guards would shoot first and ask questions later. Startled, the rest of the new arrivals fell into long lines and obeyed the sergeant’s command. “Marsch!” One or two, however, did not look like the rest of the pack, and the sunlight gleamed on something metal that they had. We knew that something was amiss when we saw that glint of metal.

 

In the evening, they called us to the common room of our bunk, saying, “Brothers! We will meet tonight after the lockdown. For the Germans are fools. They don’t do anything once the lockdown has been settled. Except there are no lights and no people entering or exiting. So we may have a secret meeting after dark.” I was very very excited. When darkness came I was one of the first people in the room. Already in the room were the three people that we had seen coming off the trucks that afternoon, they said, “Welcome, brother! Welcome! We are of the Jewish Society, of the city of Boden. There, Jews are safe. We wish to aid you in escaping. We have been hired by the Swedish government to get ourselves captured so we can help you escape. But before we get into all of that, we have a present for you.” And he produced some of the most unlikely things possible: a metal box full of pistols. I gasped, along with my fellow captives. He said, “Now which of you here are trained infantry?” About twenty people raised their hands. “Alright then,” he said. “Come up one at a time to get your weapons. Do not fire them for we only have limited ammunition.” And so the line progressed along. “Conceal these well. If you do not, you will be killed. Now, brothers. In a few days we will work out our plan. Good luck to everyone.” And that was the start of salvation.

 

Chapter Four: The Plan

(July 21 1943)

 

Three weeks later….

The new arrivals had become accustomed to camp life. And now, they had let the word out that it was time to convene, come up with a plan and get out of this slum. So that day, we broke our backs and cut our hands and strained the muscles in our our legs. But we did all of this happily because we knew that soon we would start our plan to escape. That night was both a happy night and a sad night. The sad part: Lieutenant Captain Mark Smith was gassed at around 8. The happy part: it was time for us to begin our escape at last. We all rushed back to our bunk. We were happy all through lockdown. Then it was time. When the two men from the Jewish Society entered the room, they said, “Davidson, you still got your pistol?” “Yep,” he said. “What about you, Jacobean?” “Yep!” And so the process continued. The man finally said, “Alright. Everyone has checked in. So we may begin. We can give you a few ideas on what has worked in other camps. But overall you are the people who know this camp best. You are the ones who’ll be the base of the plan. One of the things that worked a lot is having someone hide out with a pistol in one of the bunks and fire off a shot, causing the guards to run over there. He can kill a guard or two. That way more guards will have to come through and divert their attention from the posts on the exit. All in favor of that plan?” About half of the people said “yes” and half of the people said “no.” The people who said “no” offered to dig tunnels. And the Swedish sergeant said, “Alright then. It is decided. Now for your jobs. Mister Steel, you will work on acquiring supplies. Mister Manning, you will be the engineer, working out safety for the tunnels and the rail lines that we will build inside. Mister Shire, you will work on forging passes for us to get out of the country to Sweden. We have a network in case the plan fails, but if all goes well the plan will work out.” Then he said, “The rest of you: you are guards. you will take your pistol and guard our operation, injuring and even killing soldiers if need be. Oh, and by the way, Mister George, you will be the persuader. You will work to curry favor in the German ranks and use them as supply links. Any amendments?”

After three hours, the plan was decided. Everything would go as originally said, except for the fact that the Swedes would be leading two “divisions” each of the divisions would have workers that worked on things the Swedish officer was skilled at. It was almost time to implement the plan. But there was one more very important part. That was the secrecy swearing. Everyone had to be sworn to secrecy and promise that they would not reveal the plan and also aid the plan wherever it took them. Once this was complete, the two Swedes said, “It’s almost midnight. You get some rest or you will only have four hours and twelve minutes to sleep. Go now.”

 

Chapter Five: Implementation

(July 22 to Midnight July 23 1943)

 

In the morning, I walked off to my position as a guard. I was assigned to the forgers. I concealed my pistol carefully underneath several layers of the thin papery bedsheets. We had arranged to that some of the Swedes were now guards, stationed strategically at the frisking point leading to the work areas. They deliberately ignored bedsheet-wrapped bundles in our orange belts. We exited out of the camp inner sanctum walls, to the work areas in the outer ring. My job today would be to enter the office and make sure that the forgers were not discovered. I scurried along to the door and I sat down to wait.

BOOM. “Herauskommen! Hände über dem Kopf! Fallen keine Waffen auf dem Boden!” Two German soldiers raised their rifles and prepared to fire. A third ran forward with handcuffs and so I stepped out with my hands above my head and my glinting pistol lying on the ground. One of the soldiers called the sergeant over and abruptly the sergeant yelled, “Isolation. Zehn Tage. Jetzt. Wärter!” So two guards came with handcuffs and marched me off to the Isolation chamber. They locked the doors and said, “You won’t get any food for two weeks. Sergeant’s orders. Goodnight!” The door slammed shut with such force that it caused the entire wooden shed to vibrate.

The head of the theft and forgery division said, “Where’s Mathewson?! He’s needed to be a forge guard and he hasn’t shown up since the morning!” “Sir, he’s in the isolation chamber,” came the sad reply. “Alright then. We must do it now! Quickly, notify all people to proceed to hiding place one.” Then everyone was running towards an insignificant little shed that the guards had always presumed to be an outhouse down by the edge of the camp. Not wanting anyone to escape, all waste was placed in the holding tanks so that no one could possibly escape by sewer. But they had deliberately kept the tanks clean. So they stood inside the toilet and climbed down. Inside of the septic tank, instead of human waste it was like a small apartment. There were canned foods lining the walls and a modestly sized radio transceiver. One of the Swedes stepped up to the transceiver. He pressed a button and after around 30 seconds something flashed orange and a crackly voice came through with a bit of an accent. “Welcome to the Swedish Intelligence Office. This is the Center for Radio Control. How may I help you?” “This is Operative 1313978A. We require assistance on the mission. This radio may be monitored, so we can’t say much. But we require extra agents and perhaps a government supervisor.” “Alright. That can be arranged,” was the reply. The new agents will arrive by sundown tomorrow. I wish you luck and hope it works out. Goodbye.” And the radio fizzled out. “Alright,” said the Swedish supervisor already there. “Our first step is to rescue Jonah from isolation. “Let’s do it, then!” said one of the guards. And so they set off.

 

Chapter Six: Rescue

Midnight July 23 1943

 

It was now dark. Someone had picked the lock on the front door. During midnight blackout, there were no guards on duty, so they passed the isolation building in the far left corner unnoticed. The isolation building was surrounded by a tall wire fence.  “Alright,” one of them whispered quietly.  “Since there are no guards on duty, there’s no one to open the skeleton gate leading to the isolation room.  We’re going to have to cut our way through.”  “Supplies.  Have you managed to acquire any wire cutters?”  

“Yes,” someone replied.  

“Great.  Lets go.”  So they cut through the wire and snuck along in the darkness to the door.  “Lockpick” was the whispered command.  And so the lock was picked and they entered.  

There was a bolt on Jonah’s door, but we opened it with ease.  Inside, Jonah jumped up and said “You came to rescue me!”  

“Of course!” said the Swedish agent.  “Now lets get out of here, it’s almost midnight.”  So they ran back to the bunk and were inside with the door locked by 11:59.  “Phew, that was close,” one of them said.  “Now make it look as if you were sleeping.”  So they did.

 

Chapter Seven: Two Turnings of Tides

October 1943

 

Sunset the next day… we heard the roar of a plane.  The German guards look up and just figured it was a military plane departing from the nearby airbase.  

The two Swedish operatives are down in the septic tank base.  The radio crackles to life.  “This is the Swedish field service.  We are progressing towards your location.  Please provide a means of entry,” I heard a squawking voice on the other end of the line.  “Right,” was the reply.  “Guards, see to it that the gate is unlocked and open for the operatives to arrive.”  Once again I addressed the person on the other side of the radio.  “We only have another half hour before the German guards come back on duty.  You better be quick.”  “Of course,” said this squawking voice.  “Signing off.”

There was suddenly a light outside of the gate, and the soft patter of wilderness uniform boots on the hard packed dirt outside the compound.  They saw the Swedish operatives run in.  I jumped with joy.  Reinforcements!  The tide was finally ready to be turned.  

“Lets all go to sleep now, we have a long day ahead of us.  It’s one step closer to freedom!”  

In the morning, something quite unusual happened.  We were roused at our normal time, but besides the usual breakfast hubbub, there were many more soldiers marching about than usual.  One German sergeant shouted, “Inspektion! Aufstellung!”

I grimaced as we lined up. SO this was another of those dreaded inspections. Most of these inspections ended with half of the camp going away to the gas chambers. I gasped as I realized they were doing this inspection because they heard the operatives coming in last night. Their safety is in jeopardy. As one soldier passed me, I tried to appear rigid, my face not worried. Soon one of the Swedish intelligence officers was wrestled out of the crowd by two German soldiers who put them in handcuffs. He was pushed up against the wire fence behind a line of soldiers. Soon another one came out of the crowd, then another, then another, then soon all the Swedish operatives, our only hope for freedom, were picked out by the Germans.  They formed quite a sizable number, the total of them.

One of the Germans barked, “Why have you got a bulging spine?”

“Because I’ve got THIS” said the Swedish operative, and he pulled out and automatic rifle, shooting down three German Soldiers in rapid succession.

The guards brought their weapons to bear quickly and fired upon them. A fierce gun battle ensued, the guards, me included, went into this sort of protect-the-leader rage and all pulled out pistols. More and more guards came and soon we were outnumbered, still fighting. We weren’t defeated yet and we wanted the Germans to know that. Soon one of our members, Jacobean fell to the unending barrage of machine gunfire. The other agents all pulled out automatic machine gun rifles from their shirts too and soon it became a scene of mass carnage, more and more German soldiers and more and more operative streamed through the camp. The time for secrecy was over. We would probably all be executed in a few days, but at that time we didn’t care, I didn’t care, my friends didn’t care. We were fighting for freedom and that’s all that mattered.We had killed three German guards by now and wounded 7 more but we were still outnumbered. However, the Swedish operatives were more skilled than the standard German infantry and the Swedish operatives had a kill rate of around 20 to 1. However, the Germans had the advantage of numbers on their side and soon it almost swarmed us over. We retreated back to the septic tank. They all jumped into the toilet and closed the lid. With a bang, German soldiers ran toward the outhouse. Everywhere was a tumultuous smoke of gunfire as the operatives made their retreat. There was angry yelling and I could tell that the commander was angry. Suddenly I heard a whirring, grinding noise and I saw a tank. I couldn’t believe it, I yelled to my comrades to take shelter. We dived to the bottom of the tank, covering our ears. There was a sonic BOOM and the tank shell ripped through the ceiling. Suddenly, all around me, metal was twisting and groaning. Smoke was billowing. I could hear the screams of my friends trapped under the masses of mangled metal. We had the get out of here but how? There was a tank and 5000 german soldiers on the surface, what were we supposed to do. Suddenly, I heard a wailing.

Oh no, not an air raid! If there was an air raid on top of what we were already facing then we would all probably die. I said my final prayers, cried for my mother for a moment, and then steeled.

I could hear a faint and distant whistling. The sirens, the screams, the shouts, all drew distant as my world faded to black.

When I woke up I was in a dark room covered with a soiled white sheet which stank of human body byproducts. I groaned and rolled over. So I wasn’t dead, but I would still be forced to live on in torture forever. My head felt heavy and I stared up at the lamp hanging above my head. Goodbye, I told the world, goodbye.

And I slept.  

 

Chapter 8: Air Raids

November 19-November 26 1943

 

In the morning I woke up and there was a soldier beside my bed. He spoke to the white clothed doctor beside him. “Ist er tot?” “Nein.” a voice replied out of the darkness.

Hazily, I understood. They were discussing whether I was dead. It appears that they had come to the conclusion that I had not, which was true of course, but I had no idea why in the world I was alive.

There was more talk, “Sollen wir ihn wieder an die Arbeit?”

A reply came out of the darkness.

“Geben ihm drei Stunden und weisen Sie dann ihn bis zu einem gewissen geringeren Innen Pflicht. Persönlich ist mir egal, wenn er stirbt, und weder sollten Sie.”

Now I understood. They were going to send me back to work, even in my poor condition. They really didn’t care about people’s lives here and I doubted they ever would. So, and hour passed and then I was put to the work of peeling and chopping potatoes for the evening mess. The potatoes were the least meaty of the crop, just enough to keep someone alive, and covered with mold and gone bad. Our job was to scrape the mold off and then peel the potato, placing them in the pot for cooking. We were not allowed near scalding hot water lest we use it as a weapon against the guards. I sprained at least three fingers in the course of doing this, got whipped by a German soldier once, and shocked in the leg by another. After a hellish six hours, that backbreaking, unbearably painful work was finally done. I sighed. They said, “normally you wouldn’t get dinner, but we need to keep you alive to break your back.”

I’m kidding, they didn’t actually say that, but it sure sounded like that.

I dejectedly picked at my moldy peas which looked wilted and were bitter. They made us eat raw pork here so I had several cases of tapeworms already. Then the air raids happened. We all ran out of the building and cheered as several allied aircrafts raced overhead, bombing the massive camp. There was a radio signal picked up by the radio in the septic tank saying ‘We are raiding the camp, , hide in the potato warehouse, that is the one place we are not bombing. That way you can survive for liberation. Quickly now!”

We all rushed happily yet sadly to the potato warehouse, barricading ourselves inside. Several German soldiers charged in and held us at gunpoint, every one of us. They said into our radio that if the air raid didn’t stop they would slaughter every one of us, so the air raid had no choice but to be stopped, as advent as we were about bringing death to the German forces. The German soldiers released us quickly, shoving us into one another, marching us out of the warehouse into the gas chambers.

 

Chapter 9: Survival

Noon November 27 1943

 

As we entered into the gas chamber, which, of course, they did not expect us to know it was a gas chamber, there was a small window. As we entered the ‘baths’ as they called them. A little girl whined. “I’m suffocating, mama,” she said, “Will you tell the man to open a window?”

I wanted to laugh and say, “ha, to have you suffocate is the idea!” But I refrained.

It seems that the Germans were not yet ready to reveal the true purpose so they said, “Alright, one window may be open for five minutes.”

And that is how we survived. I returned to the bunk in high fervor, excited about surviving the gas chambers. The Swedish agents had reconvened yet again, brought in more agents and better manpower, spun captivating capture stories that the Germans believed to be in every way true. This time, they brought in an automatic rifle for each guard and told them to conceal it in an inner pocket of their pants.

“Now for the second plan,” the new Swedish head of operations said. “We have a better plan now and automatic rifles to help us along. WE shall do the same as before except that now all guards will be equipped with forged ‘warden’s pardons’ which will allow them to be about in the camp without supervision from soldiers. Then we will be protected from isolation and other forms of torture that the Germans may subject us to. Now onto the second phase of the plan. We’ve got Swedish operatives posing as German soldiers and actually officers in the German high command that will attempt to work on giving you as much leeway as possible. Of this, Hitler will not and must not know. For freedom!

There was a rising responding call.

“For freedom!”

The officer told us to get some sleep and then we did.

 

Chapter 10: Implementation ii

November 27-November 30 1943

 

We had a plan. We would pose as prisoners transferring to a different camp and board military trucks that were manned by the Swedish operatives posing as German soldiers. When we got in, we would make for the boarder of Germany and freedom in Sweden. This way we didn’t have to focus on forging and we had one less thing to do but we would escape they assured us.

Time to go, work on reacquiring supplies and escape this hellhole once and for all!

We all went about our jobs. The old persuader worked to get the prisoner transferred orders. We all worked hard to seem as innocent as we could, and the Germans seemed happy that for once, we were acting as dejected hopeless Jews instead of budding revolutionaries. Time went on, but we endured the cruel tortures happily, knowing that freedom was on the horizon.

 

Chapter 11 – War, Bad News and a Spark of Hope Extinguished

February 1945

Somebody had stolen a newspaper from one of the guards and the news that it carried was not good.

 

Schweden ausgesetzt!

In den Nachrichten an diesem Morgen, ist eine atemberaubende Durchbruch. Es wurde festgestellt, dass die schwedische Betrieb sind pro-jüdische Zellen, die Juden zu befreien, so dass sie uns helfen kann zu zerstören. Entlang von diesem, hat Ihr Anführer und Beschützer Schweden den Krieg erklärt. er schwört, dass wir werden nicht aufhören, bis wir erbärmlich Schweden in unserem Kielwasser zerdrückt. Lange kann das deutsche Vaterland und die arische Rasse zu leben.

 

In my later years, I have found time to translate this news article and it may be found in the Annex materials section. However, we have no time to read that now, so heres the basic content. The Germans have discovered the Swedish intent, and intend to declare war upon them so we cannot be free. I go back to my work saddened by this prospect, but the Swedish operatives are telling us that they will continue to aid us at all costs. This cheers me a little, but not much. They say we must go on with our plan, but after reading the article some of my brothers have abandoned the attempt. I, however, and most of my friends have not. ¨The plan must continue,” we say. For those of us who are not abandoning the plan, we are close to salvation but yet another setback occurs and we are yet again set back.

It was morning time. The Swedish operatives came out of the shelter looking dejected. One of them sighed and proceeded to tell us ”Because of the war, our superiors demand that we pull out and aid them in the war and aid them in the defense of our country. We will not be doing any offensive campaigning because that would result in the loss of too many lives unless there is a breach in the German defenses which we will fully utilize. I will not see you for a long time and I hope we meet again on free ground, my brothers. Now, I must leave.” So he went to the car where the two German soldiers were waiting for them. ”Me and my remaining comrades did something bad so they would transfer us between camps aboard a truck. A Swedish plane will raid the truck and pull us out so that we can go home.” All of the people of the camp were sad as the agents car drove away. Some cried. Some fainted. Others attempted to throw themselves at the door to the gas chamber. I myself sighed and fell on the spot. The blissful blackness of the dirt encasing me…

I woke up again in that same bed of the same building I had been in before. Once again, the familiar conversation, ”Ist er tot?” ”Nein.” ”Sollen wir ihn wieder an die Arbeit?”, ”Geben ihm drei Stunden und weisen Sie dann ihn bis zu einem gewissen geringeren Innen Pflicht. Persönlich ist mir egal, wenn er stirbt, und weder sollten Sie.” Three hours later, as normal, I was put back to work. Time flowed by unendingly. There was no hope now. Sweden was gone. There was not now but oppression. No hope. Nobody. No nothing. Just war. War and death. I fought to keep myself alive. Now there was nothing. The air raids had been forced to stop. No salvation. War. I prayed to Adonai hoping for something better and it turned out that God didn’t wish for me to die today. There would be another attempt. Soon, that attempt presented itself…

 

Chapter 12 – Freedom Eludes Us Again

April to early May 1945

 

Soon, that other opportunity presented itself. Into the camp, two Jews, who had been escape artists in the circus, they promised that they might be able to save us and our beliefs. We gave them the wire cutters that weeks ago (it seemed like years now) supplied the escape effort. On June 22, 1939, it was scheduled to happen. We would break free at all costs. We swore, saying we would come out of battle free or dead. That was the rekindling of the spark of hope. The next day was that fated day; it was June 22. Morning rose quietly but trembling with anticipation. It was time for the escape. The artists met at the appointed hour in Bunk 6. It was time. Blackout had come and gone. The final planning was over. We went together to the gate. “Hey!” I yelled. “Aufhalten!” he replied, “Stop, stop now! Succumb, I order you!” I pulled out a rifle I had saved for the last uprising. I fired. The guard fell. Wild yells penetrated the air around me. Yells of anguish and happiness as more people charged forward. They ran. The rest of the guards held them to the choking point. I, however, as one of them was able to divert the attention from the real escape. The artists dived out from behind cover. They snuck to a point about 780 feet west of the nearest guard tower. One of them pulled the wire cutters from their pants. They attempted to make a step to make a hole. The time left of the diversion was running out. The main body was rapidly being overwhelmed by the guards. I ran to the front and, shooting down one guard, narrowly missed three more shots fired by another. I ran for it. Diving behind cover when I could, I charged one of the towers. Three people backed me and together we were able to defeat the guard. They were almost through. We had to give them five more seconds. “Five! Just five!” I told myself.

I hurried to fire a few more shots. Another one of our friends fell to the guard. Five! Four! Three! Two! One! Boom!!

It was over. We had failed. I saw the artist lying dead on the ground by the wire. There was blood but the ground was rapidly soaking. There were yells and dejectedly we once again dropped our rifles. Some fell from exhaustion just then. I slumped over. We had been foiled. Escape was now a long way away. The guards handcuffed us. We were sent back to the gas chambers which, thankfully, we once again survived. This time they did not hesitate to inject the gas to the chamber. Each of us, however, had nose clips stowed in our outer pockets. I clipped my nose clip over my nose and whipped out a pair of goggles. These I placed over my head. I also had a rubber mask. I placed that on as did most of my friends. We let the red gas wash over us. Then there was just darkness. 23 seconds later it was over. All over. The gas had dissipated. Assuming of course that we were all dead. We did our best to appear so and whipped off our nose clips and eye masks and lay down on the floor, splayed out as if dead. They came and carried us away and placed us in the ‘Tomb of Auschwitz.’ There they left us. Suffocating in the brittle air, we struggled to survive. Day by day we crawled to the door, struggling for breath. As quietly as we could we exposed and activated the trigger for the vile of gas that we had procured. We debated, whispering quietly among ourselves, “Should we kill the Germans? It’s the only way to be free. But do we want to take anyone’s lives in the quest to be free? But it’s the only way to be free!”

Then we were at the door. We climbed out. We were free. However, a steady guard of Germans had been placed at the entrance to the Tomb of Auschwitz because they had known that one of us would probably play a trick like this eventually.  Now our trouble was getting past the German guards. WE didn’t want to have to do this but we had captured a vial of Zyklon B. This we threw at the guards and that was how we got out of the tomb. It was very very hard for me to throw the canister. I didn’t want to kill anyone in the quest for freedom but if it had to be done, it had to be done. So we got out and prepared to escape.

 

Chapter 13: Victory and Tipping Points

May 7th 1945

 

But then we heard a heated discussion between four German officers.

“We have surrendered to the Allies but should we tell the prisoners now or later? Should we let them be free now?”

“Tell them now, we have surrendered and if we do not free them now the allies may kill us” another soldier retorted.

We began to chatter excitedly among ourselves.

“Let’s go back to the camp so we can receive British aid.”

An so that’s what we did!

That was it. Salvation was here. Trucks drove in but this time they weren’t German trucks. They were Allied trucks. A soldier stepped up to me and said, “Hey, do you speak English?”

“Yes,” I replied calmly.

“Please get aboard the truck now then, we will take you to the airport at Trier. From there we will fly you to the British constituate in Spain. From here you can do whatever you wish. You deserve to be free, you have been through a lot. I myself am of your brethren and I commend you for what you have done and the people you have lost. Get aboard the truck now.”

And so I got aboard the bus. We left the camp behind. It was now covered in a grey film of dust. During the Allied occupation of Germany the camp was used as a training site for Allied bombers. Some buildings were tossed aside and the gas chambers were the first to be bombed.

 

Epilogue: In Memoriam and My Travels in The World

October 1949

 

The minister finished his prayer with an amen that was echoed by all.

“And so,” he said, “These heroic people fell in battle for freedom of religion, of belief, and physically. They died fighting for their brethren, their life. And I commend them for their losses. May everyone watch over them.”

It had been a long mourning, filled with stories, heartfelt narratives that are too long to include in this narrative, but I think that they were beautiful and represented the dead more than adequately. Once I was free, I traveled by plane to the United States in 1956. There I stayed for ten years visiting the sights and telling the people of my experience at the camp of Auschwitz-Birkenau, but the most important place that I ever traveled in that time was in fact the same place I had come away from. Germany. The refugee society member tracked down my mother. I visited her. She was overjoyed to see me as I was to see her. I was happy and overjoyed to know that after the deportation of men to Auschwitz, Jews were isolated from the rest of the camp an not assigned to work teams. In October 1943 1700 people were sent to Auschwitz so the remaining Jews were not assigned to work teams, so her condition did not deteriorate as much as mine. We discussed our experiences and she was horrified to learn that I had gone to Auschwitz and noted that the conditions that I must have faced were probably ten times worse than hers. She constantly pestered me. I told her of all the details and she told me of hers. Then I traveled to France, visiting sites where prisoners like myself had languished and I was free after 11 years of terror.

 

Annex Materials

Here are some things that will help you understand this story better:

 

  1. Newspaper Translation from Chapter 11:

 

Sweden exposed!

In the news this morning, a stunning breakthrough is made. It has been discovered that the Swedish are operating pro-Jewish cells which help to free Jews so that they may destroy us. Along by this, your leader and protector has declared war on Sweden. He vows that we will not stop until we have crushed pathetic Sweden in our wake. Long may live the German fatherland and the Aryan race.

  1. The Beginner’s Guide to German Military Language And Phrases Described in This Book
  1. Further Reading:

Here There Is No Why by Rachel Chencinski Roth

Night by Elie Weisel

The Book Thief  by Markus

THe Diary of Anne Frank

Surviving Auschwitz by Primo Levi

Maus I & II by Art Spiegelman

 

Florence (Part 1)

When I was one year old my uncle started taking care of me. I still don’t know what happened to my parents. Neither my relatives nor my uncle have told me. We live in a small apartment with one bedroom, a kitchen and a bathroom. I go to school everyday and have summer vacation just like every other kid. I also have a normal and plain name, Izzy. But something is different about me. I keep a list of questions I have that have never been answered. They can be big questions like where my parents went or just small questions that are just not appropriate for anyone to answer because of my age.

What I have found out:

  1. When I was little my parents and I lived in a large house.
  2. We didn’t have much money but the house had been in our family for generations, so we were able to keep it.
  3. Now we don’t have the house because the government took it, because we weren’t paying the full rent, just before my parents disappeared.
  4. My dad had a job working in a factory making shoes and didn’t get paid much by his mean boss.
  5. Our town didn’t like our family because we didn’t pay taxes to help our parks and buildings. We didn’t pay them because we were too poor. We could barely pay for our house.

I decided that the first person I wanted to ask questions to was my uncle. So after school I went to find him. He was in the kitchen.

“Hi, Uncle Kevin, can I ask you a question?”

“Just a minute Izzy, I’m making a sandwich.”

“I only have a quick question.”

“Okay,” he sighed. “What is it?

“Were you there when my parents disappeared?

“I told you, I don’t know anything, they just told me to take care of you for a little bit and then they were gone.”

“Really? Are you sure?”

“Yes,” he said. “I’m sure.”

I knew that wasn’t true.

“Did they tell you anything else before they left?

“Oh, fine!” he yelled. “I’ll tell you. Before they left they said that they had to go somewhere to make money so that they could raise you better instead of raising you with no money. They told me not to tell you this because they just wanted to come back as fast as they could so that they could raise you. But with you pestering me, I couldn’t stand it.”

“Thank you, but why have they taken nine or more years? They left when I was one.”

“Who knows. But I think you should forget about it for now.”

That was something I wasn’t going to do.

 

When I came home from school, I heard my uncle talking in the kitchen to a voice I didn’t recognize.

“I don’t know what’s going to happen. I tried to give her something to kind of lure her off of the path, but I think she’ll see through it. She even makes a list of things she doesn’t know and does know,” my uncle said.

“I would never do that… It’d take too much time and organization. I got better stuff to do,” the other person said between bites of a cupcake. He had bad grammar and etiquette.

“Hey,” I said as I came into the room. “What’s your name? I’m Izzy.” I asked the person talking to my uncle. He looked very unbathed. He was also wearing jeans that were cut at two different lengths and his shirt’s buttons were uneven. I guess he just didn’t care how he appeared.

“I’m Joe, I drive trucks. Garbage trucks,” he said as he choked on some apple cobbler. He was eating up all my dessert.

“That’s nice,” I replied. “Do you live in our building?”

“Yeah, I live in the apartment right next to yours.”

“How have I never met you?”

“I move a lot.”

“Why?” I said curious.

“Anyway, I have to go.”

“Bye,” I said.

“See you later!” my uncle said.

“Why was he here?

“Just wanted to um, ah, you know, talk to someone while you’re at school? I get really lonely.”

“That’s never happened before.”

“Enough… With… THE QUESTIONS!” Suddenly he was shouting. “Does it ever occur to you that it is ANNOYING!?”

“Sorry,” I replied meekly.

 

The next day I went into my bedroom to think about what had happened yesterday. They were talking about what my uncle had told about my parents. He said it was a lie. What was he trying to do? Then I thought of going to Joe’s apartment. He might have some answers. He didn’t seem very smart, so it wouldn’t be too hard to get information out of him.

 

Knock, knock knock. “Joe?”

He opened the door in a quite unpleasant way. “Oh you. Ya live over there, don’t you?”

“Uh, yeah.” He was in his pajamas and it was 4:00 in the afternoon. “I just want to ask you some questions. Are you busy?”

“No, come in.”

As I walked into Joe’s apartment, I was very confused. Everything didn’t seem to match his personality. It was neat and all the furniture matched the carpet, there were no clothes on the floor and the walls were white without anything on them.

“I can’t stand dirty places, so I choose to keep mine clean,” Joe said.

That seemed kind of suspicious, so I immediately started asking questions.

“Do you know who my parents are?”

“No, isn’t Kevin your dad?”

“No, he’s my uncle. How do you know my uncle?”

“He welcomed me to your apartment, since I’m new here.”

“Oh, I’m not going to get anything out of you. You’re too- never mind.”

With that, I left. As I opened the door to my apartment I noticed something was missing.

“Uncle Kevin? Where are you? Are you home?”

No reply. He was here when I left so I doubt he would have gone anywhere since I was only at Joe’s for five minutes. I went back to Joe’s apartment and told him that my Uncle was gone.

All he said was, “We’ve been caught.”

Then he took my arm and led me out the door. I don’t know why, but I trusted him. He didn’t seem like the person he pretended to be. So as he took my arm and led me out of the building, I didn’t stop him. We ran down the street and passed all the buildings to Anchor Lake which was at the very very tip of our town. Surrounding the lake was the woods and through the woods was the next town. He took me halfway through the woods and stopped me.

“Look, Izzy, I have a lot to tell you.”

“Well, then tell me! I’ve only been waiting my whole life!” I said, exasperated.

“Well, your parents are spies, and they work for the government. They couldn’t tell you as much as they wanted to because the government couldn’t trust you. I’m also a spy, like your parents. Your ‘uncle’ is not your uncle, he’s your bodyguard. He never wanted to take care of you but your parents made him. Your real name is Florence, your parents met in Florence, Italy, spying together. We had to change your name to something plain like Izzy, because Butler and her people know that there’s only one Florence, you. But now Kevin’s been caught and we have to go find your parents, Berkle-Butler is onto us.”

There was so much to process in my mind right now, I didn’t say anything. I was angry at my parents for abandoning me, I was worried that my parents, Joe and I were in danger, I was frustrated that no one ever told me this and I was surprised that my parents were spies working for the government. My head was swirling with all these emotions and I still had nothing to say. I was going from my boring life and now I was going to find my parents.

gg

Jacob and Josh

Jacob is Ceyon – loves eating pizza and video games and not doing his chores.

Josh is Jacob’s friend – he is responsible, he does his chores and his homework, and sometimes he does Jacob’s and he doesn’t play video games all day.

Problem: It’s math class class and Jacob is having trouble but him and Josh were doing something at night. They brought their phones and laptops but the light’s didn’t work — they think something is there, like a big shadow. But there are four people, one girl and three boys. The other boy’s name was Stewy and the girl’s name was Megan but some people just called her Meg.

So Stewy and Meg bring their laptops and Jacob and Josh brought their phones but when they turned on the lights that didn’t work. They felt like something was there watching them, so they were watching movies and then they heard a noise. “Chchchchchc you’re breaking up chchchchch.” So they go look at it, but first they download this app so they can have light so they download a night vision app and a regular light. Same thing for the phones. They hear in the Janitor’s room, it was showing this restaurant called Freddy FazBears. There was a night watch so they all took the job, 12 a.m. to 6 a.m. First night the limited power is 100, the pay was $20.10 minimum waged man.

So on the first night they heard a noise, it sounded like “Ruu ch chch.” One of them was trying to find where it came from and they noticed there was three animatronics on the stage, but one was missing. They told them, “I am going to check the kitchen.” They looked at the kitchen camera but there was nothing.  

 

Chapter 2: The missing Stewy

“Stewy don’t go, use the camera, cuz we can’t see you in there and already two of the animatronics are gone — Chica and Bonnie!” said Jacob. “Let Josh go with you with the laptop light.”

“Fine, but if I hear that noise one more time…I’m about to flip,” Jacob said. So they went to the kitchen and they saw Bonnie sitting down near pizza and Jacob screamed, “Josh, Stewy, come back, we have to close the doors.”

They all left and closed the door, but Stewy wasn’t there.

And then it was 6 a.m. and the animatronics went limp. And Stewy was found by Josh, alive.

 

Chapter 3: The Animatronics

The animatronics were on stage and they were talking in some secret mood. Chica got in the room and said, “Do you have a phone charger, I need to order pizza!!!” Jacob his going back to work he look at Foxy, he was pecking at the cam. He called the manager to tell him the Foxy is staring at the cam. Staring is not the problem, he’s not in the cove close the left door “nigbone.” Open the door, it’s magnetic, your power is low powers out freedy his that you music stops “aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa ah crap man wheres josh stewie guys found you.We have to get out of he its night 3 5am 321 6am is 6am now.” The place close and  left to rot they  used the old parts to make new and shine animatronics.

                   

Chapter 4

Night 6, the final night until we get our paychecks.

It shouldn’t be too hard. Josh came, Stewy came, and Meg came. We all brought our flashlights but it’s closed! There’s locks and the building stinks, but there was a not attached to it.

“Please come to the new location, please come to it in two week.” Signed, the manager. “And here is your paychecks.”

Two weeks has passed. They place looks new. Even the animatronics look different. They are shinier and Chica’s bib changed. Instead of “Let’s eat,” it says “Let’s Party.” We had a limited amount of flashlight batteries. There is a phone ringing, somebody is speaking. There is no doors to close and I have to wind up with the music box. This is so much harder. Instead of just closing doors and no music box I have to look out for that thing and this box and there is vents. The first night was fun, amazing, nothing happened. I think the second night might be harder.

On to the sixth night. He had to work a little later. From 12 to 7. He had to work at the day shift tomorrow too, that might be fun. He checked the camera and Bonnie was missing. He checked all the cameras and then he wound up the music box. He saw Bonnie with his guitar in the party room. And then the phone rang. It said there was a new animatronic like Foxy. His name was mangel in the new place. “Well see you tomorrow night,” said the manger at 6:00 a.m. It might be harder checking the left door. “Aaa Bonnie right door aaa chica,’” said Jacob closed. At 2 a.m. the biulding has 69% power left they are not there the animatronics are gone.

The 6 a.m. lights are on the left door. He sees Freddy and closes the door. 60% is left. Freddy left, he’s gone. He opened the door at 7 a.m. He got his paycheck which was 189 +200$ because he had to work til 7=389.

Gods and Goddesses

Characters:

ATHENA: War, wise    

ARES: God of war

ZEUS: King of all god

HERA: Queen

HADES: Lord of the dead

APHRODITE: goddess of love

ACHILLES JR.: Achilles’ son, shy

The three Fates: CLOTHO, LACHESIS, and ATROPOS

Scene One

ATHENA and APHRODITE are in a fight over who is the most beautiful. It got so big ATHENA and APHRODITE started a war with the gods. They are in elementary school. ARES, APOLLO, ARTEMIS and their mother are on APHRODITE’s side. Everyone else is on ATHENA’s side. ZEUS and ACHILLES JR. are neutral.

At the school. In the gym during gym class. All the characters are there except ZEUS and ACHILLES JR. They are playing soccer. APHRODITE and ATHENA are the team captain choosing the people on their team.

APHRODITE

Ares!

 

ATHENA

Hermes.

 

APHRODITE

Artemis.

 

ATHENA

Hera.

 

APHRODITE

Apollo.

 

ATHENA

Poseidon.

 

APHRODITE

Leto.

 

They start playing.

 

ARES

You’re gonna lose!

 

ATHENA

We’re gonna win!

 

ARTEMIS passes the ball to ARES. ARES gets the ball and scores.

HERA passes the ball to ATHENA. ATHENA scores.

 

GYM TEACHER

Five minutes left!

 

HERA scores. They cheer.

 

GYM TEACHER

One minute left.

 

ARES scores for APHRODITE’s team. They go into overtime until the last minute of school. The game lasted 24 hours. HERA falls asleep in the middle of the floor. APHRODITE scores. Her team wins three to two.

It’s already the next day and they have art. ZEUS and ACHILLES JR. also in art class. ACHILLES JR. is painting like a normal person. ARES punches HERA in the face. She tries to punch him in the face, but she misses. APHRODITE uses her intoxicating perfume to make the teacher faint. HERA comes up to her and APHRODITE punches HERA in the face. HERA falls down bloody.

 

HERA

I hate everyone.

 

ZEUS

Well we shouldn’t say mean things!

 

ARES

We should have a war, Hera. I’ll send you to Hades!

 

ATHENA

Having a war is not wise.

 

HERA

Who do you think you are Aphrodite!

 

APHRODITE

Goddess of beauty and love!

 

ACHILLES JR. is going home to get his lunch, which he forgot. He is walking through the woods near the school. POSEIDON kills ACHILLES JR. by throwing his trident in his heel.

POSEIDON runs away to Mount Olympus.

The three Fates, CLOTHO, LACHESIS, and ATROPOS are on the end of the earth. They cut the string. See ACHILLES JR. with blood gushing out of his heel.  

 

HERA

Oh no! ACHILLES JR. is badly hurt.

 

APHRODITE

Whatever, he’s not even beautiful.

 

ATHENA

We don’t want any more mortals to get badly hurt!

 

ARES

Okay. I don’t want to drain all my powers for this little fight.

 

HERA

Little fight? This was the biggest fight ever!

 

The End

Five Minutes Until The Bomb Goes Off

Five minutes until the bomb goes off, everyone might wiped get out.

Five minutes until the bomb goes off, everyone stay calm, don’t shout.

Five minutes until the bomb goes off, whatever shall we do?

Five minutes until the bomb goes off, the first one dead is you.

Four minutes until the bomb goes off, we have to get out of here.

Four minutes until the bomb goes off, the time is getting near.

Four minutes until the bomb goes off, we have move to the corner.

Four minutes until the bomb goes off, we better have us a big warner.

Three minutes until the bomb goes off, everyone hang on to each other.

Three minutes until the bomb goes off, gee, I want my mother!

Three minutes until the bomb goes off, how do we turn this off?

Three minutes until the bomb goes off, please protect my skoff!

Two minutes until the bomb goes off, what is the password?

Two minutes until the bomb goes off, I think I may have heard.

Two minutes until the bomb goes off, Fred what did you hear?

Two minutes until the bomb goes off, the password might be “red ear.”

One minute until the bomb goes off, the password wasn’t right.

One minute until the bomb goes off, everyones screaming in fright.

One minute until the bomb goes off, the room is fully loaded.

One minute until the bomb goes off, it has just exploded!

Fire Spreading

Red paint

Swirled out of a bucket

Onto its blanket

Of cream-colored

White

Fire swirling,

Blooming,

All over

Its blanket

Of cream-colored

White

Flowers sprouting,

Bearing crowns

And wings

Of cotton

Spreading

On its blanket

Of cream-colored

White

And after the day

Is leaving for home

Upon the blanket

Of cream-colored

White

With flower

And fire

And paint

A tired head

Is dropped

Upon

The pillow

Fashion

More schools should have students wear uniforms because fashion is bothering kids in school academically. People say they want to go to Yale and Harvard, but meanwhile their grades are like B’s or C’s and that is because they are so worried about what to wear in the morning and how much makeup to put on. I think that people should be more worried about how their grades are not how much makeup they are going to wear. This mostly happens to girls not boys and that is why people say that girls don’t get far in school, but I want to prove that wrong because if more schools start wearing uniforms then more girls will have opportunity to be a better student in school.

 

If you ask most parents, they will say that if you want to get into a good college than do not fall into the fashion trap. In fact, my mom did not fall into the fashion trap and ended up going to Yale. Some girls are so caught up in putting a bow in their hair and they are never really caring about what they really should be caring about. Most people think that a lot of people will like you if you are fashionable and beautiful. You might also think that you will be the most popular girl in school because of beauty and by that you will be the only one in your grade that gets a scholarship to whatever college that you want to go to. But that is not true. Go ask ten different moms if you will get a scholarship to to a college by being the most popular and fashionable girl in school and all of them will say no.

 

Some girls might not like to dress up and that is fine. Putting on a uniform might not magically get you good grades but putting on a uniform might stop you from worrying about fashion. You might be thinking that you don’t worry about fashion in the school day, but that is also fine.

 

If you are a girl, believe in yourself. The thought that boys are smarter than girls is not true and I believe that we can change that thought and turn it the other way around. If you are a school that has a no uniform policy, than maybe go ask your principal if you can put in a uniform policy and then she might say yes. You might be uncomfortable with that policy for the first five days but when you are getting straight A’s and being the smartest kid in your grade then you will thank me. You might not like this, but you may love it in a couple of years. You might actually surprise yourself in a very good way. You go ask your principal if you can have a uniform policy if you don’t already have one.

Excerpt from Escape From Magic

Chapter Two

My name is Jacqueline, just don’t call me that, because I prefer Jack. My mother and father learned that the hard way. From the day I was born I hated that name, Jacqueline. It sounds all sophisticated, and believe me, I am not sophisticated. A normal princess, or at least my mother’s definition of a normal princess, should wear dresses, not pants, and your handkerchief should be in your handbag, not used as a bandana. I am not your stereotypical princess, though I know my mother wants me to be. The one thing I do that she wants me to do is go to Bellmapel Magic Academy. It is horrible. All the other girls are those stereotypical princesses who wear gallons of makeup (by the way, we are thirteen) and big, poofy skirts and dresses. And the teachers don’t make it any easier. We actually have a beauty lesson. Can you believe that? Its ridiculous. We have to learn magic, too, and that’s not as bad, but still pretty bad. The annoying thing is, I’m actually pretty good at magic. I am classified as a witch, because I passed the test last year, and partly because my Great Aunt Filipina was a first class Magician, and so was my mom. You can’t apply to be a first class Magician until you’re seventeen, and I’m only thirteen.

I like to sew a lot. My mother says it’s waste of time, because our servants can do it for us. But I love to look at a beautiful outfit that I made. It makes me really relaxed, and it something I really enjoy. But of course, the one thing I like to do my parents don’t approve of.

Emma

Chapter 1

 

Emma walked home in the rain because her dad forgot to pick her up again. The rain was dripping from her hair and onto her back. Pitter-patter, pitter-patter. Ugh, why did her dad have to come back? Why, why, why? She knew the way home, because this was the sixth time he forgot to pick her up. Two miles from school she had to walk. Walk in the rain. Ugh!

Finally she got home. But her dad wasn’t home. Yet she knew exactly where he was, at Murray’s. Murray’s is the local liquor and bar store on the island of Cortin. Cortin was a small island so Murray’s is one of the only liquor stores on the island.

Emma sighed and went to the fridge. She slide a microwave pizza in the microwave. Then Emma went into the living room and grabbed her laptop and her favorite movie, Sleeping Beauty. She felt that everyone in the sixth grade knew that they were way too old for Disney movies. But Emma loved them, they comforted her. Almost made her feel like her dad, her life, and everything was gone. Ding! The microwave woke her up from her fantasy. She rushed into the kitchen and put her pizza on a paper plate.

In her room Emma popped the DVD into the laptop. She heard the familiar theme music and saw Bugs Bunny. When the prince kissed Sleeping Beauty a tear rolled down her cheek and splashed onto her laptop. Why couldn’t someone save her? Then she started the movie again. Hi Bugs Bunny!

After the second time Emma watched the movie, it was 10 o’clock. She put the movie and computer away. Then she slipped on her PJ’s and brushed her teeth. Emma climbed into bed. Just when she got in she heard the front door open. Oh no, Dad!

No, mom! Yay! Today she came home from her long business trip. Mom is always working, but dad is unemployed.

“Sweetie, are you home?” mom shouts.

“Yes, mommy!” Emma shouted back. Seconds later she poked her head through her bedroom door.

“Where is your dad?” mom questions,

“Murray’s,” Emma sighed. She nodded then sighed too.
“Ok, well guess what?” her mom said. “I have to go away tomorrow at four in the morning to China, so I won’t see you.” Tears brimmed Emma’s eyes. Does she have to go?

“I know it has been hard on you ever since your father came back, but that is life. You are who you are because of him coming back last summer, ” her mom said sadly. She kissed Emma on the cheek where tears have somehow creeped out of Emma’s eyes. They were like little drops of sadness. Falling, falling, falling. Emma’s mom turned off the lights and Emma thought maybe she could see a tear in her mom’s eye.

 

Chapter 2

 

The next morning Emma stumbled through her morning routine. Put on clothes, brush hair, brush teeth, eat breakfast, grab bag, go on bus. She felt like a robot going through the same motions over and over and over again.

On the school bus, she sat in an empty seat in the back. Her friend, Charlie, came on the bus. Charlie moved to Cortin just this year. Charlie and Emma had became very good friends.

“Hey Em!” said Charlie, sliding into the seat next to her.

“Hi Char, how’s it going?” Emma replied.

“So did you hear about the plane crash this morning?” Charlie asked excitedly. Charlie’s mom is a news reporter, so she tells Charlie all the news.

“No Char,” Emma said, half-heartedly.

“Well,” she begins, “a plane going to China crashed and everyone on the plane died.” Charlie finishes excitedly.

“Mmm,” Emma said, not really listening. Charlie talks enough for Emma and herself combined, so sometimes when Charlie talked Emma tuned out.

At school in Social Studies they were talking about a plane crash. Emma decided to listen.

“The plane left at four this morning,” Mrs. Kelley told the class, “trying to go to China.” Emma’s heart stopped beating. NO! Emma raised her hand, almost scared to ask the question. Mrs. Kelly’s eyes fell on Emma.

“Yes,” she said.

“Um… could you maybe um, you know, print out a sheet of the um, names of the um, people who um, died,” Emma barely made out the words.

“Of course, Miss Emma Clount. I am so happy that you care about this horrible tragedy that has fallen upon us,” Mrs. Kelley said. Charlie shot me a look as if to say, She is such a drama queen. Usually Emma would laugh, but right now she didn’t care. Emma heard the printer going whir, whir, whir. As though every second was an hour the sheet came out of the printer.

Mrs. Kelley took the paper off the the printer and made her way over to Emma. With shaking hands, Emma took the papers made warm by the printer. Then she scanned the list.

 

Chapter 3

 

Emma heart stopped beating. There, her mother’s name. Oh no, oh no, oh no. Emma weakly raised her hand. Mrs. Kelley smiled and called on Emma.

“Uh, I don’t feel well,” Emma said and coughed just to prove it.

“Oh no! Horrible killer cough. Go to the nurse’s office, and here is your hall pass,” Mrs. Kelley said. Charlie made a face as if to say, What? I know you aren’t sick! Emma ignored it.

At the nurse’s office the nurse said that Emma didn’t have a fever, but just in case she would send Emma home. The nurse called Emma’s dad, but he didn’t pick up the phone.

“You will have to lay on the bed in the sick room until the end of school,” the nurse said politely. Emma smiled weakly and turned to the bed. In the room it smelled of moldy cheese and rotten cabbage. Ugh, dad. Sadly, Emma sat on the bed and cried herself to sleep.

The bell rang. Emma snapped awake, she looked at the clock: 3:30 p.m., school was over. Emma sat up and walked back over to the nurse.

“Is there a ride for you, sweetie?” the nurse asked in a honey-coated voice.

“Yeah,” Emma lied, pretty sure her dad wasn’t coming.

“A girl, Charlie, brought you your bag!” said the nurse.

“Thanks,” Emma barely replied. She scooped up her bag and walked out into the rain. Emma went to the circle of parents waiting to pick up kids. In that circle was her dad! Ugh, this was the last person she wanted to see right now.

“Hey Emma!” he shouted. Emma grumbled. Her dad walked over to Emma, beer in hand and the same shirt he has been wearing for the past three days.

“Your mom died,” he said. “But I’m gonna swing by Murray’s, how ’bout that. Woo-hoo!!!” Then Emma got very angry. Murray’s!

“Why do you care that mom died? You know what? Maybe you wanted her to!” Emma screamed. Tears stung her eyes. “Go to Murray’s and never come back!” Emma screamed. Emma turned on her heels, crying, and walked home.

Chapter 4

 

It has been a month since Emma and her dad got into a fight. He still hasn’t come back. There were stacks of bills piled high on the kitchen table. Emma was starting to get nervous — she didn’t have any money to pay the bills. There was only almonds left for food, and she hadn’t gone to school for a month.

But Emma had taken care of school; she wrote a note saying they had moved. Emma sighed. This was kind of her fault; she had told her dad to go and never come back. But what parent would leave their kid alone for a month? A bad parent, that’s who! Just then, there was a knock on the door. Confused, Emma rushed to open it.

Emma pulled the door open, standing there before her was a very, very, very tall women in a gray pantsuit. The very, very, very tall women looked down at Emma. The very, very, very tall women had gray eyes that matched her pantsuit. Piled on top of her head there was a bun.

“You must be Emma,” said the very, very, very tall women. “I am Mrs. Eleanor P. Humbert. Where is your father? At Murray’s, I suppose.” Emma stared at Mrs. Eleanor P. Humbert. How did she know all that stuff?

“Yes, he is,” Emma said very, very quietly. Emma looked Mrs. Eleanor P. Humbert in her gray eyes and asked, “How did you know that?”

“It’s my job,” Mrs. Eleanor P. Humbert said like it didn’t matter.

“Mrs. Eleanor P. Humbert, what do you mean it’s your job?” Emma asked very confused.

“Please call me Ellie, Emma,” Mrs. Eleanor P. Humbert said. “I am a spy, Emma, and after a month I have decided to step in and help you.”

“I’m okay, I don’t need help,” Emma said, closing the door. Ellie stuck her foot in the door and kicked it open again.

“You do need help. Your mom is dead and your dad has disappeared. Honestly, you need a world of help,” Ellie said. Emma had to say Ellie had a point.

“How are you going to help me?” Emma asked.

“Join us in spying! Endless possibilities. Time of your life and something you really want to know,” Ellie said in a magical voice. “Plus, if you don’t trust me, then I know someone who you will. She works for me. Charlie, get out of the car!” Out of a black limousine stepped Charlie. Charlie was also wearing a gray pantsuit. On top of her head was a bun.

“Char? Oh my gosh! Sure I’ll join, Ellie!” Emma said excitedly. Ellie clapped her hands together and Charlie brought forth a gray pantsuit.

“Change, and then tie you hair up into a bun on the top of your head,” Ellie said. Emma nodded and changed.

 

Chapter 5

 

Emma climbed into the car. The windows were tinted so Emma couldn’t see the outside.

“Hey Char, this is so cool!” Emma exclaimed. Charlie didn’t answer. “Char?” Emma poked Charlie.

“Would you just be quiet, okay? I wasn’t ever your friend,” Charlie said. Hurt, Emma didn’t talk any more.

“Where are we going?” Emma asked Ellie.

“Be quiet, girl,” Ellie said to Emma, then to Charlie, “gag her, Charlie!” Charlie tied a gag over Emma’s mouth so Emma couldn’t speak. It was also pretty hard to breath. What is happening to me?! Emma thought. Then Charlie tied Emma’s hands behind her back.

The limo pulled into a driveway, Emma was trying to scream but no words came out of her mouth. Emma was afraid to move but she tried anyway and successfully sat up. But then Charlie tied Emma’s feet together and Emma couldn’t move anymore.

Ellie pulled the limo into the driveway and got out. Emma was petrified in fear. Emma’s door opened and Ellie grabbed Emma. Ellie slung Emma over her shoulder. Ellie was surprisingly strong for her age. Ellie turned to yell at Charlie about something and Emma got a glimpse of the building. It was a little white cottage with ivy crawling up the walls. Somehow, this building seemed familiar.

Once inside the building, Ellie threw Emma inside a small room. There was very dim lighting but Emma could make out a figure. She looked kind of like her mom. But that would be impossible; a single tear dropped from Emma’s face at the thought of her mom. Then a very familiar voice said,

“Is that you, Emma?” It was mom! Emma tried to reply but the gag stopped her.

“Ghrlb,” was all Emma could make out.

“Oh no, sweetie! Here, let me try to get your gag off,” Emma’s mom said. Emma’s mom’s hands were also tied behind her back so she had to turn around to get the gag off. Emma’s mom also took off Emma’s hand-and-feet-ties too. Once freed, Emma undid her mom too.

“Emma, you can ask me questions later but right now we need to escape.” Out of Emma’s mom’s jean pocket she revealed a flashlight and switched it on. The room flooded with light, as Emma looked around the room memories poured into Emma’s mind.

Emma was little, two, maybe, bouncing up and down on someone’s lap.Horsie!” Emma shrieked. “Again, again!”

“I’ll give you a boost.” Emma’s mom pointed her flashlight to the window. Emma snapped back to reality.

“Ok,” Emma said. Her mom unlatched the window and pushed it open. The breeze rushed through Emma’s hair. Emma’s mom lifted Emma up and Emma fell through the window. Seconds later her mom came toppling after. Emma stood up and brushed leaves off her. Emma’s mom took her phone out of her pocket. She dialed a number and pressed call.

“Hello? Hi! Could you give us a lift…we are at the cottage…mmmh…thanks!” Emma’s mom put away her phone.

“I never got on the plane,” Emma’s mom whispered. “They took me right before.” Emma smiled. Maybe Ellie did help her, without even knowing it. “We were kidnapped because your father was a spy and they wanted information from us. I will explain everything later.” Just then a black jeep pulled up behind some trees.

“Come on!” Emma’s mom said. She pulled Emma’s arm and they ran into the backseat of the jeep. Inside the jeep a man turned around. He seemed so familiar. He had jet black hair combed perfectly.

“Who is this?” Emma asked her mom.

“This, this is your real father!”

 

The End

Do Calculators Have a Negative or Positive Effect on People’s Brains?

I have seen many kids use calculators who don’t understand what they are doing. They don’t understand the consequence of their actions. The handheld calculator was invented in 1967. Even by 1986 (29 years ago), calculators represented an estimated 41% of the world’s general-purpose hardware capacity to compute information. Calculators have a negative effect on people’s brains. It causes kids to not know basic math facts.

Calculators were invented as a tool for adults to use in their jobs. Adults use calculators to figure out their rent and issues like that. It is used to calculate money so they don’t pay too much or too little money. Calculators are not supposed to be used by kids who just want to get their math homework done quickly. It is better to take time and learn the basic facts. It is important for kids to have a base in math just like a building that needs to grow bigger and bigger, just like how the math is going to get harder and harder when you get older and older. Math is hard enough. Not learning basic math facts would make it even harder. Adults are supposed to use calculators because they have already learned how to do their basic math facts. They also need a calculator for their jobs, unlike kids.

The consequence of calculator use is that kids do not get to learn their basic math facts in calculator use. The USA is under average at math and science. This is because of calculator use. The USA also gives less school hours and days in the year.  The USA has less than 180 days in a school year. People in the Singapore curriculum can use calculators because they know how to do the basic math facts. What is the point of teaching someone how to do math if they forget how to do it later? It is like the story where the guy catches fish for the man, but the man still doesn’t learn how to catch fish. Christina L. Sheets Wallace, in her NE Math in the Middle Institute Partnership Action Research Project Report in partial fulfillment of the MAT Degree Department of Mathematics University of Nebraska-Lincoln July, said that her students between 7th and 12th grades had lowered their grades on tests because of excessive calculator use.

Calculators have a negative effect on kids who don’t know their basic math facts.  It makes math harder than it needs to be. Calculators are mostly for adults to use in their jobs. Next time you see a kid use a calculator to do their homework, stop them.

Daybreak

Daybreak

Sometimes it’s good to start over

when the damage is done

though some won’t allow

say the damage too deep

but even the most evil

should be forgiven

given a second chance

a clean slate

a chance to try again

because someday that

might be you

Flying

Stung

cat got my tongue

not believing

grieving

my eyes are blurred

he whispered three words

I go from crying

to flying

Pool of Tears

I’ll find my pool of tears

where all my dreams come true

all my dreams of dreams

Secret Wish

I have a secret dream

that nobody seems to know

and I don’t want to tell

people guess

world peace

no matter how hard you try

that will never happen

love

that will happen when I’m ready

happiness

enjoy the little things

you’ll be the happiest person on earth

here’s my dream

now can’t you see

the freedom of dream

without disbelief

Growth

Does not mean

going through life till the end

it means living life to its fullest

having fun

making mistakes

but not making the same ones twice

changing

understanding

growth

Peaceful as a lion

I shouldn’t

not worth it

what is he talking about

no

no

nooooooooooooo

he didn’t

crying

sad

angry

unsure

scared

not peaceful

Dawn

Pink

orange

gold

sky

colors mixed

like painting

where the sun

and moon

whisper

Too Deep

Start over

what’s that supposed to mean

put puddles back in the sky,

leaves back on trees.

start over

not gonna happen

some cuts are just too deep

 

Criminal Warehouse

PROLOGUE

I have been here for weeks months days years hours minutes seconds.

Okay I have been here for five minutes. Let me explain.

I live in a huge mansion, and just minutes ago a man (or woman) just locked me, my brother, and my mother in our pantry closet. I woke up this morning and read the newspaper. It said that a criminal group had five failed attempts to take over rich mansions. FAILED. I wasn’t worried. I went to my private school. We were talking about what to do if a criminal came into our house. Little did I know I needed to listen.

I’m really scared. What if my house is a victim of one of these criminal warehouses? I’m nervous. I was trying to smile and keep quiet so my mother and brother would stay calm. That didn’t work. My mom won’t talk, and all my brother can think about is dividing the food in the pantry. In his defense he’s only four and does not know what’s going on. In my defense neither do I.

CHAPTER 1

ONE YEAR LATER

We’ve been living here for a year. We’re running low on food. This pantry is dusty. This pantry smells like old ketchup. The floor is too hard to sleep on. I can hear the mice in the walls. Everything tastes like mold. I am now nine. My brother is five. Mother went missing. I didn’t cry. I knew this was a challenge. I had to take it head on. We just went to bed one night and when we woke up she wasn’t there. I hate living here. I know that my house, MY HOUSE, is now a criminal warehouse. I hear every night commands. Commands such as, “If that girl and brother find out about us we’ll put them to work.” I hate living here. I hope they find us. I’d rather work for criminals than live here one more night.

CHAPTER 2

THEY FOUND US.            

One morning we were eating some ridiculously stale muffins, when the door opened. I knew it wasn’t mother because the figure was wearing a black suit. Mother doesn’t own a black suit. The figure said no words but it’s time for work. My brother and I gulped. On the way into the main area the figure asked our names.

I said, “Livvi and Josh.”

“Kids, we’re putting you to work,” the figure said.

I had only one question on my mind: would we get to see mother? I had only so much to lose so I said, “What did you do with my mother?”

“She works for us now.”

I couldn’t help myself. “Will we get to see her?”

“Yes! Tonight… if you behave.”

“What do we have to do?”

CHAPTER 3

OUR FIRST HEIST

I pass filth, dirt, and well, all the people I’ve ever seen in a newspaper. They growled at me. My brother spoke gibberish. That is all he ever talked since the mold started building up. I am so grateful he is not dead. He is my only friend. He always has been. Ever since dad died three years ago, he has been my best friend. I’ve heard enough to know that we would be working for these criminals. I figured that since my life already sucks so much, I have nothing to lose, so I start asking every question I have.

“What is our first mission?”

“You are going to distract the people working at the bank.”

“How?”

“Pretend you are missing your mother.”

“I am missing my mother,” I said quietly to myself.

CHAPTER 4

IN THE BANK

We entered the bank using the front entrance. All of the criminals went through the back entrance. I feared they would kill us if we didn’t complete the mission. I was trying to keep calm, but I was shaking. I had to complete this mission.

If I die, the criminals will keep my brother just to torture me. I couldn’t let that happen. We went up to the bank teller.

“We have lost our mother, sir.’’

We talked for about ten minutes.

A women popped into the room.

“Is that your mother?” said the bank teller.

“Yes,” we said.

And sure enough it was.

My mother and I hugged in the backseat of the van while the other criminals talked about how much money they took. I wanted to learn about the criminals before Mom, Josh, and I escaped.

CHAPTER 5

RONNIE

The first criminal I wanted to learn about was Ronnie. I cornered him in the hall. He said, “Leave me alone, or I’ll take the upstairs room away from you,” he said like he didn’t want to be bothered. I stood there pretending I didn’t notice how grouchy he was.

“I WAS ACTUALLY WONDERING HOW YOU GOT HERE.”

“Well girl…”

“Mmmmmmmmmmmm.”

“What?”

“Mmmmmmmmmmmm,”

“WHAT?”
“My ma left me when I was young. She was bad, now I’m bad, okay?

“What if you gave your mother a second shot.’’

“I’ll give her a shot. I’ll give her a shot to the head.”

“Just give her a chance, mothers don’t just leave their children.”

His face was full of confusion. He started crying. The toughest criminal here. CRYING.

CHAPTER 6

LULU

The next morning I told my mom what happened when I talked to Ronnie. She just kept talking about getting out of the warehouse.

“There are only four criminals who live here regularly. We just have to take them out.”

I could not stand it. I went downstairs to get oatmeal. That’s breakfast, dinner, and lunch here.

I noticed Ronnie wasn’t there.

“Lulu, where’s Ronnie?”

“Went soft, kid.”

“Said somethin’ ‘bout goin to find his ma.”

An idea came into my head: What if I made all the criminals soft? Then we could get out of here.

“Lulu, why are you here?” I asked.

“I was a bank teller. Everybody who worked with me was trying to get money. I wanted money. I had a son. We were not poor. I’m just very competitive. I was the youngest of eight children. I had seven older brothers. I wanted to be a leader.” Lulu looked away from me, as if what she had to say next embarrassed her. “I wanted to be a leader so much that I killed my husband and robbed the bank. I put my son up for adoption. I didn’t love him.” Lulu looked back at me, an expression of horror on her face. “Wow. I’m terrible. I didn’t realize what a terrible person I was before this. I want to be a leader not a follower. I think I’ll do what Ronnie did. I’ll make my life better. I’m so sorry. I’ll tell the others to get out.”

CHAPTER 7

13 YEARS LATER

It is my wedding day. It has been 13 years since the criminals left the warehouse. Guess who is at my wedding. Lulu. I paid her bail. I am rich you know. She even got to adopt her son, Michael. That is who I am marrying. We have a lot in common. I do love him. My brother is now giving a toast. We got him treatment so that he doesn’t speak gibberish anymore.

I barely even think about what happened. I just think about my new life.

My new criminal life. I’m following in Lulu’s footsteps. JUST KIDDING. 

 

Clutterfunk

 

Jimmy

Mom knocks on my bedroom door. I freeze. My hands are hovering above the keyboard. I look over at my bedroom door. It slowly starts to open. I could see my mom’s face. She was glaring at me with her firm, dark blue eyes. She didn’t seem too excited to see what I was up to — computer coding.

Mom rolls her eyes. “Can you do anything else?”

“I’m just finishing up.”

“Okay, because I want you to do some other stuff too.”

I nod vigorously.

“Finish up in about ten minutes. Then do something like basketball.”

I nod again.

I’m a little bit disappointed. I just started coding ten minutes ago, and now I have to turn it off. But anyway, I wasn’t working on anything.

But still, how come she doesn’t appreciate coding? I wondered. Maybe it might be too much screen time that she doesn’t like. She put me in a melancholy mood. Maybe if I do something great with coding, will make her think it is worth my time.

I open a new window and think about something that will change mom’s perspective on coding. I think for a long while.

After about three minutes, the idea comes to me! A contest, on coding! Maybe if I got a prize, I would impress mom enough that she would recognize my talents! I search Contests within New York. Baking contest, drawing contest, costume contest. Wow, I didn’t know that contests were so abundant in New York.

I scroll to the bottom of the list before I finally find what I want:

Coding contest 7/15/15

145 Drake Hill Dr.

Make a fun, addictive game to get on the featured list on scratch! Entries due by 7/11/15

If I get on the featured list, mom will realize my talent! I think. I could almost see my game on the featured list and mom seeing that coding was the talent God gave me.

About a year and a half ago, my computer teacher, Ms. Wilson, started an end-of-year session on coding. I thought everything was amazing: the fact that code went in cars, computers, and phones. So I tried it out, and it was really fun. When you did something right, you would see it all work smoothly and gracefully on a screen. It was so fun that I decided to practice it at home. Dad was just as fascinated by coding as I was. But mom frowned; she wasn’t fascinated. She was almost upset that coding seemed to be the talent I was born with, but I never knew why. Perhaps, she thought it wasn’t healthy, but she decided that I could continue with it anyway.

But now, I have to prove to mom that coding is a great talent and is a great learning experience too. Because mom will never let me enter a contest about something related to computers, I have to enter secretly.
Then I realize something. My best friend Dan might want to enter the contest too. He also loves coding. I give him a quick call. “Hey Dan.”

“What’s up?”

“I found a contest on coding, and–”

“I think I might have entered the contest already. Which one is it?”

“The one on Drake Hill.”

“Well then, I did enter that contest. I finished my entry.”

“Oh, okay then, see you there.”

I have to hurry and start my entry, because I found this contest a couple days late.

[]

After two days, I’m almost done with my entry, a game called Clutterfunk.

Kyle, my brother, is coming in to my room to watch me code. But this time I don’t want him around. He has to wait until I have finished CLUTTERFUNK completely before he can see it.

“Shoo Kyle, I don’t want you in here,” I try to say nicely.

“Why not?” Kyle asks in reply.

I grumble, then mutter, “‘cause I don’t.”

Kyle whispers something under his breath, so I can’t hear him.

Kyle runs off and tells mom, and then mom comes up to my room to tell me that Kyle can watch me. So I argue, “But mom, I can’t focus on my work with someone breathing on my shoulder.”

“But Kyle says that you were being mean to him and that he just wants to see your game.”

“I want Kyle to see it when it’s finished!” I yell.

Mom crossed her arms. “Jimmy! Do not talk back to me like that!”

“This is my computer.  I bought it myself, so I get to choose who sees it!”

“Jimmy, your father paid for that laptop, not you,” mom says angrily. Kyle whispers something in mom’s ear. Now mom looks mistaken. (Kyle must’ve told mom that I actually did pay for the laptop.)

“Mom, please just leave me alone so that I can finish my game for the contest,” I say.

“What contest?” Mom says.

“I entered a contest… with Dan, and it’s in a three days. And it’s for coding,” I stammer.

“You can not enter any contests without asking ME first!!” Mom’s cheeks are flaring and her face is turning red. Her fists are clenched tightly and firmly. “This is a warning Jimmy, if I catch you entering any type of contest again, no coding for a month.”

You’re gonna have to be more strict than that. I have a lock on my door and I only code once a week.

“So I can enter my game into the contest?” I ask. If I can’t enter this contest, nobody will recognize me. I will pass up my chance to get onto the FEATURED LIST–the place where people have their projects on the homepage so that everyone will see them. And also the chance to get mom’s approval of coding.

“No you are not in the contest anymore, Jimmy,” mom replies in a quiet, yet still strong kind of voice. Mom, the contest is my big opportunity, I say to myself as she and Kyle leave the room.

[]

I finally get a chance to work on my entry. I add some ghost and pixelate effects to my title screen and add my logo to the bottom right corner.

Now for the music, I’m using the song Clutterfunk for my game (hence the name of the game). But one catch is, I deleted my Java connection to a website that makes recording easy, so I have to record it from youtube and on speaker, which picks up noises for miles around.

I bring up Clutterfunk from Youtube and record it. Luckily, everything around the speaker’s pickup range is absolutely silent. And so I think that the recording is gonna be amazing. The song Clutterfunk is four minutes and fourteen seconds long.

I am three-and-a-half minutes through the song when Kyle opens my unbearable, creaky door and ruins the whole recording! I stop the recording and look at Kyle. I give him my best icy stare.

“What are you doing in here?!” I grumble with annoyance. “You ruined my perfect recording! I also told you that I didn’t want you in here! Don’t you have any respect for people’s privacy?!”

Kyle’s shoulders are drooping, and he starts to frown. “I…I just want to see the game,” Kyle whimpers. I do think that I overreacted a little, after all, he didn’t know I was recording music. So I decide to make it up to him.

“You know what Kyle? Come back in about 10 minutes, and the game’ll be done.”

Kyle perks up. Now he isn’t upset, which is good. He practically jumps out of the room.

[]

 

In the next 10 minutes, I work silently and efficiently and complete my game in a matter of minutes. It takes another few minutes to write the instructions and the credits.

“YES!!” I cry out. “YES!!” It’s done! I can’t believe it! It has highscores and smooth text fonts and everything! “Kyle! You can see my game now!”

There’s fast thumping and then the doorknob twists and Kyle flies in at the speed of light. He loves seeing my finished games, and he seems to be extra excited with this one.

He plays it about fifty times before stopping, and he gets a high score of 67. He is way better at the game than I am. My high score is a measly 16. Maybe it’s the control flip that screws me up. I don’t feel like telling mom though, because she thinks coding is a waste of time. And she also might find out that I was still entering the contest. When dad gets home from work, I’m going to show him Clutterfunk. But in three days I’m going to face a bigger problem: getting to the contest location. Considering that mom is not on board with the contest idea and dad is at work, which isn’t good because he likes coding just as much as I do.

 

=================================================================================

 

Vicky

 

In the next town, in a huge mansion, another contestant had finished their ‘not so great’ game.

“I finished my game! I’m gonna crush everyone in this contest easily!” Vicky yells gleefully.

“Don’t get so worked up Vicky, I’m sure other people have great games too,” Mom replies.

“No one will match the expertise in my game! I have been on the featured list twice!”

“That’s because you helped make scratch and you are the one who goes around featuring things,” Mom counters, rolling her eyes.

Vicky gets too worked up over coding contests, and she thinks that because she’s been on the featured list twice means that she is amazing at coding. When in reality she doesn’t know how to use pen (which everyone on scratch knows how to use by the way).

“But I helped make scratch, the most complex coding of all!”  Vicky says proudly.

Her older brother gets in on it. “You only tried to boss people around in COSTUME DESIGNING and you didn’t succeed. You also didn’t do any coding, because you’re horrible at it.”

Vicky sulks and turns to face her brother. “Very encouraging, also you’re bad at coding.”

This is stupid to say because her older brother is amazing at coding and has 204 followers and has been featured 5 times by some other scratch worker. He also knows how to use pen. Vicky has 1 follower– herself– she doesn’t know how to use pen, and she hacks, but with the help of her friends who know how to code.

 

=================================================================================

 

Jimmy

 

A week later, on the day of the contest, I ‘m starting up my plan.

I’m using the oldest trick in the book, saying that I will be sleeping over at Dan’s house and that I will be bringing my laptop so that I can code with Dan and then I will run off to the contest location.

I grab my laptop and run downstairs.

“Why did you bring your laptop down from your room?” Mom asks suspiciously.

Here it goes: “Can I sleep over at Dan’s tonight?” I ask.

“You still haven’t answered my question, why did you bring your laptop downstairs?” mom asks again.

“I’m gonna code with Dan at his house,” I answer. This is the big moment. I hope mom will say yes. The fate of her respect depends on it.

“Fine,” mom replies, waving her hand in a shooing motion. “Go get your sleeping bag and walk down.” Yes, I say in my head.

I go upstairs to get my sleeping bag. I dart down the hall. Open up my creaky bedroom door and run in. I always keep my sleeping bag underneath my bed. I reach under my bed and grope around for my sleeping bag. After a couple seconds of hitting carpet instead of cushions, I finally grasp the strap of the compact bag and squeeze it out from under my bed. I sling the sleeping bag over my shoulder and walk back down the stairs.

I do sort of feel guilty about lying to mom about the sleepover, but I’m twelve and I am not afraid to make my own choices. But I’m making it even: she hates the fact that I code, so I go to a contest that means a lot to me. Kyle sees me with the laptop and sleeping bag.

“What are you doing?” he asks curiously.

“A contest.”

“Didn’t mom–”

“Shh!”

“But–”

“Don’t even think about telling mom.”

Kyle pretended to zip his lips together, “Alright, I won’t tell mom, but next time–”

“Okay, okay, I won’t do again. But there is a reason that I’m doing this.”

I don’t want to lie to everyone, so I let Kyle in but make him promise that he won’t tell mom.

I pass through the kitchen and out the door. “Bye mom!”

“Bye honey! Have fun!” but mom eyes me suspiciously right after she says it.

 

=================================================================================

Vicky

 

Vicky is riding in her limo to the contest, when the driver pulls up at the final destination, a Victorian-style house. It has a double oak front door with a brass lion head for a knocker and a golden keyhole and doorknob. The house in general is tan, with many bay windows and lots of windows with no sills.

“I thought it would look nicer, it’s not even a good house,” Vicky scoffs. Compared to Vicky’s mansion, it was a shack.

Vicky hops out of the limo without giving the driver any sense of gratitude. Vicky doesn’t even look at him. She just walks off with pride and up the cobblestone pathway. I’m gonna win this thing, Vicky thinks confidently. She stomps up the cobblestone steps and swings open the oak double doors without knocking first.

There are many kids in the room, from nine-year-olds to 16-year-olds. Vicky shouts at the top of her lungs, “MAKE WAY LOSERS!! THE WINNER VICKY IS COMING THROUGH!!”

Everyone stops to look at Vicky. Some people laugh, and everyone blocks that obnoxious kid’s way. One kid even says, “HEY!! YOU’RE THE HACKER, THE… THE… GIRL WHO DELETES PEOPLE’S PROJECTS FROM SCRATCH, YOU HAVE FUN RUINING OTHER PEOPLE’S HARD WORK AND EFFORT!!! I’M TELLING THE JUDGES THIS!!!”

Vicky’s face turns pale. That kid somehow knows that she deletes projects by hacking with her friends to get an edge in competition! That’s impossible! How does he know that? Vicky thinks. She now knows that everyone else has an ADVANTAGE on her.

“YOU GUYS ARE ALL LOSERS!!!” Vicky yells again.

 

=================================================================================

 

Jimmy

 

Everything is working smoothly! I escaped from the house and now I’m walking to the contest! I drop my sleeping bag in the front of my house against the wall so that I won’t have to carry it. And then I dash off before mom can see me without my sleeping bag. I walk for a little while after I and sure mom can’t see me through the neighbor’s finely trimmed hedges.

After a while, I arrive at the contest. Dan is waiting for me at the front double doors of the awesome Victorian-style home. It’s like a McMansion! He waves me over. So I run to him.

He cups his hands over his mouth while he whispers, “I got rid of a threat.”

“Huh?” I say in confusion.

“When an obnoxious hacker walked in and yelled that her name was Vicky, it took me a second to realize that she was Vicky12. The deleter of projects that are amazing. She has hacked and deleted 15 of my 67 games on scratch. I’ve also had to remake my entry because she writes discouraging comments on my not-shared project, which is not possible, then she says that she will delete it, and next thing you know, 127 lines of code are gone forever.”

“So that’s why I couldn’t find my platformer.”

“Yep.”

“Whoa.”

“I told the judges this and they said that it would affect how they rate her game. Now Vicky’s not so sure of herself.”

I grin, so does Dan. He has very good memory, and with that move he saved all the contestants! Vicky probably would have deleted everyone’s entries before the contest even starts! Dan and I go inside the house.

There are only twelve kids. One after another every kid is called in individually. And after five contestants go up, it’s Dan’s turn.

=================================================================================

Dan

 

Dan walks into the judges’ room carrying his white iMac. There are three judges: a man around fifty years old, another man around forty years old, and a woman around thirty-five years old. “Welcome, contestant No. 6. How are you doing?” says the woman.

“Fine, how are you?” Dan replies politely. He is getting all jittery inside and is extremely excited.

“We are all very excited to see your entry,” the woman says again. She smiles.

Dan set his iMac on the judges’ table. He opens up his scratch account– ScratchLikeDan. “This is my game, Qix 2. It is a game that is a re-creation of the old arcade game Qix. You are a small red diamond that runs along a grid making squares and rectangles to enclose that cube so that it bounces an average every other second. Arrow keys to move and draw. When you press and hold the f key, you move faster when drawing. When you press and hold the s key you draw slowly, but is worth more points. It the cube touches the line you are drawing that is not finished, you die. Anyone wanna try?”

The fifty year old man tries first. He beats level three and loses on level four. He gives the game four stars. The forty-year-old man goes next. He beats level one but dies on level two. He gives it four and a half stars. The woman beats the whole game and rates it five stars.

Dan pumps his fist in the air and closes his laptop. “Thank you!” Dan says as he walks out of the room. He hears on the loudspeaker:

Will contestant number SEVEN please come show his or her game?

=================================================================================

Vicky

 

Vicky walks up the stairs to the judges’ room. She runs into Dan. “Hey! Watch it loser!” She yells.

Dan smirks. She notices with horror that he is ScratchLikeDan, the kid who yelled about the hacking, and also her favorite target for deleting projects. “Hey, Vicky12, good luck getting more than a 2-star rating in there,” Dan sneers. She hates him. She only recognizes him from his profile picture.

“Did you figure out how to design Minecraft? Or did you REMIX a really good game and hack to erase the remix label?” Dan scoffs. He also sounds like the kid who yelled about the hacking. Vicky now completely loathes him. He is insulting how good she is at coding! Did he not know that she helped code scratch?!

Vicky can’t take his insults anymore. She clenches her fists and grits her teeth, and…

=================================================================================

Jimmy

 

I saw the whole thing unfold, Vicky12 calling Dan a loser, Dan insulting Vicky12. Vicky12 getting angry, and then Vicky12 punching Dan in the gut and screaming. Dan only laughed though, he’s had two concussions from playing football and has been punched harder than that many times. But I still yelled at Vicky12, “Hey!! What the heck are you doing?! Go tell your mother that you have behavior issues!”

Another kid supposedly called Marcus ran up to tell the judges. Vicky12 got disqualified for cheating and assaulting another contestant. She also earned a judge to call her mom. The judge even mentioned something about BEHAVIORAL ISSUES! (I know that because I’m a champion eavesdropper.)

After the remaining contestants (and I) went, these people won these prizes:

 

Third prize: Monica Jones and her game: Amusement Park

 

Second Prize: Logan Brandenburg and his game: Chillstep

 

First Prize: Jimmy Brendon and his game: Clutterfunk

 

Grand Prize: Daniel Ronan-John and his game: Qix 2

 

[]

I walk to Dan’s house with Dan. I have a big smile on my face, Dan has a bigger smile on his face. “I can’t believe that I got grand prize in the contest. I guess the judges really liked my game.”

“Yeah,” I reply. I admit that his game was better than mine, but I’m happy that I’m getting featured tomorrow.

“But hey! I’m on the featured list right now! And you’ll be on the featured list tomorrow!” Daniel says excitedly. I slap my hand onto his back. He laughs, I grin. We’ve both had a really exciting day, and it all ends with a celebration sleepover at his house. Dan starts to run. He’s too excited to see his game on the featured list that he runs at the speed of his sprint as a running back in football.

When we get to his house, we rush up the stairs and into Dan’s bedroom. He sets his laptop on his desk and opens it up. Then he opens up scratch, and there it is:

Qix 2

By: ScratchLikeDan

 

Dan nearly breaks into tears of joy as he writes in the credits:  

FEATURED 5/7/15!!!!

MY FACE WHEN THIS GOT FEATURED o_o

(DO NOT WORRY THIS IS A NORMAL REACTION TO BEING FEATURED)

[]

The next day in the morning, I take out my laptop with Dan and open up scratch. My game pops up on the featured list just as we open up scratch. I currently only have 17 favorites and 26 loves. But I start to get comment after comment, and love after love, and…
I keep trying to answer everyone’s comments, but it is impossible. There is a new one every second. My hands are flying across the keys like mad. Everyone is saying Amazing game! and My highscore is only 15, but still, great game! Maybe I will tell mom that I got featured. Maybe that’ll get her to understand that I’m good at coding and that I love it and that I should continue with it. Maybe…

[]

 

When I finally leave Dan’s house, I take in the fresh air and look around. The sky is a brilliant blue, with occasional puffy, white, cumulus clouds. Trees are swaying lightly to the quiet, gentle breeze. There is also the distant humming of cicadas and a landscaper blowing leaves.

When I arrive at my house. Mom is setting up the dishwasher and Kyle is watching TV in the family room. I walk right into the family room where Kyle is sitting on the couch watching his cartoons.

He looks at me. “How was the contest?” he asks quietly, as if to be sure mom can’t hear.

I smile, “Great.” I hand him the prize winner sheet.

He glimpses it. He notices that Dan won grand prize, and not me. “You didn’t win, huh.”

“No, I didn’t. But at least Dan did.”

Just then mom walks into the room. She sees that Kyle’s holding a piece of paper. Mom says, “What’s that?” She eyes both of us suspiciously and sees the words:

First prize: Jimmy Brendon and his game Clutterfunk

=================================================================================

Kyle

 

“Nothing,” Kyle says. Jimmy’s eyes are wide with worry.

“Then why, may I ask, does it say JIMMY BRENDON AND HIS GAME CLUTTERFUNK?!!” Mom yells, “Jimmy! You are banned from coding for a month! Kyle! You attempted to lie to cover your LYING brother so that he wouldn’t get in trouble! Well you just made the situation worse! You’re not allowed to watch TV for a MONTH!!!!”

Personally, Kyle thinks mom is wrong. She shouldn’t be disappointed that Jimmy’s hobby is coding. She shouldn’t be trying to force me and Jimmy to do ballet, she should be letting us choose what we want to do, whether it’s coding or astronomy (which is what Kyle is into, but mom isn’t much happier about that choice). So I am going to protest by bringing my iPad to my room, shutting and locking the door, and watching my astronomy shows there. And I think that Jimmy’s gonna do the same.

=================================================================================

Jimmy

 

As ifm, Mom, I thought, Kyle and I have locks on our doors and we’re both gonna do what we love, coding and astronomy. So you can punish us all you want but you won’t stop either of us. So Kyle and I both grab our iPad and laptop and dart up to our rooms. I code and Kyle should be watching his educational astronomy shows from his iPad.

A little while later, mom is pounding on my bedroom door. I hear her yelling, “YOU BETTER NOT BE CODING!! I’LL TAKE THAT LAPTOP FROM YOU!!!”

I yell back, “IT’S MY LAPTOP AND I BOUGHT IT SO YOU CAN’T DO ANYTHING WITH IT!!!” That makes her lose momentum.

“OK FINE! BUT I WANT TO TALK TO YOU ABOUT CODING!!”

I say in a normal tone, “Alright.” I unlock the door and let her in.
She doesn’t look that angry anymore, and she sits on the bed with me.

“Now, Jimmy.”

“Yeah?”

“I might have been a little too angry for the situation, but I’m still angry that you entered that contest without my permission, because the truth is, I would’ve let you do it if you’d asked me first.”

Oh that would’ve been easier, I think.

“I’m happy that you found the thing that you love to do– coding.”

I nod slowly. “But why do you seem… well… so unsupportive of it?”

Mom looks down at the floor. I could tell that there was a more serious reason then staying active, “It’s just that… your dad understands it, and so do you. Even Kyle sort of understands it.”

I nod again. She continues, “I don’t understand it. It’s all so confusing to my eyes. So seeing all you guys enjoying it, it would mean a lot to me if I could join in, do something with you guys. That’s why I don’t look like I support you. But I do.”

“I could always teach you the basics, so that you can get a simple understanding of it.”

Mom smiled, and gave a small laugh. She put my hand on my shoulder, “You could do that for me?”

“Yeah,” I grinned. So did she.

She got up and said, “I’m very proud of you Jimmy.”

“You still can’t code for a month,” mom continues, “but after that if you ask permission I’ll let you in on those contests.”

Yeah!

She smiled, nodded, and then left my room.

Wow, I’ve misperceived a lot of things about mom. I thought she didn’t like that I coded, based on how she acted when I coded.

 

[]

In the end, today and yesterday were pretty interesting days. Probably the most exciting days I’ve ever had in my life. I mean, mom all along did appreciate my coding, and Vicky12 is now in trouble with her parents and with scratch. And Dan and I got on the featured list on scratch and each have 20000 views!!!! I also found out the truth about mom, and I started to teach her the basics of coding every other day.

 

THE END

Callie and the Valentine’s Day Catastrophe

 

    Callie walked back from the school bus, feeling sick of all the pink, red, and violet flowers that were unfortunately all over the place. Cupid decorations could also be found here and there. Today was Valentine’s Day, and eleven year old Callie was not very happy about this. Her school, however, celebrated Valentine’s Day, and appreciated its many colorful qualities, unlike Callie. When she finally got home, she walked into the kitchen, washed her hands, and prepared to make herself a delicious after school snack. As she was making a peanut butter and jelly sandwich, Callie saw her baby brother, Tyler, sitting in his little crib next to the couch. Looking at how adorable Tyler was, her mood was raised immediately, even if it was just a little bit. She smiled to herself then got back to work.

    Callie groaned as she heard the girly squeals of her sister as the front door slammed shut. Reyna walked into the kitchen gushing happily about prom night, and showing off the chic, expensive dress that Mom and Dad got for her. Callie gave her sister a sheepish smile, and was about to walk away with her two pieces of peanut-butter jelly covered toast until SPLAT! Reyna shrieked and Callie gasped as they both discovered what Callie-the-butterfingers dropped her toast on this time. The dress! The perfect, amazing, gorgeous dress was now covered in peanut butter and jelly. Oh great, Callie thought, this is just the thing I needed to add to this perfect, perfect day. Reyna was probably about to slaughter her.

     Callie ran up to her room, and angrily sat on the covers of her bed. She then noticed  something written onto a sticky note on her desk. It was from her mom, and it said: Happy Valentine’s Day, sweetie! Don’t forget to finish your homework before dinner! Love, Mom. She buried her face into her pillow and replayed the entire day in her mind. Now that Callie thought about it, today was a great, unbelievably amazing day for everyone. Except for her. She thought, I wish I could go back in time and start this entire day over. Then none of this would’ve happened. She closed her eyes, crossed her fingers and wished hard. Then she lay down, and minutes later, fell asleep.

      The moment Callie woke up, she knew something was wrong. The Valentine’s Day decorations from the previous day were still hanging. That was unusual. Since Callie  hated Valentine’s Day, her parents had a “decorations are not to be hung before or after the day itself” rule. She checked the calendar. It was once again, Valentine’s Day. Callie’s wish had come true! What she didn’t know, but would soon find out, is that time travel has consequences. Her parents had mentioned something about being able to time travel once, but she didn’t actually dare try it. But now, it seemed like she accidentally had. Suddenly, Callie froze. She slowly looked up. She didn’t know how, or why, but Callie was face-to-face with a prehistoric grizzly bear. She screamed as it opened its mouth, and that’s all she could remember before the room went dark.

Two Months Later:

    Callie opened her eyes, and for the the first time in a while, she saw light. A bunch of men with hunting weapons were gathered around her as she crawled out of space she was in. When she asked them what happened, they told her she’d been in a bear’s stomach for approximately two months and a half. So unless she’d miscalculated, it should be April 29th. Callie thanked the hunters for killing the bear, and quickly dashed out of the forest she’d ended up in, and back into her neighborhood. What made Callie jump about five yards into the air was the screams she heard when people saw her casually walking down the sidewalk.

   She went up to her house and walked in silently, making sure she didn’t slam the door behind her. As she went into the living room, she saw her mother crying, and Reyna and her dad attempting to comfort her. When they looked up and saw Callie, they all rushed up to her and hugged her. They told her how her status was “missing” for the past couple months, and everyone thought she was dead. A lot of people wanted to have a funeral for her, but her parents refused and didn’t lose hope, though they were on the verge of doing so. After they cooled down a little bit, Reyna awkwardly strolled over to her sister, and said probably the closest thing to nice that someone like Reyna could manage. Reyna told Callie that she was glad Callie wasn’t dead. And Callie, for once in her life agreed with her sister.

     A month passed, and prom was right around the corner. Reyna had purchased an even more expensive dress after Callie ruined her old one. She liked this one even more than the previous one, and wouldn’t stop talking about “the most important night of her life”, much to Callie’s “delight”. Plus, flashbacks from when she was in the bear’s stomach were haunting her. Everyone kept telling her how lucky she was to be alive, and they were transfixed when she told the tale of how she had to eat raw meat and drink the juice of the contents in the bear’s stomach. Although it disgusted her, it fascinated others. So anyway, with prom and her sister’s excitement, she decided that this just had to be the best month of her life.

One Week Later:

     Callie had been feeling a little moody lately because of the tightness of the many new rules that were added to their household after her return. Her mom insisted on tucking her in every night, and her dad changed the curfew to an hour earlier than usual. They were both suddenly extremely strict, and saying Callie didn’t like it was an understatement. The one thing she did enjoy about this situation was Reyna’s behavior towards Callie, and that was because it was good behavior. For the first time since probably when Callie was born, Reyna had actually started treating Callie in a sisterly way. Instead of giving each other nasty snarls back and forth, they exchanged cheerful glances, and occasionally smiles. The one thing Callie did not at all appreciate about this newfound friendship was how Reyna always insisted on giving Callie a makeover. Now, this kind of thing was not optional, because Reyna (who played soccer every day after school) always said Callie can either do her laundry for a month, or receive a makeover. For some reason, Callie never chose the laundry option. Neither of them knew how, but they had become great friends, and they both liked it.

  Anyway, it was finally prom night. Their mom took Reyna’s picture with her date, and then just like that they were out the door. Callie smiled to herself, then headed back upstairs. She paused and turned around. She shivered because of the sudden coldness, and called out to see if anyone was there. When she looked around and didn’t see anyone, she walked up the stairs with suspicion, and a little bit of fright. She didn’t hear the wind blowing behind her, or the sudden amount of darkness at the bottom of the stairway. The lights turned off and a dark whirlwind entered her room, taking a few of her belongings with it. She didn’t have time to scream before it swallowed her up too.

   As Callie opened her eyes, she attempted to look around her to see where she was. However, she couldn’t. It was dark. Very, very, very, dark. She was scared. She’d simply had enough. She yelled and screamed and shouted, but no one heard. Even Callie herself couldn’t hear anything. That’s when she remembered. Back when she was at school, they’d learned about it in Science. Callie finally realized where she was. The thought frightened her, but it was the truth. Callie had fallen into a black hole.

    Callie was straight up annoyed. She’d been in the black hole for such a long time, she thought at least a whole day had gone by. Then, she was struck by a thought. What if she could somehow climb out of the black hole. Objects were always whizzing in and out, so why couldn’t she? She looked around for any objects she could use to give herself a boost. She saw a table, a really tall lamp, and four chairs stacked on top of each other. She grinned, stacked them all on top of each other and with a lot of effort, she was finally able to climb out.

     For the second time in the last two months, Callie opened her eyes after seeing dark for a long time, and saw light. She heard Reyna telling their parents that she’s finally awake. The three came into Callie’s room, surrounding her. Her mom then played the “explain yourself, young lady” card. Callie told the story starting from the peanut butter, to the bear, all the way over to the black hole. Reyna joked that the universe was probably after her for messing up the strings of time. Callie laughed. That’s when she finally learned her lesson: no matter how awful, your day is, you’ll survive it, and if you’re lucky, you’ll survive it without time travel.

Bucks, Bucky, Bucksy

Bucky and I are now best friends. But then something happened…

Me and Bucky were in the park, swinging on the tire swing. Then someone started to come up to us.

“Who do you think that is?” I ask Bucky.

“I don’t know, and I don’t care as long as she doesn’t bother us,” Bucky says.

The girl continues walking towards us. She comes so close me and Bucky have to stop the swing. She has long wavy brown hair. Her eyes are blue, so blue I could have told from a distance. I wonder who she is. Did she just move here? This question runs through my mind, until she says something.

“Hello. Can I join you?” She asks us. I wonder what to say. I decide to let Bucky answer. She’ll know what to say.

“Um, sure,” Bucky says, hesitant for a moment. I wonder why Bucky was hesitant. She usually is never hesitant.

“What’s your name?” I ask her, as she sits down next to us in the three person tire swing.

“My name is Bucksy,” the girl who I now know as Bucksy says.

“What are your names?” Bucksy asks us.

“I’m Bucks,” I say.

“I’m Bucky,” Bucky says.

“Hey that’s funny, our names all start with B. Our names are very similar,” Bucksy says, sounding slightly surprised.

“Cool,” I say.

“That’s interesting,” Bucky says.

We start swinging after Bucksy sits down.

Later, we leave the park. It hadn’t been fun. Bucksy and Bucky were doing everything together, and I was just there.

Later Bucksy leaves. Me and Bucky start having fun again.

Later we leave the park.

The next day we go back to the park. This time, Bucky sees Bucksy and goes to do things with her. I go and join in, but they don’t seem to notice me. This has never happened before. But, then Bucksy says something interesting.

“I recently moved here. I’m going back in a month” Bucksy tells Bucky. I’m happy about

this, but seeing Bucky’s expression, I know she’s not.

Later, Bucksy leaves the park. Bucky brings up the topic.

“Isn’t it sad Bucksy is leaving?” Bucky asks me.

“Yes,” I lie.

“Didn’t you have so much fun with her?” Bucky asks me.

“I don’t know. She didn’t really do anything with me,” I say.

“Oh, I didn’t realize,” Bucky says.

“I don’t care,” I say.

“I thought you wouldn’t,” Bucky says. Later we leave.

That night I find out some terrible news. I’m moving. I dread going to the park tomorrow. Bucksy is Bucky’s friend and she’s moving. I’m Bucky’s friend and I’m moving. We’re Bucky’s only friends. I feel terrible for Bucky.

Tomorrow has to come. But, I dread it. I feel terrible for Bucky. It is horrible. Bucky will be so sad.

“Bucky, I have something to tell you. I’m moving,” I said to Bucky.

“Oh no! That’s terrible news,” Bucky says.

Then Bucksy came into the park. She came running.

“Bucky, Bucky! Great news! I’m not moving. We can stay, and be friends,” Bucksy says. This makes me feel terrible. Her staying and me leaving.

I leave the park early.

I go back the next day. I spin around on the tire swing until Bucky comes.

“I don’t like Bucksy as much as I like you. I would rather her leave then you,” Bucky says.

“I’m going to miss you,” I say.

“Me too,” She says.

I go home from the park early again.

I go to the park late, the next morning.

Bucky comes up to me and asks me a question.

“Where are you moving to?” Bucky asks me. I tell her where I’m moving to, and I get a shock.

“My family told me we’re moving. I thought I’d see if we’re moving to the same place. And we are,” Bucky tells me. I’m really happy. But, then I think about Bucksy.

“What about Bucksy?” I ask Bucky.

“I know, I was thinking about what to tell her,” Bucky says. Just as Bucky finishes saying that, Bucksy comes into the park.

“I’ll tell her,” I say.

“Bucksy, Bucky is moving,” I tell Bucksy.

“Oh, that’s good for you,” Bucksy says.

“I’ll try and talk to you some how,” Bucky says.

“Cool!” Bucksy says excited.

We all become friends, but me and Bucksy are still not best friends.

Botched Quiche

“So Virginia, what do you think you want to be when you leave this university?” said Ms.Carter, the guidance counselor. Hi, my name is Virginia Lois and I am 24 and I love to cook.

“I want to work at The Universal Studios as a chef.”

“Okay, I know some people, I can give you their phone numbers so you can be in touch to have an interview there,” said Ms. Carter.

“Great.”

I woke up this morning and I am very nervous and I had to get some new business suits for my interview. Since my university is about an hour from Universal Studios, I had to get up very early.

“Hello Mr. Clark, my name is Virginia Lois, I am 24 years old and I was wondering if I could work at Universal Studios as a chef!”

“Well I am happy to interview you today. I will also need you to prepare a dish for the head of the food department.” So we had the interview and he seemed very impressed with my knowledge of cooking. Next I met the head chef and he asked me some questions about what I am going to cook. He then showed me everything in the kitchen and he said I could start preparing my dish.

So I started to make a quiche, so I got my eggs and my pie crust and was going to add some tomatoes, lettuce and some butter. I put everything inside and added my eggs and then crumbled some goat cheese on top. Then I put it in the oven to bake. I was going to make a quick garlic sauce. I peeled the garlic and mashed it together, I added a little salt, pepper and some water, mixed it up and tasted it, and it tasted like it needed some more salt so I poured more salt in the sauce. I wasn’t really paying attention and all of the salt went in the sauce. My first mistake. I realized as they were watching that I needed to finish quickly.

So I just doubled the recipe and and tasted it, it was okay and it wasn’t great. It was too salty, I was thinking of scrapping it, but the head chef was looking at me and it seemed like he really wanted to taste it. So I just kept it there and took out my quiche. I cut it into some slices and put the sauce on the side of each plate. I gave a piece of quiche and sauce to the head chef, the head of the food department and Mr. Clark, the manager of Universal Studios.

I am really confident about about this dish and I think they are going to love it. Everyone looked really impressed and started smelling the dish because it smelled really good, and I was hoping that it tastes really good too, though I am sure that it tasted delicious. They all took a bite of the quiche with the sauce and they all made strange faces, like it was sour. That’s when my confidence went from 100 to a 0. Mr. Clark said, “The quiche is good, but the garlic sauce is very bad and we can’t have mistakes like that at our amusement park. So, I’m sorry, you don’t get the job.”

I said, “Thank you, I enjoyed the interview,” and I left with a broken heart. I really wanted the job, so I decided I need to get more training. I knew that in France they have really intense training and the teachers are really great, so I thought, why not try to get there and get trained. When I got back to school I told Ms. Carter what happened and she said to try to get into the training program in France was a great idea.

I just got off my plane and I am really excited that I am in Paris to be trained to be a better chef and I am a little nervous because I haven’t been out of the country before and that is a very scary thing for me. The sights look really cool and pretty. I got here a week early so I can could look around and see what Paris really looks like and see the cities. I will be staying in a really nice posh apartment. I have a roommate, her name is Annabeth, she is very smart and fun. She really loves the history of cooking.

It’s my first day of school and I am really excited. I think that I will be the best student besides Annabeth. My culinary teachers names are Mr.Pierre and Ms. Jorris. Ms. Jorris welcomed us, she explained our course schedule and put use in groups of three. I got paired with Annabeth and my friend Anthony. We are all the same age so I am really excited.

The first assignment we were given was to make a dinner with our group. We each decided to make a course. I was feeling very confident so I volunteered to make the dessert. I wanted to do something hard and really fun that I know how to do very well. I picked profiteroles, which I love. I will fill them with a lemon cream and some powdered sugar on top.

The first dish we presented was an appetizer made by anthony which Mr. Pierre especially loved. Next, it was the entree, a delicious looking roast chicken with white rice and roasted vegetables. Both Mr. Pierre and Ms. Jorris enjoyed the entree.

Now it was my turn to present. I was sooo nervous, my heart was pounding. It happened so quickly I couldn’t believe it. They bit into my profiteroles and smiled I smiled back then they frowned, their faces looked like they had just ate something rotten later after a lot of water and coffee Mr. Pierre and Ms. Jorris told me the puff tasted good but the lemon in the filling was sour and had an after taste. I was heart broken at the news and the started to cry. Our team did not win the best meal even though Mr .Pierre said we had the best entree and appetizer. Ms. Jorris did say that we would rather have you serve an okay meal than an okay and really bad dessert. But that doesn’t mean it’s acceptable to have an okay dish.

After seven weeks in France and some very intense training, we had our final tests on Friday. I had a written exam that was fairly easy then a visual presentation. We had one hour and 30 minutes. When I did the presentation I was kind of worried. I didn’t want to mess up. I wanted to redeem myself, so I decided to make cheesy bread, quiche, and lemon puffs. The cheesy bread was very easy, I just got some nice shredded gruyere cheese and put some salt, pepper, and a little butter on the bread and sprinkled the cheese on top. I put it in the oven and started on my quiche. I wanted to do the quiche again because I wanted the judges to know that I could make the quiche and I wanted it to be perfect because I knew I wouldn’t get past the class if I didn’t make it perfect.

First, I made a homemade pie crust which is very simple. I mixed everything then rolled it out, put it in the pan, and then quickly tossed it in the oven and so the pie crust would be cooked fully when I put the eggs inside. I added tomatoes, lettuce, salt and pepper, put it back in the over. I took out my appetizer and let it cool. Then I started on my pate choux for the profiteroles. By the time I finished making the dough and got the puffs in the oven, I took out my quiche and started on my garlic sauce. When I made my garlic sauce, my hands were shaking because I didn’t want to mess it up, especially with the salt this time. When I made my garlic sauce I tasted it and it had way too much garlic. It was so spicy! I decided that I needed to throw away the sauce and make a new one quickly. I started to sweat I was afraid I wouldn’t finish in time. But finally the sauce was finished. With my shaky hands I took out the puffs. I instantly made the lemon cream which was delicious.

I plated everything very neatly and brought my food to the judges. I told them what I made and they looked excited.

“Why did you make this,” asked the judge.

“I want to redeem myself with the profiteroles and I love cheesy bread. And they reason I did the quiche is because I was interviewed, but I messed up the quiche, and I wanted to know that I could do it right.” So they said thank you and they took big bites of the quiche with the garlic sauce. The day was so bright because they were all saying how good it was and saying “ummm” and everyone ate their entire slice of quiche! They also loved the lemon cream puffs and thought that it was just the right sweet and tangy. I was so happy and I started jumping for joy.

I am so happy with my new job at Universal Studios! When I tried to get the job again there were no mistakes. They all seemed really surprised at how good the food was they especially loved my garlic sauce. Mr. Clark said. “I will work on getting this sauce on the new revised menu.” That night I called my parents as soon as I got home they were soo happy for me that they were going to fly from California to Florida to congratulate me. I feel so blessed.

Box Man

One day there was a person named Boxman and he wore a box his as clothes. He was very shy and he lived in the local U.P.S store in New York City. Boxman lived his life by stealing food from the workers at the store. Then one day everything was going fine and Boxman forgot to hide when the mailman came. So he got packaged and sent all the way to Alaska.

When Boxman arrived in Alaska he finally opened his taped box and he was hungry. So he went to a restaurant and stole a burger, fries, and an airline ticket to New York City first class from a blind careless billionaire. So he got on the plane and after an hour the plane landed for fuel but Boxman thought he was at home so he opened the emergency exit, jumped out, and ran in front of a truck. He jumped on and knocked the guy out and started driving. “Weeooweeooweeoo,” the sounds of a siren. The cops were chasing him. So he stepped on the gas and sped away. After an hour the car broke down and he got sent to jail in the Texas maximum security jail.

Fortunately he had gunpowder in his fingernails. But first he wanted to see what jail was like. Jail was horrible. They made you stay in your cell for the whole day, they made you eat horrible food, and he was sick of this place so he decided he was going to break out. The next day in his cell he took out his gunpowder and rubbed it against the wall and BOOM, the wall exploded. He stood back. Charcoal and ashes flew everywhere.

He dived for a police car and started driving. The police lost him.

“Phew,” he said. Then he had an idea to kill the president, the mean and evil Hillary Clinton. He drove all the way to Washington D.C and drove straight into the White House and killed Hillary. He had a problem: his car broke down. So he ran and dove into Hillary’s Mustang and this time it was no problem when the cops chased him because he went so fast he lost them in one minute.

When he arrived at home at the local U.P.S store, he ran in and slowly, in his box, made his way to the storage room.

He saw the mailman and boxman took out his gun and said to the mailman, “You sent me to Alaska, meanie.” BOOM. He shot him and the mailman was dead. Later in his box listening to the radio he heard that Donald Trump was the new president.

“Yaaaaaaa!” he said to himself. He continued to live his life by stealing food from the workers and he never got packaged away again. But one day he stole a lottery ticket from one of the workers and won so he used the money to buy a better box.

The End

Blue

 

Blue is the feeling of wind.  The ocean breeze biting my cheeks

Blue is the smell of palm trees going through your nose and dancing in the sky

Blue is the taste of a ripe berry filling your mouth with flavor

Blue is the sight of a blue-jay perched on a branch

Blue is the sound of rain dripping down my window

Blue is the feeling of sadness shattering your heart

Blue is the smell of salt cleaning your soul

Blue is the taste of cold ice tea sinking down your throat

Blue is the sight of snowflakes, each one unique in their own way

Blue is the sound of waves crashing against the shore  

Blue is the feeling of a warm bubble bath

Blue is the smell of a cool breeze when standing on the highest point overlooking a lake with not a cloud in the sky and no haze from pollution Blue is the taste of cotton candy filling your stomach with excitement

Blue is the sight of truth.  The sky can never lie to you.

Blue is the sound of bubbles floating over the land as if they were never going to pop

Blue is the feeling of sea shells tickling my feet  

Blue is the smell of blue-berry muffins dipped in milk

Blue is the taste of cool snowcones turning your tongue blue

Blue is the sight of a grassy meadow with the sunshine beating on your neck and not a single cloud in the sky

Blue is the sound of a baby in a deep sleep

Blue is the feeling of warm tears running down your cheek

Blue is the smell of a fresh rain in the countryside that cleans all the dirt away from the flower petals and gathers in small pools for birds to bathe in

Blue is the taste of orange Fanta

Blue is the sight of night.  Looking into the eye of the moon and howling at it like a lone wolf that has been set free

Blue is the sound of peace.  I am sitting on top of a mountain, day dreaming into the mist, thankful.

 

Blood Red Forest

 

The full moon shone upon the dense forest, a spotlight in the starless abyss of night.

Its the kind of place that felt as if there was something you didn’t know about it.

A secret.

That was the kind of thing Trish was thinking as she stumbled on through this dense forest, deeper and deeper into the night, closer and closer to our secret.

It was secrets that brought her here now, my dear reader, and you must know, that secrets are a dangerous business.

That is why, naturally, our world is swimming in them.

Secrets are part of everyone’s lives, but our friend Trish was not keen on accepting that.

She isn’t the type for reasoning, I must warn you.

She wasn’t much for listening ether.

But she is the subject matter here, so don’t be picky.

And she is a person of action.

One of her various actions was the one that is over all making her the subject of this book.

The action to run away.

Secrets were a big hobby for most of Trish’s family members.

Rich nobles with upturned noses and squinted brown eyes and pale skin made up trish’s family.

Unknown tales and illegal deals and secrets.

Trish wasn’t like them. Her long brown curly hair sat tangled on square shoulders. Wide green eyes pierced through the night and elf-like features littered her face.

So that’s what brought Trish here.

Her dislike for the constant secrets of her family, and her differences.

For she was about to enter the realm of secrets.

And that would be, my dear readers, our story.

 

“They say I can’t do anything, HA, they can’t even tell the truth!” Trish told herself as she walked through the forest.

Lying was something Trish had a distaste for, but was also a talent of hers.

“What kind of person would keep things out of reach from their own daughter?!”

Trish, who was carefully taking all the “bad habits” and constructing a valid argument, had blinded herself to her surroundings.

She had not noticed the air of mystery in the air, and that the crickets had stopped chirping, and that the forest was easier to navigate because the trees weren’t thick as glue anymore.

There was a slight breeze, and the air was crisp, like rain had just fallen. Fog clouded her vision.

And just for a second, it felt as if time itself had slowed down.

The crickets returned, the air returned to its average state.

Only after a tree offered its opinion about her carelessness and gave her a bump on the head as some advice, did she care to look around and give the appropriate response.

As she shook off the daze, her gaze focused on her surroundings.

“Where in the living world am I?” (This was spoken in a half whisper, so that she could know that she was still capable of words,

but also to not disturb, well, whatever this place was)

She was in a bed of grass next to a shimmering mirror of a lake so clear,

and the pale moonlight so bright you could see her reflection as well as day.

She felt a sense that this was not at all the woods she had run off to earlier that night.

She stood (her legs not very much liking that decision very much, because they had been walking for so long that they did not want to let go of the small moment of relief of sitting down, for you must know, before this whole story started they had been had been, along with the rest of her, quite spoiled).

While her spoiled little self slowly rose up from the short term rest, something growled behind her.

She had no feelings about this, for there was no time for any feelings on the matter.

Only time for action.

Of course my dear reader, Trish is a person of action.

Trish ducked as the mysterious figure (this is a place of mystery, after all) lunged over her,

Its pearl white fangs shone as its lips drew back into a wide grin.

Its well worn fur as the effect of age.

Yet there was an air of power surrounding her.

Something that rarely anyone has, and is quite hard to achieve.

“You think you can outsmart me?

I am the ruler of this forest, and with that too, soon the world as well.

I am not one to be underestimated, for soon all of this planet, seven seas and all shall know my name!

No creature of your kind has ever came to this realm, and now you dare to insult me?

Speak strange creature, and with your words you may shape your fate.”

Trish was at a loss for words, so all that came out was a choke.

As soon as she caught her breath (as you must know all this activity was not well suited for one with a pampered life, and was quite tiring for someone like Trish)

She managed to make the words, but they were barely a sound,

“Who are you?”

“The creature dares not know my name, the name of her ruler!

What a petty servant it shall be.

But for pride is a mere misunderstanding for some, I shall spare the creature this.

I am Silverfang, ruler of all, and of the many before, but you shall address me as master, or Queen.”

What a strange concept this is, for power comes with great effort and practice in the art of leadership.

Silverfang was one of all creatures that was not keen on accepting that.

Now I can go on and on, but we must get on with the story.

And so, as you can see, our poor friend Trish was at a loss for words.

As Silverfang circled around Trish, she took a close look at her.

Silverfang had fangs that shone like two daggers stabbing through the night.

Her gray pelt, though old, moved with her like the waters in a river.

Her icy eyes pierced Trish’s soul.

As she stared at Trish, Silverfang decided to go by the common cliche:

“Better safe than sorry.”

As she glared with those icy eyes at Trish, taking in every detail, every breath, every move, she gave her final answer.

Speaking to what seemed like air, she said calmly,

“Kill her.”

Now don’t think that Silverfang is truly evil.

You have every right to think that, for she seems like a horrible, power hungry freak.

Well she is, but it wasn’t always this way.

Let’s take a journey back, shall we?

For whatever is done is not for no reason.

There is a side effect to everything.

I guess that makes us all side effects of the human race.

Silverfang was just a side affect of life’s cruelty…  

   *   *   *

“Silver! We need to go hunting today!”

Silver sat in the cave as her father called for her.

“I can’t.”

“Don’t be silly, of course you can!”

“Just leave!”

“Your loss.”

As he left the cozy clearing, Silver dragged herself to the water hole.

After she made sure all had left, she examined herself, and sure enough,

right where her heart would be, was a gap.

She couldn’t prove that it was gone, but she could not feel it.

She didn’t feel its beats, and it comforting buzz.

All nothingness.

Emptiness.

And it’s not easy to “have a heart” when yours has been stolen.

As her heartlessness grew, the gap ripping her apart, she replaced it.

She needed to fill the gap.

She filled her gap with the worst of things, but it was the only thing that stayed long enough:  

Craziness.

The evil crept into her as well, a shadow, grew into a heart that fed of of pain and misery, and poisoned her from the inside out.

This was not Silver.

This was Silverfang.

*  *  *

As soon as Trish heard those words her heart beats became a storm.

And without thinking it over, she flew across the lake!

Just kidding.

If you knew Trish at all, you would know that is way too much psychical activity for her.

But as the shadows seemed to draw nearer, and the darkness choking, she became desperate.

She saw what seemed like a million eyes, yellow headlights, beaming through the darkness.

Each pair was like two suns, the gaze strong and determined, yet their was something soothing about them.

Then they attacked.

It was just a blur of fur and teeth.

“Get rid of her,” voices surrounding her chanted.

In the tornado of the, the, the cats!

She was in a catnado!

As she looked around, she could just make out their furry bodies.

As she looked around, looking for a escape, the suffocating craziness surrounded her.

“RUN!” screamed a quite intelligent looking squirrel.

Its fur had a neat tuxedo over it, and it looked quite dapper.

As Trish grabbed its tiny, furry little paw, it started to run quite fast for a squirrel I must say.

As they ran alongside the lake, the squirrel introduced himself as the most proper squirrel in the whole woods, and these were his precise words:

“Hello strange creature, and of your ladylike air, I take to question that you must be what they call a girl, yes? Oh, of course!

Let me properly introduce myself my fair, um, what should I address you as?”

“Oh me! Trish would be fine.”

“Oh, of course, trash? Oh dear no! I’m so sorry, I don’t know what has got into me this fine morning!”

Trish looked up from her slow jog (she couldn’t manage more than that, for she was so tired, that as she ran dark spots floated in and out of her sight.)

And as she did, she noticed the bright blood-red sun, slowly climbing up the trees, and making its way to the top of the forest.

The birds sang their songs, the melody weaved into a gentle tone, that flew with the wind and ran with the rivers.

The sophisticated squirrel broke the silence.

“So what a wonderful morning it is!”

He brought his paw out in front of him as a gesture to show the wonderful morning.

“Of course, we haven’t gotten to my name yet. I am Sir Strange of the Sophisticated.I am part of the group for the Intelligent Squirrels. And I am here to escort you.”

That didn’t sound right to Trish.

Squirrels didn’t talk, and they most definitely did not have groups for “Intelligent Squirrels.”

But here was one, claiming that he was an “Intelligent Squirrel.”

But even that didn’t bother her too much.

She was worrying about the fact that she was going to be “Escorted.”

That did not really have Trish thinking about anything good.

But she knew better than to question.

That had already gotten her near to killed.

This squirrel had saved her from Silverfang, and the strange yet believably scary catnado.

There was no one else with her, and she was taking a huge risk, but she decided to trust him.

Trust is a very fragile thing, and is easily broken.

Trust is also, in my opinion, the most important thing for anybody to believe.

If you can’t trust or be trusted, you become lonely and depressed.

Finally, Trish broke the silence.

“Escort me where…?” she questioned.

“Shhh!” Sir Strange hissed  “Trees have ears. Come along now, we must be arriving soon!”

                                    

About an hour of walking later, Sir Strange finally came to a stop.

They were in the entrance to a small cave.

“This is where we part, my dear. This cave is the home of them.

They know all, and they tell little.

Don’t let them teach you.

They are there to guide, but not to teach.

Keep their advice with you, but don’t let it change your ways.”

Destiny is a strange sort of thing.

It’s something you want to know, but will change if you know what it is.

It’s a ticking bomb, my friend, and with one malfunction it will explode.

As she turned to face the cave, she looked back and asked “Why?”

But it was words wasted.

Sir Strange has left.

As she looked back to that cave and found something in her that she hadn’t had in a long time.

It was bravery, my friends.

It was bravery.

She stepped forward, and as she did, she took one more step towards fate.

Trish had been walking for what felt like hours.

The walls were covered in vines, and as she walked leaves crunched under her feet.

The walls started to cave in, and the air became thick with dust.

But the fire of bravery still burned in Trish.

The walls suddenly opened up, and a dim light shone through the ceiling.

The walls seemed to whisper, and then the whispers came together to make a voice.

The voice was an ancient whisper, and seemed to be wise above all.

It spoke.

“Who dares to disturb our deep slumber?!

Weary traveler or seeker of their life.

They who have came to this olden grim, have come out as the different man.

And as the traveler who travels, come near, and to the spirits of the wood you must dare speak.”

Trish stared into the darkness, looked deep inside of her for that courage, and spoke.

“I am Trish. I have been sent here by Sir Strange of the Sophisticated. I’m am here to find my fate.”

“Fates are shaped by their master. Before you figure out your fate, you must find out who you are.”

“But I know who I am! I am Trish!” she exclaimed. “I need to know my fate!”

“Very well, but fates in the hands of one who does not know themselves will do more harm then good.

You must return to the high of the low, and find one who will not know what it is to be true, and with them they carry the ruby of the soul. You must take this, but beware, this creature is a master of the art. If it sees you, your time will end.

Wander on to the place where the crow meets the eagle.

There you will find either friend or lies, and journey still you must, to a land where not all is at seems, and when you get there, the ancient ground will unearth, and your journey shall be done.

Use these words as guide, and use them well.”

The whirling dust came to a gentle rest, and silence overcame the cave once more.

A loud echo hit Trish’s ears.

“Begone!” it screamed.

Trish didn’t need another word.

 

Clueless, that’s what Trish was.  

“The high of the low, the high of the low… What on earth does that mean?”

But she knew.

She knew exactly where she needed to go.

She just didn’t want to admit it.

The lake.

It was at the bottom of a mountain,

The place that Silverfang tried to kill her was on a natural platform, about five feet up.

She didn’t want to go back.

It was a childish thing to do, to be afraid of a place.

But we have all felt that.

Some are afraid of the dark, and being in the dark is a sort of place.

Or the attic. Or the basement. Or wherever.

Then it started to rain.

It was a light drizzle at first.

Then the wind came in.

Gusts of freezing, rain filled air, striking Trish at every opportunity.

Trish shook from head to toe.

The cold crept in and attached itself to her.

She made the decision.

She would go to the place where it all started.

After twenty minutes of walking through the bitter cold rain she reached her destination.

And there lay, as prophesied, a person.

Or at least that’s what it seemed to be.

No, it wasn’t a person.

It was a shadow.

The shadow had no owner, and it lay as its own creature.

“It is mist with a life of its own,” Trish thought.

Just like another person.

But that wasn’t true. It was far from another person.

It wasn’t really there, yet it was.

It was something with no life or meaning, but this one had both.

It was incredibly, impossibly, true.

There was a glint of red in its satchel.

It was a dark blood red sort of color.

It was moving.

No, it was beating.

“With them they carry the ruby of the soul.”

The words flashed through Trish’s train of thought.

It was a heart.

The ruby of the soul was a heart.

And she needed to steal it.

Now how Trish was going to steal this shadows heart she did not know, but there was one thing she was sure of:

She was a horrible thief.

She needed to find someone.

The rain had slowly ended, first the rain had slowly became a drizzle, then it stopped, like the sky had cried out all its tears and now was bringing itself together, the high after the pain.

The wind slowly became a breeze, and the cold melted off and the sun rose like a flower in bloom.

The shadow was there.

But it was no longer a shadow.

Trish shook off the cold and went off into the forest (now buzzing with life) to look for a thief.

Now you must know that finding a thief is like finding a needle in a haystack.

Thieves are masters of disguise, for that is part of their jobs.

They must remain hidden, along with their, well, gifts that were not given, let say that.

There is one thief, though, that does not follow this rule.

The Fox.

The Fox is the most clever of the thieves.

But the Fox is not at all trustworthy.

And trust, my dear reader, is a fragile sort of thing.

Now it just so happens that Trish stumbled across one of these foxes.

The sun stood straight over the withering tree that, in the shade, Fox lay beneath.

Now Trish, naturally, is clueless about these creatures.

So of course, she spills her story.

Now this Fox was quite interested in this “heart” that she needed (for reasons she refused to say), and started to think about what he could do with this heart.

Now, he being a Fox and all, lying came to him like flies to a venus fly trap.

On this day, he was quite bored.

He wanted to get in trouble.

And so he went with Trish.

He told her he would steal it.

But it’s not about what he said.

It’s about what he didn’t say.

He never said that he would give it back.

Trish stood by the side of the wood.

“If anything goes wrong,” the Fox had said. “You may come interrupt.”

“Okay!”

“Of course it is. Now don’t interrupt. This is the work of a thief.

It requires concentration.

Now where is this shadow?

There is only a wolf.”

“WHAT!” Trish exclaimed.

She pushed the Fox back so she could get a better look.

Sure enough there was a wolf.

But in the satchel she could still spot something dark red, or blood red.

This sight spread relief through her, and she relaxed her tense self.

The Fox noticed this (he had a eye for detail), and he struggled to push in front of Trish to see what had happened.

He spotted the heart in the satchel, but he had also spotted something Trish hadn’t.

The face of the wolf.

It was familiar.

But the plan continued.

The wolf had walked off for a moment, taking the satchel.

As he lifted the satchel off the ground, something red, blood red, had fallen out and rolled to the ground.

Trish noticed this, but the Fox did not.

His pride and arrogance had deceived him, and as he walked off, a shadow to the shadow, Trish kneeled down, and reached for the heart. Each step the Fox walked, the farther he was from his final prize.

Maybe even the cleverest can deceive themselves.

Trish turned around, her back facing the Fox, and journeyed on.

 

As Trish journeyed on with a piece of her fate in her hands, she came across a sign that read:

“sdrawkcab fo dnal”

Next to the sign stood a garden gnome, or what seemed like a garden gnome.

“Well, this is gibberish,” Trish sighed. “Where in the world is this? The land where not all is as it seems.

Fate doesn’t seem to like me very much, that’s for sure.”

“If you are your fate then what is fate itself?” someone stated, matter-of-factly.

“Excuse me?”

“If you believe in fate then you’re just really self confident.”

“I guess so,” Trish replied. “And may I ask, who is speaking?”

“Ah, thats where you’re wrong,” Trish was trying to pinpoint the voice “Fate and self confidence are two terribly different places.”

It was the gnome that was speaking!

“Are you a gnome?”

“I do not think that gnomes can talk, now can they?”

“So you are not a gnome?”

“Well, I do not see my self to be so, but that is different depending on the eye of the beholder.”

“So, you’re not a gnome!?”

“To you I am a gnome, but gnomes can’t talk can they?”

“Are you a gnome or not!?”

This creature was really getting on her last nerve.

“Well gnomes can’t speak.”

“Whatever. What is this place?”

“It can be any place. It depends on the size of the person in question’s imagination.

To me this is home.”

“You live here?”

“Well you say it in that tone and it seems to be a bad thing.”

This was not her ideal gnome.

“I am your tour guide for today.”

“Is there any way I can skip the talking part of the tour?”

But her comment had already been blocked out by the gnome.

It had already started talking.

“Well here we go,” Trish mumbled.

She had been here (wherever here was) for barely five minutes and she already hated it.

Yet there was something interesting about it.

So the tour began.

I will spare you the long, quite uninteresting details (that will be a whole other story, my dear reader.)

And I will pick up when the story gets interesting.

*  *  *

“Now trash…”

“IT’S TRISH!” The gnome had made that mistake far too many times.

“Now, here is where the battlegrounds are.”

“The what?”

“Battlegrounds. Should I spell it out for you?!” the gnome said in a mocking tone.

“No, thank you,” she said in a voice that showed her suppressed anger.

“Continue.”

“Of course. Now these ground have been around for centuries.

They are some of this places most prized landmarks…”

Hadn’t the prophecy said something about ancient grounds?

Trish heard a surprising yet familiar sound.

It was a growl.

Silverfang had returned.

“A pleasure, really, seeing you again,” Silverfang said in a cold tone.

“You don’t sound too pleased,” Trish replied in a equally feelingless tone.

“Yes well, we were rudely interrupted at our last meeting.”

“Yes, well, that was preferable. A better option than my dead body!”

“I don’t remember mentioning any options.”

An idea flashed through Trish’s brain.

It was not a very thought-through decision, and it was risky, but Trish was a person of action, not thought.

“I think I have something of yours.”

“And what possibly could you have of mine”

“I think you left your heart in the shadows!” Trish reached into her pocket.

“The shadows seem to love you so much, that your heart is such a lovely token for them.”

Trish pulled out the heart and thrust it at Silverfang.

“Want it back? Come and get it.”

That was the stupidest decision she had ever.

If Sir Strange had thoughts on that, they would go something like this:

“What a strange thing that is, a little girl fighting a full grown wolf! This world is true to its common chaos!”

But Sir Strange had no comment, and we must get back to the story.

We have most definitely lost track of time (it is not quite important in times like these),

so I shall let you know that the pale orange moon had just rose as Trish said those words.

Now, let’s get back to the story.

A flash of realization crossed Silverfang’s face, and was gone again in a instant.

But it was there.

That was her heart.

And without a thought, she lunged (the gnome had fled by now).

The battle was short yet action filled.

Clawing, punching, teeth marks and bruises.

The final screams of the girl and the last cry of the wolf rang out into the thick darkness.

By the end, under the pale orange moon lay two bodies, the wolf and the girl, laying lifeless, the moonlight gleaming on the thick,

Red

Blood.

The heart lay at its rightful place, at last at rest with its rightful owner, and the prophecy was fulfilled.

Fate in the hands of one who does not know themselves does more harm then good.

(“Why this is an unusual end for a little girl! Stay away from dark woods like these, children, you never know what’s hidden in the shadows.” – Sir Strange)

The End

 

Back Together Again

“Okay, Aprille, Jackson, time to go, I’m running late. Your lunches are on the table. Aprille take care of your brother at school OK. See you at 7:00. Love you. Bye.” Slam. She shut the door hard.

“Jackson, time to go to school. Ma already made lunch and breakfast. Come on, get up. I don’t want to be late again.”

“Uhhhhhh,” came a groan from the stairs. Jackson was going down the stairs, but slowly.

Thud, munch, thud, munch. The sounds were coming from Jackson’s  footsteps and Aprille’s sounds of eating.

About fifteen minutes later the siblings were out the door.

“You know sometimes I wonder if Ma and Pa are ever getting back together,” Aprille said.

“I know. It gets me sad to think that Pa lives in another country, ” Jackson said looking down at the pavement. “We only get to see him once or twice a year.”

“I can always tell when Ma is feeling sad or depressed but she always makes us feel like everything is how it used to be,” Aprille said with a tiny smile on her face. “You know her birthday is coming up soon, we can make a surprise party for her.” Her grin grew bigger.

“That’s right. We should figure it all out after school,” Jackson agreed. “Class is about to start. Bye.”

“Now students, today’s lesson is the story of a family. Of course most of you in this classroom have two parents, woman and man, but maybe you have two dads or two moms. Or maybe you only have one parent,” Mrs. Bloome said.

All of a sudden Aprille slapped her chest where her treasured necklace stayed. It was a necklace her father gave her when she was only a young girl. She never took it off, never. It was the only thing she had left of him.  She missed him so much. She wished to see him more often.

“Excuse me, Mrs. Bloome,” Aprille said with her hand in the air. “May I use the restroom.”

“You may, Ms. Hollow,” Mrs. Bloome said.

Outside in the school halls, Aprille was the only thing alive, everything else was just benches and lights.

Aprille was still clutching her necklace. Aprille’s eyes began to get teary.

“What if I never see him again,” she said to herself through small sobs.

When she entered the classroom again, her eyes were still a little red from the crying.   

“Are you alright Aprille?” Mrs. Bloome said. Aprille just simply nodded.  

About half an hour later, everyone was rushing to the cafeteria. The cafeteria was always a noisy place but  that day it was crazy. Everybody was screaming and running around, but not Aprille or Jackson. They were quietly sitting at a lunch table all for themselves. Neither of them were talking, just quietly eating their lunch.

Three hours later, school had ended and the siblings were walking home.

“You know now that I think about it, we haven’t celebrated Ma’s birthday in years.” Jackson said. ”I think she needs something like that to cheer her up.”

“I agree, we should get started right away,” Aprille said and started running to the door.

It was Friday morning and the siblings’ mother had already left for work. Aprille and Jackson were at the table eating breakfast and getting ready for school, when they heard a knock on the door.

“Stay here okay,” Aprille said to Jackson. Aprille answered the door and didn’t believe who it was.

“PA!” Aprille yelled, and flung her arms around her father.

“Oh my gosh my children, they’ve grown so much. How old are you, Aprille?”

“Thirteen.”

“And you Jackson?”

“Ten.”

“Where’s your mother?”

“She is at work, ” Jackson replied. “You know her birthday is today and Aprille and I were planning a surprise party for her, could you help?”

“Why not,” their father said.

“Do you know Ma’s  favorite food, we were thinking on ordering her favorite food,” Aprille said.

“Oh, I remember our first date. Your mother and I were still in college, we went to this Italian restaurant. I remember it like it was yesterday.” The siblings could tell he was deep in thought so they didn’t want to interrupt him.

Aprille pulled her brother to a side. “This might be easier than we thaught. I think they really miss each other,” Aprille whispered in his ears.

“Uh-uh,” Jackson said nodding.

“Well Jackson and I should be heading to school but we will see you  later,” Aprille said grabbing her backpack and gesturing Jackson to the door. “Bye,” the siblings said in unison. Their father could just smile.

In class neither of the siblings could concentrate on their school work; they could only focus on what was going on outside of school. The school day felt like it was going to take days to finish. But finally the second to last bell rang. It was the last subject of the day.

“This hour’s subject is science, as you all know, and today is Part 1: Electricity,” Mr. Gaven the science teacher said. “Electricity runs through our homes all the time. When we turn on the light, when we cook, and even keeps the refrigerator cold. But …”

Aprille could no longer hear Mr. Gaven talking because she was trapped in her thoughts. She thought that if she could keep her parents together for even a small amount of time she might be able to get them together again forever.Aprille was anxiously tapping her pen on her desk. She was watching each second go by on the clock. Then finally the moment the siblings had been waiting for. RING! The bell rang and Aprille and Jackson were the first to get out of their seats.They immediately started running towards home.

The sibling’s home was fully decorated. There were signs that read Happy Birthday Mary and I Love You and balloons all over. “Wow Pa you did a great job,” Jackson said in amazement.

“Thanks, what do you think of the cake?” Their dad had made a circle cake covered in chocolate icing and there were pink sprinkles shaped like hearts all around the borders of the cake. In the center was a candle of a family.

“This is all wonderful,” Aprille said

“Glad you think so, but I still haven’t ordered the food yet. I will do that right now, you two should put on something fancy.” So off the kids went into their rooms to change. A couple of minutes later the siblings got out of their rooms. Aprille was wearing a white dress up to her knees. She had a pink belt around her waist. She had pink slip-ons and a pink head-band in her hair. She had diamond earrings and a pink purse.

   “You look gorgeous sister,” Jackson said

   “Thank you brother, You look very handsome yourself,” Aprille said back.

   Jackson was wearing a white shirt with a black tie. He was wearing black jeans, shiny black shoes and a nice black coat.

   Then the siblings went down stairs and the food was already there.

   “Wow kids you look great. Could you set up the table while I get dressed.”

   The siblings got right to work. Their mother would be there any minute. Five minutes later the table was set and their father was dressed. The three of them couldn’t wait any longer, they were about to burst. Then the door knob turned and the door creaked open. Their mother had finally arrived.

SURPRISE!

“Oh my gosh.” Their mother hugged the kids, but once she saw who else was in the room she froze. Tears started to form in her eyes. “I’ve missed you so much,” she said and hugged her old husband.

“I’ve missed you too,” he whispered in her ear.

All four of them were partying all night long.

Then finally Paul proposed for the second time.

“I can’t bear another day without you Mary, I want to live rest of my days to be with you.”  

Right away Aprille touched her necklace. “We are a family again,” Aprille thought to herself.

“Will you marry me?” he said

“Yes. I will!”

ANNOYING BROTHERS

Pesky, Pushy, and Annoying,

The time together I’m not enjoying.

 

He’s very bad you will see,

He’s even mean to me!

 

He’s like a broken robot,

In the world, he’s like a tiny dot.

 

Nothing helpful, meaningful, or nice,

He’s sneakier than sneaky mice.

 

When I see him in my eyes,

His whole inside is full of lies.

 

But if you know him you will find,

HIM, I don’t really mind.

Another Day Another Person

 

Prologue

Hello, I’m Marta Pennington and as my parents say, “Your life is a jewel and you’re the center.” That basically means my life is perfect. I live with my mother and father in a big house off the coast of the pacific ocean. I go to a top priority private school with kids who need special attention, whether we are really smart or have some trouble. I have wonderful parents that love me with all their heart, while I try to be their perfect daughter. There are some kids at my school who are really mean like Amira, she doesn’t try in school and she is always complaining, which I find perfectly crude. I don’t think I could ever understand her.

Chapter 1: Marta

This day, like any other day, was wonderful, but a thousand times more wonderful. I could not stand the suspense of finding out who my teacher would be. I was so excited that I woke up at 5:00 which is an hour earlier than usual. Who your teacher is shapes your entire future. If you get a good teacher (which I always do) you learn a lot, then that knowledge may come in handy on your S.A.T’s. If you use your results to get into a great college, boom! You have your whole future shaped out in front of you.

When I found out who my teacher was I raced into the house. I really wanted Miss Sweet.

“Hey honey, who is your teacher?” asked mother when I got inside.

“Miss Sweet,” I replied ecstatically.

“It’s like we always say,” said father walking into the room. “Your life is a jewel and you’re in the center.” I giggled, my family made my life even more perfect.

Chapter 2: Still Marta

The first day of school is always the best. In school I am top of my class. Sadly my class is very small. On the first day of school Miss Sweet asked if she could speak privately with me. I (of course) consented.

“Marta, I need you to go down to the lower classrooms and help out a girl named Amira. She needs special attention. Can you tutor her in math when we have math class since you take a math class at the high school?” she asked.

“I’d love to,” I said. Yes I may not like her but everybody needs to be given a chance.

The next day before math class Miss Sweet looked at me with those gorgeous blue eyes, and said, “I think it is time to go Marta.” I looked at the clock. Dang it! I was almost late.

“Yes Miss Sweet, I believe it is. Thank you for your concern. It is deeply appreciated”, I said. I always try to sound as sophisticated as Miss Sweet. Then I got up from my desk and walked out of the of the classroom.

The students who have problems with things such as learning, have their own “special” classroom dedicated to helping. Normally I think that it is better to die than step foot in the lower classrooms. Anyway I walked in and I thought that I had walked into kindergarten. There were bean bag chairs and clipboards instead of desks and hard chairs, there wasn’t a single educational poster in the room, and the worst of all they were making paper airplanes while their teacher Mrs. Hellion yelled. I went back outside shut the door and knocked as hard as I could. Then walked back inside this time everyone stared at me with wide open eyes. While I walked toward Mrs. Hellion I could hear whispers all around me like a thousand little bees buzzing all around.

“Isn’t that Marta?”

“She shouldn’t be here.

“I hear she is the smartest kid in the school.”

“Doesn’t she go to high school for math or something?”

I ignored all of this they weren’t important enough to make gossip about me. “Mrs. Hellion, I am here to tutor Amira.” I said her name with such disdain I was afraid that Mrs. Hellion would detect it.

“Ah yes, this way. Amira is a handful. I thought a child her age would help more than I can,” she said hinting she didn’t like Amira either.

When I sat down with Amira her scowl looked like it was permanently etched on her face. She was as thin as a stick with a pale pinched face. I smiled and said, “Well Amira, since we are going to work together for a long time we might as well get to know each other.”

“We both know you’re just doing this to impress somebody so why bother.”  I was deeply offended but swallowed my pride and tried to continue talking as if nothing had happened.

“I’m trying to help you, because let’s just say I didn’t exactly want to come in at all today. Everyone including you deserves a second chance.”

After days of trying to help I decided to quit. Normally I’m not a quitter but you have not seen her when she gets angry. She is a monster (all I said was, “In Miss Sweet’s classroom you actually learn things you were supposed to learn in sixth grade not third.” Is that mean?), and after our last fight I was at my wit’s end. I hate Amira. I tried to give her a chance, because I’d hate to judge her too fast, but Amira blew it. I was right, I’ll never understand Amira.

Chapter 3 Amira

I was woken up today by the piercing sound of two pots being banged together. I’m never woken up by anything but my alarm clock’s tuneful song. I looked around confused, and I realized I wasn’t in my bedroom with my four poster bed and my lovely pink velvet curtains. I was in a small closet, the ones that are infested with spiders and other creepy crawlies. Gross!

“Amira, are you going to get up? You have school, baby.”

Wait back up, who did she just call me? Oh and who is talking to me? This had to be a dream, and anyways since I can control my dreams I’ll be fine, might as well “get up.”

When I got up I was amazed and horrified by my dream. It was so realistic, but I didn’t know if I’d ever seen anything so dirty and small. The walls were covered in something that could’ve easily been mold or mildew, the rugs were threadbare, and the windows were grimy.

“Oh good yer up my little Fuzzykins.” I looked up and saw a young woman in her late twenties. Was this woman a mom? She couldn’t have been more than eighteen when she had me or possibly Amira.

“Er mom?” I asked.

“I know, I know, don’t call you Fuzzykins,” she said sighing.  

“No thats not it all. I was wondering where’s Amirr- my dad?” The second I asked I knew I shouldn’t.

“ Oh Amirrikins you know the man is in jail,” Amira’s mom said. Then her face became the victim of a downpour.

“Just go to school,” she called in between sobs as she ran away. What? In jail? I didn’t know that poor Amira. I decided to get to school even though my head was crowded with thoughts.

I got to school on time and sat at my normal desk in Miss Sweet’s classroom

 

“Ummm Amira, sweetie, you aren’t in this class and that is Marta’s desk.” I wanted to shout “I am Marta,” but thought better of it. This was starting to feel more and more like real life and less like a dream every minute. The whole class laughed and my face felt red with embarrassment. No one had ever laughed at me before.

“Class stop laughing and Amira please go to see Mrs. Hellion. You’re missing school hours.” I hung my head and left the class. My class is nice. They would never laugh at anyone. Oh well at least the kids in Mrs Hellion’s class would be nicer to Amira. I was thinking so hard I rammed into a wall and a couple of 7th graders laughed. Wait this couldn’t be a dream. I just felt that wall. It was hard, bumpy, and hurts people. How did I become Amira? Maybe I’m hallucinating, or delirious or something. It can’t be logical to be able to turn into someone else, especially without your knowing. Without realizing it I’d just walked into Mrs Hellion’s classroom.

“Ah Amira, you’ve finally joined us. Did you disturb anyone else today on your rampage through the school?” asked Mrs Hellion. She couldn’t do that. I thought that I’d read somewhere that teachers cannot cruelly tease their students.

I seated myself at myyyy- Amira’s desk, my head swarming with thoughts.

In jail for what? Her mother is like what 29? I am Amira?!

“Amira, Amira,” said a sharp voice I looked up to see Mrs Hellion.

“Yes?” I asked. What did she want?

“I wanted you to answer my question, what is 5×10.”

Uh oh, I knew this easy, but if I answered it like Marta then people would get suspicious, but I didn’t want to give Amira a bad grade. She had been through enough.

“As I see Miss Hoolie (that is Amira’s last name) cannot answer the question in under a minute, ah Rebecca, what about you?” said Mrs Hellion.

“5×10 equals fifty,” said Rebecca, obviously excited to please.

I had a long day of sitting alone at lunch, being bullied by friends, and Mrs. Hellion giving snide comments. I was walking out of school, kids were talking together on the school stairs telling each other secrets and problems no doubt. I felt awful for me, err, Amira. She didn’t have a friend she could talk to about her family situation or to laugh with. I was done with being Amira. She was such an unfortunate girl. If I went back to being Marta Pennington I would become friends Amira and tutor her. I’d help her mother and her get back on their feet. I wanted to help Amira.   

Chapter 4 Back to Marta

After a blinding flash of light and a rather painful transformation back, I was me again, Marta Crystal Pennington, daughter of John and Lisa Pennington. I wondered where Amira was when I was her. Was she me!?  I knew I must find Amira. I wanted to help her. I felt awful. I thought she was the bully when all along it was people like me who were quick to judge.

    “Amira!” I cried giving her a huge hug.

“Gerroff Marta!” she cried.

“Sorry I’m just so happy to see you!”

“Why?”

“Well lets just say I know what is like to be like you and I am sorry.”

“Okay, then are you feeling alright? You normally don’t want anything do with me.” I could sense that Amira was trying to keep her hopes low. I had been her for a day so I could tell she really wanted a trustworthy friend, but didn’t want to get stuck with a dead end friend like I was.

“I know you want a friend and I feel awful I was mean to you. I’m sorry.”

“People always let me down but think they can come crawling back to make my life more miserable. What makes you any different?”

“Just let me help you. I know whats going on at home and at school and I just want to be there for you. Let me.”

Finally Amira gave in at this point I guess she thought she had nothing to lose.

“Oh fine, but only because everyone needs a second chance.”

I couldn’t believe it. Amira was joking! I smiled. She did a half smile which was good enough for me.

Epilogue

Amira and I have been best friends ever since. Amira’s mother eventually got back on her feet, and got an awesome job as the head of a very successful business. Amira and her mother moved into a splendid little house with two very grand bedrooms and a fine kitchen with good things always on the oven. I visit Amira often, and was even there when she was told that she’d been moved to the middle class in school. Amira recently told me that her mom was getting married and I am a bridesmaid, Amira is the maid of honor.

As Time Goes On (Excerpt)

Chapter 1.

As I walked out of my office I pulled on my sweater. It had been a long day at work and I was exhausted. The street was noisy as it always was at this time of the day. Cars and people rushed by, dogs barked, and the homeless man sat on a blanket begging for a dollar so that he could buy his dinner. And that’s when I heard it: a wail so faint I couldn’t be sure it was there. But there it was again, sounding even more desperate. It sounded like it was coming from the abandoned building across the street. As I crossed, I wondered what the sound was from- was it an animal or a screaming child whose mother refused to buy a lollipop? I hesitantly pushed open the broken door, careful not to step on any shards of glass. And there, lying in the corner, was the source of the wailing. Wrapped in a blanket and wearing nothing but a diaper was a little baby girl-or boy, I’m not sure.

Chapter 2

“No, Alice please!!! Come on, please!!!” Beep Beep Beep Beeep Beep Beep-!! “ALICE!!!!”

I carefully picked up the child the way I thought was right. I used to want children, but now I had no interest. I know nothing about them I had never even picked up a child! As I tried to shush the infant, I noticed a little piece of paper attached to the blanket. I picked it up- it read: Please take care of my child. My heart started thudding. Please take care of my child. This baby was abandoned and its mother had left it here in an abandoned house with nothing but a blanket a diaper and a note. I held the child closer and muttered into its ear

“Now, what are we going to do with you huh?”

The baby whimpered. I sighed.

“Well I guess we might as well get you home. You need some food and some place warm to stay tonight, don’t you?’

It just sniffled.

“You don’t talk much do you? Anyway, we better get going. Why am I talking to you anyway, huh? You don’t answer.”

Chapter 3

As I walked to my car I thought over what had just happened. I had found a child, and I knew nothing about children. As if to prove my point, a mother with a stroller walked by giving me a strange look. I guess she noticed how I was carrying the infant. I climbed into the driver’s seat, the baby on my lap. Worn out from crying, it had fallen asleep in my arms. As I parked in my garage, I looked down at the sleeping child in my lap, sucking its thumb and lying on my lap, its head resting on my shirt. I smiled.

Chapter 4

I lay the infant down on a towel on my dining room table with a cloth, safety pins and a box of tissues. I took a deep breath and took off the diaper. Quickly wrapping the cloth on and fastening it with safety pins. Well, it was girl. I picked her up and as she looked at me with her big blue eyes I made my decision.

“Hello Alice Lily McKinley, I am your new daddy.”

Chapter 5

“Johnykins?”

“Yes Alikins?” I turn away from my baby name magazine.

“How about this one?” She points to a name on a list of girls names.

“Lily?”

“Yeah don’t you like it?”

“I love it.”

Little Alice watches me as I rummage through the attic.

“I know it’s here somewhere!”

I curse as a box fall on my foot, and Alice starts crying. I climb over the box to go comfort her.

“I know, I know you’re hungry. But I’m trying to find a bottle I know we have one from-from-never mind.” I kiss the top of her head.

“Just give me a sec ok”

She nuzzles into my neck and I try not to drop her.

“Ok, after we feed you I’m gonna have to find out how to carry you, won’t I? And tomorrow we can learn how to properly change a diaper.”

I lay her back down on the floor and she starts to whimper.

“Alice, let me just find your bottle, ok? Give me one second.”

I kiss her and head back to the boxes, and there, away at the back, is a couple of boxes labeled Lily’s things. I pull them out and cut through the tape as tears start dripping down my face.

Chapter 6

“Come on, up you go. Are you ready for some milk, hmm?”

I lift her into her high chair and pour some milk into her bottle. Then I lift it to her mouth she sucks on it eagerly drinking about ⅔. Then she starts howling. I lift her out of the high chair, patting her on the back to try and calm her down.

“Shh Shh Alice, what’s wrong sweetie hmm?”

She continues to sob and I try rubbing her back talking softly to her, and then- she vomits-all-over-me.  

 

Chapter 7

How To Carry An Infant:

Slide Your hands underneath their Head and bottom And hold Them Close To Your Chest

“Alright Alice, do you think I can I can do this? Well it doesn’t hurt to try-ok, slide your hands underneath their head and bottom… Ok….Hold them close to your chest…… There we go… What do you think, Alice, am I doing it correctly? No. Ok let’s try this again. Slide your hands…… Ok good-hold them close to your chest……OK yes!”

Alice looks up at me quizzically. I kiss her forehead.

“Now I can finally take you out without everyone staring at me!”

Chapter 8

5 years later…

“Daddy, really, it’s fine, I’m a big girl now, I’m ready for school!”

“I know, sweetie. I just can’t believe you’re starting school! Have you got everything? A pencil box, pencils, erasers, crayons, markers? What about your scissors? Have you got a folder?”

“Yeeees daddy.”

“Wait, what about your lunch?”

“It’s in my bag! Come on, I’m gonna miss my bus!”

She tugs on my hand, pulling me after her. The bus pulls up just as we arrive at the bus stop. I pull her into a hug as she gives me a kiss.

“Bye daddy!”

“Bye-bye sweetie have a great day!”

“I will! See you later!”

“Bye!”

Smiling, I walk back to the house. The little baby I fell in love with 5 years ago was starting school and a new journey in her life.

Alliteration Poem

an alligator ate an apple

bashfully bad bats

can cats clap

do dogs do doo-doo

elephants eat eggs

faint fashion far above

giant gum is great

hope hopes for hopscotch

it is impossible to be invisible

jim jumping, jackrabbit black, we are all jumping like that                                          

katey kit-kat is katty

love your looks                                                                                                                    

mom is mother and moon is melon

nobody nodded nothing nowhere

out in outside of outer space

please play pool gently

quiet quilts quark quails

rhinos run really fast

shimmer in the spotlight

special sparkling snowflakes see snow

time to team up

up umbrella, unicorn flight

value vapperating

wonder woman wins wars

x-rays are x-cellent  

yawn, yo-yo, you know

zebras are zombie

 

A Perfect Halloween

Once there was a girl who really wanted a cape but had no money. Her name was Nicole and she was short, with long, dark brown hair. She lived in Michigan with her twin sister Rebecca and their dog Charlotte. Even though they were twins, Rebecca didn’t look the same as Nicole. She was tall with short blonde hair.

So the thing you should know about Nicole and her home is that the town she lives in loves Halloween. Every year they celebrate and everyone in the town wears a costume. In fact, nobody had ever once forgotten! So it was a really big deal and if she were to show up on Halloween night without a costume, everybody would laugh at her.

Rebecca already had her costume — she was dressing as a spooky witch. She bought the costume down at the dollar store, and it was the very last costume they had. Nicole had wanted to be the witch, but now she couldn’t. More importantly, she couldn’t wear any costume because the dollar store was all out, and the only other store in town that sold costumes was really expensive.

“I think we need to make a lemonade stand,” Nicole said to Rebecca.

“Why’s that?” Rebecca asked.

“Because I want to earn money for my costume.”

“Sure thing,” said Rebecca. “I’ll help!”

So they went about building the stand using wood from the porch. They got paint from the basement, and they painted a big colorful sign on the stand. Then Rebecca and Nicole made the lemonade using a special recipe from their grandma’s cookbook. The book was kind of old and skinny with pages missing. They made five full gallons of lemonade. When Nicole tasted it, she said, “This is really good.”

Rebecca tasted it, too, and said, “Yeah! It is!”

So Nicole lifted the lemonade and started carrying it out to the stand on the side of the street. Suddenly, Nicole heard the sound of a barking dog. She looked up to see if it was Charlotte, who was known to escape from time to time. Just then, Nicole tripped on a rock and spilled all five gallons of the lemonade.

Rebecca came outside and saw Nicole and the spilled lemonade. “That was all the lemonade we made, and now you’re not going to make any money!” said Rebecca angrily.

“It was an accident,” said Nicole.

“Now you’re not going to get your costume, and I’m going to be humiliated!” Rebecca said.

“We can make more lemonade,” said Nicole.

“We’re out of lemons!” said Rebecca. “You need to think of something else to make money.”

“We could sell the candy inside the house that we got for Halloween,” said Nicole.

“Okay, we can give it a try,” said Rebecca.

So Nicole and Rebecca went back inside and got the candy and started going door to door selling it to people who had forgotten to buy some already. And, as it turned out, a lot of people had forgotten to buy candy for Halloween so they were able to sell theirs for a lot of money.

When it was all over, they had made a pile of cash.

“Now you can buy your costume,” said Rebecca.

So they went down to the fancy Halloween store and Nicole bought the fanciest costume in the shop! She bought matching witch costumes — capes and all! — with Rebecca and some of their friends. They even bought a black cat costume for their dog, Charlotte. And when they went out Trick-or-Treating, everyone complimented their costumes.

 

A New Life

A New Life

Chapter 1

Hi, I’m Sophie. I’m ten and today is my first day of school at my new school, PS 158! I have so many feelings stirring up inside of me: angry, sad, and excited! I’ll tell you why I feel each of these feelings. I feel angry because I had to leave all of my friends in my old town, and school. I feel sad because all of my friends still live in California and now I live in New York.

“I feel excited because I can not wait to meet new friends! If everyone was nice in California, then everyone has to be nice in New York!” I said to my mom on our way to school.

“Well Sophie, I don’t know if everybody is going to be as nice as your old friends in California,” my mom said.

“Well I guess I’m going to find out now,” I said to my mom as I walked into not just a new school, but a new life.

 

Chapter 2

Good morning class,” said Ms. Witney.

“Good morning Ms. Whitney,” the class cooed.

“Today we have another new student! And her name is Sophie!” Ms. Whitney said to the class and then turned to me and smiled. “You can sit next to Anna. She is the girl in the blue dress,” Ms.Whitney said. I saw the little girl in the blue dress she had her head down and it looked like she was…sleeping?! It was good I saw that because now I could now prepare for a long, boring year.

 

Chapter 3

After a long boring four hours, which felt like 1,000,000 hours, it was lunch.This felt like a test to me. This is my only chance to make new friends. The only table open was the table that everybody was putting their trash on. But I had no choice, I had to sit there. A little later Anna came over to me and I realized that she was a weirdo, she was wearing a blue elmo dress with hearts and flowers around it and talked in a very perky voice, so I just walked away laughing. When it was time to go, my mom was late so I watched everyone leave with their mom & dad. Then I saw Anna, she was running to her mom & dad, crying. Now I realized what I have done.

 

Chapter 4

The next day I saw Anna, and I knew what I had to do, say sorry. “Um …Anna I’m really sorry that I laughed at you, you are actually a very sweet person,” I said to her and smiled.

“Thats okay, everyone makes mistakes,” said Anna.

”Would you like to be friends with me?” I said, hoping that she wouldn`t say no.

“Of course!! I know that feeling you get when it`s your first day of school and you don’t know what to do or say,” Anna said to me.

”Thanks for understanding Anna, you’re a very good friend!” I said as we walked into the playground talking.

A Kids Life: Poems

A Kid’s Life

Do you remember that teddy bear you named with all your heart that you still think about every day? Or did you have a doll maybe her name was Alice you would have tea parties and you would take her everywhere. Or maybe you had a sister that you played with and when it rained you would build forts between the two chairs you would play spies and try to listen to what your parents are saying. Or you had a journal to write stories in. Did you have a baby brother to read to or play cars with? But you know when you told your parents you were bored it was just so they would play with you or help you build forts or read or maybe just maybe so they would be bored with you.

 

The Backyard

Do you still have that little picture your mom took of you on the playset you had in your backyard that your dad put up for you. Or the swing that you pushed your teddy bear on or your sister off of. Do you remember that tree you used to climb and one time you fell off and broke your arm. Or when you got a new bike and tried to ride on the grass and you fell but it did not hurt. When you put a table in the yard and put a coloring book and colored (outside the lines) and drank pink lemonade.

 

Rainy Day

That day when it rains and you were a kid you made a fort with your imaginary friend named Sunny or Carl you watched a movie and you liked watching the raindrops and say that the big man was crying and Carl would say I think he is crying tears of joy. But Sunny would be sad because there was no sun. Your mom would read to you and you fell asleep when you awoke the rain was gone. You walked to that swing set in your backyard without any shoes your feet getting wet when you sat down on the swing your butt would get wet but you would not care because you were with your friends Sunny and Carl.

 

Imaginary Friends

You remember Sunny and Carl those friends that were not real but were always there. Through sun through rain they were there. Through good times and bad through mad times and sad they were there sometimes but sometimes Carl was gone but Sunny was there with you waiting for Carl’s return. Then one day carl left and he took sunny with him you did not seem to mind you were all grown up and soon you went away to college you don’t know what happened to sunny or carl but you still miss them.

 

First Day For Us All

Your alarm went off and you got dressed. You ran downstairs your mom used the hairbrush and mom tugged your hair telling you not to squirm. Dad runs out of the house forgetting his pants mom runs after him. Meanwhile baby brother poured out his cereal, mom yells a bad word we get in the car. At school I get scared new faces new things new people new times. The day is done I go home and get sleep then we repeat and repeat.

 

Leaving Us But Why

You say he is leaving us but why. Where could he go that is a better place. You say our dog Buddy has gone to a farm but where is it let me see I love the farm. I was digging in the backyard and I found him asleep. He has not woken up don’t tell me he is dead. I thought he went to the farm I thought we would visit he is gone. He is gone he is gone he is gone he is gone.

 

THE END

A Love and Hate Relationship Between…

 

Hi I’m Olivia, I have autism and I have no friends. I don’t go to school. I have a tutor that comes to my house five days a week, just like normal school but at my house. I am very shy and am petrified of the outside world. I have a bossy sister named Mia who always makes fun of my autism. I absolutely hate it!!! Really you don’t understand! She makes fun that I have no friends and that I am not a normal 8-year-old girl. Gosh she’s so annoying!

“I just want to be normal.” I always say that in my head! My sister also always lies to Mom that I am always being bad and that I am never going to be able to go to school. So if my sis keeps up with this I will definitely never go to school and be a little more normal! I always think about normal kids and how fun it would be to get to go to school and have so many friends! But all I ever do is get made fun of by my ANNOYING sister Mia! Another thing I always think about is going to sleepaway camp and having an amazing experience! My sister goes every year and always brags about how fun it is! All I ever want to do to her is to have her be in my shoes and see how it feels! I bet she would hate it so much!!

I was walking down the street with my Mom. I was holding her hand tightly, when suddenly I saw a fluffy dog pop right in front of my face. I slipped my hand out of Mom’s hand and ran up to the dog. The dog had a mean face on it. OW! It bit me. I yelled! I had blood dripping down my neck! OMG! I was in excruciating pain!

OMG I was thinking, “my whole life is absolutely ruined! This is so awful! I hate you dog!”  My Mom dialed 911 when even more blood started dripping down my neck! The ambulance finally came and gave me a huge cup of ice to put on my bloody neck. He then rushed me to the hospital! When we got to the hospital named ‘Helpful Doctors,’ Mom had to carry me into the ER. While holding the ice on my neck! I was totally in shock! So we got into the ER and the doctor rushed to bring me on the stretcher into the room. When we got into the the room the doctor said, “Oh my gosh what happened?”

Mom said something like, “She got bit by a dog!”

“Wow!” the doctor said!

I couldn’t really understand the conversation between the two of them because of how in shock I was.

The doctor stitched me up and then took X-rays and said to my Mom, “I am sorry to say but I think your daughter has a stutter!”

Omg, I thought in my head, did I really just hear that or was I dreaming!

When I woke up from my ‘dream’ I asked my Mom what the doctor said. She said, “he said that you have a stutter!”

So I found out that it wasn’t a dream after all! I really did have a stutter!

“Are you kidding me,” I stuttered!

I yelled and screamed and kicked! When I talked it sounded so awful! Mom told Mia about what happened and how I have a stutter from the dog biting my neck. (All I wanted was for Mom to tell Sis that I have a stutter now) now she will make fun of me even more!

“I hate my life,” I screamed!

“Olivia honey calm yourself,” Mom said!

“NNNOOO!”

I then ran to my room slammed my door closed and starting crying so hard! It sounded so terrible! (Possibly because of my stutter.) I then heard a knock on my bedroom door. Who do you think it was? Of course it was Mia. I bet she came just to make fun of me more! When she knocked on the door i wouldn’t let her open it! But instead she yelled from the hallway,

“Haha now you’re even more disabled!”

“Weeeell you knooww whhatt geettet oouut offf myyyy liffeee!” I shouted!

It literally took me like 2 minutes to only say not even a sentence! Because of my stupid stutter!

It was Saturday evening when I woke up, I saw something red! I was so sleepy that I didn’t know what it was. (Obviously blood from my dog bite.)

I ran to Mom’s bed and screamed in her ear, “My neck was bleeding in the night there’s blood all over my sheets!” I stuttered!

“OMG honey come on we have to go back to the ER hurry up!”

Mom quickly got dressed and she picked me up and ran to the car she slammed the car door closed and turned on the ignition.

We finally got to the ‘Helpful Doctors’ hospital when I realized maybe Mia was playing a trick on me and this whole blood thing was a prank. But I didn’t want to say anything to Mom because to be honest I was kind of in pain. We walked into the ER and Mom asked to see Dr. Webber. The person at the desk said he’d be there in a sec. So me and Mom sat down and waited. When Dr. Webber came we told him what happened. He said that I would have to stay over night so he could watch over my neck.

I thought in my head, “my goodness this is so terrible!”

Mom ended up going home to get some clothes for tomorrow. I hoped I would only have to stay one night.

So Dr. Webber brought us to our room and said, “If you’re in pain Olivia or if you need anything just push that button right above you and I will come.”

I thought in my head, “this is going to be a bad night. The bad hospital food, the bed and everything else! Gosh Mia I really do hate you!!”

When it was about 9:00 I got into the bed and thought, “this is so uncomfortable I will never be able to sleep!” But I really had no choice! So I closed my eyes.

The next morning I woke up and saw there was no blood on my sheets thank goodness! The nurse brought us breakfast. I really didn’t want to eat this horrible hospital food but I knew I had no choice! The nurse gave us a bagel and a muffin. I took little nibbles of it. It tasted very stale and rotten!! It was also very hard to eat it because of my neck. It hurt so badly! I didn’t eat much of my food because it number one was very painful to eat and number two wasn’t very good. After Mom and I ate, Dr. Webber came in and asked me how I was doing.

I stuttered, “I am doing a bit better”

The doctor felt very bad about my stutter! He said, “I am so sorry!”

Mom said, “She will be ok. She’s a tough cookie.”

He said we could go home I felt so relived. I got dressed then Mom and I got into the car and drove home.

“Thank goodness we’re home,” I stuttered.

Mia acted like she didn’t know what happened but really she did because she played a prank on me I knew it! I ran up the stairs and walked into my room and saw that Dad washed the sheets with the blood on it. I wrote a sign on Mia’s door to her room that said I hate you! You’re the meanest sister ever! You made me sleep at that stupid ER for absolutely no reason! I hung the sign on her door. Then I went down the stairs very carefully (because I didn’t want to get yet another injury and get more made fun of! That’s all I needed!) So when I got downstairs I motioned to Mia to come upstairs so I could have a talk with her. But of course she refused to! So instead I told on her. “Sorry you lost your chance of not getting punished,” I thought. I said to Mom that I really wasn’t bleeding Mia actually played a prank on me just to be so mean! Mom was so in shock!!

She yelled at Mia and Mia then said, “What no I didn’t! I would never do that!!”

“Yes she did,” I stuttered!!

“Mia that’s it, you’re grounded!!” Mom yelled!

“Haha,” I thought!! Mia made a face at me and I made a face back at her like I really didn’t care!! Mia then  ran up the stairs stomping her feet so loud I felt like he whole world would be able to hear it! When she sees the sign she justs makes a face tears it off and throws it in the trash. She slams the door closed and then starts crying!

“Hahahahah,” I stutter! In my mind!

The next morning I woke up at 2:00! I must have been really tired!! I barely knew what was going on because of how late I woke up! I got dressed then went downstairs to see what was going on.

“Hi Mom,” I stuttered. “Wait a sec I don’t have a stutter anymore Mom!”

“Wow honey! How in the world did you get rid of that? I am so proud of you!”

“I really don’t know, someone must have casted a spell on me well i was asleep for so long!”

“Let me go to tell sis,” I said in a happy voice! I walked up the stairs then pushed open Mia’s door and yelled, “My stutter is gone! Now you have one less thing to make fun of me!”

“Wow sis that’s very cool!”

From Mia’s perspective:

I realized a very important lesson! I should really stop making fun of Olivia! She has a disorder and now I really understand what a hard life she has! I should make her a letter shouldn’t I! Then I won’t be grounded anymore! I took out a pink piece of paper (that’s Olivia’s favorite color) then I found a pen. I then started writing.

Dear Olivia, I realized a very Important lesson!

I am so sorry for what I’ve done to you!

I realized that you really do have a tough life.

I apologize for being so mean!

I promise I will stop!

I love you!

From your sister Mia!

I then folded it up ran down the stairs and all of a sudden I hear Mom say, “Mia aren’t you grounded what are you doing down here?”

“I want to give Olivia something special,” I answered back.

“Ok,” Mom then said, “She’s on the couch resting.”

I then went to the couch and saw Olivia, she was watching TV. “Olivia,” I said, “I have something special to give to you!”

She just sighed and said, “Ok,” like she thought you’re not giving me something special! You’re usually so mean to me!”

“Here Olivia,” I said.

She opened the card and read! She had an amazed look on her face like wow is this really my sister! She then gave me a huge hug and kissed me right on the cheek and said, “Thank you so much Mia!”

Mom then ran over and said, “What just happened?”

I said, “I gave Olivia a special card!”

“Wow Mia,” she said in a surprised voice! “You’re not grounded anymore that was so nice of you!”

“Thanks Mom,” I replied back.

“I love you Olivia!”

“I love you too Mia,” she replied back!

Back to Olivia’s perspective:

I felt so great about how Mia and I made up! It was Saturday evening when Mom yelled up the stairs, “Olivia do you want to come on a walk with me?”

“Sure,” I answered back. I walked down the stairs and then both me and Mom went outside.

When Mom and I got outside i was thinking about that stupid dog that bit my neck! I hoped I wouldn’t see him! When Mom and I were walking down the street I was asking myself questions about that dumb dog, such as “What if I did see that dumb dog and what would happen?” If I saw him would he bite me again? I really hope he wouldn’t bite me again because then I would have to deal with my stutter all over again! That would be so awful!” When I was done asking myself questions, I asked Mom If we could turn around and go back home? She said yes.

I was walking home when suddenly I almost fainted!!

“Honey are you ok?” Mom asked.

“Oh yes I think I’m fine.” (I think). Omg my face was literally as red as a tomato!!

“Mom,” I yelled, “I see that stupid dog again!!”

I looked into the dog’s eyes and he looked into my eyes, I then said, “Mom It looks like the dog feels bad for what he did.” The dog’s face looked so sad and it looked like she wanted to run up and give me kisses!! I then said in a questionable voice, “Mom I feel like going to pet the bad dog!”

Mom answered, “Honey, why would you ever want to go pet that BAD dog that gave you a stutter!”

“Well I just feel like he might now like me because he feels bad for what he did to me.”

“Ok Olivia you can do what you want but if he bites you don’t come up to me complaining,” Mom said.

I said, “Ok, here I go.” I walked up to the dog very slowly I looked into his eyes and he looked into my eyes. Nice doggy, nice please don’t bite me, I thought. “I pet him,” I yelled.

“Great job, Olivia,” Mom said!

“Thanks Mom!”

After I pet the dog I asked the owner what the dog’s name was he said her name was Lucy. I answered back, “Wow that’s a very nice name!”

He said, “Thanks!”

Mom then started walking towards the owner and asked him if maybe it would be ok to do dog therapy because her daughter had autism.

The owner said, “Absolutely, I would love my dog to help with your daughter! Oh and by the way I am so sorry about my dog biting you!” the owner said.

Mom said, “It’s ok i am glad they like each other now!”

“Let’s get back to the therapy,” said Mom.

“Ok, so when do you want to start and where should we do it?” asked Mom.

“Well I think we should do it at my house and maybe we could start tomorrow and do it two days a week,” said the owner

“Ok I guess that’s fine!”

“I can’t wait,” I said to Mom!

Mom and I then finished walking home. It was so pretty on the walk home. It was night time so the sky was like an orangey and pink color! And the sun was shining right in my face! It felt so good to be outside! And the fresh air smelt so woodsy! I just really love the smell of woodsy!! When Mom and I got home, I told Sis about how I am going to start taking dog therapy! She thought it was very cool! She also seemed a little jealous!!

She said to me, “I feel a bit jealous.”

“Well sorry,” I said back. I couldn’t stop thinking about tomorrow I was so excited I really couldn’t wait!! I was thinking to myself questions such as: How is this going to work?  Will this really help my autism? and Will the dog be nice to me during the sessions? After I thought about those questions I realized it was already 9:00 and that’s when I go to bed. So I got ready, took a shower put on my pj’s then gave Mom a kiss goodnight and got into bed. I then snuggled under my covers and closed my eyes and fell asleep.

It was the next morning when I woke up and shouted, “I can’t wait for dog therapy today!” I felt like I just woke the whole world up because of how loud i shouted! But really I only woke my family up! So I was exaggerating a little too much! Dad, Mom and Mia were a little surprised when they heard me shout so loud! I then went into Mom’s room and asked her,

“What time does dog therapy start?”

She said, “It starts at 8:45.”

“Ok well should I start getting ready?” I asked.

“Yes honey,” Mom said.

I then walked back to my room and got dressed. I put on something that I wouldn’t mind getting dog hair all over (not something fancy obviously!) After I got dressed i went back into Mom’s room to ask her if she would make me breakfast. She said, “Yes.” I wanted pancakes, so she made them for me. They were very good! We then walked out the door and got into the car to drive to the man’s house! I was so excited I had a rush of adrenalin and my heart was beating as fast as a 85 mile car! That’s how excited I was!! I was also thinking to myself I really want a dog!! Maybe if Mom saw I really loved Lucy she would get me one. I would hope so! When we got to his house him and Lucy were waiting outside for us. Mom and I got out of the car and went to say hello. I pet Lucy and Mom started talking to the owner about the therapy. Lucy was giving me kisses everywhere and was just being super fantastic to me!!

When we all got inside Lucy’s owner named Bob asked Mom and I if we wanted anything to eat or drink. We both said no. Then we went downstairs because that’s where we were going to do the therapy. When we got downstairs Bob got Lucy ready and told her to sit, and to be good and behave! I agreed with Bob. I hope he would make me feel comfortable with Lucy.

Bob said to Lucy, “Give her a paw!” Lucy gave me her paw and then I gave her a treat for being good! It was literally like the most amazing thing I’ve ever seen! Lucy was trained so well!! She did so many other tricks for me and she really helped me calm down!!

“I love you Lucy,” I said!

I think she might have heard me so she then gave me kisses back!! When the session was over Bob said that I could give Lucy a lot of treats because of how great we both did!! I felt amazing after the session!

When Mom and I walked into the house immediately I told Sis about how much fun I had! Keep in mind I wasn’t trying to brag to Mia. Really I didn’t want to start up again with the fighting and arguing! That would be awful! It was then already bed time!! the day went by so quickly! I got washed up and ready for bed! “Goodnight,” I yelled to Mom, Dad and Mia.

 

It was the next morning when I woke up and heard a barking sound! Was it a dream or was it the next door neighbor’s dog? I went downstairs to see what it was and guess what I saw. A big fluffy dog right downstairs in a cage!! I couldn’t believe my eyes!!

“We got a dog!!!” I yelled.

Mom came downstairs and said, “I decided to get a dog because I saw how much you enjoyed Lucy!!”

“Thank you soooooooo much,” I said while hugging her!!!

All I ever wanted was to have a pet!! And you know what I really did learn an important lesson: it was to always take second chances in life because you never know what you’re going to expect!!

THE END!!!!!!

#YOLO

 

Paris. Finally. I was in Paris.

Leaving my home in London had been the most difficult thing in the world to do, but it was worth it. Birds swooped and swirled above me. The Eiffel Tower was silhouetted against the sunlight sky much farther along the Seine. Clear and blue, the Seine was rushing down the river bank in a comforting rhythm where shopkeepers with bright banners and flags were selling their merchandise. The wind was whispering through the bright green leaves of the trees. Further down, I could see the landscape of the Luxembourg Gardens with its perfectly mowed lawns, rippling ponds and park benches.

I felt someone grab my arm. “Look, Emma,” my twin sister gasped in awe. She was pointing farther down the Seine.

I followed her finger and saw a big boat full of passengers gliding across the shimmering water. It split through the river like a knife in a cake. I waved to the boat as it docked. A mob of people swarmed off and they dotted the landscape like an ink blob, growing bigger and bigger by the second.

“Maia, we should probably get back to the hotel,” I said, tugging on my sister’s sleeve. Maia had the same long and vibrant red hair as I did, and the same sparkling bright blue eyes.

“Wait, this is what we came for. Look at the light! There won’t be another time of day like this,” she replied, and lifted her camera from her bag.

I couldn’t argue, so I did the same. After snapping a few pictures, we agreed to come back tomorrow at break.

Maia and I were 14 years old and both quite the shutterbug. It was only this past year that we were accepted into the Parisian School of Arts even though we had been submitting work since we were ten. The lessons were to begin tomorrow. We had gone to a fine school back in London, but nothing compared to this. Some of the most famous photographers had gone here, and about ten years ago, they began taking in students from the ages of ten to nineteen.

Maia and I headed back to our hotel in silence, snapping a few more photos on the way. We each flopped on our beds, tired from a long day’s flight. It was only a one hour time difference from London to Paris — thank God, what if we had been flying to the United States — but we were still exhausted. Soon we were fast asleep.

The next day when I opened my eyes, I was groggy and sprawled in tangled sheets. It took me a few moments to realize where I was, but when I did, I took no matter hesitating in waking my sister.

“Maia!” I cried, shaking her. “Maia, wake up!”

“What?” Maia groaned as I flung open the curtains. “Oh no, Em, too bright.”

I grinned. “Lessons!” I said. “Up! Up!” I felt like a five year old trying to wake her parents on Christmas.

Maia flung off the covers. That tactic worked, I thought as I got dressed.

Sooner than you could say photography, Maia and I were out the door on on the streets. We quickly rented bikes and sped off towards the school. It was a giant building, located just to the right of the Luxembourg Gardens.

A crowd of kids was joined at the door and they were all chatting excitedly to one another. As Maia and I approached, we made out the excited faces of some, and the calm ones of others. Nobody seemed sad.

“Alright everybody!” a voice called, echoing over the chatter. Everyone stopped talking at once. “Hi guys. I’m Lauren, and I’ll be your counselor for today. Ten to 13-year-olds on the left. 14 to 17, you’re on the right. Eighteen and nineteen in the middle,” Lauren said, and Maia and I took the middle. “Right then. Stay in your groups and follow me!”

Maia and I obeyed and passed through the courtyard and into the building. It was all spacious and marble and–whoa! Ice statues! A diamond chandelier hung from the ceiling.

Everyone was oohing and aahing, especially the new students. The only person that didn’t seem surprised was a blonde haired girl who was sighing and saying loudly to anyone who would listen, “Oh please. My mansion at home looks like this. And besides, I’ve been here since I was ten, I’m so talented. Yeah. They took me on my first try.”

I glanced at Maia and we rolled our eyes in unison. In twin language, that pretty much means, Seriously? And I know, right?

A boy nearby ran his hands stupidly through his hair. What was wrong with these people??

“I’m Shelby Moore, by the way,” the blonde said shrilly.

There was a chorus of “no way’s” and “oh my God’s” throughout the room. Shelby Moore was probably the all-time most famous child photographer in all of Europe. The only thing was, she was kind of a diva.

Before Shelby could say anything else, Lauren ushered the fourteen to seventeen year olds into a room filled with film and cameras.

“Okay guys,” Lauren said. “I’m the mentor for your age group as well as Jia and Saio.” She motioned to a brown haired girl and a Korean boy. They both looked about 25 years old.

“Your goal for this term is to take wonderful photos and enter them in the art exhibit that we have — open to the public — at the end of each term.

“But this year, we have an extra special treat.” Everyone’s ears perked up. “You will have the option to submit five photographs that you took to The Traveler.

There was a murmur of excitement floating around the room. I looked at Maia and we both grinned. The Traveler was a magazine that went from city to city all over Europe displaying prize-winning photos.

“You will have the chance,” Lauren continued, “to win 50,000 euros if you win first prize.” There were some cheers and a couple of whoops at this. “For second place, 30,000 euros. For third, 10,000 euros.

“But beware,” Lauren continued. “Only three of you will get these prizes, and there are 25 of you. Work as hard as you can and you can do it. Now. For the lesson.”

Maia and I settled down into chairs and listened to Lauren, but before she began, I heard Shelby whisper, “I’m totally going to get first prize.” That made me want to get a prize even more. Beating the world’s best child photographer who also happened be the world’s biggest diva? Score! Getting first place? Bonus points!

At break, Maia and I immediately hurried back down to the Seine. We grabbed a baguette to share and settled on a bench. I set a timer on my phone to make sure we didn’t stay past one o’clock. After all, we had regular school lessons in addition to photography classes. I snapped some pictures and so did Maia, but mostly we enjoyed the view.

Just then, an earsplitting screech sliced through the air. I leapt up from the bench in unison with Maia.

“What’s going on?” I asked.

I wasn’t the only one. People were screaming and pointing. In the sky was a giant red dot zooming towards the earth. Was that…? A meteor!! Maia and I seemed to realize at the same time, because we both jumped and frantically began gathering our stuff.

“Run!” Maia screamed, and we took off.

The meteor, a big ball of burning flames and coal, was just miles away… it came closer and closer…and closer…I was losing focus…my head was swimming…then suddenly, everything went black.

“Emma!” I was shaken awake in a pile of rubble. “Em! Emma!” It was Maia.

Slowly, I opened my eyes. Maia was staring down at me, her face blurred.

“Wha-what happened?” I gasped, pumping air through my lungs.

“Oh, thank heavens you’re alive!” Maia breathed a sigh of relief. “Well, the meteor plummeted into the Seine and you fell and…well, you went unconscious.”

“Wow,” I said, sitting up. “I really reacted to that crash.”

Maia nodded. “I’m just happy that you’re alright. You could have died!”

I bit my lip. “What time is it?” I answered my own question by glancing at Maia’s watch. Two fifteen. I had been unconscious for pretty much two hours.

My eyes flitted around the scenery. Everything was buried in lumps of ash or coal. Heaps of debris like plastic bags floated around in the air like clumsy birds. There was nobody — nobody except Maia and I — around. Even the Seine was murky. There was still a faint tint of fiery orange at the bottom from the meteor. I winced as my eyes fell on the half sunken boat that had carried passengers just yesterday. So many lost lives…all those people who didn’t deserve it…

Maia seemed to know what I was thinking. Softly she said, “We’d better get back to the hotel.”

I scoffed. “Like it’ll still be up after this,” I said.

“It’s like a mile away,” Maia retorted.

I shook my head reluctantly but got up from where I was sitting. Almost at once, I buckled back down onto the ground. “Ow,” I said, clutching my ankle. “It hurts.” I closed my eyes and let the pain sink in. If I lay there long enough, maybe it would just go away.

“Oh, yeah, Emma, it’s swollen,” Maia said. “I–wait. What’s that?” I opened my eyes and followed Maia’s finger to see a stick of green poking up from the rubble.

“It’s a four leaf clover!” I gasped. I inched closer to the clover and pulled out my camera. “This is perfect for the contest!”

I snapped a few pics from different angles and grinned. This would win me the contest for sure! My caption would be This clover is different from the rest, like me and my sister. It’s been through bad times, but it’s stood strong throughout them.

“Okay,” I said to Maia. “Put your arm around my neck and we’ll get to the hotel together.” And off we went, the silhouette of two girls stumbling along a sea of ashes and coal.

It took weeks for the mess to be cleaned up, but when it was gone, life resumed as normal. My ankle got wrapped up and a was put on crutches for a few weeks. Luckily it was only a mild sprain.

Finally, the day everyone in my group in photography was waiting for arrived; the day that the prizes were given out. Everyone gather excitedly in the hall.

Maia had chosen to take her picture of me — yay! She had asked me to face away from her and she got a great shot of me silhouetted against the Eiffel Tower.

Lauren motioned us to get in a cluster and we obeyed. “Okay! Wonderful job this term guys, really excellent. Now. Third prize is…Maia Blac!”

I cheered so loudly that my twin had to scream at me before I stopped. I could tell she was happy by the way her pale cheeks were now full of color.

“Congrats, Maia,” Lauren said, motioning for her to come to the head of the group. Maia was handed a big back of clinking euros. The crowd clapped once more. “Now,” Lauren continued as Maia joined me again, “second place is to Shelby Moore!”

I heard a scream of outrage: “WHAT?” Shelby shrieked. “No!! You’ve made a mistake! I need first place!!! RAHHH!!!” And she stormed from the room.

I grinned.

“First prize,” Lauren said slowly goes too…” she paused… “Emma Blac!! Congrats!”

Me?? Me! I won first prize! This was like a dream. I gratefully accepted my 50,000 euros and the class was dismissed.

Maia hugged me so tight that I could barely breathe. I was so happy.

We plopped down on a bench and looked around. It was an amazing sight. Then it hit me. This is what it was all about. Paris, I mean. It wasn’t about pictures, it wasn’t about money or contests of the stores. It was this. The experience. A Parisian isn’t a just stylish person or a talented artist, they know how to live the moment in time. Whether it’s good, bad or bland as buttered pasta, they know that you only live once and you need to live every moment of that life with feeling. That’s what makes Paris Paris.

So, my last words to you are this:

YOLO like Parisians

-Emma Blac

…And His Name Is John Cena

 

Chapter 1

Lars

In the dragon apocalypse nobody is your friend. Currently, my only friend is a wrestler. And his name is John Cena! He and I are the last survivors. We only survive on gatorade and solid form Gatorade. Before the dragons tried to destroy us they gave us one last wish each. I was one of the 20,000 people who wished to meet John Cena. If you’re wondering why there is dragon apocalypse it’s because Donald Trump took over the United States of Eh (a super country/mix of the US and Canada) and turned it into an oligarchy. The other oligarchs are the leaders of ISIS (who are dragons). So, now there is a dragon apocalypse.

So, back to John Cena. John Cena took all the 20,000 people up to the top of a mountain. So, I took the chance and pushed 19,999 people off a mountain. I was the only one with John Cena. John was slightly alarmed, but he didn’t say much.

After 24 hours everybody had died except for John and I. We were living in a cave formed by all the 19,999 people rolling down the mountain. John was expanding the cave by punching the rock when he hit what he thought was an oil outbreak. He said, “Lars, I think I hit an oil outbreak. We’re rich!”.

“Everybody’s dead, remember?” I said, “and that’s not oil, it’s Gatorade!”

After finding Gatorade all we drank was grape Gatorade and all we ate was solid form grape Gatorade. After a day John and I were developing what I call ‘Gatorade Cramps’. John and I started brainstorming how to stop the dragons at 5:00 pm. John thought there were other people left. But, I said, “There can’t be any people left, ISIS killed them all.” We continued brainstorming until John decided we should leave Colorado. I asked John, “What time is it?”

Then John said, “Midnight.” Time flies like ISIS dragons.

The next day, as we were leaving the cave, I asked John, “Where are we going and how are we getting there?”.

He replied casually, “We’re going to the Mega-Ultra-Super Amish people. And we’re taking the Cinnamon Toast mobile.”

“What’s the Cinnamon Toast Mobile?” I asked. “It’s about time you knew,” said John, “John Cena is just my secret identity. I am really … Cinnamon Toast Man!”.

“What are your powers?” I asked curiously.

“Er, I don’t really have any,” explained John.

Then, we finally got on the highway. When, we were on the highway John said, “Not much traffic.”

I replied, “Everyone’s dead, remember John?”

“My name is Cinnamon Toast Man!

“Okay, Okay, just go faster!” After driving for a couple hours in John’s “Cinnamon Toast Mobile” (*Cough* 1985 Honda Civic *Cough*) we found the “Mega-Ultra-Super Amish people”.

When we found the Mega-Ultra-Super Amish, they were doing nothing. So, John and I introduced them to metal. By the end of the day we had an acoustic metal band named Spontaneous Exorcism. Though Amish don’t permit music in their society, when they realize it’s probably their last day to live they decided to do it. Eventually, we got the Amish people to join our side. We’re on amish-on, to stop the dragons!

I was surprised when I heard the dragons didn’t attack the Amish, but apparently, They’re so far out of the way that the dragons couldn’t find them. I was even more surprised that they had tanks (the tanks were wooden, and were powered by pedaling). So, we set off to stop ISIS.

We traveled out of the country because the Amish leave near a port. We took a boat and set sail. After a couple of days we saw land. I was very excited. About mid way through the trip we started fishing to provide food.

We decided to search the island to find allies to help fight the dragons or a secret hide-out. After searching the island for a while we found a very small tribe of people who looked like Native Americans. Apparently they had survived the dragon-apocalypse, I don’t how though. John tried to explain to them that we came in peace, but they started shooting their bows and arrows at us. They clearly weren’t allies.

When we realized we had a war we were terrified. At least, I was terrified. The enemy’s war cry was, “Smell Whale!!!” I don’t know if that meant something in their language or if they were just telling us to smell a whale.

Chapter 2

John Cena

Lars ended up dying in that war. By the way, this is John telling the story now. I wasn’t going to let ISIS, Trump, and The Northern Sentinelese (the people who killed Lars) destroy humanity. The dragons even made their own cracker called “Children” supposedly using real children. Their slogan is “The snack that smiles back: Children!”.

We ended up defeating the Northern Sentinelese, but many of our soldiers died. Only 50 other soldiers came back with me on the ship, but we felt pumped. When we were about halfway between the Northern Sentinel Islands and the US of Eh my evil twin Anec Nhoj joined our party. He tried to AA me, but I did a reversal AA knocking him out. Then I AA’d him off the boat.

When we reached the U.S.E we went straight to the Trump Towers. At the Trump Towers there was a dragon guarding the doors. He insisted that I beat him in a rap battle to p***.

So,I started;

“Your time is up my time is now,

You can’t see me,

My time is now,

It’s a franchise what we shining now,

You Can’t See Me My time is now!”

I kept going;

“In case forgot or fell off,

I’m still hot knock your shell off,

My money stack fat plus I can’t turn the swell off,

The franchise, Doin’ big Bid’ness,

I live this,

It’s automatic I win this.”

The dragon melted because my rap was so fire. We took the elevator up to the top floor. When we got there, we were met by a dragon.

That time I  started again;

“A soldier, and I stay under you fightin’

Plus I’m stormin’ on you chumps like I’m thunder and lightning,

Ain’t no way breakin’ me kid, I’m harder than nails

Plus I keep it on lock like I’m part of jail”

That dragon also melted. Then, it was time to battle Trump. I walked down the hall to an office … and stepped in.

Donald’s chair was turned around so I couldn’t see him. “Long time no see, Mr. Cena.” He said.

Then I said, “You don’t sound like Mr. Trump at all …”

“It’s about time you knew John…” Then while spinning his chair around he said, “I am really your arch enemy … ANEC NHOJ AKA !NAM TSAOT NOMANNIC”.

“But, But, … I defeated you earlier today!”

“You always forget John, I’m immortal!

Anec started the battle:

“Whether fightin’ or spittin’ my discipline is unforgiven

Got you backin’ up in a defensive position

An ***-kcikin’ anthem, heavyweight or bantam

Holdin’ camps for ransom, the microphone phantom

Teams hit the floor this the new fight joint

Like a broken needle kid you missin’ the point

We dominate your conference with offense, that’s no nonsense

My theme song hits, get you reinforcements

We strike quick with hard kicks, duckin’ night sticks

Bare-knuckled men through fight pits, beat you lifeless

Never survive this, you forgot like Alzheimers

Two-face rappers walk away with four shiners

The raw rhymer, turnin’ legends to old-timers

My incisors like a viper bitin’ through your one-liners

New DeadMan Inc., and we about to make you famous

Takin’ over Earth and still kickin’ in Uranus”

He was good. But he hadn’t seen me yet. I sang my whole theme song, not just parts of it like the previous 2 times.

“In case you forgot or fell off I’m still hot – knock your shell off

My money stack fat plus I can’t turn the swell off

The franchise, doin’ big bid’ness, I live this

It’s automatic I win this – oh you hear those horns, you finished

A soldier, and I stay under you fightin’

Plus I’m stormin’ on you chumps like I’m thunder and lightning

Ain’t no way you breakin’ me kid, I’m harder than nails

Plus I keep it on lock, like I’m part of the jail

I’m slaughtering stale, competition, I got the whole block wishing

they could run with my division but they gone fishing –

– with no bait, kid your boy hold weight

I got my soul straight, I brush your mouth like Colgate

In any weather I’m never better your boy’s so hot

you’ll never catch me in the next man’s sweater

If they hate, let ’em hate, I drop ya whole clan

Lay yo’ *** down for the three second tan

(Duh, Duh, Duh, Duh, Duh, Duh, Duh, Duh)

Yeah, uh

It’s gonna be what it’s gonna be

Five pounds of courage buddy, b*** tint pants with a gold T

Uh – it’s a war dance and victory step

A raw stance is a gift, when you insist it’s my rep

John Cena, Trademarc, you all are so-so

And talk about the bread you make but don’t know the recipe for dough though

Aimin’ guns in all your photos, that’s a no-no

When this pop, you’ll liplock, your big talk’s a blatant no-show

See what happens when the ice age melt

You see monetary status is not what matters, but it helps

I rock a timepiece by Benny if any

The same reason y’all could love me is the same reason y’all condemn me

A man’s measured by the way that he thinks

Not clothing lines, ice links, leather and minks

I spent 20 plus years seekin’ knowledge of self

So for now Marc Predka’s livin’ life for wealth”

I thought my rap was a bit better, but he didn’t seem phased at all. There was only one way to end it … A fight to the death!

Chapter 3

A fight to the death

The fight to the death started. We immediately grappled each other. He ended up shoving me out of the office. Then shoved him into a – suspicious – open elevator. We took the elevator to the roof floor. Once we got out of the elevator, I got Anec in a fireman’s hold. I was about to AA him off the side of the building, but then, I got a cramp. I wasn’t just a normal cramp, it was a … Gatorade cramp! Anec and I both fell off the side of the Trump Towers. I thought we were both going to die. But then I remembered Anec is immortal. He would live and I would die! But, then the MUSA (Mega-Ultra-Super Amish) stepped in.

When I was falling of the building the MUSA got a trampoline and put it under me. Luckily, I landed on the trampoline. Anec and I took the battle to the streets. I AA’d him and the he AA’d be back. The MUSA rolled in with one of their wooden tanks. They ran over Anec Nhoj! But he’s immortal so he survived. The only way we could beat him was with magic.

I jumped in to the MUSA’s tank and we rolled away. We took a boat and sailed to England. We docked in Southampton. We then took the tanks to London. It took about seven hours to do that. In London, we went to King’s Cross Station. From there, we went to platform 9 ¾. We rode the Hogwarts express all the way to Hogwarts. Of course, all wizards were unharmed from the DracoTrumpocalypse. We told Prof. McGonagall (Dumbledore is dead) that we needed her help. She told us to contact Harry Potter. So we did. We rode back to New York on Harry’s broom.

When we got to New York we found Anec almost immediately. Harry said, “Avada Kedavra” and Anec died.

The End!

 

#FairytaleBall

Chapter 1: #Princess

Once upon a time in the year 2013 there was a girl named Emily. Emily was the princess of England. Emily pictured herself as the perfect princess. Filthy rich. Amazingly beautiful. The only thing that could stop her was the perfect night at the ball.

”Emily where are you?” yelled Emily’s father.

“I’m in my room Father!” Emily called back, as she started to braid her hair.

“Father I need you to buy me a dress for the ball, like, now!!!”

“Ok sweetie. Be patient. I told you we are going dress shopping tomorrow.”

“But Father! I want to go today! If Mom was alive right now she would take me at my beck and call! I deserve more, father! I’m amazing! I’m the most beautiful princess in the world!

“And my prince! Oh my prince! He will be there with me, while I’m in the perfect gown and we’ll look like the perfect couple dancing under the dim lights of the ballroom ceiling. Being around all of those filthy rich people who are gonna adore me more then they adore their own children! It’s going to be wonderful father! If we cannot at least get the dress today, then let’s go shopping for the jewelry! I will look so pretty with sapphires or maybe emeralds on my necklace, to make my long blonde hair and blue eyes to stand out. Oh and my beautiful pale peach skin would stand out with rubies! So much to choose from! Lets go! To the vault!”

“Ok, but hold on. Your mother told me when this day comes, she knows you will try to wear more than three pieces of jewelry. So you may go down and pick one necklace, one pair of earrings and your crown. That’s it! Do you hear me?”

“Yes, Father,” responded Emily, like she was a little upset.

As Emily went down to the vault to pick out her jewelry, someone else was thinking about the ball.

Chapter 2: #Prince     

“Mother! How do I look in my brand new tux? I got the tailor to make it for me for the ball.”

“It looks good on you, son. I’m so proud of you, and so would your father. He would be proud that you grew up so handsomely, I know I am,” said the mother of Edward as she fixed her hair.

“Thank you Mother. I love you.”

“I love you too, Edward.” said the mother.

Edward turned around from the mirror and stared into his mother’s wet, damp eyes. Then he hugged her tight, his carrot-red hair sticking to her dress, and his hazel green eyes blinking lightly while he rested his head on her small boney shoulder.

“I cannot wait to dance with Emily under the beautiful ball ceiling. Although it’s in a month, I’m still super excited.”

“I know you are. I know. Ok, well we still have to go find a crown for you. Come on let’s go upstairs.” As Edward and his mother went to the vault in their castle someone was thinking about the jokes that were going to be made at this ball.

Chapter 3: #Jester

“Oh I can’t wait to see all of their faces when I make my jokes! It’s going to be the funniest night of their lives!” said the Jester.

“Honey, your jokes will be hilarious. But don’t forget that it’s a ball, so don’t get upset if they want to dance instead of listen to your jokes, okay?” said his mother.

“Okay mother. But I know that my jokes will be too funny to resist. I’m just too funny to ignore.”
“Yes sweetie, but nobody wants a stuck up jester. It’s just wrong. It’s like Miley Cyrus with her tongue sticking out. Trust me I would know, I am the queen of jesters after all.”

“Very funny mother. Those are the type of jokes that I need for the ball.”

“I think those are good jokes sweetie but you need something with more pizazz. Something that will make them die of laughter.” She made a noise, “ba da! Ba da!

“Where did that come from?” asked the Jester.

“When you’re a jester, sweetie, you need to have that to make your jokes funny.”

“Yeah ok. But, don’t you think I’m funny without all of that stuff?”
“Um, well. Uh. Well.”

“MOM! AM I FUNNY?!

“Um… no, sorry, hun, you’re just an average joker.”

The jester put his hand to his chest and dramatically gasped.

“Mother! I thought when I was 5, you named me a jester and not a joker anymore because I was one of the funniest jesters!”

“Yeah, well, I did that because you would cry if I didn’t give you the title soon.”

“You lied to me! Thats it! I’ll show you! I’m still going to do my jokes at the ball! And everyone will love them! Even you, mother! I’LL SHOW YOU! I’ll show you!” screamed the jester as he walked out the door.

Chapter 4:# The Jester’s Mother

My son is absolutely insane. He thinks that when he goes to the ball everyone will laugh at his jokes. Pssshhhh.

No one at that prissy ball will listen to him. They’re too fancy and full of themselves to even look at my son.

Plus, when I started, no one wanted to listen to me. They basically chewed me up and spat me out onto the street. I was the chewed up gum on someone’s shoe. I was the pile of poop that got walked away from because my jokes stank so much.

‘Ba da ba pa ch’

Anyway, the point is, he’s never gonna be a good jester, because he is the type of person who gives up if they fail the first time. I’m just afraid that when they do shoot him down, he’ll come running over to me telling me I was right. That doesn’t really matter because that is what I like to hear.

Anyway, I wish he didn’t choose to go to the ball. I wish he chose not to, so I wouldn’t have to see him get hurt.

Ever since his father died, he’s been really insecure about his jokes lately. It’s like he’s my son, but he’s not.

Chapter 5:# The Princess’s Father

My daughter is absolutely insane.

She’s so full of herself, it’s funny.

I’m really thinking about not letting her go to the ball. I mean, she really needs to learn that the world doesn’t revolve around her, although she is beautiful, and she chooses whether or not kids should go to school, and she supports the homeless people, to give money to us rich.

So I guess, yeah, physically, she does rule the world but mentally, she does rule the world.  Oh my god. She does rule the world.  Agh  We’re all gonna die!

Oh my god.

Oh my god.

Oh my god!

It’s time to panic! Everyone Panic! Now! I can’t believe done this! She rules the world! Agh!

Ok, I’m ok. I’m ok. I’m ok. I’m ok.

Ah! We’re all gonna die!
I’m not okay!  Agh! We’re all gonna die!

We’re all gonna die! Agh!

While someone was talking in their head, and worrying, another was thinking about her son.

Chapter 6: #The Prince’s Mother

“I fully support my son’s decision about Emily. Well, not fully. Actually not at all. She’s such a brat. I don’t want no girl like her to be dating my son. She will change his personality. If she does, she doesn’t know what’s coming for her. I will get her, I will hunt her down and get her!”

“Hey mom. What are you yelling at?” asked the prince, as he walked in his mother’s bedroom.

“Oh. You scared me sweetie. I didn’t you were there.”

“I scared you? That yelling scared me. It sounded like it was coming from here.”

“Oh no, nothing is going on here. It’s just me and my old self. Doing old things. Sitting like an old per-”

“Mom! Focus!”

“The screaming. Where did it come from?”

“Oh ok. You got me. I was screaming at a bird on the window sill.”

“Yup. You were right. Old people stuff,” said the prince as he walked out of the door.

Chapter 7: #Princess

“My ruby earrings and necklace are gonna look so nice with my pink sequined ball gown I picked out for the ball. I’m gonna be the prettiest girl they have ever seen! I’m gonna be the life of the ball! I think its time for me to sing the victory song!

“Oh what a beautiful princess! Oh what some beautiful money! I have a wonderful feeling, everything’s going my way!!”

“Bravo sweetie! Bravo! Just like your mother!”

“Father! You were listening?!”

“You’re beautiful.”

“You have my attention.”

“I have found you the most handsome prince in the whole land!”

“But I already have one father.”

“Your hair flows beautifully in the wind.”

“You have my attention again.”

“Here he is!”

“Hello. I’m Philippe. You’re beautiful.” Philippe said, entering in to Emily’s room. He brushed his dark spooky black hair with his hand, and looked in her eyes with his dark green ones.

“Father I’ve changed my mind! I’m going to the ball with Philippe!”

While someone was dumping someone, someone else was thinking.

Chapter 8: #Jester

“I still have to figure out my jokes for the ball! And what to wear! Wait I’m a jester. I wear those stupid clown hat thingys. Duh.”

“What are you doing?!”

“Mother! You again?! I thought I ditched you!”

“As you did, my son, but don’t forget who’s the better jester here. Oh right. There’s only one! Ha ha ha.”

“Yeah there’s only one. And its me!”

“What are you even doing?”

“I’m picking out what I’m wearing to the ball!”

“Why? You’re a joker all you need to pick out for the ball is your jokes, and trust me I know you haven’t done that yet.”

“Mother you’re such a conniving snake!”

“Funny. But that’s my trick, so get your own!”

“No, I better keep it, just to annoy you!!!”

“Yeah ok. You annoying me? Hilarious!”

“Mother, you’re such a conniving snake!”

“Hey!!”

“Mother, you‘re such a conniving snake!

Mother, you’re such a conniving snake!

Mother, you’re such a conniving snake!

Mother you-”

“OK! OK! I GOT THE POINT! THE CHALLENGE IS ON! LET’S GO TO THE BALL!”

Chapter 9:# The Jester’s Mother

I can’t wait to see my son fail! Oh and all those people! They will be laughing at him! It’s going to be the most funniest thing that ever happened! I can’t believe I was about to feel bad for him! Ha! But now all I’m gonna do is kick his butt at being awesome! Or funny I guess. You know what I mean! I can’t wait to see him crawl back to me! This is gonna be great! Well, first, I gotta go investigate what jokes he’s doing!

While someone was starting to spy, another was thinking about changing his daughter’s date to the ball again!

Chapter 10: #The Princess’s Father

Ooh. I’ve got an idea. I think I’m gonna change my daughter’s date again.

It will show her that she can’t always have what she wants and she can’t always change her mind in a snap because she can hurt someone’s feelings! I can’t wait to show her!

“Hello, father. You rang my bell from the kitchen. What do you need my prettiness to do for you right now?”

“I need you to meet your new date to the ball.”

“You mean Philippe? But I already met him, father.”
“No sweetie, not Philippe. Philippe is gone. I’ve got a new date for you.”

“But I like Philippe. He – he’s genuine,” said Emily all googly-eyed.

“Is that because he said you were beautiful?”
“Maybe…”

“Ok. well, this is Duke. Duke has loved you since you were little.”

“Hi. I’m Duke. I really like how beautifully your eyes sparkle in the moonlight. I also really want a cookie.” said Duke as he swung his long brown hair against his sunset skin, and blinked his brown, hazel eyes, while he walked into the kitchen door.

“H-H-Hi. Father! I’m going to the dance with Duke! Forget Philippe!”

Chapter 11: #Princes: Philippe, The Prince, OH! AND DUKE!

“I can’t wait for the ball next week bro. I’ve got a new date.” Said the two princes at the same time.

”You go first” said Philippe.

”No you go first.” said the other prince.    

“Ok. How about we both say her name at the same time?” suggested Philippe.

“Ok. 1, 2, 3!”

“EMILY!”

“Wait wha-” said both boys.

“Hey guys. Just got a new date to the ball. Her name is–” said Duke.

“EMILY!”

“Yeah how did you guys know?”

“Oh just knowing that me and Philippe have the same date, it was just a hunch.”said Edward.

“Wait… So she’s taking us all to the ball? Awesome!”

“No dummy! She dumped us for you!” yelled Edward.

“Oh! Well, You don’t got to be so rude about it! At least I wasn’t the one who got

dumped.” said Duke.

“Yeah well-” started Edward.
“Guys! Guys! Stop fighting! We aren’t supposed to be fighting each other! We’re the fighters! Not the ‘fighties’!”

Chapter 12: #Princess is Mad      

Knock! Knock!

Suddenly the door opened.

“Hello boys. What would you like from Ms. Emily today?” asked one of Emily’s many servants.

“We would like if we could all speak to her at one time.”

“As you wish. Ms. Emily! Your future husbands are here!”

“Ok! Coming Pemberly!”

“Hello Pember-”

“Hello Ms. Emily.” Said all three princes at the same time.

“I can’t believe we all fell for you.”

“Me neither, but you did. So now we will see who wins.”

“Huh?” Said all three boys at the same time.

“You guys are going to play a game. You’re going to… fence over me!”

“Uh… no way we are fighting over you! You’re a coward! Forget you! Go to the ball on your own!” said the three boys firmly, as they walked out the palace door.

“Well that was some visit, wasn’t it Ms. Emily?”

Emily looked at Pemberly. “Yeah! Some visit!!! Hmph!”

Chapter 13: #Prince’s Mother

“I can’t believe Emily! She ruined my son’s life! She will pay for this! All he’s been doing for the past week is eating royal, rocky road ice cream, in a robe, watching TV, and every two minutes, he has new bits of chocolate ice cream in his hair, because parts of the ice cream was too chocolatey for him! I told Emily – well didn’t tell her I told me, but still she’s gonna have to pay! Ooh! I know! I’ll get her at the ball!”

Chapter 14: #Dear Diary,Jester

Dear joke book, I have decided that I am not going to do my jokes at the ball.

It’s just making me feel pressured, I guess. It makes me feel like my mom isn’t my mom anymore. She laughs when I mess up on my joke work, she doesn’t make me lunch anymore, and she tries to eat the whole breakfast before I get down from bed.

I miss her. I wish she didn’t challenge me as much as she does now. I wish she was back.

Signed,

Jester

Chapter 15:# The Ball

“The ball! It’s finally here!” said Emily

“The only thing is I don’t have is a prince,” said Emily all upset.

“I know sweetie. But at least you get to ride in this beautiful glass carriage.”

“Yeah, but it’s not the same!”

Then someone else was on their way to the ball…

“I can’t believe none of us have dates!” said Philippe.

“Yeah well at least we got each other,” said Duke.

“Duke…”

“Yeah?”

“I think thats the first time you said something smart!” said the Prince

“I know right!!!” said Duke, back to the first prince.

While someone was talking another was apologizing…

“Honey… I have to tell you something…” said the Jester’s Mom.

“Yeah, okay! What do you possibly need to say to me?” said the Jester.

“I need to say I’m sorry…”

“What?! Did you just say… sorry?”

“Yeah… I’m your mother, I’m supposed to cheer you on… I’m not supposed to go against you…”

“Thanks mom…”

“You’re welcome… but I want to wish you good luck.”

“Good luck? I thought I told you… I’m not going to do my jokes.”

“What?! No! You have to!”

“Why?”

“Because I’m not gonna do it either!”

“Oh… well…. I’ve decided to be more of son right now then a joker… so let’s just let them have no jester!”

“Now you’re thinking hun! I missed being a team with you….”

“Same,” said the jester.

Chapter 16: #Happily Ever After

Now everyone lived happily ever after… Well of course, except Emily.

The princes all got a date to the ball…at the ball,

The jester and his mother are still working as a hilarious team,

The father of Emily taught his lesson, Emily had no one to go to the ball with.  

Emily also got another lesson taught by the prince’s mother, and Edward’s mother and Emily’s father started dating.

And finally… Duke got to eat a cookie.

“Animal Land” Disaster

Spotty the giraffe had a very long neck to get to her food. She was the only type of animal that can have a very long neck. Spotty lived in Animal Land with her family. Everyone that lived there were animals that could talk. In Animal Land, the animals lived in the same land but there were different habitats, even if you were neighbors. None of the animals in Animal Land were enemies. They were all friends. Spotty lived with her younger sister, Hooves, along with her mother and father. Spotty and her family didn’t live in a house like humans do. They stayed outside on green grass plains. In their habitat, there were acacia trees. There are acacia trees because that was what Spotty and her family ate. Acacia trees were different than other trees because the tree grows flattish on the top where acacia leaves grow. Acacia leaves are very thin and round on the ends, they also have a lot of lumps.

One day, Spotty went with Hooves to see if their neighbor, Blacky the panda, was free to play with them. Blacky the panda lives in a habitat with lots of bamboo. Bamboo are a type of plant that look like a green stick with lines in between. Sometimes bamboo grow leaves on them. The leaves look like long and thin almond shapes. There are lots of bamboos because they climb and eat them. He only lived with his mother and father, he does not have any siblings. Blacky was free, so they went to play. They liked to play with a very bouncy ball. While they were playing Spotty, Hooves, and Blacky heard other animal families talking about how Animal Land was ending the next year. It sounded like it was ending because humans thought the land was useless, because no humans lived there. Humans wanted the land because they wanted to have houses and wanted more people to live in different places. All the animals were worried about when and where they would have to go. They were extremely worried about where they would get their food, because Animal Land was the only land that had the different types of food the animals eat. Spotty was really worried, because no one had told her about this. Spotty wasn’t really sure if her parents knew either, so they went back home quickly, and told their parents. Spotty’s and Hooves’s parents heard something like that before, but they didn’t know if what they heard was true. Their parents have always trusted Spotty and Hooves. So this time when they heard it they believed it, and they hoped it wasn’t a prank. Spotty and her family were trying to think of ideas of what they could do about what was going to happen. One of the ideas they thought about was they gather all the food they could find and store them in small boxes. They decided that they should start doing that, because collecting as much food as they can would take a while. All four of them spread out in different parts of Animal land; they went to different trees and grabbed the leaves off. Because, Giraffes only ate acacia leaves, they had to find that type of trees to get the right food.

On the way Spotty met a human named Lisa. Lisa was someone that lives in a village near Animal Land. She had always loved animals since she was young. She was 36 years old, and she had straight blonde hair with nice blue eyes. She worked as a zookeeper. She was the first and only nice human that Spotty and her family knew. When Spotty first met Lisa, she was nervous about what she was going to do because she had never seen a human before. But after getting to know her better, Lisa became very nice to all the animals. Lisa did not want Animal Land to be gone, because she knew animals actually helped humans. Lisa went to Animal Land once in a while because she loved to see what the animals are up to. Lisa was the only human that did this. Spotty started to talk with Lisa.

“Humans need us! If they need us, they should let us live. We are also living things! We need our habitats! No other place have the things we need! This is the only place we can be! Can you let us stay?!” Spotty said.

“Maybe. I’ll try my best, but I’ll have to see if I can get everyone else to listen to me and see if they will agree that we need animals,” Lisa replied.

“Okay, but come back as soon as you get an answer.”

“I will,” Lisa said as she walks back to her village.

“I think this is enough leaf picking for today. We can continue tomorrow,” Spotty’s parents said.

“Can we go tell Blacky and his family to also collect all their bamboo?” Spotty suggested.

“Sure!” Hooves agreed. They walked back to Blacky’s house.

“Hey, Blacky! Can we tell you and your family something?” Spotty asked politely.

“Sure!” Blacky answered.

“We wanted to give you an idea that you should collect all the bamboo you can find, and store them somewhere; so that you won’t run out of food when Animal Land ends,” Spotty and Hooves suggested.

“What a great idea!” Blacky and his family agreed. “We should start now if it will take a long time,” Blacky continued. Blacky and his family started on their food hunt.

Spotty and her family went back to their own home and decided to rest. They had gotten tired from collecting all their food. After a while, Lisa came back and told them the news.

“I made a speech and some others started to agree and some still disagreed,” Lisa said.

“Oh! So the speech didn’t convince everybody?!” Spotty exclaimed.

“Sorry, I couldn’t. There were people saying we need that land to be a land with humans!” Lisa said sadly.

“Well, you tried your best, didn’t you?” Spotty asked.

“I did what I could. I told them we need animals! We also need humans, but that’s not the only thing we need!” Lisa replied. Then Lisa’s phone started to ring.

RINGGGGGGG RINGGGGG RINGGG.

“Hello?” Lisa answered the phone. It was the mayor!

“The humans over here have agreed to save Animal Land,” the mayor said happily. After Lisa hung up she told them that the mayor said Animal Land wouldn’t get destroyed. The mayor also agreed they should keep Animal Land. The mayor was a very handsome gentleman. He was 52 years old and had made great choices for the world.

“REALLY, REALLY? IF SO, WE MUST TELL EVERY OTHER ANIMAL IN ANIMAL LAND!” Spotty exclaimed. “Let’s go, Hooves!” After they told everyone in Animal Land, some humans started to come in. None of the animals knew what was going on. The animals were a little nervous because they thought it would be something bad. Then when all the animals heard the humans talking, the animals realized the humans were here because they really like the animals. After hearing the humans talk they became very happy. Some of the humans didn’t know how beautiful Animal Land was. Humans finally realized animals were useful because animals gave food to humans, and also some dogs could help the humans who were blind. Now that they knew animals were useful, humans were coming and going, in and out of Animal Land.

Creation Myth (From Dragonfire Saga)

About 100,000,000,000,000,000 years ago, there was nothing but Chaos — the swirling mist in the night sky that served no purpose, for time, space, matter, and antimatter had not been invented yet.

Then, out of Chaos, the first gods and goddesses were born. They are who we call the Great Deities. They are Sukai, god of the sky, Mizu, god of water and the sea, Hono, god of fire, Shitashi, god of death, Hikari, goddess of light, Shizen, goddess of nature, Suta, goddess of the stars, and Senso, goddess of war.

Now, Chaos, also called Konton, feared that he had given birth to those who would overthrow him. They had a radiant glow, and mysterious, deep eyes. So, he took the Great Deities and threw them into Yami, a deep pit, so that they could never overthrow him.

While they were in Yami, six new gods and goddesses were born. They were Taiyo, god of the sun, Uranai, god of divination, Supesu, god of space, Tsuki, goddess of the moon, Romansu, goddess of love, and Jikan, goddess of time. Then, a mysterious being floated down to them.

“I am Kurieita, your mother. Your father Konton fears he may be overthrown, and so has thrown you in this dark pit. I can help you get out,” said Kurieita.

Sukai agreed and quickly took leadership of the group, and, led by him, they escaped Yami and rose against their father, Konton. When Konton saw the fourteen gods and goddesses rising up against him, he fled.

Now the gods and goddesses were free. With help from Supesu and Jikan, space and time were created. Finally, order could be made out of the chaos, and thus the world we know as Chikyu was created. Finally, the gods and goddesses created us. And, as a response to human wish, they created the five magical orbs of fire, water, earth, light, and darkness to power our magic. All our spells are kept in our sacred book, the Kodai, or the Ancient Tome. And thus the universe was created.

Mr. Mobster

I am evil. Then again, I seem to be the only one who thinks so. Don’t hate me; I’ve never killed someone or anything, but I’m still evil. Ever since I was a kid, I’ve wanted to be like my dad was, working at the coolest job in the world. He is (drumroll please…) HEAD OF THE MAFIA! At this point, if you’re one of the people thinking: “Oh my God, your dad is the head of the organization that has killed people and then used that as an excuse to kill even more people!” then stop reading right now.

But if you’re thinking to yourself: “That does sound kind of cool,” or even, “Why would you find that cool?” than bear with me. I’m not sure what the best part about my dad’s job is: the cool clothes and cars, the parties (I know, this might come as a big surprise but Mafia parties are awesome), the hats, the people, or just the pure…evilness. Anyway, I’ve been trying all my life just to get to do all of these things, but to no avail. I just don’t get how I’m “not evil enough.” What do they want me to do, bring in some dead bodies? Is it that Zander isn’t an evil enough name? I would literally give anything just to be a desk jockey (even those get cool hats and AK-47s).

I actually have a few friends who are also trying to get into the Mafia, with the same result. My first friend is Blake. When he was little, he would have totally been allowed into the kid Mafia (although then again, what did they use, shovels?) because he was always beating people up and feeding their homework to the dog (ironic, right?). But he is kind of sensitive (totally un-Mafia) and so when his parents found out, he never hurt anyone again.

Then there is Dominic: he is the brainiac that comes up with evil schemes and stuff. Sounds like he would totally get into the Mafia, right? WRONG. The Mafia does not need brains because this is their general rule of thumb: Take machine gun. Get people. Put people in a room. Spin around while shooting. Get as many people as you can. Oh, and don’t forget the evil grin. See any “evil schemes” there?

If you do, you’re totally overthinking it.

Then there is James. He is the explosives freak. Too much if you ask me. Quick story: his science fair project made every student evacuate the school. His Instagram account is full of videos of stuff exploding. He will post anything as long as it’s exploding. I know. We’re a weird group. At least everyone is evil (ish). Anyway, we’re meeting up tomorrow to decide what to do.

 

One day later…

 

“You still bein’ evil?” asks Blake with his usual excitement.

“You still not punchin’ anyone?” I reply (as always).

“But what if my par–”

“OKAY, I GET IT.”

Then suddenly, Blake’s pet sheep Al (you probably know why he named him that) comes next to us. Actually, I think that if anyone in our group were to go to the Mafia, it would be Al. Anyway, it turns out that Dominic called us here for an important meeting.

“Okay,” says Dominic. “Time for your weekly confidence booster: Al could probably overthrow the Mafia before you guys even got a job as a desk jockey. Anyway, I called you here to tell you something. How many times have you registered to join the Mafia?”

“Twenty,” we say in unison.

“I’m sorry guys, but I think it’s time to give up. Before you attack me, let’s remember that I’m the genius here.”

“WHAT?!?” we scream in unison again.

“We have dedicated our lives to this,” I bellow.

“As I said earlier, Al could overthrow the Mafia before you guys even became desk jockeys,” replies Dominic calmly.

“Hey, wait,” says Blake. “That’s not a bad idea. If we can’t join the Mafia, we could try to overthrow them. And you’ve already admitted that Al could overthrow the Mafia. What do we have to lose?”

“Huh! We would need a miracle to do that!” snaps Dominic.

“Well, if an evil genius, an explosive maniac, the son of the ex-head of the Mafia, a 300 pound 6’6” kid who refuses to hit a fly and a psychopath sheep that could beat the heavyweight wrestling champion in a few seconds isn’t a miracle, then what is?” says James, speaking for the first time.

“So your big scheme is based on a goat?!” says Dominic.

“Well, I guess it won’t be based on you!” I respond.

“Oh my God, you guys are crazy! But if you’re in, I’m in,” says Dominic. “But that doesn’t mean you’re not crazy.”

After many months of planning (well if it hadn’t been for Dominic, we would have attacked already, but, are you gonna argue with an evil genius?) we began. Everyone was nervous, except for Al (yes, even Dominic for once.) The plan had started.

James and I snuck down to the front door. We were worried, but then we heard it — a crack from behind the guards.

“OW! What the hell was that? I hire all these guards and then I’m injured by a chair!” squealed the guard captain.

Distracted by their injured captain, we managed to sneak the cake onto the desk. To be honest, we did a good job baking the cake…and setting the knock-out gas explosives.

“What’s this?” said one of the guards.

“‘To the wonderful guards of everyone’s favorite organization.’ Wonder who it’s from?” said one of the guards.

“What are we waiting for? Let’s dig in! I’m so hungry I could explode!” said a (significantly) chubbier guard.

Speaking of explosions…BOOM, CRACK, SMASH!

“Wow, great job James, just like clockwork,” I say high-fiving my friend. I radio in to Dominic: “Step 1, complete.”

“Good job. Blake is sneaking through the pipes now,” replies Dominic.

“How did you switch the chairs?” I asked.

“I didn’t. I just used aerodynamics. Would you like to learn how I did it?”

“No. Anyway, why are you sending Blake? He will make a lot of noise, after all, he is 200 lbs.”

“What else would he do? He wouldn’t throw a punch to save his life.”

“Fine, you win. We need to get going.”

“Roger that.”

Sigh. He’s so professional sometimes.

We took off for the secret passage my dad showed me when he was the leader, where he would meet Al (yes, sumo-goats are smart too.) Thump, thump, crack!

That must be Al, I thought to myself. Thank god I knew this passage, or the guards would have heard the bomb and found us. Luckily, that was just what we wanted. We took the passage behind the guard and (sorta) stealthily snuck behind them.

“Hey Al, want some carrots?” I whispered, and threw a bag of carrots at the guards.

“Those poor guards,” chuckled James.

Al went into rage mode (like the Al he was named after) and charged after the carrots (and therefore, the unexpecting guards). Soon, all the guards were on the ground being licked by the soon-to-be head of the Mafia. That’s got to have been bad for their self-esteem. We continued on, past the bodies scattered by the bomb and Al. Crackle.

I assumed it was a message from Dominic.

“Blake is almost there, what’s your status?”

“Doing fine. Al just took out the guards.”

“Great.”

Suddenly, we heard a noise. Like a click. Then thumping from behind us.

“DUCK!” I screamed.

Bullets fly across our heads.

“ROLL!”

I took them to a statue, and put in the secret code. The trapdoor opened up. We jumped in and blocked the entrance.

Just before we ducked in I spied who was chasing us. Big problem. It was head of security, who knew all the passageways by heart. We ran down the moldy halls of the tunnel until we reached a secret bunker. The head of security is always armed with a least two guns and a knife. Yikes. Even Al couldn’t beat that.

Crackle!

“Dominic!” I phoned in. “We got a fully armed head of security on our tails. Well, Al is the only one with a tail, but you know what I mean.”

“Doesn’t James have any explosives.”

I felt so dumb.

“Right. Of course he does,” I replied. “But wait a minute. He only has real explosives, not knock out gas.”

“Uh oh. Big problem. I’ll try to think of something. Try to keep him at bay.”

Then I had an idea.

“Dominic, do you have the building floorplan right now?”

“Yeah, why?”

“We’re in the secret tunnel under the statue. What is the wall behind us made out of?”

“Hey, not a bad idea. It’s made out of wood, you could blast us to the moon!”

James and I finish setting up the explosives just in time. *CRACK* The trapdoor

broke. *CRACK* The wall explodes.

“Grab Al and run!” I screamed.

The security guard is stunned by the blast, and must wait a little before he pursues us. That “little” makes all the difference.

“We literally just escaped the frickin’ head of security!” I screamed at James. “Bro hug!”

There are a surprising amount of times when I’m actually glad he’s an explosive freak.

We run with all our might, and soon we are out of breath. Well, except for Al. We take off towards the office, aware that the security guard would soon be on our heels.

“Blake, how are you doing?” I said over the radio.

“Doin’—” CLANK! “—Ow!” Thump. “Blake is down!”

“Come on, Dominic! Something has happened to Blake!” I said over my shoulder.

One problem. The only way to get to the pipes is back at the main entrance, where all the guards and commotion are. Wait hold up. Why am I doing this? This is Dominic’s job!

“Dominic! We got problems. Blake is down. The only entrance to the pipes is at the main entrance, where the guards are,” I practically screamed into the mic.

“James is out of explosives?” he replied calmly.

“Using explosives would destroy the water pipes, creating a flood.”

“Not gonna argue with our building expert. Anyway, just abandon him and invade the office yourselves.”

“YOU’RE JUST GONNA ABANDON ONE OF YOUR BEST FREAKIN’ FRIENDS?! ARE YOU NUTS?!”

“No, I’m just logical.”

“You know what? To hell with it! I don’t need you. I’ll just come up with my own plan, like I did when we were being chased by the head of security. We ca–”

“Speaking of the head of security, look behind you.”

Oh my god. This whole Blake incident completely made me forget about the head of security.

“Worrying about your little friend?” he chuckles.

“What did you do with Blake?” I scream at him.

“Nothing. The kid had lost his way in the pipes. He couldn’t do any harm. I just stole his poorly hidden mic. He’ll probably starve before he leaves. You and that little creature there, however, are a much bigger threat. That’s why I’m here.”

So this is how it ends? Are you kidding me? We are so close! It can’t—

Hey, wait a minute. Blake got lost? Blake never loses his way. Not even if you spin him around and make him drink wine. Then, I saw something. Just a glimpse. All of a sudden Blake is running full speed at the man threatening our lives. BAM! The head of security hits the ground. Immediately, Al is all over him.

“Good boy!” says Blake.

James and I are still stunned at this incredible turn of events.

“How? What? When? How?” we say in unison.

“Invasion first, questions later,” says Blake.

He looks nervous that he finally hit someone, but a see a smile creeping up his cheeks.

“Your parents will understand,” I say. That is, if they even find out.

Now that I think about this, I realize I forgot something important from an earlier scene (not the kind of thing that will change your life, but, important nonetheless). Blake was nervous about this whole invasion thing in the first place. Like, if his parents get mad when he hits someone, they probably might not be too happy if he’s the head of the Mafia. Anyway, we agreed to leave his name out of it, but still allow him to rule with us. Like an anonymous ruler. That’s what makes this so incredible (I still can’t get over the fact that I forgot this.)

Back to the story: We charged down the hallway, our final destination and soon-to-be office straight ahead. We opened the door…and inside was my dad. Just kidding! This is NOT Star Wars. Anyway, we open the door and…no one is inside. No, seriously. Where is the head of the Mafia?! Where?! Oh wait. How many times am I supposed to feel like the dumbest person in the world today? It’s twelve o’clock. The head of the Mafia is on his lunch break. We would be heads of the Mafia right now if it weren’t for a stinkin’ LUNCH BREAK!

“Uh, guys? Is it me, or is there no more head of the Mafia?” says James anxiously.

“He’s on his lunch break,” I replied.

“WHAT?!” everyone screamed in unison.

“Not even joking,” I grumbled.

“But what’s the big deal? You worried he will kill us with a tuna sandwich?” said Blake, although he still looked worried himself.

“The guards might have had a chance to warn him, and our whole plan will be ruined,” said James.

“Thanks, Mr. Positive,” snapped Blake.

“He has a point. We have to think fast. We not going to get defeated by the fact that the head of the Mafia needs a tuna sandwich, are we?” I said.

“I’ll think. But first, why are we obsessed by the idea of the head of the Mafia only eating tuna sandwiches?” I said.

He simultaneously received two kicks in the shins.

“What was that — ?!”

“THINK!” I screamed.

We heard thumps coming from the hall.

“Into the bathroom!” I cried.

We charged in, grabbing Al along the way. The thumps come inside the office.

“And how did these invaders take out all the guards with a SHEEP?! Stevenson, I want the truth!”

“But this is — ”

“Well even if this is true, that makes you the worst guards of all time. You’re all fired!”

The guard glumly walked out, ready to bring this news to his fellow guards.

“Okay guys, this is the plan: we sneak out –” I begin.

“And blow it up?” finishes — wait, do I really need to say who?

“No. We must get him captive. We’ll offer him his job or his life.”

“Right,” said James, sounding bummed.

“And we use Al?” asked Blake.

“That’ll be fun. It’ll make him pity the guard he fired!” I replied.

We snuck outside, behind the head. We can’t resist making a funny face when he’s not looking. We must be careful, I mean, he’s has a GRENADE CANNON for crying out loud.

“BAAAAA!” bleats Al.

The head turns around fully armed.

“I should have expect ― ”

SMASH!

And all of a sudden the head is crumpled on the floor, in a fetal position. I then notice the huge piece of plaster on top of him.

“What the…” I said, dumbfounded.

*Crackle* It’s Dominic!

“Did you—”

“Yes. I took into consideration what you said. I didn’t abandon you. Would you like to hear the Rube Goldberg invention that inspired me?”

“Sure. We owe you,” I responded.

After a long time enjoyed in our new office, the ex-head finally came to. First he was annoyed we ate his tuna sandwich (yes I know, it’s really true), but then he realized he had bigger problems (he was bound and gagged with his own grenade launcher aimed at him). Of course, he ended up giving in, and giving up his leadership, as Blake hid cowering in the bathroom hoping the ex-head wouldn’t see his face and tell anyone.

A few months later…

 

We did it. We finally finished. We have overcome life’s two biggest obstacles: overthrowing the Mafia, and understanding Dominic’s explanation of aerodynamics. Jokes aside, that was so totally awesome! I still can’t believe we did that. Also, I wanted to thank all of you who were skeptical at the beginning, but still bore with me. Hope you enjoyed my story. Have to go now…Mafia cupcake pet show party starts soon.

Story Told Backwards

My name is Neal Bhasin and I’m 10 years old and I am going to tell you a different kind of story. At my 10th birthday party, we had a game truck and a laser tag game at my house. After that, we went to have some cake, then we went to play dodgeball. Reader, before we move forward, we have to go backwards.

A couple days before that, we had to buy the dodgeballs from the store for the dodgeball game. The problem was we had to find out where we could find the dodgeballs. But all the sports stores didn’t have them. I was really nervous that we couldn’t get the dodgeballs for the party, and it would be a total disaster for the party. Luckily my mom had one of my school’s coach’s number, and she called him up to get the dodgeballs from the school. Finally we got the dodgeballs from my school then took them to my house. Now I’m here writing for you about my life.

I’m going to go back to my 9th birthday. We had a party at Lazer Tag and this time it was actually at the building instead of at my house. It was a fun party with all my friends and my family members. The next school year I was scared for my first day of school. Then I found out that I was in Miss Asker’s homeroom, Miss Ochoa’s reading, and Miss Roth’s math class. During that school year’s winter break and last year’s spring break, my family and I went to Mammoth and we skied. It was fun skiing in Mammoth, but after 11:30 the slopes got really slushy. Then during spring break we went to Snow Park, Salt Lake City, Utah. We skied there and I did a jump that was there. It was really fun going through the air. Later that year during the summer we went to Australia and New Zealand. We went to many different types of places like Auckland, Queensland, Queenstown, New South Wales, Sydney, Cairns, and Rotorua. We had a lot of fun during our trip seeing all the ways that our culture is different than Australia’s.

Now I’m going to go back to my 8th birthday. Reader, I’m going to put in some spice in the story to change it up a little. I was scared for the first day of third grade, until I found out I was in Miss Kaplan’s homeroom and reading and Miss Roth’s math class again. During the school year it was very fun and one of my friends came to me for advice about his girlfriend. Because he didn’t know what to do, I told him to back off a little bit and he did and it’s working out fine with him and his girl. That same year, I kept on getting injured and so I kept on going to my school’s nurse’s office. When my mom got all of these nurse’s slips back she thought that I really liked one of the nurses there, but no, I didn’t. It was just what they gave us crackers and the best flavored Gatorade — fruit punch.

During winter break we went to India and I met the rest of my family. We went to different parts of India like New Delhi and Mumbai. We went and watched a cricket game: India versus Pakistan. We went to my mom’s and her brother’s school and met one of her college friends. The friend had a daughter that was about my age.

During the summer of 2011, when I was 6, we went to Peru so my brother could show off his Spanish skills to my mom. We went to do some shopping and my brother was able to bargain and translate. We were getting ready to go on a hike up the side of a mountain to this thing called The Sun Gate. We started off like it was a nice smooth trail and me and my dad went farther and farther up the hill and people going down were so impressed by this little kid going up the hill. And so many people asked me how old I was and I said, “Six,” and they said, “Wow, how young you are and you’re going up this hill.”

We went up this trail farther to The Sun Gate and my dad took some photos standing in front of The Sun Gate.The Sun Gate was so beautiful I cannot describe it. I can’t even remember it, just it was beautiful. We decided to go back down around 12:30. We started heading down and it was a lot harder going down than coming up. The sun was going farther and farther and farther down. Finally, we reached the end of the trail around 7:50 while the sun was setting. Reader, that is all I want to say to you this time.

 

To be continued…

The Willow Tree

Part 1:  The Seven Witches

 

Long ago, there was a tree. A weeping willow tree. And it was just a pretty normal tree. Its leaves turned red, yellow, and brown in the fall; all the leaves fell off and the tree became bare in winter; the leaves bloomed back in springtime; and the tree shone the most bright in summer.

But one day, a troop of witches went walking through the woods, all old, and cackling their witchy laughs loudly. They spotted the tree.

“Well, lookie here,” said a witch.

“Looks like a mighty good one, if you ask me,” said another.

“We should do something to it,” said a witch mischievously.

“Maybe put a curse.” A witch rubbed her hands diabolically together.

“Who’s ever heard of a talking tree?” a small, frail witch blurted out.

“I haven’t,” said a rather plump witch.

All the seven witches, sisters in fact, looked at each other and each grinned a horrific smile.

The leader, it seemed, said, “Sisters! Cast the blabber spell!”

Each witch chanted, “Willow! Willow! Turn it into Willow!”

The leader said in a deep voice, “Let this talking tree, amaze and terrify everyone who sees it!”

The witches cheered in agreement and walked on, cackling again.

 

Part 2:  Willow, the Talking Tree Grew

 

“Hi everybody!” I said as a group of tourists were walking towards me. “I’m Willow, and…”

“Aaahhh!” the tourists screamed and ran.

I sighed. Everyone always did that. But I was used to it.  I’m 100 years old, but really I’m seven. I’m seven because I was cursed by witches to talk, but the witches didn’t know that the spell had “living forever” side effects. I don’t know. I woke up one morning and thought to myself, “A brand new day to look sharp.” Then I realized that I said that out loud, and you can imagine my shock. But I’ve had 97 years of experience, so I’m ok now.

Some kids were talking and chatting, and their voices grew louder as they were walking towards me. “Hey, kids!” I shouted.

“Who said that?” asked a heavy boy with a jersey and short hair.

“Me!” I said cheerily. I was glad that none of them had run away. Yet. “I’m Willow,” I continued. “And I’m…”

“It’s that tree!” interrupted a geeky looking boy with glasses. “I’ve read in myths that talking trees can grab you and strangle you till you die!”

“Ah!” said the jersey boy. “Run for your lives!”

The two boys ran, but there was a girl, and she stayed put in her place on the soft grass.  Her name was Lily.

A talking tree? Not likely. But if it is, I don’t believe in those stupid myths. It seems like a nice tree to me. I bet everyone runs away from that tree, and I bet that makes the tree really sad. I should talk to her. Or him?

“Um…hello?” I said nervously.

“Hi!” said the tree. “I don’t know if you heard me before because of those boys, but my name is Willow.”

“Willow?” I repeated. “Cool name.”

“Thank you!” said Willow.

I saw Willow’s branches turn a bit pink. “I’m guessing you’re blushing right now,” I said with a smile.

“Maybe,” said Willow, and her branches turned bright red. After a moment, though, Willow’s branches returned to normal.

“What’s your name?” Willow asked.

“I’m Lily,” I said, “and I have two older brothers. You probably saw them running away.”

“Yeah,” said Willow a little sadly.

“I’m seven,” I said.

“Me too!” interrupted Willow excitedly. “Except I’m really 100,” she said kind of sternly. “What do you mean?” I asked curiously.

 

Part 3:  Willow

 

“I mean,” I said, “Well, long story.”

“Please, can I hear it? I have lots of time,” said Lily hopefully.

“Fine,” I said.

Lily smiled brightly and sat down on the grass, as if she was already expecting a story.

“Long ago, I was a tree. I wasn’t a talking tree. Just a regular tree.”  Lily was listening intently, I could tell that. “I lived a very boring life. I couldn’t talk, and all my thoughts were shared with me, myself, and I,” I continued. “But when I was seven, some witches came along and turned me into a talking tree. One of the words in the spell that they cast was ‘Willow,’ so I guess that they named me that when they cast the spell.”

Lily nodded curiously and frowned. “Why would they name you that?” asked Lily.

“I don’t know,” said Willow thoughtfully. “But anyway, I was thinking something and realized that I had said it out loud! I was so shocked.”

“You must have been,” said Lily kindly.

“Yes,” I said. “But, I thought talking would be awesome! It wasn’t. Every time I talked, whether it was a group of tourists or some kids, they would all run away. And it’s been like that for 97 years.”

Lily looked at Willow sadly but said, “Why 97 years? Why that long?”

“Well, I guess the side effect of the spell was to live forever, but the witches probably didn’t know that.”

“No they probably didn’t,” added Lily.

“Yeah,” I said, “and to this day, when I shout out ‘Hi!’, everyone starts screaming and running away. I bet the witches wanted to make me feel sad.”

“Yeah,” said Lily sadly.

But my face brightened. “I have you, though!” I said cheerily. “You didn’t run away. You were smart and courageous. I don’t think think you believed that boy with the glasses, right?”

“Of course not!” said Lily with a happy smile. “I don’t believe in that kind of stuff anyway.”

“Good. Me neither,” I said.

 

Part 4: Lily

 

As I sat on the soft green grass, looking at the tree, I felt a rush of happiness. I was really glad I could cheer up a tree, and furthermore make a friend. This tree here was a complete miracle, straight out of The Wizard of Oz. I was still really shocked that I was sitting here, talking to a talking tree! I needed to get to know her more.

“What do you like to do?” I asked.
“Well,” said Willow, “nothing really. Standing, maybe?”

Right then and there, I felt so bad for Willow. She was right. That was a stupid question to ask because she really does nothing. Oy! What a life!

“I’d do anything to trade places with you,” I said sadly, but with a smile on my face.

Willow blushed extra extra bright red. “Aw,” said Willow, “I wish.”

Willow and I traded sad looks.

“I have an idea!” I shouted.

“Geez, what’s the hubbub?” said Willow annoyingly.

“I’m gonna get you a new hobby!” I said excitedly.

“A new hobby?” asked Willow, confused. “I don’t have any.”

“I’ll make you a new hobby!” I said happily. I jumped up from my seat and skipped on the grass. “Let’s see…” I said. “Hmmm…what’s there to do in the woods? Oh! You can pick flowers? Try it!”

“Okaaayyy,” said Willow hesitantly.

“There’s a patch of flowers right there.” I pointed to a nearby patch within her reach.

WIllow’s branches started to stretch out to the flowers. I watched in awe. Willow’s vines then grabbed about four flowers and pulled back. Willow smiled. “For you, madame,” she said, holding out the flowers to me.

“Thanks!” I said, taking the flowers and grasping them tightly in my hand.

“I like that hobby!” said Willow. “Let’s do it!”

A Peculiar Predicament

The sun glistened brightly with glory and freedom, just like the thousands of hearts that it had granted life to. The butterflies wafted across the bright blue sky, graceful like the mist that encircled them. Everything was submerged in happiness at this astonishing era in time, leaving the world devoid of any peril that had left us wretched before. I too was born during this happy era, with many unusual characteristics which gave way to happenings that would change my life forever.

Early in my life I was born in New York City, in 1821, in a poor family that had mainly happiness to bond them together. I was the youngest of three children, who had thus far lived for ten years, in the small house that our family could afford. I had all the trappings of a normal childhood, furnished with the joy of school, books and friends. I was unusually curious about the world that I lived in, constantly marveling at the assortment of plants and animals within my reach. My mother was fine with me going out of the house alone, as long as I kept a small iron pistol with me to protect myself from any person that might try to harm me. My curiosity proved to be a great characteristic for school, as the teacher would raise my grades tremendously. But one day I pushed the limit.

In the summer, when I was meandering around the park looking for plant samples to study, I came across a putrid little flower that was filled with a foul odor and disease. It was limp, lying in the distance, too far for me to reach safely. However, my curiosity goaded me to go on, and that is what I did, trudging through the underbrush until the flower was just a yard and a half away. I gently touched the flower, retaining its feel like that of a rotten fruit and the color of the rain clouds in the sky. Suddenly, a bolt of lightning struck the decayed flower, right in front of me, reducing it to charred tendrils of broken leaves. I leapt back in fright, running instinctively towards my left, in the direction I knew my home was.

I suddenly realized I was mistaken, and that I was running in the wrong direction. I sat down hopelessly, looking at the sky, exhausted, crying as much as the rain that was falling all around me. I, for the first time, experienced fright and it struck me as hard as the lightning that fell before me. Too tired to do anything, I laid down in the dirt and fell asleep, my mind fogged by the thought of what my day had become. The next morning, I awoke from my dreamy trance. I was lying in the same spot in the same lawn of last night. The only difference between both days was that the lawn was now filled with minute droplets of water that peppered the ground like flowers in a meadow. I realized my position and continued walking towards the north in search of my home. I stumbled through fallen boughs from trees, bloody carcasses of small animals and much, much, more until I came upon a small city-like place that was just in my sight. Again, my curiosity got me into trouble.

I ran toward the city, my heart once again enlightened by the thought of meeting another human being. I ran through the grass as fast as I could. One structure seemed to stand out, larger and grander as I came closer and closer. The structure was a castle made of four large walls, each composed of the finest marble. Embedded in the marble was a medley of jewels of various sizes, each a 100 times more mammoth than any jewel that I had ever seen. I ran through the doorway, looking with the utmost envy at all the jewels that dotted the walls. The corridor seemed to be endless, but still, with each step I became more elated and energetic. Soon, I emerged from the other side of the hallway, face to face with an object that would put anyone into a trance. It was large and diamond-shaped, with a small door as an opening. Its color was of a bright blue pigment just like that of a diamond. I approached the doorway, unsure as to whether I should to enter it. My mind was a medley of thoughts, one of them urging me to go on.

However, my curiosity was overwhelmed by my common sense, and I pushed myself to turn back around – which I began to regret, as soon as I did. As I turned, a ten feet long iron-headed spear appeared just a few inches from my face. The bearer, a soldier, emerged from the shadows, clad in a tough sheet of metal cloth. His face seemed to be made out of molten rock that warped constantly into different shapes. I turned around to run, but was stopped by another spear that emerged from the darkness, and then very soon was surrounded by spears, all of them looking more jagged than ever. Trying to suppress my fright, I pulled out my pistol and fired without hesitation at one of the savage faces, but the bullet surprisingly melted on its path toward the face and then just sunk lightly into the face upon collision. I was weighed down by hopelessness and fatigue, and so I gave up and just stood there without doing anything.

The soldiers finally stopped coming forward but looked menacing nevertheless, and with their spears held high it looked like nothing had been altered. I still exhaled a sigh of relief at the prospect of death that I had so nearly missed. Then, the soldiers nodded to each other with their disfigured faces and brought me through another set of corridors to a jail cell. This cell was filled with rotten bones aplenty, and was not any place fit for a human to stay in, but I followed them with utmost haste, as this was heaven compared to the torture those spears could induce. They then shut the bars down and began speaking in low, solemn voices, indistinguishable to my ears, but I was already so tired I was ready to faint. I was thinking about all of the events that could have resulted in my death, and how anxious my parents would be, hoping all day that I would appear, as I always do at their door, unfazed by any scoundrels that populate our city like the worms in a garden. I drifted into sleep, away from home once again, dreaming about the room that I would be in if it weren’t for my curiosity.

I don’t know if I had been sleeping for a day or a year but I awoke to the sound of spears hitting the bars of my cell. The soldiers seemed to be beckoning me to follow them. I followed, still frightened by their spears and their insusceptibility to my bullets. They then took me through another long corridor, which opened up into the most astonishing room I had seen so far. This room was almost completely occupied by an immense throne, more than two times larger than the house in which I lived in. On the throne was seated a middle aged man, a king of some sort, who didn’t seem that powerful at first glance. He wielded a small spear that was enveloped in a glistening sheath of emerald green particles. The sheath was astonishing to the eye, and I was amazed that nature could conjure such an object.

“Who are you who dared to scamper upon my property?” he said in a booming voice.

I shuddered out of my awe and responded to his question in the most innocent voice that I could muster, “I am just an innocent….” – but the man stopped me before I could speak.

“You are no innocent, for it is obvious that you came upon me intentionally.” Then the man aimed his spear at my heart. I suddenly realized his intent and leapt out of the way in the split second that he shot the spear. A small lightning bolt that struck the ground where I once stood showed me what my fate could have been. I dodged the oncoming lightning bolts, each one giving me more motivation to run faster until with one final effort, I started to run towards the corridor, for it seemed the safest place for me to run to. I ran constantly without halting or stopping, the cries of the guards humming in my ears as painful as the strongest bite a bee can induce.

Finally, the end of the corridor appeared, leading out into the room containing the diamond with a small doorway, which I had seen on my first arrival. Quickly realizing that my only hope was to go into that diamond, I executed the thought into action, and in a fragment of a second, I was inside of it, fright relentlessly pouring down my back like the sweat drops in a race. In my fright and haste, I was oblivious to what was happening within the diamond, as the diamond wasn’t stationary, but instead it traveled through the air at an immense speed through the castle-like structure to another part of its huge interior.

In a few seconds the diamond capsule arrived at another station just like the one I had left, which was a problem because of the guards. I could hear the guards’ tough voices talking to each other through the clean, untouched glass-like exterior of the diamond capsule that lay in between us. “We aliens have traveled to earth for a quiet, peaceful life, and that is what we enjoyed for three thousand years. But now it seems that the planet is getting dangerously hot, too hot for us to survive. We must move back to Neptune, the place in which we originated. Our ship will be ready in two to three days.” I shuddered, for all along I never suspected that I was in the captivity of aliens. I had to get home.

After a few prolonged minutes of fright, I stepped out of the capsule. One of the alien organisms was walking down the corridor; his face seemed not as deformed as the others. I took a deep breath and walked up to him, knowing that this was my only hope, to find a way out of this place even if he would probably kill me or send me back to the King. Then, I happened to notice a spear abandoned on the ground beside me. Quickly picking up the spear, I said, “Hello,” and then grabbed his arm, threatening to smite the spear into his heart. “I am a newcomer and would like to know about your species,” I offered. He conceded and gave me a bit of information about his species, knowledge as precious to me as the diamonds that hung on the walls. He told me that their species originated in the planet of Neptune. They had tried to adapt to the terrible conditions there at first, but then they moved to Earth, a relatively close planet that contained the perfect resources for their survival. He also said that the capsule would lead me to the exit.

Then I released him very rapidly and ran, so that when he attempted to kill me with a slash of his spear I was already at a distance. I was running as fast as I could through the hallways, thinking about why the guards wanted to kill me. Maybe it was because they feared us humans and thought that if I were to leave this place, I would spread the word to my fellow humans and the humans would kill them. I also then realized that I still did not know where the exit was and thus began running down corridors after corridors, as unsure about my position as a blind man.

Finally, after hours and hours of searching, I ended up in the King’s room and thought that my only hope now was to make a deal with the King. The flower, I thought, was the key. If not for the flower and the lightning, how would I have been able to see this city and its residents? The flower must have been related to these alien organisms. I walked into the King’s chamber with an expression like one chiseled from stone, death now becoming an option that I would relish.

I seated myself in front of the King’s placid expression, his arm raising the spear higher with each step that I took. “I have come to make a deal with you, if you will bring me back to my home.”

“And that deal is what?” he asked in a daunting voice.

“It is that I will tell you about your flower and what happened to it if you bring me back to my home.” Everyone gasped and even the king looked perplexed.

“My flower – you know where it is?” he asked in a voice much more placid voice than he had used for the previous question.

“Yes, I do, and will tell you only if you make the deal.”

“Describe the flower to me,” he said.

“It was black and withered and ridden with rot and disease,” I replied.

“Okay,” the King said, becoming less suspicious. “I will make the deal.”

“Now tell me what happened to the flower,” he asked.

“It was struck by lightning and destroyed to smithereens,” I replied. Everyone around me breathed a sigh of relief, even the King.

“Fine. I will teleport you back to your house, if you promise not to talk about our civilization to anyone.”

“I promise,” I said as I offered my solemn pact, and in a millionth of a second I was back in my house.

The Great Bird Colonies

There were BILLIONS of colonies of birds, but the two most popular were Ravenshine and Gryffinsmelt. At the Bird Olympics, Ravenshine always came in first and Gryffinsmelt came in second. Some of the sports were who can fly the best (Gryffinsmelt won that), who is the smartest (Ravenshine won that), who is the loudest (Ravens really are loud). The worst of all the teams from the bird colonies was Chickencroon.

Chickencroon was the worst because they weren’t really that loud, they couldn’t fly, and they weren’t very smart — in fact, you know how people say “chickened out?” Well, they say that because of the Chickencroons. The Chickencroons have beaks and flapping feathers like the other birds, but they can’t fly. The Chickencroons are also known as the Chickens of Terribleness because they’re so terrible. The Awful Chicken is the leader of all the chickens in the world. The Awful Chicken is in the royal family so he has to be the leader. The other chickens call him “Awful Chicken” behind his back because he’s such a careless ruler. But he doesn’t know they say that.

The chicken coup is where Awful Chicken and his family live is in a barn in Westchester. The royal chicken coup is owned by a farmer named Old McDonald, his god awful brother named Joe, and his crazy daredevil of a wife, Jane.

Maraie was the only daughter of the terrible chicken and instead of living luxuriously like her brothers, her mother, and her father, she was used as a servant. A very poor one, too. She slept on an itchy haystack while the others slept on the softest feathers Maraie could find. She traveled far and wide to get whatever they wanted because they asked her to. She never talked back and was very grateful, unlike her family. She was treated as a servant because they didn’t mean to have her. Her mother laid another egg and she wasn’t supposed to. They didn’t really want her. They only wanted the three sons, who they loved, but they wanted nothing to do with Maraie. Maraie’s life was miserable and sad. They never let her have the toys her brothers got, and the only thing she had was a doll made out of rags. Every Christmas, she  would get one toy, but it wasn’t really a toy. She would get a sewing kit, (some string, rags, and needles) for Christmas and for her birthday she didn’t really get anything. All she got was a five-minute break, and that’s the time she had to make the doll.

Later that day, Maraie was running errands when a piece of paper flew into her face. She quickly pulled it off. It was an ad to buy tickets for the Bird Olympics. Maraie had never heard of this Bird Olympics! The poster said it was the most important thing to the chicken colonies, and that they were in last place in all of the bird colonies. Maraie was outraged because nobody ever told her about the Great Bird Olympics. Wouldn’t you be mad if, ya know, your colony or your city or whatever had something super super important and no one ever told you?

She said, “Oh my god, all of these things I can do very, very well. Because in all my years of serving my family, I’ve done all these things and I’ve practiced them so much that they’re very easy for me. Like flying, shouting, and thinking good thoughts.”

She went to her father, the king, and said, “Nobody ever told me about the Great Bird Olympics. I just found out about it on my way here!”

The King muttered to his wife, “How did she find out?”

His wife whispered back, “I don’t know.”

The King spat out, “How did you find out, peasant?”

“Well, I was walking down the street when a flyer hit me right in the beak. It was flyer for the Great Bird Olympics and I didn’t know about it so I came back here to ask you about it.”

Then there was a long pause… then Maraie asked, “May I please compete in the Olympics representing  Chickencroon?!”

“NO!” said the King and Queen at once. “Even if you were royal, even then, you wouldn’t be allowed because only men can go!”

Then Maraie left.

As she walked outside she saw morning glory flowers blooming and she said, “Wait a minute, is it Spring? It is the first day of Spring, and the first day of Spring is my birthday!”

Then she rushed back into the castle. She said, “Oh it’s my birthday, that means I get five minutes off, right?”

The King said, “Fine. I can have other servants go fetch the milk. Now go on with yourself and make sure it’s only five minutes!”

Then she rushed back to her tiny little cottage. She got her needles and her rags to sew a costume. She tied back her fluffy feathers and put on the costume. She looked at herself in her dirty cracked mirror. She looked nothing like herself. She looked like a boy. She went back to the castle.

She went on her knees and asked, in front of the King and Queen, “Oh may I please represent Chickencroon in the Great Bird Olympics?”

The Queen and King asked, “Fly for me! Squawk for me! Answer our son’s homework.”

She did these and aced them.

The Queen and King answered, “Yes! Yes! What is your name?”

She hesitated. “Maximus the Great!”

The King and Queen said, “OK Maximus, the Great Bird Olympics are tomorrow.”

“Tomorrow? I thought it was a year from now!” said Maraie (Maximus the Great).

“Oh yeah, the date changed,” said the King and Queen. “So beat it and go train!”

So Maraie rushed out of there as fast as she could. Before she left, the King called, “One more thing. Our peasant Maraie was gone for at least six minutes! Go and get her now!”

She went back to her little cottage, changed into her regular peasant clothes, and then rushed back to the castle as fast as her wings could take her.

She said, “Yes, your highness. What should I do to please you?”

The King said, “Go fly as fast you can to the cows. Then come back.”

Maraie found this a bit odd because usually when she goes to the cows, she milks them, but now she only had to go and come back. And so then, she flew as fast as she could and flew back. Then, the King and Queen thought, “Wow! That’s a lot like Maximus. You know Maximus was awesome. She can’t be like that. She always does that, so maybe that’s how she knew. Let’s ask her to fly to the sheep and yell at them to stop eating grass.”

“You have to yell as loud as you can!” the King and Queen said to Maraie.

Then she went to the sheep and yelled at them, “Stop eating grass!”

Then, she went back to the castle.

“For our final request for today,” the King and Queen said. “Do this sheet of math homework for our son.”

She did it and got every answer correct. The King and Queen were amazed and annoyed because now they suspected that she, Maraie, was Maximus The Great, which she was. They were catching on, which was a bad thing, and Maraie didn’t know it.

They said, “Now go to bed. Make sure you wake up at the crack of dawn. And when you wake up, make breakfast, get our sons ready for school, and do everything you usually do.”

So she went to bed thinking, Maybe they are catching on, what if they are catching on, I’m scared. What do I do? When she went to sleep, she had a dream. She went to the Bird Olympics, as Maximus, of course, and the King and Queen were watching her with mean eyes. Then, as she did her first challenge, they watched her like a hawk. She kept on doing these things right, as she usually did. She had her normal clothes underneath the suit to make it look like she had muscle.

While she was flying, a really stupid pigeon knocked into her and her suit fell off. The King and Queen saw what she looked like. Then she went down and guards surrounded her. That was the end of the dream. She woke up with a start. She checked the time on her clock. She was really late. It was 8 o’clock. She got into her day clothes and rushed out to the King’s castle. The King and Queen weren’t there. Just then she noticed no one was outside, or in their homes. She wandered around until she came to town square and she found the public poster board. She saw that there was a poster for the Great Bird Olympics. And she saw the time and the date. It was right then.

She gasped. Then she looked for the location. It said so at the very bottom. It said it was in Central Feather, the famous park where they hold the Great Bird Olympics. And it’s a great spot for nice picnics. She rushed back to her little cottage as fast as her stumpy little legs could take her. She put on her costume then rushed back out the door. She rushed over to the Olympics as fast as she could. Central Feather was in the middle of all the farms of the world. It was an hour flight. Then eventually when she got there it was almost too late. She got there just on time. It was the match right before Chicken Croon went on. She went up to the top box where the King and Queen were. They saw her.

“Oh! Maximus!” they said. “We thought you weren’t gonna come!”

“Why would I miss the biggest thing to happen to our colony? Anyway, we’re up next, right?”

“Yes,” said the Queen.

Then the announcer said, “For the worst match you’ll see here, Chickencroon is on! With Chickadee Do Da and everybody else.”

“Oh, Maximus, you’re up first,” says the King.

“Okay then.” Every birdie booed at her, but she was used to that so she wasn’t discouraged or anything.

“Eh, whatever, it happens all the time.”

But she thought people would cheer for her eventually, because she was in the Great Bird Olympics. She walked over to the center of the colosseum. She waved to the crowd. They booed even louder. She stopped immediately. She was guessing it was the running race, because the announcer announced, “Take your places at the starting line, contestants!”

She went to the starting line. Then the announcer

said, “One…two…three…go!”

Maraie ran as fast as she could. The other racers were ahead of her, but only by three feet. She flapped her wings as hard as she could, but didn’t fly. She got ahead and she ran faster and faster and faster and faster and faster, until she reached the ending line. Then the announcer said, “Oh my god, that’s the first time Chickencroon won anything since, like, ever. That’s amazing!”

She had reached the ending line before any birdie did. She was really surprised. So was every birdie else. The whole crowd was crazy shocked. The crowd gasped. Literally every birdie. Then other birds started to crowd at the finish line. Eventually everyone was there, and in that time Maraie got water and had a nice break. She was thinking, Oh my god, I just beat Ravenshine and Gryffinsmelt and everybody else!

The king and queen were jumping up and down singing, “Weeee woooon, weeee woooon!”

The announcer said, “And the next event iiiiiiiiisssss…ummm……FLYING, I think…”

Maraie made her feathers extra big by fluffing them. Then the announcer said, “Ready! Set! GOOOOOOOO!”

Maraie took off, flying as fast as a jet. Then she heard sizzling. She looked at her wing. It was smoking! She had been flying too fast and her wing caught fire. She started to go down, but she didn’t want to. She tried to flap her wings even harder, but by that time it was too late, and she was already on the ground. Then there was a loud beep.

“And Chickencroon is out! Not surprising. I knew their popularity was going to fade quickly!” said the announcer.

The King and Queen sobbed harder than usual. Then the king opened his eyes and looked at Maraie. Her costume had burned a little bit and he could see the scar that Maraie had when he slashed her when she was a baby. He looked at her in awe. He was amazed that his daughter could go that far and he suddenly realized how hard a life she had. Maraie flew wobbley to the top box where the King and Queen were. Then the queen said, “You betrayed us and all of Chickencroo-”

“SILENCE!!!” said the king. Then he continued. “That is our daughter!”

“Wha-” said the Queen.

“Uh uh uh! You are here to listen not to speak!” said the King. The Queen and Maraie were paralyzed with astonishment.

“Did I just fall on my head?” Maraie muttered.

The King said, “I have just realized how hard a life our daughter has had. We abandoned her when she was just a little baby, and not just that, we slashed her before that. Also, we treated her as the most unpleasant servant of all. Actually, the worst part is that we treated her as a servant at all! I believe that we must…accept her.”

Finally! Maraie thought. “Why…” She was in tears. Of happiness!

The King said, “Just seeing you out there getting hurt pained me.”

The Queen said, “No! Have you gone bonkers?!”

“You dare say that to the king!?”

“What are you gonna do about it?”

He turned to Maraie. “Maraie, pack up your things in your cabin. You’re moving into one of the biggest rooms in the castle.”

He turned to the queen once more and said, “As for you, you my bitter, bitter wifey, you are taking Maraie’s place in the peasant quarters.”

“But I still get all my things, don’t I?”

“Well, you can have half a slice of bread and two cups of water every day. You’re lucky, my queen, because you, first of all, do not get executed, and also what you get to eat every day is double what Maraie had! Oh yeah, one more thing. From this day forth, we’re divorced, and Maraie is princess of Chickencroon.”

The Queen shouted as the guards took her away, “This is not the end of me! I will be back for you! And Maraie, too!”

The King turned to Maraie and held her hand and said, “Let’s go back to the castle…Princess Maraie.” Then they walked back to castle happy, and confused.

 

THE END

Footsteps

Chapter 1

 

I don’t think I’m ever going to have more than one kid. I mean, why should I? Just look how upset I am with a new baby sister in the house. Lily. Just when I thought my life couldn’t get any worse, she came along. Basically what I’m trying to say is that I don’t want to put my son or daughter through that. Also, just look how upset my mom is: she just got a divorce with my dad and she is SUPER depressed. They got a divorce right after the new baby arrived. My personal opinion is that they divorced because of the baby.

“Margret, get down here for dinner, we’re all waiting for you.” By all, my mom means Lily and herself.

“Jeez, mom,” I whisper to myself.

I run down the stairs and quickly sit down. As I am sitting I accidentally knock over Lily’s pudding cup. Mom breathes in and out about five times and then loses it.

“MARGRET!” she yells as she gets up and runs to her room. Lily just sits there smiling and laughing.

“Oh, what are you so happy about, it was your stupid pudding cup,” I say.

My face turns red and then I run to my room. I sit in the corner and start to cry for the first time in my life. I feel all alone. A couple of minutes later there is a knock on the door. I run to get it, but scarily enough, Lily is by the door standing up and trying to reach the doorknob.

“MOM, GET DOWN HERE NOW!”

There is no answer and of course I am left all alone with devil child. Ok, I think to myself, what do I do now? I walk towards her very slowly then grasp the handle of the door. I pick Lily up and open the door barely enough so that I can see.  “Oh, thank god,” I sigh to myself. It is Thomas and Julia, my best friends.

“Come in, come in,” I tell them.

“OH MY GOSH,” Julia yells.

“What?” I asked her, putting Lily down in her high chair.

“Are you ready for the first day of 6th grade tomorrow?” Julia says.

“I know,” Thomas says back to her.

“S-,” Julia is about to say but I stop her.

“Guys, hello,” I tell my two best friends. “You guys are not even letting me talk.”

“What, Maggie,” Thomas says very nicely.

“Well what I was going to say was, are we meeting at Julia’s locker or in the janitor’s closet In between classes?” I say.

“Well I was thinking the janitor’s closet just because, well you know we did that all of last year,” Thomas says.

I looked at Julia. She shook her head. Yes, ok, I think we’re set.

“Yay,” Julia says really excited.

Just then Thomas gets a text. He says that he has to go meet up with his dad. He says bye to me and Julia and walks out. Me and Julia walk to my room. I slam the door shut me and Julia start talking about our first day of 6th grade. She says something about science class and Spanish but all I could think about is how I am going to survive 6th grade without Thomas and Julia with me every second of the day.

 

Chapter 2

 

I get up super early to organize all my folders and papers. I do it every year.

Ok, only some years.

I walk upstairs quietly enough so I don’t wake up the baby, but unfortunately I wake up mom. She comes out in her nightgown and smudged makeup…but you get used to it. For some strange reason mom is rushing me to eat breakfast like I am late or something. I look at the clock and scream hysterically.

“I AM LATE!”

“I know,” Mom says very angrily.

I eat my corn flakes fast then rush out the door, but halfway to school I realize I didn’t change out of my PJs but it’s too late. I am in the middle of 6th grade wearing my PJs.

“Hey,” I heard a voice behind me. It was Julia.

“Hi,” she said looking at me in a strange way.

“I know, I know,” I said, cutting her off.

“You don’t even know what I was going to say,” Julia replies.

I roll my eyes. “What am I going to do?” I say way over-dramatically.

“Calm down,” Julia says. “You can go change in the girls bathroom. I have a extra pair of clothes in my locker.”

“Oh my gosh thanks, Jules, you’re the best. Oh and hey, where’s Thomas?”

“Bad news,” Julia says. “Thomas is really sick.”

“Oh, that’s so sad,” I respond.

“Um, here is my combination.” Julia scribbled something on a piece of  paper. She looked at her watch and ran away.

“Hey, where are you going?”

But she never answered.

 

Chapter 3

 

After first period I try to find Julia. I realize I need to meet Julia in the janitor’s closet. I go to the closet and try to find her, but she isn’t here. I get out my phone and call her, but there is no answer. I don’t know know what was wrong. I try calling Thomas but then I realize that he is in the emergency room. Something must be really wrong.

When I get home my mom is not there and my sister is probably at this girl Gabby’s house. Gabby is the first friend Lily had ever made, well, the only friend Lily has in general. Anyway I call up the emergency room. I wait and wait until they finally pick up.

“Hello,” the woman on the other end of the phone says.

“Hi. I am Margaret Moore calling for Thomas Weinstein.”

There is a long pause. She says he switched to the Greystone Hospital a few nights ago.

“Oh,” I say suddenly. “Why,” I ask.

“I am sorry ma’am, I cannot tell you that over the phone. You will have to go over to Greystone yourself.”

“FINE,” I yell. I hung up the phone and run down the hallway out the front door, and long story short, I end up at the Greystone Hospital. I walk to the front desk and state my name real fast.

“I am Margaret Moore and I am here to see Thomas.”

“Ah yes, Thomas. Right this way, miss.”

She leads me into a pale gray room. I wish they would paint it, it is so depressing. A long stretcher comes out of another room. It is THOMAS!

I run up to him to hug him but the nurse just backs me away.

“What? Is it contagious?” I ask.

“No,” says the nurse. “Just give him some space.”

“Well okay,” I said. “But what’s wrong with Thomas anyway?”

Thomas finally says, “I have lung cancer.”

“W-what?” I said. “This can’t just happen overnight.”

“It didn’t,” says Thomas. “I knew I had it for a long time, but the nurses did nothing about it so neither did I. Then a couple nights ago I was playing soccer with my dad and I fainted my dad took me to the emergency room and told my dad it was a serious cancer problem so they switched me to the hospital and right now I am stuck in this hospital. Oh, I am so so so sorry, but I have to go.”

I say, “Wait.” I hear Thomas barely whispering. I feel both mad and upset I know it wasn’t his fault that he had cancer but I still feel like he is letting me down. It’s the same kind of feeling when my mom and dad got a divorce. I can’t really help it.

 

Chapter 4

 

Lily is in the hospital. My life couldn’t get any worse than it is. I am going to see Lily on Tuesday and my dad who I have not seen in about nine months is coming to the hospital.

 

******

 

“DADDY,” I yell, hugging him.

“Honey,” he says back, “I have to go see Lily ok, but you might not want to go into-”

“Amelia,” my dad says, a little upset but with a smirk.

My mom looks at him. She sees the smirk too.

“Look, Amelia, I am only here for Lily, not for you.”

“Oh, Tyler, I thought you were here for me,” my mom says, trying to be funny. I can’t help but smile. My mom obviously sees and winks at me across the waiting area. My dad sees  too and starts talking about how he got a new job and he is a lawyer and it is primarily true that he gets one of the kids. I personally do not think that is true but the he really starts yelling and my mom did not even say or do anything he just starts just like that.

“I can’t take your constant yelling and lying. You can’t get the kids all excited and then not do anything. You are a horrible parent so are you sure you want to keep both of our kids?”

“Yes I am sure, Tyler.” But then my mom starts getting really emotional and it happened again just like that.

“THEN WHY DID YOU LEAVE US? Why?” my mom says, getting quieter.

I always knew my dad left without an explanation. I just thought he packed his bags and left one day but I know that could never be the case.

Then my dad says something. He says something that I never will forgive him for.

“I love Lily and I am not going to get to know her.”

I finally scream, “WELL YOU’RE NOT GOING TO GET TO KNOW ME EITHER, DAD.” And with that I stand up and walked away. I hear my mom whisper but I am too upset to spy on them like I used too when I was little. I am too upset to do anything: to stand up, to talk, or to even think about what I heard walking out of the hospital. Thomas Weinstein is dead. I am so upset I run home.

Before I go to bed I look at my bedside dresser. I remember how Thomas had been sitting on the dresser the day before 6th grade!

 

The End

A Million Ways to Have Fun

Me and my friends on the baseball team were watching the game before ours, and one of the teams that was playing got crushed 11-nothing. After that game, we played and we watched how the kids pitched. They were terrible at pitching. They were horrible because they threw balls behind their backs and balls were going over heads. It was walk, after walk, after walk until the coaches started pitching.

We finally hit stuff, and we hit home runs finally! It was a long game because we could score as many points as we wanted.

When the game finally was over, our coach tricked us by saying, “You did horrible!” But then he said, “Just joking, you did great!”

 

The next game we play I hope we will win.

 

When I had recess a couple of times, a girl that was not my friend in a different class always tried to give everybody hugs. She was not tall and very slow. She had short brown hair and when she tried to catch all the boys, she almost caught me! And then, because I had friends right next to me, I told them to just start running.

My friend, Dylan, was the main attraction. When we ran under the volcano and we saw her at the other end. Thankfully, we could go up, so we all climbed up the ladder as fast as we could and sprinted down the slide. There was a spiderweb at least 20 feet away, so we climbed up it and into the top. The girl was too afraid to to get to the top so we stayed up there for the rest of recess.

I went down before recess was over and a girl named Carly was right there at the bottom and no one was at the other side of the park so I ran and Carly chased me. It was pretty scary until I rolled under a branch. And when I got to the other side, six boys were standing right in front of me.  We grouped up and than we spread out all over the park and we all got chased at least once. And when we met up, Carly was at least two feet away from us. I was so scared, I almost started screaming for help. And then we all just ran for dear life in every which direction.

 

It was fun and totally not boring.

 

When I had a three man team in baseball we always got beat. I was the only good player on my team. We never got to the championships because we had the worst kids.

 

It was totally not fun.

 

Once when I was at a swim meet, I had a 600 butterfly. It’s hard stroke to do but when you get the hang of it you can get really good at it. I came in first, but I fell out on deck and when I woke up I was in the hospital with at least 20 of my teammates surrounding me. They looked blurry at first and then I realized who they were, but I still couldn’t see that well.
And when my mom came in she said, “You lost your goggles.”
Then my dad came in and said, “When did you get in here? And how did you get here?”

I replied, “I think I fell out on deck and just laid there flat out. and I really don’t know how else I would have gotten here.”
I think I was in the hospital for three days. When I came home, I asked where my grandma was, and my mom said, “She’s out at the supermarket.”

And I said, “Why couldn’t you drive her over there? I could have stayed in the hospital for a couple more hours.”

And then we drove to where she was and picked her up and brought her home. She lived on the same street as us. She always gives me candy when she goes to parties and if I’m lucky, we will go to Chelsea Piers. If I’m lucky, I will also see my friends. We will play arcade games and we will always get to the last level and then five seconds later we would almost beat the game and then we die. If I think a shot will hurt, it will feel like a rainbow hitting my head.

I’m usually an opposite guy.

Funny Friends – One Guy

Will, my best friend, is big, and he’s in my grade and goes to my school. He thinks he’s better than me at swimming. I haven’t seen him swim that fast but he says he can swim really fast. And he thinks he’s the king of the world. He thinks he’s related to Hitler, but what I always tell him is, “You’re not related to Hitler.”

For some reason, he punches himself and he punches the wall of our gym. It’s very odd how he punches everything he sees. I would have to run away to not get punched. But thankfully, he has the sense to not punch me. He almost punched the teacher. He actually punched our playground. He literally punched the volcano on our playground. He snapped a string on the spiderweb, but thankfully nobody fell. Luckily, nobody saw him do it, because there was a park ranger a couple feet away from him. And for some reason, he hates poetry. The only thing he really likes is punching things and gym, and art. The only reason why he likes art is because he gets to help clean up and he likes doing that for some reason.
Last year, he was punching my friend Maisai and the only reason why he did that was because he doesn’t like when he jokes around. Maisai was joking around about everything you could think of. He chased Will all day long. Everywhere he went he saw Will. Will dared him to jump off a 2-story building into a pool, and for some reason, he did it, and thankfully it was 12 feet deep. So he did not hurt himself.

It was fun watching them, but it was amazing that Masai did not get hurt.

Today, in swim practice, when I was swimming, I got hit at least 20 million times. And when I did, I got run over, so I couldn’t breathe for at least a couple seconds. They were drowning me underwater because there were at least nine people behind me, and I had to push up and stand up so I could get back where I was. It’s pretty odd because I’m the fastest one, but I was in two different lanes so it would be normal for me to be doing that. I had to race 9-year-olds, 10-year-olds, and 11-year-olds. It was fun and thankfully I beat all of them.

“Why won’t you stay in your lane?” said my coach.

And I said, “Okay, I will stay in my lane.”
So we did a 900 kick – a 900 free kick. It took me a long time to finish, but I came in first. I was happy and glad, but I did not cheer. And it seems like this is over, but when we had breakfast, oh my gosh. Everyone was talking about the 900 free kick and how good I was. It was really fun and somehow annoying, because everybody was talking about me.
When people talked about me, I told them, “If you hear anybody talking about me, tell them this is from the master: ‘Do not talk about me.’”
The next day, even more people were talking about it. Even news reporters said, “So many people are talking about this kid that did a 900 free kick.”
Then, people started coming to their swim classes and they asked me, “Are you going to be an Olympic swimmer?”
I said, “Maybe, maybe not.”

And then, I had bad luck that day. Somebody dropped a radiator on my car and a couch fell right next to my head. And then, our car caught on fire and the couch was in the car so the couch exploded and the whole city could see a car flying in the air somehow. I was scared. The day I came back to that same exact spot, the car went up, and then I saw a giant car come crashing down, making a crater in the Earth.
And then there was a blackout and then a war began and it was so not fun. I stayed in my house and a man came crashing through the building and I mean, falling from the sky. It was so scary because it was an old man just falling from the sky.

And he said, “Why do you want my presents?”

And then I said, “Who are you? What do you want from my life? Where’d you come from? How did you get here? When did you get here? And, I’m guessing, you made the couch and the radiator fall. Why did you do that to me and when did you do that?” And then I finally said, “You can leave my house and go up to where you work and stay there for your life.”

And that day was fun, scary, and guess what day it was? Halloween.

One day when I was walking home from school, this guy walked up to me and said, “What are you doing? This is a haunted room.”
“I thought this was a living room,” I said.
When I saw the guy randomly disappear into a deep black hole, I followed him and then he said, “Come with me and I will show you your doom, and if you survive, I will give you this house.”

I still followed him even though I could possibly die. And then iI entered a world of superheroes. I knew this was a superhero world because everyone was flying, shooting fire out their mouths, or running very fast.

When I said, “Hi superheroes,” their eyes turned red.

Then I started running back to the door that I came from. The guy slammed the door in my face and I was locked in, and there was no way to get out unless a superhero punched it down. But thankfully it was my lucky day so when I punched one of the superheroes they all turned into candy.

And then there was another black hole I had to go through, and there was a ghost that kept floating around. Thankfully, you could walk through them and they’d do nothing to you. There was a big staircase that led to the lobby of the house. It took me an hour to get all the way up the stairs and then I saw a giant floating baby head but thankfully you could go through it so it did nothing to you.

Then I walked out the house and what I saw was a town of angry mobs. And then I went back into the house and then the house turned upside down so I was on the ceiling. And then there was another black hole you had to go through and then the superheroes were there, and this time when you punched one they give you one piece of candy.  And then I had to destroy all of them for ten pieces of candy. The house was like an unreal house. It was a world of black holes. There was this one magical book that could stop the whole thing, but you would have to jump over 900 black holes to get to it.

And this weird man came out of nowhere and said, “If you want to get the magical book and stop all that’s happening, you will need a jetpack, a rocket, and two more jetpacks.” The weird man looked like a man, but he had hair like a cow and his face looked like a duck’s. His legs were shaped like buildings and his feet were shaped like pigeons. And then he gave me all the stuff I needed to get across. After one black hole, one of the jetpacks ran out, but thankfully the man had given me everything I needed. But then I had to get away from the black holes to read the book. But thankfully, I had a rocket with me and could fly over through six million black holes. And there was only one last black hole to go over, so I was happy and there were no problems. But the directions said to be careful because when the haunted house ends it will blow up. When I finally got outside, the house blew up. Thankfully I was not inside it. The angry mobs were still chasing me, so I read the book while I was running for dear life. You had to say six secret magical spells, and then everything would return to normal. And then it finally did: the sun was back, the angry mob was gone, and all the angry mobs turned into regular humans.

I am so glad I never had to be one of them.

My life is the best life I could ever have.

Believe

A tale of sister’s trust and an underground world where it’s all wrong.

 

Dedicated to Nikki And Cami

 

You are my best friends

I could never trade you guys

For anyone else.

I have always trusted my sister, Annabelle Grace Stevens. I don’t think that she trusts me, but then again, doesn’t every sister think that her sister hates her guts? Even though that she is the most beautiful girl I have ever seen or met, she covers it up. We all know why. She has a scar from 8th grade, where she had her skin cancer cells removed. There is a big scar left. She got a haircut that year, to cover it up, so there is always hair hanging over her face. The other side of her face is open. Annabelle is trustworthy. You can always count on her to tell secrets and they will not be told to any other ears.

Annabelle and I have a window that separates our rooms. When she sits and listens to jazz music, or watches a movie on her laptop, I watch her. She is too beautiful to ignore. Her ocean blue eyes and golden blonde hair blend with her perfectly tanned skin and amazing outfits that always match. I don’t know where she got all of those beautiful genes from — maybe Aunt Lucy, but the rest of my family is pale and plump.

I always feel nervous approaching Annabelle, because she is like the queen of the family.

“Annie, can I borrow your headphones?” I look at her.

She shrugs, “Sure, lil’ sis.”

She hands me the headphones and then goes back onto her phone. I walk back up to her with a promising look on my face.

“Lil’ sis, I have a birthday surprise for you for May 8th.” She winks.

I want to scream at her so badly right now because she knows that I hate surprises so much because you have to wait until somebody does something. I am not a patient girl, and can definetly not wait for a long time, because I like for things to happen, and to be entertained, and in my opinion, I rush life. I need to go a little bit slower because when you go faster, you cannot enjoy it.

RIIINNNGGG! My alarm clock goes off. It’s May 7th. I rub my eyes and stretch my arms out. May 7th. Tomorrow I am thirteen. My family is very Jewish, so I have to get a whole bat mitzvah. They are pretty psycho that I get to go to Israel, but we don’t have that kind of money right now. We will just do a regular bat mitzvah and then just go to NYC to a club and party. Ok, that’s small talk because my parents are almost broke. Well, except for the fact that I have a nice, comfortable house, not big. But, the perfect size.

I throw on one of my sisters old Beatle’s crop tops to wear to school. Until she comes yelling in from our bathroom. Her hair is put up in a turban, with a towel wrapped around her. She shows me downstairs to our creepy, dark basement. There are no lights down there, so we bring flashlights. The steps creaking noise stop, and Annabelle turns to me.

“I thought I heard mice down here,” she says. I look around by the light of the flashlight. I cling to Annabelle, even though I am fourteen years old. She turns on what I think is a newly installed light. Yep, I’m right. I see my whole family — yep, all 73 cousins, and my aunts uncles, grandparents, great grandparents, parents, friends, and all of my presents are down here.

“Surprise early birthday!!!” they all yell at me at the same exact time.

My favorite cousins and only best friends beside Annabelle run up to me with a 20 foot cake. I don’t know where my parents found the money to do all of this. No — they did not make — no — they did not make Aunt Josephine, owner of Kicks for Kids sneaker store — she did not pay for it. But, I know she payed for it, so I drop the cake back into the hands of Emerald and Kris. I pull her into a bear hug, and take in the wonderful scent of her new smoochy Gucci perfume from Michael Kors. I finally start digging into the presents, there are 72 though. That’s kind of weird, I think to myself. I look around and count them all twice. There are 73. I count the seventy third one as my sister, so I figure that she hasn’t gotten me one yet. And my parents will give me my presents tomorrow.

 

This is the list of all of my presents:

Alex and Ani ladybug bracelet

Gold necklace

New peach colored shirt with the words, “If you’re happy and you know it, go away!”

12 Abercrombie shirts

Nike sneakers (from Aunt Josephine)

A dress from Lord and Taylor

New nail polish set

Fitbit

Insurgent series

My favorite singer’s records

An iTunes giftcard

500 dollars that mom says are for college, but I think otherwise

A striped dress

A new bedroom remodel gift card for Pottery Barn

An art set

Converse shoes

Some skinny jeans

A scarf

Some bows from my cousin Jojo

More money

A bowl of my favorite candy

A leotard (I don’t know why)

Amazon gift card

New crop top

An awesome painting

A new pair of socks (thanks a lot)

Flats from Justice

2 pocketbooks from my favorite cousin

A key chain

A freedom flask

Some capris

Weight watchers 30 day trial (from Jenny) (Thanks a lot.)

Harry and David food basket

Stuffed animal from Ty

5 eos

Chair for my room

New flip flops

Bathrobe

Gummy bear light

Headband (I will never wear but thanks)

More rock crop tops

A hairbrush

More money that I can spend

A trip to the Plaza Hotel in NYC

A new nail polish set

More makeup

Pimple remover (thank you, god)

A little pet guinea pig named Fluff

Spray tan

Soccer ball (I don’t know where it came from)

A diary

New PB Teen pillows for my bed

Grape purple lip gloss

A bouquet of flowers

A membership on moviestarplanet.com along with a brand spankin’ new laptop

An Apple gift card for books

A head set

Silly putty

A magic 8 ball

Smelly erasers

Cool smencils that I will bring to school

A pencil that bends

Two pairs of leggings for next winter

A prom dress (I hug it for 20 minutes)

New pairs of socks from Nike

Great shorts from Aeropostale

A notepad with my first initial printed on it

Top hat (?)

Gift certificate to Crumbs

A new mini TV for my room

A turquoise beanbag

 

Wow, I have gotten so much, I better not act spoiled, and now I go around with my new notepad and write down my cousins names along with the present that they got me. It took a while because everyone was pushing and shoving. My oldest cousin turned on some pop music that set the mood and everyone started dancing. I just danced around the room, asking what presents people got me. It was pretty fun. But, then it was time to go.

I gave everybody the goody bags that were on the table in the basement. Hey, goody bags had a pencil, bouncy ball, two eos, and a note from me to each of my cousins. I thank Emeral and Kris for the awesome gifts. They all leave.

“Clean up!!!” Mom yells.

“I did not even set up this party! Why do I have to clean it up. Annie should really be cleaning it up. She set up the WHOLE thing!!!!!!” I yell.

It is a big mess, and one that I would not like to clean up.

“I will take away all of your presen –” Mom starts

“Ok,” I reply.

I waddle back downstairs in my old forever lazy and start picking up trash and papers. I clean up the fallen candy wrappers. I shut off the lights and step on the first stair when I hear a squeak.

“WEEEKKK,” says the animal.

I run upstairs and grab a fly swatter and then run back downstairs to look for the mouse. I walk around the basement in position that I am ready to karate chop it with the fly swatter.

“Hi yaaaaa!” I do a turn into a roundhouse kick.

Now, this is just getting weird. I used to take karate when I was an itty-bitty baby. I chuckle. I can imagine myself sucking on my finger and then my instructor comes over and I do a small kick and fall over.

I finally creep up to the mouse and swat it. It looks injured, but not killed, so I slam it with a baseball bat and it dies. I kick it over to the corner and get a wet paper towel to clean up the blood.

Mom comes down with a puzzled look on her face.

“Huh? What did you do here, honey?” she asked.

My face turns pale. Well, paler. I was cleaning out the old boxes with pictures of us. I gesture over to the piles of boxes with lots of content in them. Some boxes have so much stuff in them, that it has fallen over and onto the cold ground.

“I was just coming down to ask you what you wanted for dinner tonight. So, what do you want for dinner tonight?” she asks.

“Do you have any burgers in the freezer?” I ask her politely.

Mom nods her head and then runs upstairs. I can feel her panting when she gets to the top. I should really talk her into exercising. Maybe for her birthday, I should bring her to the gym. Would that be too obvious that I think she’s overweight?

Scratch that, I know that she is overweight.

Well, we’ll see what happens when her birthday comes around.

I eat my dinner and then wash the dishes and put them all in a neat row in the dishwasher. I then walk upstairs and take a shower while my parents look at all of my gifts and admire them. (I think mom stole my eos.) Whatever, parents will be parents.

After my shower, I come back downstairs to where Annabelle is sitting in the kitchen, crying. There is a pile of envelopes. I knock on the wall that divides the hallway from the kitchen. There are a few sniffles before I hear a reply from her.

“Come in.” She quickly shoves the papers in a drawer and starts to smile again.

I waltz in. Tear drops are glimmering on the old rusty granite. Her eyes are puffy and red. I pull over a chair and sit down next to her.

“What’s wrong, sis?” I ask her.

She turns away from me and pulls her arm out of my reach since I was stroking it. She mumbles something to herself that I don’t understand and then reaches her foot out and starts kicking the chair that is next to her to the side. Her hands are clasped under her knees, and she is moaning.

“UCLA. I-I-I-I didn’t g-g-g-g-et acc-e-e-pted,” she moans again.

“That’s weird. I thought that you didn’t want to go to UCLA! I thought that you wanted to go to Stanford. Or Harvard. Or Yale,” I finish.

I am just so confused right now.

“I GOT INTO HARVARD AND YALE AND PRINCETON AND DARTMOUTH AND BROWN AND…STANFORD!!!” she screams so loud that the house starts to shake and some things even fall.

“That’s amazing, sis!!!” I hug her. I do not want to be the one to let go of this. She suddenly yanks her arms away.

“You mean you don’t want me here!!” she says.

“I love you so much, it’s just great news but I wish that you would stay!” I reply.

“I was just kidding! God, little sis! Take a joke. Puh-leez!” Annabelle says.

I really want Annabelle to stop calling me little sis because it sounds like I am little and I really don’t want to be little. We are only four years apart. I think she should just call me Juliet like everyone else calls me.

But, she decides to call me little sis. It’s her decision anyways what she wants to call me. Everybody decides for themselves what they would really like to call me. You, reader, can call me Juliet.

I have to go to school tomorrow and be tortured unless one of my presents is a vacation somewhere. I need that. I have not been on a vacation ever in my life since I was 3 and went to Disneyland with my parents and their family friends.

I lay my head down on my pillow and start to slowly fall asleep. Tommorrow. Just a day away. My mind drifts off and my eyes shut.

“Rise and shine! It’s potato’s birthday!” My dad calls me potato because when I still wore diapers, mom handed me a potato and I dropped on dad’s head.

I scream. I am a teenager. No more, “You can’t date. Don’t go out any later then 7:00. You’re a little kid. No crop tops. No new phone!” God — the list could go on and on forever. You name it, my parents have forbid it.

I run downstairs to the kitchen. Mom is cooking walnut pancakes with berries. She put a dollop of whipped cream on top and got lots of syrup and sugar. I sniffed in the cool air and shifted my weight from foot to foot.

Mom stuck a corny candle in the middle of the pancake and then started to sing the song “Happy birthday.” Even if it was pretty corny, I was going to let my mom enjoy herself on my birthday even if I cringed at my judgment.

Mom was standing with her back to the counter like it was glued to it for the whole time that I ate breakfast. I tried to take small peeks, but she zigged every time that I zagged and then blocked every possible angle. She went down the hall to grab a snack. I casually stood up and walked over. Everything went black.

I wake up in my mother’s arms. Wait…let’s move back a second. How can my mother even carry 95 pounds? Anyways, all I remember was walking towards the counter. Boom!

“What happened?” I ask.

“You fainted a minute ago of shock. I guess of this….” She did not even have to keep speaking.

Well, to be honest, she was talking, but I was cutting her off. A phone. A new phone. Who wants to know what my old phone looks like? Basic math, just, two times dropped, thrown in toilet once, puked on three times, thrown by baby cousin, dropped in water for three hours four times. What does that equal.

A new phone. My love. I immediately add all of my old contacts and text my cousins. I upload Minecraft, Doodle Jump, Piano Tiles, Pinball, Facebook, and Circle and A Line. I am a phone freak. I guess you can call me that now. Now, what its my sister’s present for me? I wash the dishes and then climb up the stairs and brush my hair and get dressed. Annabelle is still asleep of course. I send music into her room to wake her up. The music of course does not wake her up. If you shot a gun five cm from her ear while she was asleep, she would not even hear it. I think that she really needs to get her ears checked out by a doctor.

I go into her room and punch her arm.

“Wake up, Annie!!!” I screech so loud that she principal calls later and asks what the noise was. My school is 8 minutes from my house.

She awakens just as I lift my arm, threatening to punch her. She luckily blocks her face with her pillow. I search like a bloodhound for my present. Nope, not it. I keep digging through the pile of stuff.

“Okay, okay. I will give you your present.” She opens a small bag that is beige colored and throws pixie dust on me. We both vanish.

The last thing I can remember is standing in my sisters room, about to bump my head. Now, I am in…???

I look around me from where I am standing and see about 60 monsters. Give or take. My sister is scooting on the ground in between the monsters and cringing I run through one ghost that is standing still, to get to my sister. We are suddenly on a monster street with monster people. There is a huge house that is also and inn. I whisper to Annabelle, but she doesn’t hear me. I whisper again, but louder this time. She doesn’t hear me. One monster walks over to me and throws a banana peel.

“I am not a garbage can, you freaks!!” I scream.

They obviously do not understand it because they speak monster language. Who I think is the king steps forwards, ahead of all of the other monsters who are gathered around me in a circle.

“Welcome…welcome to forgotten land. My fellow monsters here were actually humans, but they were transported from the real world by feeling forgotten. My fairy friend, Mary Ashley here, transports them back to Earth when they have gotten enough treatment. Not all of us are forgotten. Just some of us were born here and stayed here to make our lives easier. Like me. I speak part English, part Poovy,” he explains.

I try to escape from the circle of monsters standing around me, but there are rows and rows of monsters, and no openings. The king backs away, and laughs as he watches me try to get out. I finally look up to him and put my hands on my hips. He mouth speaks, “fine,” and then speaks in Poovy and apparently tells them to get out and make way for me.

I start to get thirsty after around Poovy time of 6 p.m. The Poovys offer me their gross water that is filled with earth worms, but I do not accept. Then one monster throws up cucumbers and asks if I want to eat.

“That’s just sick!” I say. It is really gross, but that’s what monsters do. From dinner, I thought that was just one bad thing that was going to happen. And…this was my birthday present. I am looking for my sister everywhere. She calls out my name, where she is in an alley with teenage monsters chatting and gossiping. I sigh. Some things just never change, wherever you go whoever you meet, they could still be gossiping. Annie waves me over.

“These nice monsters just told me that we are in an underground world!” Annabelle looks like she is excited to hear this.

“Why did you bring me here for my birthday!?” I hate it so much, but I just don’t say that because that would just make her cry.

“I didn’t have enough fairy dust to go to candy land, so I settled on this one,” she says.

Now we just have to find a way home. I pull her away from these freak monsters, and we run. For all these years, Annabelle has been missing for something for one day. And she does not ever tell us where she is going. Now I know that all of these years, she has been going to different worlds and explore new things. If she gets into a world, then she must know how to get out.

“There is always something that brings us home that is in the ocean. Where is the ocean?” Annabelle tells me.

We ask somebody who looks like they are the Poovy police where the ocean is, and he points down two streets, to the left, left again, and then a right turn.

When Annabelle and I are walking for a long time, we stop when we see the ocean. The ocean us just like a human ocean. No Poovys in the ocean! Thank you very much. Annabelle and I each get on a life vest and snorkeling equipment, and a boat brings us out far out.

I jump in the water, holding my breath before having to not breathe for a long time. There are what seems like Poovy creatures who are pretty scary. But, I can see resemblance with regular ocean creatures.

I am suddenly bitten by something and then everything goes black.

 

Juliet’s Funeral

I can hear my parents sniffling from inside my coffin.

“We let go of your dear daughter Juliet two days ago, on May 9th. She was very dear to all of us and had a love and passion to make each and every one of us feel nice and kind. She always made each and every one of us be noticed by her. Even if she had not many friends, she has ceased what she has and appreciates everything that she has. We will always remember her.” Everyone bows and my mom blows her nose.

Before everyone begins to cry, I sit up and open the coffin.
The End

Sad

I stayed there a while, sitting in the warm, sweet air and crying next to my mother’s grave. I cried over the flowers I brought my mother. I wish she could see me. I just wish that one day she could come with me, or I would go with her, but I didn’t want to die, even if everyone I knew hated me and my Dad thought I had something to do with mother’s death. The only reason my Dad let me in the house was because someone might see me outside and then they would probably report him, and he wanted to live here, not in jail, or with my Mom, or as he calls it, DEATH. I liked to call it a better word, heaven. My Dad sometimes threw me out of the house and called me a freak and yelled and swore a lot. When I went to see my mother sometimes, he asked me where I was going, and if I said to see Mom, he said and screamed SHE IS DEAD or WHY? WHY? ARE YOU DUMB? Sometimes I thought I was adopted, but Mom was nice. I was young though, I don’t know why, but ever since Mom left, I just felt like I didn’t need any friends, but in my heart, I really did. I needed friends because friendship helped me when Mom left, all of my friends and everyone else were super nice, too, and all the teachers too, but one day I shut every one out. My Dad said he would homeschool me but he never taught me anything but how to yell and one million reasons why he should blame me for killing my mother.

I tried texting my only friend. Her name was Sarah. She didn’t care if I was dumb or awkward. I am super dumb. When she came over in eighth grade, she was doing philosophy, and my Dad didn’t really homeschool me like he was supposed to when he said he would homeschool me. When Mom was around, she used to say to my Dad, “When you get mad, just count to ten backwards, then you will calm down.” But these days, he only gets mad when I tell him to count backwards from ten, or he throws a book at me. I loved him even though he did this stuff, but I want to tell you where all the fun started and I got to tell you it from the beginning, a long time ago…the sad beginning.

 

Chapter 1

 

“Wait,” Sarah called as I looked. She was running behind me. “You’re always winning in our little races, you know, Christine. You are super fast. You should try out for the track team.”

“Yeah, right. Those people in the track team are weird and mean and huge. Whatever. But I am sorry, I can’t. I have violin lessons and I am not fit for it. I got to help out in the house because Max isn’t really feeling like herself these days.”

“Hey, well, you won’t really be alone. We could do CHEERLEADING,” she yelled.

“Wow, ok.”

When I turned around and saw her with a pom pom, all I thought was boringness.

“Oh, come on.”

“Fine, only for a little bit. And if I don’t like it, I will quit. Understood?”

“Ok then.” She burst out in huge smile. “Wow, oh my god. I am so happy you are actually going to try it out.”

 

Chapter 2

 

“Do I have to do this?” I called. My feet were tired.

“Yes, you said you would try and, wait there until I come out of the stall, please. Oh, wait. How does this look, Chris?”

“Oh gosh, I don’t really know what to say. You look good with pom poms. What about the outfit?” I answered.

“Well, it’s too tight. What about yours?” Sarah called.

“Well, it’s too tight. I am coming out now, wait.” RIP RIP RIP RIP.

“Oh no, wait, can you hand me my clothes? My outfit is too tight, too.”

“What’s with these cheerleaders and tightness?” I said.

“No clue, Chris, no clue.”

“Well, whatever. Let’s go. I don’t really want to try on the outfit. I’m too tired.”

“Whatever, Chris, let’s go.”

 

Chapter 3

 

“Ugh, I can’t do this. I should be at home helping. I hope I don’t get on the squad,” I said.

“Whatever, Chris, come on. I hope I get in. I bet I could become best friends with Elisabeth,” Sarah responded.

A pang of jealousy filled my body. Wasn’t she my best friend? A bunch of thoughts filled my head.

“Okay, let’s try. Five, six, five, six, seven, eight, flip!” Then another a double somersault.

“Ouch, ouch, Sara, you know I can’t really do th…ouch,” I said.

“Don’t be a grouch, you have to try. You promised, Chris,” she whined.

“Fine!”

“Sometimes you can be a real grouch, Chris.”

“Whatever, let’s go home!” I exclaimed.

 

Chapter 4

 

“Hi, Mom,” I said to my mother.

“Hi, sweetie,” my mother said.

“How are feeling? Is your fever down? How are you feeling?”

“I am fine, hun. How are you today?”

“Fine, ma. I am going to go up in my room. I got to do homework. I have lots. Bye.”

“Ugh.” Maybe Sarah texted her.

I sighed, then cried.

“Why is everything in life so hard? I have to do cheerleading with Sara and now Sara wants to be best friends with Elisabeth and…now I think Mom is going to die. Wwaaahhh.”

RRRR IIII IIII NNNN GGGGG!

 

“From: Saraqueen396

hi let’s quit this cheerleading thing”

 

“What–quit? Why!?” I immediately responded. “AARRRRRRRGGGGGGG,” I screamed in my pilllow.

Why why why would she quit? I thought it was our thing. Immediately I knew what to do. Run away. It was a really good idea, the best I had in long time. I immediately packed my backpack full of shirts and underwear. In my other bag, I packed pants and sneakers and a pair of flats. I wasn’t sure when I would leave, but I knew it would be today, because in the night I would be too tired and my dad would be home, so I might as well do it now. I stepped one leg out the window, then the other, carefully, so I wouldn’t make any noise that would cause my Mom to wake up and see me. Then I would get in trouble. I ran as fast as my legs could go…

“OOUUCHH!” I fell and tripped down the hill.

I looked for a place to stay. Once I found a place to stay, I opened my sketchbook. My recent sketch was of this girl, who looked so pretty. She sort of looked like me. I tilted my head.

It sort of reminded me of home. I didn’t want to imagine home, or my Mom calling the cops. Ugh. I looked at my scraped knee. I wished I brought bandages or alcohol in case of an accident.

“WELL, I AM HERE. I SHOULD PROBABLY EAT SNAILS. I should probably go home now. I gave them a good scare.”

Wait, I thought, I don’t want to go home. What will I say? I am so dumb. I should have brought food or snacks with me.

“Excuse me,” said a strange boy .

 

Chapter 5

 

“Don’t call the cops, please.“

“I won’t. I am nice. Anyways, you are just a girl jogging in the woods.“

“Right.” Oh wow, I made it without getting caught. Oh darn, he is still here, I thought.

“Well, bye, “ the boy said as he walked away.

Ugh, I thought. That guy is annoying but kinda cute. I tilted my head. Not bad. I must have looked like a fool in these clothes. I looked at the clothes I was wearing – my Dad’s khakis, and my Mom’s old blouse from Goodwill. I hadn’t wanted to look like myself. All my clothes were so, um, GIRLY. I hated it. Sara picked them out, but I never had the courage to say no offense, that outfit looks GIRLY. Anyways, Sara always wore those kinds of clothes, well, sort of like mine. I waited for a long time. Ugh, I thought. This is so boring. And off I drifted.

“Kid, come with me.”

“Huh?“ I said. When I looked up, I found a tall cop by me.

“Look kid, come, the train is going to leave us.”

“Where do you want to go?” I said.

“I am going to take you to an adoption center. Ohhhh, I forgot to ask if you had parents. Dumb me, sorry.”

“No, I don’t. My Mom left me here,” I lied.

“Okay, come on. You are coming with me,“ said the tall man.

 

Chapter 6

 

After a LONG train ride, I found myself face to face with an adoption home. They’re way creepier than they look in magazines.

Ding, dong. The bell sounded…uh, it didn’t sound normal.

“Well, off you go,” said the officer that went with me on the train.

“Okay, bye.”

“Bye,” he said without turning.

“WELCOME!!” a voice boomed from the loudspeaker. “Miss, please come to the main hall NOW.”

 

Chapter 7

 

At least I had my pad of paper. I also had my mechanical pencil. While I waited for someone to open the door, I started drawing anime. Anime was my favorite. I loved drawing it, too. I also loved watching it, that is the thing I love about my house. I had netflix and my anime website so that I could watch any anime show for free.

Sometimes, I doubt myself in my drawings or in class, I am always shy and …

“HELLO, LITTLE GIRL,” a seven-foot-tall woman said. Her face was uglier than the house, her eyes were gray but with a mix of red in the middle of her pupils and her hair was white, and I think she was albino. CREEPY .

“Hi,” I said. I didn’t want to be bothered by anyone, especially not by her.

“So, whats you’re name?”

“Abigail,” I lied.

“So, do you have parents?”

“NO,” I lied.

“Are you sure?”

“Yup.”

“Where did you live before then?”

“Alaska.”

“Then how did you get here? It’s Ohio.”

“Walked,” I lied.

“1,074 miles?”

“Yup.”

“Why are you lying, little girl?”

“Um, I am not…”

“Don’t deny it.”

“Oookaay.”

“Ok then, go up in the room and unpack. You WILL write a letter to me telling me where you used to live, and I know when you’re lying, it’s my…talent. Everyone here has one.” She smiled at me like the joker.

I thought about that.

 

Chapter 8

 

I thought and thought about it, and I couldn’t take my mind off it. I felt so curious. What was my talent? What if I don’t have a talent? Where was I, really? Was that really the only person in the orphanage?

Boom!

As I heard the boom, I sang,

 

“Oh, tumbling leaf

You fly so high

Let’s go chasin’

Butterflies

 

We follow clouds

Up in the air

Painting pictures

Of fairy tales

Oh, summer sun

Hold me in your arms

 

I love you, mother nature

Your sunny fields of green

I love your taste of freedom

Your singing in the wind

 

I love, I love

Breathing deeply

To smell your summer rain

 

I love, I love

When you kiss me

With your sunlight on my face, I love, I love

 

I lay my head

Under the tree

How many seasons

He might have seen

 

The golden fields

They softly bow

And seem to whisper

A lullaby

 

Oh, summer sun

Hold me in your arms

 

I love you, mother nature

Your sunny fields of green

I love your taste of freedom

Your singing in the wind

 

I love, I love

Breathing deeply

To smell your summer rain

 

I love, I love

When you kiss me

With your sunlight on my face

Like a warm embrace

 

Oh, you little bird

Tell the whole wide world

That I save my love for her

I love you mother nature

Your sunny fields of green

I love your taste of freedom

Your singing in the wind

 

I love, I love

When you kiss me

With your sunlight on my face

 

I love, I love.”

 

“STOP SINGING,” said someone upstairs.

Sorry, I thought, as I kept on singing under my breath.

“Come down here. There is someone I want you to meet,” said the woman that was, I guess, the manager.

As I came down, I saw a girl next to the albino woman who was probably the manager.

“I want you to meet Jade. She is…very, very creative.”

That minute, I knew I was going to be safe here.

Three Years Later

“Some girl named Sarah is here,” called the manager, who I recently learned was named Gretchen.

Sarah. The voice rang in my mind. How did she find me? I thought I was safe.

“Coming,” I called.

The minute I saw my friend’s face, it reminded me of everything. I missed her. Sure, Jade and I had become best friends throughout the years, and even though Sarah became my enemy, I still burst out crying.

“It’s ok. Do you know about what happened?” Sarah asked.

“No.”

“Well, your Mom died and your Dad is mad, but you still have me ALWAYS.”

“I want to come back.”

I knew that things wouldn’t be the same, but at least I had Sarah.

 

The End

God Like Thing

All of a sudden I was there.

But what was I before?

Was there a before?

I was alive. But what was alive?

I felt something rising into my subconsciousness, something of knowing.

But what was I before? Did I not exist? I can’t remember.

 

I stretched into my new form. It felt different, somehow.

I looked across the landscape, or was it sky? What does that mean? How do I know what this means?

 

It was blank, white, nothing. I could see nothing, or was it that I couldn’t see anything? But surely, if I saw nothing, It would be black, as I saw before. What was before?

Then I knew, at least I knew something. I could see something. Everything was just sucked of, something, instead of nothing, and this I know. Because I could see something. Full of vibrance…Color, that is what it was. Color. I could see it. It was small, but full of greens and blue. In the distance, a small box of beautiful color. And then I heard something. Heard, hearing? Yes. I heard something. Something very small. Something I know, no, believe to be coming from that color.

“Help!”

Then, before I could even realize it, something moved. Was it me? Did I move? I think I did. Suddenly I was closer, to the blue and the green. I looked in.

There were vibrant colors, lush greens and intoxicating blues, covering, what was it called? The landscape, yes. Mountains and hills rose and fell as they pleased, and the water rushed in rivers and sparkling waterfalls, dancing around the land. It appeared to have part of it submerged in water, it was surrounded by this blue liquid, it was all alone. The beautiful land was untouched, until I touched it.

 

I didn’t mean to, I just wanted to get close. The land was so beautiful and bright. It was warm. I wanted to see if I could go there, I had a pang of loneliness, it was terrible. Around me it was gray, sucked of color in any shape or form. I wanted to be somewhere where it was beautiful. I couldn’t help myself, I wanted to see if I could join it. So I touched it.

I didn’t mean for it to happen! I just wanted to see! But now it seems my touch has broken chaos on the world. Every tree around was on fire! Everything was brown and black, all broken and smoldering in ashes.

It changed. Something did. I think I changed it. with my touch, now the green is being replaced by a dark gray and orange and yellow tongues, I think, fire is what it’s called.

Something grew louder.

“Help!”

What was that? I looked around, I was alone, who could be saying that? What could be saying that? I looked into the box, now all gray and dull, black splotches littered the land and it made me feel sick just looking at it, knowing that I had changed all the beautiful green color to a dark gray. Well, I think I felt sick, but I did not feel good. So I moved, I moved away, I could not look at the destruction that I had inflicted. That was probably the only thing like that ever, the only thing with color, and I ruined it. I didn’t even have the slightest hope that it would get better, that it would, grow again. I couldn’t even think about it, I had to leave it, and so I did.

This thing has not given up, even if now the green is gone and it is just a murky gray and blue, and I’m not even convinced that I have given up on it. I hear it all the time.

“Help! Help!”

It said words over and over again.

Was it in trouble? No, I don’t think so. After I destroyed it, it only seems to get louder. But I didn’t think the blue itself was in danger, only everything in the blue.

But was there something in the blue making that noise? That I do not think so. But I couldn’t pull myself to seeing it. Dread and guilt have somehow taken over me, and it is horrible.

“HELP!”

Now that was the loudest it had even been. So I fought what I was feeling and peered back in again.

Gray, dull. All black and singed with some pestering flames that would not die out. However, the trees did not look as bare, was something growing on them?

“Help!”

Now what was that? Where did it come from? I searched the box, trying to find this sound. Can sound be found? No, I was trying to find what was making the sound.

I found it, I think I found it. What was it? It was standing there, no, it was in danger. It was in the blue, in the blue and fighting. Fighting the blue? Yes, I think so. It was thrashing wildly and it was screaming. What could I do? What should I do? I didn’t want to destroy everything. Not again.

But maybe, maybe I could help it. Pick it up or something. Maybe if I touched it softer.

Something moved, and it made a loud noise. Did I move it? The land shifted, it moved! I moved it! But the thing was scared, at least, I think that’s what it was. It thrashed some more and screamed about.

I did it again, and I moved the land closer to the thing. No, it did not realize. I moved it closer. Then it happened. I plowed the creature over with the land. I didn’t mean to! Whenever I touched the land, something bad happened.

But the creature was alive, it wasn’t hurt. It just stood up and walked onto the land. There, it was safe. But why couldn’t the creature just move the land itself?

Then, something strange happened, something interesting. The creature rose, and then looked to me. Could it see me? Did it know I was there? But something told me that it did. Because all of a sudden, the creature got on its knees and bowed.

 

——

 

What just happened? The land moved. It moved! And now I am safe. But what moved it? I think, some sort of a guardian? I protector? A god?

I think I must praise it, if it is to keep me safe. Safe from what? Well, it is better to be safe, than, well, not safe.

“Thank you!” I cried. I didn’t know if it heard me. This guardian, this God. I think that’s what I will call it, the God, my God. Did others have their own Gods? Were there others?

I felt lonelier than ever.

“I am alone?” I asked, asked the God. I don’t think it heard me.

“Why am I alone?” I asked again. I don’t think the God heard me.

I didn’t know what to do, so I walked, I walked around. I wanted to find some place beautiful, where I could live, live with someone, so I am not alone. Maybe others are waiting for me to live somewhere, so they can come.

Was the God watching me? That I do not know. Will it guide me to the perfect place, a blessed land? That I do not know, either.

But I kept walking, for a long time, when something strange happened. It got less bright. Darker? It was getting darker, and the big ball of light in the sky was falling. Falling! It was falling! Why? Will I end? Will I die?

“Why is the ball of light falling?” I shouted. But the God did not answer. I don’t think there is a God anymore. I think the land moving was something else. A coincidence of sorts.

 

——

 

Something was different. I could tell. I felt weaker. What was wrong with me? This little creature I watched was beginning to move around, from place to place, slumped over in a sad state.

And that’s when I felt it.

When the little creature looked to the sky, it said something, something I could not understand, and slumped and turned away. Was it mad at me? Did it expect, something?

But then I felt weaker, I didn’t know why. Was it because I had lost the creature? Lost it to what? That I could not say.

Should I give it something? What would I give it? I didn’t want to touch the land again, not after what I had done to it. Was it mad at me for destroying its home? Or making it look less vibrant?

I had to do something, I did not like seeing this creature upset, and I did not like the feeling of weakness.

It had been pacing around and muttering something. I tried to listen.

“Lonely.”

I heard that one word, lonely.

The creature was alone! Alone like me! That is why it is sad, at least, I thought so. Did it not know that I was there, that it was not alone? Maybe I wasn’t enough.

Was I supposed to make another one? I didn’t know how to do that!

I thought if maybe I could just think hard enough about it, I could make another one. Maybe.

I don’t know what I did, but suddenly, there it was. It was something, but it did not look like the creature. Did I have to make it look like that? It was floating by me. What should I do? I looked down. I seemed to now have gained a vessel of sorts. I looked much like the creature. I had hands, yes, hands. I didn’t know when I suddenly gained hands.

I stretched the creature before me. What a mess! It was gooey and floppy, and I didn’t know how I would be able to make it look like the creature.

I looked at the sad, slumped creature back in the not so colorful land, trying to gather ideas on what it looked like.

I guess I thought hard enough about it because when I turned back, the floppy mess looked like the creature.

Only how to bring this new creature to the sad creature in the land?

 

——

 

Now I am sure there is a God, because I was sitting under a tree when suddenly someone appeared. It looked like me.

“Hello,” it said simply.

“Hello,” I replied, the word new on my tongue. How did this new creature know more than I did?

Where did the creature come from? The God.

I bent down on my knees and bowed to the God. The new creature stared curiously at me.

“The God brought you here,” I said, “Brought me here, saved me from the water.”

The creature looked intrigued, and I wasn’t sure that it knew more than me anymore,

“Where is the God?”

“Up in the sky.”

“How?”

That I didn’t know. But I knew I wasn’t alone.

 

——

 

The new creature worked really well with the previous creature. They are both happy. And, somehow, they gathered materials and now have made, what is it called, a shelter!

I felt something swelling in me. Was it pride?

Now they were living in a shelter together.

Except one thing. When they came out, there were more creatures than that went it.

What happened? Had I created more?

There seemed to be some noises coming from the hut when they were in there, than the smaller creatures that came out.

Could I make smaller me’s?

I thought that maybe I could do that, except I needed a hut.

I must have a hut of my own, that will be something to work on.

 

——

 

I have found some interest in this God power. My people have found solitude in this beautiful land that the God brought us to. I taught my people the ways of our God, and they have a strong belief in It’s teachings. I was their leader, and our people grew from a meager tribe to a great civilization. We have buildings that seemed to reach the sky. We work the land to raise our crops so we could feed further generations. We tamed beasts and we tamed the water, and our God paved the way, sculpting the land to our pleasing. Our God brought forth our kind, and the only thing we could do in return is offer our belief, and act on It’s will. I was the oldest in our tribe, the leader, but suddenly one day I went somewhere else. I felt a floating sensation and saw a bright light, and suddenly I was looking down at my own people. I could see a wave of despair, and saw people crying, for the first time my people were corrupted with sadness. Nothing I have ever felt had felt worse. I felt a hand on my shoulder, and I turned to see a smile that encompassed such kindness and wisdom. I looked down again, and saw my people moving on, and a beautiful ceremony for my transcendence into this new realm. A new leader arose and I knew that they were now in good hands. I turned back and realized.

They always were.

 

——

 

I watched as the people, my people, transformed into new shapes. They advanced, and arose as a powerful community. They believed in me, I could feel it. I realized that the only way I could survive was to feed off of their generous belief, and the only thing I could do in return was expand the land for them to use, and to guide them when they became troubled, and had no one to provide answers for them.

However, sometimes, even I didn’t have an answer.

But I never thought of myself as some divine being, however, if they believe I am, and rely on me so, I must be of some importance. I saw them grow and expand, how fast that they did. Before long they had large communities and could write each other cryptic messages with some sticks and a thin parchment they invented through the trees I had provided.

How cleverly they used their resources, always wanting to know exactly how to do something, always wanting to know how to do something to better their society. How kind they were, always lending a helping hand to others who had their particularly unique life not so well. Their leader was warm and kind, as well as wise and fit enough to lead them through, well, the not so great times.

And there were some not so great times, where greed and pride and selfishness had blackened their path and lead them to bring harm on themselves, and on others, and I was indeed surprised that there were others, but somehow I believed that they were distantly connected with me. Somehow. However, I tried to guide them to their particular needs and tried my best to lure them back when they questioned their belief in me. How frustrating it was to know that somehow they didn’t, almost seemed that they couldn’t, believe in my power and existence. It took me a while to figure out how to contact them, but somehow only certain people could feel my presence on a regular time period.

How easily manipulated they were, how easily they could lose their faith, but if they chose a different path, I could still feel they were connected to me. I knew that they could never leave me for good, I was a part of them.

Then suddenly, one day, one of them came to me. It ascended to me, a dull smile and worn eyes. Below I saw the people ravaged in grief, it made my heart ache. I saw tears form in the person’s eyes, I put my hand on it’s shoulder, I had to comfort it somehow. But they moved on, they were once again in the hands of a wise and knowing leader.

Then I realized, in the face of the person next to me, there was a familiar feature in its face. I realized, this was the first. The one that was drowning before, the one that believed in me from the start, the one I owe all my power to. Had this person come to a new world, had it joined me? Forever? Maybe it’s time in the world below us was over, and it had yet to join me in this new realm, a new part of it’s existence. For this person, and me as well, will never go away, we will always exist, we will just always be in a different form, waiting for someone else to find us, and to make us feel special in an empowering way.

I knew and welcomed the thought of one day meeting all of the people below us, and to learn of their experiences, because all I know now, I have learned from them. But was there going to be a time when I left this stage, abandoned these people that so greatly depended on me? I didn’t know, but something told me that I would always be with these people, not just these ones now, but future generations, and I couldn’t wait to meet them all, to see their experiences and help them on their wonderful journey.

I looked at the person before me, and I felt a great burst of love and pride swell in my heart. We looked on at the people, our people, together, as we watched them enter a new challenge, and a new age. I didn’t know what was to come, to happen next, but I knew it was going to be alright.

 

We’ve already come this far.

Pollyo

“Hey, where did everybody go?” I asked. Where all of my fellow ice cream cones would usually be playing, the forest was empty. The trees were not shaking from kids swinging in the trees, balls weren’t flying from the daily football game, and all the homes were empty.

Suddenly, the ground started to quiver. I jumped in fear. I felt like the world had frozen and I was in mid-air. Wait a minute, I thought. I’m just a holly, jolly ice cream cone. I don’t know fear. Happiness is the only emotion I DO know!

The squeakiest voice rang through the Fudgey Forest. It was very high pitched and sounded like a gummy rat from the Gummy Land.

“We have to get every last one of them for the boss,” it said.

Two big, blue shoes walked right by me when a giant shouted, “Hey, there’s one! Get him.”

A giant net scooped me up. Is this the end, I wondered. Is this the end of my village? All of the others must have been captured. A tiny, blue tear fell out of my eye followed by a white drip of ice cream. My vanilla was melting.

Wait a minute, I thought. This is kind of fun. Being the ice cream that I am – always happy no matter what – that little water drop sucked right back into my eye.

“Weeee, rollercoaster ride, weeeee!” I cried out with glee.

The net loop-de-looped over a rock and through the thick trees. As the huge people took massive steps away from our village, I looked through the thick ropes.

“I think that’s all of them. Let’s go,” the giant said.

“Where are we going, boys?!” I asked. I was very concerned. I had never left my village before.

“Quiet, little man,” the voice squeaked. The next thing I knew, I was dumped into an empty box.

I sat still on the ride to somewhere, thinking about my old friends who always wanted to explore the colossal world: the world of candy. This could be the adventure I’ve been wanting – to the other side of the world.

When we arrived, I saw a big box with wheels. I read the words, “Ice Cream Truck” in rainbow, bubble letters.

The giant said, “He’ll go for about three dollars.”

A little boy walked up to the giant and said, “One, please.”

“That’ll be three dollars. Pay up!”

“Here you go,” the little boy replied.He seemed like a nice kid to go home and play with.

The next thing I knew, something grabbed me. The giant’s hand, with five long, pointy fingers wrapped around my cone. The giant handed me to the boy. I could just see how hungry the boy was by looking in his eyes. He bared his teeth. The big, dangling thing in the back of his mouth was almost touching the tip of my ice cream top. I screamed, and a crack rippled through my cone.

But wait… what’s scared? I have only ever felt happiness, I thought.

Then I yelled as the little boy tried to eat me. I could see the hunger in his evil, little eyes.

“Stop right there. That was not enough,” another new giant shouted. He looked at me like I was the most important thing in the world. “This one is priceless.”

The boy jerked back his hand away from his mouth, and I gasped.

“Well, sir, that’s all the money I have,” the boy said.

“Now get out of here, scat, goodbye, hasta la vista,” he said as he waved with his devious smile. “Boys, shut down the truck. It’s time for a little magic!”

When we got back in the dark truck, the man started to wave his hands.

“Hi!” I said politely. I stood and waited and waited and waited. Finally, I started to spin and spin super fast ……whoosh.

I was flying through a portal.

“AHHHHHHH! This is so scary!” Wait, I thought. What is scary? “Can anybody tell me what scary is??”

Out of the portal, I landed right on a race track. I saw all my old buddies from the village. As I scanned the crowd, some moaned as they glanced at me. Others cheered. And some just sat quietly. Some people just didn’t get my sense of humor. And I guess I did laugh at the wrong time every now and then.

“Hey guys, what’s happening?” I looked and saw a race track that was licorice black. I hopped over to everybody and gave everyone a cone bump.

My old friend Joebob shook my hand. Then we kicked sprinkles onto each other. “What’s up, Pollyo? Are you chillin?”

“Yeah!” I said. “What are you up to?”

“We’re in a race. The winner gets three wishes.” Joebob’s ice cream started to slide. “We’re losing!” He said disappointedly. “If we lose, we’ll never get out of here.”

“Gooooo, team!” I shouted as Joebob hopped into the big thing with wheels.

Zoom! The wheels spun on Joebob’s car as he zipped and zoomed around the track.

“And there goes Joebob.” The announcer’s voice boomed throughout the stadium. “He is pulling away – the cones are in the lead!” I hopped in one of the empty cars.

Joebob zoomed passed me as the race wore on. I started to do a victory dance. I just knew we would win. Then something went down. My car zoomed off at top speed. It jerked over into a turn and went on two wheels. I started to fall over.  I gained control and zoomed around the track toward the finish line.

Everybody started to shout.

“Pollyo, Pollyo, Pollyo!”

I crossed the finish line. A great voice thundered from the sky. “And the winner is, POLLYO and The Ice Cream Team.”

The other candies crossed the line behind me. Some of them kicked their cars because they were so mad. Others were praying that they would be able to get out of this dreadful place, even though they had not won. The Ice Creams were cheering on Pollyo and telling him what to wish for.

“It’s time to get your wishes,” the voice thundered again.

“Wish that we can get out of here,” the ice cream crowd instructed. Their eyes were hopeful.

“Okay, okay,” I said, faking like I was listening. I couldn’t wait to make my wishes.

The crowd started to settle. Some of the ice creams began to melt from sweating. Everybody was waiting for me to make my wishes.

I could hear the announcer’s deep breathing.

“Can I have hands, a banana blaster, hmmmmmmmmmmmmm, Oh! And a Giant chicken sandwich?” In a split second, I had made all three of my wishes.

Many of the other groups and all of the cones shouted, “NOOOOOO! You ruined our chance of getting home!” I smiled and stood silently staring at the devastated people. Everyone walked by me giving me a look that looked like the boy’s eyes. I slept on the cold, hard ground while the others made a large village and a warm fire.

The next day, I frolicked into the village.

“Can we ask the voice in the sky how to get out of here?” I asked, looking at the sweets around me–only a few cones, a gummy bear and a nerd.

“No. There’s no way. We’re stuck,” said the nerd. He had to be right because he was the smart one.

“Maybe Pollyo is right,” said Montana. She was wearing her usual pink, sparkly cowboy hat on top of her cone. “That mountain up there has been glowing,” she announced in her country accent. All of the pieces of candy grabbed their bags and started to hike up to the mountain.

When Montana, Joebob, and I reached the bottom of the mountain, camp had already been set up for the night. I rolled out my sleeping bag and fell asleep instantly.

In the middle of the night, something woke me up. I yawned. Then I heard it again – a rustling in Montana’s sleeping bag.

“Montana, what are you doing?”

“Climbing that mountain.” She stood up taller, her sprinkles shimmering.

“Can I come?”

I watched as Joebob hopped out of his sleeping bag, already in his climbing cone.

“Y’all weren’t planning this without me?” I said sadly, imitating Montana’s country accent. “Gosh darn, can anyone tell me what this emotion is.”

“Nope,”Joebob replied. “Can’t feel it either.”

We sneaked out of the tent, carefully trying not to wake any of the other cones.

We bounced up the gumdrop mountain, getting closer and closer to the glowing object. It got brighter and brighter as we got farther up. As I hopped, I noticed mallo cream beneath my cone, like snow. From a distance, I could hear a strange noise. Screaming skittles were tumbling down the mountain. As a purple one came close, Montana lassoed it with her bright ping lasso.

“What’s happening?!” she yelled. The skittle tried to wriggle free of her firm grip, but kept screaming. A Hershey’s bar came speeding down the mountain next, alongside four, sweet-looking flopping fish. The Hershey’s bar broke into four so the flopping fish could dodge us, but the youngest ran right over Joebob, sending him tumbling down the mountain. I wanted to bounce down the mountain and pounce on that stupid fish.

Wait a minute. What’s this emotion? I’m freaking out. I’ve never felt that before. I continued to bounce up the gumdrop mountain as the glow got brighter.

The light started to melt my ice cream and began to turn into a golden, glowing liquid.

“Empty your Canteen!” Montana yelled. “Let’s bring some of this goo to the camp so we can analyze it.”

We scooped up most of goo and found a gummy fish who offered us a ride down the mountain. When we got to the bottom of the mountain, Joebob laid crippled on the ground. His cone was cracked. The Hershey bars jolted to a stop and the canteen flew out of my hand. It slammed against the ground. The goo started to seep out of the bottle. When it tapped into JoeBob, the blinding light returned. Then it faded. Suddenly, Joebob’s cone was no longer cracked. Joebob was ready to climb up the mountain again. I look at the crack I had gotten when the boy was about to eat. I poured the elixir onto it and  felt a surge of energy. Another blinding flash of light.

The others started arising from their tents. When Dr. Squishy Muffins came from her tent, Montana whispered, “Stick the elixir in your bag now. Don’t talk to Dr. Squishy Muffins or Dr. Rainbow Sprinkles.”

My smile dropped into an “O.”

“I thought they were supposed to analyze the elixir,” I said.

“Just put it in your bag.” Montana tossed me the bag.

The next morning when I woke up the Mountain was gone and there were snowflakes the ground. There were many dippin’ dots scattered across the small hill. Other cones started to wake up and I told my usually early morning jokes. The whole town was laughing.

A great rumbling suddenly shook the ground. The commotion caused a few of the cones to fall over. The dippin’ dots started to roll into the cup. I was confused and a little scared. Not another feeling, I thought.

Legs popped out of the bottom of the cup. The face on the outside of the cup went from a smile to a ghostly grin. The Dippin Dotter had risen! It stood to its full height and looked at all of the candy ferociously, just like the boy who almost ate me.

“Fe, Fi, Fo, Fum!” the Dippin Dotter roared. “I see candy. Yum, yum, yum!”

Everyone stood stunned in amazement. Then, finally, I got to action. The banana blaster was already in my hands. I began to shoot the bananas at the giant’s grumpy face.

The design was halfway finished. His frown was almost turned upside down. The final bananas landed onto his now-happy face. The dippin dotter tumbled to the ground.

“PollyO! PollyO! PollyO!” All of the candy chanted just like at the race. This time, I didn’t mess it up.

The Dippin Dotter finally melted, but his drippings stayed for days and days, forming a pool of melted dippin dots.

“Guys, we should jump in!” said Josh, the Juicy Drop Taffy. He was a crazy stunt double who had been featured in the movie Sugar Rush as the perfect stunt double for the star, Tangy Tim.

“He has been right every other time,” Professor Cameron, the purple nerd, who is the smartest candy in the history of the world.

“I’ll go in first,” said Josh.

Catie the Riddle Skittle mystery solver examined the mysterious goo and said, “Josh, you’re a okay to jump!”

Josh revved his banana split and disappeared into the goo.

We waited days and days for Josh to come up. I was as worried as pop rocks before hitting a tongue. The professors and scientists started to examine the goo and test the substance. Women and children started to cry and even though I was worried, I just kept on cheering people up. On the final day when everyone was starving and wanted to eat each other, Josh finally popped out of the goo and had an exciting announcement.

“Guys, it’s home!” he announced.

The group stood stunned. Some stuttered, “Wha-what does he mean?”

“It’s home,” he repeated. “It’s where we used to live. The goo is a portal to our home!”

The group up front, mostly nerds examining the goo, hopped right into the portal.

Joebob, Montana and I waited in the back of the line for an hour. We started to get closer and closer to the goo. Finally, we reached the front of the line. The goo’s color started to change from a beautiful candy purple to a licorice black the same color as the race track.

“Hurry! Jump in!” yelled Montana. We all three looked at each other. Joebob hugged me until my ice cream started to gush out of the top of my cone.

“POLLYO!” Montana grabbed me, leaned over and kissed me.

“What’s this emotion?” I asked.

“Love, PollyO, Love.”

The Nightmare

Every night

I stare down at you

As you sleep

Ready to crawl down into your mind

 

I stare down at you

Waiting, watching

Ready to crawl down into your mind

I am your worst fear

 

Waiting, watching

For the first rumbling snore

I am your worst fear

I make you whimper and cry

 

For the first rumbling snore

Marks your doom

I make you whimper and cry

Every night

The Night Shift

7:45 PM December 24, 1999

 

It is Oscar Robertson’s first night as the security guard in District 9. Oscar is on the watch but nothing is happening. Oscar hates this job and thinks this is the most boring job ever. Three nights later, on December 27, Oscar doesn’t even show up and nothing happens. For the next two nights he doesn’t show up until the school’s 5th grade teacher calls in to speak with him. Oscar gets to the office. In the office, he sees a very slim and tall woman.

Oscar says, “Why did you call me in?”

She says, “I’ve been informed that the kids are losing their technology and money. Could you stay on the look out for people coming in and out of the school?”

“That’s my duty.”

That night, Oscar doesn’t see anything suspicious. It is New Year’s Eve in 1999. Everybody is inside their homes thinking the world is going to end, but not Oscar, because he has the night shift.

Near the police station there is a garden where Oscar hides in the bushes with his rifle, watching the school. 11:59: everybody is inside their homes holding on to each other for dear life. Then Oscar catches a glimpse of something near the school. It is a man in a Mexican red wrestling mask approaching the door. Oscar loads…

…and fires, and he hits his mask as he attempts to run inside the school. Oscar fires at the handle which thankfully knocks the handle off, so the man in the mask makes a run for it, but is stopped by a bullet hitting his arm. He cries in pain and agony. Oscar walks up to him and sees that it is the janitor. Oscar says, “What? Why were you trying to steal the kids money?”

“I wasn’t stealing the money. I was cleaning the bathroom so thats why I have the mask so I don’t have to smell that awkward urine smell,” says the janitor. I glance over my shoulder and spot a kid on the 8th floor with a Mets shirt on. He opens the window and says, “What happened, Mr. R?”

“Nothing,” says Oscar.

 

10:30 AM   December 31, 1999

 

Today is the first day for Brett of the CPT’s and he is frightened to death. Right now, he is in math class writing in his journal. “If you didn’t already know, the CPT’s determine if you get in Hunter.”

If Brett gets into Hunter, his family will finally appreciate him. Since he is the middle child, getting appreciated is mission impossible. This is a once in a lifetime experience.

He gets bullied a lot.

He’s very shy.

He has no friends. Is this the life you dreamed of? Well, it’s certainly not the one he dreamed of. He thinks he did really well on the math part of the CPT’s. Tomorrow Brett will do the reading section.

That night, he goes home to a family all cuddled up on the bed watching his favorite movie. He asks to watch with them but they ignore him. He goes to the living room and turns on channel 26 and watches the exhibition Mets game against the San Francisco Giants. The worst part is the game starts on western time at 7:30. He watches the whole game, which ends at midnight. The final pitch of the game is pitched and the Mets win. Then the clock strikes 12:00 and he hears a gunshot. He runs to the window to get a glimpse of what’s going on. He opens the window to see Mr. R.

He says, “What’s going on?”

Mr. R says, “Nothing.”

Everyone is okay, and the world didn’t end. But soon Bret figures out that the janitor is on the ground in a puddle of blood. The blood is coming from his arm. He shouts as loud as he can until someone notices him; that someone is a cop. He thinks to himself, What have I done? Mr. R was like a brother to me. He was always there for me. NOOOOOOOOOO!!! The janitor is taken to the hospital, where he will be given a mechanical arm.

The next day, Oscar goes to court. The jury decides he has a choice of either two years in jail or to serve in the army for four years. Oscar choses to take the four years to serve the army. Oscar chooses to be in the air force. Bret doesn’t get into Hunter, which is for the best because he doesn’t deserve it, because he turned on a friend. A friend that has been there when needed is now gone. If Brett hadn’t had screamed, then Oscar wouldn’t have taken the blame. Oscar says, “If it wasn’t for the little brat, I wouldn’t be here.”

The Floorboards

I, Ruth Edith, age 12,

am staring out the window at the sky streaked with fluorescent chalk,

surrounding a sun which remains a golden luminous ball.

Deep in my soul, the feeling of happiness is locked away in a metal chest, coated in dead, gray dust.

That dead grayness flows within me. It is what makes me who I am today. I know I am supposed to be in hiding, locked under the concealing floorboards,

but I can’t take another second of it –

of insects crawling about my body, of my rumbling stomach, of fear.

Floorboards of sorrow conceal the old me.

The new me perches at the windowsill, wondering why our world is so deplorable.

How a single man can sway all of Germany to discriminate against Jews. That single man is despicable, heinous, loathsome.

I utter these words under my breath, careful not to awaken mother and father, who are obscured under the floorboards.

Father had been a tailor, but his shop has been confiscated by the Nazis.

Mother, a seamstress, worked with Father.

I had been a schoolgirl, dreamy and benevolent.

 

Suddenly I hear a faint sound.

There is a rattling noise of a car engine off in the distance.

I cannot imagine why one would drive a car around the village at the crack of dawn,

so my eyes remain peeled towards the window,

curiosity drowning me in its grasp.

It is a cherry-red convertible, as red as my cheeks on frigid mornings.

A man is standing in the backseat, hollering “all heil Hitler.”

It’s him, that dreaded man.

Many open their windows, echoing this foolish phrase.

I tiptoe back under the floorboards,

and let its despondency cover me.

Biography – Scars

I must admit, it still hurts.  Every day, I feel it a bit, in my legs, arms, and face. I wanna scream but I just sigh and sit down – I guess I’ve gotten used to it.

What am I talking about?  Let me introduce myself. I am Rebecca Lugeva, and I am currently 78 years old. This is my story of how I got to where I am today.

 

July 16th, 1946

 

Right now I am nine. I lived in Turnsdale, Ohio and loved farming with my father, Bill. We were going to Florida where we were going on a rollercoaster past live lions! I was so excited!

We arrived in Florida at noon, a bright sun shining on me. I couldn’t wait to see those beautiful lions! As we arrived at the front gates, we were greeted by a tall man in a bright green outfit.

“Greetings family of Lugeva, we have been expecting you!” he said, as Father gave him some money. “Today we will be doing a beautiful tour of trained lions, so do not worry. And, as always, don’t lean out of the roller coaster.”

Filled with excitement, my family and I boarded the coaster, the man in green getting in the driver’s seat. I wonder what colors the lions are, I thought. Soon the engine roared to life and the roller coaster slowly took off, making a chugga-chugga sound. Soon, we were in a wonderful plains with a bunch of large, brown lions.

“They’re fabulous!” I cried out.

I leaned out to see them closer. At last minute I remember what the man in green had said: “Don’t lean out of the roller coaster.”

But it was too late. I fell off, landing on the grass. Then, I saw a lion charge at me, and everything went black.

 

July 20th, 1946

 

I woke up in a gray bed. It was long and uncomfortable. I noticed Father and Mother standing over me.

“You’re awake!” called Mother.

“W-what happened?” I asked groggily.

“You were bitten by a lion,” Father said. “Dumb Park Ranger! He said they were trained! You were in a coma for four days. We were very worried. Luckily the doctors have helped a lot.”

 

September 5th, 1953

 

Now, as I am 18, it is affecting my life greatly. The scars all over me made people afraid of me. It hurts all the time.  And today, I was sick of it.

I stared at my college roommate, the only person who supports me. Her name was Melissa Termella.

“What’s wrong?” she asked.

“Just thinking back to the incident.”

“Don’t!” she said. “That’s the past. Think about this moment.”

 

December 31, 1957

 

After college, Melissa and I stayed in touch. I moved into a small house in Ohio, my home state. I tried to get back into farming – maybe that will make me happier. Nope. The farming motions just made the pain worse. I told Melissa this, and she decided to help me.

“What do you mean, help?” I asked over the telephone.

“I’ll come over tomorrow. You’ll see.”

 

January 1, 1958

 

“Happy new year,” said Melissa as she entered my house.

“To you too,” I said, then grunted; my scars hurt as I closed the door.

I led my only friend into the living room, where we sat down on my soft chairs. Melissa began to speak.

“So…lets start,” she said, “I am going to help you lighten your spirits. The more happy you are, the better your scars will get.”

I sighed, “Okay. Lets start.”

“Good,” Melissa said. “First, what is your favorite thing to do?”

“Farming. That didn’t work.”

“Ah! Don’t say that. We’re going now.”

“What – ?”
“Do you trust me?”

“Yes.”

“Then come on.”

With a large smile on her face, she ran out of the living room and into the backyard. I ran after her, so confused, that I momentarily forgot my pain.
“What are you doing?!” I asked, when we were both outside.

“I’m farming, genius!” Melissa said as she picked up a shovel and hoe.

She began to dig. All she was doing was digging, occasionally looking into the holes she was digging.

“You don’t know how to farm, do you?  I laughed.

“No clue,” Melissa said, as she turned to me. “But you do!  Get over here.”
I jogged over and picked up the shovel, “This, is how the master does her thing.”

I leaned down to the grass and got so into my farming and planting, I forgot about the scars, the lion, everything…

“Jeez,” said Melissa.  “You’re great!”

In ten minutes, a new plant was beginning to sprout.

“Boom!” I said. “How’s that?”

“I’m better at teaching,” shrugged Melissa.

We smiled and went inside. We walked over to the front door, and Melissa turned to me.

“I guess I’ll be going,” she said. “Think about what we did. Did you even feel those scars while you farmed?”

“No.”

“Great,” she said happily. “I’ll be back in two days.”

 

May 7, 1960

 

Now, three years later, Melissa is still teaching me, and I am very grateful for her. I relate myself to the plants I farm – getting taller and taller, better and better, as time goes on.

My scars are getting much better. Farming is getting more fun than it ever was. And I am closely listening to everything Melissa teaches me about: social skills, chatting skills, distractions, and more. Where would I be if I had gone to a different college? Thank goodness I found her–I might still be that secluded woman who weeps all the time.

Every year on Melissa’s birthday I go to her house, hug her, and tell her how thankful I am for her. And the hugging does not hurt my scars.

 

April 17th, 2015

 

Ah, present day. As I said, it still hurts. But not nearly as much as it used to. I am old, so that might make it worse. But I’m happy now. I think of Melissa who I still see sometimes. I have a nice husband named Rick and I have learned to be super thankful. I never took Thanksgiving “thankful speech” seriously–until I met Melissa.

Thank you for reading my story. Maybe I can inspire you to rise up and be a hero.

Rae Raspberry

Right in our world, there is a land you will only see if you look closely: tiny people live in fruit, and their fruit. This is their story.

Rae watched the sunset in their small apartment while Mom and Dad argued. The gooey raspberry substance made a good cushion, as she had been sitting there for hours. Rae sighed. Ever since Mom came back, things had been hard, there was more arguing and fighting. Rae finished watching the sunset that looked pink from the raspberry.

“Dinner,” yelled Mom.

Rae sighed again. She was just glad to have Mom back. Mom’s new raspberry had an infestation of mold. Mom had only come back a few months ago. She’s so mean. Is that why? Rae wondered.

Raspberry quiche is my favorite!!!” Rupe said.

“What’s wrong?” said Rae.

Her parents looked at each offer.

“Your mother and I have decided we’re going to move to a body,” said Dad. She liked her little room even if she did have to share it with Rupe. Rupe said he really did not want to move. She thought of running to her room, but the house suddenly had a strange emptiness to it. Rupe was not sad about moving, though.

“Cool!” their Dad said. “Rupe is super happy and outgoing.”

A few days later, Rae finally had the courage to tell Willa and Grace that she was moving. She felt like her world was turning upside down. Everything was now packed up in little pink boxes that said, “Rheina Raspberry” or “Rupert Raspberry” or “Rupert Senior Raspberry” or “Rochelle Raspberry.” Before she knew it, it was time for Rae and her family to move.

Rae and her family climbed out onto the raspberry carton. Rae was still giving her parents the silent treatment. It was 2am. It was cold and scary, but Rae felt determined. She was so scared, having to take A bus and C bus. They had to jump over the ledge when Sam, the grocery store cat walked by.  She was not happy to be there with few other families and a guide.

“1,2,3! JUMP!” he yelled.

She jumped.

 

2:45 a.m.

Rae was tired. So tired that everything sounded like mumbling. She caught snatches of a conversations: I’m telling you. Caaaaa Siiick. Those hoodlums will pay! A high fever…

But most of all, Rae heard a young woman sing to her baby, only because she was next to her, as she was singing quietly, “If all of my misery was swept by a wave, I wouldn’t have to hide in a cave, my love, my only sweetheart.”

Just then Rae noticed that the woman, certainly quite young, had no baby, or child for that matter was with her. She must be crazy, thought Rae…

“All OFF! Last stop!” said the conductor, Hank.

“Rae, honey, wake up,” said Mom.

“Uuughhh,” said Rae.

Five hours later, the man at the Fruit Service Immigrant Center said, “Here are your seed costumes! You have to wear them when you board your raspberry! So if the humans see you, you will be safe.”

“WHAT?!” said Rae. It was a big white suit with a big white middle. It was the ugliest thing Rae had ever seen. She would never wear that. Her friend Grace would have said, “It would not have gone with her complexion.” She tried that–it didn’t work.

The man said, “Sorry kiddo.”

She was wearing a white undershirt. They went to their raspberry. It wasn’t like theirs–it was fatter, and you had to board the fruit that you were born with. “Now you are stuck with raspberries.”

She was disgusted. She was over ripe. Rae was so nervous, she didn’t want to get bitten. She didn’t want to get her leg bitten off like Willa’s dad. The carton was pretty, but she was so embarrassed about having to be in that costume, she tried to hide under the raspberry gel, but it did not work. She sat down. Her little brother Rupe was busy laughing. He thought he looked amazing in his suit. Mom and Dad looked so proud of him. “Thank you, Rupe, for being responsible and wearing it, even if you don’t want to,” said Dad with a glance at Rae.

“Grace and Willa would never be caught dead with that,” Rae said.

“WE’RE GOIN’ IN!!!” was heard all over.

Gosh, thought Rae, my neighbors were quieter than that. WERE quieter than that. WERE hit her like a pang in the chest. They were never going back, and she didn’t know what came ahead…

She woke to a sudden jolt to the shoulder. “Rae!!! Wake up, we’re going in!!!” said Mom.

“Rae, it’s time to gooo!!!” whined Rupe.

“OKAY! OKAY!” said Rae. She and Rupe got their bags and joined their parents at the edge of the gel. Instinctively, she crouched.

“Rae, hold on to your luggage,” said Mom.

“How do you know so much about this?” said Rae.

“I study,” said Mom. Just then, they felt themselves being lifted up.

“AAAHHH!!!” screamed Rae. Rae noticed she wasn’t the only one screaming–the whole Raspberry seemed to be shrieking in terror. Rae screamed along with them.

“BE QUIET,” came a voice that seemed to be coming from Rae’s stomach. “BE QUIET OR THEY WILL HEAR A MURMURING FROM THEIR FOOD!”

“Oh!” gasped Rae.

“Dont worry,” said Mom, “Everyone heard that. It came from the suit, that is what Mayor Fruitsy says.”

Rae had never been more scared in her life. “Mom and Dad, that was so close!!!” Chomp…Rae was aware of being put in the mouth. She vaguely saw Rupe. She saw teeth. She saw a person directing people, sitting on top of the uvula. She dived, like Mom and Dad had taught her. Mom and Dad…what happened? Chomp…oops, so close to my leg. She was just starting to get her courage back, when…she fell.

She was just falling down the tongue, and fast! She wanted to scream but bit her lip instead. Ooohhh! Cushiony! She tripped and fell onto a bridge. Clonk! Clonk! Her two pink bags fell on her head. ”Ooff!” she said.

“All in all, not such a smooth landing,” smirked a girl about her age, and then walked away. All Rae saw was long blond hair…

They said, “What’s wrong?”

“That girl was  mean!” She looked up at her, pained with tears in her eyes. This is not the future she wanted.

“Rae, we moved here for a new start…we needed to sort things out,” said Mom.

“RUPE!” yelled Dad.

“NO!” said Rae. She didn’t know why she didn’t want the girl to see her crying. Just then, Rupe arrived. But something was wrong. Rupe was clutching his hand and crying. His luggage fell on him too, but he didn’t seem to notice. Dad knew instantly what was wrong. “Rochelle! Take Rae to our house!” says Dad. “Our NEW house. I need to take Rupe to the emergency room. I know my way around here better than we did when we lived in our raspberry.” And with that, Dad and Rupe were gone.

To Rae, it looked like they had just disappeared from the ground. But she found out later that there was actually a series of tubes that once you stamped your foot in a certain place, and tapped in your ID, a bunch of manholes that led to the tubes that were all around the body that would take Dad and Rupe to the hospital. Along the sides of the greenish river, Rae noticed little beach houses. They were more like huts with a straw roof. They were small, but Mom said that it would fit them and they would live there.

They walked inside the hut and Rae noticed it was alright. Just no raspberry furniture. But she could get used to it and she had her own room. Just then, Dad popped out of the ground with Rupe.

“OH MY GOSH!!!! screamed Mom and Rae. “Whathappendtorupeisheokaywhatsup!” said Mom.

“He’s ok, it was just a graze. I’ll tell you later, Ro,” said Dad, using Mom’s nickname that meant something was wrong.

That night, Rae could not sleep in her new bed. To her it was uncomfortable, and made her sneeze. After the 10000000000th sneeze, she crept downstairs so she could ask Mom to make Mom’s special raspberry, but stopped when she heard her name.

“…AND dragging Rae to start over with a new brother, too!!!” She crouched under the stairs listening.

“Rupe…dead?” thought Rae. “Is that why he was in Mom and Dad’s bed?” She didn’t like Rupe but she didn’t hate him. Now she felt so guilty and tired that she lay down in bed, cried all night and didn’t sleep at all. Maybe that was why she was so grumpy the next day…

Rae had unpacked but something was still nagging at her. Raspberries tend to be real worrywarts. The first day of school was drawing nearer, but on the promising side, Dad was going to take them to his work on the brain.

 

Rae wrote this:

 

Some bad things in my life: Mom and Dad are fighting more, school starts soon!!! There is something wrong with my brother, my Dad bought him a device that he has to bring with him everywhere. Even at dinner or the bathroom. That is what Mom and Dad are fighting about now, but if it beeps when he has to go to work, it means something is wrong. I don’t like this…

 

Rae decided, right there on the very first day of school, to change “Rae” to “Rheina,” her given name. But then she changed it back to “Raina,” because it was better, and in her favorite book, that was the main character’s name.

Then realized she just liked Rae better.

When she arrived at the school, she looked at the class. It was so plain. She wished she’d gotten to go to the private raspberry school. Back when they lived in their old raspberry, there were two options. Go to a private school for just raspberries, or a school of mixed fruits. They were called Can Schools and Private Can Schools. She had originally gone to a private one, but after Mom moved out the first time when she was five, she switched to a Mixed Can School, and met Willa and Grace. Rae’s mother had moved out twice. The first time Rae’s mother came back because she had felt bad that she had taken her one-year-old son and not her five-year-old daughter. Rae was still mad at her about that. But she didn’t say anything, because it was too awkward. There are just some things you couldn’t tell her.

She pushed open the door, and…

“Here is the calculus of the numbers 2 4 6 8.” Oops. It was also Rae’s first time in middle school. She had gone to elementary school back in Raspberry Ville, but now the fifth grade school was a middle school. She had no idea what the teacher was talking about, but that didn’t really matter, because the teacher stopped right where she was as soon as she heard the door creak. “And here is our new student, Rheina Raspberry! Would you tell us a little bit about yourself, Rheina?”

Rae just stood there, so the teacher gave her a prompt. “Where are you from?”

Finally Rae got her courage. “Raspberry Ville,” she whispered.

“Great! Is there anything else you’d like to tell us about?” the teacher repeated, with that same amount of sarcasm they often use.

“Yes,” Rae said, repeated in a louder voice. “My name is Rae, not Rheina.”

The teacher looked for her for a moment and sat down. She told her to sit down next to a boy. He must have been a raspberry, Rae thought, because he has curly hair, like mine, but a darker shade of pink. The teacher was saying, “Richard, would you like to give Rae a tour?” Richard nodded.

First he showed her the bathroom, (awkward, because he was a boy and could not go in). Then he started talking: “my sister Riley is just like you, a girl with a love of nail projects. But I also have a brother named Roger, oh, and a baby named Reggie, another named Robbie, and everyone calls me Rich.”

Then he was silent. When they got back to class, the both of them were blushing, Rae from the lies she had told, and Richie from, well, everything.

“Good, now join Beryl, over there, Beryl, raise your hand!”

A pretty girl with blue hair tied into a bun and purple glasses raised her hand. “Yes, Miss Kiwi?” said Beryl.

She looks wimpy, thought Rae. She sat down next to Beryl and they worked on the math. However, the girl next to Beryl sneered and glared at Rae.

“Don’t mind her, that’s just Liviah. She’s mean.”

By the end of the lesson, they were talking about movies and recess. When the bell rang, Beryl asked Rae if she wanted to hang out with Beryl’s friends. Rae was happy to have this invitation so fast.

Just then, about five million girls came up. They all started telling Rae their names. All Rae heard was, “I’m Stella Strawberry,” and “I am Limona Lime,” and “I am Carina Cranberry,” and much more…everyone except for Liviah Lemon. Just then, Beryl pulled her away.

“Here, my friend,” she said. “Those are the twins Ollie and Ophelia Orange.”

“Hii!!!” said the girl named Lucy. “Let’s do a makeover on you, your lips are so dry.”

Rae touched the lips Mom always told her to put cream on, just as Stella said, “Oh my gosh, Luce, you are being so mean to this poor girl Rea, remember your first day?”

“Actually, its Rae,” said Rae softly, not wanting to upset one girl that was nice to her.

“Ahh! So sorry!” she said .

“S’okay,” said Rae. Just then, Liviah walked in.

“Hey Rae, you’re not okay, your Dad is dumb, your Mom should be dead, and I bet you wet the bed”.

Then she pushed Rae hard smack dab onto the ground. Her new friends helped her up, whispering words of comfort.

Recess ended. School was okay, classes were good, middle school was fine. That is what she told her mother, but here is a diary entry she wrote:

 

Dear Diary,

 

I hate this! The kids are okay, but it is so awful. I hate how the teachers are so boring and drone on. I hate that awful Liviah, she is so mean! Some of the kids are mean, and some are quiet, like Bart Blackberry in science, or Lola Lime. But it is so…bland, not like a mixed can should be.

 

Love,

R

 

Rae was excited about school. By the end of the week, she had forgotten that her father would take her and Rupe to the brain. He reminded her at dinner on Friday, but was interrupted by yet another phone call.

Her mother said, “Maybe that will give you a chance to see how busy your father is.” Then she cleared the dishes. Rae now relied more and more on her diary.

 

Dear Diary,

 

So nervous for the brain! Rupe seems to be feeling better, but he looks like he is running a 120 degree fever. I’m feeling sleepy, even though it is only 7:00. And today that Liviah pushed me against the lockers and spread the rumor that I wet the bed. One of my friends believed it! Aaaahhh!!

-R

 

On the day of the brain, Rae found a note scrawled for her by her mother. It read:

 

Rae’s father woke him up. At the gym–left out your clothes. Help Rupe get dressed–don’t forget he’s coming, too. Daddy is making breakfast.

 

Love, Mom

 

Rae looked at the clock. 6:00 a.m.! “Yeah, that’s when I get up,” said Dad.

He handed her a microwave waffle, still frozen. She gestured to it, and Dad shrugged.

“It’ll warm up while we walk.”

Mumbling something about too warm weather, he went to get his shoes. Then Rae remembered: Rupe! She woke him up, and they both got dressed, Rupe in a suit, and Rae in a frilly dress. They left, walked two blocks, and took a different subway.

They walked some more uphill, and Dad had to carry Rae and Rupe across some icky mud.

“Thank you, my lovely prince,” Rae said, and kissed him on the cheek. Rupe smiled.

When they finally got to the brain, both kids were tired, and Rupe had some mud trailing off his suit. Dad slapped a card in front big brass doors. A robotic voice said, “Hello, and welcome to the brain,” and after a brief pause, “Mr. R. Rasberry. Thank you for coming to work today.” Then it began to play the fruit national anthem. Oh say can you see, by the fruitily light…

Rae’s father opened the doors by punching in a code. The brain was full of light and energy. It was circular, and there was a rope to hold so you could not go in the sections. At each section, there was a door. Everything was bursting with activity. “Hiya, Brendon!” Dad said to a worker. “Brenny, these are my kids, Rae and Rupe.” Brendon barely nodded. Dad motioned to his head and made the crazy sign, which Rae thought was rude, as even crazy people have feelings too.

Their father had asked Rae to take Rupe to the fancy bathroom. (She made him go in the ladies room). But as they were walking back, Rae saw a familiar face: Brendon. “Hi, Brendon!” she called. He dismissed Rupe and Rae waving by just walking straight ahead. Rae shivered.

The rest of the brain was cool, but all Rae could think about was Brendon, and his distant yet cold look. Brendon was a blackberry. He looked like he used to have black hair, but thinning, and turning gray and white, like a grandfather. However, unlike a grandfather, there was no telltale twinkle in his cold, blue-gray, and, in this light, black eyes. So you can imagine just how happy Rae was to see her mother, out of the marble bathroom and long empty-spaced brain. Rae practically collapsed into her bed, meaning to think about Brendon, but she was so tired, she was asleep before the name Brendon ever entered her brain.

“Dinner, Rae? Are you feeling well?” her concerned mother said as she entered her room.

“Huh?” Rae was shaken awake by her mother’s voice. “I guess so.”

She joined her family at dinner, though not her father, as he had yet another business call. She hastily ate her dinner, even though it tasted bland and gross to her. “Now I’ve got a special surprise,” her mother said. “Raspberry pie!”

“Yay!!! cried Rupe.

“Hooray,” said Rae weakley.

“I hope you’re up to eating it,” her mother began, and to Rae’s horror, started to give a long speech about the importance of listening to your body, and only eating if you feel like it, even if it does look so good. But then somehow, the raspberries bubbling away smelled sugar-sweet, and sickly gross, and suddenly she just hated the color pink, and well…being a raspberry! And then everything went black.

She woke up with an apple doctor peering over her. “Yep, a touch of colitisofruito,” said the doctor, whose nametag read Dr. Antonio Apple, also bearing the slogan: “An Apple a day keeps the doctor away!” Her mother peered down on Rae, as the doctor began a long and dull conclusion.

“It must have been moving to a new place with new germs, or direct human contact.” He shuddered. “She will be fine in a few days. Just take this Rasberrio antibiotics. Stay home from school for a week though.“ Rae signed and fell asleep.

When she woke up, her head, throat, and stomach hurt. There was a pamphlet on her desk. It read:

 

Are you suffering from fruit month long mono?

Tips: Watch TV

Sleep

Raid the fridge

Have a long relaxing bubble bath

Read a book

Rest

Feel better!!!

 

Rae groaned and went back to sleep.

When her mother came home, Rae was sitting up, face flushed with fever. She called, “Mama!” and she came pestering Rae with a billion questions “Areyouokay? Whathappened? Howareyoufeeling? Doyouwantsomethingtoeat? Todrink?”

“Oh, Mama, right before I fainted, I thought the pie smelled gross, and I well, hated being a raspberry,” blurted Rae.

“Oh, baby!” she said. “You were sick, and I know you love being who you are. Just remember that, no matter what. Be who you are.”

Two weeks later, Rae felt fine, but as she put it to an email to her BFF’s, Rae was right. There was a huge storm coming. Outside, the wind blew hard. “”Rae, can you stay home alone?”

“Yeah,” said Rae, wearing trackpants and a sweatshirt.

“BYE,” Mom yelled. Rae flipped on the TV.

“Huge storm warning.” FLICK.

“We think it is caused by the baseballitusuioras germs, but can’t be sure.” FLICK.

“Dora, lets go explora.” FLICK.

Rae turned the TV off. How boring. She fell asleep.

It must have been dismissal time thought Rae, looking at the clock which read 2:45. “Wow,” thought Rae. “I have been asleep for hours! What woke me up?” she wondered.

Outside, the wind howled, and a branch smashed against the window. Despite what her mother said about not going near the window during a storm, Rae peered out, and saw rain, branches, and Mom and Rupe!!!??? Rae ran outside, trodding on fallen bits of tree, but despite her thousands of splinters on her sensitive raspberry feet, ran to her mother and brother.

“Mooom, Ruuupe!” she yelled.

“Rae!!!” yelled Mom. “Open the door!”

Rae ran back into the house and flung open the door. Mom and Rupe rushed in. She was holding an unconscious Rupe in her hands. Rae slammed the door. Mom put Rupe on the table, and poured some liquid onto his body. “He’ll be fine,” said Mom.

Rae looked doubtfully at her little brother. “Oh Rupe!” cried Rae. “Oh Mom! I heard you and Dad talking…and I don’t want a new brother! And why does Rupe look so sick?!”

“Oh, baby,” her mother said, “Your Dad’s specific job in the brain is called a brother. WE were thinking of divorce again…” She paused, seeing Rae’s horrified expression. “But now we won’t, hon. Rupe is like this because, well, the boys at school beat him up.”

“What!!!” cried Rae.

Before her mother could answer, Rupe sat up and groggily stared around.

“Mama!” he sobbed.

“Oh Rupie,” Mom said. “Come on! Off to beddy byes.” She scooped him up and carried him upstairs. Rae sat on the sofa, hoping that everything would be normal by tomorrow.

 

Three days later, the Raspberries were eating dinner, raspberry glazed pork chops with creamed raspberries, when Dad got another call, but this time on his regular cell. He walked off to answer it. Rae heard:

Dad: Hello? This is Rupert Raspberry.

Other Person: Hi…

Dad: Oh, hey Brendon. What’s up?

Brendon: Listen. My place is flooded, and I have a new home, but I need to crash somewhere tomorrow.

Dad: Hey–that’s too bad. How about you come over to our place?

Brendon: Um…

Dad: My family won’t mind.

Brendon: Family? Well, okay.

Dad: Okay…I have to go.

Brendon: See you tomorrow.

Dad: Bye.

Brendon: Bye.

 

When he came out, he announced, “Okay, it’s settled then. Tomorrow night, my work pal, Brendon, will be coming over for dinner. He lost his home, but is getting a new one, but needs a place to stay tomorrow.”

Even though she had to pretend she had not heard, Rae’s mother did have an argument.

“Darling, that’s all very wonderful, but what about Rupe? He is still injured, you know.”

“No he isn’t,” said Dad. “All that happened was that a huge branch crushed his foot, giving him welts and a fever.”

Mom sighed, but looked like she was going to say more. Rae quickly excused herself to “use the bathroom,” or actually wait out the fighting.

“AND HOW COULD YOU WITHOUT TELLING ME???!!!”

“…a friend, I owe him huge, come on, Rochie…”

“He couLD BE PSYCHO!!!!!”

“JUST GO PUT THE BABY TO BED, dearest angel!“

Rae tiptoed back to her room, and cried herself to sleep even though it was only 7:42.

The next day was filled with cleaning, Dad (trying) to cook, Rae doing her homework and avoiding people, and Rupe looking pale and sickly. Everyone had perked up, especially Rupe, by dinnertime.

Then Brendon was there.

“Come in! Come in!” Dad pretended that he had a happy, healthy family. Rae wondered if Brendon would fall for it. He looked unhappy. Rae’s mom came through the door.

“Hello. You must be Brendon. I’m Rochelle,” said Mom. Then Rae knew that she should say hello. “Hi…” What should I say? “I’m Rae and this is my little brother Rupe…”

Then they sat down to dinner. Rae ate her gross Dad-made turkey and salad. Rupe gagged it down. No one spoke, so Rae did not tell about how Liviah had taunted, teased, and accused her of crying and hurting her friend, even though Rae didn’t. She was so worried that Liviah would tell her parents, though Brendon’s eyes always softened to the raspberry children, while turned forever steely on the adults.

After dinner, Brendon was ready to leave. Rae’s parents were a bit disappointed that he was leaving, but got him his coat and said goodbye and thank you. Just as Brendon was picking up his coat, something fell out. Rae picked it up. “Brendon?” she said, but her family and Brendon had already gone. She thought, I can always give it to Dad to give it to him. On her bed, the wallet fell open. A picture of two young blackberry children came out, one older girl, one younger boy. Both were happy and laughing. It made Rae happy to see, although the older one looked semi-sad. I didn’t know that Brendon had kids, she thought. She then hid the wallet and the picture in her shirts drawer, underneath her Ming Hui’s ice cream shop shirt, and in her Lizzyhead island sweatshirt pocket. Good, she thought, running off. As she brushed her teeth, she thought about Brendon. Why is he so mysterious? Are those his kids? Why didn’t he tell us? Why do the kids look so familiar? Rae’s head swam with questions. Rae blocked all these thoughts and fell asleep.

 

The next morning, Rae ran off to school, only to find Liviah standing at the gate.

“I told Mr. Galvin the principal. How dare you be such a bully,” she said in a mock baby voice.

Mr. Galvin came out. ”Rae Raspberry! How dare you bully sweet Liviah. Come.”

Rae couldn’t take it. “I…I…” She ran the five blocks home.

“Mama!” she called, running in.

“Rae! Are you sick?”

Rae told her everything while crying. In Kiwigarten, she’d run out after missing the bus. One phone call to the principal was all it took, and Rae went back to school with her Mom. After the drop off and apologies, the principal told Rae he was busy, but she had to stand up to Liviah. It was recess, and the tables were turned. The whole school was watching. Liviah was being bullied-bullied by Simone, her frenemy, but she realized that Liviah was protecting Bart Blackberry from Simone’s teasing. What happened to the rude girl who would say to her boyfriend before he’d brush her off, “Lemon and lime were meant to be together!” with a sugary sweet voice and lips. Just then, Rae knew…she did not know how it happened, but she recognized the children from the photo: Bart Blackberry and Liviah Lemon. At the same time, her friends Willa Watermelon and Gemma Grape visited. Gemma ran right past her…hmph! Willa also looked hurt, but said that Grace missed her too much.

 

“Beryl, psst, Beryl,” Rae said. She then told her everything. When she finished, Beryl’s eyes were wide, and her mouth open. She was also just as shocked. This was a very strange playdate, thought Rae. The next day at school, Rae decided to confront Liviah.

“Liviah…I know your secret,” she blurted. Liviah broke away from her group of friends, and then they went to the garden. Liviah grabbed Rae by the shirt.

“How do you know?” her words came out sobbing, her mascara running.

“I got plastic surgery because of the divorce and the fight and the Limes let me stay with them, and now they are trying to be together but I’m too ashamed to come home.”

One hour later, Rae realized that the crazy lady she’d seen on the bus was Lizzi Lime with her daughter from another marriage, Libby Penelope Lemon-Pineapple. Wow, thought Rae. Then, imagine everyone’s shock and surprise as Rae walked in, friends with Liviah.

“You have to go to them today,” said Rae. “Text me.”

And they traded numbers, leaving Rae to explain, “Listen, she had some rough changes in her life. She is very nice, if you get to know her.” No one asked her anything else when Liviah ditched her own friends and sat at their lunch table. Rae felt at peace with the world at last.

 

Ggrapie: I’m sorry about what I said, I’m your friend…

WW: Me too.

RR: Forgave GTG bye friend calling

 

Llemon: THEY SAID YES!!! OMG THEY LOVE ME MY NEW NAME IS BELLA BLACKBERRY!!!

RR: that’s AWESOME

BellaB: FYI don’t get plastic surgery it HURTS and sucks 😀

RR: bye miss you Dad and rupe and me are going to a ball game

BellaB: Okay have fun TTYL bye

 

Rae logged off and went out the door with Dad and Rupe, and the game was immune system VS strep throat. They all cheered for IS, and they won. Rae cheered and almost dropped her hot dog. Rae’s friend Beryl was here, and Rae’s Mom came to take her family home, but then Mom looked flushed and ran up to Dad and kissed him, and from the looks in their eyes, Rae knew they were happy together. Suddenly, Rae felt happy and knew that whatever changed her life, whether divorce, moving, or enemies, Rae could take it on.

Milkshakes

Once upon a time, there was a girl named Carley. She was famous because she had powers. Ice powers, to be exact. She didn’t like being famous because she had no privacy. Every time she went to her favorite restaurant, The Ice Palace Burgers, the paparazzi came and took pictures of her when she had her mouth full of cheeseburger. So she decided to make her own restaurant which is new and improved and also called the The Ice Palace Burgers so no one would bother her. Unless, of course, they were her family. She had a little sister named Anna who always came to the restaurant and ordered a large chocolate shake. She had at least three a day, which was starting to make her a little chubby. So Carley decided to change the password to only let in the rest of her family and not Anna. She built a new gym for her to exercise and lose weight.

“Why are you being so mean to me, Carley? I just really like to eat chocolate shakes all day long!” said Anna.

“I’m not being mean to you, I’m doing it for your own health. So you should be happy because until you lose weight a lot, I’ll tell you the password but you shouldn’t eat a lot of shakes because you’ll have to go back to the gym. Also, if you don’t do that, you’ll have to go to the old restaurant and you’ll have to pay a lot. And I won’t help you anymore!”

“Well, I guess that’s reasonable. What if I only have one shake a day? And then I’ll go to the gym and do 100 pushups? And I will be there for eight hours every day.”

“Okay, Anna. But if you drink more than that, you’ll be in serious trouble.”

“Okay. I promise to not drink more than one shake a day.”

The next day came and Anna went to the restaurant. She went to the counter and asked for one shake. And a large cheeseburger and some Sprite. She went to the table and ate it all. Then she went straight to the gym. She did 50 pushups and was there for one hour before she got hungry again.

“Hmm… I could really use a big chocolate shake right now,” she thought to herself.

“But I shouldn’t! I know! I’ll get a super duper large cheeseburger extra bacon and a Sprite. I’ll eat it and come back to the gym. That way I won’t break my promise.”

She left the gym and went to the restaurant. She ordered a super duper large cheeseburger with extra bacon and a Sprite. But while she was ordering, Carley came up next to her and ordered a large chocolate shake. It looked so delicious! Anna went straight to the bathroom to hide. After Carley left, Anna went back to her table and started eating really fast. But since she waited too long to eat it, her burger was cold and the Sprite was flat.

“Wow! That was not very tasty. But if I order any more, my sister will be mad. What should I do? I’m going to trash all this and go to the gym. Look at the time! I spent nine hours at the restaurant! I better get back really soon.”

When Anna got back to the gym, Carley was waiting for her.

“Where were you? I’ve been waiting here for hours. Were you drinking a milkshake?”

“No! I wasn’t.”

“What were you doing then?”

“I was eating at the restaurant.”

“What did you eat?”

“I ate super duper large cheeseburger with extra bacon and a huge Sprite.”

“Anna!”

“What? I didn’t break your promise.”

“Still, you ate too much! You need to exercise. How much time did you spend at the gym?”

“Um… one hour.”

“How many push ups did you do?”

“Fifty.”

“Okay. Since you broke your promise, I already changed the password to the restaurant. So now you can’t eat with me anymore.”

After saying that, Carley left Anna alone outside the gym.

Anna followed Carley and she found out that she went into the restaurant. Carley had used her ice powers to freeze the whole place but made a new restaurant called True Food Kitchen. At the moment she saw Anna, she erased her memory of the scene of Carley freezing the first restaurant and making a new one.

The next thing Anna knew, she was back in the gym doing push ups. She didn’t know why she was doing pushups, but decided to keep doing them anyway. After she finished her 100 pushups, she went to the restaurant to get a huge chocolate milkshake, but she realized it was frozen! But luckily, there was another restaurant. It was called True Food Kitchen. She went inside and ordered the chef’s special. But the chef said that a new customer has to be always blindfolded. It was a beautiful salad, but she couldn’t see it because her eyes were blindfolded. She took a bite.

“Mmmm! This is so delicious! But it’s not as delicious as my chocolate milkshake. I’ll get a drink! Waiter! I would like to order the milkshake special.”

She waited for her milkshake. When it came, it was green! But she didn’t see it because she was still blindfolded. She took a sip and it was better than the chocolate milkshake. Then she took of her blindfold. She saw Carley come through the door and go behind the counter.

“Carley, Carley, Carley!!! Sis, sis, you were right all the time. eating healthy is better for me.”

“Excellent, you learned your lesson that eating healthy is good for you!!!!”

The sisters lived happily ever after.

 

The End

Warming Sounds

Chapter 1: Different Types of Poetry

 

The wonder of light

when you’re lying in darkness

day is coming soon

 

I run

Away and the

Owls hoot breaking

The silence the darkness

Silent

Acrostic poem

Characteristic thinking

Remarkable learning

Obviously focused

Silent

Tense

Interesting

Cold

 

Patient

Observant

Excited inside

Magical silence

 

Books

Fiction, Fantasy

Mystery, Magic, Biography

Flipping Pages, Sucking me in

Limerick, Cinquain, Acrostic

Rhyme, Rhythm

Poetry

 

There was a obese old woman

Who had a very big bosom

a very small tush

give it a big push

and she’ll then have a very big bottom

 

Please write a poem

It’s an assignment for school

It is for writing

It will be long and funny

Just please bring it in on time

 

The trees are so bare

The snow is falling thickly

It is very cold

Inside, there’s hot chocolate

But outside, winter is here

 

A

Mountain

Reaches above

And beyond the clouds.

You need oxygen to breathe

The high-altitude air. You need lots

Of layers to keep out the cold. Go to mount

Everest or Mount McKinley. Climb up so very high

To the top of the world. You would be famous and awesome

 

Trying

Crying

Flying

Sighing

Trying not to start Crying

I’m Sighing while Flying

 

The animals at the zoo are locked up tight

They must be let out where they can roam so free

They will be able sleep without the light

They will get hurt and get stung by lots of bees

Make sure they don’t get on any airplane flights

Maybe they will be camouflaged by trees

The wild is where the animals will stay

Just don’t let any one of them become prey

 

Ice cream is so sweet

So many flavors to choose

All of them are neat

 

Chapter 2: Obese People Poems

 

There was on obese old man

Who put his hand in a frying pan

It sizzled his fat

His skin came off just like that

A massage chair worked better than the pan

 

There was an obese little kid

He sat under the trash can’s lid

People tried to throw him out

But there was no doubt

That he was a heavy little kid

 

There was a big and obese mom

But every day she was calm

Her kids always cried

Because she was so wide

So she moved all the way to Guam

 

Chapter 3: Cinquains

 

Upset

I feel so sad

I am going to cry

No one is here to comfort me

Angry

 

Writing

Oh so calming

Words appear on the page

Fingers swiftly touching the keys

Stories

 

The Beach

Waves colliding

With the hot silky sand

Digging a huge hole to jump in

Swimming

 

Puppy

Hyper and sweet

Kissing me in the face

Licking my hand with his wet tongue

A dog

 

Chapter 4: Haikus

Gerbils are awesome

Looking like mice but they’re not

Just let me hold them

 

School is kind of fun

You learn stuff like math and art

Let us leave some time

 

Zebras are awesome

I have a cool zebra hat

I’d like to see one

 

I love the Summer

I can go to camp all day

Beaches are crowded

 

You write with pencils

Pencils need to be sharpened

Just don’t break their tips!

 

Books are everywhere

They are on bookshelves and more

They’re there to be read

 

Chapter 5: Acrostic Poems

 

Restless night

Each individual character coming to life

All the stories blend together

Dancing through the stories

 

My mind imagines life in the stories

End the book and my dreams are over

 

Fancy castles and people

Animals can talk and come alive

In different stories the princesses marry Prince Charming

Remarkable endings

Young ladies can marry at age 15

 

Tanned ladies are as pretty as princesses

All the characters are very beautiful

Lions never show up

Endings have happily ever afters

Sending text messages is unavailable

 

Chapter 6: Shape Poems

 

A

Volcano.

Spewing hot

lava and destroying

habitats. Mother nature is

angry. Her anger erupts into fury

and her fury erupts in an eruption. In  A.D. 79

Vesuvius  erupted and destroyed the city of Pompeii

Many were killed. Volcanos continue to erupt around Earth.

 

Chapter 7: My Poems

 

Hot Chocolate

 

Sweet and sugary

Chocolate and marshmallows

Hot hand and hot tongue

Hot when you’re cold

Happy Home Becomes Horror House

Meera Alasiad and her family owned a summer house on Golden Moon Beach, next to the Pacific Ocean. Meera was 15 at the time. She loved this house, and whenever she went there, she would spend as much time as she could in the ocean. This particular summer, the summer of 1998, was different.

When Meera got to the house, it was dark and gloomy. The house, named Happy Home, was full of cobwebs and old trash. When she stepped onto the front porch, it squeaked like a dying mouse. The front door was open, which was very unusual. As she stepped into the house to put down her luggage, her mother screamed. A scream so high-pitched that the birds in the trees out front flew away. An extra-large, extra hairy, Black Widow spider sat on the porch railing. Its beady little eyes followed Mrs. Alsiad’s frightened movements as she tried her very best to walk into the house. Mr. Alasiad cried out as the largest murder of crows the family had ever seen flew overhead. Meera didn’t notice any of this. She was busy staring with goggled eyes at the creature sitting right in her path.

It was a kitten! The kitten was the cutest thing she had ever seen. How could this poor creature be sitting here innocently in the house filled with horrible things?

“Mom, can we keep this adorable kitten, sitting here like nothing is happening?” Meera said in her sweetest voice.

“Y-y-yee-e-e-esss-s-s de-d-dea-r,” Mrs. Alasiad replied, still frightened of the spider.

“Dad, can I?” she asked in a tone that sounded like a puppy begging.

Still staring at the sky, Mr. Alasiad replied. The kitten was hers! She stooped over to grab the kitten, so she could pick him up and pull him close to her chest. All she wanted to do now was pet that cat’s soft looking fur, and pull him tight to her chest to give him a strong, loving hug.

But when she got her hands close to the cat, he dashed further into the house and up the rickety wood stairs. “Come back!” cried Meera as her hopes of cuddling the cat were dashed. Thump, thump, thump. Deep-sounding noises, too loud for a cat, passed above her head. Whatever in the world could that noise be? thought Meera. There it is again! she thought.

Thump. Thump. Thump. THUMP! The noise was getting louder, quicker, and closer. That was for sure not her tiny cat, who, when he had run up the stairs, had made hardly any noise at all. Thump. “What is that noise?” Meera thought as she heard a final thump. Then, all of a sudden, the noises stopped. Meera’s cat was softly treading down the stairs now.

Mr. and Mrs. Alsiad finally got over their fright when the crows and spider had suddenly taken off to who knows where. “Dear, what has happened to your new cat?” asked Mr. Alasiad. “And what in the world shall you name him? Or her? My oh my, do you even know what to do while taking care of a cat?” Meera was not listening. Who could while holding this cat? This cat held her attention for so long, because he was so sweet.

A week and a half later, after the house was all cleaned up, the cat still didn’t have a name. Meera was lying on her back, trying to think of names. “Puffy, Cheese Doodle, Evil Maniac, Cat.” She had thought of many names but was poo-pooing them all. And, somehow, her cat was able to understand her. The cat had made a head shaking motion to every name. “Happy?” Meera miserably shouted at her cat. “I am not allowed to go to the beach until I name you.” The cat nodded. “Happy? Is that the name you want?” Again, another nod. And it was decided, the cat was named Happy.

Meera picked her cat up and started dancing with him. Then, she walked out the door to her room. When she was closing the door, she saw a message. The message looked like it was written in a hurry, and the last letter of the last word went all the way to the floor. The message read: The Cat Is Evil.

Meera didn’t know what cat the sign meant, but she took a guess and thought that it meant her cat. But she knew, or at least thought, that her cat was the perfect one.

On the Friday of the very same week she named her cat, Meera was swimming at Clear Water Point, a calm, clear, secluded, well known area of the beach. Meera’s cat was at home, not even allowed out of the house for fear he would get rabies. Well, she was swimming with her friend, having so much fun, splashing and treading and just swimming laps. Then, all of a sudden, Meera’s friend fell into a drop off of the small current. Even though the current was small, a drop off at Clear Water Point feels like being caught in a net. Meera tried to dive under and save her friend, but all she found was the friendship bracelet Meera had made her. Rumors were true – the quickest way to drown was at a drop off in Clear Water Point.

Meera tried to swim away from her grief, like a racer would run away from their competitors. But it tailed her like a leash. I could have saved her if only if I had been looking, I could have saved her. I wish we hadn’t gone swimming in the first place. Then she wouldn’t have drowned. She will go to a better place, at least. Meera began to feel better.

At home, Meera couldn’t find her parents at all. She looked around for them, searching everywhere. She couldn’t seem to find them, or a note, or Happy. Meera went to do another check of the house when she saw it, another note. This was quickly scrawled in sharpie on the coffee table. This one ending in a dropped letter, and the sharpie lying there, uncapped. This note read: Kill the cat!

Again, Meera couldn’t understand the message. What cat? Why would this person want to kill a cat? Why is the pen uncapped? Where is the person? All of these thoughts ran through her head like a speeding locomotive rushing to its next destination. All of a sudden her thought train fell off a cliff as Happy sauntered into the room.

Meera ran at the cat and grabbed him in her hands before he ran away. She pulled him up to her face and for some reason smelled his fur. It smelled sort of like blood, and death. What is that smell? thought Meera uneasily, trying to identify it like she would guess a math problem, which was her worst subject. And why does Happy smell like that? Meera dropped Happy in surprise when he hissed in her direction. Probably just out hunting birds, Meera thought as she tried to make herself feel better.

Hours later, her parents still weren’t home. Meera plopped on the couch began to shiver. She shivered like it was sub-arctic, then like someone was running her nails down a blackboard. But her shivers were always partly caused by the feeling that someone was watching her.

Eventually, Meera fell into a sleep full of nightmares and shivers. In her dream, Meera was running from something. But every step she took made it harder to take another step, until finally her feet were stuck fast, like a fly in honey or a spoon in molasses. When the beast was about to catch her, her dream changed to all of her friends and family drowning in the drop off, and then the rest of people on Earth. Nobody was left and it was just Meera standing there, when Happy popped out of the water and dragged her down into the depths of the ocean. But Meera couldn’t drown, so she was just watching everybody dying. All of a sudden she started to choke on water. Her dream ended as abruptly as a wall begins.

Meera looked up and saw her mother pouring water into a glass, her father making coffee, and Happy sleeping. Everything was as it should be, and, wait, how did her parents get here? Mr. and Mrs. Alsiad were alright, in front of her. When did they get back, from where?

“Mom, Dad. Where were you? When did you get back? Why didn’t you leave a note? Dad, why didn’t you take me up to bed, or at least cover me with a blanket? What is for breakfast? I am starving. Is it French toast? Or cinnamon buns? Perhaps crepes, or chocolate pancakes? Blueberry pancakes or just regular ones? Tell me, tell me, tell meee!!!” Meera rushed all of her sentences, so they sounded like one continuous one.

Instead of answering any of her questions, Meera’s parents just stood there. They seemed a little like they were paralyzed, or frozen, or wax statues. Meera’s mind ran through all of the possible things that could have happened to them.

“Mom! Dad!” Meera screamed on the top of her lungs, like she was trying to break glass.

Finally they moved. It was so sudden. It was like the end of the book that you had been reading for so long that it seemed like a miracle that it had ended. They jerked from their “freezing” poses into more natural positions. Meera sighed, inhaled, then sighed again. She threw herself off the couch and rushed at them. She hugged both of them, trying to fit her arms around their stomachs.

“Honey, no need for this madness. You just went to the beach, for a couple of hours. It isn’t even breakfast time, more like time for snack,” Meera’s mother stated matter of factly. “We didn’t go anywhere; we were here the whole time. I don’t know when you got back, and I didn’t even realize you had laid down and taken a nap. You are a snorer. And you must have put that blanket on yourself, because I did not touch it.” Meera’s father laughed.

“But when I got home, you weren’t here. When I went to sleep, there was no blanket on me. You left no note and nothing for dinner. The cat smells like blood. My best friend drowned. And, I had nightmares. You are making coffee, Mom – how does that not signify it is morning? By the way, who let the cat out?” Meera angrily retorted.

“Well I never. Who knew? Last thing I was holding was air. And that cat ain’t allowed outside. You must be smelling things.”

Meera was very worried. Her parents had gone missing, came back, and didn’t even remember it. Her cat had killed something, and something was moving other things. There was something wrong with Happy Home.

Meera was up in her room bouncing a ball a couple hours later. Her mind could only hear and see the ball. Boing. “Three hundred fifty nine.” Boing. “Three hundred sixty.” She kept counting and bouncing the ball. Nothing eventful had happened since the morning. Her parents still hadn’t remembered anything about last night. Boing. “Three hundred sixty one.” Meera paused, thinking she had heard commotion from downstairs.

Meera raised her arm to toss the ball against the wall again. She was about to throw when she froze. Chills began to run down her back like water in a shower. She heard the click-clack of her mother’s high heel shoes, but instead of the leisurely sounding noise her mother usually made, they were hurried, and sounded like they were running.

Thump! A human-sounding thump flew up from the downstairs. More like a Meera’s Mom sound. Meera eyes widened. Her Mom had fallen, and most likely wouldn’t be able to get back up. She was kind-of chubby, and always had a hard time of getting back up. Better help her, Meera’s mind called to her.

Meera rushed down the stairs, and when she was halfway there, she stopped short. She saw a hideous beast that somewhat resembled Happy.

It had its long, sharp fangs dripping blood on her mother. The teeth were as long and sharp as knives, and would be able to rip through flesh in a second. The eyes were as red as tomatoes. Its claws were long, pointy, and as sharp as swords. These would be able to pierce stone. And her mother’s chest. The fur on the beast’s back was streaked with blood. It was a peachy-white color which looked soft to the touch. It was almost Happy. But with all of the qualities that made it beast-like.

Suddenly, it hit her. The blood smells in his fur when he wasn’t allowed outside; the messages about Happy, always ending abruptly, with no one there to have written it; the strange thumping sound that Meera had first heard from him; and the times when he was missing. Maybe this cat was also connected to the drowning of her friend; the disappearance of her parents; their return, which was so sudden; and the things at the beginning of the summer, the things that had terrified her parents. This cat was a monster, and it would stop at nothing to reach its goal. Though Meera did not know what it was.

Thankfully, the cat had not noticed her yet. It was about to claw her mother’s neck, when Meera ran out of luck. She whimpered like a sick puppy, echoing around the almost silent room, making it sound as loud as a clap of thunder.

Happy looked up. He saw her and narrowed his eyes. He got into a crouching position and pounced.

THE CONCLUSION HAS COME.

Excerpt from Different

 

Chapter Eleven

Peter

 

Peter flipped down the hill and landed hard on his backside. He grunted and stood up, wobbly. He limped a couple paces until being knocked to the ground by an irresistible force. He felt a cloth being placed over his mouth. Peter’s eyes darted around looking for anyone to signal to. Lathan and Scarlett were nowhere to be found. Peter strained to look behind him and saw Chews Abel standing over him, holding his hands in the air.

 

“Yes Peter, I’m Different.

 

Electricity and light flew off of his hands, burning Peter, making him jolt and spaz.

 

“Chews.” He lifted his head. “Stop.” Chews slapped his hands to his sides and smiled.

 

“Ah Peter, so weak. So… pathetic,” Chews whispered. Chews fell to his knees and stared into Peter’s eyes. Wind rushed around Peter’s head, making his hair curl and flop. His blonde bangs flew into his face, making his vision blurry. He rubbed his eyes and took deep breaths, making his heart beat slow. Chew’s eyelid twitched and his stood up. Peter’s hair fell back into place, and he attempted to pull himself up. He used all his strength to sit up, but then immediately fell back down. He opened his mouth, ready to demand reason, but no words came out. He tried again, only to get the same results.

 

“Want to know what I’ve done? Oh, nothing much. Just something so that you will suffer until the end of your days. I’ve taken your strength, taken your sound, your words, your voice. Yes, Peter,” Chews breathed. “Differents can do more than you know.” He plodded up the hill, but then turned back. “Oh, and your friends? Don’t worry about them, they’re in good hands,” he simpered and left. Peter could hear his boots pounding against the grass as he climbed up the steep hill. Peter could feel his heart pounding in his ears. Sweat dripped down his cheeks and landed in the muddy grass before him. Peter thrust his hands towards the mud. Sweat poured down his face, making a bigger puddle. Peter placed his hand shakily in the puddle and moved his hand in a circular motion.

 

“I. Will. Get. Him,” Peter mouthed. He pulled his hands furiously to the side. Then a bird swooped down and landed on his back. Peter shrieked and then blacked out.

 

——————————————————————————————-

 

“I LAY! Searching through the shreds, the horror, the blood, the cuts, the the debris, the dross…the pain, the agony, the terror-”

 

“Si!”

 

“Shut up, Chika!” Tears slid down her face. “Don’t you understand? We’re ruined. Ruined! Dead! Killed! Stabbed! Murdered!” She let her cranium hit the floor and she lay, motionless, on the wooden ground of the lobby.

 

“Si!” she felt a hard slap across the back of her head. Her lip was pushed into the hard cement and her jaw suddenly felt numb and she jumped to her feet.

 

“Who did that!” she looked around. Hibikee stood, towering over her. Si raised her hand in a fist, but he grabbed it and flung it backwards.

 

“If we want to survive we have to stick together. We can’t be over dramatic,” he stared at Si. “Scared, frightened, worried, and we can not think the worst. Understood?” They nodded. “Good!”

 

“But Hibikee! Our crest was just broken! We are weaker, powerless, de-”

 

“Si! We understand! You have made yourself clear! But as long as we work together, and try the best we can, we can be amazing!” Hibikee yelled. She watched as Hibikee waved his hand in the air, and grinned from ear to ear. Si felt defeated, angry, in pain. She growled and raised her lip up and down, her eyebrows furrowed. Then suddenly she stopped. Her head became clear of thought. She stared deep into Hibikee’s eyes and tilted her head, thinking.

 

“Just think…” Hibikee murmured. She suddenly felt infatuated with his courage and bravery. She hid her smile and stared at the shattered glass before her.

 

“So what should we do first?” Araki questioned.

 

“Well, we could head towards that small piste.” Chika indicated to a snowy peak. “We could see if there is civilization! We could ask for help!” They headed down the road.

 

“Is that part of the community?” Araki jumped in the air, trying to get a glimpse over the hill.

 

“Araki! Araki!” Si held him down. “Calm down, you’re not going see anything.” The tramped up the slope, Si wearing her “beautiful” pajamas, Hibikee sporting a blue onesie covered in Superman fan art, Chika’s shirt displayed her cosplay of Spider Woman, Araki wearing a long sleeve shirt with the worlds “Marvel” printed neatly in bold typing, and black slacks that seemed to be thrown on. Araki adjusted his leather belt and latched his hand onto a rock in the snow.

 

“What’s with the superhero, superheroine theme today?”

 

“I guess it’s just a coincidence!” They stopped when they reached the top of the hill and looked down. The hill went downward, it wasn’t steep, but it wasn’t easy to climb down. Si felt something slimy touch her ankle. She turned and gasped. There sat a dog, a small white puppy with a black spot around his tail. His eyes were large, brown, and adorable. Si slowly took a seat in the snow and pat the puppy gently on his head.

 

“What the…” Araki joined her, and soon they were all crowded around the dog. “Where is he from?”

 

“Probably somewhere down there.” They stared down at the multiple houses and lights that shined everywhere. “He’s so…so nummy!” They turned and saw throngs of children and adults hiking up the slope, carrying lanterns, and sticks.

 

“Hello!” they greeted them.

 

“Where did you — ” they recoiled and started to head hurriedly back down the hill. Questions filled their minds. Are they Different? Are they safe? Are they…human?

 

“We come in peace,” a man shouted. “And we have come to help!”

Strawberry’s Journey

Chapter One

It’s Just The Beginning

 

“Ma, why can’t I go outside?” I asked.

“Because outside the tunnels there is, there is, uhhh…you cannot go outside, you have to stay inside,” Ma replied.

“Ma, you are confining me in these stupid, putrid, horrible tunnels! Just let me go outside!” I said sadly.

“No. You can’t. Inside is best for me,” Ma said.

“We are talking about me not you, I want to go outside!” I yelled.

“Well, you can’t,” Ma said.

“Ma, you are ruining my life!” I yelled. I sat down on the bench. I felt the hardwood underneath me. I was really angry. I hit the wood really hard. That calmed me for a moment but not fully. I thought about what I knew about outside.

Elder Clover always told stories to us about sunshine, grass, trees, flowers, berries, rain, snow, and other animals, but what I loved most were the horror stories he told us of the people with guns that wanted to kill us bunnies. The stories seemed real, like these things actually existed.

“Ma, I am going to the water hole,” I said as I hopped through the hole in the wall. I ran down the path. The dirt clung on to my paws. I stopped. I brought my paws up to my face. They were covered in dirt, I put them back down on the smooth, soft ground and it felt almost comforting. I kept on sprinting.

I finally got there. The water hole is a pool of water inside of a cave. The rock walls were shiny and smooth. There were little orange fish swimming in the water. I went to the edge of the water, but I was careful not to fall in. I hate water, so does everyone I know.

I looked in the water. I saw myself. My long ears were drooping down on my face, my strawberry colored fur gleamed in the water.

“Strawberry, Strawberry!” The voice behind me came closer and closer. The pawsteps boomed in my ears. Blackberry came up behind me.

“What now, BB?” I said, sounding really annoyed. Blackberry is my little brother. He has black fur and black eyes.

“Ma needs you!” he said.

I hopped up and started to sprint. “Beat you there!” I said and gave myself a head start. Blackberry started to hop, but he was too late. I had already burst through the hole in the wall.

The dirt walls were gleaming. The dirt ground was smooth and soft underneath my back paws.

“Strawberry, clean your room! Then help me with Blueberry, Pa should be back soon,” Ma said. I groaned. Blackberry came through the hole in the wall. I saw him smirk as I hopped into my room.

The walls were covered with things I had found, like dead bugs such as lady bugs, beetles, flies, and other things that were extremely rare in the tunnels.

I cleaned up my leaves. The bottom leaf is what I sleep on, the top leaf is what covers me when I am put on my leaf.

Elder Clover told us that humans use a so called “pillow,” but we use sparrow feathers instead.

The floor is grass brought from the outside by other messengers from different community tunnels.

We have small jars found by messengers on the ground. Each room in every tunnel is required to have a jar with at least one firefly in it to light it up. My firefly’s name is Outside because I’ve always wanted to go outside.

“Ma, my room is cleaned! I am going back to the water hole. When I come back we will have a fresh jar of water. See you soon!” I called.

Once again I made my short journey to the water hole. I passed Hazel’s room, Sky’s, Land’s, Dream’s, Joy’s, and my bestest friend of them all, Snow’s room. I stopped abruptly, and hopped back a few paces. I hopped inside Snow’s room.

“Hi Mrs. Winter, I was just wondering if Snow was here.”

Before Snow’s Ma could answer, Snow’s little sister, Frost, came and said, “She went out this morning, put three carrots in a bag and told us she would be back by the evening meal. So basically, Snow is not here,” she concluded.

“Sorry for bothering you! Bye!” I said as I hopped out the hole.

I hopped down to the water hole. I looked in the water again. I saw my own reflection. Then I also saw a bunny hopping towards me. She looked strangely familiar. Very familiar. It seemed a little weird. White fur, blue eyes, ears tied back by strands of grass in “pigtails” as Elder Clover calls it.

Then I realized it was Snow! How could I be so stupid?! It seemed weird that I didn’t recognize her. Huh. I’ll think about that later.

“Strawberry, Strawberry!” Snow cried.

“What?” I asked as she came up next to me.

“Have you ever thought about escaping the tunnels and going outside?” she asked me.

“Yeah, I think I am going to soon. Do you want to come?” I asked.

“Yes! I would love to! I was going to ask you the same thing but you said it first!” she said, hopping up and down. “Oh, wait a minute, Ma told me to pick up Sled from his classes. I have to go,” Snow said glumly. She sat up and started to hop away.

“Wait! Snow!” She turned around. “Ma also told me to pick up Raspberry from her classes of history and the outside and her insect after-class,” I said.

“So what does that have anything to do with it?” she said with an annoyed tone.

“That means I can hop with you!” I said hopefully.

“I have to go to get him from the after-class room somewhere up the tunnel. Where do you go?” she asked, sounding hopeful.

“I have to get Razzy from there too. Let’s go!” I said with a smile. Snow smiled back. We hopped together up the tunnel to the after-class room.

By the time we got there, Sled and Raspberry were already waiting at the wall.

“Strawberry, where were you? You are like a billion years late!” Raspberry asked, obviously annoyed.

“Geez, Razzy, stop exaggerating. I was only a couple minutes late,” I said back.

I looked behind me. Snow and Sled had already gone down the tunnel. When I got back, Ma was waiting.

Chapter Two

Just About Ready

 

“Why are you so late, Strawberry Rose Berry!?” Ma screamed. I could tell she was angry. She never uses my full name.

“Uh-oh!” Raspberry said.

“Someone’s in trouble,” a voice said as he hopped out of his room. It was Blackberry. How could I not have known? Obvious.

“Shut your paw hole, BB!” I said through clenched teeth.

“Strawberry, again, watch your language young rabbit. Now why are you late? No lying,” Ma said.

“Uggghhhh! Fine. I was at the water hole and Snow came. We talked for a bit. Then she said that she had to get Sled then I remembered about Raspberry so we went to pick them up. Finally we came here,” I concluded.

“Okay, I will let you off this time. But promise you won’t be late again,” Ma said.

“Fine,” I said.

The next morning I packed a bag full of carrots, cabbage, and my firefly.

I hopped to Snow’s place. She was waiting outside her hole. She had a bag full of the same things I did.

“You ready?” I asked.

“Yup. Lets make a hop for it,” Snow said excitedly.

We went into my room and dug up until we got to the “outside.” Ma never enters my room so it was pretty easy, the tunnel was about a foot underground so it didn’t take very long to get outside.

 

Chapter Three

The Outside

 

“Wow!!! It’s just like Elder Clover’s stories! I never thought they were actually true! The sunshine is beautiful!” Snow said.

She was right, it was a whole new world, the color was so much sharper, the sunlight was warming, it was also a lot brighter. I was amazed.

I was amazed, then suddenly there was a whistle.

“Get ‘em!” Soldier Rabbit cried. He and his army armed with toothpicks came rushing at us.

Snow screamed. It was a high piercing shriek. All the soldiers fell to the ground trembling.

“HOP!!! Hop while they are down!” I screamed. Then Snow and I hopped away into the woods.

“We need a place to hide and live,” Snow suggested. “How about that place inside that tree, it could be the entrance hall, we can dig down to make more rooms and OH over there, we can make a city, and OH MY GOD…” She kept on talking.

“Snow, Snow, Snow! The bigger problem is THAT WE WILL NEVER BE ABLE TO GO HOME!!!” I screamed.

“Oh, right.” Snow looked at the soft grassy ground underneath us.

 

**************************************************************

 

IN THE TUNNELS…

 

“Pa, honey, do you think Strawberry is going to be okay?” Ma asked

“I think she is going to be just fine. She can fend on her own. Let’s send more soldiers to look for her,” Pa said.

“Ok, I trust you, Honeybumkin,” Ma said as she smiled.

 

**************************************************************

 

BACK TO THE FOREST…

 

“Wait, SB, why can’t we go back to the tunnels?” Snow asked.

“We would be executed by Elder Clover!! He shows no mercy when it comes to breaking the rules!!!” I yelled at her.

“Oh wow, we are NOT going back,” Snow said quietly.

“Yeah, so let’s focus. How are we going to live? Most importantly WHERE are we going to live? How are we going to get food?” I said, almost ripping my ears out.

“We are going to live in that tree, as I already said,” she said waving her hands around with a smile. “We will eat grass and lettuce and carrots and the apples that fall from trees!”

“Ok, I call that tree to live in!” I screamed and hopped to the tree.

I hopped inside. The hollow trunk smelled like cinnamon and hazelnut. There was a soft coat of grass on the ground.

I hopped outside. Snow was filling birds nests with snow to put on the ground of her place. The fresh air felt chilly on my face. It was all new, trees, sky, clouds, snow, bushes, real grass, flowers, birds, and other animals. My mind was blown.

Then there was the sunset. I gathered a feather, no it wasn’t a sparrow feather like in the tunnels, it was a robin feather. I had only seen sparrow feathers.

I loved being out of the tunnels. Being inside for my whole life would make me depressed. Being outside felt like I was a bird. Spreading out my wings and flying free and no one could stop me. I felt like a new bunny.

I grabbed two leaves, one to sleep on and one to cover myself.

I hopped back into my tree. I placed the leaf, then the feather, then another leaf.

I went back outside to get some wood and something to eat. There was a shadow, it was a bunny, but it wasn’t anyone I knew.

The shadow got bigger and bigger.

“Hey! You seem new around here! I am Thalia. Our names aren’t based on things like yours, Strawberry. I know all about you. Everyone in the village I come from is a messenger, well, almost,” Thalia said. Bunnies came out of bushes, tunnels, and the other trees. “Join our village!” Thalia finished.

“We will join your village. Snow will too. Right, Snow?” I called.

“Right! I want friends!” Snow cried from somewhere in the dark, but then I heard a scoop so I now knew that she was still scooping snow.

“So…let’s get to the leaf, we are only bunnies, but you are rabbits, we need our rest, bye!” I squeaked and hopped into my tree.

I woke up in my tree. I hopped outside. Thalia was giving orders. I would have to listen to her because she scared me to death. I bet she could rip me right apart with a squeeze of a paw. She could kill a fox with a flick of the hind paw. I bet she could gnaw down a tree. I think she could crush a skull in one swishing motion. I would always obey her.

 

Chapter Four

Becoming a Part of Message

 

“You there,” Thalia pointed at me, “and Snow, we are having the welcoming ceremony, and also the adoption ceremony, but also the naming ceremony.”

All the rabbits and bunnies gathered around.

“We gather together today to welcome two new members of the community. They will be renamed and adopted. Strawberry will now be Gabby and will be adopted by Will and Bella! Snow will now be Izzy and will be adopted by Ben and Marin! Thank you all for gathering here today and welcoming Gabby and Izzy to our village!” Thalia concluded.

My new parents came up to greet me.

“Hello, we are your new parents. Call me Ma, and him Pa. We will care for you more than anyone else, we promise. We will always love you, even after we die.” Right after she said that, I trusted them with my life, I would love them forever. I couldn’t believe it after hearing that wonderful speech, it just clicked. We were bound forever until death. We walked to my tree and brought all my things to theirs. There were six empty leafs.

“Pa, what are the extra leaves for?” I asked.

“They are going to be for your new brothers or sisters. I know you are wondering why I am not at work, but when your wife is about to have her litter, you have to stay and help her out.”

 

TWO DAYS LATER

 

“Gabby, your Ma just had her litter, she wants you to help carry them to the meeting place. They are all healthy. Three males and three females. Hurry. The rabbit birthing six bunnies doesn’t usually live very long after giving birth,” Ben said hopping to my tree with me hopping behind.

“Ma, are you ok? You are turning white,” I said. Pa and I gathered close.

“I am afraid I am going to have to say goodbye. I am so sorry for leaving you this soon, Gabby, I love you all, goodbye Will, I love you I will always love you, goodbye,” Ma said then her arms went limp and her eyes rolled to the back of her head.

“I love you too, Ma,” I whispered.

CLUNK. “Waaahhh!”

“Oh no! Ma let go of a bunny!” I cried and bent over to pick it up. When it was safely in my arms, it wasn’t hurt the slightest bit.

“Wow, this bunny is really strong!” I said as a cradled the gold bunny.

“We have to bring them to the ceremony,” Pa told me, his face still wet with tears. Tears didn’t come to my eyes, I didn’t know why.

“Yes, we should,” I agreed. I picked up the females and Pa picked up the males. We carried them together to the ceremony.

We handed Thalia the bunnies. “We gather here today to welcome Will and Bella’s new bunnies! Let’s now do the naming ceremony. This will be Skylar, this will be Maddie, this will be Bella, this will be Achillies, this will be Asher, and this will be Nick.” Thalia finished and handed us back the bunnies.

Skylar was grayish blue and had blue eyes. She reminded me of Blueberry, home, and the family I left because of my own curiosity. A tear trickled down my furry face.

“Gabby darling, are you ok? Why are you crying?” Pa asked.

“Call me SB. I am crying because I am so happy! These are tears of joy that the bunnies we born!” I said. Pa seemed to buy it.

Thalia handed us a HUGE bird’s nest. I remembered that you were supposed to put the young in it. I have a fuzzy memory of Elder Clover, if that was even his name, saying that humans called this a stroller.

I think we use human words around here. I am not sure. I’ll catch on at some point.

“Thanks, Thalia! Can you help me put the bunnies in the stroller?” I asked.

“Sure,” Thalia said and put the golden bunny with the golden eyes, the one Ma had dropped, Achilles, I think, into the stroller. Then Maddie, the light pinkish one like raspberry, Bella the whitish one, Asher the black one like BB, then Nick, the spotted one, then Skylar, the blue one, like Blueberry.

Pa and I pushed the stroller back to our tree. We fed them each mashed carrots and apples, then we put them to sleep.

“We are going to have to take them to the daycare, you are going to have to be messenger, and I have to go back to my job, being the food collector,” Pa told me.

Chapter Five

Being a Messenger

 

The next day, Pa left early for work, so I mashed carrots and fed it to the six for their “breakfast.” I put leaves and feathers in the strollers to make them feel comfy, then one by one I put them each in the stroller.

I pushed the stroller through the village passing Thalia who was giving orders to men who were painting the ground blue with mashed blueberries.

Finally, we got to the huge tree where I saw bunnies hopping everywhere. “This is the place,” I told them.

I saw a female rabbit and some others scrambling about feeding bunnies, bringing bunnies to the hole to do their business, burping bunnies, helping crying bunnies who had fallen, and breaking up fights between toys.

“Um, hello, can I drop off these little bunnies?” I asked a rabbit who was sitting on a log burping a little bunny. Her eyes widened.

“SIX MORE? I am so sorry, we can only take four of your six for everyday, are you their mother?” she asked.

“No, their older sister,” I turned to look at the bunnies. “Who wants to stay here and play with other bunnies?”

Skylar raised her paw, so did Bella, so did Asher, and so did Nick.

“It is decided. Skylar, Bella, Nick, and Asher will be staying with you. I will take the other two. Then Pa will pick them up before dinner, if that is what you call it,” I said. I waved my paw at the four who were staying and hopped away.

“Hey guys, we are going to go to other villages and give them things,” I told Maddie and Acki. The gold bunny, Acki, replied with a nod and grabbing a stick as if to be saying or else. Maddie smiled showing her big white teeth.

I let Maddie and Acki hop around. Acki hopped back to me with a jar. “Here go,” he said as I took the jar and put it in my bag. Maddie was by the flowers lifelessly staring and then quickly moved to something else then repeated the cycle over again.

We got to the next community. This one was above ground unlike my first community. I walked down the road, putting things on the houses that were marked with the same mark on each package. Maddie and Acki were looking at the package, then hopping down the marked path looking for the right tree to put the package. I handed them the packages and they delivered them. They are really good helpers.

Next village. Underground this time. It was my old village. I gave Maddie and Acki all the packages and told them to go in and come out when all the packages were delivered. I waited outside.

 

TEN MINUTES LATER

“Back,” Acki said.

“All gone,” Maddie said and showed her paws to prove that there were no packages left. I picked them up and set them on my back and walked back to my village.

 

Chapter Six

Back Home With My New Family

 

When we got back to the village, we went straight to the daycare place. Asher, Skye, Nick, and Bella were waiting. “Gabby! Homey!” Nick cried.

I placed them on my back and hopped to the tree. I put them all on their leaves and prepared their mashed carrots.

Pa came and sat down at the stick and waited for dinner. Each one of the bunnies came up and sat on the bench with Pa.

I placed the mashed carrots at each of the bunnies seats. For Pa I put out apples, cabbage, and carrots. I put out for me apples and cabbage.

We talked all night until the sun set on the hills. We gathered together on the stick. This was the first time I actually felt at home. I was with new my family. No, my old family wasn’t my family at all, my new family is a true family. I was free. Finally. Forever.

Please Contact Logan Simonds

It was already 10:00 p.m., and Dad still wasn’t home.

“Where issssss he?” my 6-year-old sister Kaitlyn, whined, since Mom was letting her stay up until Dad got home.

“Be quiet, Kaitlyn,” I snapped, then returned to my gaze at the door. Dad worked at Google, pursuing his love of computers, and usually he was home by 8 every night. But not tonight. He was two whole hours late, and I felt more nervous and worried than I ever had. What if he had gotten into a car crash? Or what if he had been kidnapped, and the kidnappers had taken his phone away from him, so he couldn’t call us? Yes, I was overreacting, but STILL! The thought of anything bad happening to Dad made my heart leap into my throat.

I turned towards Mom, who was looking really nervous as she paced back and forth across the living room.

“What time is it?” I asked.

“10:30.”

I sighed, and turned back towards the door. And, just at that instant, the door opened, and Dad stumbled in, his hair messy and tousled. There were bags under his eyes, and a frown stretched across his face. Nevertheless, Kaitlyn and I still ran into his arms.

“Hey, kiddo,” Dad said, but without the usual ring to his voice.

“Dad, what’s wrong?” I asked.

Dad didn’t reply, and he walked up to Mom.

“Penelope, can I talk to you for a bit?”

“Sure, honey. What’s up?”

Dad led her into their room, and I heard the door lock behind them. What on earth was happening? Dad never acted like this, never ever ever. Where was his cheerful self, his kind and happy self, his self that always hugged me and was smiling? I was pondering this as I tucked Kaitlyn in.

“What’s wrong with Daddy?” my sister asked, as I turned off the light.

“I don’t know.”

Then I left, and went to my room to wait for my parents to come in and say goodnight. But it was only Mom who came in. She now looked as forlorn as my dad, and her face was tear-stained.

“Mom, WHAT is happening?” I said, sitting up in bed. She sat down, and placed her hand on my head, running her fingers through my mess of red hair.

Mom sighed, and closed her eyes.

“Something very sudden has come up, Marley,” she said in that soft voice of hers.

“Yeah, duh!”

Mom sighed again.

“Your father…he’s… lost his job,” she blurted out.

What?

“He’s lost his job.”

“At Google?”

“At Google.”

I was silent for a long time. This was all SO quick, and it came at me like cannonball. If Dad lost his job, we could go broke! Mom didn’t have a job, so there would be no good money in the family. We could be homeless! What if Kaitlyn and I had to be sent off to a homeless shelter because Mom and Dad couldn’t afford our rent anymore? Or what if…

“Why?” I finally said, quietly.

Mom didn’t answer.

“I’m going to send in your father, all right? I think that he should tell you why.”

Mom left, and soon my father walked in, the door creaking as he walked into my room. He was silent as he sat upon my bed, and he was still quiet 5 minutes later, just staring in front of him, a dazed look in his green eyes.

“Dad?”

Dad closed his eyes.

“Sometimes people gotta do what they wanna do,” he finally said.

“What?”

His hand went on my shoulder, and my father turned to look at me.

“Today at work, I was fired by my boss. My careless, rude boss who has no feelings for other people whatsoever,” he said, his voice coated with anger the way a chocolate-covered pretzel is covered with chocolate. “A guy at work, my friend actually, was being yelled at by my boss for saying that he would have to leave work early tomorrow, since he had to attend his youngest daughter’s school play. Well, I didn’t think that my boss screaming at my friend was right, so I-I spoke my mind. And that’s what got me fired.”

Dad looked at me, me, who was in complete shock.

“You got fired for standing up for your friend?” I said.

“Yes, I did. But I lost my temper, Marley. I took it a little too far.”

“How?” I asked, feeling bewildered.

Dad sighed.

“I yelled at my boss. Screamed, argued…cursed. What my boss did wasn’t right, but what I did wasn’t-wasn’t right either,” my father said, quietly.

Dad? Losing his temper? I was confused. Dad was supposed to be perfect. He wasn’t supposed to scream at people, even if those people were jerks. I felt a shiver go through me.

“Why, Dad? Why did you have to lose your temper?”

Dad didn’t reply, and one of those uncommon frowns formed on his face.

“Good night, Marley,” Dad said, in almost a whisper. And with that, he left, closing the door behind him.

 

. . .

 

Clack, clack, clack. My fingers worked furiously at my keyboard, typing and typing, deleting, and typing again. Finally, when my fingers were just too tired to type anymore, I stood back and smiled, admiring my finished product.

 

My name is Marley Simonds, and I’m 13 years old. I live with my dad, Logan Simonds, and he just lost his job for doing the right thing. Let me just tell you, my dad is the best person in the whole entire world. He is so kind, and nice, and cheerful, and smart, and he was so good at his job at Google. All I want is for my father to get another job, preferably one having to do with computers. He would be such a good worker, I assure you. Please, if you work with computers, and you need a new worker, hire my dad. My whole family would appreciate it so much.

Contact “logansimonds45@gmail.com

 

Done. My ad to put in the local newspaper was done. I grinned, satisfied, and sent it to the newspaper using the email address I had found the night before. Now, all I had to do was wait for the newspaper to email me back – hopefully with good news. What a surprise it would be! I closed my eyes, smiling. Dad sure would be proud.

It was a week later. Luckily for me, the ad was going to be put up in the newspaper by tomorrow! I got a letter from the local newspaper telling me that they would definitely put it in the paper, free of charge! How cool is that? The editor said that he was so touched by my care for my father, and that he was going to contact my dad later today, to let him know. I couldn’t wait to see Dad’s face, full of joy and surprise. He would hug me, and laugh, and be  his old self again. Soon, he would get the email from the editor, later today. Later today had better come soon.

Dad came home before dinner that night. The second he walked in through the door, him and Mom shared a glance that said so many things. Dad hadn’t found a job.

But just you wait, Dad, just you wait.

Mom looked down, obviously trying to hide her sadness, and continued to grill hamburgers on the stove with Kaitlyn hanging by her shoulder, nagging her to let her help flip the burgers.

“I wanna flip them, Mommy! It looks fun!” Kaitlyn said in that annoying little voice of hers.

Help me, Mom mouthed to Dad, who sighed, and walked up to the stove to convince Kaitlyn that flipping hamburgers wasn’t as fun as it seemed. All the while, I waited impatiently, hopping around in a circle, twiddling my thumbs, WAITING for Dad to be finished with Kaitlyn so that he could see the email.

Finally, Dad went upstairs to his computer. He was up there for a long time. Had the email come yet? I wondered, biting my lip.

“Marley, can you come up here for a second?” Dad yelled down from his office.

This was the moment I had been waiting for! I raced upstairs, and stood behind Dad, who was reading an email, surely enough from the “Connecticut Local Newspaper.”

Dad looked towards me, but I didn’t see any of the excitement I had expected to see in his eyes.

“What’s this?” Dad gestured towards the email.

I was confused. Why wasn’t he happy?

“I, well, I sent the newspaper a notice, about you losing your job and everything. I wanted people to see it, and maybe even, you know, hire you. I…wanted to help you,” I mumbled.

Dad was quiet for a long time, and I suddenly regretted everything I had done – the ad, sending it to the newspaper, having them email Dad.

“Oh, Marley,” he said quietly, rubbing the top of my head, “that was so kind of you. I can always count on you, you know that?”

I nodded.

“Aren’t you happy?” I asked.

“I am happy, Marls. But sometimes, someone as old as me has to take care of things themselves. You know what I mean?”

I didn’t reply.

“I can’t have my daughter getting me a job. That’s my responsibility. It just proves that the kids are always smarter than the adults, though,” he said, chuckling, “Marley, that was very thoughtful of you. And you know what? That ad you wrote was so inspiring. I’ll never forget it. But we don’t need that ad in the newspaper. Because, guess what?”

“What?” I muttered.

“I GOT A JOB! I was going to tell you guys at dinner, so it could be a surprise. The job is at Apple, and I’m gonna be in charge of the whole store! How cool is that?”

I looked up, shocked.

“You got a job?!!”

Dad nodded that nod of his, and smiled that smile of his, and hugged me the way that he used to. And suddenly, I understood everything.

“Oh, Dad!” I exclaimed, wrapping my arms around his neck.

I guess that there was a surprise tonight, after all.

Homeless

CHAPTER 1: My Life

 

“All she wants is to have a home.”

That is how everyone knows me, I thought. I was walking home after trying to find some type of family. No success; again. I do have a home, I thought to myself, those people are all wrong about me. Once I got to the park, I think about my day. I had been near the preschool, hoping someone would want another child. Seems everyone has enough children. The park is my home, but I don’t really spend a lot of time there. Most of my time is spent walking around the streets. I have been doing this for four years, ever since my parents died in a big fire at their office.

They were both scientists. Someone else at the office made a “mistake” on a potion. It burnt the whole lab building down. When I heard, I went home, and used all the money around the house to pay for food, bills and the rent. Eventually, I ran out of it. Now, I am 11 years old. By the time I got to the park, it was about 6 o’clock. I have no clue of the time though, since my watch ran out of battery about a year ago. I basically live in the woods. The park connects to the woods.

I always wonder why no one ever came to save me. NOT ANYONE. Not even the landlord in the building cared that I was a child. He knew that my parents were both dead. He was a mean man, he was NEVER nice to me. So, he made sure that I was out on the streets, instead of safe, inside an orphanage  or foster home. I still hate him. I will never like him. NEVER.

To this day, I hate orphanage and foster homes. I am glad that the landlord didn’t send me to one, but he could’ve made sure that I was safe with a relative, or something. He always made sure that I was unhappy. One time, when I was 4, a little girl walked into the building with ice cream. The landlord was standing in the lobby and all he said was, “Enjoy your ice cream, kiddo!” Then, I followed the little girl into the lobby. I had ice cream, too. He said to me, “No ice cream in this building. Get that ice cream out of here!” Those last words stuck in my head LIKE GLUE.  I could never forget all the times that he was mean to me.

The next day, I went near the preschool again. As usual, all of the parents ignored me. Then, it was getting late. I was about to go back to the park for the next few hours, until preschool ended. Then, one last preschooler came out, I said hello, and for the first time ever, I heard a voice answer back. I was surprised.

“Did you just respond to me?” I asked.

“Yeah, you said hello, and I said hello back–is that okay?” she asked me back.

“That is fine, I’m just not used to someone responding. You see, no one has answered me for three years,” I said, uncomfortable.

“How do you live like that?” she asked

“Practice,” I said, “And where are your parents, and why are you so late?”

“You ask so many questions,” she said, “but I can tell you one thing about myself.”

“What?” I asked.

“I am not going into that school right now,” She said.

“Huh?” I started to say before I blacked out.

 

CHAPTER 2: The Day My Life Got Even Worse

 

I opened my eyes after a while and I could barely see. Everything was blurry. I looked down and the marks of a needle were on my arm. The shot was blurring my eyes. The preschooler walked into the room. My vision unblurred slowly as she stood next to my bed. I was in a bed. Had I been sleeping?

“Can you see?” the preschooler asked.

“Yes.” I answered to the short skinny blonde haired girl. Her hair was down to her elbows. She was wearing a purple sweaterdress and pink leggings

“Good. Now something you should know about me is that i am like you. You will never see me with parents. Oh, and you think your life is awful? Well, it’s about to get even worse.”

“Huh? I don’t get it! How can this life get even worse? I am kidnapped, with no family or friends left!”

“You don’t know how bad a person’s life can get,” she said.

“What do you mean?” I asked.

“I told you it’s about to get even worse,  now relax,” she said.

I blacked out again. I don’t even know what happened. I couldn’t remember anything that happened before. The preschooler’s life was played in  front of me. Just important parts. The only thing I learned is that the preschooler’s fake name was Lily, and she was a spoiled brat.

I woke up. I couldn’t see, just like last time, “How did you do that? How–.”

“Shut up. And call me Lily.”

“You are nothing like me. You are a spoiled brat with parents, friends, and a family. You get everything you want.”

“True. I agree. Your life is awful, mine is great. And that black-out thing is none of your business. And I am completely like you. There are some things you don’t know yet!”

“But–”

“There are a couple of things you should know: you are being put to the test, and I am learning all about you. I am learning your life. Every time you black out, I see a new year of your life. What I mean by that is that I experience your life in fast-forward, as you are blacked out. I have access to your thoughts. From what I have seen, we could be twins.”

“Not!” I screamed. “We are nothing alike.”

I blacked out again.

 

CHAPTER 3: I’m Not Going to Estimate How Bad My Life Can Get Any More.

 

It seems that every time I black out I see something. This time, I saw my life flash before my eyes. One thing that I just remembered was that the park guard was mean to me. He always took my stuff while I wasn’t at the park, and he told me that I couldn’t live there anymore. I told him that I wasn’t even in the park, I was in the woods. I thought my life was awful. I thought it couldn’t get worse. Now, it’s getting worse by the day. I woke to what seemed like a hospital room, but I was the only one there. There were tons of beds, but the only bed that was not empty was the one I was in. I started to think about my life. My parents died, the landlord kicked me out of my own house onto the streets, and then I was living in the woods. I could barely get food. But of course it could get worse. I went from in the woods, and little food, to being kidnapped around to different mystery places every day. When I was by myself there was no one to talk to, no place to sleep. Wild animals outside around me. It was scary, I have to admit. But now, instead of knowing where I was, or what to do, I am in places that I have never even heard of. I used to have a daily routine that I followed every day. Now, I have no idea what to do. Then, my eyes started to unblur.  For the first time in 4 years, I saw a working clock, so I decided to fix my watch to the date and time. January 18, 2012, 2:56pm. That’s when I realized it. No wonder Lily thought we were alike. I used to have good caring parents, too. That’s when a man walked into the room. I recognised him in a weird way. He had short black hair, rimmed glasses, and a small goatee. He was kind of heavy. He was wearing a science lab coat, and he looked kind of nervous. He came to my bed, and held out his hand for me to shake.

“Jamie, I have learned so much about you! It is so nice to finally meet you! Can I tell you where you are?” He didn’t wait for an answer. “You are in the building that your parents used to work in. Well…it got re-modeled a little bit…after the fire.” He seemed uncomfortable to talk about the fire. “But I am Herald Waltzchiz, and I am here and proud of it! I used to work with your parents. They were very good people. I just want you to know that I feel your pain, and that I am here for you,” he said.

Just then I realized why I recognized the man. He was my LANDLORD. HE was the one who kicked me out onto the streets. I hate that man. I had no idea what to do. Should I tell him that I know who he is? No, I finally decided. “Hi, it’s so nice to know that there is someone there for me. Thanks Dr. Waltzchiz!”

“Anytime, Jamie!”

“Wait,” I said as he started to leave “Do you know who or where Lily is?”

“Oh, uh, um, uh Lily? What do you mean?” He asked nervously.

I then knew that he knew who Lily was, and where she was. I didn’t bother him anymore about it. I knew that he wasn’t ever going to be there for me, and that he was a bad man. Once again, I blacked out.

 

CHAPTER 4: This Is Not What I Thought.

 

I woke up to a big room. I guess I had been asleep this whole time. I was sitting in a chair. Next to me was Lily. She was sitting down, too. The first thing I did was look at my watch. I had been being kidnapped for the past six weeks.

“I have all the information about you. I know your whole life. You will not be blacking out any more. Since I know about you, I think you have the right to know something.” I didn’t respond. I was mad at Lily. She had been sending me around to different places with Dr.Waltzchiz for the past six weeks. I had no idea what was happening. I didn’t even know for sure that it was Lily. But, it could be Dr. Waltzchiz. I liked my life better when nobody bothered to torture me. Sure, I was alone, but at least I was free to do what I wanted. But, at the same time, I wanted to learn about Lily. I had no idea how she could possibly have the power to do this to me.

“Go on,” I said.

“Well, for starters, you have no parents. I have no parents. I know that I came across to you as spoiled, but I am being tortured as well as you. You don’t know how yet, but you will see. I have a plan to save you. We have completely different lives, but we have a lot in common. We both have unhappy lives,” said Lily.

Dr. Waltzchiz walked into the room. “Come on Lily, we have to go.” Then he saw me. “Jamie, what a surprise to see you here. It’s too bad that me and Lily have to go now. Bye! I guess I’ll see you later!” He said.

“But, Daddy–” She put her hand over her mouth. “Did I just say what I think I said?” Lily asked.

“Yes, and it really is time to go now,” Said Dr. Waltzchiz.

“I’m not going! I don’t want to!” Lily screamed and stomped her foot.

“Wait–” I said, “ Lily, this is your dad?”

“Uh…no um yes uh maybe?” Lily said. She immediately covered her mouth.

“We are going RIGHT NOW!” Dr. Waltzchiz yelled as he pulled Lily out of the room. Lily screamed for help, and I ran to help her, but by the time I got to the doorway, I looked down, and there was no floor. I did not want to go down, but I heard Lily’s distant screams, and I knew that I could not abandon her. I jumped down, slowly starting to hear Lily more clearly.

As I jumped, I had a memory. It was about when my parents died. The manager of the science office had run to my house to tell me. The first thing he said was, “Your parents are dead.”

I cried for hours. He stayed with me for a couple of days, although I never saw his face once. I knew him from before, so I was comfortable with him. He came to check on me every once and a while, but he slowly stopped coming, and I lost contact of him. After I lost my house, I lived on trash that was not completely inedible. My life sucked. I barely slept at night. Now– I don’t even know how I sleep.

I hit the floor. The neverending fall was over.

 

CHAPTER 5: Who (REALLY) Is Dr. Waltzchiz?

 

I stood up. I looked all around. I was in a big room. The middle was empty, but there were tables spread out on the sides. In the middle were Lily and Dr. Waltzchiz. They were fighting over something. It seemed unreasonable, but I couldn’t really tell. Finally, Lily screamed out, “BUT YOU’RE NOT MY DAD!!!!!”

“What do you mean he’s not your dad?” Now it was my turn to cover my mouth. Both Lily and Dr. Waltzchiz looked at the little shoot I had come out of.

“How did you get here?” He asked.

“I’m skinny,” I said, “I haven’t eaten much in the last four years.”

“What do you mean?” He asked.

“Ok. You can stop joking. I know that you know me inside and out. You have been almost reading my entire life the second it happened,” I said.

“You’re missing a chunk of the information, Jamie,” He snickered.

“Any help, Lily?” I asked, sounding like a beggar.

“Oh, she’s not helping you any time soon, Jamie. She works for me,” he said, Lily still staying quiet.

“She works for you? YOU WORK FOR HIM!?!?” I was about to go crazy!

“So smart now, huh dad?” Lily said.

“So he is your dad?” I asked.

“No, dumbo. Ever heard of sarcasm?” she asked.

“Lily, why do keep talking to this girl? We have work to do to destroy her,” he said.

“Destroy me?” I asked nervously, “You’re going to destroy me?”

“There is no use in hiding anything from you anymore,” he said calmly. “Lily said that you were being put to the test, and well, you were. The test was your life. If you were what you thought you were, you would have to die. You are nothing like we thought you would be. We thought you would be hopeless. Turns out, you are always hoping for life to get better.” I started to feel happy. “But, we still have to kill you.”

“I know all about you by the way. You have been four people in my life, trying to watch me wherever I go. You have been ‘the only survivor that used to work with my parents.’ That was when you lived with me for a while. You have been my ‘Landlord.’ You have been ‘the park guard.’ And you have been Dr. Waltzchiz. Not to mention the fact that you probably have been following me around everywhere I go using other disguises I don’t even know about.” I said, starting to get annoyed with him.

“I QUIT,” said Lily in the strongest voice she had ever used. She sounded tough.

“What? EXCUSE ME? You can’t quit!” said Dr. Waltzchiz, amazed with Lily’s choice.

She was standing across from me, next to Dr. Waltzchiz. She moved over next to me. She whispered to me, “I’m on your side now.”

“And you weren’t before?”

“Well, I wanted to be, but I was being controlled. You see, when someone likes him for a minute, he controls them. Kind of how he blacked you out.”

“I thought you did that,” I said.

“I did,” Lily said “but I was under his control. I just made myself realize that I hated him, and now, I have power over him.”

“How does he do it?” I asked Lily. Dr. Waltzchiz was still in the room.

“At birth, he wasn’t born right. Right before he was born, he died. The doctor put some type of a spatial light over him. Since his parents were both very weak, he grew up with the doctor. He taught him how to use his powers, but he motivated him to use his powers for bad. Then, he moved away, but the only way he knew to use his powers was to do bad things with them,” Lily said.

“How could you betray me?” He screamed at Lily.

Lily pulled my hand. “Let’s go,” she said to me.

“You’re not going anywhere.” he said.

“Oh yes we are! Come on, we have to go,” she said.

Dr. Waltzchiz tried to come after us, but Lily turned him into a toy, and put him in a jar. She picked up the jar. I was amazed.

“Close your eyes” she said. She brought me into a room.

“Finally,” she said. “It’s all over.”

She opened the door.

 

CHAPTER 6: Finally Happy

 

“He didn’t really kill your parents. He locked them up. This room was locked so that it couldn’t be opened unless he was destroyed. He thought he would live forever. You can open your eyes,” Lily paused.  “All that evil old Waltzchiz ever wanted was to make everybody’s life miserable. So, he figured out some way to get powers. Since he thought he would never die, he promised me his powers when he did die. The only power I got for being his assistant locking people in jars. I don’t know why, but for some reason, he had something against us, so he tortured us, and our families.”

I saw about a dozen people. Two of them were my parents. They were all frozen. “They were fed,” Lily said.

I ran to my parents. Lily unfolded a piece of paper.

It said: “My destroyer shall bring these people back to life.” Lily knew exactly what to do. She ran around, tapping all of them. They all came to life, and I hugged my parents. Finally, I was happy. At last.

“MOM, DAD!” Lily and I both shouted at the same time. We laughed.

“We knew that you would get us out,” my mom told me.

“Actually, Lily got you out.”

All of the thank you’s, and kisses, and hugs took hours. I missed my parents more than words could say.

Lily and I were friends for the rest of our lives.

“By the way,” Lily said to me, right after we found our parents, “I’m not in preschool.”

 

Chapter 7: Waltzchiz’s Story

by: Waltzchiz

 

I am not a crazy man!!! This is my story:

I went to college with the parents of Lily and Jamie. The dads of both families said that I was Harry, my first name, instead of Martin, my middle name. Ever since, I have wanted revenge. I am not crazy!!!

Excerpt from Apryl

Nat and I ate our bran cereal at the table, and enjoyed our last breakfast at home. I opened the mail, and found a notice on a green piece of paper:

 

Notice

Today is Switching Day!

All citizens of Ellipsis Yonder Metropolis are required to attend the ceremony.

Ceremony will be held at the Meeting Place

From 10 AM until 1 PM

Lunch will be held but please arrive early to claim your table.

All work is cancelled, and no classes will be held.

Anyone not at the ceremony will be severely disciplined.

 

It was Switching Day, the day that we switched quadrants. We would never come back to our parent’s quadrant. I didn’t know how Nat was taking it, but I cried into my pillow all last night. It wasn’t like I didn’t want to switch, I HAD to, but I would miss Mom and Dad. Maybe Nat didn’t think of it this way, but I thought of it as almost our last day of being sisters. Tomorrow, she would be with the negatives, and I would be with the positives. Sure, we would see each other (I mean, I’m pretty sure), but we wouldn’t live together. I was scared.

 

“Girlies! Get dressed! Your special clothes for the ritual,” Mom hollered at us from her and Dad’s room. The ritual is where we switch, and in front of everyone. We are required to wear nice clothes, so for girls, dresses, and boys, a sports jacket and nice pants. Nat and I had picked out dresses the week before, and I was completely IN LOVE with mine.

 

The dress was to my knees, and turquoise blue. A thick, dark blue waistband ran around, well, my waist. It was strapless, and, from waistband down, pleated. I zipped it up in front of my mirror, satisfied. I used my curling iron to curl my hair. I got the curling iron as a present for my fifteenth birthday. We get one present every other year. Nat got a straightening iron, so when I need my hair straightened, I use it, and vise-versa.

 

Nat and I met in the hallway outside of our rooms.

 

“You look great!” she grinned, her eyes darting from my hanging earrings to my high-heeled shoes, which was really not that high, only 1 inch. She wore a pink dress, the same length as mine, and had spaghetti straps. Rhinestones decorated the edges of the dress. Her hair was straightened (not surprising), and she too was wearing high heels. She had diamond studs in her ears.

 

Nat and I had been looking forward to getting to dress up like this for a long time. We aren’t usually (never) allowed to wear high-heels, or earrings, apart from the gold spheres that every girl receives on their seventh birthday. We dress simply, an outfit theme chosen at the beginning of each year, from when we are 10 until 16, when you are in your permanent quadrant. Honestly, I kind of like not having to pick my own outfit. When you wear the same type of thing every day, it doesn’t take long to get dressed, which is probably why they made this rule. I have always chosen the “Casual” theme, which is jeans, t-shirts, and sneakers. Nat chose that for 10, 11, and 12, but then she decided that she liked being “pretty,” and for 13, chose the “Preppy” theme. That’s dresses and flats, and stuff like that. She’s more used to wearing fancy clothes than I am. She must feel normal for her to wear these clothes. I like it, but it’s different. Really different.

 

We linked arms and walked down the hallway. Mom smiled widely at us, and gestured for us to go outside.

 

“Dad will be ready in a minute! Wait outside for us!” Mom rushed back into the house.

 

“So. Are you ready?” Nat looked at me.

 

“I guess. Are you?” I looked down at the grassy area in front of our house.

 

“No. I want to stay with you, and Mom, and Dad. Why do we have to be separated?” she sounded like she was choking back tears.

 

“I don’t know, but it’s the way of life here. We just, just have to do it,” I held back tears as well, my voice breaking.

 

Nat hugged me, and we cried into each others shoulders. Suddenly, the front door banged open, Dad hurrying out.

 

“Come on, girls! Time to – are you two okay?” He frowned, and glanced back and forth between us. We carefully wiped tears from our eyes, and nod. Mom walks out, and ushers us into the car. As we drive to the mixed quadrant, I see Dad whispering to Mom, no doubt about the hugging/crying scene. Our family has always been against showing how you feel, but I don’t exactly agree with that, and I don’t think Nat does either.

 

We arrive at the main Meeting Place, the car swerving into the parking lot.

 

“We’ll let you two out here, and we’ll find a parking spot. We’ve reserved seats, so you can meet us there! See you soon, girls!” Mom kisses us each on the cheek, a meaningful but somewhat reluctant gesture. Nat and I get out of the car, and enter the Meeting Place.

 

When we pushed open the glass French doors and walked into the huge room, I felt like everyone was staring at me. Was the strapless dress a bad idea? Should I have chosen something that covered my shoulders? Were people surprised to see me in this? Did I look bad? God, how embarrassing.

 

We found our seats, and sat down. I felt a tap on my bare shoulder, and turned around to see Linzi grinning at me.

 

“Linzi! Hi!” I embrace her over the seats.

 

“Hey, Apryl! Is this your sister?” She holds out her hand to Nat.

 

“Yeah. Nat, this is my friend, Linzi, and Linzi this is my twin sister, Nat!” They shook.

 

“So, what blood type are you?” Linzi asked. “I’m O positive!”

 

“O negative!”

 

A little girl walked up behind Linzi and said, “Linz, Mommy wants you at our seats. She wants to tell you something.”

 

“Sorry, guys! I’ve got to go! Mother calls.” She ran away, chasing the little girl, who looked to be her sister. A second later, Mom and Dad appeared behind us.

 

“Well, Nat and Apryl, we want to tell you that we love you very much, and even though you must switch quadrants, you will always, ALWAYS, be our baby girls. We love you.” Mom and Dad hugged us in turn. Nat and I held Moms’ hands, and reminisced about the 15 years that we spent together. Suddenly, Metropolis Superior’s voice blasted over the speakers.

 

“All 15-year-olds, please report to the stage. Mr. Irwin, Mr. Santos, and Mrs. Lilac will be organizing you for the switch.”

 

Nat and I jumped to our feet, and rushed down the aisle. I could hear Linzi’s bulky heels clumping behind us. I could sense Isaac’s eyes resting on my bare shoulders. I knew what the three 10 year olds were talking about in the front row of the Meeting Place. Everything was in perfect focus. I wasn’t sad, or scared. I wasn’t angry at my parents for not telling us that Nat and I would be separated. I was emotionless, blocking everything out, so that I could switch in peace.

 

Mr. Irwin placed me in between Nat and Kai Bayan. Jake was directly behind me, in a sports coat and nice pants. He leaned over my shoulder and said,

 

“Apryl, right?”

 

“Yes. And you’re Jake, Linzi’s boyfriend,” I smiled. Jake grimaced.

 

“Yep. That’s my title, I guess.” I laughed, nervously. Didn’t he like Linzi?

 

“So, your parents live in the O quadrant, right? My parents live in the A quadrant.”

 

He smiled sadly at me. “Well, they’ll hardly be our parents anymore, you know? I mean, we’ll be living separately, and since my parents are O negative, we’ll NEVER see each other,” he said, his voice a mixture of sad, and bit excited (but why? Nothing good can come from leaving our parents).

 

“What do you mean? In the A quadrant, we’re not separated by positive and negative.”

 

“You mean, they’re not separated by positive and negative. You’re going to be in the O quadrant, positive subdivision in a few minutes!” he corrected, grinning. At that same moment, Metropolis Superior stepped onto the stage, and called for attention.

 

“Today, we are letting go of our children. They will be citizens of Ellipsis Yonder Metropolis as of today. Obviously not productive citizens, at least until they get their jobs.” At this, the audience chuckled politely. “So, let us proceed with the ceremony. First up is Keala Aarons.” I watched intently as the tall girl stood next to Metropolis Superior, smiling. She seemed confident, and definitely not scared. The screen behind the mass of 15-year-olds lit up, and Keala Aaron’s blood information appeared on the screen. She was AB positive. Also, her job was indicated (she was to be Instructor of eight-year-olds). The people applauded her, and she left the Meeting Place. Hmm. Why was she leaving? I wondered where she went.

 

Many people went up to the front of the stage before me. Soon, I heard a name that caught my attention.

 

“Apryl Barnes? Are you there?” People in the audience were craning their necks to look for this “Apryl Barnes.” I must have been daydreaming, and I missed my name! Oh no! I half ran onto stage, making sure my dress stayed up.

 

“Thank goodness. I’m glad you were here! We wouldn’t want to mess up the system, would we?” Metropolis Superior smiled kindly at me, laughing, her blonde bun bobbing up and down. I looked back at her, shyly, a faint smile on my face, my cheeks a rosy red, from embarrassment.

 

A second later, the screen flashed, and my name appeared:

 

Apryl Barnes

Blood Type: O positive

Job Assignment: Diplomat

 

I got the job I wanted! Yay! The audience applauded me, and I saw Mom and Dad grinning at me. I walked offstage, suddenly feeling confident about my dress, and ignoring the fact that I had missed my name being called. I turned around before leaving the Meeting Place, and glanced at Nat. She was running up to Metropolis Superior. I wanted to watch her, so I stayed in the room as she received her job assignment. She got Psychoanalyst, just like Mom! She grinned and ran over to where I was, near the door.

 

“Congratulations! You got the job you wanted!” She hugged me tightly.

 

“You too! You and Mom will be working together! Or at least in the same building.” I hugged her back. This might be the last time we interact with each other as siblings, so we had better make it count.

 

“I’ll miss you.” I said, opening the door. We start to climb the sturdy, wooden staircase, our arms linked. She nodded. We got to the top, and Nat opened it for us.

 

“This might just be where we get separated,” she lets go of my arm, frowning. The room is long, and has seats like the ones in the Meeting Place. There is a window in front of the room. I peered through, and I had a perfect view of the stage. I saw that the room was divided up into eight sections, one for each blood type. Large green signs indicated the groups. Nat ran to meet with one of her friends in the O negative section, while I went to O positive, and joined the three other people there, who I didn’t know. I sat alone, watching for Linzi or Jake to Isaac to go onto stage.

 

First, Isaac bounded up to the platform, joining Metropolis Superior. He was A negative, and he will be Engineer. A minute later he appeared in the room, and I waved at him. He waved back, grinned, and mouthed the words, Good luck! I’ll miss you. I nodded back to him, and he sat down in his respective section.

 

When Jake went up, he cheered as his name appeared on the screen, and ran out of the Meeting Place amid clapping and whooping. His job was Physical Trainor/Novitiate Trainor. He entered the room, and ran to sit next to me.

 

“Congrats! You happy with your job?” He slid into the seat next to me.

 

“Yeah, really happy. How about you? Satisfied?” I smiled at him, with butterflies in my stomach.

 

“Oh, definitely. I’m more excited about training the novitiates than being a physical trainer, though.” He laughs, and I join him. We exchanged friendly conversation until we heard Linzi’s name over the speakers.

 

Linzi sauntered over to Metropolis Superior. Her tight black dress shimmered in the spotlight, because of the sequins. She had chunky black heels on, and a golden necklace. Her hair was in a messy bun on top of her head.

 

“Wow, she looks really pretty!” I exclaimed, nudging Jake.

 

“Yeah, she does. You do too,” he said, taking my hand a squeezing it. I quickly pulled my hand away. No matter how much I liked him, I couldn’t betray Linzi. And anyway, didn’t he like her? I mean, they were dating. And if he liked me, what did he see in me?

 

I blushed anyway. Even if I couldn’t like him, it felt good. Someone thinking I was pretty, I mean. Not the hand holding.

 

Nothing I Could Do

Lying here, sick in my stupid, old, busted up bed. It sucks so much. Dying and knowing it, that is. If I am going to die soon, I want it to be here. In the safety of my own home. My mother will most likely try to get me up and to school. She doesn’t know about my sickness. I would never have the nerve to worry her. She is the sweetest person you could ever know. She gives our leftover food to the poor and the homeless; she always gives up her seat on the bus. She is always kind and so selfless. I would never try to upset her, she doesn’t deserve that. It was hard enough when Dad walked out on us. I am supposed to go to school. I haven’t gone for a while though. I stopped the day I learned about my sickness. I got up every morning to go, then walked past it. I don’t want Mother to be suspicious of me. I missed Carly, though. She was my best friend. She would have been the first person I told if I had told someone. It was too risky though. I just told her I was on a long trip. I am scared that Mother would come in any minute now. I should try to get up. UGH! It’s too hard.

“George, I’m coming in, ok?” Oh no, I think. Just act really tired, and pretend to be ok, I tell myself. She opens the door and looks in.

“George it’s time to get up, are you ok?”

“Yes Mom, I’m just …” I can’t lie anymore. “Mom, I … I’m not ok. I’m sick.”

“Oh you poor thing. Do you have a fever? Do you need medicine?” She rushes toward my bed, her arms stretched out towards me. She tries to kiss my forehead.

“No, mom. It’s not like that.” I push her away. “I have a sickness. In my stomach.” I showed her the spot where the infirmitatem is. It was a bigish brown spot on my stomach.

“It hurts,” I say. She falls to the ground. I panic. What do I do? Should I help her up? Should I call someone. Did she faint? Is she ok?

“Mom! MOM?! Are you ok?!” I run, or more like hobble, to the phone. I dial in the number: 911. I don’t press call. Why? Why don’t I press call? I delete the numbers. (646) 534-7925, call. I press call. I wait. I wait more. I begin to become impatient. Just then a voice comes from the end of the other line.

“Hello? Mary? Is that you is everything Ok? Why are you calling me?” He sounds angry.

“Uh, um, no it’s me. Um uh, I think Mom fainted, or had a heart attack. What do I do?!” I start to cry. Why am I allowing myself to cry? Why would I do such a stupid thing? Now Dad will know how serious it really is.

“What?! Did you call 911 yet?”

“Uh, no. I called you.” I say. A pang of guilt hits me. Maybe I should have called 911.

“Ugh, just, call 911, Ok? It will be Ok.”

“Ok, bye.” I hang up and press my forehead against the wall. I bang it five times. I put the phone back up to my ear and dial the numbers 9-1-1.

“Uh, hello? Police, Firemen, or ambulance? What can I help you with?”

“My, um, mother had a heart attack.” I give them my address and hung up. For the first time in seven years I cry twice in a day. I cry until the ambulance arrives. And then it is dark. All … dark.

Next thing I know I am lying in a large bed, in a large wooden-floored room. I sit up, but quickly realized that was a bad idea. My small spot of infirmitatem has grown to a huge lump. I panic again. I don’t where I am, or how long I was asleep for.

“Hello?” A faintly familiar voice calls through the door. A man walks in. My dad. He came back. Am I happy he is here or angry that he left?

“Hi,” I say weakly. He obviously saw the spot.

“Let’s get you to the hospital.”

“Where is mom?” I have so many questions for him, all rushing through my mind.

Where is mom?!” I raise my voice and I need to know. I wouldn’t leave without my answe- OW! It is so painful.

“She is… gone.” He sounds disappointed. Then I feel myself just slip away. Gone. Forever.

AWorkInProgress

hey cal, I  say

what, she replies

do you know what, cal

what

I’m moving, cal

 

what

says cal

I’m moving, cal

I say.

 

cal says what again

but i think she knows what I said

cal runs away

 

and the next day she acts like it’s not true

like I lied to her

 

and when we have a playdate

she sits on the edge of my loft

and cries.

 

I know

she knows

 

my mom told me, cal says

is it true?

 

yes, I say.

I’m sorry, cal.

 

all my stress is rising now. my heart is pumping in my ears,

says cal.

 

I didn’t have an answer.

my stress is swirling around like glitter in a jar,

says cal.

 

well, then, I say.

stop shaking the jar.

Journey of A Worm

A few years ago, some worms fell from the sky in Norway. This is the story of how:

The worms of northern Norway were sick of eating dirt and living in dirt. It was sort of like eating their home. So they decided something: To live in people’s homes and instead of eating dirt they would eat gummy worms!

But the worms had one problem: How would they get to the town of Brekstad?!  It was a town that had a gummy worm factory.

Steve was the name of one of the worms. He had the answer to how they would get to Brekstad. But he had one problem: This plan would take way too long to get a driver’s pass (his plan is pretty simple):

“Let’s buy a punch buggy!”

All of the other worms were like, “What?” so they went with another worm’s plan. His name was JEFF!?!?! (yes including the (?) and (!) marks). JEFF!?!?! here wasn’t that smart, so he said, “Let’s go slide over the rainbow!!”

The faces of all the other worms were like,“What?” again. But another worm called Jhonny came up with another plan. This plan was to dig a tunnel to a field where there was a tornado going on in another part of Norway, in order for them to get blown to the town. This plan was all they had left, so the worms agreed.

It took a few years for the worms to tunnel to the field (really only a few hours because their destination was not actually that far), so when they got to the tornado near the town, the wind was so strong they all hung onto leaves but were blown away towards the town.

It felt like flying. It was like being sucked into a vacuum cleaner and being swirled around and around so much that they felt like they were going to hurl.

“Maybe this is how birds feel!” screamed Steve. All the worms were being stretched out because of the wind.

Jhonny wiggled around. “I’m doing yoga!”

After an hour, they finally fell. The leaves they were hanging onto broke their fall. When they made it to the ground they rejoiced.

“We made it!,” yelled JEFF!?!?!, and they all celebrated!

“So….now what?” asked one of the other worms.

JEFF!?!?! answered with, “I have no idea!”

Then they saw a sign that said: “Welcome to the Town of Bůd.” Underneath that on the sign it said: “The Town of the Gummy Worm Strike.”

Jhonny read the sign and said, “Are you kidding me?”

Not With A Wimper But A Bang

 CHAPTER 1  

“This is the way the world ends. Not with a bang but a whimper.” – T.S. Elliot.

I am Francis W. Smith, and I believe quite the opposite. I believe the world ends with a big loud bang. I think that the world will have a Grand Finale. I just feel it in my bones.

When people first meet me, they think I’m a boy. Mostly because my name is Francis. But I also wear my hair up in a bun, and put a cap over it. That gives me an advantage. People in my town don’t expect boys to follow the rules as much as girls do. Some of the neighbors think I’m a boy. So whenever I break a rule or two, they aren’t as harsh on me. James, Martin, and Steve are my best friends. Those aren’t really our real names. I’m Francesca, James is Jamie, Martin is Maria, but Steve is just Steve, because he’s a boy.

Steve believes that aliens are going to attack. I don’t believe in aliens. I wonder if there are really monsters lurking above the dark black skies, watching our every move. It creeps me out that there might be aliens up in the big swirl of darkness of outer space, sort of like that fat man in the red suit they call Santa. My parents do not let me believe in Santa.

Ding Dong.

I hear my mother yelling at my father downstairs.”Get the door Harry! I still have my curlers in!”

“You get it! I’m on the phone with the accountant!”

I stumble down the rickety stairs, and open the door. Steve stands there thin as a pencil, mumbling theories about aliens. He looks up, his glasses falling down his nose, finally realizing that I had opened the door.

“OHMYGOSHALIENSAREGOINGTOATTACKFRANCISYOUGOTTABELIEVEMEIHAVE

PROOF!!!” Steve says.

” Wow dude, calm down, I can’t understand you.”

“Aliens are going to attack, Francis you gotta believe me. I have proof.”

 

Steve brings me to his house, an old but quaint building. He digs through his baggy jeans, looking for the keys. As he walks in, his dog, Mop, jumps up and licks his knees. Mop sniffs me, and slowly walks away, as if to say I smelled horrid.

Steve says, “Come on, I’ll show you! You have to be quiet, we can’t wake up my little sister.” He takes me up to his room. Steve says, “Sorry it might be a little messy.”

I look around and I think to myself, it looks like a tornado came by and threw up another tornado. I have been to Steve’s house before, but it’s never been messy at all. We shuffled across the room, through the piles and piles of books and papers as tall as skyscrapers. They were mostly books about alien abduction, but the rest were for school. He took out his telescope, and pointed it up to the sky. I looked in the telescope, and he said, “Do you see it?”

“No. I don’t see anything.”

He looks in and says, “Oh, maybe it moved.” He looked around through the telescope, and gives me a sad look. “Maybe you should go. It’s almost dinnertime.”

He shut the door, and I hear him moan. I can hear him, “My dream. Gone. Never. Going. To. Become. The. First. Person. To. See. Aliens.” I leave his house, trudging my way to my house.

 

CHAPTER 2

My father opens the door, with his long hair tied up in a ponytail. I know it’s kind of weird, but my dad’s going through this hippie phase, where he does everything hippie style; tie dye, bandanas, skinny jeans, the whole package. He’s kind of upset that his work has a dress code. They have to wear a suit, but unfortunately, he couldn’t find a store that sold tie dye colored suits. He also went through a “Star Wars” phase. Every day when he drove me to school, he would wear a Jedi robe. My teacher told him no “pajamas”, and he went bananas.

Don’t even make me bring up what he named our dog. Chewbacca.

He says, “How are ya doin’ kiddo?”, in his fake southern accent. Just hearing my goofy dad made me feel better.

“Good, kind of good, not so good, bad. I don’t know.”

“What’s wrong?” He says. “Steve saw aliens, then he showed them to me and they weren’t there, so he’s embarrassed and sad.” He looked at me, puzzled. I just told him it wasn’t a big deal, and flopped down on my bed.

I pick up the phone and call Maria, and she answers, “The Caldwell residence, Maria speaking.”

“Hi, it’s Francis. Want to hang out?”

“Sure. Meet you at 3:00. At the movies?”

“Sure. See you.”

“Bye.” I hang up, take off my jeans, and change into my sweatpants. I tell my dad I’m leaving, then shut the door. I walk up to the curb and wait for the cars to pass by.

 

CHAPTER 3

I live in Rhode Island, the smallest state. It’s pretty awesome living here. I go to Moses Brown, the best school in the world. The campus is awesome. It has a music room, a theater building, a woodshop building, and a fencing building. Of course, there is the school building too. School starts in 3 days, and I want to run for student council, but I don’t stand a chance against Carly Westminster, the “popular” kid in school.

I cross the street, and see Carly staring at me. She says, “Hey girlfriend!” and gives me a phony smile. I roll my eyes and walk away.

I walk into the movie theaters, and I hear a shooting noise. The sound of a gun. I rush towards the concession stand, but there is nobody there. The whole movie theater is empty, completely empty. But where did the bang come from? Not with a whimper but a bang. THE WORLD IS GOING TO END.

As I walk towards the other theater rooms, I hear screams. Everything is going in slow motion. I am not scared, but something big is going to happen. The doors of the theater room open, and a man in a green suit looks down at me. I feel dizzy, and my body is flopping around like a piece of cooked spaghetti. The weird man in the green suit twitches his hand back and forth. Back and forth. Back and forth. Back and forth. He is controlling my body. As he moves his hand, he forces my limp body into the theater. I see Maria screaming, but I can’t hear her.

BANG.

 

CHAPTER 4

Lights flash brightly on my stone cold face, as a woman wheels me through a hospital. The ground is slightly shaking. Why is the hospital moving? I tug at the tubes in my arms, and I know I couldn’t have been shot. I didn’t even feel anything! No blood, no scars, I don’t see anything wrong with me. Except the fact that I believe in aliens.

I look through a window that I don’t think was there before. And guess what! There’s earth! Wait, what? How can that be earth! I’m in a hospital on Earth! If I can see earth, then I’m not on earth… Holy crap! I’ve been abducted by aliens! Ok, don’t panic. I’m just going to ask the nurse how I can get out of here. But, she’s probably an alien! I try to get off the stretcher, but my legs are tied to it. I lie back down, and think for a minute. My last option is to actually talk to this woman.

“Excuse me, miss, will you tell me how to get out of -”

“Reklg mekl gooihj,” the woman says.

“Excuse me!”

She finally turns around and looks at me. I gasp. It’s Carly Westminster.

I always knew something was wrong with her, her long white hair, big red eyes, like mine. Out of all the crazy things in my life, Carly Westminster has to be an alien! I knew she hated me, and now she kidnapped me in her stupid alien spaceship thingy and now I’m just talking really fast for no reason!! Ok, let me get back to reality. This is probably all just a dream, and I’m going to wake up. Ow! Pinching does not help! I guess this is really my crazy life.

Carly stares at me creepily, then she says the same thing.”Reklgmeklgjiooihj,djfyyzako!”

Then she makes this face, like she is constipated. Then she grabs her ear, and pulls off her face.

 

CHAPTER 5

What did she just do?! She pulled off her face from left to right. And under that was an angry crimson face, with only half of a mouth, and a big fat nose. The only thing that didn’t change were those bright red eyes. This is not how I pictured being abducted by aliens. I thought they would be cute little green things, with big black bug eyes, saying “We come in peace” or “ET phone home.”

Carly stares at me and says, “Francesca W. Smith. You are so lucky to be related to the Carly Westminster.” She twirls her hair and looks at me.

“W-what do you mean?” I stammer.

“You were left at your parents’ doorstep, when you were two. Our parents were poor. Very poor. And then grandfather started up the electrical business, and we got rich, just like that. We would have taken you back, but we couldn’t just tell the people to give us their baby. Well, I always hated you because you were normal, and I had to be the alien. Aliens abducted us, and gave us  powers. But now these powers have an advantage.”

“What does that mean?” I say nervously.

“Soon you will be like me, an outcast.”

“What are you doing with that needle?” I say.

“Once I give you this shot, you won’t remember anything, and you won’t be able to tell anyone what happened here.” I feel a weird pain in my wrists, and a green light starts coming out of my fingers. Her stunned face gleams in the light. All of a sudden, the light wraps around Carly’s wrist and she unconsciously stabs herself with the needle.

I look at her, lying on the floor, and suddenly something occurs to me. How am I going to get back down to Earth?

 

CHAPTER 6

I instantly look for an opening in the wall but there is nothing. Wait, there’s a small latch on the floor! Ughhh! I can’t open it. How am I going to get out? An enormous man with no eyes walks towards me, and I think, “Maybe my weirdness will come in handy.” The man sticks his hand in his pocket and brings out a magnifying glass.

“I think I need glasses.” He says. I think he needs eyes. I walk past him quickly before he “sees” me.

Another alien turns the corner and drops a wrench. He eyes it, then eyes me. Then he keeps walking. Why had he not picked up the wrench? A small smirk starts to form on my face. I can use the wrench to escape.

I glance back at the ground. What? My eyes are messing with me. Nope, my eyes aren’t messing with me.The wrench got up and walked up to the latch in the floor.  It’s opening!

 

CHAPTER 7

I didn’t know life could be so happy, breath taking, and sad at the same time. Steve was right. The world is ending, and the aliens are taking over. I have always dreamed about this moment. Except I thought it would be different. Falling to your death isn’t really in slow motion, it’s all at once.

When you die, it’s not a happy farm in New Jersey. It’s nothing. Nothing at all, just silence and a bunch of people in white clothes and sunglasses. It’s also very dark.  Everybody is marching in a straight, boring line to a small elevator. Maybe we were wrong. It’s a elevator to heaven, not a staircase. I look to my left, then to my right. A couple of old women take off their sunglasses All of a sudden, I hear a noise. “Francis! Francis! Wake up! Please Francis! Don’t be dead!” It’s Steve. Am I still alive?

I feel Steve patting my back, saying, “Please wake up!”  Why aren’t I waking up? I have a theory: maybe I am DEAD. Ok never mind I’m not dead because I AM BREATHING.

Providence Place Mall. I am here. Here, as in alive. My eyes slowly open, not fully adjusted to the light. Steve looks down at me stunned at what he just saw. It’s not every day you see your best friend falling to their death. Except I’m not dead. He suddenly looks up at the sky, and down back at me.

“What happened?” he says.

“Just my everyday routine, you know, fighting aliens, falling from the sky.” I reply.

“No, seriously. Are you okay?”

“I’m serious. That’s what really happened.”

He looks at me, obviously not satisfied.

“Steve, you know how you were so confident that aliens were real?”

“No,” he says angrily.

“Well, in a not so distant past you were. And they are real. I swear.”

“On your life?”

“Yes.”

“Still. I don’t believe you. My dreams were crushed, and I don’t believe in aliens anymore. I’m over it.”

He trudges away, and doesn’t look back. I whisper back to him, “I know you still believe.”

Suddenly the ground shakes, and the alien ship comes crashing down. There is no one there. Where has everybody gone? It’s an aliena incursio. An alien invasion.

Steve looks back at me, surprised. Then he says, “I believe you.”

I start to say “watch out!” but it’s too late.

 

CHAPTER 8

He’s been dead for two days now

…  …  …  …

 

He’s been dead for three days now.  It doesn’t feel real. I feel dead. It’s excruciating.

CHAPTER 9

I have to tell the world. I can’t keep living with no one else knowing what had just happened. I am the only one who knows, and the only person who will know. But I have to find them. I have to find the aliens.

I say the words Carly said on the ship: ‘Reklg Mekl Giooihj,” and a small alien appears, about the size of my arm. This one isn’t too frightening, and it looks like ET.

ZZZP. ZZZP. My lamp sparks and drops to the floor. I spoke too soon. It shoots lasers from its eyes. He walks up to me and says, ”Greetings. Sorry about the lamp. I’ll fix it. Now let’s get to business. I have a compromise. You never tell a soul about the invasion, and I will give you the boy.”

“But Steve is dead!”

“I can fix that too.” he says.

“Okay.”

The second he leaves, someone knocks on the door.

“Ugh, who is it?”I say.

“It’s Steve!”

“You’re alive!”

“Uh…yeah, why wouldn’t I be?”

They erased his memory. I should have known. I break down in tears. Nooooo! Why?

I wish I hadn’t made the deal. I wish I hadn’t.

 

CHAPTER 10

We walk to school, me pretending that it is a normal day, and Steve not knowing. Suddenly I stop and say two words: I believe. He looks back, and his eyes change color.

“I believe. I remember.” he says.

He stares at me, and we walk to school. It’s better than before, but life will never be normal again.

Broken Best Friend

My best friend

On a bike

Raises one hand up to wave “Hi”

Falls over sideways with a scream

Starts crying

An aggravating blood

Everywhere

Her parents frantically running

My mom picking her up

Running to our house

She’s sitting on the counter

Crying more and more

Wondering if I was going to even see her again

Will she remember our good times

Will she remember how much I love her

Will she remember…me?

Three days later

An orange cast wrapped around

Her broken wrist

She still

Has a smile

Pasted on her face

My best friend

Oommbatata

Oommbatata the tortoise was a crazy testudine pupa. (A dollar tortoise’s scientific name.) He was not the kind of “friendly” tortoise. He only desired to create a new Turtletopia. (Turtletopia was the land of turtles and tortoises but was only a small island). His previous 43,535 attempts to take over the earth had failed because he had an army of only 62 testudine pupas, no tortoise tanks, lack of comedians, and blah blah blah!!! Oommbatata one day got picked up by somebody and then he was reminded of the injustice of animals.

“I’m gonna call in a tortoise army to show them who’s boss!” He climbed to the top of the random person’s finger and yelled in Tortoineise, “All you miniature testudine pupas better come here!”

Then the guy went, “What the heck is that tiny turtle saying?!”

Then, of course, Oommbatata yelled, “All of you testudine pupa, get that overestimated twerp!”

So, duh, he jumped off the person’s hand and landed with an oof. He chased Mr. You’re-Dead-To-Me all over the place. But three hours later he hadn’t gotten close and Mr. You’re-Dead-To-Me didn’t seem to care about Oommbatata. So, Oommbatata called the armed forces of Turtletopia to go faster. But since turtles are slow, they couldn’t catch up even then. He then had the urgent need to fart. He let it out into the skies above and landed on Mr. You’re-Dead-To-Me’s head. He kung-fued him by pooping on Mr. You’re-Dead-To-Me with a nasty blarp. The tortoise army mindlessly followed Oommbatata over Mr. You’re-Dead-To-Me and that was that. Then they took over Carl’s House of Beans and ate beans and flew into the Tower of Pisa. It only took about five seconds for the world to rename it the “Leaning Tower of Pisa” (It was in the New York Times, Issue 26 of 2005).

He yelled, “You’re ours, Italy!”

Then the cops came to get him but that smelly little posterior knocked ‘em out. Oommbatata then realized the Army was on their way, so they farted out of Italy. He waited three minutes and said, “You’re 180.32 seconds late! Now get movin’!!”

Meanwhile, the enemies, the birds, were migrating to the U.K. So Oommbatata and his tortoise army decided on staying in an abandoned warehouse and hatched a plan for the nighttime assault, but only after the spies discovered where they were.

“At 12 we strike the nest. We will gas our way up there. Then we will fart our poo cannons up and we will fire!”

They snuck to the big tree. By big, I mean 68 feet tall. They used their turtlenoculars to spot them. Oommbatata yelled, “What’s the status?”

“We’re positive the mentally retarded flock’s asleep!”

And so he climbed (with the assistance of gas) up the tree. The tortoises farted all the way up because of their big load, which meant high speeds (remember the poo cannons?) Then they shouted, “Hey, who’s slow now?”

“Shut up!” yelled Oommbatata.

Then the tortoises lay on their bellies. The midgets climbed on. General Ahookasma yelled, “Open fire!”

And a stinky scent filled the high-perched habitat. The birds woke up in a dark shade of brown. They all fainted from the stench and later shoved off from the nest. At 7 a.m. the farmer woke up in shock that stinky birds were lying unconscious on his fields. The flag of Turtletopia was placed on the now-useless birdie-perch. Then in the middle of the gas party, Oommbatata commanded them to sail the H.M.S. Feather back to America.

They turned the Statue of Liberty green (putting a shell on would be too hard work). They sailed to Florida, where they recruited crocodiles (the people wondered why they were gone). Then he created and signed the Declaration of Preparation for Invasion (declaring invasion) on Washington. But, since he had bad geography, he attacked Washington state instead. They farted their way across the diameter of the state. They then found that the birds had claimed this land. Oommbatata had a plan.

“We will strike at 1:00 sharp. We swing up those vines, get in our shells, and crash on those surprised faces!“

These turtles were tired, but they managed to hit their marks. “Again?! Where do we go now with these testudine pupa messing around?!”

Then Oommbatata shouted, “Hey! Nobody calls us by our scientific, biologically-named names!”

They jumped around like monkeys and farted ‘til their nest burned to gas. The crocodiles jumped up, rolled up into a ball in midair and made big holes in the floors. Then they farted all the way to Canada, where they landed on a now-squashed-birdie-base. Rokanohi said, “Is this the congo?”

“No, you idiot, this is Canada!” said Oommbatata.

They ventured into nowhere and found a jungle. They ventured all they way to the Amazon and again, Rokanohi asked if it was the Congo, and again, “No, you idiot, this is the Amazon!”

Then Ahookasma said, “We’re actually probably going to die because we’re in the Amazon.”

“What is going on with this planet??!!” yelled You-Know-Who.

Then they met a tribe of testudines. Well, at least not testudine pupas. Then they declared war because they hated the differences of their shells.

“Kjgkuesrguiesygrikuserhgkuserghkieusghkrsut” is what the conflict of the first Amazonian war sounded like. This is how it ended. Like World War II, except it was a big bunch of melons times two. They had drops of turtlepowder in them which hurt more than the insides of watermelon (turtlepowder was just cracked bits of shell). They placed a flag smack in the middle of the Amazon. In Latin it said: Cave turtures! (ich by the way meant beware the turtles). Then they had to go back to Washington state (by the way, from Washington to Canada to Amazon to Washington took 12 weeks) to get the H.M.S. Tortoise running. Their next destination: Moscow, Russia.

“We sail starting 12 noon in 30 seconds. Then we will travel to the border pretending we are a little cruise liner. After we land we sneak out and take over the world!” Oommbatata announced.

“But our legs are sore!” (They didn’t know they were gonna fart there.)

“Guess what?”

“What?”

“Nobody cares! Now shut up and let’s get going!”

They launched from the docks after 23 seconds and then they farted off the ship (walking gets old! farting never does!). Then they started to stench up St. Peter’s square. It reeked so horribly it woke everyone up. The Fire Department had to wear gas masks to put out the smell. Mission accomplished! Oommbatata had a deadly idea. He found a flight that would go around the world. His maximum fart diameter was 64,532 miles. Combined with his testudine army he could cover the world with natural greenhouse gases. They snuck into the baggage section and got into the luggage chamber. Then they farted a tiny hole (big enough for 32,445 midget tortoise butts to pass gas) and then opened fire on the world! The world stunk of testudine gassing for ten devastating days. (Nobody remembered those days because no one was conscious.) Oommbatata’s plan had worked! (Only for a few days.)

That is how they did it. They spent five days sleeping! Then they kept spraying the world for a year. So 2005 was lived twice. The actual one was the first but no one knew. They had only seen the second and not original 2005. And to make sure they didn’t confuse the people, they set a one-year timer so when the year ended they spent another day cleaning up the horrifying smell so it would feel like the people had fallen asleep and woken up the next day. Oommbatata still farted around in Turtletopia (the island). The reason it hasn’t been discovered is because it reeks too badly to smell. Every person who tries to explore is knocked out. Every person who was never seen again probably was knocked out for a century from turtle speed. Even the U.S. deployed Black Ops!!! Along with Italy’s army (they were knocked out though). They left a Blackhawk heli along with an A129 Mangusta.

“You thinking what I am?!”

They flew it over Venezuela and passed some speed over the tiny place. (The reason they speeded over Venezuela is because they spun the globe and picked a random place.) When they flew back they also gassed on Mr. You’re-Dead-To-Me II and III (don’t ask me who they are). The U.S. declared war that you have never heard of. It was secret!!! It was known as the War of the Midget Enemy. The U.S. had tanks, and so did Turtletopia. The U.S. had planes, and Turtletopia had a fleet of modified 747s. The U.S. had ships and subs, and Turtletopia had sea turtle subs with floatie turtles. The U.S. had cannons and guns, while turtletopia had fart and poo blasters. The reason the war was widely unknown was because the U.S. was too embarrassed to talk about it. The turtles won by nearly a fart. The battle was only one day because the turtles dropped paratroopers and they farted on America and they got knocked out again to miss another day of life. So America’s pretty much behind a day and they gave up. The new Turtletopia is now Earth! (That is why a lot of turtles live on Earth) and why forget the facts:

  • All species of sea turtles are endangered because they lost their floaties and are not used to swimming.
  • You never see flying turtles because they look like airliners (BECAUSE THEY ARE).
  • All turtles now have the special ability to fart @ will.

Anyways, just Wiki it.

Continued, every sort of life form except turtles has missed 56,778,786,565,547,476 hours, 15 minutes, 35.687 seconds of time while the turtles had farted them out. To this day they still shell the birds and blast them with the helicopters they got for free. WW3 had begun against the birds because they owned Brazil and Turtletopia island was in the Bermudas. They weren’t far away and when the birds flew to America, tortoise recon got them in sight and they deployed the TTAF (Turtletopia air force) in a ≜ formation from the Bermudas to America. Then they split up and dropped the parapoopers onto the birdie-base. King of Birdie-Poo, the eagle, sent birds that were shot down by the 747 #56 in the first wave. Then the turtles fought back by dropping empty explosive tortoise shells on the bird bath.

“No! Our bath! You leave us no choice! Send the condors!”

A fleet of condors in a V formation flew into battle which were kicked out by the tickle-o turtles. Tickled to death, they were, and the 7.5 kilos were just too much to handle on the four gram tinies. The helicopters flew over, shooting feathers off the now-naked, featherless, beaked freaks. Here comes the twist. The Black Ops comes in and shoots everyone down. Well, at least for the turtles, because the sanctuary was a mountain of rubble. They took over an airport and the planes and helicopters landed at the airport to refuel. One hour later, they took off again after robbing the restaurants. They landed back at the island of Turtletopia and played fart volleyball. The End. Or do you really think so? Well, the turtles outsmarted him and tricked him into ramming into a wall. Mission accomplished!

Do You Know What Scares Me Sometimes

do you know what scares me sometimes?

what will happen when I die.

 

I nearly died once,

when I was told I was moving (again).

away from the place I loved the most.

 

I think I’ll come back

as my opposite

I’ve already lived once,

my memory was just erased.

 

my opposite will be

a brown-skinned

lamb-haired

boy

who wears baggy basketball shorts down to his knees

and red t-shirts.

 

he will love basketball.

he will be christian

he will have a russian accent.

he will have trouble reading

he will have many friends and be handsome (although that’s not an opposite, just something i want).

 

most of all, though,

he will hate to write.

The Never-Ending Story (of the Purple Doughnut)

 

Once upon a time, a purple doughnut jumped onto the table. Suddenly a giant hand came down from the heavens and seized the doughnut.

“Please, don’t eat me,” said the doughnut, covering its eyes.

“How will you stop me?” said the giant in a gruff, gravelly voice.

“If I tell you a story, will you let me go?”

“If you don’t, I’ll smash your crust to make my cake, and if you do tell me a story, I’ll smash your crust to make my cake anyway.”

He’ll kill me if I do, and he’ll kill me if I don’t, the doughnut thought. There’s only one way to get out of this.

The doughnut cleared his throat and began to speak.

 

“Once upon a time, a purple doughnut jumped onto the table. Suddenly, a large hand came down from the heavens and seized the doughnut.”

“’Please, don’t eat me,’” said the doughnut, covering its eyes.

“‘How will you stop me?’” said the giant in a gruff, gravelly voice.

“‘If I tell you a story, will you let me go?’”

“‘If you don’t, I’ll smash your crust to make my cake, and if you do tell me a story, I’ll smash your crust to make my cake anyway.’”

He’ll kill me if I do, and he’ll kill me if I don’t, the doughnut thought. There’s only one way to get out of this.

The doughnut cleared his throat and began to speak.

 

“’Once upon a time a purple doughnut jumped onto the table. Suddenly, a large hand came down from the heavens and seized the doughnut.'”

“’Please don’t eat me,'” said the doughnut, covering its eyes.

“‘How will you stop me?’” said the giant in a gruff, gravelly voice.

“‘If I tell you a story, will you let me go?'”

“‘If you don’t I’ll smash your crust to make my cake, and if you do tell me a story, I’ll smash your crust to make my cake anyway.'”

He’ll kill me if I do, and he’ll kill me if I don’t, the doughnut thought. There’s only one way to get out of this.

The doughnut cleared his throat and began to speak.

 

“’Once upon a time a purple doughnut jumped onto the table. Suddenly, a large hand came down from the heavens and seized the doughnut.'”

“’Please don’t eat me,'” said the doughnut, covering its eyes.

“‘How will you stop me?’” said the giant in a gruff, gravelly voice.

“‘If I tell you a story, will you let me go?'”

“‘If you don’t I’ll smash your crust to make my cake, and if you do tell me a story, i’ll smash your crust to make my cake anyway.'”

He’ll kill me if I do, and he’ll kill me if I don’t, the doughnut thought. There’s only one way to get out of this.

The doughnut cleared his throat and began to speak…

Alexander: The Kingdom of Fairies

Prologue

My name is Alexandra Olive Rose, but everyone calls me Alex. I am 8 years old and I live in the country by a huge forest. Most of my time I sit and stare at my bedroom wall and get no dinner. Well, I have stared at that wall so many times I think it moved! You know why I stare at that wall almost every day of my life? Because I get in trouble from wanting to explore, like the time I went past the village and into the forest.

But it was only a foot in…

Fine! It wasn’t a foot in, it was my whole body! I know it was wrong but it felt so good to be out of the house! My dad carried me back home and then I got sent to my room, again! With no dinner! No “good night!”

My parents say that creatures live in the forest, dark creatures!

Anyway, I knew that I would not get dinner after I went to the forest, so every day before going to explore I always got a snack and put it under my bed, so that when I got sent to bed I would have something to eat. I ate my snack then started to read. I love books, and my parents wish I read rather than explored. But the thing about books is that I can read about other girls’ lives, just like mine, then see how they resolve it!

Chapter 1

I got up the next morning with the sound of birds chirping. I knew that today was going to be a good day! So, when I think I am going to have a good day I get dressed in my favorite outfit, a sleeveless juniper green colored shirt. Then for my skirt: white with pink polka dots and a pink line across. I went to the bathroom and brushed my thick brunette colored hair. I wanted my hair to grow long, but not too long, just like my mother’s. And to top it off I didn’t wear shoes that day!

I went down stairs and my mother left a note for me next to my breakfast. It said: ¨Don’t go into the forest and finish your breakfast  Love, Mom.¨  I sighed then finished my hot pancakes and all of my orange juice. After that I cut up some fruit so that I could be active because today was going to be the day! The day I left for an adventure! I went back upstairs to my room and wrote a note on my typewriter that said: ¨Dear Mother & Father, You need to let me go and adventure at some point, and again sorry I don’t follow your rules. See you soon, but I don’t know when. -Alex :)¨

Chapter 2

I decided to go without anything to carry so that I could get around quicker. Ok, I was about to do this! I got the door handle and opened the door, and…my mother came in!

“Oh hi honey! Thank you for opening the door for me,” she said.

OMG! I was so frustrated! Now I didn’t have an escape plan! She told me to put on some shoes which I didn’t want to do! She also told me to go and occupy my time, so I did. I ran to the back door to leave and…my dad walked in! And guess what he said?

“Oh hi honey! Thank you for opening the door for me!”

Like, can no one come through the window?! It’s easy, just climb, I do it all the time! After dinner I got tucked into bed. When I saw my mother and my father’s candle go out, I got out of bed and got dressed. I combed my hair so that I would look good running away.

I checked my parents’ room to make sure they were asleep so that I wouldn’t have to open the door and risk one of them coming through it again. I went inside the room and just looked at them. I had to admit it, I was going to miss them. I left the note I wrote on the desk then left. When I stepped outside, I quickly ran to the forest, then found a nice comfy cave to sleep in for that night.

Chapter 3

I woke up with food around me and a deer on top of me. “Is she dead?” asked a voice.

“No, wait, I see that she is waking up¨ another voice said.

I woke up and saw animals around me. It must be some type of dream, I thought, because how did I get here? I was lying cozy on some type of leaves, but none that I had ever seen before. As the deer moved away from on top of me, I sat up then asked “How did I get here?”

“Well we brought you here for Queen Ella and King Elite. Because you are our savior, you were chosen to come here,” the deer said.

Wait, did this deer just talk to me?

“I just understood you…” I said with disbelief.

“She is the one,” said the squirrel.

“But how?” I asked.

“Because we gave you the enchanted forest pendant. It allows you to communicate with us. It is protected by the king and queen and they said if we found you, to give it to you,” a rabbit said.

“How do you know it is me?” I asked.

“We just know,” said a turtle. And then, in a blink of an eye, they were all gone. I decided to go look around. My pillow had been a tree, so I stood up and peeked over it…there was an entire village! It was all made out of trees with tiny little glowing lights. Inside each one, a house. In the middle was a river of sparkly red water. I felt the enchantment in the air. And then I knew where I was…Enchantia.

Chapter 4

I knew about Enchantia from the Fairy Tale books I read when I was younger. I would always pretend I was a princess fairy, the most beautiful in the land! And so I thought today I would meet the lady that I pretended to be for so long! I ran towards the kingdom, then felt a little poke, like a shot at the doctor. I looked down and tiny warriors, the size of your thumb, were shooting spears the size of pinkies at me. They were fairies! But boys!

I knew that Enchantia must have had boys, but I never would have guessed they would also be fairies! I told them that I was a good person, not a bad one! But all I heard from them was “Idontknowwhatyouaresayingbadperson!”

Hey, I understood that…

I could speak fairy!

Just then, a lady riding in a carriage went right past the guards and straight up to my face. The guards bowed to her as she came up to me. She was the most delicate, beautiful, amazing thing I ever saw! I stared at her. She had a golden dress with a beautiful golden leaf crown that circled her head. She glittered, almost as if she were the sun. Then I saw who she was… I took a bow.

Chapter 5

“OMG! OMG! OMG! OMG! You are…” I said not finishing my sentence.

“Queen Ella? Why yes, I am! And you must be Alexandra.”

“Yes, how did you-”

“But everyone calls you Alex. You ran away from home and your parents say that the forest is too dangerous for little girls like you! And animals took you here under my command. You used to play as me when you were little. You were destined to come here, Alex, you were!” She spoke in some sort of British accent.

“How do you know all that stuff about me? And how-I mean, why me?” I said.

“I watch you in my dreams. When that happens I know you are the one! And when you fall asleep I come visit you and tell you all about Enchantia, and that’s why you came here,” she said.

“Wow! Like magic?”I asked.

“No. Like magic!” she told me.

“I know, that is what I said!” I told her.

“No. It’s what I said! Anyway, you are planning on saving us all, right? Because that is what you are here for!”

“Umm…”

“Good! Now follow me and I will show you your room!” she said. I then followed her past a river and into the middle of a tree!

Chapter 6

Outside there were flowers and trees leading into two golden and wooden doors that would open to a red carpet and another pair of doors which lead to a beautiful room! It looked like a doll house, something on display because you couldn’t fit inside…unless you were very small!

“Uh…it’s a very royal room but it’s just too small, I can’t even stick my hand in there!” I said, worried.

“Oh ya I forgot! Silly me!” she said.

“What?” I asked. She took out her wand, it had the same detail as on my necklace, but on top was a perfect, beautiful quartz! She held it in front of me then.

“ENCHANTIA!” she shouted. I felt dizzy, then everything started to get bigger. Then I couldn’t see at all! All I heard was “Oh dear me!”

Then…silence.

Chapter 7

I woke up. Everything was big and I now had a dress in a wavy-sort of style, and at the bottom of this dress there was a circle of leaves. I had a beautiful tree pin in my hair and my hair was curled. I had these beautiful flats that matched my dress and as I turned around…I had wings! They were beautiful and golden with tiny bits of green! My necklace remained, so I knew I could still talk to the animals of Enchantia. I tried flying and on my first try I fell. I tried a second time. I fell, again. But I was not going to give up! I tried one more time…I flew! The Queen came up to me and said, “I see you have gotten the hang of flying!”

“Its awesome! So…now since I am small I can live in that royal room?” I asked her.

“Of course you can!!!” she said.

“Thank You!” I said, then flew off to my room. It was a beautiful room, and everything inside was forest themed! Canopy tree bed and wooden walls with a forest painted on it! It just looked so royal! I landed on top of my huge bed and went right to sleep!

Chapter 8

The next thing I knew I was in the middle of a wedding! There was a monster. I remembered him from the Fairy Tale books I used to read! His name was Fenrir, a dark and scary werewolf. He lived on the cold side of the forest, where everything was covered in ice. He was dark gray with a white belly, and ice stuck to him like honey that never wanted to come off. He had dark blue eyes that would spot you from miles away. He used to be locked up in chains and spikes, but someone had let him free. I woke up in the morning and I realized that it was only a dream. I remembered in the old story that Fenrir was to marry a fairy named Mary that he was obsessed with! She was forced into marriage to unite the two kingdoms or Fenrir would destroy Enchantia! Fenrir was afraid of Enchantia taking over the land. He was evil and did not want goodness to spread to the darkest parts of the forest.

I looked around me and saw that half of my room was torn up, broken! It wasn’t a dream after all! I had to go to the wedding because something must have gone wrong!

But how? I recognized that place but from where? Then it hit me! It was the tree where I woke up at the beginning! I flew over there and, sure enough, there they were! All the fairies were tied up, even the Queen and the King.

“How do like being at my wedding?” asked the Fenrir.

“We hate it and you know it!  The savior will help us! I know she will!” the Queen shouted at the Fenrir.

“So she will?” said the Fenrir. Fenrir was as tall as the statue of liberty!  I snuck up behind him, then I kicked him in the weak spot on his shoulder, and just like in the story, he fell to the floor! It was like a gigantic explosion had hit the entire earth! I was speechless, and before anything could be said, Fenrir got back up. He pushed me down upon the floor and was about to stomp on me with all his might when, all of a sudden, a Force Field surrounded me. I was flying, again! Then I thought happy thoughts as sun/fire balls came out of my hands. I threw them at Fenrir. I knew I had an advantage over him, since Fenrir will die if he is out of the cold for any long amount of time. I threw one last fireball at him and he fell. I went to him and put my head on his chest to see if his heart was still beating, but it wasn’t.

Silence fell upon the room. “You…you…you did it!” said a fairy.

“I told you that she was the one! I told all of you fairies! I haven’t see that power since I ruled the throne! And no one else has it!” the Queen shouted.

“All hail our savior…Princess Alexandra Olive Rose!” said the King.

“Me, Princess?! Me!?” I asked, surprised.

“Yes, but you have to take an oath to say that you would stay here, forever!” said the King.

“I would…” I didn’t finish my sentence, I looked at all the fairies, then looked at my house in the distance. “I used to just be a girl who wanted to explore, and now look at me, about to become a princess? I love you all and I will come back and visit…” I said, still looking back. “But my family is waiting for me at home!” I said.

“Understood.” said Queen Ella. And with a flick of a wand I felt dizzy again. I fell to the ground and the last word I heard was “Goodbye!”

Chapter 9

I woke up in my bed and it felt like nothing had happened! Had it all been a dream? The only thing I could remember was the necklace! I felt around my neck, and there it was! I knew it couldn’t have been a dream because it seemed so real! Then, in the corner of my eye, I saw a light glow in my closet. It was faint but I soon recognized it…

It was Queen Ella! I waved and saw her wave back, then she pointed to my desk. I saw a tiny card that read: “Don’t forget us please! We will all miss you! Keep the necklace but come visit us, ok!” I then looked at Queen Ella as a tear went down her face. I wanted to run and give her a hug but by that time she was already gone. I got out of bed and looked outside, which is when I saw all the fairies of Enchantia holding little lights in the sky! They were all crying tears of joy with a sign that said: PRINCESS ALEXANDRA OLIVE ROSE!

 

Authors Note:

During writing this book I pictured an 8 year old girl that just had a life that all the other girls didn’t.  This is the second book I have done besides DisNerds vr. PokeNerds in school. But I have like 5 other books I put aside to finish this book! I also put an author’s note in the other book as well! Like every professional author, I add the people I thank for inspiring or helping with the book! Ahem, My friends: Gracie, Alex A, Izzy, Sophia, and so many others! Umm…Oh ya! Ahem, My Writopia correctors/teachers: Alex and Emily! Umm… ya, my family and just lets say lots of people!

Beanie Boo Bunch

There was once a dog named Sir Rufferton. He was an arctic dog who lived in Greenland. One day Sir Rufferton was standing as a sentry for his doggie village. A few hours into his shift, two dogs in the dog army came with a cat hostage who was caught snooping around the back side of the village. Sir Rufferton was then assigned to interrogate her. When they reached a private room, he took off her face mask and instantly fell in love with this cat beauty. Her name was Sheila and she fell in love with him back. Despite dog and cat code they got married and had a child who was a dog named Slush.  After he was born, the stern glances and rude gestures turned into riots and angry mobs. For the safety of themselves, and Slush, they decided to give him away to a  summer village, a strange place called California, so maybe he could have a happy life. The next morning, Sir Rufferton set out on his long, hard journey with his baby son Slush.

Once Sir Rufferton arrived he waited until nightfall, then put Slush next to the sweetest looking animal, gave him a kiss on the head, and left. Little did Sir Rufferton know that he had put Slush next to the leader of the summer animals, the meanest and toughest of them all, a colorful hedgehog named Holly. Sir Rufferton had no idea that he’d put his precious son in a long life of pranks, rude names, and so on.

Five years later, Slush was no longer a pup. He was an adult dog. One day he was woken up to a pink lamb named Babs baaing in his face. Slush was very annoyed, and Babs just explained that she was giving him the proper treatment for a dog.

“You don’t help an adult dog,” she explained.

As the day went on, all of the other summer animals finally woke up and gave him the same reply, except in their own little animal language. Slush finally screamed to the rest of them, for the first time in his life.

“I can’t take it anymore!” he screamed, “You call me rude names, you’re always mean to me, whether I was a pup or not. It’s just not fair, what did I ever do to you? I’m leaving this place, never to return. You all are just such meanies, and I can’t take it!”

And with that, Slush grabbed all his things and left his summer village.

Once Slush felt like he was a fair distance from California, he stopped for a moment. He pulled out the one hint he had as to who his parents were, and tried to figure it out so he’d know where to go. The hint was a letter telling him that they were from somewhere cold. It was also a map of a place. Not how to get there, just of the place. Slush thought he knew this place, but he had failed geography as a pup. He mistook Greenland for Antarctica, so that’s where he went.

It took many days and nights, and lots of cold weather, but he finally reached Antarctica. Slush roamed through Antarctica, feeling at home despite the cold weather, which he had never before experienced. All of a sudden he heard a sound screaming.

“Look out!”

Next thing he knew, a blue penguin was racing toward him on his belly. Before Slush could react, he was on the ground, and the penguin was on top of him.

The penguin said, “Sorry for bumping into you, mate! I’m Ice Cube. Oh, and I think you need to call upon the magical unicorn of the Antarctic, because I think you broke my beak!”

Slush wasn’t sure how to react, but before he could, Ice Cube started doing this weird dance, and making these weird sounds, and a flash of light appeared. Then a white unicorn with rainbow colored spots all over her came flying out of the flash of light.

Once she landed, she said, “Hello unknown arctic dog. Oh, and hello Ice Cube, it’s been a while! I see your beak is broken, would you like me to fix it? Oh where are my manners, my name is Wishful, unknown stranger.”

After they got the whole introduction thing finished, Wishful began using one of her magic spells on Ice Cube’s beak. The three of them decided to become best friends forever. Slush felt really happy that he finally had friends he could trust. But little did he know the Summer Gang was coming his way fast.

The Summer Gang had an unknown source and found out where Slush was. One strangely warm day in Antarctica began as peacefully as everyday had over the past few weeks. Then, all of a sudden, Ice Cube, Wishful, and Slush saw a big gust of ice flying up, as if something was propelling it into the air. A few minutes later, the Summer Gang, Opal, Holly, and Babs, were seen in the distance. As soon as they had arrived in front of the winter gang’s igloo, Holly explained why they had come.

“Hello Slushie-Bear!” she said. “Just before you left our summer village, California, you said that we were meanies. And we’ve come to say that hurt our feelings in our empty, stone cold hearts, you ugly gray mutt! I mean, whoever heard of a grey dog living in a sunny place? Anyway, I’m getting off track. I’ve come to begin a war with you and your putrid arctic friends.”

The Summer Gang immediately walked inside the igloo without being invited.

Before you could say bananananarama, the war began! Each team fought strongly, but their power was equal to the the other.

Wishful then said, “You think you’re beating us? Well I think I’m gonna call in a friend.”

She went outside for a few minutes, and when she came back she brought a white and brown owl named Swoops. Ice Cube knew Swoops, so he decided to tell the Summer Gang what they were up against.

“Swoops here is a wise owl, as all owls are. But he is a special wise owl. He is a trained tactician. He will give us the skills we need to defeat you, and add a fourth party to our war against you. You better give up now, or you will be defeated trying.”

Opal was very jealous of their new friend, so she said, “You think you can call in a friend and win? Well we can too. We’re gonna call in a friend from way up high, and I mean way.”

With that, Opal made a horrible screeching sound, and in flew an angel bear named Halo. Each team decided to take a fifteen minute break so they could go over new strategies.

Once they returned, each team fought hard. The arctic gang fought with as much precision and synchronization as possible, while the Summer Gang played dirty, and had their angel friend call upon some undead skeletons to fight. Swoops, seeing that the Summer Gang was gaining an advantage, decided to play a little trick on them. He stopped the war for a few moments, and said that the winter gang didn’t want their floors to be broken any longer. They wanted the Summer Gang to go outside, and call upon more skeletons if they felt they needed them. The Summer Gang, seeing their chance, went outside. They no longer had their heavy duty snow gear on, and they had lived in warm weather all their lives, so they were not prepared to endure this very cold weather. The second all four of them got outside, they froze! The winter gang, realizing they had won the war, were very happy.

Slush stuck a note onto the ice cubes they were trapped inside of which said, “Never come back. We have won the war fair and square.”

And with that, Slush and his friends mailed the Summer Gang back to their home in California. After that, Slush never felt alone again. He knew he had true friends he could depend on, who wouldn’t make fun of him. Slush and his friends lived happily ever after, as BFFS.

And They Will Live Happily Ever After…Or Not!

Prologue

 

I am an angel in Heaven right now. This may sound a lot like Flynn Ryder, but here is the story of how I died…

The morning dawned and each princess arose in her own way. Princess Ariel was awoken by a crowd of adorable marine life. Princess Cinderella prefered a wake up call inside of her, thanks to a wee bit of magic from her fairy godmother. Princess Snow White let the dwarves wake her up, as they did anything for her after all that time she had spent being their maid. Princess Pocahontas was still a bit of a stranger to the English culture so always awoke to Meeko, her pet raccoon licking her face. Princess Belle (Beauty) loved more than anything else to stir to dancing and singing silverware. Princess Tiana was always up with the sun, even without an alarm clock. Princess Mulan, quite the early bird as well, was up even before the sun for training. And Princess Aurora? She just slept and slept. Only the sound of breaking tiaras could wake her up.

Oh the excitement that ran through the princesses’ hearts! The first reunion in a century! The only princess that had lived that long was, again, Aurora. But she hadn’t attended. She hadn’t fulfilled her story. To be honest, the princesses weren’t excited.

“Do I have to?” Tiana asked Naveen that morning. “It’s busy season at the restaurant. Are you sure you can handle it by yourself?”

Naveen assured her that he could. Belle wasn’t any more excited.

“But Adam, I’ve got to dish sit for Miss Teacup and I’d hate to let her down, you know how sensitive she is.”

When Aurora was dragged out of bed early, she had fits! “NO! No!” she shrieked, still half asleep. “Must…sleep…innn… ” she protested.

The second Cinderella’s mice groaned, as they have aged, but Cinderella hasn’t since she is a princess. “Cinderelly! Cinderelly! You’ve got your big fancy party!”

She moaned. “Not today! I just couldn’t stand a day with those bratty princesses trying to steal my fame!” Then her fairy godmother shot her with sleep magic and hauled her into her carriage.

Meanwhile, Mulan was up super early practicing kung fu for a festival for the school children coming up next week. “Keep it up gurly you looking FINE in the kung fu suit!” Mushu, her pet dragon, exclaimed.

“Mushu, stop it, I am trying to focus,” she said, trying to hold back her giggle.

Mulan’s grandma came up to her out of the house and said, “Mulan, you have to get ready for the princess reunion, you don’t want to go there sweaty, do you?”

“Nainai, can I please have 5 more minutes?”

“No Mulan, take a shower and put on your dress and meet me in the garden in 20 minutes.”

“Okay, Nainai,” she said reluctantly.

Ariel’s excuse was her daughter, Melody. “But Eric, we’ve got Melody’s ball to plan for! I’ve got to pick out her dress, try out hairstyles, help bake and who knows what more! Plus, I’ll be missing my daddy visit!” Ariel’s father let the merpeople and humans mix now, so she was turned back into a mermaid once a week to visit. Especially now that her father wasn’t feeling well.

Eric looked at the ceiling. “Women,” he said wearily. “I’ll never get them! Ariel, it’ll be fine. Besides, Melody’s almost 16. She should be able to take care of herself.”

“Fine,” Ariel grumbled.

So, surprisingly, they all got to the reunion on time, except Cinderella, of course, who had to make a “fashionably” late appearance. Snow White clicked her tongue in disapproval. Pocahontas rolled her eyes. “What?” Cinderella asked defensively.

Tiana’s temper had reached its limit. “Oh I’ll tell you what. None of us want to be here. Agreed?” The others nodded their heads. “Exactly, so why do you have to get here half an hour late like you’re better than the rest of us?”

“That’s right,” said Mulan, “I’ve had it with you snotty upper class princesses from Far Far Away thinking that you’re better than everyone else.”

“That’s because we are,” commented Belle.

“That’s exactly her point! I mean, have you ever worked a single day in your entire life? No! Have you had to fight for your husband? No! That’s because everything’s handed to you on a platter!” Pocahontas practically screamed.

“And that’s our fault why?” Aurora couldn’t help but point out. “Yeah, like the crowds love us and we’re beautiful and kind and stuff. We can’t help that!” Ariel added.

“Oh God,” Tiana muttered. “Even Naveen was better than this. And on the fact of you being ‘beautiful,’ have you never realized that you guys look almost identical? Ever thought about how you are all skinny and white? Y’all is like clones! Like take Mulan, she’s Chinese. She’s got culture. And if you’ve seen Pocahontas’ movie, you’ll learn about the Native Americans. And me, I’m here to teach y’all about New Orleans. I actually feel bad for you guys. You’ve got nothing.” Tiana sat back down, pleased with her speech. But you can bet that Ariel wasn’t.

“Excuse you! Saying I don’t have culture! Need I point out that I am the only mermaid here!”

Belle nodded. “I bet no one else here married a Beast…” She was cut off by Cinderella.

“Who turned out to be gorgeous. Hey, Tiana! Are you forgetting how many years I worked for the Steps?”

“And now all you do is sit around doing nothing. At least you got to be the servant of people! Those dwarves are disgustingly messy! And don’t even get me started on their fashion sen-” Snow White stopped. Sneezy had just walked in with an extra bag of ‘essentials’ she had forgotten to pack. He looked hurt.

“This was just what Ti was saying- you don’t mind if I call you Ti, do you?-” Mulan asked.

“Of course not, my sister, go right ahead,” agreed Tiana.

“You go, girl!” Pocahontas added.

“Just what Ti was saying! You guys hurt people’s feelings and don’t care! It’s just one dwarf out of your admiration society, right Snow?” Mulan said.

“But-” she protested. Pocahontas shook her head.

“I don’t want to hear it,” Mulan countered heartlessly. Cinderella sighed.

“You all are so immature. Dumb, too! Everyone knows that I’m the most famous. Sorry to crush your dreams, girls.” She laughed her high, tinkly laugh.

“You know what?” Aurora snapped. “I wish I didn’t have to come! I wish I wasn’t here! I could be sleeping right now! You guys can stop arguing because I’m the oldest and the eldest is always the best, so stop your yapping!” The princesses looked at one another.

“Sheesh. What’s up with her?” asked Ariel snottily. “Plus, I’ve got a movie made about me, my daughter, and my past. Or course I’m the most loved by all.”

“Oh my gosh!” Pocahontas screamed. “For Pete’s sake! Although I agree with Ti and Mulan, we’re all princesses. We don’t have to be bickering all the time to prove that. But, if it matters so much, Ariel, I’ve gotten two educational movies made about me and so does Mulan. Your movies teach, hmm, let me think, how to brush hair, and how to sing in an impossibly high soprano. All such important life skills, of course!” All of the royalty glared at each other. If looks could kill, they would all be in a casket. Mulan pulled a dagger out of nowhere and started sharpening it. Belle ‘politely’ cleared her throat.

“Do you mind?”

Tiana clenched her fists. “I’m gonna go ahead and speak for my gal MuMu-”

“Don’t call me that!” Mulan snapped.

“Fine, ya feisty little frog! My gal Mulan! A. You cannot try being sassy. It doesn’t work for you, and B. Mulan has the right to do whatever she wants. Leave her alone!” The fuel and force in Tiana’s words had escaped her mouth, but the power in them was buzzing in the room. Not a good sign…

Miniature elephants somehow popped into view and played a fanfare on their trunks. “Oh! They’re so cute!”Aurora squeaked breathlessly and all of the princesses immediately started gushing. Then a hovering dolphin floated up to Ariel. It squeaked in dolphin, a language that no one but Ariel could interpret.

Ariel nodded. “Mmm hmm, okay, uh huh…” she said, soothing the excited dolphin. She suddenly looked shocked and her face turned pale under her makeup. “Oh,” she said, nodding again, but with noticeably less enthusiasm. She nervously turned to face the group, their eyes wide in fear (everyone but Ti, MuMu, and Poca). “I don’t know how Splash knew this – I don’t know at all – “ Her hands shook with terror. “There is a war brewing. Against us. The villains have teamed up with someone else. An unexpected group of people.” Her breath almost failed her. “The princes,” Ariel said, and fainted.
Snow White turned paler than humanly possible. Aurora collapsed and no one knew if she had fainted or simply fell asleep.

Mulan didn’t look at all surprised. “I’ve never trusted men, real men, that is.”

Belle looked like she didn’t really care. “As long as I still get my palace, why does this even matter?” Pocahontas scoffed.

“Talk about conceited! Did you think about all of the people that might die in this war?”

“Might,” Belle interjected. “Whatever! How would you feel once you realized that you don’t have any servants because they’re all dead?”

“They won’t die!” Belle cried hotly, sounding as if she was desperate for some backup. “And if they do, I’ll just find new ones. What, do you think I’d work like some dirty slave?”

“Because you don’t care what happens to anyone as long as you get what you want, right?” Pocahontas was on a roll and there was nothing stopping her once she had that fiery glint in her eye. Their argument was interrupted by the creepy hush of all the birds muting their voices.

“Is it just me, or did everything just fall silent?” Cinderella half whimpered.

“It’s not you,” Aurora stage whispered.

At that moment, the lights went off. So did the sun. Literally. The sun turned black. All you could see was a flickering candle on the far side of the room.

“C’mon guys! It’s not that bad!” Tiana said, but her tone wasn’t goading, it was encouraging.

“Yeah! Don’t worry, we’ll be okay!” Mulan chided.

“You hope,” Pocahontas replied darkly, still sulking from not finishing her argument.

The lock on the ballroom door clicked shut. They were trapped. From a distant, very faintly, the princesses heard a cackle. Mulan sat up straight.

“What’s the matter, Mulan?” Ariel taunted shakily. “Scared?” Maybe picking on others ridded her of her fear.

“No way! Hunter’s instinct. Never trust unfamiliar sounds.” The girls exchanged worried looks. For once, Tiana appeared to be uncertain of herself. Unsure of what would happen next. Because that is what fear will do to you. Pocahontas had a strange look on her face. Like she was scared spitless, but didn’t want to show it. The other princesses had no such masks. They were scared and wanted everyone to know it.

“Help!” They wailed. “Please, somebody save us! Turn on the lights! Get me a pretty dress to wear as I die!” they cried. Tiana mischieviously smiled at Pocahontas, who returned the smirk-like grin before resuming her battle mode. She tightly gripped a bow and notched an arrow instinctively. Mulan did the same with her knives, poising them so they’d be ready to attack in a moment’s notice.

“Listen to you!” Tiana teased. “The princes are in a war against us. Why would they come and save us? And I’ll bet that your minions – sorry – companions are too scared to return.” The formerly panicking princesses lowered their heads, embarrassed.

“I guess so,” Snow White finally admitted. “I mean, this is pretty freaky though. Who would think our princes would do such a thing?”

“So much for ‘true love,’” muttered Pocahontas. “I chose John Rolfe over John Smith thinking he’d bring me a better life, and look at where that got me. Trapped in a room with you guys.” She wore a disgusted look on her face. When Poca ain’t happy, nobody’s happy!

“What’s wrong with you guys!” Aurora exclaimed. “You’re flipping over something a stinkin’ fish said, for Pete’s sake! How do we know for sure that Ariel’s not pranking us?”

“Hello? Standing right here!” Ariel was mad with a capital MAD. “Do you think I’d really play this sort of trick? I mean, I do love a good prank, but I’d never do that. I’d never want Eric to betray me!”

“So let’s stop this arguing. Obviously, we’ve got to make a game plan. We all hate the idea of being double crossed, or flat out lied to, but we gotta face the truth.” Cinderella stopped talking. The others seemed awestruck.

“Maybe you’ve got a brain under all of that hairspray after all, Cindy,” said Mulan, clearly impressed.

“Not bad for a princess,” Belle agreed slyly, nodding her head. “Not bad at all.”

“So what C means is that we all have something we’re good at and that we have to make that our defense against their fancy but deadly equipment. For example – again, an example, so you don’t have to agree with what I say – I’m a cook and baker, so I’ll pelt doughnut after doughnut and cannoli after jumbo pots at them! Ariel, do you have any control over water?” Tiana asked.

“A bit,” she answered, appearing as modest and shy for the first time.

“Can you summon it?” Tiana wanted to know.

Ariel perked up at this, grinning innocently. “Yes I can!” she said triumphantly.

Tiana smiled. “That’s perfect, because your defense is going to be to create a thin water wall blocking them from us, while also completely soaking the opposition. Belle, you can talk to dishes or something, so can you get your silverware friends to find you some non-alive teapots or something to chuck at our enemies? Thanks,” Tiana said without waiting for an answer. “Poca and MuMu…” Mulan growled. “…Poca and MuMu,” Tiana continued, “Y’all have your bows and knives along with a load of practice, so my bet is that you’ll be fine on your own. Aurora, you got magic pillows filled with bricks that can be cannoned into the air? ‘Cause that’s what we need. Cindy, see if your godmama can make us a cannon and you’ll get some pumpkins to fill it up, too. Am I missing anyone?” They all shook their heads. “Then let’s get to it! Let’s go kick some royal butt!”

Mulan kicked down the door, both fearlessly and ferociously, invigorated by Tiana’s battle plan/pep talk. She wasn’t the only one. They all were feeling pumped. Feeling like they could do anything. The princesses strutted out of the ballroom with a newfound confidence, ready to take on the world.

The princesses were working hard, funneling their spirit into their work. Unsurprisingly, Mulan and Pocahontas both had competitive streaks, competing against each other on how awesome they could be with weapons in their hands. As it turned out, Ariel was a determined person who never planned on giving up. Belle had deadly aim and could hit a target with a fork from anywhere. Cinderella and Aurora were an amazing team, quick to gather supplies, pull levers, and alternate positions. They were all excited, having set their differences aside and were having fun. But deep down, they knew that the time would come where this would not be a game or training, but a fight for their lives. That time came too soon…

Aurora was first to spot them, from high in the tower filling her previously comfy pillows with bricks before flinging them down a chute into Cinderella’s waiting hands. “They’re coming!” she hollered into her bullhorn loud enough for her friends to hear, but not the princes. The female royalty scrambled into their hiding places, waiting for the princes to play right into their hands.

As expected, the princes had recruited other townspeople to rally against the soon-to-be queens, claiming that it was their fault that they weren’t living the high life. Belle rolled her eyes, waiting for it to be over. She almost fell asleep as Charming gave a speech persecuting the princesses, that is, until someone whispered. “Psssst!” Belle heard the voice but couldn’t see the source. “Over here!” The supposedly invisible person whisper-called, and quick as lightning tied her up.

“Who are you?” Belle asked, her eyes full of anger and wonder simultaneously.

“I’ll tell you who I am in due time,” replied the masked figure. “But first, we need to talk.”

Pocahontas stood ready, every inch of her alert, ready for battle.Then someone stealthily crept over and nearly pulled her braid out. “What was that for?” Pocahontas whisper-yelled.

“Follow me,” said the mysterious person.

So Pocahontas and Belle each obeyed and walked. Their captors had led them to some sort of hideout. At the sight of each other, they were filled with glee.

“Poca!!!” Belle squealed.

“Bellerina!!!” Pocahontas exclaimed, each of them using their pet name for the other.

“Who are they?” Pocahontas added with a frown, nodding her head toward their guards. Their kidnappers exchanged looks.

“I guess we’ve gotta tell them,” one said sheepishly.

“Alright, but I like the disguises,” the other pouted. The first one yanked off the ski mask covering her face and turned toward the kidnappees.

“I am Princess Jasmine, and I am ready to join your fight.”

Belle gasped, “I so did not see that coming.”

But Pocahontas wasn’t really paying attention to her. Her gaze was fixed on the other, Pouter.

“If she’s a princess, than you are too, which means you are…” and Pouter finished her sentence for her. She unraveled the turban around her head and the scarf on her face. “Princess Rapunzel.”

She stated matter of factly as miles of thick blond hair tumbled down. “But didn’t you cut your hair a few years ago?” asked Pocahontas. Rapunzel only laughed.

“It’s amazing what hair products can do,” was her only reply.

“Jasmine, take a spear and work with Mulan. I’ve figured that you’re really strong,” commanded Belle. “And Rapunzel, go to Ariel and create a force field of hair around her water wall. Any leftover hair should be lassoing up the enemy. Got it?” They all nodded, surprised to see Belle in control.

Meanwhile, the other princesses had been spotted. Mulan had carelessly tried to find Pocahontas when she was challenged in combat by Eugene Fitzgerald A.K.A. Flynn Ryder who happened to be carrying a stainless steel pot. Unfortunately, that was when Jasmine came along and smashed it to smithereens. The moments of combat occurred too quickly (and violently) to record, but it was terrible. Prince versus princess. Townsperson versus warrior. It was a madhouse out there.

The battle either lasted for 2 hours and 40 minutes or 4 hours and 20 minutes. It did, eventually, come to an end, as all things do.

A sense of darkness covered the area. The opposition bowed down to a misty black shape/person that appeared to be riding on a storm cloud. “Who’s that?” had become the phrase of the day, for that was what the feminine portion of the royalty was wondering. The figure was slowly descending and its shape was becoming more definite. It was a she. She was a girl, about 18, a black hood, very punk looking, with leather boots and black jeans, also a glamour goth, with black hair with a red streak. Her body radiated power, but also a form of death, and maybe revenge. This pale, skinny teenager was a wonder. Was she an ally, or a threat? But it all came back to the same question: Who was she?

“Well, well well,” she taunted, “what do we have here?” The tone of her voice made the princesses pretty sure that she was foe, not friend. “I bet you’re worrying your perfect bratty princess heads about who I am. Well, that’s for me to know and you to find out! For years I’ve been planning this. For years I’ve stood in the shadow while you’ve gotten the glory. Now have you figured out who I am, princesses?” She practically spat out. They shook their heads. “Well, I can’t be surprised. You’re all too dumb to figure anything out.” The princesses had been scared into silence, but that ended once the stranger insulted their intelligence.

“Excuse you, Miss Mystery, but I’ve got plenty smarts,” snapped Tiana. “More than you!” She dished out sassily.

“Oh, really?” countered the stranger. “Go on, walk up to me. Come now, I won’t bite.” Taken aback, Tiana stepped forward. “Whoops, wrong step!” She jeered, pushing a button, therefore ensnaring Tiana. “Goodbye, country gal,” the stranger said softly in triumph. She raised an eyebrow at Belle. “Well? Haven’t you figured me out, book girl?” Belle had been lost in thought, but shook her head in defeat.

“I know who you are!” Cinderella blurted out victoriously. “You’re the one we all thought was good. The one we always loved. The one who we now know always secretly hated us. Don’t listen to a single word she says, guys! Don’t you get it? The streak in her hair? She’s Red Riding Hood!” Red said nothing, but chuckled. A small smile danced across her face, before settling on her lips.

“Well done, Cindy!” She congratulated her, but, as with all of her words, she had a sense of sarcasm.”You’re much brighter than you appear to be.”

“Well, I hope you’re happy, because you’re goin’ down,” was Ariel’s frail attempt at being intimidating. But she did look fierce, with her tangled mass of red hair and tattered clothes.

“Are you sure you want this, Red?” Jasmine asked. “Do you really want to destroy so many people to get what you want? I know you desperately want to rule, but what good it it to be a king without a kingdom?”

“You could always join us. We’d find a way to make you a princess. Please. We could be friends!” pleaded Aurora. Their voices were richer-sounding. Not charmspeak, but some magic. Ariel seemed to understand what they were doing, even before they knew it themselves. They were not forcing her. They were befriending her. She began to beautifully vocalize and sounded like an angel. The others followed her, harmonizing to Ariel’s melody that swiftly melted into a song. A song about friendship.

 

“To have a friend is the greatest thing ever

Cause once you come close, you will part never.”

 

“You think you can crush me? I, who have stolen all of the dark magic on the planet. I, who have the power to do ANYTHING!!!” Red cackled.

But the princesses had a plan. They kept singing, talking, and putting their souls into their words. Red tried to fight back, to summon dark magic, but it was too late. The power of love couldn’t melt a heart frozen with hatred, but it could destroy it. The princesses suddenly knew what they had to do. They each put one hand on Red’s heart and it glowed into a purple glowing ball. It was her sense of love. You see, without meaning to, each princess had taken a bit of Red’s love. She had adored them, and that led to a bit of her soul being transferred into theirs. By singing, the love had come out into the open. Like a vacuum cleaner, that love sucked out every ounce of mean in Red’s body. She was free. But she was in no state to live. She had been through so much that she couldn’t take it anymore. As her body dissolved into mist, her now clean soul went to Heaven to start a new life. Red became an angel, as I am.

That is because I am Red, and this is my story.

 

THE END

Nothing To Do With Cats

Kathy

Hello. My name is Katherine Mohrlang but some people call me Kathy or, better yet, Kathy Kat. Okay, only one person calls me that, my best friend Sammi. Although you can still call me Kathy if you want. Sammi aka Samantha (but everyone calls her Sammi, I’m still trying to find a nickname for her.) and I live in, you guessed it, the South. Sammi and I have so many things in common, we could be twins. I think that we were twins to begin with but my mom thought that it would be nice to give her best friend (Sammi’s mom) a baby.  Sammi and I are both 12 years old and we both have German labradoodles which are sooo cute and fluffy. Mine’s named Julia. When it’s summer, we bathe them in our 19-year-old kiddy pool that neither my brother nor I have used since we were little. My brother’s name is Peter. He is 16 and the absolute best brother ever.

“Want to play some Minecraft?” Sammi asked me when we got to my house after school.

“Sure. Did you finish all of your homework?”

“Yeserry. What about you?”

“Yep.”

It seemed like we were playing for about 30 minutes, but when we finished playing and looked at the clock, it was 7:00 and we usually get home around 4:00.

“Wow, look what time it is,” I thought out loud. “Want to run up the hill and get your pjs?”

“Ok,” Sammi said, and went to get her stuff.

The good thing about our houses are that there is only a hill separating them. My mom and her mom act like we’re sisters and always allow us to have sleepovers with each other without asking. She also has a toothbrush and a rag at my house and I have the same at her house. The only thing we have at our own house that is not at the other’s house is clothing.

For most of the school year, it went on like that with different homework, new games, and other stuff. Until one day when school ended, I asked, “Do you want to come back to my place and play some games?”

“Uhhhh, I’m good,” Sammi’s depressed face said. I looked into her eyes. They were tired with a hint of sad.

“What’s wrong?” I asked.

“Nothing,” she says with a bit of attitude.

“Come on, I can see it in your eyes. You’re sad.”

“I don’t want to talk about it, ok?”

I felt like my whole world just crashed and crumbled. We never kept anything to ourselves, and we always told each other everything. I was stunned, heartbroken. Am I dreaming? Something like this would not have happened in real life. Somebody please pinch me.

Just then it happens. A car turns the corner. It’s going too fast for a peaceful Friday. I’m laying on my back with car wheel marks on my arms and leg. I can’t feel my body. I’m in so much pain. Then I hear someone screaming. Oh wait, it’s me. “Kathy, Kathy,” I hear someone say. I hear crying. I soon realize that it’s Sammi. I hear a siren. An ambulance. I’m loaded on like a package. Ahhh…

Is this what Heaven feels like? Endless white halls. Weightlessness. Then I see some people lined up. I think it’s for and escalator. People were wrong. It’s not a staircase to Heaven, it’s an escalator.

Sammi

My name is Sammi Garmalsdyte. I’m 12 years old and I go to South High Middle School but Kathy Kat probably told you about me and my backstory. The only thing she didn’t tell you is why that one day I didn’t want to come over and play.

See my other best friend Sara, she’s 14, her boyfriend dumped her, her guinea pig died, and now her dad developed cancer. She had the worst week in the history of weeks. She wanted me to come over and have a shoulder to cry on. Her mom doesn’t get her. Her mom never had a pet and she thinks that Sara is too young to date. It’s so frustrating for Sara that these things are happening and she has no one to talk to. She told me not to tell anyone and it’s not like it’s anything that I need to tell Kathy Kat…

There is another thing I didn’t tell her. Ok. This is really personal but my parents are getting a divorce. Ok please please pleeeease don’t make fun of me. I didn’t tell her because I thought that she would start crying and would ask a lot of questions and I don’t want to talk about it. Well, now you know my big secret.

Kathy

After going up that escalator I discovered there is a whole nother world up there. I got a new dog because Julia couldn’t come. I named my new puppy Angelina. One day, when I was walking Angelina, she started barking. I looked to the direction that she was barking to and I saw a cat. I went over to the cat to see if it had a name tag. It said “If this cat is found, please return her to your true best friend Sammi Garmalsdyte.” Then I saw blackness. I opened my eyes and I was in a hospital room. I screamed and my mom came running into the room.

“Ohh honey, are you ok? Do you want me to call a doctor?”

“Just pinch me I want to wake up. I want to go back to the cat and Angelina. I need to find out my life.”

“Honey, this is real life.”

“You just don’t understand. I just know it wasn’t a dream. It’s like you don’t even know me. You are the worst mom ever.”

Later someone approaches my room and says, “Hello? Kathy Kat?”

“Who’s there?”

“It’s me, Kathy Kat.”

“Oh,” I say. “It’s you. People like you are not allowed to call me Kathy Kat any more.”

“But –”

“No buts. Only my bffs are allowed to call me that.”

“But we’re best friends for life.”

“No best friend for life would deny to go home with me. Best friends for life would stay by my side. Best friends for life wouldn’t make me get run over by a car. This is all your fault!” and with that Sammi ran out of my room crying. Serves her right.

Sammi

I wonder why Kathy’s being so mean to me. I didn’t do anything bad.

OR DID YOU.

Who said that.

HI SAMMI, I’M YOUR SELF CONSCIENCE.

Ahhhhhhhh.

OH SAMMI, I’M HERE TO HELP YOU.

Does anyone else hear this? Someone help me.

SAMANTHA GARMALSDYTE, PLEASE LISTEN TO ME. I AM HERE TO HELP YOU.  

I’m here to help you solve your problems.

YOU NEED TO TELL KATHY WHAT HAPPENED.

But she will be too sentimental about it.

DO YOU WANT TO LOSE YOUR BEST FRIEND?

No.

THEN TELL HER.  

Ok, I’ll tell her.

GOOD. NOW GOODBYE. EAT CHOCOLATE, ITS GOOD.

 

“Kathy,” I say as I come in.

“Mommy?” she asks.

“Nope, its Sammi.”

“Ohh. It’s you.”

“Kathy, just listen to me. I want to tell you why I ditched you that day.”

“Well, I would try to get you out but, you know, I can’t move my legs.”

So I ended up telling her everything that happened with my parents and Sara. She started to cry and I hugged her.

“I forgive you,” she said. “I didn’t know what you were going through.” It felt good to have a shoulder to cry on. I should have told her sooner.

Germany Series

Halloween in Germany

In Germany, Halloween is on December 13th, but instead of people trick-or-treating, people wear Teletubby suits and sleep in the subways. They watch Teletubby videos and watch the president give the Teletubbies the Nobel prize. The Teletubbies throw a party to make everyone tubby so they can’t fit in Alex’s vac pack. Halloween is the only time when mustard is not illegal. Teletubbies give everyone mustard so they will become sleepy and do whatever the Teletubbies want. These things happen because December 13th is on…FRIDAY THE 13TH!!!

The Teletubbies order everyone to find a man named Alex Henderson so the Teletubbies can meet Moby *** (the whale (duh)). The Teletubbies know everything because the TVs on their chests show them everything in the whole entire multiverse. They want to see Moby *** because he invented the lightbulb (LOL). Everybody thinks that Thomas Edison invented the lightbulb because Thomas Edison stole the first lightbulb from Moby *** and said that he invented the lightbulb. Thomas Edison’s brother said that Thomas Edison died of diabetes because he was actually killed by Moby ***. The Teletubbies need Moby *** to make a time machine to stop the people that made them from discontinuing them.

All the people of Germany went to Alex’s vac pack and tried to open it. They all got sucked in and the vac pack exploded and Moby *** came out. Moby *** gave them the time machine that he made over the thousands of years that he’s been in that vac pack. The Teletubbies went back in time in 2001. Andrew Davenport was sitting at his desk, thinking of new ideas for the Teletubbies and then he decided to discontinue them. Then, there was a bright flash and the Teletubbies used their tubby powers to kill him. Tubby powers are things that are powers that you can only use if you are tubby enough. The only tubby power that you can use is a body slam where if you jump up you’ll jump really high and when you fall you’ll fall faster than anything else, and when you land you will kill/break the thing you landed on. The teletubbies can only use these powers because they are tubby and they have TVs on their chest. Then, the Teletubbies started melting.

“What’s happening?!!!” asked one.

The Teletubbies discontinued themselves by killing their creator. The Germans dress as Teletubbies on Halloween (FRIDAY THE 13TH!!!) because they admire the Teletubbies because the Teletubbies made them when they were alive. The End…or is it?

Christmas in Germany

Christmas in Germany is the time when all the Germans dress up as Dora the Explorer and Diego. They run around Germany and sleep in gas stations. They drive in the driveway and park in the parkway. They eat carrots and then dress up as a bunny and eat rabbit food and say, “What did the rabbit say? DING DING DING DING DINGDADING, DING,” and then they say “WE MUST STEAL MA-YO-NAYSE, VAC-PACK MUST DIE.” So the German SWAT team doggy paddled on doggies. It took ten years. They opened Alex’s vac pack and disabled the vacuum device.

“WE WON!!!” they screamed, followed by them laughing evily.

“MWAHAHAHAHAHA…MWAHAHAHAHAHA!…MWAHAHAHAHAHAHAHA!!!” They laughed like that for 50 years. And then they moved so slowly that 5 minutes later, Alex realized that he forgot his backpack (no longer a vac pack) at the airport and he took his backpack while the (retired) German SWAT team tried to take the now 110 year old tub of mayonnaise (and failed).

Eraser Day in Germany

Eraser day in Germany is the day when people wear erasers that they bought probably the day after Eraser Day last year. The erasers are very, very dirty because they erased their whole house so everyone lives in erasers on Eraser Day because if they don’t, they get kicked in the face by everyone. Everyone loves Eraser Day because they get erased in their eraser clothes, so after Eraser Day the population of Germany is 10. On Eraser Day, someone named Jimmyjoebillybobtommytim erases everything in the universe, so the big bang happened again because after the universe was erased, someone went back in time and exploded the biggest bomb that man will ever create and as the universe developed again, Jimmyjoebillybobtommytim fell in a hole and died.

Once Jimmyjoebillybobtommytim had a tooth. It was the most sacred tooth in all of Germany. He used it to power a time machine and went back in time and accidently pressed the self destruct button. Then, the 123456789987654321th big bang happened.

Why Germany Is Crazy

When Icosaxx was little, he fell of the Eiffel tower onto a trampoline. His DNA got messed up and his mind frame changed to that of an adult. He passed college and became the smartest man in the world. Although being the smartest man in the world, he got little to no recognition.

In Germany, someone invented a time machine and went back in time and killed Hitler. In the future, he didn’t go back in time to kill Hitler because there was no reason. Then the universe exploded. After the 3rd big bang, a time machine was created and duplicated twenty times by going back in time to ten seconds ago twenty times. Then there were twenty scientists named Icosaxx. They all got into a fight about who was the real Icosaxx and one got into a time machine and destroyed the time machine that made the 3rd big bang. Then the universe ended (at least for 10,000,000,000,000 years). In a parallel universe, the Icosaxx missed a button on the time machine and went back in time to become the smartest person in history named Einstein. In another parallel universe, the Icosaxx traveled back in time to become Leonardo Da Vinci. He also became Michelangelo, Abraham Lincoln, Napoleon, Martin Luther King Jr, Shakespeare, etc.

Once  Icosaxx invented a robot. A reproducing, communicating robot.The robot population grew and grew, and soon enough the robots took over the world. Then the one person left, Icosaxx, duplicated himself once more and touched himself. Then the universe exploded.

After the fourth big bang, Icosaxx changed his name to Icosikaihenainteger. ( ico-sika-ihe-nain-teg-er) Icosikaihenainteger was then finally recognized as the smartest person in the world in the year 9,999. Unfortunately, the world ended 10 seconds after the year 10,000.

 

The Secret Hunter

The burning sun beat down on my back as I intertwined the two pieces of golden straw. I worked intently, biting my chapped lips as the straw began to blend in with the rest of my basket. My masterpiece was halfway done, and I had been working on it for already half of the day, twisting and turning, while the sun burnt my bare back.

I looked up, setting my basket down onto the sand below my feet. In the distance, the sun was already starting to melt down the horizon, bursting with bright oranges, subtle yellows, majestic reds, and even tints of a soft green. It would be half an hour before the sun set, before Mama and Papa called me in for the nighttime meal.  I still had time to finish my basket, which would surely please my Mama. But I had been working on my basket for much of the day. I deserve a chance to have time to myself, I thought.

I stood up, brushing off dirt and sand from my clothes made of antelope-hide, and then began to walk over to the swimming hole. Clumps of sand crunched underneath my bare feet, as the sweet tune of the native sunbird carried out in musical waves in the beautiful sky above me.

It was a lovely day, perfect for exploring, running, and relaxing in the African savannah. Yet I was not permitted to do any of that. On this wonderful day, all I could do was weave a basket, and do all of the other womanly work that girls must do.

“Ebele!”

I whirled around. Imamu, one of the most daring boys of the tribe, was hanging off of the branch of an acacia tree, his long, strong legs dangling. He smiled at me.

“Look at me, Ebele! I am like the white monkey who swings atop the trees!”

His friends laughed around him, as Imamu let go of the tree, and fell towards the ground– only to land perfectly on the sand below him. I ran over to the tree.

“I would like to try!” I exclaimed.

I had just begun to place my foot onto a low branch, when suddenly, Imamu grabbed my arm, and pulled me down. He looked surprised at me, as did all of his friends.

“You are a girl, Ebele. The one who works around the home. Girls do not climb acacia trees.”

I did not reply. Instead, I looked down, and kicked a small, round pebble across the ground.

“Now, come, Ebele. It is almost time for supper.”

“But I was going to go to the swimming hole,” I began, but Imamu cut me off.

“There is no time.”

I sighed, and followed the group of boys back to the huts. I longed to climb the acacia tree. But Imamu was right. I could not. It was my job to weave baskets, to cook food, to clean up the huts. Men were the ones who hunted, explored, and climbed. Who did all of the things that I longed to do, but could not.

At dinner that night, all members of our tribe, which was known as Massai, gathered around a large fire. My Mama and I helped to serve everybody the meat from a fallow deer, before we were able to eat ourselves. When everybody was served, Mama, me, and all of the other women sat down to eat. As I munched on the juicy meat, I kept thinking back to today’s events.

“Mama?” I finally asked.

“Yes, Ebele?”

“Why must it be that men get to do adventurous activities while women must stay around the huts?”

Mama looked surprised at me.

“Ebele, men and women have their own jobs. We all help in our own ways.”

“I understand that, Mama. But why couldn’t the men cook and clean, and the women could hunt and explore?” I asked.

Mama cocked her head at me.

“This is just the way things work, Ebele. Now, finish your food. We would not want it to go to waste.”

Mama turned to talk to the woman next to her, and I turned back to my food. I gazed into the roaring fire, thinking. I needed to show Imamu and the rest of the men of our tribe that women were also capable of doing men’s jobs. But how?

The next morning, I woke up early to begin my chores. As I tidied up the tiny hut where I lived and collected wood for making a fire, I watched the men as they set off with their bows and arrows to hunt. Papa led the troop at the front. And suddenly, I had an idea.

Quickly, I swept the last bit of dust off of the floor of the hut, and ran over to Mama and Papa’s sleeping mat. Mama slept peacefully, but there was an empty space next to her where Papa usually slept.

“Mama,” I whispered.

Her black eyes fluttered open, and gazed up at me.

“I am going to go collect supplies to make a basket. I will come back in the afternoon.”

Mama nodded her head sleepily, and her eyes fluttered shut. I smiled. My idea was working.

Quickly, I slipped on my pair of moccasins, and took one of Papa’s bows and arrows from the shelf he had carved out when building our hut. Then I rushed out of the hut. I was a strong girl, so I ran quite quickly as I rushed to catch up with the men. I stayed back, waiting for them to fully disappear into the woods, and then, quiet as an elephant shrew, I went in after them.

I had never before been in the woods, so the surroundings were new to me. I gazed around myself in awe, at the tall, broad trees that ran along the sides of the path that the men always used. It was dark and cool in the forest, but very noisy, too. The forest was teeming with life. Although I could not see them, I could hear the sounds of animals everywhere – the chattering of baboons, the running of deer, the calls of albatrosses, the slithering of snakes. It was so different from the life I always lived at home, so much more exciting. I smiled, and then quickly crept along the trees, to catch up with the hunters.

We soon reached a clearing in the woods. Sunlight streamed through the trees, and I stayed back as the men stopped in front of me. Papa stood ahead of the group, looking around. Suddenly, one of the men, named Adebowale, let out a cry.

“The aardwolf! Men, I see an aardwolf!”

I gasped. An aardwolf! These very shy, nocturnal creatures were rarely seen by members of my tribe, yet they possessed some of the most juicy, delicious meat of all. I always heard men talking about how they longed to catch one of these animals, and now, here one was, for the first time.

I took a step forward out of the woods, my heart pounding. I watched as Papa’s eyes grew wide, and the hunters started whispering frantically to each other, as Adebowale pointed to a small, brown deer that was grazing in the shade of some trees. The men slowly affixed their arrows to their bows.

“Wait!”  Papa whispered.

The men turned toward him.

“It is much too difficult to catch the aardwolf with a bow and arrow.  It will be much easier to kill it using a dagger, yet we did not bring one. We must find another weapon to use.”

The men lowered their bows and arrows. The aardwolf had not spotted us yet, but it would soon. As the hunters looked around for something to use as a weapon, I did the same. Originally, I had only wanted to follow the men into the forest, and watch how they hunted. But now, I saw a chance to help, and I took it.

My eyes darted between the trees. A rock was too short and stubby to use as a dagger, and a piece of wood was not sharp enough. Suddenly, my eyes came to rest on a long, pointy stick that was resting against a tree. I looked up at the aardwolf. It was still grazing. Then, I glanced at the men. They were still searching. I smiled to myself, and I lifted up the stick. I took a step out from the trees, and held up the stick over my shoulder. I squeezed my eyes shut, and took careful aim at the aardwolf’s side. I knew that that was where I should be aiming, for I had listened many times to Papa’s conversations with his fellow hunters. Slowly, I walked farther out from the trees.

“Ebele!” I heard Papa shout.

I did not pay attention to his call. Instead, I drew back my arm, focused on the aardwolf….and released the stick.

I bit my lip as the stick shot forward. All of the hunters around me held their breaths… and the stick struck the aardwolf. I gasped, in shock at what I had just done. Around me, the men burst into shouts of cheer. I beamed, rushing over to kill the aardwolf, to put it out of its pain. As I tended to the creature, I heard running behind me.

“Ebele! Why are you in the woods? You should be at the hut, helping your Mama,” Papa exclaimed. The men around him nodded.

“I caught your aardwolf, Papa. I was the only one who saw the stick. I was a great help to you. If I had stayed home with Mama, the aardwolf might not have been caught.”

Papa gazed at me for a moment.

“You are right, Ebele. I am proud of you.”

He knelt down, and kissed me on the top of my head. Then, he helped me lift the aardwolf, and place it in a sling made of the strong hide of a fallow deer.

The other men gave me nods of appreciation as we began to walk out of the forest. I walked next to Papa, holding my head up high.

“I never thought that a girl could do such a wonderful thing,” Papa said, as we walked amongst the trees.

“Girls have the same abilities as men,” I said.

Papa nodded.

“I understand that now, Ebele. We will have a fine feast tonight, because of you.”

When we arrived back at the huts, everybody gathered around, while Papa told of what had happened. When he told of how I had killed the aardwolf, everyone gasped, and looked at me. And then, they all burst into applause. I even saw Mama at the front of the group, beaming up at me, her very own daughter.

“Ebele,” Papa said to me, when the clapping died down. “Will you join my hunting group? You are a fine hunter, and you will be a great help to my men.”

My eyes widened.

“Oh, yes, Papa! But only if the other women of Massai may join as well,”

Papa was quiet for a moment, but then he smiled.

“Yes. They may join if they would like.”

I looked out at the cheering women in front of me, and then at the men. Two equal genders, capable of doing the same things.

As I was walking back home, the sun setting behind me, I noticed a group of boys, in a huddle by the fire. They looked at me, their eyebrows narrowed, and I caught a glimpse of anger in their eyes. I walked slowly behind them, so that I could hear what came out of their mouths.

“How could Ebele’s father agree to this silly rule? Girls are not hunters. They are only made to clean the huts and cook us food.”

My eyes widened as Imamu said this.

“Ebele is sick in the head. She is a girl. I do not care if she caught the aardwolf, for that is not what she should have been doing,” Imamu’s brother snapped.

I walked on, for I had no longing to hear the rest of their words. Yes, people would not always agree that men and women were equal, despite all of our efforts to prove this. There would always be people who thought that women were only fit to work around the houses. Yet I knew that the women of Massai would prove themselves to be more than cleaners and cookers. Even if men such as Imamu did not agree.

Before I reached home, I made a final stop, at the acacia tree nearby. I let the wind play with my hair, as I placed my foot on a sturdy branch. I hesitated for just a moment. And then, I began to climb.

The Dog With Black Eyes

Now…

Aiki felt dizzy from her change. She rubbed her eyes and tried to focus. Staring at her were two pairs of black, watery, familiar eyes. She closed her eyes and tears went streaming out of her black eyes, remembering the details of what happened to her over the last two years.

Two Years Ago…

Aiki was nine before she was changed. She was running down the rocky stone path, crying and sobbing. Her mom and dad called her name.

“Aiki!” they shouted over and over.

Aiki never looked back. She never wanted to see them again. Why did they have to be in my life? she thought. This wouldn’t have happened if Mr. Goya had never appeared at their doorway.

Mr. Goya was a gangster. When people borrowed money, he would ask for more back. Aiki’s parents borrowed only $1.00 from him, but he is asking for $3,000. Ridiculous. And that is not all. He wanted to keep Aiki for her smartness. She was perfect in math, getting all A+’s. She could recite most of the Japanese history, knew a lot of science, and could write perfect essays. She was elected in all of her town to compete in the All Japan festival where she would compete against other kids for the prize. And the prize was $150,000. Aiki’s parents tried to hide in the town, but someone told him where Aiki was.

Mr. Goya wanted to pretend that Aiki was his daughter so he could get the second half of the prize: $35,000 for all of the parents. He wanted the prize money and the parent money. “I need Aiki, too. It is either me keeping Aiki or your whole family is going to jail,” Mr. Goya said.

Now, Aiki’s parents never wanted to go to jail. Or, they never even liked her. So they agreed that Aiki could be Mr. Goya’s “daughter.” Aiki overheard all of this from the kitchen. She quietly slipped through the back door and ran for the woods. She trampled through the tall grasses and scurried through the muddle of broken trees. She knew this place well. She always studied here and played here when she was little with her other neighborhood friends. She stopped short and rested on a fallen log beside a large rock for five minutes before she ran again. She ran deeper and deeper into the forest, jumping over tree roots and branches until making a complete stop. There in the woods sat a fairy in a blue, silky dress with faint teal wings. She was crying. Aiki ran up to her.

“Are you alright?” asked Aiki. Suddenly, the fairy zoomed across the sky-blue lake, leaving ripples on the surface. Aiki stumbled back in surprise.

“Who goes near me?” asked the fairy.

“Uh, l-l-I g-g-got l-l-lost…” stammered Aiki.

“What do you want?” asked the fairy.

“N-N-Nothing,” replied Aiki, still shaking from fright.

“I know what you want. You don’t want Mr. Goya to take you. Here is a disguise to last you two years,” and with that said, Aiki felt strange. Her arms scrunched up into the beige front paws of a dog. Her back legs became short, too.

“Woof! Woof!” barked Aiki, trying to say, “Why did you turn me into a dog?”

“Haha!” laughed the fairy and then she was off. Aiki felt unhappy. Just because of Mr. Goya, she thought. She ran to her house and licked her parent’s hands.

“What a cute dog!” her mother exclaimed. “Let’s keep her!”

And so, they did.

Two Years Later…

Aiki’s parents named the dog Aiki as well, which made Aiki laugh in her mind. Things were going so well, she even forgot she was a human. Her parents treated her 100 times better than when she was a human. She learned to not be afraid of Mr. Goya. She even forgot who he was. But she was a little sad. She wished she could tell her parents that she was Aiki. And also, she wished she even got to compete in the contest. She studied all year for it. But she pushed those thoughts away from her mind and imagined what the next day would bring. But one day, the fairy’s voice appeared in her head.

“In two years, you will be human,” the fairy repeated and repeated, her voice growing stronger each time.

Aiki wanted to see the fairy and ask her what she meant. Aiki never wanted to be a human again. She never wanted to have to run away from Mr. Goya again. Aiki ran out of the house and arrived at the fairy’s house. She couldn’t see the fairy. Aiki felt a little weird. Suddenly, her hind legs became human legs. The fore legs became her arms. The dog head became her head. She found herself in her old school uniform, which was clearly too short for her. She was spellbound.

“How could this work without the fairy?” she thought, her heart racing. She tried to run to her house. She wanted to tell her parents what happened. Well, she finished one of the two things. Aiki ran to her house, but she blacked out before she saw her parents. Her parents went outside and saw Aiki. They picked her up and carried her to her bed.

Now…

Aiki remembered all of those thoughts. She opened her eyes and saw her parents. She wiped her tears with her white school uniform sleeve that she was still wearing before she changed. She smiled and straightened herself into a sitting position. She was joyful to see them in her human form and she had many things to ask.

“What happened to Mr. Goya?” asked Aiki.

“He was killed by a fairy,” said the dad, who showed her a newspaper article. The fairy was using its powers to kill Mr. Goya in his fancy car.

Thanks fairy! thought Aiki.

“What about the contest?” asked Aiki.

“It was rescheduled. It is tomorrow by the way,” replied her mom.

“Really?” squealed Aiki. She leaped from the bed and grabbed her books and ran to the forest. She read and read. She was bothered by the pecking sound. She looked up to see what it was. Aiki smiled when she saw the fairy, grinning and holding up the newspaper all about her and Mr. Goya. Aiki returned home and talked more with her parents.

“You know, Aiki, we had an Akita dog. We named it after you. It had the same eyes as you, but she ran away. I wanted you to meet her…” her dad said.

Aiki smiled to herself.

 

The Sky

Blue,

flowing,

towering,

blowing,

sweet wind,

a cool breeze,

my glass of lemonade,

on a hot summer day.

 

Sky oh sky,

the home of clouds,

where rain falls down,

and is collected,

where sun and moon shine,

where stars lay,

glowing,

on your soft blanket.

 

Blue,

black,

pink,

purple,

red,

orange,

oh so many colors,

waiting to be discovered,

Looked upon by many,

something,

everyone,

no matter where,

shares.

 

Sky oh sky,

the home of clouds,

where rain falls down,

and is collected,

where sun and moon shine,

where stars lay,

glowing,

on your soft blanket.

 

Everyone,

everywhere,

looks up to see you,

you comfort us,

and wrap us,

swallow us up,

like a blanket,

one we will forever hold,

forever see,

forever feel,

forever hear,

forever smell,

your sweet,

wet,

smell.

 

 

Sky oh sky,

the home of clouds,

where rain falls down,

and is collected,

where sun and moon shine,

where stars lay,

glowing,

on your soft blanket.

The Same

Our forgotten friendship

Haunts me as I

Go by you

Everyday

 

When I talk to you

You turn away

I try to make an effort

But it’s not the same

 

You would laugh and talk with me

And tell me funny jokes

Like you and I were the only people

In the world

 

You still act the same

To other people

But I feel like dirt

When you treat me like you do

 

I think about you everyday

The way we used to be

And you would say

Hey, let’s get together

Sometime soon

And I would beam with happiness

Inside

 

I ask if you want to come over now

You say, sorry, busy

And I try not to show a reaction

But inside I’m crying

And I can’t feel
Can’t think

 

We used to sit together

Everyday

Talk about our future

And plan

 

We would go to

Greece and Rome

Paris and London

Everywhere

Somewhere new

Everyday

But then we didn’t have it anymore

Well, you didn’t have it anymore

 

And you became closer with

This person

And shut me out

I was afraid and lonely

 

I tell myself each day,

Maybe you’ll be my best friend

Again

I hope for it

 

And I cried about things I shouldn’t have

And said things I didn’t mean

I wish we could be friends again

 

So maybe you’re thinking about me right now

You probably don’t know I’m feeling this way

But if you do I’m sorry

Because you shouldn’t have to suffer

 

Maybe if we became closer

It wouldn’t be that great

But maybe, just maybe

It would be

The same

Gone

Ever had

That feeling, when

You don’t think

Something’s important

Till it’s gone?

 

My parents are gone.

Alive, but gone.

I miss them.

Badly.

 

Every second,

I see their faces

Imprinted in my mind

Like a tattoo.

 

By the time you read this,

They’ll be back

But I want you

To know

How it feels

When they’re gone.

 

When they’re gone,

I think about them

nonstop.

Every part of me misses them.

Sometimes, I catch myself thinking

“When I go home, I’ll tell my mom about this.”

And I play

The

Conversation

In my

Head.

Then I remember the truth.

She’s gone.

 

Sometimes,

I think about the big hug I’m

Gonna

give

My dad,

When I get home

 

Then, I realize

That

Last night,

I gave him the last

hug

I’d give him

In 12 days.

Its 11 now, but

It still hurts,

Like a

Band Aid

Ripped off

A

Wound.

Swiftly and

Cleanly.

 

I knew they

Would leave, but

It didn’t seem real,

TIll the day I

Woke up and realized

They were

GONE.

Fashion

More schools should have students wear uniforms because fashion is bothering kids in school academically. People say they want to go to Yale and Harvard but meanwhile their grades are like B’s or C’s and that is because they are so worried about what to wear in the morning and how much makeup to put on. I think that people should be more worried about how their grades are not how much makeup they are going to wear. This mostly happens to girls not boys and that is why people say that girls don’t get far in school, but I want to prove that wrong because if more schools start wearing uniforms then more girls will have opportunity to be a better student in school.

If you ask most parents, they will say that if you want to get into a good college than do not fall into the fashion trap. In fact, my mom did not fall into the fashion trap and ended up going to Yale. Some girls are so caught up in putting a bow in their hair and they are never really caring about what they really should be caring about. Most people think that a lot of people will like you if you are fashionable and beautiful. You might also think that you will be the most popular girl in school because of beauty and by that you will be the only one in your grade that gets a scholarship to whatever college that you want to go to. But that is not true. Go ask ten different moms if you will get a scholarship to to a college by being the most popular and fashionable girl in school and all of them will say no.

Some girls might not like to dress up and that is fine. Putting on a uniform might not magically get you good grades but putting on a uniform might stop you from worrying about fashion. You might be thinking that you don’t worry about fashion in the school day, but that is also fine.

If you are a girl, believe in yourself. The thought that boys are smarter than girls is not true and I believe that we can change that thought and turn it the other way around. If you are a school that has a no uniform policy, than maybe go ask your principal if you can put in a uniform policy and then she might say yes. You might be uncomfortable with that policy for the first five days but when you are getting straight A’s and being the smartest kid in your grade then you will thank me. You might not like this, but you may love it in a couple of years. You might actually surprise yourself in a very good way. You go ask your principal if you can have a uniform policy if you don’t already have one.

The Unlikely

Chapter One: I’m Lizzie

 

Hello, my name is Lizzie, I’m 11 1/2. I perform at the Rose Theater in England. Today, I perform “Alex and Alex II.” I play Ida.

 

I’m going to tell you a story about a strange thing that happened to me.

 

“Lizzie, do you know where my prop is?” Ron asked. I reached for pink flowers with brown stems and handed it to Ron.

 

I finished my costume and went back to my teeny-tiny apartment. I looked at my savings jar. There were three sides — Spend, Save, Share. I used to be an orphan, but when only three orphans were left (including me) the caretaker bought us each a tiny house, and bought us each a dog. And that’s why I live alone.

 

I felt a lick. It was my dog, Lucy-Rosie.

 

“Hi girl! I’ll feed you right now,” I said. “Here’s your food.” I gave my dog a bit of dog food and washed her. She was very dirty.

 

Now back to my savings jar. I have one nickel, two quarters and three dimes. I realized I left my rainbow earmuffs from Gemma at Ron’s garage, where we were practicing.

 

Chapter Two: Bows and Buses, and a Strange Visitor

 

I tried to find a nickel to see if I could buy a bit of ribbon to tie a bow for my costume. After I found the nickel and made the ribbon, I got on a bus. I found a seat in the back — the only one left. I found a candy wrapper and tied it into a bow. (Did I mention I’m good at making bows?)

 

When I got off the bus for the second time, I put my earmuffs on and I walked inside. I noticed that my window was open and my dog was gone. I thought my dog was hiding, because the closet door was open and I could smell her wet fur.

 

Then a pretty red-head came in and said, “I think I found your dog!” She showed me a golden retriever with a pink bow and a pink leather jacket. It wasn’t my dog.

 

There was a very pretty teal pouch lying by the dog. I saw the girl run away. I think she might have been rich, I thought.

 

“Wait!” I said, but it was too late. She was gone.

 

I saw a very pretty pink card with sparkles on it. I opened it. It said:

 

Dear Poor Girl,

You can keep the puppy and what’s inside the pouch.

From,

Emily W

 

There was a gift card for H&L. I’ve never been to H&L, but my half-sister works there.

 

Just then, my best friend walked in with Lucy-Rosie.

 

Chapter Three: I Tell My Friend…

 

“The weirdest thing happened!” I announced. “A girl named E-”

 

“Well? Tell me what happened!”

 

“I shouldn’t tell you. You’re gonna be afraid. You’re a scaredy-cat.”

 

“No I’m not!” Elizabeth said, shaking her head.

 

“Can you give me a ride to H&L?” I asked.

 

“But…oh, okay.”

 

I got into a wagon with two horses.

 

Chapter Four: H&L

 

“Wow, can I buy anything here?” I looked at my gift card. How could this be? I knew she was rich, but I didn’t know she could get me a…I gasped.

 

It was a $100,000 gift card!

 

The first thing I found was a white tank top, very plain, but I turned it around and there was a package of fabric markers. “I like it,” I whispered, and I plopped it into my cart. Next, I went up two flights to a sign that said “Dog Clothes.”

 

“Oh, my!” I gasped. I saw the most beautiful jacket that comes for you and your dog. And then I saw a pretty red tee-shirt for my dog also. “I’ll buy this stuff!” I whispered loudly as I plopped it into my cart.

My Days as a Spy

I woke up this morning and realized I overslept. I threw on some clothes and ran out the door. I was just in time for the school bus to pick me up. I hopped on the bus, running to take my usual spot, next to my best friend, James. He looked very tired, I noticed. I pretended to be even more tired.

“Why are you so tired?” he asked.

“Oh, um, I- I was up doing homework, obviously.” I lied to make myself seem like a better person. James yawned loudly. He stretched his arms and pressed his nose on the window so it would be foggy. Then he wiped off all the fog. I fake yawned even more loudly and hoped it sounded real. I hoped he was not playing video games until 1:00 in the morning because I was only playing until 11:00 at night! I can’t let him know that. “Why are you so tired?” I asked suddenly.

“I was up doing homework until 12:00,” he replied.

I took a deep breath. “Yes,” I said to myself. I finished my homework at 8:00.

Suddenly, the bus came to a stop. We arrived at school. I walked as slowly as possible out of the bus and to the doors that led to the inside of my school. There was a large fountain with water pouring down outside the school. This girl, I’m not sure what her name was, had her shoulders up and looked tense. When she walked past the fountain, her shoulders went down and her face relaxed. She looked back at the water, and then bumped into a pole. The sound of the water seemed to calm or distract her. I chuckled to myself.

“You don’t see someone that ignorant everyday,” I said to James and patted him on the back.

When I entered school I dragged myself to the poetry room with my crazy and hippie teacher, Ms. Williams. Today we were going to write poems, I remembered.

“Think of things you like and your poem will arrive in your head,” she told my class and hopped around in a whimsical way. So I did what she told me and thought of things I liked. I made a list in my head. 1: Me. 2: Frappuccinos from Starbucks. 3: I can’t think of anything else. I sat there for a long time. I even tried hopping around in a whimsical way with my hands together and one leg in the air, but the poem never arrived.

I told Ms. Williams that I had poet’s block.

“Improbable!” she yelled at me. I turned my head with a dumb look on my face. It can’t be me she’s yelling at, I’m perfect. “I’m talking to you Zach!” she screamed at me. I stared blankly at her face, my mouth hanging down, drooling. Why would she yell at me? Something told me at that moment, something weird was going on with my usual calm, relaxed, peaceful, and hippie poem writing teacher especially because of the fact that out of everyone, she decided to yell at me, the perfect one. I intended to find out exactly what was going on. Just if you were wondering, it’s not like I’m worried about Ms. Williams. People say I’m nosy, but I prefer to say I like to know what’s going on with other people.

 

Spy Day 1

I woke up early this morning because I wanted to look as snazzy as an actual spy. I put on my cool, black sunglasses, my flashy watch, and wore a fedora hat to get myself in character. I looked so cool. I hoped no one would question my outfit. Wait, but why would they? I always look stylish. I told my mom I was leaving early today to get a frappuccino from Starbucks, but actually I was going to use my Starbucks money to take a cab to school since I was too early for the bus. I adore how tricky I am. Sorry, back to the plan. When I got there early, I would locate Ms. Williams and stalk her all day. I would ditch all of my classes which I do all the time because I’m way too good for school.

I walked like I was in a hip-hop performance to the cab, got in and directed the driver to Millsbury school. I’m as cool as a cucumber. Don’t tell anyone I just said that. Geez, “cool as a cucumber,” where did I get that from, my mom?

Anyways, ten minutes later, we were there and my search began. The driver handed me his card and said, “Good luck, kid.” Then he winked at me. It was like he knew me and everything I was going to do.

“See you soon,” I said that because I knew I would call him again.

When I walked inside the school, I saw a janitor on the phone with someone. I don’t think that he saw me because he was talking about how bratty and snobby the kids are at our school. How we don’t pick up our trash, don’t clean up our spills, and so on. I wanted to yell at him and fight back but, no, I remembered that I must remain unnoticed when I am a spy.

“This is going to be harder than I thought,” I said to myself.

I ran around the corner to the stairwell and didn’t look back. I hoped to find Ms. Williams sitting in the teachers’ lounge, but I know things aren’t usually that easy. If she is in there, there will probably be a catch. So when I went upstairs, I remembered that I had to expect the unexpected. I guess I’m just cool like that. I attempted to do a forward roll but I failed and landed on my stomach. I got up, brushed myself off and pretended like nothing happened. I looked back at the stairwell. Anyone could be following me at any moment. When I finally got to the teachers’ lounge, I peeked through the window to find Principal Blinkman giving Ms. Williams a lecture. What?! What did she do wrong?! I made a list in my head. 1:Calling me, her star student, out. 2: Making things sound very easy.

“Never mind,” I said to myself.

I decided that I wasn’t going to skip my classes because I do it so often that I was going to fail 5th grade. Lets just say I’m sort of regretting skipping yoga and math all the time so I could go to Emack and Bolio’s with my friends. As you could probably not imagine because you most likely have NOT ever been a spy before, I couldn’t stop thinking about the lecture all day.

Sorry about that guys. I’m just really cranky and annoyed at myself because I missed my chance to figure this out. Well, I’ll get back to you guys tomorrow. I have to go do my homework. (Did you get that joke? Who actually puts effort into their homework?)

 

Spy Day 2

Today, I’m a pro spy. I have experience and I know how to look cool doing everything. I’m even better than Mary Poppins. After all, she’s only practically perfect. I wore the same hat and watch and an all black outfit. I got compliments from everyone yesterday. Again, I lied to my mom. I called the taxi driver. I got in the cab and the driver already knew where I was going. I knew that I wasn’t going to mess this up today.

I didn’t talk to the taxi driver that day. He didn’t talk to me. It was silent. I think he was on to me. I don’t know if I will call him again. He looked at the back seat and said, “See you in ten years.” What’s that supposed to mean? He’s really freaking me out now. My final decision: no tip today.

I got to school and saw the same janitor, but this time, he was waiting for me.

“Look, it’s a bird,” I yelled.

“What?” he said stupidly and turned his head around. I didn’t think I could get by that easily. I ran up and peered in the teachers lounge again. This time Ms. Williams and Principal Blinkman were walking in and left the door open. All the other teachers rushed in and sat down rapidly. The door remained open.

“We have a very special announcement for you,” said Principal Blinkman.

“We are getting married,” squealed Ms. Williams with delight! My mouth dropped open and made the shape of an “O”. I’m done now. No more spying for me. Three words: Too much information.

 

Spy Day 3

Sorry guys. I was overreacting. Wait – or was I? You guys wouldn’t know how much stress this is, because you’re obviously not spies. And even if you were, you would never find out anything because you would be terrible spies, unlike me. So you know what? I’m gonna go back to bed, and stop spying because you guys are being so sassy. You already know too much! Goodbye. Mission accomplished.

 

Epilogue

This was written in the year 2005, when Zach was in 5th grade. Today, in the year 2015, Zach is an international spy. He has never forgotten you, but is afraid to talk to you again. He wishes that I tell you thank you, from him.

 

Sincerely,

Zach’s guardian angel, the taxi driver

Roman Play

CAST

Norbert the Nerd/Narrator

Wolf Friend

Baby Romulus

Baby Remus

Lupa

 

ACT I

SCENE I

Norbert: The story starts long ago in a place that would soon become Rome. Oh, look! There’s Romulus and Remus, brothers and founders of Rome. Dar dar dar, I’m a big stinky nerd.

Lupa: Oh look, why are there babies floating down the rivers? How odd. I should go investigate.  (Travel down to the river and pick up babies). My, my! Baby brothers! I must raise them!

Wolf Friend: Hi, Lupa! Are those babies you’ve got there?

Lupa: Sure are! Found them floating down the river! Odd, isn’t it?

Wolf Friend: That IS odd. Are you going to keep them?

Lupa: Yup.

Wolf Friend: ‘Kay. So what are you going to name them?

Lupa: Name them?

Wolf Friend: Yeah, name them.  If you keep them, you’ve got to name them!

Baby Romulus: (Gurgle) Romulus.

Baby Remus: (Gurgle) Remus.

Lupa: That’s it! Romulus and Remus!

Wolf Friend: How will you tell Remus and Romulus apart?

Lupa: Hmmm… I know! I will always dress Remus in green, and Romulus in blue!

Wolf Friend: What will you clothe them in?

Lupa: Good ol’ fashioned togas!

Wolf Friend: Great idea! See you at the wolf party tonight! (Leave)

Lupa: (Leave)

Norbert: The young Remus and Romulus grew up to young men very soon. They decided they would build a great city that would be around for generations to come. Dar dar dar I’m a fluff brain nerd!

Four Seasons of New Life

Hidden Music

A soft breeze,

Bright sun,

a shine,

and pollen or a sneeze.

 

When spring comes around,

all the babies are safe and sound.

New and filled,

with life,

wonder,

joy,

and    awe.

 

A silent peace on the chicks

young rabbits,

new grass,

bright flowers,

a silence called awe.

 

Broken only by the sweet song of birds,

learning to sing,

Small peeps,

signalling the beat.

 

A  quiet orchestra,

conducted by the trees,

in harmony with others,

dancers in the silent breeze.

Bright flowers,

born from seeds.

 

A soft hum,

brought by bees,

fighting against the sweet wind,

with yellow rays jumping down.

 

An ocean,

of greens and stems,

a rainbow,

crashing onto the soft wet grass.

Rumbling,

in a soft sweet hum

A raging war of color.

 

Green string,

beaded with shining crystals,

littered with clear diamonds.

An elegant necklace,

from the sky.

 

Soft wet earth,

holding these precious gems,

selling them for sound,

the life of the orchestra,

blowing in the sweet,

warm,

wet,

bright,

air.

 

Vivid colors,

that pop up,

yellow peeps,

pink sways,

blue streaks in the air,

with their beautiful song.

 

Bright buzzing balls,

filled with sunshine,

the stripes of a robber,

stealing the show,

from all else.

 

The gleeful shouts,

the after party,

welcoming the whole cast into their home,

even the warm

yet cool rain,

refreshing us all

as they run around together.

 

Climbing trees,

their thick trunks,

swinging on the papa branches,

while the mothers nurture all the new life,

birds,

leaves,

buds opening to blossoms,

and their own babies.

Twigs.

 

A raging war,

a battle,

between cool winter,

and a

warm summer.

 

Cold Water

 

A hot blaring sun,

pouring down,

covering us,

making us red and brown,

covered in crystal beads,

diamonds brought from spring.

 

You see waves in the air,

mimicking cool winds from past seasons,

the winds we all wished for,

filling us,

we would drink that in instead,

instead of ice cold water.

 

A cool sea

a pool,

the shade of a tree,

smooth cool lotion,

hot air,

bright light,

cold water.

 

Dripping,

warm water,

from my forehead,

cold water,

cooling us down.

 

We wilter in the sun,

saved by cold water,

but we don’t care,

we choose to run.

 

Us and plants alike

saved only by cold water,

wishes for winter,

once you have what you wish for,

you want the other.

 

Us,

summer,

heat,

sun,

saved,

by cold water.

 

New life,

Sun,

Beach balls,

Cold water dips,

All born again in summer.

 

Panting dogs,

hot sand,

cold water,

refreshing ice,

come again the jelly fish,

sweet green grass,

as you slip away to the dark,

the darker fall,

get lead into whiteness,

into a long frozen sleep.

 

The Down

 

When they come tumbling down,

falling fast,

trying to grasp,

clinging on to empty air,

as they flutter,

softly like the wings of a paper butterfly,

twisting and turning,

graceful dancers,

the biggest performance ever.

 

For a while they prepare,

staying still and stiff,

so they can put their whole life,

into this,

this one moment.

 

Then it comes,

new costumes,

green to

brown

red

orange

a level up,

a new show.

 

Then they rest,

after their long tiring performance,

on the ground,

a long sleep,

they rest and disappear,

to prepare their young,

for their own journey.

 

The beautiful play,

the story,

the papers spread it,

saying,

The Down, The Down,

Oh, The beautiful down.

The graceful downfall,

of that generation.

 

Where they spend,

their whole short lives,

preparing,

putting their all into this show,

like young kids.

 

Kids who spend long hours,

on their toes,

in leos,

bowing,

up and down,

bending,

their long graceful legs,

to bow down again,

and end.

 

A Rich Whiteness

 

Small pearls,

mimicking,

the leaves,

another generation,

of beautiful dancers,

a long ballet,

disappearing in the spring,

gone in the summer,

creating a soft,

wool,

cozy,

blanket,

wrapping us all,

creating fluffy marshmallows of fun.

 

Tiny hills,

hills that laugh,

and giggle,

and  hills that are covered in foot prints,

running up,

racing down,

while the hills scream with pleasure.

 

A soft pillow,

where angels sleep,

but never make their beds,

where kids rest their heads,

and their excitement,

creating these good natured beings,

these sweet angels,

blending in the white snow,

in their white gowns,

granting their wish.

 

Tiny pieces of glitter float down,

lighting the whole world,

like the dewy diamonds,

that spring brings,

changing the grass,

out of it dress,

red to white,

ready for a ball,

winter ready,

for its prince charming.

 

A gown,

white tile,

blowing,

flowing,

in the harsh,

demon wind,

blowing things away,

but the angels,

keep the joy,

and the winter becomes,

as warm and bright and refreshing,

as the whole changing year.

 

A Whole Changing Year

 

In a whole,

a year,

12,

4,

Life.

 

Life?

Year?

The same,

it is a whole life,

that happens in one whole year,

a long year,

a short life,

but then all things new come along,

same routine,

same show,

more interesting each time,

winter wants spring,

summer wants winter.

 

A continuous show,

never breaking,

featuring,

two ballets,

beaches,

and an orchestra,

with its own dancers,

dancing sunbeams,

flashy rays,

is the world ever not a dance,

one long big wonderful,

happy dance,

peaceful or violent,

strong or soft,

smooth or rough,

whipping or slipping.

 

A peaceful slide,

a violent wind,

a peaceful scene,

violent cries of “gone!”

A violent shake,

a peaceful fall,

a peaceful swim,

a violent sunbeam.

 

A strong wind,

a soft glide,

a strong scent,

a soft grass,

a strong fall,

a soft land,

a strong glare,

a soft water.

 

A smooth twirl,

a rough texture,

a smooth flake,

a rough fall,

a smooth sway,

a trunk,

a smooth water,

a rough burn.

 

A whipping wind,

slipping into water,

they have it all,

seasons,

anything you want,

all to your heart’s desire,

maybe,

maybe that’s why the show never stops,

a continuous dance,

because we like it,

repeating,

we know,

we can always be sure of one thing,

the circle of life,

the nature of animals,

the dance,

the way,

of the seasons.

Vroom Vroom

The car screeches across the asphalt and I groan under my breath as I press myself to the seat. The ringing of police sirens fills my ears, and if I’m even more unlucky, I might go deaf. I press my sandaled foot to the pedal, screeching at the same time the car does. It makes a strange sound and I notice I’ll have to get that checked out. Add that to my agenda, as if it wasn’t full enough already.

I squint and turn my head to the side, gripping the wheel and leaning forward. I’m on an unlucky streak. When I got my driver’s license, my supposed friends made me drive us to Las Vegas, where we would party for a week or three to celebrate this newfound freedom. Freedom isn’t all it’s cracked up to be though, especially when all of your friends think it’s a good idea to trash a casino with celebrities hanging out in it, for example, Katy Perry or Justin Bieber, who they may or may not have screamed at multiple times and gambled with. And lost your money. And then when they continuously scream at you-

“DRIVE!” Barley shouts into my ear, and I nudge him in the ribs. He’s riding shotgun next to me, but Madeline is leaning forward to yell at me too from the backseat.

But who cares where they’re sitting? It doesn’t matter right now, as we’ve already done something illegal.

I press the pedal harder, looking into the mirror at the cops. Lights flash by me, blue and red and green and yellow, all the colors in the rainbow blended to brightness that brings tears to my eyes. Barley rolls down the windows and I know it will be soon that we’ll be sweating as the hot air slams our faces.

“Air conditioning, Yasmine?” Madeline begs, but I shake my head breathlessly as the city flashes by us. Or maybe we flash by the city, I can’t tell. “Mad, we’re in a car chase in probably one of the craziest cities in the world. I’m beginning to know why we call you Mad.”

She rolls her eyes but keeps looking forwards, twitching nervously. I control my breathing and watch the array of colors smooth by. We crash through the parade, but thankfully don’t run anybody over. We’re in enough trouble. Barley yells a warning and I quickly avert the civilians with weird hair and colorful clothes and terribly applied makeup. And lots of bald guys that have the city lights reflecting on their shiny heads.

“This is bad,” Barley says tersely.

I roll my eyes. “Did that just occur to you? You can’t fool Barley, oh no! He might not look like the brightest crayon in the box-”
“Yasmine, one more insult about my intelligence and I’ll throw you out of this car,” He warns. I wave the remark off with my free, sweaty hand, but then attach it onto the wheel again.

“It’s my car. Good luck outrunning the cops.”

The wind whips my hair that has large, rainbow streaks dyed in it. Mad screams as people dart out of our way, clearing a path for another large car.

“Get ready to swerve it,” I inform my friends, making another unwise, stupid decision of a large array of unwise, stupid decisions.

“Oh, no,” Barley says hoarsely. “No. Yasmine, you’re not going to-”
“Shut up, Barely,” Mad chimes, leaning forward and grabbing his arm and screaming as we dart around the car, and I wince as we keep going. My instructor told me I was an excellent driver. I am, when I’m not in the midst of fear.

I wipe my rainbowed hair out of my eyes.

“We done?” Mad asks, trembling.

“Car chases never finish, oh dear Madeline.”

Life’s a Mess

August.12.1986

Lab

 

Heart beating and racing.

Pulse strong,

fast.

Words floating in my head randomly.

People treating my life as just a retrospective,

the way I live.

Facing the threatening fear of

DEATH.

 

August.13.1986

Truck

 

Blood pouring from my chest,

down to my numb,

pale legs.

Crawling hands feel like they’re climbing up

my spine.

Tickles make me nauseous.

Flash back:

lhkjk! mggfusti! io!

(Don’t take my precious daughter! What are you doing! NO!)

kjdgkj!jhfsdh!

(Sorry! I can’t help it!)

kjkjsgggskg,jsgjkg! jfshsdffdk!

(What’s going on! Stop this!)

 

*Bleep* is all I hear,

now chattering.

Heavy woman carrying me now.

Tears roll down my cheeks heavily.

I seriously can’t take control of this.

 

Anonymous

August.13.1986

To Mr.Pres

 

The alien is caught! Can’t you believe it!

 

SoORrY! CANt wRiTE!

Gernemrwer BLOdb

 

{Same Day}

 

I was

craving this.

Delicious humans

this planet

brings!

*Lips

licking.*

 

August.14.1986

?

 

Escaped.

 

August.15.1986

Girl’s House

 

Saw girl.

Followed her.

Girl has dark hood.

Demonic prayers?

Beady,

crimson eyes.

Hands like claws.

Wings like thy raven.

Left dark,

mysterious trail.

 

Ever so

 

Peculiar.

 

The girl gave me

a dark stare.

“Curse her!” The girl mumbled into the darkness.

She snapped her cloak sharply.

Observed a book

laying on desk.

Force brought it

to her.

Calamine air filled

the room.

So very

 

suspenseful.

 

I followed her anyway.

 

She walked into a portal leading into a dark cave with a shrine. She took off her hood and a beam rose to the sky, making a hole in the cave and in clouds straight in the sky.

“Ugh, I can’t control this!” The demon girl exclaimed. She lit out her match with the tip of one of her fingers; if I did that, I would melt!*

She fainted.

 

*I’m made out of slime even though I have some normal human body functions.

 

The candle flew out in the peculiar shade of aeneous which transformed into a neon orange and then into pure cinerious,  making the delicate candle burn into ash. I blew the now lukewarm candle and formed a flame with my slime.

 

August.16.1986

Slime Shack

 

Inside the cave, I made myself a shack,

a slime

shack.

Where I held my

insecure feelings.

Specifically

about this new

earth culture.

Suddenly,

a boy

in a dark cloak

walked up to me,

handed me a

burnt

rose.

 

You couldn’t tell if he was blushing under his dark cloak. You also couldn’t if I were “blushing” because I’m just formed slime. Even though I did smile awkwardly.

 

August.17.1986

Back at girl’s house

 

The girl is back at

her cave.

She put

her amulet

on.

It

unleashed

another solar

beam.

Suddenly,

she broke the amulet

in half;

in two halves.

And the boy fell

out of the middle of those two halves.

But this time,

he completely

ignored

me.

*TEAR*

 

August.18.1986

Still at girl’s house

 

Girl found me,

locked me into

a

cage.

I think I locked myself

into a metaphoric

cage.

I’m not out of this cage,

but I’m walking,

civilized.

Little bits of slime,

falling off,

in this heat.

This

heat

wave

of

metaphoric

infinites.

 

August.19.1986

Locked in my own heart

 

Out of this

metaphoric

cage.

Now I’m locked into my own

 

HEART.

 

IN IT’S DARKEST DESIRES, DEEPEST NEEDS, PLAIN ME, MY LIFE

 

HOODED UP IN A DOME.

THE DOME.

zzzzzzzz

 

THE DATE DOESN’T MATTER AT ALL

IN INFINITES WE LIVE

IN THE DOME

 

DARKNESS FROLICING IN THIS DOME

MY DOME

IT’S NOT LIKE ME

AT ALL

I SEE THE BOY

IN A CAGE IN MY HEART

I LOCK HIM OUT

HE PLANTS

A KISS

ON ME

I KNOW

IT’S

NOT

ACTUALLY HIM,

IT’S

IN

MY

SLIMEHEART

RIGHT NOW

I DON’T CARE.

 

HE HANDS ME THE SAME

AMULET THAT

THE

DEMON

GIRL

HAD

IT’S

THE

EXACT

REPLICA.

 

INSIDE,

THERE’S A

SWORD

WITH

A

SUPERSHARP

BLADE.

I LIFT IT OUT AND

KILL

MY

HEART.

 

A

GIRL

POPS

OUT

ME.

I’m not me.

 

blonde,

frizzy

hair

beady

blue

eyes

rosey

shirt

I’ve

been

brainwashed

for

all

these

years.

 

END.

 

 

 

 

The Portal of Fiction

Crystal woke up, finding herself in her bedroom. It was quite dreary in her room, so she turned on the lamp. She grabbed a book from her desk. It was a Heroes of Olympus book by Rick Riordan called The Blood of Olympus. She was very fond of this book. It had so many twists and surprises which kept her at the edge of her seat. Crystal sat down near her lamp, turned it on to a dim light and started reading in the shadows. She wished that the characters in her book were real. But they’re in a fictional world, Crystal thought. And I’m here, in reality. She continued to read. She was at the part where three characters— Leo, Frank, and Hazel —were meeting Apollo and Artemis to seek help. Crystal glanced at the clock hanging on the wall. It was 6:30 a.m., so Crystal decided to get ready to go to school. She put her homework in her backpack, and then put her book in there, too. Half an hour passed. Crystal exited her house, and walked towards the bus stop. She looked up at the gloomy sky.

“I wish that the characters in my book were real,” Crystal said, still staring at the ominous sky as if her wish would come true. She thought that her wish would never come true, but she was wrong. After one month, Crystal’s wish came to life.

 

It was May. Crystal had finished her book a while ago. Her wish was still in mind, but she was convinced that it wouldn’t happen. She looked outside, and it seemed pretty warm out, the usual spring weather. She texted her friend: Hey do you want to go running 2day? Her friend didn’t reply, so Crystal continued to stare out the window. It was suddenly cloudy and windy, as if the sun decided that Crystal’s neighborhood wasn’t worthy enough to shine on. She raced down the stairs to get a snack.

“Real sunny, don’t you think? You should go running with one of your friends,” Crystal’s dad said. Crystal raised an eyebrow.

“Dad, it’s cloudy and really windy right now. Not the right weather for running,” Crystal replied. Her dad looked outside and shook his head.

“It’s still sunny out, Crystal. Take a look,” Crystal’s dad said. She took a look. It was still windy, and she pointed that out. Her dad took a picture with his phone and showed the picture to Crystal. The sun shined brightly.

“What? But it’s….” Crystal decided not to argue anymore. I guess that if it really is nice outside I could go for a walk, Crystal thought. She put on her running shoes and went out onto her porch. It was still really windy, but this time it was stronger. The wind caused her to fly out of her porch and onto hard cement, far away from her beloved home. The wind was even stronger there, because this was where the wind was coming from. Crystal looked up and saw a giant shape over six feet tall. The exterior was amazing. With obsidian outlines, the shape was made out of diamonds. At the edges were…Percy Jackson books? Crystal discovered that the shape she was staring at…was a portal. Purple and blue sparks were everywhere, and inside the rectangle she could see hills and trees.

“I’m going in,” Crystal said. With her foot shaking, she stepped inside the portal.

 

Crystal did not want to leave. The first thought that entered her mind was, “Woah.” Across the meadow she could see a familiar pathway. Crystal approached an entrance, reading the words carved on the arch. “CAMP HALF-BLOOD,” she read. Her eyes widened and were as big as quarters. No way. Even if this was real, I can only pass if I’m a demigod, Crystal thought. She decided to step in anyway. However, Crystal passed. She stood there, shocked. A boy quickly approached to snap her back into reality.

“A new demigod? Did a satyr take you or…” The boy stopped talking as a centaur approached.

“Percy, remember that the barrier is broken. She could be a mortal. Remember that.”

Crystal gasped as the centaur said those words.

You’re Percy Jackson?! Wait… it all makes sense…” Crystal thought for a moment. In the books, Percy was described as a tall boy with sea green eyes and black ruffled hair. This boy had met all of the criteria.  And the centaur was probably Chiron! Before Crystal could say anything, Percy replied.

“Um, yeah I am Percy Jackson. Listen, I really don’t care if you’re a mortal, but we need all the help we can get.” Crystal had a puzzled look on her face.

“Huh?” she asked. Chiron sighed.

“Luke Castellan has returned, with a so called ‘friend,’” he explained. Crystal’s eyes widened, and if anyone looked closely they might have seen the fear in her brown eyes.

What?! B-but Luke’s good now, right? I mean, he stabbed himself in his Achilles’ heel in order to stop Kronos.”

In The Last Olympian, Luke Castellan was the hero of the great prophecy all along, and had turned to the good side at the last second. Chiron went silent, not even bothering to answer Crystal’s question.

“Percy, just… Tell Annabeth that we have a newcomer and uh, show her around. Crystal needs some armor, a weapon and a lot of training,” Chiron muttered. Percy nodded and motion for Crystal to follow him.

“Are you diagnosed with ADHD?” Percy asked, and Crystal knew exactly why he had asked it― it helped demigods fight monsters. She nodded.

“Yeah. Really stinks, but now I guess it can help me fight Luke and his sidekick,” Crystal replied, smiling to keep up the spirit. Percy smiled back, but Crystal could immediately tell that the smile was forced.

 

Camp Half Blood was packed. Even though Crystal had read all about the storage room for battle gear, she was still amazed. Daggers and swords were stacked against the walls, and hanging armor caught Crystal’s eye. She studied a celestial bronze sword, and she could tell that it was one of her favorites. Earlier, Percy had gotten Annabeth, a close companion, to show Crystal around camp, mainly because he needed to talk to Annabeth eyed Crystal examining the gleaming blade.

“I have a feeling that that sword is the one for you, Crystal. I know it,” Annabeth said with a lopsided smile. While touching the sharp sword, Crystal nodded.

“Yeah… I’ll pick this one.” Crystal replied, and Annabeth nodded back.

“Take it. Anyway, Crystal, what’s home like to you? I want to get a good backstory, like, I want to get to know you,” Annabeth said. Crystal sighed, remembering how earlier she explained her world to Annabeth.

“I kind of miss home, even though I’ve only been here for a few hours. Like, what’s happening back in my world? Hey, that reminds me… Will I ever get back home?” she asked. Now it was Annabeth’s turn to sigh.

“To be honest, I really don’t know, but I have done some calculations… ” Annabeth took out a folded piece of paper from her pocket.

“According to this paper, you got here through a portal, bringing you to this world. The difference between our world is that you’re reality and we’re from a book. Crystal, how exactly is that true? I’m not fictional, I’m a true being, I’m living a life,” Annabeth said with a puzzled look on her face.

“Well it’s hard to explain, you know? You’re part of this book series called― ” A rumbling sound interrupted Crystal’s reply. Demigods shouted their battle cries while raising their weapons. Some frantically rushed into the storage room, the same exact place where Crystal and Annabeth were, and grabbed armor.

“What’s going on?!” Annabeth screamed over the noise. Clarisse turned to her.

“Luke’s arrived, nit-wit! Get in gear!” Clarisse yelled back. Crystal remembered how Clarisse and Annabeth didn’t get along as well.

“What do I do?” she asked Annabeth, hoping she could hear her over the roaring noise. She seemed to hear her perfectly.

“Grab your sword. It’s time for your first battle!”

 

Battle was horror. Everyone was screaming or yelling, while some of the demigod leaders were trying to get control. Crystal could see Luke’s figure. He was tall and no longer wore a Camp Half-Blood shirt. By his side was a much smaller figure. Squinting, Crystal could see the figure’s features. He also had blonde hair, and dug his knife through a teddy bear. Crystal’s face fell. The ‘sidekick’ was Octavian, the main villain of the Heroes of Olympus series. She found Percy yelling at his peers, so she grabbed his arm when she had the chance.

“That guy with Luke is Octavian! He wants to take over our camp and he’s not Greek!” Crystal hissed. Percy’s face was blank.

“Then what is he? A mortal?” He asked.

“No, Roman! It’s really hard to―” Before she could finish, Octavian’s voice boomed through the air.

“Listen up, you stupid Greeks! I have a whole camp with me, and I finally convinced them that Greeks are dumb and do nothing for us Romans!” Demigods murmured after he had said those very words. Octavian continued to speak.

“Many Romans had objected, and said that I was wrong. What are their names? Oh, Jason, Reyna, Hazel, and Frank. I plan on killing them, after I take over this camp! Romans— ATTACK!” Swords flew through the air.

Someone grabbed Crystal. She turned around to see who it was, and it was Percy.

“We need to talk about this alone,” he said seriously. They turned to escape the battle, but two Romans approached. Percy took out his pen and opened it, revealing his sword, Riptide.

“Get out,” he growled at the Romans. They took out their swords and slashed at Percy. He dodged it right away and pulled Crystal’s arm, but the Romans wouldn’t let her pass. They slashed at her too and she almost was cut badly. She grabbed her sword and swung it at them as hard as she could.

“Curse you, Greek. All of you belong in Tartarus! You’re weak anyways. Ryan and I can take you both down.” The Roman had spoke in a gruff voice, and had also cursed under his breath. Ryan, nodded. They were both distracted and was focusing on Crystal. Right behind them, Percy swung Riptide and the Romans cursed.

“Dang it Greek!” Ryan yelled and slashed back, giving Percy a huge cut. The other Roman hit Crystal, and she screamed as she fell to the ground. Before she passed out, she only had one thought left in her mind. I want to go home.

 

“Crystal, it’s okay.” She heard these words spoken by a familiar voice— Percy’s voice. Crystal got up, and saw that she was in the infirmary.

“Oh, hey. You weren’t hit as badly as… others,” Percy spoke weakly. She turned around and saw what Percy meant. Campers were groaning in pain, and the Apollo kids were doing the best they could to help.

“The sword hit you, but it’s a small cut. I think I knocked down those Romans, though.” Percy didn’t say anything else. Just then, Will Solace, a well known Apollo kid, had walked up to Percy.

“I’ve had it!” Will yelled. “Those stupid people, the Romans, are freaking killing us. We’re losing a whole bunch of people!” Annabeth walked up.

“He’s right. Many demigods were killed. Anyway, I was eavesdropping on Octavian and Luke. They’re planning a bigger attack by the end of the month,” Annabeth informed. Another Apollo kid raced up to Will and whispered something to his ear. Will frowned, and said nothing for a minute or two.

“Annabeth, this is really hard to say but—”

“What?!” Annabeth interrupted with a concerned face. He sighed, and finally replied back.

“Your half-brother died in battle. It was Malcolm… Sorry Annabeth..” Will drifted off. Annabeth was silent. Crystal could see a tear rolling down her cheek. Malcolm was the second in command in the Athena cabin. He had done so much for Annabeth. He’d lead the Athena cabin to battle while Annabeth was with Percy. Percy embraced Annabeth, and she cried. Even Crystal felt like crying, because she knew what it was like to lose family. When she was two years old, her mom was in a car accident. Everyday, Crystal would ask her dad: “When will Mommy come home?” Her dad would leave the room, and she would hear faint crying sounds. After a week, her dad would stop leaving the room, and say: “She went on a trip, Crystal. Just a few more days and she’ll be home, I promise.” Of course, this promise was always broken. When Crystal grew older, she understood that her mom took a drive to heaven, and was going to stay there forever.

Annabeth raged.

“No matter what, Greeks will completely destroy these Romans!” Annabeth yelled loudly. Percy flinched, as she was right next to him. Crystal decided to say something supportive, but instead she said something else.

“I need to go home!” Crystal blurted out. No one really cared too much about what she said, except for Percy and Annabeth.

“You sure? I mean, you have potential you know…” Annabeth was about to say many reasons why Crystal was needed, but Percy cut her off.

“Sure. I mean, after all, this isn’t your home. Annabeth can calculate when the portal could be opened, and you can go home,” he said. Of course, Annabeth disapproved, and she pulled him aside for a little talk. Even though they were at the back of the infirmary, Crystal was still able to hear them.

“She can’t leave, Seaweed Brain,” Annabeth insisted. “We need her. She’s important.”

“It’s her choice, Wise Girl,” Percy shot back. “Besides, no mortal can be used to having battles every five minutes.” He grinned when she finally gave in. They returned to Crystal.

“As soon as I know where the portal will appear, you can travel home,” Annabeth said. Crystal felt like smiling, but couldn’t. She really wanted to know how the fight would turn out. After all, she was the only one who knew information about the Romans or Octavian. Then again, she wasn’t that brave and wasn’t a risk taker. She could never stand a chance against Luke. Annabeth sat down, writing equations about the portal arrival and whatnot.

“You can head to my cabin if you want. You might as well explore the camp, actually. I’ll come with you,” Percy said to Crystal.They exited the infirmary and looked at the cabins of the demigods. The cabins were all in the shape of a U. Crystal explored each cabin, but her smile immediately dropped when she saw the Athena cabin. She heard faint crying sounds, and she knew why the demigods were crying— because of the death of Malcolm.

Putting his hand on her shoulder, Percy said, “We shouldn’t bother them.”

Crystal agreed. They left, and bumped into Tyson, Percy’s half brother who was also a cyclops.

“Hi brother!” Tyson said cheerfully.

“Who is your friend?” Percy chuckled.

“This is Crystal,” he said. Tyson nodded, and spoke about working in Poseidon’s underwater palace. It took a few minutes, and then Annabeth suddenly raced up to Percy.

“Seaweed Brain, I figured it out. In about a few days, the portal will arrive, and Crystal can get home,” she said. Crystal came up to her,with her face all red.

“A few freaking days?! I need to go home now!” she yelled. Annabeth backed away from her.

“Sorry, but it’s just the portal’s arrival and speed. I can’t change that for your needs.” She stalked off into the Athena cabin, and everyone could hear her trying to calm down her cabin mates.

“Where do I sleep?” Crystal groaned.

“You can sleep in the Hermes cabin,” Percy suggested.

“Fine,” Crystal mumbled. “When do I get home?”

“Don’t ask me.” He shrugged. Percy left, as it was getting late. Crystal decided to get some rest. She introduced herself to the eight people in the Hermes cabin. There would usually be a lot more, but too many of the demigods were killed. Crystal felt uncomfortable in her bed, but managed to get some sleep. It was a very dreamless sleep.

 

Days passed by. Crystal spent most of her time training. She was taught how to use her sword properly by Percy. Sometimes Annabeth would come by, asking about the Romans. She also tried bringing up what Crystal had said about her being in a book, but Crystal often changed the subject. She didn’t know what to say, and the thought process behind it drove her crazy. How exactly were fictional characters real? Crystal had decided not to think about it. After four days, Annabeth calculated that the portal would come in the afternoon, near the entrance to Camp Half-Blood. Once she had told Crystal, she had never seen such happiness from someone else. Crystal waited out until the portal had come. She checked her watch: 11:52 p.m. She glanced further through the field, and gasped. The Romans had come back.

“Oh my Gods!” Crystal screamed. “They’re coming right now!” Other yelled while pushing through into the storage area, and other groaned, clearly annoyed of the incoming event. Soon enough there was a whole battle going on.

“What the freaking heck Greeks, we beat you last time! Stop trying to fight us.” Octavion groaned, while Luke looked disgusted to have a partner like him. A portal zapped at the entrance. Crystal immediately ran towards it. She had stopped when she heard a terrifying yell. It was Percy. Luke smiled for a few seconds, but had frowned.

“What the hell!” Luke yelled at the Roman demigod. “I wanted him alive!” Crystal stood there, with her mouth wide open.

“Percy!” Annabeth screamed, pushing through. No one paid attention, they just kept fighting each other. Crystal came racing too, worried about her favorite character in the series.

“Fight, Annabeth. This is really dumb to die at a time like this, huh?” Percy mumbled.

“Seaweed Brain! You drive me crazy with those words! Here have some―” Annabeth started to get ambrosia, but Crystal stopped her.

“It’s too late,” she whimpered. “Percy’s dead.”

 

Annabeth cried. She was sobbing nonstop. She looked up to see Luke Castellan standing above her. He still had his scar, running down to his chin.

“Sorry,” he said. “I wanted him stay alive but hey, battle is battle.” Luke clenched his teeth together. Crystal tried hard not to punch his face. Annabeth turned to her.

“What are you doing?! The portal!” She reminded her. Alarmed, Crystal headed straight for the obsidian shape she had once saw. One foot was in.

“This is not what Apollo wanted!” Will Solace yelled at the top of his lungs. Octavian was a son of Apollo too.

“Kill the demigod scum,” Octavian said cruelly. At once, Romans had stabbed at Will, leaving him to die.

This world is vicious, Crystal thought. Too much violence. She shut her eyes. I need to help this place overcome this terrible battle. I choose not to go home. One foot was out. Taking her sword, she yelled, stabbing as many enemies as she could.

“Stop!” Luke Castellan said to her. Taking her arm, he shoved her into the empty Hermes cabin.

“We need to beat that stupid Octavian. He is unbearable!” Luke said sharply.

“Don’t you want to take over the Greeks and Romans? Or destroy Mount Olympus?” Crystal gritted her teeth. Luke rolled his eyes in return.

“Listen, I know that was all a big mistake. But Octavian is crazy. His orders are terrible, and he’s getting on my nerves. Some darn kid barking at me? Ugh,” he said, followed by a curse. Crystal wanted to believe him, but she still wasn’t so sure. Luke seemed to know what she was thinking.

“You want some proof that I’m against Octavian? Jason, Reyna, Hazel, and Frank! Come out,” Luke said. The four people shuffled out from a hidden wall.

“Luke!” Jason said with a frown. “There’s a demigod right there, we could get caught!” Crystal rolled her eyes. Jason was her least favorite character out of the series.

“Don’t worry, she’s with us, idiot,” Luke said while shaking his head. He turned to her.

“These are the Romans that think that us Greeks aren’t so bad,” he explained.

“Octavian is a terrible praetor. He isn’t even a praetor, he just thinks he is,” Reyna muttered to herself.

“So, you guys must have vital information on the Greeks,” Crystal guessed. Everyone nodded except for Luke.

“They’ll be able to help. Anyways, you guys get back to your wall. I need to talk to Crystal.” Luke shooed them away like animals. The Romans rolled their eyes and went back into their secret base. Pulling Crystal’s arm, Luke took her outside of the cabin. He looked down at his feet right away, after he saw the terrible damage the Romans had done. The Apollo kids were working harder than ever, getting the demigods to the infirmary. Annabeth continued to cry, right until Luke approached. Tears were still in her eyes, but she managed not to be so loud.

“Your soldiers killed…” she was not able to finish that sentence.

“I wanted him alive! Don’t you think that I care, Annabeth? I’ve cared for a long time, but Octavian had gotten the best of me. I have heard that Thalia had died, Annabeth. I’m broken.” Luke hung his head in shame. Crystal was mortified. Thalia was a very good friend of Annabeth and Luke, and now she was dead.

“I’m so sorry,” Crystal said shakily. How many times has she said that? The fictional world was terrible to its people living in it. Suddenly a horrible thought struck her. What if I die?

 

Training was important. Crystal trained every day, slowly becoming better and better. Percy was no longer there to help her. The incoming battle was so important that no demigod had any time to mourn, or to even do a proper burial. Annabeth did perform a burial ceremony for Percy’s body, but it was just by herself. Crystal stayed around, but she decided to train some more. Days passed, turned into weeks. Months came around. The Romans decided to attack a bit further into the year. The Romans that had declared a truce stayed in hiding, but trained too. Luke decided to teach Crystal about strategies in battle. This had made her improve a lot. Later that week, the Romans attacked.

 

Octavian turned up, as expected.

“We have come, once and for all! Attack, Romans!” Octavian screamed. Luke turned to Crystal.

“We need to get to Octavian. Don’t mind the others,” he said quietly. Crystal nodded, and soon they were hiding. Octavian was near, so Crystal was very scared.

“Get the onager!” Octavian called. “It’ll blow up these Greeks for sure!” Luke frowned, but Crystal whispered her plan to him. In The Blood of Olympus, Octavian had died due to his toga tied to the onager. When it fired, he flew through the sky and died. First, Luke had to find a way to get the Romans on their side, not Octavian’s.

“Crystal, sneak up and tie Octavian’s toga to the onager. Tyson will impersonate Octavian with his voice, so the Romans will be lured away. I’ll distract him,” Luke whispered. He went off without even bothering to listen to Crystal’s thoughts. That didn’t matter anyway, as she thought it was flawless. It got passed on quickly to Tyson. Luke made some awkward noises, and lured Octavian away. Tyson knew that it was the time to act.

“Hey! Get over on those rocks over there!” Tyson barked. “We’ll get a much better view of the death of our enemies!” The Romans seemed to hear, and they went over to the rocks. Demigods ambushed them, and they were cornered. They cursed, but no one could hear or care over the noise. Luke then motioned for Crystal to sneak in.

“Octavian, get further towards the onager,” he said. “I’ll teach you where to aim perfectly.” Octavian nodded, and Crystal cheered in her mind. He fell for the bait! He didn’t seem to notice Crystal. She quickly tied his toga on the onager.

“Why do you want to take over the two sides?!” Luke said loudly. Octavian rolled his eyes.

“Whatever. I want to prove that I am superior. I hate these two sides, and the Romans are really dumb sometimes!” Octavian quickly covered her mouth, as everyone had turned silent to his words.

“I uh, didn’t…” Romans yelled and screamed at Octavian and surged forward to kill him.

“Crystal, now!” Luke screamed. She powered the onager, and Octavian was soon flying through the sky with a girlish scream.

“Good work!” He said, and then hugged her. She wanted to say so many things, but suddenly the portal zapped in.

“What? No! I can’t go home now.. I just..” Crystal tried to say something, but couldn’t. The portal had already sucked her in.

 

Crystal stood at her porch. Coming inside her house, she could here her dad crying.

“Missing children.. My child was missing..” Her dad murmured.

“Dad?” He turned to Crystal. He didn’t say anything. He just ran to hug her.

Thieves of the Sea (Excerpt)

Chapter 3

 

*Gawain*

 

“Meet me where the sky touches the sea

Wait for me where the world begins”

 

I felt lost in another world. Time flew by, and I didn’t know how to count the minutes that had passed. A startling atmosphere hung in the air. I couldn’t remember what had happened. Am I dead? Is this how heaven feels? Like an endless, blank room? Everything was plain white. It damaged my eyes to see nothing but one color, but I couldn’t give up. This was just an obstacle I had to pass through. I made up my mind to search this unusual place.

I had been walking for what seemed like hours. My eyes were sore, so were my feet. If I was lost, I wouldn’t know. I had wished more than once that Jak were here. He was my savior, for he always knew what to do.

Finding the situation hopeless, I put myself into Jak’s shoes.

“What would Jak do?” I asked myself. Pondering on this question seemed doltish.

But indubitably, it was quite obvious. Emptying my pocket letting coins and other junk tumble out and onto the white floor.

I chose a few items and placed them as my markers and continued to explore placing a marker every few yards.

Jak had taught me all about what to do if you find yourself lost. He inspired me to keep items in my pocket for safety.

Dreaming in the process of marking, I failed to notice that my markings had shifted in the place of a circle.

“What the–”

But I didn’t have time to finish my statement before the inside of the hole became a purple storm. A feeling inside me told me I had to jump. Whether the hunger had gone to my head, or I was just normally insane, I jumped.

I thought my leg would sink through the cloud, but I was shocked when I landed softly like a feather on a pillow.

“This isn’t so bad,” I said as I watched the clouds slowly sink down, and the top of the hole close. “Perhaps this is the new land I had been searching for!”

But of course I was nowhere close.

It had seemed all delightful at first, but my heart had skipped a beat causing me to choke when the clouds dropped me in a dark tunnel. My eye couldn’t focus, and my hand was invisible in front of my face.

My back hit the ground hard, and in an instance, I was moving in an incredibly fast pace down the slope. Light soon found its way in the tunnel lighting it up. Stalagmites hung from above sparkling with due.

I felt my stomach rumbling and had been wishing for the ride to be over after many quick dodges from death.

I pointed my heel down and tried slowing down. Dust flew in the chilly air and went down my lungs. I gagged and fell flat on my back causing it to make an awful sound as I bellowed in pain.

Giving up, no longer feeling like Jak, I allowed myself to slide the rest of the way down, shutting my eyes.

I wasn’t scared, if that’s what you are thinking. I was just tired…..

 

I opened my eyes slowly, as if expecting something — or someone — to jump at me. Instead I saw a room. The room itself felt like it was part of a house. A family room perhaps.The proof I saw to help prove my point was a fireplace that stood in the center, and a brown, furnished table built of wood that had seemed recently polished.

The table had nothing but a large china plate with a dozen pieces of bread covered in the finest honey that glimmered in the light. The table wobbled at my touch as I leaned on top of it to get a better whiff.

My mouth began to water. The orphanage had been given a jar of honey as a reward for taking such good care of one of the parents who adopted a girl named Melitta. But that was before the death of Mr. Floros.

I remember how fine the honey was. It was sweet in my mouth and softened my throat that was painful.

This honey, however, was golden and seemed to be pressuring me to reach out and eat it.

I couldn’t help but reach out and grab the one farthest away from me, and stuff it in my mouth. The honey was all that mattered in that minute of delectable goodness.

I hadn’t noticed that my eyes were closed. It came as a real shock to me when I opened them to see the whole room empty, just as I tried to reach for a second helping of bread and honey, but that was missing as well.

I nearly tripped over the dead rat that sat beneath where the table used to sit.

I got down onto one knee to study it. What had caused his death? I hadn’t seen him before. Was what I seen before an illusion? Am I stuck here for eternity like the rat?

Near the mouth of the rat’s, was his front teeth inserted in a piece of bread. Honey slathered all over his poor, lifeless body.

Questions threw themselves at me as I tried to solve what was currently happening.

Looking around once more. The table missing, as well as the china plate, and the fireplace. It was missing. It couldn’t have sprouted legs and ran away! Or could it? No. It couldn’t. I kicked myself for having been so lousy.

I was stuck in an empty room with nothing. I was done for. I would die of starvation if I wasn’t dead already. I was ready to sulk when I heard a faint tinkling music behind me. I turned around alert for anything. In the distance I saw a round mirror.

It had a gold frame, and pearls every two inches. The glass was polished and sparkling. Golden vines seemed to be entwined in the frame. Words can not describe its remarkable beauty that I saw that day.

As I inched forward, the mirror’s light seemed to have been radiating the sun’s glare. I managed to step forward. I was deeply startled when I did not see my reflection in the glass. Was it a fluke? I had no idea on how this mirror appeared so suddenly. Could it hear my desperation? Was it magic? I wanted to find out as soon as possible, which meant now.

I marched towards it, and brought forth my hand and let my fingers and the mirror collide together. The mirror was cold, and smooth. My fingers slid onto the frame tracing every mark. It was then, when I was caught off guard, did the mirror cast a deadly beam of light. So bright it was, I nearly went blind.

“Who dares to awake me?” said a bold voice coming from within. I licked my lips which had dried and tried to responded although it was hard to think of the right words to say when you’re still trying to figure out how an ordinary mirror can talk.

I could feel it deep down that I would regret offending this powerful object.

“I’m sorry. I didn’t mean to disturb you,” I apologized, taking a step back.

“Ahh. Gawain Michel. Pleasure to meet you.”

I was starstruck! How did it know my name? The name of a poor orphan boy.

“Pardon me, but how do you know my name?” I asked, checking behind it to assure myself no one else was here besides me.

“You will find no one there, boy,” she said which made me blush. I hope it didn’t look rude.

“To answer your question, I am The Mirror Queen of them all! I know everything that has happened, is happening, or will happen. I know everyone by name! Every place that has been discovered or not. And I am immortal, to live forever in the souls of every hero. I never shall die or decay,” it fumed.

“Are you going to kill me?” I addressed her…or him.

The mirror laughed with it’s lights blinking on and off.

“I would love to!-” it replied.

I stiffened.

“-But sadly I can not. You see, you have heard my tinkling noise. Only thee who hear it’s beautiful sound can see this very mirror, which is I. Mirror Queen. Therefore I can not kill you because you are the special one. My soul lives within you. And I can foretell that you have an important mission.”

I tried not to show it, but I was relieved that The Mirror Queen wouldn’t kill me. Although, I still had a question, but I didn’t know how to ask. I didn’t know if I even wanted to know-

“Ask me little one. I can hear your thoughts,” she interrupted.

” I-I was wondering, your majesty-” I bowed, “What would have happened if I didn’t hear your tinkling wonder?”

I didn’t know how, because this is all so hard to explain, but I could sense that she was blushing because I had felt a happiness inside me that did not belong to me..

“Well, if you hadn’t heard my tinkling-” she began. “That would have meant you had eaten the wrong dessert. You would have chosen the poisoned bread and honey. If you ask me, you have powerful instincts and I would advise listening to them. Tell me, boy, how you chose it, I’m pondering on how you survived. For nine out of the twelve are deadly. Two out of the twelve would open your eyes to allow you to see what is real, and depending on which of the two you chose, you may have even possessed power.”

“What did it do to me. Can you tell me which one I drank?” I begged ignoring her question.

“Unfortunately, darling, I can not allow you to divulge in what could have or has done to you, for the fates will not allow me to reveal such private facts. I am terribly sorry.”

I was confused and didn’t want to have to solve or be involved with the fates, but I did not let that show.

“Thank You Mirror Queen, but where am I? I thought I was dead at first, but now I-I don’t know!”

“You are in a dream, dearest boy. You are to awaken soon if you follow my command.”

“Of course!” I promised.

The mirror began to swirl in the colors of yellow, and purple.

“You must step through this portal. It will take most of the power invested in me, but I will manage. You will find yourself surrounded by my swirls of colors. Once you are in you must say one wish. Once you speak of it, it will appear on the walls and become real for a temporary amount of time.”

“The spirits will ask of you to step in, they will make promises they can not keep, but you must not! It is all an illusion,” she warned. “Instead you must resist the temptation. Instead you must destroy your dream. Here.”

A golden sword of similar color appeared out of thin air in front of me. My fingers found their way to the handle. I gaped at its wonder.

“Now go! There is a girl who is awaiting your awakening. You are both in trouble, and need to leave the premises! Best of luck, Special One.”

I didn’t want to risk leaving and dying, but my legs refused to listen and began to walk forward and into the portal.

“Will I ever see you again?” I asked.

She let out a soft laugh of sweet happiness. “All in a times come, boy. In the future, if you are to survive that is, we will see one another again most certainly. Although you may not be pleased to see me.”

I had disappeared as The Mirror Queen had recited her last word. I was blinded by the colors I had seen earlier. The swirls seemed to be coming closer. I didn’t have to even think about my wish because every star I ever saw, or every opportunity I could find to pray, or every birthday wish from my candle, I would always wish for the exact thing.

“My biggest wish is to have a family of my very own. Someone to love and hold in sad moments. That is my biggest wish!” I shouted through the swirls of colors that were inches away from touching my skin.

“We hear your wish, foolish child,” many voices hissed in usion. “And we can give it to you with no pay at all. All you must do is step throu-”

“Be quiet!” I shouted in a rude voice. “I know all you want to do is to feed on my blood, and feast on my bones. I will not step through the swirls!”

“Ahh, but you will change your mind. See here! This is what you can have.”

The swirling stopped. The room turned into an image of me having a picnic with a lovely woman and a handsome man. They were smiling into each others eyes. the woman — who I guessed was my mother — had brown eyes like me, and brown hair falling down her shoulders as she bit into her apple. She was wearing a tired grey dress with an apron tied around her that matched the the bonnet she had on.

The man had a brown mustache that matched his hair. He had blue eyes that were really quite sharp. He wore wrinkled clothing. I guessed that he was my father. Then there was I. I looked much handsomer, and less tired. I was chasing a little girl who I guess is my little sister. She looked like a miniature me, except for the girl part, and blonde hair.

I wanted to step through the picture. I wanted to be part of the scene. I didn’t care what The Mirror Queen had to say. I was ready to walk through the portal when the spirit awoke me.

“Yes. Yes. that’s it,” it hissed happily.

The scene was a trance! I didn’t actually want to cross! But it made no sense. Could it…be magic? No. It must be a dream. And to think of how sad I would be if that wish were to come true and be gone when I awake.

Pain would wash me. I took one last look at the scene. Without thinking I slashed off all the heads in the picture. Their eyes rolled to the back of their head as blood rained down.

The swirling stopped abruptly. I encouraged a smile to be plastered upon my bloody face. I awaited for something unusual to happen. Not that this or anything else that happened was unusual, but something to top it off.

My smile faded into an angry scowl. I was so caught up in my thoughts that if it hadn’t been for the slight creak in the floor, I would have died.

A devilish man with horns protruding from his head, and fangs that peeked out of his mouth, with a body of a horse came running with a silver sword towards me. The man was taking aim, and threw his sword. I was able to dodge out of the way saving my life, but my arm was severely scraped. Blood poured out of the wound, and onto the floor.

I held my arm in agony. “Why?” I asked through clenched teeth.

“My brothers and I haven’t eaten in ages, my dear. You are the first to come in over two centuries. I bet we can hide the fact that you’re a bit too skinny towards the belly, but I think we can manage,” he hissed.

Still on the ground holding my wound with a bloody hand, I managed to swipe my sword at him, missing by feets.

“Well done! You were able to stab the floor! I am impressed,” he mocked inching closer.

I was now swordless. I tried to think of a solution. I made a move of trying to grab my sword, but he blocked me off. If I were to reach down for it, I would loose my head with a flick of a wrist.

The sword was too far to reach it with my foot. If only there was another way! The man only continued to inch forward.

“Where are your brothers?” I asked, trying to spare myself some time.

“Where they should be. Lurking in the shadows awaiting for the right time to attack. Because like The Mirror Queen, we too are immortal.”

I searched for his brothers. I couldn’t locate any shadows. Where could the demons be?

“I find it cute, foolish one, that you can not seek them when they are right above your nose!” the man sneered.

Above my nose? My body stiffened as I looked above me. There on the ceiling lay more than a hundred demons. Each one unique in bad ways. One of them had three eyes and two holes for a nose, and no mouth.They were each a horrible sight, one worse after another.

“And you know what surprises me, foolish one?” the Devil asked. “Is that you have no idea of the power you contain. With one bite from you, I could possess all the power you maintain. Wouldn’t that be incredible.”

What could he be talking about? But I push my thoughts aside, for he was no more than five feet away from where I stood, as his brothers had almost reached my head.

“And who may you be, wanting to own my power. I bet you have loads. What could mine possibly be that you don’t have?” I countered. I was pleased on my come back.

“You joke! How dare you. I am your worst nightmare. The one that hides under your bed. They have many names for me, but I call myself the devil. The Queen must have told you. Well, screw her. You know that I have no power. That by simply devouring you I have enough to destroy, your majesty, while she is in her weak state. That’s what you get for helping others!” he whined.

I wanted to smile that he had no powers. It felt special at the moment, but I yet had no plan! He was close. Too close. If I were to outstretched my arm I could touch him, but I would have to be mad to do such thing.

“But aren’t I in a dream? You can’t kill me if I’m asleep,” I challenged him in a sassy one.

The Devil chuckled. It sounded deep and scary, and it echoed through the room.

“But that’s exactly how I receive your power. In your dreams. If I were to kill you now,” he said grabbing my chin tenderly. “Then you will — poof — disappear. Your soul with fly out of you, and on it’s way to heaven when I, the devil, will interfere — of course — and breathe you in where you will go to my kingdom. The most miserable, and feared place that the world will ever face. Lovely story, isn’t it?”

The Devil was already by my side. The sword lay on the ground. The Devil was on the opposite side from me. If I could be quick, then I could succeed.

Feeling better with a plan in mind, I took action. I jumped to the opposite side of the Devil and grabbed the sword. I was feeling a moment of bliss, when I fell to the floor. There was a heavy object weighing me down. It was the same color as the devil, but much more horrible. It had no eyes or nose, just one, wretched mouth. It’s body weighed me down as much as it could. I was being crushed.

Out of instinct and pure luck, I was able to dodge a few punches and stabs by the demon’s dagger. Out of pure frustration he meant to stab me, but I was able to lift my back high enough to pass it, but when I saw the opportunity dangling of the demons back, I took it. I opened my mouth wide enough and bit him. Of course to him, who had skin made out of iron, felt nothing but a pinch. Although startled at such a silly attempt, tried to shake me off.

Seeing my chance, I rolled out of the way, although my feet were still stuck underneath his weight. Without thinking much on what to do, I sent him a powerful kick on the back, causing him to drop his dagger.

I picked up the dagger that was bloodred. I stared at this object flashing before me with great beauty. A hand blindly attempted to search for it on the ground. I stabbed the it, pushing as hard as I dared to go. The hand was too large to be pierced all the way through, but enough to break his scaly skin. But I didn’t stop there, I pulled the dagger out. Green blood came pouring out. It flooded the ground, inches away from where I sat.

I let my dagger lead me, and I came so close to the demon’s heart. I hesitated on pushing it forward. I didn’t think I was capable of such criminal intention! Yet I had to do it.

I stabbed the demon’s body with his own dagger. I felt such burning guilt fill me inside. The demon shriveled up, becoming weightless.

The words: I had just killed someone kept floating back to mind. I had just murdered.

I had had a tough past, and killing would not help. I had sworn that the action of death shall never be committed by my name.

Yet I had done the very thing, I had betrayed myself. Even if he wasn’t human.

But there was no time to feel guilty. There was another demon to deal with, whether I wanted to or not.

While fighting, I had been oblivious to the shadow without a person. Realizing at the last minute, I threw my dagger at the shadow, square in the chest. The shadow disappeared into smoke going in all directions. I had been hoping I had killed it, but that would have been too easy.

I heard a voice in the distance cackling wickedly. I was turning my head in all four corners in the room, trying to make out the hidden demon.

“Ahh. I admire how you think your so powerful, full of…” He appeared in front of me, holding my chin between his warty fingers. “…Ability.” He said ever so casually. I held my dagger firmer in my hands, causing my knuckles to turn white. I swung my dagger towards his stomach. But of course, not being fast enough, he had disappeared into smoke once more.

I felt a tap on my shoulder, I turned around, quite swifter than I thought was possible. There he stood, behind him was hundreds of other demons. All bigger than he. All bigger than I. I knew I had no chance of beating them all. The thought of surrendering came to mind. But I pushed it aside. The only solution that seemed reasonable, was to stall.

I didn’t know what to say. I had never been good at talking. Instead I just let my heart speak, and kicked myself for every stutter.

“Well, that’s unfair. 200 against one. You must be very frightened by my skill,” I commented. “In Fact, Whenever I fought someone. It was usually just that person and I. Never had I thought, I would be fighting against demons.”

They all looked around, flustered by my comment.

“But never did I imagine that I would be fighting meek demons,” I finished off.

The demons gave me a look of murder plastered on their face, well, the ones who actually had a face. I felt proud of myself, but I didn’t expect for them to make the teams fair.

“Meek demons, did you say?” I heard a whisper in my ear. I felt hands rubbing my shoulders. Under other circumstances it would have been considered relaxing.

“Then, shall we get rid of these, ‘meek demons?’” the Devil hissed in a mocking voice.

I turned around and tried to stab the demon. No such luck. He had vanished once again into black smoke.

“You’re pathetic! Show yourself!” I shouted with rage. I held my dagger in my strong grip, resenting any sign of ridding it.

A few feet away from the demons, stood he.

“Shall we charge, sire?” a demon in the crowd hissed.

The Devil gave me a long look. He looked me up and down. His eyes seemed to be scanning me, seeing how strong I could possibly be. What my chance of winning is.

When his eyes reached mine, I saw fire behind his pupil. It was a wild one, swishing to all places. Nervous I took a step back.

The Devil seemed satisfied of my nervousness and smiled, I wanted to punch myself for showing weakness.

“No. Leave me be,” he replied, inching forward in a snake-slithering way.

“But sire-”

“I SAID LEAVE ME BE!” he roared with erupted rage.

The demon seemed speechless. I almost felt pity for him. Almost.

The Devil then made an effort to push the demon, but instead of the demon falling to ground, it burst into flames. The flames as though of the one behind the the demons eyes. The demon screamed with pain. He was slowly sizzling away until he was nothing but black dust.

“Does anyone else want to object as well?” the Devil threatened. There was long, silent, pause. No one shouted out. No one even dared to breathe.

“Good,” he replied. Clearly content with himself. With a snap of his fingers, the army of demons swiveled away in a swirl of wind. They were gone. It was just the Devil and I. I was scared. The Devil just sent his army of demons away, he obviously knew I was too weak to defeat someone such as him. Someone who has been alive for eons. I stood no chance, and I knew it.

“Is that fair now, foolish one?” he asked in a wretched tone.

“Why did you kill that demon?” I couldn’t help asking.

“Why shouldn’t I have. He talked to me disrespectfully. That’s unacceptable!” Each word became louder as he spoke them. He talked with such disgust. Every syllable was pronounced with such anger, and sadness.

“Because…because it’s unfair,” I came up with. I, myself, didn’t believe my words.

“Enough with this ‘fairness,'” he responded with annoyance in his voice.

“But to answer your question, monsters can’t be killed. His soul remains where I rule. The kingdom where my power is endless. There he will rest until he reforms. Of course, he can not do so unless I consent, which may take a few centuries to figure out,” he added.

Every step forward he took towards me, I took a step back. When I felt my back bump against the wall, I felt helpless. I was done for. Something caught my eye. It was shiny, and was glowing, but I had no time to investigate, instead I saw the Devil grin a sly smile before he pounced.

I dropped to the ground, and rolled to my side. I grabbed my the object, that I had guessed was my sword, and stabbed the Devil in the heart. I was certain he would die.

“Every human’s heart is is placed in their chest, but a demon is not. Instead they are located in the head, and the brain on the foot, where it is safe. Therefore you have not defeated me, but weakened me, for that sword is poisonous to the flesh of a monster. But weakness is not death!” The Devil hissed with effort, for i could tell he was in great pain.

Thinking that I had won, when the Devil collapsed, I had let my guard down. The Devil gathered all his speed and twisted my sword. He had used so much force that my hand was sprained. I dropped the sword with confused pain. He grabbed my sword, ready to plunge it in my heart. As his arm came forth towards my chest, I dived to the floor and stabbed my dagger into his foot. Red blood came oozing out of his foot. I looked up to see that the Devil looked half dead. I then took the dagger out and plunged it into the other foot as well. That was when the Devil fell. Just to make sure I stabbed him into the head as well. I couldn’t help letting a tear fall down.

“You don’t deserve to live,” the Devil hissed. Those were his last words. And I had to agree with him.

I curled up into a tight ball, crying with heavy breaths.

How am I alive? was the question I continued to ask.

The Case of the Missing Ruby

Miles Sharplake, better known as Detective Sharp, was busy playing on his Wii U when suddenly his partner, Patrick, hollered in his ear.

“Sharp, come here, take a look at this.”

Sharp, who was tired and wanted to relax playing Mario Kart, walked over. “What is it?”

Patrick told him to look at the other TV. The newscaster said there was a ruby worth 11 million dollars that had been stolen from the museum. Police had studied the scene of the crime, but no evidence was found. Sharp, who was really smart, knew what to do.

“Sharp, I think you can solve this,” said Patrick.

Sharp said, “Well then, let’s do this. But this is my last case. Oh crap, why another case?”

Sharp and Patrick went to the museum to check out the crime scene. When they looked at the dome featuring the ruby, they saw that it was gone. The tour guide was there, along with the police chief. The police chief was questioning the tour guide about what happened the night before since the tour guide has to help the janitor with cleaning up.

“Last night, I was asked to stay for a few more hours. When I went near the ruby, I swear I saw the ruby float. Then, something hit me, and I was knocked unconscious,”  said the tour guide.

“Say, is there anyone who knows about this ruby?” asked Sharp. The tourist told him that Bob could help.

“Bob isn’t here right now, but I know his address.”

“Well then, next stop: Bob’s house,” said Sharp.

Inside Bob’s house, there was a person with chips and soda on his couch. He was watching TV. The newscaster said that new, advanced technology had been invented, specifically gravity guns. The museum would put gravity guns in the displays. That segment immediately shocked Sharp. Gravity guns, museum, what did this all have to do with the ruby?

Sharp and Patrick immediately went to the police chopper. “Here comes the big experiment,” said the chief. There was a scientist who was using a gravity gun  for testing purposes. The gravitational force shot at the rock, pushing it.

“Perfect. Tomorrow, meet me at the museum,” said Sharp.

Sharp and Patrick went to the museum that night in night guard disguises and snuck into the building.

“Have you got the magnifying glass?”

“Yep, I do.”

“Quick, get to the ventilation system.”

Inside, Sharp and Patrick went and crawled under the laser security all the way into the famous display of minerals. “The thief is ready to go.” Suddenly, a voice was heard. “Ready aim― what the…” The whole room went pitch black.

“The power’s out,” said Sharp. “Quick, get me the flashlight, Patrick.” Suddenly, the power came back on. Police were surrounding the criminal. “Hey, we don’t know who we’re dealing with,” said Patrick.

“But I do,” said Sharp.

“Sharp, you know who this is?”

“Well well well, if it isn’t my old friend Thomas,” said Sharp. “Let me explain. A long time ago, when I started going to college for my degree, I met Thomas. We did experiments together, we helped each other in math class, we were basically best friends. Until one day, tragedy struck when Thomas went broke.

He had no money and no job. But, this was after our graduation. He moved over to Texas, and I never saw him again. Or did I? When I was playing on online mode of Mario Kart, some guy hacked on my account. He referred to himself as an old friend. When I heard that the ruby was stolen, I remembered the tragedy. And to this day I know what happened. Thomas knew that the ruby was worth 11 million bucks. He tried to use the gravity guns in the safe room to steal the ruby.”

“So you knew who the thief was, but you kept it a secret,” said Patrick.

“Yep, I did.”

“Sharp, you’ve done a wonderful job,” said the police chief.

“Yes, yes. Thank you, but please call me Miles. I will no longer solve crimes, I need to focus more on relaxing.”

Saving Grace

Chapter One

 

Grace Cook and her sisters, Sadie and Ellie Cook had been best friends since the day that Grace had been born. They didn’t really fight. Even though Ellie was ten years older than Grace and Sadie was five years older, the trio acted in unison. But all of that was about to change on October 1st, 2010.

 

Grace left for school at 6:30 to catch the bus. She ran across the street with her long red pigtails whipping in the wind. She got on the bus and her friend Alyssa called out from the backseat: “Gracie, Happy Birthday!!! You’re finally ten!!”

“Thanks! And you know that you only turned ten, 21 days, 3 hours and 2 minutes ago, Alyssa.” Grace slid into the seat next to Alyssa, next to the window.

“That’s still 21 days, 3 hours, and 2 minutes ago!” Alyssa bragged.

Grace sat the rest of the bus ride listening to Alyssa talk excitedly about the six-person sleepover Grace managed to talk her mom into doing. Grace sat very quietly and stiller than a trash can when no one is in the room. She looked out the window and wished that Ellie and Sadie were here. Her favorite part of her birthday was going to be the secret feast that she was going to have with Ellie and Sadie at midnight. They had done this when Sadie turned ten. Grace couldn’t remember what they had done when Ellie had turned ten because she had just been born two months ago. The sleepover wasn’t it. It hadn’t been hard to get. She had just asked for The Feast. Ellie, Sadie, and Grace would be breaking a couple of rules.  a) They weren’t supposed to be up at 12:00 b) No food was allowed in Grace’s room and c) There was no c.

“Grace!!! We’re at school!” Alyssa shouted, shaking Grace’s arm.

They got off the bus and Alyssa skipped off to find their friends, Ela and Chloë Ledger, her strawberry blond hair bouncing back off her shoulders each time she took a skip. Grace ran after her, flying like the wind. She had been told that she was as graceful as wind when she ran. She flew to the school steps and sat down. She was feeling really lonely and wished that she could go to middle school with Sadie. Even if she still had few friends, at least she would be with her loving and kind older sister.

“I hope that the birthday girl doesn’t plan on sitting on the steps for the whole day,” a voice said over Grace. Grace looked up into the smiling face of Chloë Ledger, “Mind if I sit with you?” Grace shook her head. Chloë sat down and looked straight into Grace’s purplish-blue eyes and Grace stared right back into Chloë’s sea-blue eyes.

“What’s wrong?” Chloë asked.

“Oh, nothing.” Grace sighed and dropped her gaze from Chloë. “Where’s Ela?”

Ela was Grace’s best friend from first grade. That was when she had also became good friends with Matilda. Even though Chloë was Ela’s twin, she had only became good friends with her in 3rd grade, same with Alyssa.

“Ela’s inside. It’s almost 8:15. We should get inside as well.”

Chloë stood up. Grace got up too and as they walked in their school doors, Chloë took Grace’s hand.

“lt will be okay,” Chloë whispered into her ear.

They ran to the door and were sitting down at their wooden desks when the morning bell rang and their teacher, Ms. Kate walked in with a clip clack of her gold high heel shoes. She walked to the front of the room, sat down at her polished white desk, and turned to face the class.

“Good morning, ladies,” Ms. Kate said, and started the longgggest school day of school in Grace’s life.

Seven hours later (only it felt like seven hundred hours to Grace) Grace walked out of Elm Elementary and searched for their car that was going to pick Grace up.

“Over here, Gracie!!”

Grace whirled around and saw her sister Ellie standing by their Green Subaru.

“Ellie!!” Grace shouted, and ran into Ellie’s arms. Ellie laughed and ran a hand over Grace’s red pigtails. Grace looked up into Ellie’s warm brown eyes, and the loneliness melted away inside of her.

“How are you, Ellie?” Grace asked.

“How am I? How is the Birthday girl?” Ellie asked.

“She’s fine.”

“Hop, in the car, kiddo.” Grace got in the car and buckled herself into the seat. Ellie put the key in the keyhole, pressed the pedal, and the sisters set of home.

 

Chapter Two

 

At 7:30 in Grace’s apartment, Grace and her Family were eating 3-Cheese Mac-and-Cheese (Grace’s all-time favorite meal) and were having a nice conversation when Grace’s Mom, Sara, asked the question that would change Grace’s life forever.

“Did you get a letter yet, Ellie?” Sara asked Ellie. Grace looked at Ellie for an answer.

“What letter? Tell me, Ellie!” Grace demanded, looking Ellie straight in the eye. Ellie wouldn’t meet Grace’s eyes.

“Um, well, Gracie, I have to go to college and, well, I applied to Harvard, and umm, err, I got accepted there,” Ellie mumbled, looking down at the marble table. Grace stared at her sister in horror.

“You got accepted at Harvard!” Sara and Grace’s Father, Leo exclaimed, “That’s great news, Ellie!”

“No it ISN’T!!” Grace screamed, “How will I SURVIVE without my older sister???!!”

“I think you’ll manage,” Leo said. Leo didn’t understand Grace’s friendship with her oldest sister.

“Well, I just got an email from Boston School of Arts,” Sara said, “And they want to take you in. It would mean that you would move to Boston with Ellie.”

“Oh, Yes!” Grace cried out, “Thank you-”

Grace stopped and saw that Sara had been looking at Sadie. The email had been about Sadie not Grace. Sadie looked at her sister. She really wanted to take the spot but she knew that Grace would never be able to handle it. She would fall apart. She felt like she should be there for Grace. But on the other hand, not everything could revolve around her little sister. And being an artist was Sadie’s dream.

“I don’t know,” Sadie said.

“Come on, Sadie,” Ellie pleaded, “We would have so much fun! Boston wouldn’t be the same without you.”

“Maybe…” Sadie shrugged.

“My WHOLE world is about to FALL APART!!! And on my BIRTHDAY!” Grace screamed, got up from the table, stormed down the hallway and into her bedroom.

She got onto her warm bed and began to cry. Grace lay down on her back and looked up at her ceiling which was black had all of the constellations painted on it in gold. The rest of walls were royal blue. Grace got out her pillowcase (where she hid her diary), pulled out her diary, turned to a page, pulled out her favorite flow pen (red), and begin to write.

Dear diary,

My world may be about to end.

The next thing Grace knew, she was being shaken awake.

“Gracie Bear, get up!” Leo started to tickle Grace and her eyes flew open.

“Dad!” Grace groaned.

“Kiddo, you got to run! The bus comes in 20 minutes!” Leo said, pushing Grace around. Grace jumped up, very awake, and ran down to breakfast. 20 minutes later, Grace was once again running to meet the bus. She got on and thanked the bus driver for waiting for her (again).

“No problem, kid,” the bus driver said.

“Grace! Over here!” Alyssa shouted from the middle of the bus. Grace made her way towards her.

“Slept in?” Alyssa ask, “For the first time in forever?”

Grace grinned and said, “Yep. For the first time in forever.” Grace sat down next to Alyssa and said “Ready for school?”

“Ready to Fly.” Alyssa and Grace shared a secret smile.

They were doing their secret pumper-upper. Grace looked away from Alyssa, out the window. She then remembered what she had been thinking the morning before. The secret Feast! They had never done it last night. Grace felt hurt. They had done something for Sadie but not for her? Of course, Grace had noticed how close Ellie and Sadie were. They shared a room. They most likely had billions of whispered talks after they turned out the light and Grace could never know what they were about. They had forgotten. That was it. It was the most that they had ever hurt Grace. She felt like crying.  Soon they might be living in Boston together for 4 years. Grace knew that Sadie wanted to take the spot at Boston School of Art. What if their friendship fell apart? Grace thought it might. Sadie and Ellie had been distant for a while. Suddenly, the bus jerked to to a stop in front of Grace’s school. Grace got off and found herself head to head with Chloë Ledger.

“Chloë,” Grace said, looking into Chloë’s trusting eyes, “I’m about to be an only child. My world is about to end.”

 

Chapter Three

 

One month later Grace and her family were at Elm Tree Airport, so they could tell Ellie and Sadie (who had decided to take the spot) goodbye before they flew to Boston for 4 years. They had rented a little house near Harvard and was also close to the Boston School of Arts. Grace was heartbroken but she tried to put on a brave face as she hugged Ellie and Sadie goodbye. She was going to miss them more than they could imagine.

“Plane 3444 Boarding now. Please report to gate 5 if you are on plane 3444,” said a woman’s voice over the speakers. She sounded bored like she couldn’t believe that all she had to do was say the number of the planes and their gates all day.

“That’s our plane, Sadie,” Ellie said. “It’s showtime.” Sadie and Ellie gave everyone one more big last hug and took off running towards gate 5. Grace kept her eyes on them until they were out of sight.

“Gracie Bear,” Leo said, “We need to go back home.” Leo gently stirred Grace back to the car and drove home. When Grace got home her mom said:

“Grace, would you like me to make you some cookies?” Grace knew that cookies wouldn’t help the space left by Ellie and Sadie but cookies are never something that you want to miss on.

“Sure,” Grace said sadly. She ate the cookies wishing that she had been eating them with Ellie and Sadie at the Feast they had promised but had never happened

The next day at school, Grace felt even more lost than before. The gap left by her sisters was bigger than before. She spotted her friend Ela standing by the biggest elm tree in the schoolyard. She walked up to her, planning on telling her how she was feeling and hoping that Ela could help her.

“Hey Ela,” Grace said.

“Grace!” Ela cried and threw her arms around her.

Grace pushed Ela’s arms away and said, “I have a problem.”

“What is it?” Ela asked. “You know you can always tell me everything.”

“Well, it’s about my sisters,” Grace muttered looking down.

“Oh no! Not about them again! You know you’re supposed to fight with them sometimes in your life, Grace. You’re like the perfect family on a reality show!” Ela practically shouted.

Grace looked hurt and walked away. She thought that she could tell Ela anything, but that was obviously not the case. She knew that her friends thought that she and her family were perfect because they didn’t fight. Obviously, they didn’t know that Ellie and Sadie had completely ditched her.

“Hey girl,” Matilda said, walking up to Grace. Grace jumped in surprise. She hadn’t seen Matilda lurking right nearby.

“I hate to tell you this, but it’s true. You are like the perfect family on a reality show, Grace,” Matilda said sadly.

Grace shouted, “Oh no, not you too! I am not the perfect family! You don’t know the half of it! Ellie and Sadie just completely ditched me! They left for Boston for the next four years to have tons of fun without me!” Matilda looked doubtful. “It’s true!” Grace screamed and stomped away.

She stomped off to the school steps where she had sat just one month and a day ago. She couldn’t believe that one month ago she was worried about missing Sadie and Ellie for an entire day. Now she was worried about missing them for four entire years!

Just then, the bell rang. Grace ignored it, though. She put her head in her hands and started to cry into them. Her sisters had only been gone for a full day, and already she was missing them like they’d been gone for five years.

The school door opened and Ms. Kate came clickity-clacking out. “Grace,” she said. “Where have you been?”

Grace fiddled with her hands and nervously looked up at her teacher. “Okay, I’m coming inside, I’m coming inside.”

Grace had many days like that. She got through a month of school with her grades keeping up and keeping herself together. But one day, Grace completely fell apart. Her grades started to go down. First Bs, than Cs, then Ds. She couldn’t take her report cards home. She threw them out in the trash. She cried herself to sleep every night. And worst of all, her parents barely paid any attention to her. They didn’t do anything to make it better or worse. One day before school, Grace completely fell apart. She sat down with her back against a tree. She put her head in her hands. She felt someone slide down next to her. She looked beside her. It was Chloë.

“Grace,” she said sternly. “I know nothing’s okay right now.”

“Well, I miss my sisters,” Grace sighed.

“I know,” Chloë said gently. Grace looked up in surprise. Whenever she tried to talk to someone, they shouted at her, screamed, or said she wasn’t even trying to get through it. But Chloë’s behavior was different.

“What if I become your replacement sister?” Chloë asked. “It might help you get through your situation.”

Grace brightened immediately. “You would do that for me?”

“Of course I would!” Chloë said, smiling as bright as the moon.

From then on, Chloë and Grace became best friends. They had sleepovers every weekend. Chloë stuck with Grace whatever Grace was going though and Grace did the same for Chloë. The two acted like sisters. Grace’s world was put together again. Chloë helped Grace get though missing her sister and little by little Grace got used to Ellie and Sadie not being at her house. Chloë saved Grace from falling apart. She stitched Grace’s world back together. Chloë was Grace’s Saving Grace.

 

4 years later

 

“See you later!” Grace called over to Chloë.

“The sleepover still on?’ Chloë asked.

“You bet!” Grace said, looking over her shoulder as she got on her bus, M 91910. She sat down on a seat and pulled out her copy of the Iliad. She had just started to love poetry when she turned 14. Her mother had given her Homer’s poems and she loved them.

She thought back to four years ago when Ellie and Sadie had first left. She had been a wreck. She couldn’t handle not having them around. Now? It was better. She still saw them over summer break and spring break but their relationship was strained. They also seemed to be giggling to each other or they seemed to know something about Grace that she didn’t know. They texted their friends in Boston a lot. They stilled played with Grace but she knew that they were growing up and didn’t really want to play anymore. But they still had fun. They would talk and have fun hanging out with Grace. Once they left; it was always hard for Grace. But then she would get over it. All because of Chloë. They were still best friends today. Grace was still friends with Ela and Matilda but she thought they were shallow and silly. Alyssa had moved to India to help her mom and aunts out with their grandpa, who was king of India.

She even now had a little sister, Maddy Cook! Maddy had brown hair and brown eyes. She was the light of Grace’s past 2 years. Grace made a friendship with Maddy, just like her one with Ellie and Sadie.

Grace realized that it was her stop and got of the bus. Two people were waiting there for her. One was taller and the one next to her was smaller. They both had fire red hair and kind, warm brown eyes. They looked familiar.

“Hey, Gracie,” one said.

“Ellie!” Grace exclaimed and flew into her arms.

“We’re home.”

 

Route 66

Chapter One

 

My headphones were in while I stepped out of the car. I flipped my hair, then put my black sunglasses on. I didn’t realize how sunny it was here. I grabbed my suitcase and rolled it inside the hotel. I heard my mom calling my name in the distance, but I ignored it. I was too into my music to turn around and talk to her. I was listening to Calvin Harris, his new single, “Outside” feat. Ellie Goulding. I walked into the hotel and waited in the lobby for my mom. I sat down and took out my headphones. My mom came in carrying a bunch of my bags. I wanted to help her, but the hotel guy seemed to have it under control. When she came over she put down the bags and got a cart.

“You know, Hallie, it wouldn’t hurt if you helped a little,” she said to me.

I stood up and started helping her. If you don’t understand what’s going on right now, I’ll tell you.

Me and my family lived in Nashville for 16 years, but my parents got divorced last month, so my dad stayed in Nashville with my older sister, Emily, who is 18, and me and my mom packed our bags and moved to Los Angeles, California. I didn’t choose to move, it actually wasn’t my choice at all. I didn’t have a say in it. I didn’t mind leaving my dad, he was always kind of mean to me and my mom. He hit me sometimes. It was Emily that I had trouble leaving. She was not only my sister, but she was my best friend. We did everything together and we told each other all of our secrets. We had a really hard time saying goodbye. But enough about that, it’s going to make me cry. My name is Hallie. I’m 16 years old and I love producing music. My hobby’s are making music and DJing. when I left Nashville I brought all my equipment with me, oh, and my cat, Dibbles. Dibbles and Emily were the only things I really had in Nashville, I didn’t have a lot of friends, I was very independent. I spent most of my time locked in my room making Music. So in a way moving to LA wouldn’t be such a bad thing, new friends, a new start. It would also be a good break from everything. I love Emily, but she was such a goody-two-shoes. That’s why my dad never hit her, because she was perfect. Every little thing about her. I have light brown hair with blonde highlights, it’s up to my shoulders, I have side bangs, they don’t really show, but it’s okay. I like it.

 

Me and my mom went up the elevator to our room, we would be staying here a while until we can afford a real place. When we got to our room, I started unpacking. My mom came up to me, “Hey, sweetie, I know this is tough for you but I’m really proud of you for pulling through.”

“No problem mom, anything for you.” I said.

“Oh, sweetie, you’re the best.”

I smiled and put Dibbles on the floor so he could stretch. I put my clothes into drawers and put my DJ equipment on my bed. I went into the bathroom to check on my mom, and she was fixing her hair.

“Sweetie, remember tomorrow is your first day of Brookstone,” she said to me. Brookstone was the new school I would be going to. I nodded and hugged my mom. She really was the best.

“I love you, mom” I said.

“Aw, sweetie, I love you too. So, so, much.”

 

My mom was my hero. She was always there for me. I loved her so much, when I was younger we had our occasional fights, but they usually only lasted for five minutes, then we would hug it out and say we loved each other, we don’t have a bad relationship, and we don’t have a perfect one either, we have one that would last through the good and the bad times, and I loved that about us. Her name is Julia, she’s 38-years-old, I know, pretty young, her and my dad had kids early.

 

Chapter Two

 

The next morning I had to wake up at 6:50 a.m., because Brookstone was very far from the hotel. My mom wasn’t up yet so I decided I would surprise her with some breakfast in bed, she was going through a really hard month and I knew she was stressed out, so I went into the lobby in my PJs with Dibbles in my arm. I went inside the coffee shop and bought two Caramel Lattes (her favorite) and two Scones (also her favorite). I saw people staring at me- they thought I was some kind of freak because I was in Pajamas and holding a cat in my arms. I didn’t care, though, I was used to it. In Nashville people would make fun of me all the time for the way I looked. You should’ve seen me, I looked like a freak, seriously though, when I was 12 I dyed my hair pink and chopped most of it off. I know. Freak.

I went back to the room and woke my mom up, it was now 7:15. She woke up and smiled when she saw the Caramel Lattes, I told you those were her favorites. My mom is very pretty, she has dark curly brown hair that goes all the way to her ribcage. She sat up and grabbed the Latte out of my hand. We both laughed. I put Dibbles on her lap and grabbed clothes from the drawer, I changed into my outfit. I was wearing a plain white crop top and long black overalls, my signature black sunglasses, and my beige suede wedges. I walked out of the bathroom. My mom saw me and was paralyzed.

“Is something wrong?” I asked.

“Not at all, you just look so beautiful,” she answered. I smiled at her. I checked my phone, it was now 7:27, I had 3 minutes before I had to go. I grabbed my backpack and hugged Dibbles goodbye, I didn’t want to leave her. I haven’t left her alone in 3 months.

“Don’t give mama so much trouble, be good, Dibbs.” I kissed her forehead. then I hugged my mom so tight I could hear her heart beating.

“I’m gonna miss you, mama” I said.

“Oh, honey, I’m gonna miss you too. But trust me, you are going to kick Brookstone’s butt.”

I laughed. I let go of her and took a deep breath. I stood up from the bed and said goodbye one last time, then I walked out the door, (not) ready to start a new school.

 

Chapter Three

 

I needed to take the bus to school. It was a 30 minute ride. School started at 8:30. and it was 7:38 now. I put my headphones in and walked to the bus stop. While walking, I looked around noticing everybody, they all looked so different then the people from Nashville, they went from cowboy boots to five-inch-high heels, from old-fashioned jeeps to bright red Maseratis, big country hats to bandanas, leather backpacks to leather jackets. I started missing Emily, so I called her. The phone rang and rang. No reply. Dang, Em. I left a message.

 

“Hey, Em, it’s Hallie, just wanted to say I miss you. You’re probably at school right now, I’m on my way to Brookstone now. I really don’t know how I’m going to survive without you.”

 

I started tearing up. No. No. Not now. No. But it was too late, by the time I reached the bus stop I was sobbing.

 

“Well, now I’m crying. I love you, Em. please call me soon. Bye.”

 

I hung up and wiped the tears from my face. It was 7:49. The bus came at around 7:51.

 

On the bus I sat alone. Everyone was playing on their phones, or throwing spit balls at one another, I was sitting by the window in silence, I wasn’t in the mood for anything. I felt so different, I was actually, for the first time in my life, nervous about something. This was not me. I did not get nervous. I was tough. Wasn’t I? Well, apparently not.

 

I got off the bus at 8:27, 3 minutes early. When I got off the bus I was completely starstruck. The school was 10 times bigger than the one I went to in Nashville. My heart began racing. I wasn’t ready for this. This wasn’t me. I’m not a california girl. I’m a nashville girl with a heck of an accent. Would people make fun of me? Would they think I’m weird? god, I still own my cowgirl boots from 5th grade. Snap out of it, Hallie. you don’t get scared, you don’t get nervous. You are strong. But the truth was, I wasn’t at all.

I walked inside the school, and there were people everywhere. I basically fell over. I didn’t know where I was going. I wanted to ask, but everyone seemed busy doing their own thing. This is so weird, I thought, I mean, it’s January 25th, and I’m starting school. It’s the middle of the year. What the heck am I doing here? I reached the principal’s office at around 8:34, and knocked on the door.

“Come in!” he said.

“Hi, I’m Hallie Steinfeld, I’m enrolling here.”

“Hallie! so nice to meet you! Please, take a seat,” he said to me.

I sat down and took my sunglasses off. The principal started talking to me about a bunch of school stuff, but I wasn’t paying attention. Behind the principal was a big glass window where I could see everything going on. It was a regular school, I guess. It had all the labels, the jocks, the nerds, the popular click, the rockers, the goths, and the loners. That was me. When the principal finished talking he stood me up and took me to my first class. English. I walked in and took a deep breath. I was ready. The teacher introduced me to everybody and then gave me a seat. Right in the middle.

“This is it, Hallie” I thought. “This is it.”

 

Chapter Four

 

English was interesting. but mostly the same as my old school. I guess it was better. I saw some boys staring at me, that was a good sign. Hopefully. Classes went by pretty quickly. I found my locker, I was next to a jock and a popular girl which kind of sucked because they were just talking really loudly about this sick party that I wasn’t invited to. But it was okay because I didn’t expect to be invited to anything yet. I had five minutes left of Math before I went to lunch. I was actually pretty excited to meet new people. Too excited. I dropped my text book and it made a huge bang on the ground. Dang it. Everyone stared at me, and I even heard some laughs from the people in the back row. I leaned down to go pick it up, but somebody got it before I had the chance. I looked up. right there was the most beautiful boy I have ever seen in my whole life. He had green eyes and blonde hair. He was obviously a jock because he was wearing a varsity jacket that said “BROOK 4 LYFEEEEEEE.” Then I realized who he was, he was the jock next to my locker, he was the one, he was- ring.

I snapped out of my daydream, I guess I just spent five minutes looking into the eyes of that handsome hunk. And… and… he stared back! When I got to my locker to put my stuff away, I felt someone tap my shoulder. It wasn’t my- I mean- the handsome hunk, it was lady hands. I shut my locker and turned around. right there was “the” clique, the one that every single school has. the popular ones, the pretty ones, the only ones that everyone looks up to.

“Hi, is it.. Bayley?” the blonde one said.

“Hallie,” I replied.

“Whatever your name is, you better stay away from Jared,” she said with sass.

I was confused. who was Jared? Wait a minute, the blonde, she was in my math class, Jared must be… the handsome hunk. Even his name is hunky …

“Listen, blonde, you can’t control me. You might be physically flawless, but it doesn’t mean I like you.” What. Was. That. I’m such an idiot. The clique walked away laughing at me. I leaned back on my locker and sighed. Then somebody came over next to me.

“Hey,” the voice said, “I’m Jared”

Ah Oh my God what is life. I acted cool.

“Hi, I’m Hallie,” I replied. I turned around to face him. He was sooo tall. He must have been 6’4.

“Can I take you to lunch?” he asked.

Ahhh, I’m going to die in this dream.

“You may.” I replied, acting casual. We started walking. Then he looked at me and said, “Your hand looks heavy, let me hold it for you.” Then he grabbed my hand.

I seriously almost passed out. I laughed a little. Oh my god Hallie, what was that? But it was okay because he smiled.

“so, what do you like to do?” he asked me.

“I produce music.” I said.

“No way! My dad works for a record label!” he said.

“Awesome.” I replied. I started to get used to this. I wasn’t shy anymore. We were laughing in the lunch line talking about our lives. I pulled out my phone and showed him Dibbles. That was a big hit. He loved cats! Yay! I feel like I could tell him anything: I told him about my parents and how they got divorced, about how I live in a hotel with my mom, how I have a sister, and how I lived in Nashville. Everything. Now I know we’ve only known each other for a day. But I felt like I’ve known him all my life. It was so easy to talk to him. The words flew right out of my mouth, and the best part was, he didn’t think of me any differently knowing about my past.

“Hey, Hallie, I’m having this party tomorrow at my house, do you wanna come?” he asked.

“I would love to!” I replied. I was so happy. I knew I was going to like this school. but it gets better.

“Hallie, do you mind if I have your number?”

I was done. Completely done. What is this I can’t even. I gave him my number and he texted me right away. I’m pretty sure I passed out.

 

Chapter Five

 

When I got out of school that day I was so happy I skipped all the way home. When I got to the room, my mom wasn’t there, but had left a note.

 

Hallie,

I will not be home until late tonight. I am going on a job hunt. Be safe and take care of Dibbles. Text me if you need anything. Love you.

 

Mama <3

 

I smiled and jumped on to my bed. Dibbles was sleeping. I opened my phone. 3 messages.

 

Emily-

Hi, Hallie, I’m sorry I missed your message. I love you so much and I know you’ll get through this. You are so strong and brave. I miss you too but I know that you are going to do just fine in LA. Always text me, Hall. <3

 

I replied:

 

Thx so much Em, you’re the best, I met someone today and I think I really like him. 🙂

 

There were 2 more messages.

 

555-2424

hey, hall. it’s Jared  😉

 

hehe… he called me Hall…

hey Jared, I had a lot of fun getting 2 know you today  😉

 

I sent it. Ah!!! Be calm, Hallie, be calm.

 

Dad-

hey, sweetie. how’s LA?

 

I didn’t feel like talking to him. so I just deleted the text.

Then I got 2 more messages.

 

Emily-

already?? omg, girl. you cray-cray.

 

I laughed.

 

Jared-

me 2. so r u going 2 the party? it starts at 8:00.

 

Duh! Of course I was going!

 

i’ll be there.

 

Jared-

great, I will pick u up at 6:50

P.S

i think ur really pretty and cool. just wanted u 2 know.

 

Oh my god! This is unreal.

 

thx. you’re also really cool. and really handsome….

 

Uh oh. I think that was too much. Oh, well!

 

Jared-

lol thanks. ur the best. ik we just met. but I think ur the most beautiful girl in the world.

 

I’m dead. R.i.p me. I died. Dead.

 

omg thanks you’re so sweet.

 

Jared-

maybe we could get dinner together sometime?

 

Ahhh! I stayed calm. Pf, No I didn’t!

 

I WOULD LOVE THAT <3

 

Ahhh!

 

Chapter Six

 

The next day went by fast. Jared and I talked a lot at our lockers. He was my first friend at this school, and I think I really liked him. I didn’t have any other friends. I mean, there were these two girls that I talked to sometimes in Social Studies, Gabby and Mia. But they weren’t really like me. They weren’t mean or anything, they just weren’t relatable to me. After school I ran into them, and they asked me if they could come over to my house. Okay, so I didn’t tell them that I lived in a hotel. They couldn’t be expecting a mansion. I said yes and they cheered the “EEK!” cheer. They linked my arms and we walked home together.

 

“So, Hallie, what do you like?” Gabby asked.

I could tell she was the chatty one. Mia was like her sidekick.

“Well, I like cats” I said.

“NO WAY! My uncle has a cat!” Gabby said.

“Wow!” I said sarcastically, I told you I was more independent, I didn’t like talking! When we got to the hotel they looked shocked. I just ignored them because I don’t even care if someone makes fun of me. This was my life, I couldn’t change it. They looked disappointed, so I turned and looked at them. “You think I want my life to be like this? You think I chose this path? Wow. You guys are super selfish to think that everyone just has a perfect life. Because not everyone lives in a huge mansion like you guys.”

I was going to keep talking but Gabby’s nails were so long they were sticking into my skin.

“Are you going to Jared’s party tonight?” She completely ignored what I’d just said. Wow.  I nodded.

“Maybe we could get manicures together!!!” Gabby screamed.

Done. I was done. I just can’t.

“Yeah, but, um… listen… I… can’t because I need to… um….. visit my uncle! At the… police… station.” That was the worst lie in the world.

“Oh, okay! We’ll see you at the party!” Gabby said.

God, she was so cheery! I opened the door to the room. I didn’t see my mom.

“mom? mom?” I saw Dibbles hiding in the corner.

“Dibbs, where’s mama?” He started shivering. Huh. Then I heard something. it was coming from the bathroom. I opened the door, and there was my mom. Lying on the floor, sweating, most of her hair chopped off, wearing dad’s old shirt.

 

Chapter Seven

 

I started freaking out. I started sobbing. I grabbed the phone and called 911. It was ringing.

“Hello, this is Hallie Steinfeld. I just came home from school and my mom is lying on the floor sweating and looks like she passed out. I really need an ambulance.”

“Okay. We’ll be right there, what is your address?” the policeman said.

I told him everything he needed to know. I was freaking out. I went to the bathroom and leaned down near my mom.

“Mom. mom, answer me mom. I know you’re there mom. mom, please.” I starting crying like crazy. The ambulance came 10 minutes later. They rang the door and I answered. They ran into the bathroom and took my mom on the stretcher. They carried her away and I followed. In the car, they were feeling her heartbeat and saying a bunch of medical stuff. I pulled out my phone to call Emily.

 

Ring. Ring.

 

She answered.

 

“Hi, Hall! What’s up?

 

“It’s mom, she passed out today and I found her in the bathroom. She was sweating and most of her hair was chopped off. She was wearing dad’s shirt. I called the ambulance and we are in the car right now. God, Em. I’m freaking out.”

 

Tears kept running down my face. I couldn’t survive without my mom. She was my hero. What would I do without her?

 

“Oh my god, Hall. I’m so sorry.”

 

“I don’t know what to do, Em.”

 

“She’s going to be fine Hallie, she is strong and she will pull through.”

 

“I don’t even know what happened, or how it happened.”

 

“You never know, but she’ll be fine, Hall. I really wanna be there for you but I’m in the middle of finals. I’m so sorry.”

 

“It’s fine. I guess I just really needed my older sister to come here and tell me everything’s alright instead of hearing her voice on a freakin’ phone.”

 

“Hall, don’t be like that.”

 

“No, Emily. When I need you the most, you aren’t there. Silly of me to even think that you would fly to LA to see your mom who might die. because we both know that you don’t even care.”

 

“HALLIE!”

 

I hung up the phone, then the tears came out, they came out and never stopped. I knew my life sucked, but I thought my sister didn’t. We used to be best friends. Now we felt like strangers.

 

Chapter Eight

 

I was in the hospital waiting room for about three hours. They wouldn’t tell me anything. I just kept pacing back and fourth. I texted Jared.

 

jared im so sorry I have to miss your party. family emergency, im at the hospital r n. long story, I am so sorry I really wish I could be there but I just cant.

 

I sent it, and leaned my head back against the wall. Why did this have to happen? Why does my life have to suck, why is my family a freak show? Why is my “sort of” boyfriend popular, why did I have to move, why did my parents get divorced. Why did my dad hit me? Why isn’t Emily here. Why? Why? Why?

 

Jared-

party cancelled. coming 4 u, hall. ill be there in 10.

 

No, he was not really coming. He did not just cancel his party to see me. A girl that he’s known for 2 days. I couldn’t believe it. I never thought I would say this, but I was in the hospital, with my mom who was passed out, not knowing if I could be happy again, and a guy that I’ve known for 2 days, who is hot, and popular, made me … smile. Made me smile at one of the hardest times in my life. He was the one that brought me up when I was down, and to think … that used to be Emily. But now, it’s him. It’s him.

 

Jared did come. He ran in and threw his arms around me, I hugged him so tight that I could feel his manly arms come out of his shirt. He sat me down and held my hand. He made me so happy. The doctor came in about 15 minutes after.

“Hallie?” he called.

I stood up with Jared, whose hands were in mine.

 

I saw my mom in the hospital bed. She looked horrible. So sick and red. I started crying again.

“So what happened?” I asked holding my tears back.

“Well, it’s hard to tell, we found her on the ground holding scissors in her hands, so it must’ve been suicide, and that also explains the cut hair. Suicidal thoughts happen all the time. Apparently she’s had a mental disorder since she was 34, but nobody knew so it couldn’t be treated. She’s also suffered from very serious depression. She is going to have to stay here for a while if she wants a chance to survive, I am very sorry to say this, Hallie, but it is a very easy situation for her to die.”

When those words came out of the doctor’s mouth I stopped breathing. I stopped moving. The earth stopped spinning, everything just stopped, well, at least for me. I ran out of the room. I heard Jared call my name but I ignored him, I was so depressed. I am nothing. Literally, nothing. Silly of me to think there was such a thing as happily ever after.

 

Chapter Nine

 

The next week went by so slow. I was spending it in the hotel with Dibbles. I know I was supposed to go to school, but I couldn’t, it was to hard for me. I texted Jared for most of the day, and called the hospital to check in. I wasn’t allowed to stay at the hospital because they were doing surgery. I got a text from Jared.

 

Still on for tonight? xoxo

 

Oh my god, I totally forgot, I had a date with Jared tonight. I had to go, I needed to get my mind off of mom.

 

of course. pick me up at 7? xoxo.

 

I changed. I was wearing my white crop top with a high-waisted plaid skirt, I wore my old-fashioned high heels and my black purse to match. I wore my mom’s gold necklace for good luck. Then the door rang. I opened it.

“Wow,” he said, “You look amazing.” I blushed.

“Thank you. and you as well,” I replied.

He took my hand and we walked to his car. He had a big,black van, you know, the one’s that rich people with drivers have. It was amazing.

“Wow,” I said. He laughed and opened the door for me. What a gentleman. We drove to a sushi place near his house. It was so fancy. We sat at a booth in the back, and it was so nice. We started talking about his life and what he does and his family. I found out his mom had died. When he was three, she got into a car accident. He had a sister named Gigi, who was 18. He had such an interesting life. We got our sushi 30 minutes later; I got an avocado roll and he got a california roll. We laughed so much that night. When we were done I leaned my head against him. He smiled.

“I really like you, Hall. I know we just met but I think you’re the one for me.”

I smiled and stood up.

“Me too.”

He leaned in, I leaned in, and the next thing you know we were kissing, and I never felt so happy.

 

It was 1:00 when I got home. But I didn’t even try to fall asleep, I just texted Jared all night.

 

tonight was amazing. thx for the sushi. <3

 

No problem, hall. 😉

 

What is this, some kind of sick joke?

 

so are we dating now? <3 I sent.

Was that too much? Nahhhh, it’s okay.

 

I felt mean, I know I should’ve been paying all of my attention to mom, but I couldn’t help it. He was the only one that made me happy and I needed to be happy more than anything right now.

 

if thats okay with you…. <3

 

Ahhh! We’re dating. Ahhh!

it’s totally okay with me. ily.. <3

 

Before he could respond I got a call. It was from the hospital. I answered it. The words they said on the phone call were the two words I would never forget.

She. Died.

 

Chapter Ten

 

How could they do that? Just say it like that. “She died” not even a “She passed away, i’m so sorry” type of thing. I was over it. Over life, over everything. I didn’t care anymore, all I had left was a crappy hotel room, and my cat that sounded like a rooster. I was completely done. So I went away, I packed my bags and started the car. I drove through the city with the roof down and my hair blowing in the wind, I didn’t tell anyone, not even Jared. I just abandoned my life because it was pointless. My phone kept buzzing with texts from Emily, dad, and Jared. But I ignored them. They weren’t important anymore, nothing was.

I drove all the way to, you guessed it,

Route 66.

 

THE END

 

Conclusion

 

When I went to Route 66 I found a small shack near the water. I ended up telling Jared where I was, and being the gentlemen he was, he came to get me. I wouldn’t go, though. I didn’t want to live in that sick town. So he bought me a house, about 15 acres across from his house. He visited once in a while, but me, I lived with Dibbles for five years, until one day Jared came over and bent down on one knee, and you know where this is going. We got married and lived, I guess you could say, happily ever after.

Emily and dad came to the wedding, and me and Emily were friends again. Not as close as we were before, but we were sisters, and some things would never change between us. But dad was gone. He wasn’t dead, but I never talked to him again. It was so wrong it almost felt right. So Jared, Dibbles and I, along with our one kid, Julia, yep, named after my mom, ended up living on Route 66.

 

Guardians Part 1

Chapter One

 

He walked back to the clinic. “How’s life?” Jason asked.

“Fine, for someone with cancer,” Jack responded, who was in his hospital bed.

“Well, if there’s anything I can do, tell me.” Jason paced around the room.

“Ugh, I hate this waiting. I wish you would either get better or… or something would happen!” Jason exclaimed. Jack had been diagnosed with cancer when he was 12.

“Well, it’s not like I can do anything!” Jack yelled.

Jason fixed his shaggy hair and left the room. He was 19, and had to get back home to study. He was on the basketball team, but not considered buff. He had a short temper and always needed something to do. He was diagnosed with ADHD when he was 14. He was walking back to his dormitory on 118th street when his friend walked up to him.

“Hey, how’s Jack?” asked Brian, the star of the basketball team.

“In his words, ‘fine for someone with cancer,’” Jason replied.

“Well, that’s not that great of an answer,” Brian responded.

“What do you want me to say?” Jason said.

Jason walked onto the college campus. He went to Columbia University. He was in his second year of college and was hoping to graduate with a master’s degree in engineering. People were all over the campus. He walked to his dorm building and sat on the steps, contemplating all that had happened that day. He needed to calm down. He had almost lost his temper on the basketball coach during a game, but Brian had gotten him out of the jam. The coach said Jason had a real problem and that he might need to see a therapist.

 

Chapter 2 (2 Weeks Later)

 

Jason knocked on the door. “Who is it?” the person behind it answered.

“It’s Jason, for the 7:15 appointment.”

“Ok, come in.”

He opened the door and laid on the couch. The therapist was sitting behind a desk with bookshelves to his left and right. He was wearing a sweater and a button down shirt with yellow jeans.

“Ok, Jason. Tell me, what angers you?”

“Well, a lot of things, but mainly, my friend Jack has cancer and I can’t deal with the waiting and not knowing what’s going to happen. It’s just scary, I don’t want to lose him, but I can’t wait much longer.”

“It seems you need to get your mind off of Jack and try to understand what’s happening to him.”

“Well, Jack isn’t having any surgeries and besides basketball, I do nothing else. What do you suggest?”

“Maybe try and get more involved in your school work.”

“Well, I’ll try that, but I’m not so sure it will work.”

Jason left the room, took the C train to 110th street and walked over to campus. “So, what did the therapist say?” his dorm mate asked.

“He says to get my mind of Jack by becoming more invested in my schoolwork.”

“That’s not the worst thing recommended by a therapist.”

Jason put down his school bag, pulled out his homework and laid down on his bed. Today had been good for Jason, something new happened. He tried to focus more on his schoolwork but he would always lose focus, even when he tried to work on the tiniest of things. He blamed it on his ADHD.

 

One day, he looked outside to the lion statues on campus. He looked back at his schoolwork and five minutes later when he looked outside, the statues were right outside his dorm! He was surprised and scared but also wanted to go outside and prove they had really moved. Finally, his curious got the best of him and he walked outside. When he opened the door, the lions spoke to him. “You are the only one who can see us. We can show you magical things but you cannot tell anyone. If you do, you will never see us again. Do you promise to never tell anyone?”

“Yes, I promise,” Jason said.

“Good. We will contact you when we need to.”

Jason walked away. He was puzzled by their words, “When we need to.” What did that mean? He turned back to them but saw the usual college students, chatting away. He resumed school as normal, but always had the lions on his mind. He wondered if what they had said was true, if no one else could see them but him. There had to be someone else.

 

Three Months Later…

 

It was a late Tuesday night, about 10:30 p.m. and Jason was studying. Then, the lions appeared. They seemed to pull him outside. It was like the lions could control his curiosity. “We need you now. Come with us.” The lions were being very conspicuous. A black sedan appeared out of the ground directly in front of him. “Get in,” the lions said. He got in the car.

I have to say, for a car that just came out of the ground, this is pretty comfortable,” Jason thought.

“Wow, really, Jason, you’re thinking about that. Why did we recruit you?”

“Wait, what? How do you know that?”

“Put two and two together, Jason. Figure it out.”

“Oh, ok, so you can read my mind now? Can I read minds now, too?”

“In time, Jason, you will learn. But for now, you need to learn the basics.”

“Basics of what?”

“The basics of controlling people.”

“Controlling people?”

“Yes, manipulating people to get exactly what you want.”

“Oh.” Jason was quiet for the rest of the car ride. He thought about what the lions had said. Did he really want to do this? Yes. He had to. It was the only way to stop thinking about Jack. The car ride finally ended. He got out of the car. “Where are we?” Jason asked.

“You don’t need to know that, so we won’t tell you.”

“Why not?”

“Our people do not like to waste time, so when we do not need to tell someone something, we do not.”

“That is a weird reason,” Jason thought.

“We can still read your thoughts.”

“Oh sorry, I forgot.”

They walked inside the building. It looked like a miniature castle with its and stone structure and towers. They walked four flights up a spiral staircase made of stone, with creaky wooden railings.

“Here is your partner, Jason.” A girl about 5’8” with long flowy blonde hair walked in with her own set of lions. “She will guide you through the basic training.”

“Nice to meet you, I’m… “

“I know who you are, Jason.”

“And who are you, then?”

“I’m Lara Walker. That’s all you need to know. Let me show you around the building.”

They entered the first door on their left. “What’s this?” Jason asked.

“This is the sleeping quarters.”

“Will I stay here?”

“While you participate in your training, you will stay here. After you complete your training, you will have the option to stay and be a mentor or work with the lions.”

“So, how many others are there?”

“We don’t know. The lions search around the world at campuses and school buildings for kids who can see them.”

“So how many are here?”

“Three others, making five altogether. I’ll introduce you to them when I’m done showing you around.”

They walked over to a set of white double doors.

“Is this the cafeteria?”

“We call it the mess hall, or the mess for short.”

“Ok, cool. Are there preset eating times or can you just walk in?”

“Well, both. From 8:30 a.m. to 10:00 a.m., you can get breakfast. From 11:30 a.m. to 1:00 p.m., you can get lunch, and from 6:30 p.m. to 9:00 p.m. you can get dinner. These times work in with your practice schedule but if you have time for any reason, you can stop by and grab a snack.”

They came to a long narrow hallway.

“What’s this?” Jason asked.

“These are the training facilities and classrooms.”

“Is that all?”

“…All of the building, yes.”

“I thought it would be bigger, for a secret hideout.”

“It’s not really a hideout, more like a training ground. Follow me.”

“Where?”

“To the others, remember?”

“Oh yeah, sorry,” Jason apologized. “They’re in class?”

“Yes. Good improvement on self-learning, Jason,” Lara remarked.

“Thanks?”

They walked into classroom number 504. “Who’s this?” asked the class in unison.

“Class, this is a new recruit, Jason.”

“Nice to meet you, Jason,” greeted some of the class. “Hi, Jason,” greeted the rest of the class.

“So, what’s this class working on?” Jason asked.

“We’re studying how to figure out what a person wants so you can manipulate them.”

“Oh.” Jason sat through the rest of the class.

“Did you like the class?” asked one of his classmates.

“Yeah, but I thought it was a bit weird.”

“We all do. But it’s better than where we came from so we’ll take it.”

 

Four Months Later…

 

While everyone was eating, the lions walked into the cafeteria and asked everyone to silence themselves. “Students, we, the lions, have an announcement to make. The training you have gone through was not actually to learn how to manipulate. It was to learn offense and defense against…The Hidden. The Hidden are an elitist group who believe if you are inferior in one thing, you are inferior in everything. Our ancestors tried to show them otherwise. They were assassinated. The Hidden are extremely good at what they do, which is killing people. We have been training your type of people because you are open to magic. The average person will write off magic as a ‘weird phenomenon’ or will not believe it happened in the first place. Open people accept magic, which is why you can see us. All we are made of and anything we own is magic, which makes you the only people who can see it. You five were chosen to defeat The Hidden, and that is what you will do. Sometimes you will work as a team but sometimes you will have to work on your own. Even though The Hidden aren’t much stronger than you, they have the power to break you. We will keep you updated as you work. Also, you will now work with the other lions. Tomorrow, we will have a meeting ceremony.”

The five kids were slightly shocked but one or two said, ”I knew it!” What was even stranger was that the day carried on as normal. But over the weeks, their training got harder. Soon they had personalized sessions and were working and learning for 8 to 11 hours a day. They had tight schedules and barely ever had free time. Then, one day, the lions had another announcement.

“Students, you have trained around the clock. Now your time has come to see what it is like in real battle. You will all graduate by the end of the week and will be doing field missions around the world. Do not worry about your other life. When you entered this building your outside life paused. When we are done with your services, or you wish to permanently leave, your life will resume as normal and you have the option of you memory being wiped as well. Understood?”

“Yes,” responded the five students.

Graduation was ten times more intense than the previous training. They fought battles against each other, cast spells they had been learning and worked in teams. They were split in half and faced the instructors in duos. Jason worked with Laura in duels and 1v1’s. These were the hardest because they faced the lions as well.

Finally, Jason and the group went on their first mission. Apparently, one of the scouts for the lions had found a fallen member in one of the college campuses.

“That’s strange.”

“What is?” Jason asked.

“We didn’t expect them this far up,” the lions explained.

“What do you mean?”

“They’re usually not as aggressive as going to a campus to hunt for us.”

They took the appearing car (the same one Jason took when he arrived at the castle) to the campus. “What do we do when we find The Hidden member?” Jason asked.

“Do what you were taught,” said the lion.

“You mean, attack him or her?”

“Thats what you learned, correct?”

“If they are The Hidden, what are we?”

“Everyone used to be human. Then came The Hidden. The attack was called the Fall. We are the Survivors. You are the Guardians.”

“The Guardians of what?”

“The last remaining of my species. Only special humans that can see us are The Guardians.”

“Well, do you have the same technology as humans? Are you an advanced race or…?”

“Can you ask us the questions later, like after we take care of this Hidden?”

“You sound like a mafia mobster.”

“What?”

“Nevermind.”

They approached the Hidden member. “What are you doing!?”

“Umm, stopping you?”

“You want me to battle you ruffians? I am Canakis The Great! Only kings challenge me!”

“Well, we’re gonna do something to you.”

The battle commenced, exhausting everyone to the max. Jason and Lara were very helpful, as they had been partners in the graduation duet battles. Before the group finished him off or before he retreated, the lions came over to extract some information. This gave the group of guardians some time to relax. They were all around the age of 18, the oldest being 21. They sat down on park benches.

“That was new.”

“Yeah, definitely.”

“Don’t know if I could have killed him though.”

“He deserved it. He was snobbish.”

“He wasn’t that bad.”

“Yeah right.”

“Not the rudest person I’ve met,” Lara said.

“Really?” Jason asked.

“Oh. Trust me, I’ve had some super snobs as friends.”

“Oh, sure.”

“You sure are acting snobbish.”

“Be quiet!” They both laughed.

“Today was fun. We work well together.”

She smiled at him. The rest of the group had broken up into their partnerships they had used at graduation. As the months passed, the group became more accustomed to fighting The Hidden and altogether became more friendly with each other. Partnerships were formed and bonds were made. Jason was having a lot of fun. Then came his next big problem.

“We have scouted a new power that is threatening to overcome The Hidden, The Survivors, The Guardians and possibly humanity. It is called The Monstrosity. They are a group of aliens connected to one source, one body of plasma, which is The Monstrosity. You will have two months of extra training based on what we have recovered from our scouts about The Monstrosity,” the Lions announced. “You will also have a two month break to visit people before we start the training. Colleges around the world have teachers and students that are recruiting Guardians like we are. You may know some.”

Jason was happy but surprised at the break the lions had given everyone one. Was it a sign? Could Jack be a recruiter? Jason felt confused.

Jason finally left with one of the lions to go to his campus in the strange appearing car. He said hello to everyone: Brian, the therapist, his roommates. Then, he went to visit Jack.

“Jack, I know…”

“I know what you’re about to say, Jason. Yes, I am a recruiter, yes, I did try to push you to the lions, and yes, the therapist is also a recruiter.”

“Whoa, how did you…?”

“I was trained too, Jason.”

“Oh. Well, that was all I was going to say, so, bye? I guess…”

“We can talk about normal things, if you want to.”

“Ok. How’s cancer life going?”

“Fairly horrible with a hint of…” Jack sighed.

“Well, this is awkward.”

“No. This is fine. I haven’t talked to anyone besides doctors in weeks. No one visits me besides the lions and they are boring too. Please talk to me. I won’t see you for months, maybe years. Please.”

“Well, if you put it that way, then I guess…” Jason trailed off. “Are you seeing anyone?”

“What do you mean?” Jack asked.

“Are you…dating someone? Like actually,” Jason said.

“No, boys in hospitals with cancer aren’t exactly popular.” Jack laughed.

“Nice to see your sense of humor. Always reassuring,” Jason said. “Anything else you wanna talk about?”

“Not really, but…”

“If you want to stop talking, that’s fine,” Jason said. “I know you can’t always talk and…”

“Jason, it’s fine. Go ahead. Leave if you want to, I don’t want to hold you back.”

Jason left and met back up with the lions. He asked the lions to go back to the facility.

“As you wish, but you don’t get to change your mind,” the lions said.

“Whatever,” Jason said.

He hopped in the car. The scenery around Jason drastically changed as they approached the facility. “Lions, do you know who trained Jack?”

“Yeah, only the best teacher. You should know who he is.”

“That’s cryptic,” Jason said.

The Lions ignored him for the rest of the ride. At the facility, he asked around to find Jack’s instructor, but couldn’t find him anywhere. He started get random headaches every now and then. They wouldn’t hurt that much but he would see flashes. Later those flashes got clearer. They were showing him something. But he didn’t know what it was. He told the lions about this. They seemed concerned.

“Can you see what the flashes depict?” they asked.

“Not clearly.”

“How long have you been getting them?”

“Maybe two to three weeks.”

“Okay. Keep in touch. If you can ever see what the flashes are depicting, tell us.”

“Why?” Jason wanted to know.

“We think The Monstrosity may be trying to contact you. It’s been happening to Lara, too.”

“Is she ok?”

“She’s as good as you are.”

Jason left the lions and went back to his room. He traveled through the white hallways and contemplated on his talk with the lions.

 

Two Months Later…

 

Jason rushed to the lions. He had a flash of a pulsing piece of plasma and a fairly small circle was highlighted in red. As he started to talk, he saw Lara was saying the same things.

“I saw something in the flash!” Lara and Jason said together.

“What did you see?” the lion asked.

“I saw the location of The Monstrosity,” Lara said.

“I saw its weakness…the brain,” Jason said.

“So if we can get to the brain with Lara’s help, we can exploit its weakness thanks to Jason,” said one of the lions.

“Students, we have an announcement. Your fellow classmates Jason and Lara have had visions that tell us where The Monstrosity is and how to kill it. We have already made a pact with The Hidden, so The Monstrosity is our main target. You know how to kill it and you know why to kill it, so let’s destroy our last enemy. That is all.”

Everyone was a little shaken up by the last talk, so they all took a nap. Jason kept having the flashes about The Monstrosity. People asked him and Lara, “What does it look like?” and “Where does it live?” or “How do we kill it?” It got a little annoying. Eventually, everyone stopped asking. They went through different stages. At first, they wanted to do the mission, then they got scared, then they just didn’t care. Finally, they went on the mission.

“According to Lara’s flashes, we will find The Monstrosity’s core in Hamburg, Germania. We will go there and kill it!” said one of the lions.

They arrived at a huge volcano and started to climb it. It was very rough ground. Once they reached the top, they saw The Monstrosity. It was a colorful mix of blue and purple, uglier than a face that had been shot. It had veins on it and spanned the whole gap of the volcano. In its center was a red and greenish dot-like mark that looked like a target. Some of the kids asked Lara, “Is that what we’re supposed attack?” At first she was a little confused, because it didn’t look as clear as it had in her flashes, but then she said yes. They asked the lions what to do next but their answer was cryptic: “You should know what to do already.”

They decided the best idea was to head down the volcano so they could attack the dot-thing in the middle. Using some cables and black harnesses, The Guardians began to descend down the bottom of the volcano’s cavern. It was very dark. Someone lit a lantern so they could see. Finally, they reached the bottom of the volcano.

“Do we have to step on the plasma thingy?” asked one of The Guardians.

“I think so,” Lara said.

“I’m washing my shoes after this,” Jason said.

They walked over to the dot-thing and started attacking it. They even stomped on it. But nothing happened. Next, The Guardians started falling down. Jason walked over to one of them. He had tranquilizer darts in the back of his neck. Then, suddenly, black, white and sunlight. Jason woke up in a white room with two people in lab coats staring at him.

“What happened?” he asked.

“This might hurt a little.”

“What will?”

Suddenly, a needle injected him. As he screamed, the light fades. Jason woke up looking out of his dorm window. His roommates were staring at him. He didn’t care. He could see everything but the lions.

The Importance of Space Exploration

Space exploration, just flashy photos and flags? If you look closer than your or your parents’ black and white autographed photo, you will see that it has a much more purposeful purpose. Space exploration actually benefits the environment and the population, and it allows important new scientific discoveries to be made.

Space exploration would benefit the environment. If we moved our dirty factories to another planet, this would reduce Earth pollution and provide a lower-cost alternative to building completely non-polluting factories. Also, space exploration may allow for better sites for greener living. For example, we could find a planet with more direct sunlight and a heat-only ozone layer. Or we could find a planet with natural cave tunnels for transit systems and cities so that no machinery would have to be brought to delve the cities. Space exploration might allow for environmental supplements to be pumped through to Earth so that we could still enjoy the environment but with less maintenance.

Space exploration could help the population. Space exploration could do this by finding new planets for the world to go to in an emergency or if the population gets too large for Earth to handle. There are probably dozens of planets with all the essentials of what we need — water, air, sunlight, and oxygen. In this way, space exploration could help the population. Finally, if you’re just ever yearning to go on a vacation, space exploration is very important to find new vacay destinations to get to if ever they are needed.

Space exploration could lead to important new scientific discoveries. For example, it could lead to the discovery of a new alien nation to be represented in the United Nations, or another tribe/nation of humans for us to connect with on a new Earth, or maybe one that is in need of our aid for creating a better government with freer rights. This would create the “United Intersolar Nations (UIN)” or, with the proper advancements the “United Republic Of Galactic Nations (URGN). Also, we could find planets that are empty, on which we could perform potentially harmful new science experiments with no casualties. This is how space exploration could lead to critical scientific discoveries.

Overall, space exploration is one of those things that just popped up, took hold and led the way to new greatness – the greatness of better science, more sustainable living, and happier lives. That’s why we should all promote space exploration. All of us should be those annoying salesmen we shoo from our doors in the morning. A number of people have come to agree with this fact, and in 2013 applications to live on Mars began. Even now we are developing those ships, for in all of our hearts there lies a simple yearning for the stars. So take action! Move! And send in your application today!

The Battle

I pulled and thrashed and tried my best to heave him off me. He was an evil piece of work. I socked him directly in his stomach, and he looked green, as if he was about to hurl. He donned patterns of wicked grins. Then, for a moment, he goggled at me, looking sheepish as if he might let me toss him across the room. But he stuck to me as firmly as a tree’s roots were planted into the ground. I swore.

“You, come right here!” my teacher screeched at her usual high pitch.

“Coming!” I gasped for air.

My arch-nemesis just would not let go without ending the fight.

“Stay and fight, you coward!” my sworn enemy screamed.

A voice in my head spurred me on, and I continued the war. I bit him, I punched him, and I swore that if I ever got him off me, I would murder him. “Ouch! Curses!” I had stubbed my puffy toe. I was getting beaten up and making a huge fool of myself in front of my whole class. My face burned red from embarrassment as my classmates sniggered and giggled. My head was stuck under his arm!

“Would one of you be kind enough to help him?” my twin sister said, with a pang of annoyance in her voice.

My best friend volunteered. Ha! I thought, you’re no match for two kids! But I had underestimated the power of my evil foe. One was defeating two of us! The teacher called up another one of my classmates to join the battle! But my crooked fiend was invincible. My twin just kept on calling up one student at a time to try and help me overcome my opponent. But nothing stood in his way. He was indestructible! At last, all of my classmates joined the fight!

We strategized. One person would try and pull him off me from his thick left shoulder, the other would try from the other shoulder. Everyone else would try pulling him off the top. The name of our battle plan? B.U.A.S.O!. Everyone got to their stations. We counted: 1, 2, 3, GO! They all tugged and pulled. Beads of sweat trickled down my neck. But our adversary retaliated with his own wicked plan: hang on tight and don’t let the stupid kids take over! Oh, yeah, and strangle the innocent victim (me) while you’re at it!

The irritating thing was that the teacher did absolutely nothing to help us. She just sat there, and occasionally took a sip of cool pink lemonade. After a few futile attempts to yank the enemy off me, the headmistress walked into the classroom to carry out her weekly ‘class supervision.’ My guess is that she scribbled something like, ‘class 567 is acting like a band of uncivilized monkeys’. Which is really offensive to monkeys!

At that moment, my friend grabbed a pair of scissors and tried to pierce the rival’s invulnerable and hairy skin. I spun around, with the enemy on me, trying not to get cut by the scissor. Then, disaster struck. I whipped around, smashed into the headmistress and knocked her over! She screeched in frustration, her puny spectacles dangling of her long, bony nose with steam escaping her ears. Her face was red as a tomato.

“YOU!” she yelled in a fury.

She blindly lunged at me, and in her rage, seized my arm (with the enemy still hanging onto me) and dragged me to her eerie office (dun dun dun!)!

Many strange artifacts hung here and there in her domain. A clock hung upside-down on a peg, and broomsticks lay still on the floor. She slumped onto a chair and donned an amused grin.

“Need help with that rival of yours, don’t you?” my principal said.

“Yes, miss!” I squeaked.

“Well, he can just stay on top of you and tackle you for eternity, I don’t care! That will be your punishment for knocking me over!” I swear that I heard my foe cackle with glee.

My enemy had blue spots all over his body from all the punches I had thrown at him. When I trudged out of the room, I accidently pushed a china pot over. It tumbled off the desk and shattered on the floor.

“AGAIN!?” my principal screamed.

This time, she charged at me and tried to pull me. Fortunately, she missed, and got the enemy instead. He landed on the floor, his stringy and woolly hair in a mess. I was free!

After a long lecture (with an occasional yell) the school bell finally rang. Students trampled each other, eager to get out of the prison. “FREEDOM!” they all yelled in unison.

When I got home, my mother asked the usual question, “What did you do at school today?”

I answered, “Today, I beat up my arch-enemy with B.U.A.S.O!” I puffed out my chest and flexed my muscles like Superman.

“What’s that?” my mom asked, while doing the dishes.

“It’s a battle strategy!”

“And who was your arch-enemy?” my mother asked, now very interested in the matter.

“My polka dotted sweater! B.U.A.S.O. stood for Beat Up A Sweater Operation!”

The Lightning Conspiracy

Peter rushed down the stairs. 10 minutes. He took out the guard near the door. 9 minutes. He heard the boosters starting. 8 minutes. He started to lockpick the door. 2 minutes. The door was unlocked. 0 minutes. The rocket took off. Peter’s heart sank. He had failed his mission.

Peter grabbed his coffee and put on his coat. “Another tiring day at work,” he mumbled to no one in particular. That is when the most unexpected thing happened. Two NSA agents appeared at the door of his apartment.

“Peter F. John, we need you,” the agent named Albert said.

“To do what? Make a cup of coffee?” Peter joked.

“Sir, this is serious matter. The NSA needs you to take down Lightning Industries. You did well stopping a nuclear war between the United States and Russia.”

“Do you mean the Lightning Industries that can blow up the moon with a touch of a computer? Oh yeah, by the way, you didn’t give me the 100,000 dollars like you promised.”

“Sir, are there any other Lightning Industries? And the President cheated you, not the NSA,” the agent said.

“Can’t your NSA goons take the company down?”

“The NSA does not have the right to take action. We can’t interrogate people, send people on suicide missions, etc.”

“So, what’s going to happen?”

“They are going to turn America to civil war.”

Peter was stunned. He always thought Lightning Industries was the greatest company in the world. How could Lightning Industries start a civil war in America?

“Sir? Are you there?” the NSA agent asked.

“How are they going to send America into civil war?”

“By crashing a rocket into Los Angeles. The rocket will have the U.S.A flag. People will blame the government. The second stage will involve a nuclear attack on the west coast. The attacks push America onto the edge of civil war. Finally, Lightning Industries will send in their troops and overthrow the government. Peter, the CIA and the FBI are made up of spies for Lightning Industries. The NSA intercepted a message about this.”

“What do I get for saving the world?”

“3,000,000 dollars, and we will buy you a nice estate just outside of New York City.”

“Okay. I’ll do it. Just make sure I get the reward.”

“Start Project: Civil War now.”

“Yes Mr. Lightning.”

“Oh yeah, and one more thing. Kill that highly skilled agent Peter John while you’re at it.”

Peter was finally there. The tallest building in the world. Lightning Tower. 520 floors and headquarters of the first multi-trillion dollar company. Armed with a pistol and a lock-picking kit, he knew he would never pass through security. His mission was to make sure the rocket never launched. “Freeze!” the armed guards shouted. Peter kicked the first guard and sent him crashing into the guard behind him. The four remaining guards started to fire away with their rifles. Peter took cover behind a truck. He loaded his pistol and fired at the guards. All the guards dropped to the floor and were saying their last prayers, and soon they all fell and lay motionless in a pool of blood. Peter slowly lock-picked the back door and went inside. He got in the service elevator and went to the control room.

He was surprised to see the control room empty. He looked at the enormous screen. He saw the target. Los Angeles. “What!! Only 10 more minutes till the rocket is launched!” Peter yelled.

The elevator down from the control room seemed like the slowest elevator that he’d ever been on. The elevator went above the 519th and a half floor, so he had to take the stairs down.

Peter rushed down the stairs. 10 minutes. He took out the guard near the door. 9 minutes. He heard the boosters starting. 8 minutes. He started to lockpick the door. 2 minutes. The door was unlocked. 0 minutes. The rocket took off.  Peter’s heart sank. He had failed his mission.

“Breaking News. A U.S. rocket crashed into the heart of Los Angeles, California, leaving 2,000 dead and many more injured. Revolts in San Francisco, San Diego, Sacramento, and Oakland have led California to the brink of civil war,” the reporter announced. Peter’s heart sank. If he had just been a little earlier, the U.S. would have nothing to worry about. Then he remembered something. The nuclear attack.

 

The Story of Lightning Industries

Lightning Industries was originally a weapons company that was founded in 1971 by 56- year-old Mark Lightning. He provided weapons to the government during the Iraq War and other various wars fought by the U.S. Mark bought tons of companies, and Lighting Industries’ yearly profit jumped to $12,234,109,459,017 in 2013, making it the first company worth a trillion dollars. Mark died on August 23, 2014, at the age of 93, after helping to fight Ebola in Africa. James Lightning took over the multi-trillion dollar company. Unlike his father, he was corrupted by evil and didn’t think about the middle and lower classes. His company became a monopoly in every department, and other companies fell like helpless chickens. His ultimate goal is to take over America. He gained control of the CIA, FBI, Army, Air Force, and the U.S National Guard by persuading (and bribing) them to take down the U.S government.

 

“I’m never going to get another job again,” Peter mumbled to himself.

That’s when two Lightning Industries troopers smashed through the door. “We have been ordered to put you in The United States Penitentiary Administrative Maximum Facility in Fremont County, Colorado until you have to present your case at court,” one yelled.

“What the !@#$!! What the !@#$ did I do? And did you really have to crash into my door? Have you guys heard something called a !@#$ing DOORBELL!!”

“Mr. John, you have been charged with assault and murder,” the buff guard said.

“Who did I murder?”

“You killed 5 Lighting Industries guards and injured 7 guards, 3 of whom are in critical condition.”

“You’re not the police though. You can’t arrest me!”

“Refuse to come with us, and we will shoot.” The guards then pulled out their pistols. “Last chance,” they warned Peter.

“NEVER!!!” Peter shouted.

There were gunshots and screams from the apartment. Then, everything went silent.

Peter woke up with his eyes bloodshot and his chest throbbing with pain. He slowly got up from his bed. He looked across the room. He saw Albert sleeping on a chair.

“Albert?” Peter moaned.

Albert’s eyes fluttered open.

“My God, Peter, you’re awake!” Albert rushed toward him.

“Yeah, I think I realized that I’m awake. What am I doing here?”

“Those Lightning Industries guards shot shrapnel into your chest. Our NSA agent on the street heard those gunshots and called the nearby hospital. Fortunately you live on the first floor so the medics could find you quickly. Right now you’re at a classified location.”

“How long have I been out?”

“2 weeks in a coma.”

“What has happened in the last 2 weeks?”

“America’s military forces have taken sides. The states of California, Washington, Oregon, Arizona, Nevada, and every state west of Louisiana have seceded and and declared themselves the Consolidated States of America. Lightning Industries, the Army, and Coast Guard have sided with the CSA. The Air Force went against Lightning Industries for framing them for the nuclear attacks on Portland, Oregon and the rocket crash on Los Angeles. So the Air Force, Marines, and Navy remain with the U.S government.”

“Wait. Are you telling me that they nuked Portland?”

“I’m afraid so.”

“S@#$!”

“Pete, don’t you realize what the biggest part is?”

“This might be World War III.”

Peter stared a long time at the building. The White House. The Fountain was gushing up water and the Columns towered high. He was going to meet the President to plan a strategy to combat the CSA.

“Good morning Mr. President, Christopher Beck.”

“This isn’t a good morning, but I’ll take the greeting,” said the stressed president.

“So, what is our strategy?”

“We surround the CSA. The Navy and Coast Guard will take the seas. The Marines are already securing the Mississippi River, and will join the 64th Tank Division en route to Topeka, Kansas.”

“Well, Mr. President, what do I do?”

“You’re going with the Navy SEALS and Albert to Boise, Idaho, to take down Lightning Industries’s main headquarters.”

“But isn’t Lightning Tower in San Diego the headquarters?”

“That’s what we thought, until the NSA figured out that the broadcasts Lightning Industries were sending to the CSA government were coming from Boise, Idaho. If you take Lightning Industries down, the CSA will lack weapons, supplies, and other troops.”

“What do I get?”

“The same reward you were supposed to get for stopping this civil war.”

Peter, Albert, and ten other Navy SEALS parachuted down from the plane. The wind blew against Peter’s cheeks as he floated down from the high altitude. The team met up in town, not wearing their uniforms of course. “Alright guys,” Peter whispered through the the comlinks in their ears. “Our operation will consist of two teams, with six people in each group. The first team will secure the perimeter. The U.S hacked their security system, so it should be easy to get in. The second group will make its way inside, and the first group will follow. Then, we plant the bomb inside the command center, and we get out. Understood?”

“Yes sir,” the soldiers said in unision.

Peter, Albert, and four Navy SEALS made their way through the dark building. It took them 30 minutes to find the building that was underground in the sewers.

“Hawk-1, this is Easy-4. We’ve secured the perimeter and took out some guards. We’ll be joining you soon,” the commander of the first group said.

“Roger that, Easy-4. We haven’t encountered any hostiles yet.”

Peter took out the map of the headquarters. He saw that the control room was the first door to the right. The team walked down the hall. That’s when about 50 CSA Army Special Ops surrounded the team, blocking their path to the control room where the self-button was. They had no chance of getting in.

“Hey Pete,” Albert whispered. “I’ll take on these guards, and you make a beeline for the control room.”

“But you’ll surely die,” Peter responded.

“There are more important things at stake the my life, Peter.”

Peter whispered Albert’s plan to the other Navy SEALS. First, Albert started to fire at the guards and threw a smoke grenade. The guards couldn’t see Peter and the rest of the troops making their way to the control room in the smoke and the confusion. Peter pushed the door open and found hundreds of workers inside.

“Everyone evacuate this building immediately!!!” Peter shouted to the workers. The workers didn’t leave at first, but after they saw the guns, they rushed out the exit.

“It’s going to take some time for me to hack this main control panel and blow this place up,” the technician said.

“How long is it going to take?” Peter asked.

“Five minutes.”

Albert was having trouble fending off the troops. He already had wounds in his foot, arm, and leg. He was getting drowsy. He knew he was losing blood. He started to collapse. His eyelids closed, and he thought about home. He then lost consciousness.

“Vulcan-5, this is Hawk-1. Easy-4 and Hawk-1 need extraction,” Peter shouted into his comlink.

“Roger that, Hawk-1. ETA 2 minutes,” the Vulcan-5 commander shouted.

Soon, Easy-4 and Vulcan-5 arrived to remove Peter and the rest of Hawk-1. Except for Albert. Peter flew away in the helicopter, and all the troops shouted with joy as they watched the factory blow up. Shrapnel flew in all different directions. A mushroom cloud hovered over Boise. All the troops strapped their gas masks on. It was the second atomic bomb used in war. Peter knew that they had probably now won. But not without a cost.

 

EPILOGUE

On January 14, 2017, the CSA merged back with the USA. James Lightning was reluctant to sell the company to another big company, Energy Enterprises, but advisors convinced him it was for the best. The Lighting Conspiracy was released by the government and James Lightning was put on trial for treason and sure enough, he was found guilty and sentenced to life in prison. Energy Enterprises helped America rebuild after the second American Civil War. Albert Goodman and Peter John were awarded the Medal of Honor for their bravery in combat. Peter retired to his new house near the Hudson River in New York. He does not want to be disturbed, but that time will have to wait.

Peter was reading his morning newspaper when the NSA showed up at his door. The NSA agent started to walk forward and began to talk to Peter.

“Peter, we have orders from the president to extract you and bring you to Washington D.C.”

“To do what?”

“We have another mission for you.”

 

The Dead Walk Again

“We got another fever, Taylor!” the doctor said. I sighed. The Fever had been going on for a while. So many people had gotten it. No one knew how it started. We couldn’t stop it. Many people had gone insane because of it. There was so much grieving and sadness. Everybody thinks it’s the apocalypse because no disease has ever been so bad. The Fever was worse than the Spanish Flu. It spread worldwide.

The Fever is so dangerous, because it burns you out. It takes a long time to burn you out, but then it wakes you up and turns you insane. We think that The Fever has such a high temperature that it actually burns a little tissue of your brain and makes you insane. I had been treating it for three years.

After work, I headed back home. I walked because my house was only three blocks away from the hospital. As I was walking home, I saw an explosion. Then, everything went black.

I woke up in the hospital. My right leg was in a cast. I saw a pair of crutches next to the bed. I called out for my nurse, but no one came out. I stumbled out of bed. Turns out my leg was not broken. It had healed over time. I wondered how long I had been asleep. It takes a long time for broken legs to heal. I was very thirsty and hungry. I felt sick. Like I had a cold or a cough. My hair was probably sticking out and tangled. I slipped on the clothes next to my bed. There was a glass of water on the table and I drank the whole thing in one gulp. After I took off the cast, I walked outside my room. For some reason my door was boarded. I kicked it open. Were they trying to kill me?

I regretted coming out of my hospital room. One of the patients of The Fever was out running about. He turned towards me. His mouth was foaming and his skin was decayed. Part of his mouth was ripped. His leg was partially eaten which made him limp, but he was still sprinting towards me.

“Calm down, yes I know you’re hurt but sprinting will only make it worse,” I said, trying to calm him down, but it only took me a moment to notice that he would not listen. I ran back inside my hospital room and locked the door. I climbed out of the window. Too bad I was on the third floor. My hands were the only thing that was keeping me up. I was scared. I didn’t want to fall. The ground seemed 300 feet away. I climbed carefully down the side of the hospital and when I got back on the ground I collapsed. I was so relieved to be on the ground. I saw that the other side of the hospital was destroyed. I went home to find out that the explosion had also taken my house.

I knocked on my neighbor’s door but nobody answered. I called my younger sister but she didn’t answer either. I decided to drive to my parent’s house in Atlanta. They were the closest family to my home in Roswell. It took an hour to get there. It would usually take a long time but no one was on the road.

Then I saw a piece of paper on the floor, I picked it up and read it aloud.

The explosion has blown up half the hospital, the infected got out and infected most of the people in Georgia. I’ve been hiding in my basement for days now and I haven’t seen anybody pass by my house. If anybody is reading this I will be out of the state by now and on my way to California. I need to get out of Georgia before the infected go to other states and to different countries. My wife and kids have been infected. I don’t have anything else to do but run. I have a house in Atlanta I might stop by there for a while,” the page said. I stuffed the piece of paper in my pocket. I figured I might meet the person who wrote it later on.

Once I pulled up into my parent’s driveway, I took their key from under the mat and opened the door. No one was home. I searched the tiny house, but my parents were nowhere to be found. I tried calling them. I tried texting them. They wouldn’t respond to anything. I decided to stay there until they got back.

After a few days, my parents still hadn’t gotten back. I went to the 99 cent store for groceries but it appeared that no one was there. Someone was actually there. It was the cashier, who had The Fever too. I ran to the back of the store. Someone had the idea of hiding there too. It was a man named David. He said that he had been hiding back there looking for food. When he found out the zombie……

“Wait, zombie?” I asked.

“Yes, zombie. Have you not figured that out yet? This has been going on for a month. Ever since part of the hospital exploded in Roswell and the infected got out, there have been zombies all over,” said David.

“Wait, a month?!” I asked.

“Yes, a month! Were you not listening? Do you want me to explain it to you again?” asked David impatiently.

“No, sorry. It’s just that I woke up in the hospital after the explosion,” I said.

“What? Well then, you would’ve been bit by now,” said David.

“Well I woke up in the hospital and the door was boarded,” I said. The cashier was banging on the door and trying to get in! David handed me a hammer.

“Hold this,” he said. David kicked open the door which made the zombie stumble back. “Give it to me, NOW!” I handed it to him and he took it and hit the cashier in the head with the hammer. It went through his skull and into his brains. We walked out of the back. We locked the store’s doors and helped ourselves to all the food in the store.

“Are you sure it’s not stealing?” I asked.

“It’s not stealing if there’s no government around to stop us,” David said while chewing on a Snickers bar.

“One cop is probably around to stop us,” I said.

“Trust me, they’re doing the same thing as us,” he said.  He finished the last bite of the candy bar. He threw the wrapper into the bin. He was acting very calm. But I was about to cry.

“What was your life like before the virus spread? Did you have a family? Kids?” I asked.

“Are you always this nosy? That’s my question for you,” David replied. “What’s your name anyways?”

“Taylor,” I said. I grabbed all the water in the refrigerator section and dumped it in a shopping cart.

“You have to keep your inventory light, because you’ll have to carry it all,” he said staring at the water in my cart.

“If you wanted some you could’ve just said so,” I said while handing him a pack of water. When I got home David followed me.

“You have to move around or else the zombies will catch your scent,” he said.

“Well I’ll take that chance,” I said. “You can stay over if you want I have an extra bed.”

Once nightfall came, David said to turn off all the lights because the zombies are attracted to light. I wondered when parents were going to

get home. Will they ever get back? Are they dead? Falling asleep to thoughts like this will make you toss and turn. I scolded myself. Eventually, I fell asleep.

I woke up to David shaking me. “We have to get out of here! Come on! The zombies got in!” he yelled.

“They’re not zombies!” I argued.

“We have no time for this! We need to grab as many supplies that we can and get out!” he pushed. David dragged me out of bed and started getting supplies. I packed some clothes and put on fresh clothes. I rushed into the kitchen and stuffed food and water in my suitcase. I rushed out of the kitchen and while I was running out the door I saw my parents. They had been infected.

I almost started crying when we got out of the door, but we needed to get out of there. I got into my car and rushed out of there. How could I concentrate on driving when I just figured out the reason why my parents weren’t coming home?

David drove to a nearby motel which didn’t look so clean. The signs were falling down. One of the numbers above the doors fell off. We picked a random key on the wall in the lobby. We went to the room that the key fit in. When we went inside we noticed that someone else had the same idea. David pulled out his hammer and walked up to the zombie.

“I’m not a zombie!” the not-zombie yelled.

“What?!” questioned David.

“Oh my god it’s a kid!” I exclaimed.

“Hey! I’m turning 18 in September!” he said.

“What are you doing all alone in this motel?” I asked.

“Oh, I ran away before the apocalypse. What great timing isn’t it?” he said.

“Your parents must be worried sick!” I said.

“No they hate me,”he shrugged.

“I’m sure they don’t,” I said. “What’s your name?” I said.

“Ned Hickery,” he said shyly.

“Ned Hickery? The kid genius?” I asked.

“This is Taylor, I’m David,” said David.

“Wow, you really need to clean this room up,” I said. I looked around the room. Posters covered every corner of the room. Dirty clothes were strewn across the room. Gadgets of all kind were covering the small desk. A suitcase was laid on the bed, it was overflowing. The room smelled like dirty socks and I could hear a movie playing from the computer.

“Yeah, you should see my room at home,” Ned said. Then, out of the corner of my eye I saw a suitcase under the bed. I bent down and pulled it out.

“What’s this for?” I asked.

“That is none of your business,” Ned said and he pulled the suitcase out of my arms. I was suspicious. Why would he be hiding a suitcase under the bed? Why didn’t he let me open the suitcase? I was so engrossed in my questions I didn’t notice David pulling my arm.

“Come on Taylor, there’s nothing here let’s just pick another motel room,” David said.

“Wait! Don’t you want to see what’s in the suitcase?” he asked.

“I thought you didn’t want us to see what’s in the suitcase,”I said.

“I just didn’t want you to open it, it sets off an alarm if the fingerprints don’t match mine,” he said. He opened the case. It had one vial with a clear liquid inside.

“I’ve been working on a cure for Zombitis,” he said.

“It’s originally called The Fever,” I argued.

“You’ve been working on the cure? Why haven’t you used it yet?” David asked.

“Oh I did, it just made the zombie look human, it still had the virus,” Ned said. “I need you to take me to the lab in Monroe, then I can finish the cure.”

“We’ll help you,” said David. “As long as you cure my kid and wife first.” No wonder he doesn’t want to talk about his family, I thought.

“Okay,” Ned said. “Let’s get on the road now!” We packed some food and stuffed it in the trunk.

“You’re almost 18. Can’t you drive?” I asked.

“My car broke down at a gas station, I had to walk to the motel,” he said.

“Then you drive,” said David. He stopped the car and Ned went up, turned on the navigation system and started the car. After thirty minutes we were only a few minutes away from Monroe. Since there were no more cars on the road we could go as fast as we wanted. Then, suddenly, the car jerked.

“We hit something!” I exclaimed. Ned stopped the car and I jumped out. I ran to the back of the car. We had run over a zombie. I heard a groan coming from behind me. It was a zombie! I screamed. Ned and David rushed out of the car. They saw what it was. David grabbed his hammer and smashed the zombie’s head. The zombie fell to the ground and I recognized that it was my younger sister.

“That was my younger sister,” I stammered.

“Really? Oh wow, we could’ve-”

“Shut up, Ned,” said David.

Once we got inside the lab we noticed that the place was totally zombie-infested. David locked up some zombies in a huge display case in the lab. Ned took samples from the infected and locked ourselves in a tiny room with vials and ingredients. While Ned worked on the cure, me and David sat down and talked.

“Hey, are you okay?” David asked.

“Yeah, I just don’t know what to do,”I said.

“Well, sometimes it’s just good to run,” David said. David said something familiar. He wanted his wife and kid to be cured. What he just said. I pulled out the piece of paper that I found on the street.

“What’s that?”asked David. He ripped the piece of paper out of my hand. “Hey, that’s my writing, I wrote that! You found the piece of paper?”

“Yeah, I guess so-”

“Guys! I got it!” Ned exclaimed.

“Ned, be careful before you-” Ned slipped and the vial in his hands had been broken. “Slip.”

“Ned! What have you done! You finished the cure but then you broke it!” David yelled. “Do you remember how to do it?”

“No, but I do have a copy of the ingredients at home!” Ned said.

“And where is that?” I asked.

“California,” he said.

“Oh great, this always happens when somebody finishes what I need,” complained David.

“David? Do you know how to fly a plane?” I asked.

“Yes, but I’m a little rusty,” said David.

“I don’t care, let’s get that cure!” I exclaimed.

David drove us to a nearby airport in Monroe. We boarded a plane, after David checked to see if there was enough fuel.

“I usually fly jets,” he said.

“Just fly the plane,” I ushered. All of us sat in first class.

“I’ve never sat in first class,” I said.

“I have,”said Ned.

“Of course you have, you’re the most smartest kid in America,”I said. Ned helped himself to all the snacks in the cart. I drank some water just to keep myself occupied. Ned almost scared me to death when he had a spaz attack, I thought he caught The Fever!

Finally the plane took off and while it did Ned was going to the restroom. “Ned! Get into your seat! We’re taking off!” I yelled. Ned scrambled out of the restroom and sat in the seat next to me.

After a while, I decided to get some food. Ned ate all the snacks for the first class passengers so I headed to the back of the plane to grab a snack. As I headed to the back of the plane I noticed that there was a sound coming from the back of the plane.

“Ned! I think someone’s at the back of the plane. Grab David’s hammer,” I said. Ned handed me the hammer and followed me to the back of the plane. When we got there I opened the bathroom, no one was there. I opened the curtain the back, no one was there.

“Well I guess no zombie is here then,”I said. I turned around and a zombie was right in front of my face! I took out the hammer and smashed the zombie’s head. I kicked it aside.

“I’m not that hungry anymore,”I said. We got back into our seats. The ride wasn’t smooth, David wasn’t kidding when he said he was a little rusty. When the plane landed we noticed that the plane was a little dented and that he must’ve not have landed well.

“David, you destroyed the plane,” I said.

“Yeah, I haven’t flown in a few years,”he said .

“We can see that,” I said. Me and Ned started chuckling. “We saw a zombie in the back of the plane.”

“Wow, quick change of the subject,” he joked. “Are you okay?”

“Yeah, it was just really surprising,” I said.

“It nearly bit Taylor,” said Ned.

“Yeah and I wouldn’t brag about it,” I said.

“Why wouldn’t you? It would be a very interesting experience,” said Ned. “We have the cure anyway.”

“No we’re here to get the cure right?”I said.

“Oh I already have the list right here, I grabbed it while you guys were talking, you really need to shorten your conversations,” Ned said.

“Wait what? You were here with us the whole time,”I said.

“No I wasn’t, I used my hologram,” he said. He showed us the disk in his hand.

“How did you? Holograms haven’t been made yet!” I exclaimed.

“Oh yes they have, I’ve spent my whole childhood trying to make holograms and I succeeded,” he said.

“Well then, let’s go back into the plane, but maybe a different one this time,” I said.

When we got back to the lab we noticed that the zombies in the display case were gone.

“Where did they go?”I asked.

“I have no id-” A zombie had jumped onto David’s neck and bit him!

“Ned! Work on that cure!” I commanded. I smashed the zombie’s head with a hammer.

“Put me in the display case! Now!” David yelled.

“Okay,”I said obediently. I dragged him into the display case and locked the door. Then he started shaking. It looked like he was having a seizure but much worse. His skin turned pale and his eyes turned bloodshot. He started banging on the glass and I looked away. I couldn’t stand to see my family or friends a zombie. He started shrieking, and I heard banging all around us, we were surrounded by zombies.

“Hurry up Ned!” I commanded.

“Here,” He handed me a vial of clear liquid. “Don’t use it yet, we need to go to a machine in the lab that will copy the cure.

“This is going to be hard,” I said. “Grab a weapon Ned, we’re going to get to that machine the hard way,”I said.

“Are you sure about this?”Ned asked.

“Yes,” I said.

“Because there is a tunnel right there that leads to the machine,” he said.

“Well that tunnel is still infested with zombies,” I said.

“Oh well, here goes,” said Ned. I kicked the door open and all the zombies turned around and started sprinting towards us. We aimed for their heads. When all the zombies were dead we ran to the machine and copied the cure.

“C’mon, let’s go back to the lab,”I said. Then when we got across the tunnel we noticed that the zombies had gotten in.

“Let’s take a bowl of blood on put the cure inside,”Ned said.

“Where are we going to get the blood?”I asked.

“Did you not see the floor?” Ned questioned. So Ned and I put the blood on the floor and poured it into a bowl. And then we poured the cure into the bowl as well. Then we laid the bowl out for the zombies. They slurped it and turn back human.

“Eew! What’s that smell?”

“Why am I slurping blood!”

“Mommy! Where are you? I wanna go home!”

Me and Ned walked into the room and noticed that David got out of his display case and was cured!

“David!” I exclaimed.

“Taylor! We did it! You guys did it!”

“How did it feel being a zombie? What did you think?” Ned bombarded  him with questions.

“I actually didn’t feel anything at all. It’s like waking up from a dreamless sleep,” he said.

So after that we cured all the people in Georgia we worked on other states. David got his kid and wife back and Ned reunited with his parents.

Me, I rebuilt my home. My parents were cured and pretty much every person was cured except the people who were killed. So in the end everything turned back to normal and we all went back home safe and sound. For now…….

THE END

Dawn of the Flamingo

Chapter I

1ntr0duct10n

Hello, my name is Chris. I am a 38-year-old writer and I am a tall American with brown hair and brown eyes. My works are published and popular. This is my story.

It all started when I walked back home from lunch. There was no home to go back to. It was stolen. Everything around the home was normal: no pulled wires, no signs of trucks, no signs anything had been destroyed. In fact, it looked exactly the same. But the most strange thing was that all of my possessions were in a pile, sorted neatly. A nice criminal, never heard of that.

Later that day I put up signs with pictures of my home in case anybody saw it. That night I slept in a hotel. Luckily, insurance would pay for the home, but it was sort of weird.

The police came over to look for evidence, but they found nothing but a pink feather. Why would anybody want to take my home, you ask? Well, because it’s the nicest home on the block. It even got featured in a magazine. It had everything somebody would want: a nice pool, a tennis court… All stolen! They could get replaced, but my dog couldn’t! She was just a babe, smaller than a little dog, but she was stolen when they stole the house.

Now I had to put up double the amount of wanted signs!

At least the milkman came, poor man, always delivering milk while doing several other jobs. He delivered milk to our family since we were kids, and he never said a single word to my parents. He was a tall man who just lost his kids so he always looked glum back then, and he is still glum right now. The only reason I think he makes money is because I pay him a little bit extra.

He called to ask where my house was, and I responded, “Stolen.” He then asked what hotel I was in, and I said which one I was in. A minute later he delivered the day’s milk. I paid him and drank the milk while I wrote my stories. I then fell asleep to awake another day.

Chapter 2

Dawn Of The Flamingo

Thinking back on that day, the most suspicious thing was a custom pickup truck. It was obviously custom and had the slogan, “Custom Trucks.” Well, that doesn’t matter, I guess. I was driving to get some coffee, when I saw one of the same trucks about 10 cars over. I tried to get to it, but the traffic was ghastly and seemed like it didn’t want me to see the license plate. But I did see; it was “2cool4sch00l.”

I then did my normal work. Maybe if I could find that license plate, I could find my house. I asked the police chief if I could look at the database of license plates, and he said, “Yes.” I looked through them and I found one that was what I was looking for, and it was located on my street! I found the house where it was. The car was there but the house wasn’t, and then I thought for a moment of another crime. I waited to see if somebody came to the car, and several people did carrying wood and cement. The person who was obviously the leader was wearing a flamingo-like dress. I remembered to make a mental image of it. I then proceeded to call the police chief and the flamingo’s phone rang. He picked up his phone and said, “Hello, Joker speaking.”

I said “Who’s Joker?”

He answered, “What goods you want? Materials, help, revenge?”

“No, it just seemed I had this number.”

“Oh, I just borrowed it for a while.”

“From who?”

“None of your business.”

*beep*

He hung up, and I looked at the news on my phone: “Local Police Chief Brutally Injured in Attack from Unknown Suspect”

Chapter 3

At least he was ok, but I thought this Joker character had done it. He had his phone, and he was most definitely a bad guy. I went to look around the neighborhood since he probably lived there.

I walked and almost immediately I heard dogs barking. I followed the noise, and it lead me to a huge house painted in an assortment of colors.

I looked through one of the windows to see Joker, but it was not Joker. It was somebody else. It was the second-in-command. I saw him and realized that he would be the chief in no time.

But then before that, I was handcuffed by two police officers. I said “I was just looking at the house!”

Then the first police officer said, “Thats what they all say.”

“But I am telling the truth!”

“Really I doubt that, you even have the air of a criminal.”

“Oh come on, do I wear a ski mask?!”

“No, but–”

“You just want to arrest me because he told you to, I’m not doing anything wrong!”

“Here, we will let you go if you don’t tell anybody about this conversation.”

I didn’t go to jail, but I realized how corrupt the police were going to be if I didn’t get Joker out of the position of chief. I then asked the in-term chief to let me look at his call logs. After about two hours I found what I was looking for. It was a call saying, “Let’s go steal some houses.” Joker was saying this to an unknown person.

Just then Joker walked into the room. “Delete the records or that pretty little face will be not so pretty anymore,” he said.

So I got rid of the police files, and he left the room. But I had the number of the person he called, so I called it.

“Hello, Family Deconstruction speaking.”

“Hey, it’s Joker. I forgot how to get to your house.”

“Oh, no problem, it’s just 12345 Nowita Place.”

“Ok, coming.”

*beep*

I went to the house, but before I got to the lawn, I felt stunned for a second. I doubled over. I looked at my leg and blood was oozing out. I then started feeling a little bit woozy then finally fainted.

Chapter 4

I woke up. I was really cold, and my leg was bandaged. I was in somebody’s cellar; there were cases of wine and they looked incredibly old, but other than that the room was sweaty and smelled like dead things.

I tried to leave the cellar only to find the door locked.

I took a crowbar that was lying there and tried to open it. The crowbar got stuck in the wood and wouldn’t come out. Then after a little bit more searching I found a relatively new axe and smashed the door open. The crowbar then dropped, smashed my foot, and left it almost broken.

I crept around, trying to find the frontdoor of the house nearby. It was a cold, windless night so I could be easily heard.

“Hello, my nosey little friend,” said Joker.

I didn’t make any noise. I saw blood coming from underneath the front door. I opened the door and Joker was there. So was a dead man.

The body was bloody and several wounds were stabbed onto it. Joker stood there with a bloody knife.

Instantly, Joker lunged at me. I caught his arm and held it firmly. We struggled for a little bit. My arm was sweaty and he was going to kill me.

I shoved Joker away and quickly rolled and found a pistol on the ground. I pointed it at Joker’s head. I started sweating. It felt like we were there for an hour.

I shot and his body lurched backwards in pain. Then he coughed up some blood and fainted.

I then saw if he had some keys and he did. I ran and ran for what seemed like an hour, trying every car on the street. I finally found his car and plugged in the engine. It took a few minutes but eventually it woke up. Then I drove, but I didn’t know where I was, so I called the chief.

*Ring*

*Ring*

“Hello, Police Chief Daniels.”

“The Second just murdered a man, 1384 Windton Ave.”

“What?! I will be there immediately!”

*beep*

Afterword

Its been two years since the incident and I have mostly forgotten it.

I walked to the cafe, ordered some coffee and left. I was walking back home from work, when I strolled through my front door, and my dog greeted me. I got a blanket and watched T.V. I switched on the news for awhile. It was just some political nonsense when suddenly some breaking news came on: “Jail Break at Local Jail. High Class Inmates Escape.”  I thought, ‘Oh that’s horrible. I better lock my doors and close my windows.’ Sort of reminded me of Joker, but nah that couldn’t be.

I went to get some ice cream. They had rounded up most of the prisoners and so the neighborhood felt somewhat safe. I ate the ice cream and went back home. Yes my home.

I sat down and fell asleep. I woke up to a text: “I’m coming.”  I got another text: “That face won’t be so pretty when I’m done with it. Say goodbye.” I looked at the news, and I had a feeling I knew what had happened. “Local Police Station Blown Up, Police Chief Dies.” Then, suddenly, I heard a knock on the door.

THE END

Life in a Closet

I have a secret. A really important secret. Nobody can know. My secret? I live in a closet. A small closet, with a door in the back. Behind that door hides a world full of adventures. And that world, that’s where I live. In a closet.

Once you realize you have a Closet World accessible closet, a robot is created to make it look like you’re not a crazy teenager locked in a closet.

Other people live there, too. My best friend’s name is Hannah. She lives in a closet in Arizona, but she practically lives in Closet World.

Anyway, today Hannah asked me if I wanted to come back to Arizona with her. Apparently she found her closet key and is able to swap places with her robot so it looks like I’m a friend from school. Hannah’s one of those techy kids who can figure everything out.

When we get to her house, she holds onto me and swaps places with her robot, who’s right outside her house. Hannah walks to her front door with my arm still cuffed in her hand. Her front door is freshly painted a soft shade of purple, with a gold and shiny doorknob.

“It’s real gold,” she informs me as I stare in awe. “You can feel it.” I slowly tap the smooth gold. It feels just like Hannah’s shiny light brown hair with natural blonde highlights that’s currently in a tight bun. She’s been growing it out since she was 10, and that means 6 years worth of hair! When she sits, her hair is down to her knees. My hair is nothing compared to hers, 8 inches of dark brown hair, faded blue dip dye at the bottom, leaving the bottoms bleached.

“You can open it.” Hannah says, interrupting my thoughts. I reach for the shiny knob, then I turn it, but it stops me.

“Locked.” I say. I feel the knob as she pulls out her keys from her bag.

“Sorry.” She says. She unlocks the door and we go inside.  We go down a long hallway painted paper-white that has drawings of trees that have labels for grades K-10th.

“I draw one every year,” Hannah tells me as she sees my amazement towards the pictures. “I enter them in the Arizona National Tree Drawing Contest. I’ve won every year.”

“There’s a-” I pause while making my voice all goofy “-tree drawing contest?” There’s a brief moment of silence, then we burst out in laughter. Our friendship just works that way.

“What’s all the racket down there?” an older woman’s voice says from the top of the staircase. Hannah leads me to the top, revealing her mother. Her mom has straight blonde hair that goes a bit past her shoulders. Her eyes are icy blue with anger. Her nose is long and narrow with a point at the end. Her freckless face is pale as the white painted walls.

“Mom, this is a friend from school,” Hannah says as if it was true. She’s such a great actress.

“What’s your name, dear?” Hannah’s mom asks politely. I don’t know what to say. Should I reveal my identity to this stranger I just met, or should I lie?

“Um, I’m Violet,” I say. Hannah glares at me and I shrug.

“But everyone calls her Ivy, right Ivy?” Hannah steps in. I nod even though it isn’t true. My real name is Ivy. It’s not that everyone called me that as a nickname, it’s just that it’s my real name.

“Flowers,” Hannah’s mom says. “Pretty. So, Ivy, where are you from?” I stop myself from saying Closet World, and I take a minute to remember where I’m from.

“California,” I say. “Yeah. In Hollywood, actually.” Hannah’s mom’s smile fades into a frown.

“Oh, what’s the story with that?” she asks.

“Um, I was raised by 2 movie stars… ?” Hannah’s mom doesn’t seem too flattered. She just fakes a smile at me.

“Well, you two can go to Hannah’s room. Oh, and by the way, my name is Mona.” Hannah’s mom, who now has a name, says.

Hannah leads me down a long hallway with lots of doors. We reach one door that has lots of signs. “NO TRESPASSING!” one says. “Property of Hannah B. Middleton” says another. My eyes light up to a handmade one that reads, “Yep, keep going down the hallway. Nothing to see here.” I laugh out loud at the humor of it.

We go into the room painted purple with blue and green lines trailing across the room, overlapping at parts, but also going in opposite lengths of the room. What I like about the lines are that they always are united, even if blue’s at the floor and green’s at the ceiling. I look over behind me and see a flower painted on the wall, every other petal blue, and the ones in between green. I see that the two lines generated from that flower. It’s almost like they’re siblings, two lines coming from the same flower, like two children coming from the same parents.

“So…” Hannah says. “What do you want to do?” I scan the room, looking for games I want to play or books I want to read. Then I look through the open door and see the long hallway.

“A tour of your house would be cool.” I say casually. But in my mind I’m begging, just thinking how cool it would be.

“That’d take HOURS.” Hannah says, exclaiming the hours.

“I’ve got all day.” I remind her. She thinks for a second then finally makes her decision.

“No,” I sigh and sit down on her bed. “We have to get back to Closet World by 9:00. We’re known there, people will start worrying.”

She’s right. Both of us were known for basically just being people. We always say hi to people (on the bus, on the streets, in the elevator, etc.).

“So…” Hannah says. “what do you think of Max?”

“Max?” I ask with disgust. Hannah nods. “No way.”

“What about Theo?”

“Not my type.”

“Ryan?”

“He’s creepy.”

“Will?”

“Socially awkward.”

“Bryan?”

“Doesn’t know I exist.”

“Austin?”

I pause at the sound of that name.

“Okay…” Hannah says. “Guess Austin’s the one.”

“No no no,” I say while stopping her from taking out her phone and calling him. “I paused because I was debating whether to barf or slap you. Austin. Ugh.” There’s an awkward moment of me staring at Hannah and Hannah staring at me for like 5 seconds, then she decides it ‘s about time to speak up.

“I can tell you like him.” her straight face turned to a smirk. I roll my eyes.

“I already told you. I hate him.”

“Sure you do.” She smirks.

“I don’t!” I throw a pillow at her. It had some kind of band on it.

“What’s…” I take a minute to read the front of it. “Glowing in the Day?” I squint while reading it.

“Oh, right…” Hannah says while snatching the pillow off the ground. “You’ve been trapped in a closet for 3 years. They’re a band, idiot.” She whacks me with the pillow.

“Well I’m sorry I’m not a techy nerd like you!” I whack her back.

“Well I don’t mean to rain on your parade, but I graduated college with a masters degree in technology. Oh, right, I’m sixteen. Wanna look at my Harvard acceptance letter from 5 YEARS AGO?” Suddenly I start sobbing uncontrollably. My best friend got into a great college when she was 11, and I dropped out of high school after 10th grade.

“What about those pictures up on the wall, the trees. Aren’t you supposed to be going to 11th grade in 2 months?”

“I skipped a bunch of grades,” she says softly while putting a hand on my shoulder. “After 10th, which was supposed to be 5th, I went straight to college.”

“You know what, I’ll just leave. I’m not a help in your life. This was all a mistake. Our friendship was a mistake. Bye.” I skim the room for her closet, then finally find it.

“Ivy,” I turn around. “Sorry. I know you’re still gonna leave me, but I just want you to know. I’m sorry.” I see real tears in Hannah’s eyes. For the first time in years, she cries real tears. Real, salty tears.

“I’m sorry too. Here’s this 20 dollar bill,” I pull out my last bit of money from my wallet. “You can have it. Though it won’t be much in your million dollar house.” I look around the room at all her expensive things.

“Ivy I didn’t think-”

“Keep it.” I say and then walk to the closet in the left corner farthest from the door. I slide open the door on the right side.

“Ivy,” Hannah says gently. I turn around. “Here’s the key,” she tosses me her key to the door in the back. “I won’t need it.” I wipe a tear from my left eye.

“Thanks for being a friend.” I say then walk to the closet. I see her creepy robot waving goodbye at me. I wave back only because I’m scared it’s gonna kill me.

I move some clothes out of the way and go to the door. I put the key in and twist. When I get through the tunnel, (which is much like the ones leading to airplanes) I see Hannah’s door, blending in with the purple polka dots and black background theme for today. Every day we have a theme, and everything in closet world just turns into the theme. Today the theme is rather dark, black with royal purple. My favorite theme was lilac and teal vertical stripes, mainly because those are my favorite colors. I look down at my skin. Black with white polka dots. In those 20 minutes I spent back on Earth, it was strange to have my olive colored skin back. To be different, and stand out. And my hair, it was brown again. With the bottoms bleached. My hair’s now black with the thick purple polka dots that cover the city from head to toe.

I decide to look behind Hannah’s door. See if there’s a connection to Earth. But there’s just a door. But now I need to find my way back to town, so I can be in my own house again. Not this storage closet with a bunch of doors. It’s not even a closet, just a narrow hallway with doors in the back. I decide to go all the way to the end of the hallway. Maybe I can make some sort of connection to Hannah. Maybe I can tell her I’m sorry for overreacting about the tiniest things. Maybe I can tell her that I really DO like Austin, and that I was just embarrassed. Maybe I can tell her that I want her to be my friend again.

I suddenly feel the need to sit down and start crying. What kind of person am I? Dumping my best friend because I was embarrassed? You overreact way too much, Ivy. A little voice in my head convinces you. I bet Hannah never wanted to be your friend in the first place. Another tells me. More voices with negative thoughts join in, increasing the speed and volume so that all I can hear is negative thoughts.

“STOP!!!” I scream at the top of my lungs. For once, they stop. I lay down on my right side. I hear a cracking noise, then remember the keys Hannah gave me. Well now, they’re broken. Thanks to me.

I wipe my eyes and get up to start my journey to the end of the hallway. I walk for minutes. Hours. I finally come across a door with the name, “Ivy Sinclair” imprinted on it. Out of anger, I rip the door out of the socket. My vision starts to go black. Then all at once, it vanishes.

 

 

Three Short Words

Before We Get Started

“Ready?” Aliyah Goldstein asked her co-worker, Dennis Root. They were partners on the designing job for Verizon, using Dennis’s big imagination and Aliyah’s artistic talent. They were the perfect team. But we must go back to deep, deep history.

On the first day of ninth grade, Dennis saw her baby-blue eyes and that hair, the brown beachy waves and the natural, blonde highlights, oh, how he loved her hair. Her olive-colored smooth skin along with her makeup-free face. Her best feature, in his opinion, was her clean language, but her soothing voice (it reminded him of honey) wouldn’t make sense any other way.

“Okay, let’s see,”  said the busy tech designing teacher, while looking down at his many paperworks. “First we’ll have… Aliyah Goldstein and Dennis Root?” the teacher looked up. “Stand up if it’s you.” The two nervous teens nervously stood up, unaware of what they would be in for. Let’s go into deeper history.

Aliyah was born on February 4, 1978. Her parents loved her with their whole hearts, but one day she heard something about some sort of car crash, and refused to hear more. Her father always wanted her to be an electrician, no matter what kind of electronic she was making. To this day, she still remembers her father’s exact words: “Grow up. Do something with your life. Become an electrician, for any kind of electronic.” It wasn’t the kind of, “Oh, grow up. Just go do something with your wasted life.” It was encouraging, and made her believe that even if they WERE dead, her father would still be proud.

Dennis was born on July 7, 1978. His parents are both 100% alive and healthy. His mother is a nutritionist and his father is a doctor, so he has no choice but to be healthy. His parents will make him. Still, at the age of 35 (as of April 2014), he lives with his parents. They want him to take on a profession other than designing cell phones, but — unlike Aliyah — he stuck to his profession. Now, back to ninth grade tech.

“Okay, Aliyah and Dennis will be partnered-up since they’re  both new. Everyone else, find last year’s partner.” From then on, it’s history. The two naturally clicked, and then got a job working for Verizon.

“As always,” Dennis replied. Their rule: improv. No scripts for who says what or anything like that. Improv.

“This,” Aliyah said while displaying the new phone model, “is the Veri Tech Smartphone-” she paused. “-slash  Hologram Mini-Tech. The device folds up so it can fit in somebody’s pocket. ” It went on, and at the end of the presentation they got a standing ovation for their presentation.

Dennis was happy about the ovation and noticed all the smiling faces, but what he didn’t notice was the CEO talking to Aliyah.

Chapter 1

That night, Dennis went home and was excited to tell his parents about the ovation. They were happy to hear, because the duo’s work didn’t really get used. Ever.

“Know that girl, Aliyah. She seems pretty nice. How’s the relationship going?” his father, or should I say, Dr. Root asked.

“Well, there isn’t much of a big relationship. We’re friends, just that,” Dennis confidently replied. Although, deep, deep down inside, he did have some feelings for Aliyah, he wasn’t going to admit that anytime soon.

“Aliyah seems nice. We should invite her over and get to know her. We’re sure she is a great designer,” his mother genuinely told him.

“Yeah, well the creativity is mainly my part, and the art is mainly her part,” Dennis was a bit ashamed that it was sort of  like that he was making the great ideas and she was just doing all the work.

“Well, it looks like it’s time for rest, Dennis,” Dr. Root let him know.

“Aw, but pa! It’s only 9:30!” Dennis complained like a 7-year-old. He hasn’t exactly grown out from childhood.

“We’re gonna have a big day tomorrow, and sleep is what we need.”

Dennis wasn’t going to argue, his parents would just win. He stumped into his room, not dropping the 7-year-old act. In fact, he basically was a 7-year-old. He had posters of super heros plastered on his walls and had a spiderman bed set. A superhero-loving 35-year-old (as of May 2014), that’s Dennis Root for ya.

***

“Please welcome our head designers, Aliyah Goldstein and Dennis Root.” The CEO presented the duo to the board of Verizon to present their new design. Aliyah basically presented the whole model, since Dennis was staring at her the whole time. She had the same 14 year old face: baby blue eyes, brown beachy waves with natural, blonde highlights, olive-colored skin, but now with some lip gloss and brown eyeliner, and a voice like honey.

At the end of their, er, Aliyah’s presentation, they got a standing ovation from the board members. Dennis was surprised that they were the head designers; none of their work had even gotten a single clap before this. But a standing ovation from the CEO, that was a big deal.

At the end of their 10:00 p.m.-6:00 a.m. shift, Aliyah spoke to Dennis about some very important business.

“There’s a job offering up for us, and even though they’re good and everything, it might not be exactly what we want, we’re a team, and we have to agree.”

“What’s the job?” Dennis asked.

“It’s in the building department; we build what other people design.”

“How much more money?” Dennis was all questions. Though, he didn’t care about money that much.

“They said they’ll get back to us on that.”

“How about we think about it for now.”

“Ok.” And there, then they both simply left.

That night at dinner, Dennis spoke to his parents. He explained every detail of it, them not knowing how much more money, and the building department, everything.

“Dennis, if it’s more money, then take it. Money is very important, and we don’t want to miss our chance of getting more.” Dr. Root was a very selfish man, and sometimes Dennis was ahamed they were related.

“Dad, not everything is about money. If we take it, we’re closing up a spot for the less fortunate to make money. And we’re pretty good designers.”

“Dennis, sweetie. Your father makes a point. Money is what we need right now, and we both made the mistake of early retirement, so please. Take it.” Mrs. Root just agreed with her husband.

“Why do we even bother asking their advice? My parents just want money, money money, that’s all they care about. What about what makes their son happy? What about helping others? But no, it’s just money,” Dennis spoke to himself, although his parents were listening closely. “Goodnight.” Dennis spoke directly to the selfish relatives of his who shall remain nameless. He left the conversation at a negative note and went towards his room.

“But Dennis, it’s only 9:30!” his father called after him. It really depended on the conversation that decided what happened at 9:30.

“Well that’s too bad!” Dennis yelled without turning around. He heard a loud bang on their old wood table. Dennis remembered what people said about his father when they were young: David bangs the table when he’s mad. Now that brightened up his day.

I stepped down the stairs to the restaurant. Of course, to meet Aliyah. We had been dating for five years now, and it was about time. I tried not to look like an amateur, dressed in my younger brother’s suit. At the age of 41, I don’t think I should stay forever alone. Besides, we were meant to be.

“Hi,” Aliyah shyly said. She was so cute like that. I pulled out one of the wood chairs for her to sit. I sat in my own chair, and we discussed the menu.

“I want the caviar,” I said to nobody in particular. I was paying. I wasn’t telling her what to get me.

“The bouillabaisse looks good,” she commented. After we were almost done eating our French cuisine (forgive me I didn’t take French), I decided to do what I’d be waiting for since the first day of ninth grade. I got down on one knee and-

“Aliyah Goldstein, will you marry me?” I let the words quickly slip out of my mouth. An awkward silence fell over our table for two.

“So… will you?” I asked again. She better say something.

“No.”  Her hushed tone was part of what was so heartbreaking.

“Aaaaaaaaaahhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh!!!!!!!!!!!!!!” Dennis sat up in his bed, breathing very, very heavily.

“What the hell is going on up there?” he heard his father ask from downstairs.

“Sounds like Dennis had a nightmare,” his mother said. He heard her rush up the stairs to his room.

“Dennis sweetie, what happened?” Part of what he thought was so annoying about his mom was that she was so kind. Even though he liked kindness, it was too much for him to handle.

“Aliyah… said… no,” was all he managed to let out of his mouth. His mom did NOT need to get into his personal life. Even between all the heavy breathing, little miss smarty-pants was able to figure out what he was talking about. Exactly. You don’t want your mom to know that you woke up screaming because the love of your life said no to your proposal in a dream, now do you. Well, Dennis didn’t.

“Aw Dennis, it’s ok. Aliyah is a very beautiful, and awesome, and lovely, and way too out- of-your-league girl.”

“Well, dayum. Duh lady!” Dennis screamed.

“And she definitely doesn’t deserve a stupid little nerdy crybaby, take yourself for example.”

“Goddammit mom!” Dennis screamed, and before she could do anything, he ran out of the house.

Chapter 2

Dennis stormed out of the house, wishing for a bunch of things. In fact, he made a list:

Want to have…

-a better mom

-a better dad

-Aliyah

He couldn’t believe he wrote that. But, being Dennis Root, he continued the list.

-a dog

-a wedding by 40

-my own place 😉

He stopped there. He couldn’t think of anymore. Since he had nowhere to go, he decided to go home. His parents were probably worried sick about him. But then he thought, This might be worth the walk. And boy, he was right.

Walking about the streets of Hoboken, New Jersey, Dennis turned onto Washington. Ah, Washington. The original “main street” of Hoboken. But he wanted to go past Washington, to the river. He walked down to Pier A Park, a pier that wasn’t much of a park, that was Pier C’s job. Walking towards the water, he looked at Sinatra Park, and then at New York City, where he worked. Aliyah lived there, in her own apartment with her dog. Oh, how Dennis loved her dog, Lucy.

Lucy was a 2 year old pug that was going to be killed after her 6 months of puppyhood. Thankfully, Aliyah rescued her just in time, along with her 6 brothers and 3 sisters and her parents. After 6 months of that, on the young dogs’ birthdays, she let them go to their forever owners, only keeping Lucy.

Dennis walked south, so he could see Aliyah’s city better. He heard the clock strike midnight, and a bunch of people cheering. The Empire State Building was red, white, and blue. Of course, Dennis thought. It’s the Fourth of July, 2014. That’s 3 days until my birthday. He decided to start walking to fifth street so he could go on to Jefferson and go home. But somewhere along Washington Street he ran into a blue-eyed someone named Aliyah.

“Aliyah,” Dennis said.

“Dennis,” Aliyah said. “this is a pleasant surprise. Fourth of July in Hoboken. Wow. Just, wow.”

“We put on a real show, us Jerseyans,” Dennis joked, and to his surprise, Aliyah laughed. Her neck crouched over and she pulled her hair out of her face while rising back to her full height.

“The view of the skyline is just amazing. Should we go get a better look?” Aliyah asked.

“Sure, follow my lead.” They walked back downtown, and Dennis was a bit disappointed that he couldn’t stop at 7-Eleven or Subway, but that was okay because he was going to be coming home on the same path.

They walked back right in front of the pier. Dennis walked into the park, but then he realized Aliyah wasn’t following him. He turned around and found Aliyah with her arms crossed. Dennis raised his eyebrows and stuck his head out as if he were asking why she wasn’t coming.

“Why can’t we go over there?” Aliyah pointed to Pier C Park. “It seems funner. Yes, everybody knows, funner isn’t a word, but it’s funner to say funner even though funner isn’t a word.”

“Fine,” Dennis grumbled while walking over to Pier C. “That doesn’t mean there’s a better view or anything, all it has is a playground and it’s a bit more West, er, uh. North, er, uh…” He wanted to impress Aliyah with his geography skills, except for the fact that he didn’t really have any…

“North,” Aliyah corrected, realizing he was having a bit of trouble.

“Yeah… right… that…” Dennis awkwardly said. “So,” he said after an awkward silence. “My birthday’s in 3 days.”

“And mine’s in 8 months,” Aliyah sighed. “36 years and almost a half with still no response from my parents,” Aliyah sighed and continued walking. Dennis ran up to her to catch up to her speedy walking.

“Aliyah,” Dennis sighed as she turned her left foot to face him while picking her right one up. She planted her right foot onto the hard concrete. “They’re alive. It’s guaranteed. Trust me.”

“No it’s not, Dennis. None of us know that.”

“Al-”

“They left me 27 years ago!” Aliyah screamed. “Do you know how hard that was? Living on my own at a young age was the most stressful part of my life, Dennis. You’re lucky your parents are there for you. Oh, there’s one thing that was left out about the promotion,” Aliyah told him. They stopped walking.

“Okay, what is it?” Dennis asked confidently, knowing there still would be no way for him to take it.

“It’s in Canada.”

 

 

 

Chapter 3

“Canada!?” Dennis exclaimed. “Ok, now we definitely CAN’T take the promotion. Sorry, Aliyah.”  He started walking faster and faster and faster until Aliyah caught up right in front of the entrance to Pier C Park.

“Think about it,” Aliyah said while putting her right hand on his left shoulder, causing him to turn around. “We’re both in our mid-30s, single, and we don’t have enough money. Think about it, Dennis. We could have a future in Canada. Living in New York City is a bit… much. Plus, I’m all alone. You’re with your parents.” And that’s what the forming tears of loneliness in Dennis’s eyes were for. He paused for a minute waiting for a good reply. Then it hit him.

“Then I’ll feel thankful for being one of the 50,00 cramped into a square mile.” Was all he managed to say with a broken voice. And just like that, he walked in the other direction to go back to his house.

***

When Dennis arrived at home, his parents were asleep, so he could go straight up to his room and go to sleep. But there was only one problem with that: he wasn’t tired. He looked around to find his green iPhone 5c (it came with the job), but it was nowhere to be seen.

Great. Dennis thought. Just great. It’s 1AM, I’m fully awake, and now my stupid phone is missing. He kicked his twin-sized bed and his phone came out from in between the mattress and the frame. He picked it up and layed down on his bed. He opened Wipeout and started playing until, well, Zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz…

“Hello I can’t really read this it’s really small but I guess I sorta can read it but like not really, I mean, it’s small but I’m not old yet so I can read it how about you?” squeaked a tiny little mouse on a bright green field. “I really need to have normal dreams,” Dennis said as he scratched his head.

***

“Aaaaaaahhhhh!” Dennis screamed as he woke up. He rolled off of his bed and thumped on his head. “Ugh,” he said shortly after, he felt the large bump on his forehead. Then the little mouse from his strange dream came back to him. He pictured her little gray face with her blue eyes and big ears until he realized: the mouse was Aliyah. Her soft face, and those beautiful, sparkling, blue eyes. Though her voice wasn’t as squeaky as a mouse, Dennis could still feel a bit of resemblance between both their voices. Like how she pronounced syrup, sort of taking the y away and leaving it sounding like “surup.” And although the mouse never squeaked out the word syrup, Dennis could tell that she’d pronounce it the Aliyah way. He was certain.

“I have to do something about this,” Dennis spoke to himself while rolling out of bed. “I have to get Aliyah before she goes off to Canada.” But somewhere in his confused mind, a voice doubted him. Why would you even think Aliyah would take you? You’re a 6 and she’s a 10. Just forget it.  Dennis thought about those 2 last sentences. The longer he thought about it, the more true it felt.

“I’m a 6, she’s a 10. Forget it.” He repeated that over and over again, and then he started to have some fun with it.

“I’m a 6, she’s a 10, she’s so fit, I’m insecure, but she’s comin’ back for more. How did we end up here, in the first place, ya said ya had your…” By the time he got to that, Dennis realized he was singing End Up Here by 5 Seconds of Summer.

At once, he stopped, and heard his phone playing it. After about a second, he sang along with it again. About 6 seconds later, the music stopped. He walked over to his phone and clicked the home button. There was one notification that read: Missed Call Aliyah Goldstein

“She called me! She needs a call back!” So Dennis went and called Aliyah. She picked up immediately.

“Hello?” Aliyah asked.

“Hey, um, there was a call with your name, just wanted to check in and see if everything’s okay.”

“Yeah, everything’s great. Though your voice sounds very tired, or maybe it’s just the phone.”

“Um, let’s just say my bed has been recently slept in by someone named Me.”

“Really, there’s a person named Me? Just kidding. But seriously, check the time! It’s noon!”

“So, what was the missed call supposed to be?”

“Oh, it was probably a butt-dial. Sorry.” Aliyah hung up before Dennis could respond. But how would she butt-dial him? He was Dennis Root. Contacts went by last name. R was pretty close to Z.

But then Dennis realized that there were other loners in the world. People who had only a few contacts. And as cool as Aliyah seemed, he had to accept it: Aliyah was a loner.

Chapter 4

Since the 4th of July was a Friday in 2014, the next time Dennis saw Aliyah was on Monday, July 7th. The 36th turning of Dennis. He got a cake and The Board Of Decision (yes, they capitalized the o in “of.” That’s how serious Verizon workers are) came to celebrate.

Dennis walked over to Aliyah as the red velvet 3 layered cake was being passed out. As soon as the two made eye contact, Aliyah rushed out. Dennis followed her. They went down the block, took a left,  Jay Walked through every road, and then they were at the pier. Pier 26, more specifically.

“What’s all this? It’s my birthday, we’re eating my favorite cake.”

“Dennis,” Aliyah weakly spoke. “My boat’s here. It’s taking me to Canada. You know, because they say a boat instead of about. Goodbye.” Dennis chuckled then turned around to look at, well, something besides his dream girl leaving. When he turned around the boat was far away.

“Aliyah, wait!” he called. But it was too late. The boat had already left. “I love you.”

 

Add Two Eggs and A Cup of Charming

Prologue

I’m Mandy Simon. I’m thirteen, I have brown hair, green eyes, I’m tall, I’m thin, shy, quiet, creative, calm, smart, and a witch.

What? You need me to repeat what I just said?

Oh. Okay.

I’m a witch.

I know it makes no sense, but it’s true. I have the power to bake a boy. All witches have one main power and a bunch of other little ones, and my main power is to bake a boy.

What? That doesn’t  make sense?

Fine, fine. I’ll explain it.

Thirteen years ago, I was born. As the daughter of a wizard and a poor baker, I became a witch. And because I’m boy crazy and a hopeless romantic, I have the power to create a male human through baking. Like, I can turn vinegar into bravery, and sugar into strength. Just tell me your ideal male human, and I’ll bake him! And don’t worry, I’ll do it great. I’ve been mixing up beaus and cooking up guys since I was three. So, sit back, relax, and let me create your perfect bachelor.

Just stop by my family’s Matchmaker Bakery and we’ll turn flour into falling in love!

And, you’ll get to hear about a crazy adventure I had a few months ago.

Or you could read this book.

But don’t tell my mom,  I’m writing this, I’m supposed to be making flyers right now.

(Evil Laugh).

 

Chapter 1.

Okay. First of all, you should know a little bit about my family. I’m the youngest of ten kids, for one. My siblings are Olivia, Talia, Tara, Fanny, Felicia, Sam, Sarah, Emily, and Nina. Olivia and Talia are twins, and Fanny, Felicia, Sam and Sarah are quadruplets. Emily and Nina are fraternal twins. I don’t understand WHY my parents were willing to have ten kids. Or why they had two sets of twins, a set of quadruplets, Tara, and me. And why did all my siblings end up having white blond hair and crystal blue eyes, just like my mom, while I have dark brown hair and green eyes like my dad, who by the way, ran off somewhere when I was two. So I have nine siblings, only one person to take care of us, no father, and no friends. Oh yeah, I forgot to mention I’m friendless ‘cause everyone at school thinks I’m a weirdo. My mom calls it quirky, but I know I’m just a weirdo. Good thing  me and my sisters got pulled out of school.

The only friend I have is Fanny. Of course, the rest of my siblings love me and are nice to me, but Fanny’s the only one who gets it. She’s the only one who realizes how hard it is to be the youngest of ten kids, to look nothing like them, to not have a father, and to be bullied and friendless. She also makes me happy and brings out the best in me. I’d say she’s the best sister ever, but I have eight others, so I can’t. Let me tell you about them. Olivia’s the brains. Her main power is having a brain twice the size of a normal human’s brain. She read War and Peace at three, and Pride and Prejudice at six. To kill a Mockingbird came at eight. She’s been doing physics and chemistry for as long as I could remember. She’s won awards and prizes and trophies for everything in academics. She could walk at six months. Her first word was “obstreperous. ” Honestly, Olivia’s smarter than Einstein. His IQ was 160, Olivia’s is 200. She is smart.

Now I’ll tell you about Talia. She’s the athlete. Her power is being good at sports. She does Track, Soccer, Basketball, Baseball, Swimming, Dance, Golf, Bowling, and Croquet. You name it, she does it. She’s Varsity in all of those sports and all her coaches say she could go to the Olympics now, if she wanted, even though she’s only fifteen. That girl is strong.

Now I’ll tell you about Tara. She’s the creative one.  Her power is the arts. She paints, acts, sings, dances and plays seven different instruments. She does concerts, plays, and art galleries all the time. Her voice is like angels, her dancing is incredible, her paintings are amazing, her acting is perfect, and when she plays her instruments, it’s like an orchestra. She’s so talented that I don’t know any person more talented than her. Honestly, I don’t.

Next is Fanny. She’s a comedian. Her main power is making people laugh. She does corny jokes, adult jokes, kid jokes, bad jokes, weird jokes, prop jokes, knock knock jokes, riddle jokes, you name it, she does it. She has a joke for every person she meets. Like our pediatrician. “Laughter is the best medicine!” she always says. She’s performed skits and stand-up comedy and anything that will make you laugh. With Fanny, nothing’s ‘not funny’. With Fanny, there’s always time for a joke.

Now you’ll hear about Felicia. Felicia is a psychologist. She’s really smart and wise, and she totally understands people. (That’s her main power, understanding people). And she will always listen if you’ve had a bad day.  And she knows lots of metaphors and exercises. She could be a therapist right now. No PhD needed.

Now it’s Sam’s turn. She’s an engineer. She can build clocks, mechanical toys, blenders, she can even fix a car. She’s got a gift with mechanical things. She could totally fix a car, if she wanted to. Her power is understanding how all these things work and being able to build them. She’s really smart.

Now here’s Sarah. She’s a designer. She can make shirts, bottoms, accessories, you name it she can make it. That’s her main power. Clothing design. Who’s next? Oh, yeah, Emily. She’s a baker. She’s the only one of the family who has more of a normal talent, right? Wrong. She can bake cookies in two seconds, cakes, brownies, and cupcakes in one, and honestly, her pastries are the best thing you’ve ever tasted. There’s nothing better than her cupcakes, and her cookies are heaven in my mouth. If you don’t want to believe me, then fine, but you’re the one missing out on her INCREDIBLE, AMAZING, STUPENDOUS, DELICIOUS HEAVENLY SWEETS!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Okay, I’m calm now.

Now I’ll tell you about Nina. Last but not least, Nina. She’s a copper. Out of all the weird talents, my sister knows about how to be a cop. She’s a genius at finding clues, a prodigy at seeing if people are speeding, and if you put one toe out of the line of the law, she’s got you. My sisters have straaaaaaaaaange powers. Okay. Now that I’ve told you about my sisters, I can get on with the stor-

Uh-oh. Gotta go. I’m supposed to have two hundred flyers for the bakery, and my mom’s really mad I was writing this book instead of making flyers. Gotta run!

Chapter 2.

Okay, now that I managed to get my mom off my back, I can keep writing. But I’m not sure what to write next, because I don’t exactly remember that well what happened at this time. Oh! I remember now! This is when the real fun began: I had just finished a long, hard day of baking boys, and I was exhausted. People had wanted all sorts of kind of guys, and the more you ask me to bake, the more tired I get. So at that time, I just wanted to flop on a bed and do nothing. But when I did flop on my bed, I realized something.

All the time, every day, people come into my family’s bakery and ask for their ideal man. I bake it for them, and they go off and live happily ever after. Meanwhile, I just work and work. But then I realized that I don’t ever think about the kind of guy I would like.

“Oh, wow,” I said to myself. “I can’t believe I’ve never realized this before.” So then I thought, well, what kind of guy would I like? “Well, he’d be tall. With dark brown hair and green eyes. He’d have freckles, too.” Then I thought some more. “He’d be funny, sweet, passionate, sensitive, and romantic.” Then I thought a little more. “He’d be kind and honest, too. He’d also be open-minded and understanding.” Then I thought one last time. “He would also be sympathetic and caring. And going out with him wouldn’t be awkward. And I would be able to tell him anything. I could always confide in him. And when I have a bad day, he’ll bring out my favorite movie, or give roses or chocolates. And most of all, he’d care about me and accept me, flaws and all.” Then, before I knew what was happening, I’d fallen asleep.

The next morning, I’d completely forgotten what I thought about the night before, so I just sleepily stumbled out of bed and pulled on some clothes. I brushed my teeth and my hair and went downstairs. Nina was sitting at a table, using her magnifying glass to look at something on the table. Olivia was at a booth, reading a book about advanced Physics. Emily was in the kitchen, taking out a tray of cookies from an oven with one hand while balancing a bowl of brownies on her head and taking out a tray of cupcakes with another hand out of another oven. Sarah was in a corner, working on our bakery’s uniform on a dress form. Talia was outside, kicking soccer balls. And Fanny was trying to tell a joke to our Yorkie, Cutesicle. (Sarah’s idea, not mine).

“Where are Tara, Felicia and Sam?” I asked my mom, who was sitting on a stool behind the counter in the kitchen.

“Oh, good morning, sweetie! Talia’s painting in her room. Felicia has a meeting with a client that has a fear of clowns. And Sam’s asleep. Why do you ask?”

I looked around at all my weird sisters using their crazy talents. “Oh, I was just curious.” Then, before I could go over to Emily and ask her for a brownie, the wind chime that plays when the door opens tinkled.

I turned around. A tall, brown haired, green eyed, freckle-faced boy walked in. I almost passed out. He walked toward me.

“Hi, I’m George. Are you Mandy?”

For a split second, my jaws seemed to be seared together with cement. “Y-yes,” I stuttered.

“Well, I was wondering if you would want to go out sometime.”

Fanny looked up and scanned George from head to toe. She raised an eyebrow and crawled behind the counter so he wouldn’t notice her. She popped up from behind the counter next to me.

“She’d love to go out sometime!” Fanny said. “Right Mandy?” Fanny said.

“Um-um-yeah,” I muttered.

George beamed. “Great! I’ll pick you up tomorrow at six. Will you be here?”

“Yeah, I’ll b-be here.”

“Awesome. See you soon.” Then he walked out of the shop.

Sarah, Nina, Olivia and Fanny all crowded around me. “What was that all about?” They said in unison.

“I don’t know! He just came out of nowhere.”

“You have any idea where he came from or how he knows your name?”

“No! He just-” I stopped.

“What?” Fanny said.

“Well, last night, after work, I just went up to my room and realized that I have the power to bake a boy, and I bake boys for other people, but never thought about  the kind of guy for me. So I thought of my perfect boyfriend and went to sleep. Then he just… showed up!”

“Mandy! When a fantastical sorceress born with the blessing of engineering a male human through pastries, that fantastical sorceress can never create a male of her own through the power of imagination, or the male she invented through imagination will be born out of magic and wonder!” (Of course, this was a comment from Olivia).

“WHAT?” We all said in unison.

Olivia sighed. “A witch that has the power to bake a boy can’t dream up her own or he’ll come to life. It’s a side effect of having a non-magic being for a parent.” Mom glared at Olivia. “I mean…a wonderful little quirk! Right, Mom?”

Mom shook her head and drove her attention back to me. “So…you just made up the perfect boyfriend for you and he just showed up and asked you on a date?”

I nodded.

“I do not understand magic,” my mom said, and walked away.

My sisters drove their attention to me again. “I can’t believe a guy asked you out! We have to help you pick an outfit! Oh my gosh, can I do your hair?”

“Well, if this is going to be a conversation about sexist and superficial face goop, I’m going to do some algebra problems.”

“I’m going to the highway to see if people are speeding,” Nina said.

“Well, I’m going to help Sarah help you get ready!” Fanny squealed.

So Fanny and Sarah steered me to where Sarah keeps her makeup and hair stuff. Fanny wanted to give me clown face paint in case George had a sense of humor, but Sarah wouldn’t let her. Sarah gave me purple eyeliner and curled my eyelashes with some eyelash curler thing and put on some blush, but I don’t know what affect any of that stuff have. (I might be boy crazy and a hopeless romantic, but that doesn’t mean I understand makeup!) Then they put three hundred different kinds of lip gloss on me for an hour until they decided that they liked the first one. After that you would’ve thought they would be done, but they had barely started. They spent nearly four hours trying different hairstyles on me before realizing they hated them all and that I should just wear my hair the way I wear it everyday. Then the actual important part: the clothes.

I went into my closet and emerged with a short, light green tank top and jeans. Sarah took them into her room and returned empty-handed.

“Where are my clothes?”

“Mandy, don’t tell me you seriously thought I would let you keep those? Oh my gosh, why do you think I hate you? Sweetie, relax, I burned those clothes. Literally burned them.”

I frowned at my sister. “Fine, what would you prefer, Miss Queen of Fashion?”

Sarah inspected my closet. “I think it’s time I show you my closet.”

I didn’t breathe for a full minute. “Your clo-clo-closet?”

Sarah nodded. She gently tugged my arm in a dark room. She shut the door and flicked on a light. For years, if I stepped within even six feet of Sarah’s closet, she would give me an electrical shock for two minutes. (We’re witches, so it doesn’t kill us, but it still hurts. A lot.) So obviously, this room was off-limits. You go in without Sarah’s permission? You just signed your own death warrant. And now, after thirteen years, I was in it. And being in it now, I suddenly felt sorry for Dorothy when she found Oz, because she couldn’t find Sarah’s closet instead. It was fifty times bigger than six football fields put together. The walls were painted in order of the colors of the rainbow, in a wavy pattern. It had 500 different kinds of televisions all over the walls with beanbags of every color of every shade all over the room on the floor, with a pool table in the back and a ginormous basketball court. There was also a Mcdonald’s and a KFC. And there was a escalator that lead to a room two hundred times bigger than the room with the Mcdonald’s, the KFC, the pool table, and the basketball court. The entire room just had clothes clothes clothes clothes clothes clothes clothes clothes CLOTHES! Every single inch of it had clothes. Not one part was empty. All there was was clothes, clothes, clothes.

As I gazed around, not moving, breathing, or doing anything else, Sarah disappeared into a corne. When she came back, she was dragging a rack of clothes behind her.

“Okay, Mandy. These are all the clothes I have that are good for first dates. Pick one.” There was a pleated denim dress, a strapless light blue dress, a red knee-length dress, a jade blazer with a denim bellbottom, and a flower patterned skirt. I looked at all the clothes thoughtfully. I didn’t really know which outfit to pick. I don’t know anything about fashion, so I was kind of stuck.

But finally, FINALLY, I decided that I wanted the blue strapless dress with the jade green blazer. So I put on the outfit I chose with the makeup Sarah wanted to put on me and I put on my favorite high-tops. Sarah thought I looked perfect, and Mom said I was stunning. Olivia said that according to a recent study at Stanford University, I appeared to be what the male population desires. And Fanny, of course, said: “Sarah’s done it! She’s waved her wand, said Bippity, Boppity, Boo, and changed you into a princess! Or, a really pretty teenage witch. You look good either way.” Then she gave me jazz hands.

 

Chapter 3.

Everyone who’s had or has a boyfriend/girlfriend knows that your first date can turn into your worst date in two seconds. That’s why the best thing to do on your first date is go to a movie. It melts anxiety and you can say you only have the money for one popcorn bucket as an excuse to hold hands in case you reach into the bucket at the same time. So George and I went to see The Amazing Spider-man. It was awesome and we both loved it. And, luckily, we held hands in the popcorn bucket! Yes! And while he walked me home, he let me wear his jacket when I was cold. And then, when we were at my door, he asked me out to play mini golf next Saturday. I said yes and dreamily walked inside.

Olivia, Nina, Emily, Talia, Tara, Sam, and Felicia were totally weirded-out and did not understand, but Sarah, Fanny and my mom totally got it. We spent hours giggling, whispering, and squealing. I know that sounds girly, but I’m not really like that. I’m a little girly, but most of the time I don’t act all sexist. Sure I’m boy crazy and a hopeless romantic, but what I wear is totally tomboy, and my favorite hobbies are using my power and playing soccer. Not to mention I don’t understand fashion or makeup. But when you have your first date, being girly is allowed.

So I went to Sarah’s closet and decided to wear a red peplum with jeans and my favorite hightops. Then I resumed giggling, whispering, and squealing with two of my sisters and my mom. The next day, I didn’t pay attention to the customers at the bakery. I kept talking in this high, soft, floaty voice. Everything I saw was pink and had butterflies flying around it. And I don’t remember one thing a person said unless it was about George.

All my sisters tried to stop me from acting all weird, but nothing worked. But then, Mom had an idea. She took an enormous bucket of ice water and dunked my head into it. Then she shouted “SNAP OUT OF IT!” in my face through a bullhorn. I jumped about a foot in the air and then fell on the floor and fainted. When I woke up, my nine sisters and my mom were staring at me, confused and worried. (Well, Olivia wasn’t really confused. She never is.)

“Hi-hi guys,” I mumbled, shakily standing up.

“Are you okay?” Mom asked.

“Yeah, I think so.” Everything was back to normal. I wasn’t all weird and gross and day-dreamy.

“You’re sure okay?” Sarah asked. I nodded. “Great, Mom. She was finally perfect, after thirteen years, and you broke her!” Sarah stomped off in anger and frustration, and my mom and all of my other sisters but Fanny followed her. Fanny and I looked at each other for a few seconds, and then laughed. Then we went to Sarah’s closet and watched TV while sitting on Sarah’s beanbags. We laughed and joked around and didn’t mention George once. And, to tell you the truth, not thinking about George made me really, really, really, happy. Whenever I did, I started to have a panic attack. So Fanny thought was it was a good idea to pretend George didn’t exist. And it was a good idea. Well, it was a good idea at the time. Later, I realized that it was one of the worst ideas ever.

Chapter 4.

Sorry last chapter was so short! But I had to rush because Mom was on my case about writing this book instead of working. Anyway, this chapter is about my cliché, gross, and totally TV three-week relationship with George. My second date with George was only a couple days after our first date, so didn’t have a long time to prepare. Before the date, I was a nervous wreck. I couldn’t breathe normally, my heart was going at the speed of sound, and my voice kept cracking. Even Fanny, who always knows what to say, couldn’t help me. Mom told me there’s no reason to go crazy over a boy. Nina, Sam, Talia, Tara, Emily and Felicia didn’t care. Olivia told me that most teenage girls feel uneasy with a handsome male specimen, so what I was feeling was normal. And Sarah — shallow, gossiping, self-centered, drama queen Sarah — said: “Mandy, I know what you’re going through. On the first couple dates you have, you feel stressed. But the best thing to remember is that boys aren’t worth you feeling unhappy. You’re supposed to be dating George because he makes you happy, right? So break up with him if you need to, okay?” Shocking, I know, coming from Sarah. But I realized she was right. So was Mom. If George made me feel anything but happy, I should break up with him. Besides, life is more than boyfriends and crushes.

So when I heard somebody ring the doorbell, I marched straight to the door, prepared to break up with George.

I flung open the door and said: “George, we need to-” Then I saw it was a mailman with a package.

“Delivery for Mandy Simon.”

“That’s me,” I said. I signed something and took the package. I brought it to Sarah. Fanny and her were in her closet, playing Air Hockey.

“Hey guys, look what I-” I looked at them closely. “You guys didn’t tell me you had an Air Hockey table!” They blushed. I decided to ignore and I continued. “I got a package from… George.” The two stopped playing. I ripped open the package. Inside was a brand new Windows 8 computer. I pulled it out, opened it and turned it on. There was a video on the screen. I pressed play. It was George.

“Hi Mandy! Sorry i couldn’t play mini golf with you. I got busy at the animal shelter. You see, I volunteer with orphan animals. Anyway, I’m going to be pretty busy for a while, so I was wondering if we could date through videos on this computer. Email me if you want to do it!”

And the video ended.

I looked at my sisters. “No. I say no. I’m not going to date him. He can have his computer back. I don’t want it.”

“Um, Mandy, there’s something else in here,” Sarah said. I looked in the box.

“An opal necklace?”

“That’s real opals,” Sarah said. I believed her, because if anyone knows about accessories, it’s Sarah. “So are you going to do it?”

I took a deep breath, sighed, and opened my Gmail account.

 

The next few weeks dating George through a computer was really weird. I would have to go on a romantic picnic by myself and talk to a computer, or go on a horse carriage ride by myself with a computer, and it was fun, but really weird. It was the strangest (and only) relationship I’d ever been a part of.  I got to get to know George, and he got to get to know me. It was cool, but a little (okay, a lot) cliché. We would giggle constantly, and he would keep sending me presents, and I felt like some sort of girl in a TV sitcom. You would’ve thought it was perfect, but in reality, it was the worst. Talking to a computer screen just makes you feel weird, and I felt like I wasn’t really getting to know George. I felt like a weirdo with a computer. So, after a while, I realized that I had to break up with him. So one day, I started a Facetime chat and then started to say, “George, I’m really sorry, but-we-we have to-”

“Break up?”

I turned around. I was in the bakery at the time, behind the counter, so how could somebody be behind me? Well, you tell me, ‘cause George somehow was there. “George, how…”

“I had to get into the bakery sometime. How else would I be able to hack into your family’s files and destroy your business?”

“Hack-into-my-bui-what?”

“You see Mandy, you didn’t create me. I was born the son of two convicts, who happened to also be magic. I wanted to get a good job, but with my parent’s reputation, it was impossible. So, I knew I had to break some rules.” George gave me an evil smile and continued. “Then I found you. You, a very smart, kind, sweet girl with a rare talent and a great business, who also believed I was a good guy. So, I went along with it and tricked you. I was secretly learning all about your family’s business, planning to destroy it. And then, one day, I managed to get in, and collapse the system. And now, all of this is mine. Say goodbye to this bakery, Mandy. ‘Cause I’m going to take it over and wipe you and it from existence!” I stared at him, stunned.

“But-how did you know so much about us?”

“That opal necklace had video cameras in the gems. I could watch your every move. That’s right, sister. My  power is evil.” Then he started laughing a really creepy laugh. I shook my head and punched him in the face.

“Guys! Come here! Now!” My nine sisters flashed into the bakery. They read my mind and understood what was happening. “You know, George, you may have collapsed the bakery’s system, but guess what? Nine witches against one jerkface equals one jerkface loser.” I gave him a little smile. “GET HIM!” We all flew up into the air at the same time, and our powers went into action. Sam threw gears, screws, and other mechanical stuff at him. Sarah threw some accessories at him. Fanny threw prop comedy stuff at him. And I pelted him with eggs. “Okay, this is not so effective. Switch to elemental powers mode!” We all breathed fire, water, and ice. (Those are witch powers we use for emergencies.) We lifted him up in the air and threw him around with fire. Then we threw him to the ground. “Oh, and by the way, George, we have a backup system. So you did nothing to us. Ha.” We lifted him with ice, froze him, and threw him to the ground. “Turns out two can play at the jerk game, huh? Well, eleven, actually.” We lifted him up and threw him out the door. “And don’t come back!” we all said in unison. Then Mom came in through the back door. “I’m back from town — oh, good you’re all here, I got dinner, and snacks, oh, and unfortunately, Sam, they didn’t have a build-a-car-starter kit-” Mom stopped. “So, did you girls have a nice afternoon?” We flew down. “Yeah, Mom. We had a great afternoon,” I sighed.

Chapter 5.

I know you’re mind is blown after the last chapter and everything, but there’s more of the story. So I’ll keep going.  In the next three days after my breakup with George, I tried to focus on working at the bakery and nothing else. And it kind of worked. My mind was completely into baking the boys people requested. And, after a little while, I felt better about the whole situation. I mean, there was no point in crying over George. He was a jerk and I didn’t need him. And there was one good thing that came from his arrival: I got eight new friends.

 

 

EPILOGUE

The eleven Simons lived in harmony. The girls fought from time to time, but that was all. They enjoyed running their bakery and all became good friends and sisters. And one day….

Emily was going through the bakery’s records in their family’s computer files, and she saw something odd. She squinted at the screen. She felt confused. Then, it hit her like a ton of bricks.

“OH MY GOD.”

 

 

To be continued…

 

Dr. James Leonard

Chapter 1.

“I have never heard such a thing before!” I said.

My first name is James, but my whole name is James Leonard Olshansky. But I just prefer Dr. James. The sound I just heard is a type of Frankenstein-ish thingy but instead of Frankenstein I am resurrecting my daughter Clementine. She died in a roller coaster accident *sniff*. Her head got hit, so I made a “magical” machine that will make her live exactly 89 more years. She is twelve years old *UHG* I mean she was twelve years old.

The “magical” machine is made out of the finest metals, wires, circuit boards, and technology. I called the machine: Resurrector 10,200. I hope it works; I spent weeks trying to make this and it will break my heart if it doesn’t. The sound is a tingly sort of fairy sound. I thought the Resurrector 10,200 was working, but I think that the used tungsten, the rusty, cracked wire is broken. The used wire of electricity, the tungsten, just a tiny little filament, wouldn’t make such a huge difference, you would think. But I need it. *Sigh* Think, James think! Of course! The used tungsten from that scientist usually fails with light bulbs! I was supposed to use a new tungsten! Anyway, I talk to myself a lot, but I just think it helps me focus.

 

Chapter 2.

I think I should get something to eat, I said to myself. Maybe a turkey sandwich, or chicken, eh whatever, I like turkey, but my daughter likes chicken! Maybe I’ll just do eenie minee mo and pick whatever.

*********************** **************************************

“Ooh! Just what I need, a tungsten!” I said out of nowhere, in front of maybe a good 16 people (it’s a small town). I found the part I needed for my “magical” machine in the window pane of the town’s hardware store.  Running to it: “Ah! *pant, pant* here *pant* it is!” I panted.

“Thanks, I appreciate your business,” said a British stranger, starting to walk out the door, with the machine part I need for the light bulb. “NO!!!!! THE ONLY ONE LEFT!” I screamed with a feeling of never hearing my daughter’s sweet voice again, the light bulb can heat up the machine making her warm as soon as she wakes up. I live in Iceland, a very cold area, even though you can just find a hardware store in North America almost everywhere, a little town in Iceland is very different, and the light bulbs just got sold out. Tungsten is also rare, so I guess I cannot hear my daughter’s sweet voice and the funny jokes she made up.

Wait! I found a receipt on the dusty floor of the  hardware store. It says:

1297 Skaroseyri Road

Akereyri, Iceland

11116

1 tungsten: $26.89

Subtotal: $26.89

signature:

Terry M.

Chapter 3

Who’s Terry M.? I thought over and over, wondering if that was the person who bought my tungsten. Maybe I should just ask everyone if they have that name, but at the same time I will see if they have a British voice. ”Smart idea!” I said out of nowhere.

*********************************************************************

“Excuse me, but is your name Terry M.?” I asked.

“Sorry, no,” said the stranger I had asked.

I was starting to think that after the 35 people I asked with all the same answers, no, there’s almost no possible way there can be a person with a British voice called Terry M. in this town.

The millisecond after I thought that, I heard a faint British voice saying “Of course,” in front of an old lady’s house.

”Yes!” I whispered excitedly,”finally!”.

*Pant*, *pant*, I run across the street to the British man while panting, “Wait! *pant* wait!, is that you Mr.Terry M.?”

Now I am following this annoying man asking, “Did you buy the tungsten?!” repeatedly.

Finally an answer:“Yes.”

What’s with the attitude? I thought. Maybe he was answering me all along and I was interrupting him with all of my excited questions.

******************************************************************

 

We were now in Terry’s house. Then he started the conversation.

“I need this tungsten for my sixth cousin, Corie. She was in a car accident and I need her to be alive again, so I need the tungsten for the only remaining light bulb I have, do you have a problem?” the man explained. I was starting to think that we are alike in that way of wanting our loved ones to re-live, or get resurrected.

“I need it for the exact same reason, so do you understand?” I replied.

“Well, I do. But I have spent thousands for my resurrector, and I accidentally used a dead tungsten for my light bulb and it broke, so I need them so I can warm her up and not let the chemicals and the cold weather of Iceland make her get hypothermia.The chemicals I use are very cold and cannot be interacted with the human body when resurrected.”

“Okay,” I replied, freaked out that the man had almost the same reasons to get a new tungsten as I did.

“Well then, you can go get some in the hardware stores of the United States of America,” the annoying man said.

“I’m not going to go to the United States just to get something at the hardware store that will probably not be found!” I said with an impatient sort of voice.

“Well then, I guess you won’t resurrect your loved one after all, as I am keeping the new tungsten for myself only.”

I paused with silence. He really wants me to go to a hardware store in America, maybe I can get a lightbulb, and just get this over with, or maybe I can just deal with my daughter’s loss—wait! I can just order the light bulb on the internet!

***************************************************************

4 weeks later.

 “Dad?…”

*Gasp* “It works!”

“Father! You made me die! How dare you let me go on that rollercoaster!” my daughter said, so angry to the point that she was turning red.

“Honey, I have waited so long to hear your sweet voice! And you just scream at me?!” I screamed angrily at my daughter. “Do you know how much I missed you?? Isn’t heaven nice though?” I said, feeling guilty for some reason, while fixing my hair (so she doesn’t think I’m a maniac).

 

“Father *cough* heaven is beautiful, but I kept on falling through clouds *sniff*. I got some bruises,” Clementine said.

I was starting to think that she was going a little crazy, falling through clouds in heaven.

“Qwertyuiop-asdfghjkl-zxcvbnm-whejyuiop-asdfghjkl-zxcvbnm-jjsj!!!”

“Oh my god!” I said in fear, ”my daughter’s having a seizure!!”  “Hey-irebgierfw-dad-dad-adad-eeeeeeey!!!” screamed my daughter.

 

1 week later.

 

“Dad, can I get out of the hospital?” my poor daughter said. I felt guilty somehow. I think it’s just the thought of me bringing her back, then having to be dragged into a hospital. I even hated them, the lights make me lightheaded, and other annoying things like that. “Father!”

“Yes?!” I said, so surprised and scared at the same time that my shoulders were tense.

“You didn’t answer me when I asked you if I can get out of the hospital, seriously, all I have been eating is cold powdered mashed potatoes,” my daughter said in a depressed way. “Don’t you worry, we will get you out of the hospital,” I said. “I’m going to ask Dr.Sandler,” I said in a low voice, so my daughter could relax.

***********************************************************************

I left the hospital and told my daughter I would be back soon, before the argument with Terry M.

“I cannot believe that you resurrected your daughter! I was going to do it first!” the insolent man said. I held my breath and closed my mouth shut, before I was going to punch him so hard that it would leave him a mark for years. I bet I was the only one to actually shut him up, he just kept on talking with no sense on how his sixth cousin, Corie, should have been resurrected first, before my daughter. I was starting to think that he is sick in the head and I was wasting my time on this person.

“Bye,” I said. I opened his front door, then walked outside.

“Wait!” said Terry M. His sentence ended with a door slammed shut.

”That’s it,” I said, I may be crazy (just slightly) but I am not spending any precious time on this person.

 

                                                          Chapter 4.

I was now back at the hospital, BING BING BING BING

“All patients stay put,” an alarming microphone said a couple of times after the bings.

“Daddy!” Clementine screamed with all her will.

“Honey!” I screamed back, ”It’s okay!“

I ran as fast as I could. “No,” said an insolent ‘guard.’ More like, ‘I want your daughter to die again’.

“I. Need. To. See. Her!” I screamed.

“Sorry, I don’t want to do this but, in your daughter’s shape, we can’t let her get out,” said the stupid, insolent man. *Crack*.  I gave the stupid man an uppercut and he passed out.  Perfect, I thought, I can sprint right past him.

 

 

Chapter 5.

I was now holding my daughter in my arms, she passed out because she got really alarmed and was not feeling well.

***********************************************************************

I was at my house, and I put my daughter on her bed, I kept her impression on the bed. I do not know why, but thank god she wasn’t paying any attention to it.

“Dad?” she said tiredly.

“Yes, honey?” I ran to her bed and was surprised that she woke up.

“Um, where am I?” I was astonished.

“Honey, you are in your house, remember?” I said, terrified that she completely lost her memory.

”Oh yeah, it’s just that I kind of forgot, but you don’t have to worry.”

I was ignoring her attempts to calm me down. I was actually worried, but I said: “Of course I don’t have to worry,” just so she could not be anxious.

I had a smoked chicken sandwich for lunch, moist with mayo, and just wonderful, it was one of my daughters favorites.

***********************************************************************

“And here we meet again,” said Terry M.

I tried running across the street, trying to get away from the man, hair up, British accent, I cannot stand him, not to mention that he was…(let’s just say, “off.”) I was going to the grocery store, but after, I’m going to my lab. I think my machine is messing my daughter up. Thank goodness Terry M. wasn’t trying to follow me, but that was odd, he usually tries to follow me, maybe he just has mood swings or something.

*************************************************************

I am at my lab, and for no apparent reason, the machine is acting up. Now all I have to do is turn it off, or destroy it because my daughter is not going to die again, I said to myself, proud that I accomplished the dream of bringing my daughter back.Hallo! Hallo Hallo!” screamed the resurrector 10,200.

“Oh lord!” I screamed,”what-are-you-and-who-are-you!” I screamed, the resurrector actually had teeth, red eyes, and large creepy crawly legs.

“I am going to kill all of your loved ones in life—as in your…daughter!” Life kind of froze, and I was stuck, feeling faint, I collapsed.

Chapter 6.

>CLEMENTINE’S POINT OF VIEW<

 

So enough about my father, I am Clementine, and even though my father gave a sort of definition of me, he doesn’t know much. I actually love turkey sandwiches, but for some reason, he just forced me to have chicken, he said it’s healthier for you. Anyway, after that incident with the roller coaster, someone in their right mind would never do that again. I just hated the feeling of being in that roller coaster. After seeing my  best friend on a different ride, my father always thought I should (imitating his voice) “go by the tradition of going on a roller coaster in the summer.” Then guess what happened—I was in the middle of a free fall, one of the most exciting things on a roller coaster ride is a free fall, or at least it’s supposed to be. Then I fell out of my seat and bam! But anyway, back to the story:

After I heard a robot say that he was going to kill all of my father’s loved ones, such as *gulp* m-m-me. I just heard a thump, then that was it, I called the number 911 (I think I am starting to remember certain details, and remembering how to use gadgets). I wished I didn’t panic or had anxiety, or think that there was a robot that my teacher Mr. Dannie Mendenhall made to make my father pass out and take my unfinished homework that I kept under my bed. He is a teacher from before I died, but I am not going to school now, because of my memory, but I am going to go soon. Anyway, here is what I said to the police when they came, and here is what happened:

*************************************************************

“After I forgot about where I was, my father was going to the grocery store,” I explained to the officers.

“Ye sure this happened?” Replied the Southern-ish accented officer, I wasn’t sure what the accent was.

” Yes, I am sure (for some reason I remembered that,but nothing else) I think my memory is definitely getting better,” I said  sarcastically.

“Okay child, y’all are gonna get into trouble once I know you are lying. I know you remember, you just don’t wanna tell me,” said the officer. It was sad because he didn’t know my tragedy, and didn’t know that I kind of lost all of my memory, but it’s getting better slowly. You just need the right amount of patience and enough to

let the days when you forgot where the bathroom is just pass.

**********************************************************

“Ooh!” I said in excitement, I spotted macaroni and cheese in one of the cupboards in the kitchen. I love macaroni and cheese, so while the officers are looking at the creepy machine that I was basically born out of, to look for clues of how it made my father pass out, I’m going to eat. Such an ordinary life, I thought sarcastically to myself. *Sigh*

“CLEAR!” an officer said out of nowhere, at least for myself- I had no clue on what they were doing with all of the rooms and the machine, all they told me was, “Don’t worry, we will find your father and then we will see what that machine is used for.” I was holding my breath at the last nine words: we will see what the machine is used for. I didn’t answer because I know what the machine is used for- but my father will never forgive me if I give away the magic of resurrecting.

Here is what the machine is made out of: even though it is made out of the finest metals and blah, blah, blah-it still had a turkey tray, strapped onto another turkey tray with duct tape, and it had a light bulb, under the two turkey trays, with a whole bunch of sciency stuff, like tubes and wires and circuit boards. It was like a mix of cheap and sciency, did I also mention the toothpicks?

My father picks his teeth, because he says it helps him concentrate even better when his teeth are clean, so he can do his work, I just don’t understand him sometimes.

“The man’s waking up!” an officer said surprisingly, I was surprised too, my dad is waking up from a monster machine making him faint, I ran down the steep stairs of the basement, breathing in the grimy air (more like 90% dust,and 10% air) “AAH!” I tripped and I was now rolling down the stairs-feeling faint, like my father. I fainted.

 

Chapter 7.

>Clementines point of view<

 

“Honey! Are you alright?!” my father cried. I never saw him with so many tears. I could make out him crying but… “It’s okay honey! Daddy’s here, I’m okay!” my father interrupted my thinking.

“I don’t know, the girl just started running down those stairs and fell, I didn’t know what to do, thank god you woke up,” said one of the officers.

”Yes, thank  god  I woke up-by the way, how did you find out that I fainted?” my dad asked another officer,

“Oh well—(UGHUM)—I just found out because your daughter called 911, and I just (the officer started having a British voice) UGHUM and I certainly heard the robot scream and…” said an unfinished officer.

“Wait, did you have a British accent?” asked my father, “because I just heard a similar voice and…”

“NOOOOOOO!” said the officer. BING BONG BING PING PING. The officer was shooting all over the place. I think my father angered him.

”NO,NO NOOOOOOOO!“ screamed the angry Terry M. I was terrified and hid in one of the corners of our large basement.

 

 

Chapter 8.

>Back to Dr.James Leonard<

 

I was so terrified by the fact that Terry M. was shooting all over the basement, I think Terry M. is trying his best to kill my daughter.

But he didn’t know how much my daughter and I can fight, he doesn’t know us, and he is just a crazy, sick man that is trying to ruin our family, he also mentioned that he wanted his sixth cousin Corie M. to get resurrected before my daughter. But really, who cares if my daughter gets resurrected first or if my daughter gets resurrected after his cousin?

“Let’s go,” said the demanding Terry M. “we shouldn’t care about these people, I know them. The man just knocked out himself for attention, and his daughter is just fine. Plus, who bloody cares about these turkey trays! It just doesn’t make sense!” Cops these days, they bloody care about a sick daughter and an insolent man who just knocked himself out, Terry M. said to himself.

The other officers looked shocked, and were  so scared that they just followed the commands. One was even shaking, and saying “Y-y-yes sir” and “o-of -course officer Terry”.

“Wait- wait!” I cried. I really wanted the cops to discover why this machine is trying to kill my daughter and why it is going crazy, but I was too late, they left the house, and slammed the door while they were at it.

“Daddy! Daddy! I missed you so much! I have no idea why you got knocked out!” said my daughter. I ran to her, and grasped her in my arms, it made me cry. I was terrified also, but I quickly wiped my tears away, and said: “you don’t need to worry, we won’t let that crazy machine knock me out again. I have a plan.”

“What is the plan?” She replied,

“Well, I am going to destroy the Resurrector and everything will be fine,” I said, not saying my thoughts, but what I was thinking is that Terry M. must have controlled the resurrector. I am certainly baffled by the thoughts of Terry M. trying to, I guess, get revenge for what I did—but what I am wondering is if he’s ever even had the time to resurrect his sixth cousin, but I am not quite sure. I should spy on that crazy man and find out the hard way, instead of asking him, but it would probably be even harder to ask than to spy on him. Because he’s not quite sane, and the man will probably just ignore me or say that it wasn’t fair that I resurrected my daughter before his cousin, and even then ignore my question.

I was overly thinking, and thank god my daughter asked if I could braid her hair, or else I would’ve kept on thinking about Terry.

I was not so sure on how to braid hair, but Clementine taught me how, and I got it after a while.

*************************************************************

“Pot roast!” I said to my daughter. It was the next day of the incident, and we are having pot roast for lunch. I thought it should just be an easy day after everything that had just happened. Halloween is on October 31st, and it is a month away, so it is pretty cold, about 39 degrees Fahrenheit. In the middle of my pot roast I heard the phone ring, brriiing! brrring! Then I picked it up, but Clementine interrupted me.

“Daddy when is the pot roast done?”asked my daughter.

“I don’t know honey!” I tried screaming across the room, then finally I hear an answer on the other line.

“Hi, you are invited to our secret society, and we are going to have a meeting,” said Terry M. “Be there and I will tell you everything, even the reason why I was shooting all over your basement and screaming ‘no.’ There is a reason for everything and it’s a better reason than your reason of resurrecting your daughter first before my cousin,” Terry said under his breath.

I felt like a kid; I wanted to hide under the covers, he wanted to meet me in a “secret society” and “explain” why he did everything but I didn’t know what he was going to do, and I did not know what to say. But I am going to go there anyway, I thought.

“Can you answer me? I am inviting you to a secret society!” screamed the impatient Terry M.

“Yes, I hear you,” I answered. Then hung up, sighed, and thought, this situation is never going to end.

 

Chapter 9.

I do not even know how he got my house phone number exactly, but I am a little anxious, maybe I just told him what the number was when we were still “friends” for about a week, before everything turned to heck (or as my daughter would say, when  everything went to mush).

********************************************************

I am on my way to the secret society (using the address Terry—you know what? Instead of saying ‘Terry M.’ I should say ‘Terry Mad’. It sounds better, don’t you think?)

*******************************************************

I am waiting at the front door in the underground secret society. I just really hope he is going to go through another mood swing, just so he doesn’t feel like shooting all over the place, that’s if he even has a gun. I am starting to feel nauseous, and extremely worried because I have no clue what he is going to do after he opens that door. Screeeech I hear, and I see the door open. I am terrified because I am face to face with Terry (Mad).

“H-hi” I say to him.

“Hello” Terry replies,”come in, and I will explain everything.” Terry said this in a disturbing voice, sort of like an evil British voice.

I was now in a seat, and Terry was standing up right in front of me staring down right at my eyes, my face was numb, I was shaking-and I was terrified.

“I know you’re shaking, and I know why. You’re scared, you think I am terrifying, but I like that. I feel like I’m in control” Terry M. said, he started to stare at me.

“So what was the reason for you to shoot in my basement?!” I screamed.

“It was for a good reason!” Terry screamed back.

I jumped off my chair in anger, and screamed: “Then what was the reason!?” I was turning red, and I grasped Terry’s neck collar.

“Okay! Okay! I will tell you once you stop doing that!” Terry screamed, but I held his neck collar a little longer for revenge. Then I finally let go, and I waited for him to explain why he did such a thing in my basement. “The reason why I did that is because my cousin never got resurrected, and my family is blaming me for everything. They are depending on me to resurrect her, and I didn’t, so I thought that I should knock out your daughter, hide my cousin’s actual body, and just say that the resurrector kind of changed her a bit. Then take your daughter home.”

I was bright red, and I was ready to end this. “Trying to use another human body is cruel,” I said and punched his face repeatedly.

He struggled and screamed, “YOU’LL END UP IN A VERY HOT PLACE AT THE END!” screamed Terry, “AND I WONDER WHAT THAT PLACE IS!” he screamed sarcastically.

I just kept on, for revenge, and for anger, until he collapsed, and said:

“I now cannot see my family, they will find out and you-you’ll end up in jail for this.”

“I JUST WANT TO STOP THIS!” I cried with dozens of tears running down my cheeks, and making their way down my chin. I sobbed and kept on wiping my tears, ”I DON’T WANT YOU TO STEAL MY DAUGHTER AND I DON’T WANT YOU IN MY LIFE!” I kept on punching, then I stopped, and I left him on the floor, looking at him, I kept on looking at him. He wasn’t breathing. I was still crying.

“I DIDN’T NEED TO KILL YOU!” I cried. Blood was running down his face like tears, and I felt so angered at myself and had feelings of guilt.

 

Chapter 10.

I drove home

*************************************************************

My daughter asked what happened and I answered : “It’s dealt with, don’t worry.”

“Okay!” my daughter smiled. “How about we have that pot roast?”

“Okay” I answered, and I felt a huge relief off my chest, and that was it.

 

BREEONG BREEONG NEEEER NEEEEER NEEEEEROOOOOOOOO. I saw the flashing colors of America, red- white and blue, “Wait a sec!” I told my daughter. I walked down the 12 steps of of house and opened the door,then I was shocked because I heard a police officer say: “Are you Dr.James Leonard Olshansky?” Is this about Terry M.? Am I in trouble? I was asking a whole bunch of questions in my head.

“Y-y-yes I am, do you have a question?” I answered  “Do you know this person?” said the officer, he showed me a picture of him.

 

 

THE END

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A Caveman’s Life

Chapter 1

Grunt listened to the boring story. Grunt wanted to be outside playing with the big, loud wolves rather than staying inside a dusty and dark cave. He knew that the reason why his parents were staying in the cave was because they were scared of the outside world. They only went out when they had to hunt. The rest of the day was spent just sitting down and sharpening rocks on the cave walls or drawing pictures with the tar.

Grunt was nibbling on the raw lamb that he, Grunt, had caught. The family knew that since Grunt was not afraid of the outside, he could just get the food for them and they could just stay in the cave for as long as they wanted like a bunch of overfed pigs. Grunt was hardly listening to the scary story. Everyone in the tribe except him was listening. Grunt was laboring and making spears and making tents for the hunting party who hardly ever went hunting. Grunt was so good at hunting because he tamed a couple of the wolves to help him hunt. He was also known besides Grunt as Friend of the Wolves because every other caveman’s enemy was the wolf. Man and dog were not best friends; they were the worst of enemies.

Grunt came to the conclusion that he would rather be listening to the story than doing all the dirty work for the tribe. He crawled over to the fire and listened to the Old Caveman tell the story. Grunt laughed when the people shivered and drew back in terror and surprise. It seemed like the same story kept them being afraid. The same old story led them to the same reaction. He thought that it might be reasonable for them to be scared the first time, but why be scared if you heard it all your life? The cavemen knew every word of the story and they were still shrieking at some of the violent parts. He then grunted in caveman dialect. It roughly translated to, “I want to learn how to shiver.”

The old man said “If you can’t shiver, you don’t qualify as a true man. You have  always been odd. You have not learnt how to shiver by now. All these men and boys who are shivering have gone out into the world to do so. If you want to learn how, get off the floor and go out into the world!” That day he vowed that he would learn how to shiver.

Grunt wondered that maybe his life could be more scary than this story. Maybe doing that would teach him how to shiver. He was starting to think that maybe if he made his life interesting, he could teach himself how to shiver. So he snuck toward the boulder at the cave entrance which was blocking the way out. He squeezed through a tiny crack beneath the boulder.

Outside, the light was fading. The sun was lowering and it was beginning to snow. In the distance he heard a wolf howling at the edge of the moon on the horizon. Within five minutes, the sun was gone. But so was Grunt. He was wondering where the sun goes after it sets, so he headed west. He was running, trying to keep up with it. He wondered what would happen once he got to the other horizon. So then he stopped. He knew he had reached the next horizon. But he didn’t see anything different. He just saw an icy stretch of water, showing the last rays of the day. He looked around. He was standing at the top of a very tall, chalk cliff. The sun was there, on the freezing water. It was glinting like gold under torchlight. Grunt knew he could go no further, so he turned back. Then, his eyes widened as big as the sun. The pack of wolves had smelt him out!

The wolves were cornering him. He tried to calm them, but these wolves looked far from taming. Then, he pulled out his crude stone knife. Grunt knew that the chances of surviving with a mere stone knife against a pack was very small. He didn’t rush towards the wolves. He would wait for them to come to him. The wolves realised that if he was not afraid of them, then he wasn’t a weak target. The wolves backed off.

He tried to shiver about this close encounter, but he didn’t shiver. He stomped his foot on the icy rocks.

When he returned home, he received a lot of scorn. Grunt said, “I was just trying to learn how to shiver.”

But the Old Man said, “If you want to learn how to shiver, go out into the world. Then you will learn how to shiver by the end of a day.”

Chapter 2

So, for the second time in half an hour, Grunt was out in the bitter cold having no idea where he was going. He just kept walking south. He knew that if he went down it would get warmer, so he just kept walking and walking and walking and walking. Then, he fainted. He was extremely cold. He woke up in the morning under six feet of snow. He continued his journey south, determined to learn how to shiver.

Soon, winds from the west were whipping up the snow, so he had no sense of direction. The snow was thickening in his eyes, and his hand and tongue were red with cold. In the distance, he saw a cave. The cave was pitch black, blacker than night.

Grunt, without thinking of the consequences, stepped in the cave. Then, a wolf jumped out of the darkness!

Grunt realised that he either would have to become friends with this wolf or he would have to invade the cave and push him out into the snow. The wolf snarled at Grunt, and Grunt snarled back. No, he could not make friends with the wolf because the wolf would not give him enough time to before the wolf consumed him. Grunt realised that he was becoming less patient for the wolves. Anyway, now that he was out in the wild alone, everything was his enemy.

Grunt was a very strong caveman. He was not an adult yet, so he didn’t have the strength to throw the boulder at his cave into the air, but he was still very strong. He got to high-ground, which in this case was a rock. The wolf could not get up there. The wolf was ready to jump into the air a soon as Grunt would.

Grunt jumped, and kicked as he did. This resulted in a couple of shattered teeth for the wolf. The dog left the cave, limping. Grunt could see the red stain of blood pouring from his mouth on to the fresh snow. Soon, the wolf disappeared into the cloudy blizzard.

Grunt realised two problems. He had no idea where food would be at this time, because he had never hunted in those condition and where would he get water. In his old home, there had been a cool mountain spring. Grunt set his sights on exploring the cave. To do that he needed to find a fire. He knew how to make fire. He had a chunk of flint in his pocket. He saw two thick logs at the edge of the darkness.

The logs were lit, and the fire that was roaring was nice and cozy. The cave was huge, and the fire shone upon a waterfall. This waterfall was going into a hole in the cave below, which was were the water flowed into a deep, dark, ravine. After a long day of exploring, Grunt fell asleep.

 

Chapter 3

Grunt realised that he had still not learned how to shiver. He had heard absolutely horrible stories about the south. He had to go there. He heard that there were these strange and wicked creatures called “Humans”. The humans called them Cavemen. That was offensive, thought Grunt. They were the Neanderthals. He would prove to them that these tricky and cunning people would make him shiver, and he, Grunt, would conquer all the land. Grunt smiled a toothy, evil, grin. He had traveled miles away from home. Cavemen can travel at a surprisingly fast rate: 20 miles per hour. The cavemen literally powerwalk.  Grunt had traveled something around 300 miles. He had left his cave back in the area where the city Oslo is to Stockholm. Stockholm is where Grunt was sitting in his cave.

Grunt got up from the ground and picked up his flint and headed outside of the cave. He started journeying South. Then a stampede occurred.

It was no regular stampede. Today our stampedes resemble that of wildebeests charging across the African country and buffalos charging across the fields of America. Back then, the stampede was of huge, bulky mammoths. Their great horns were very dangerous and in the north they were aggressive to cavemen.

Grunt realised that he had no choice but to run for his life. The beating of the feet got louder from the mammoth and they were crashing into one another and having fights amongst themselves. Grunt stopped running. He looked at the mammoth. Two huge mammoths were fighting to become the leader of the tribe. The biggest mammoth executed a blow upon the other mammoth. The other mammoth attempted to get the mammoth which had hit him back but that mammoth simply deflected it. That is exactly what the biggest mammoth did until the other mammoth was so exhausted that he felt on the ground. The mammoth comrades moved on with the new leader leaving him in the snow to get up.

The mammoth continued on to stampede. Grunt got out of their way and cautiously went to the mammoth. Grunt held back with his hands but then quickly he touched the ivory horn of the mammoth. The mammoth was suddenly alert. His eyes fluttered open. But when the mammoth saw him, to Grunt’s surprise, the mammoth did not attack.

The mammoth picked himself up and stared down at Grunt with huge black eyes. He softly cooed to Grunt to come and touch his horn. Grunt did not know that the mammoth had asked this but he still thought that the cooing sound was inviting him to touch the mammoth. So he did. Grunt had an idea. He could ride on the mammoth to get to the South and conquer the humans. Then he tried to climb up to the mammoth. The mammoth showed no resistance. So then he kicked the side of the mammoth gently and the mammoth went roughly on the same direction he wanted to go. South. They rode for hours and hours. Finally Grunt saw something memorable. He saw a huge unfrozen ocean and in the distance he saw what is

today mainland Europe.

 

 

CHAPTER 4

Grunt realised that he could not take the mammoth with him. Grunt also realised that he had a problem. He had no idea how to swim.

 

The Adventures of Hillel: Going Nuclear

Hi everybody, Hillel here. I’m going to tell you about another war. We had to arm and train an army so we could destroy the rebellions of the cat war. See we destroyed the cat army but the regular cats on the planet of cats apparently were armed by the government and were prepared to fight if the actual army lost, which they did, so we had to fight a bunch of untrained citizens. There was a council meeting of what else we should do. As I am the head of the CIA, I was invited so that’s where I was going. Finally, I got there. “Hello General Hillel, take a seat,” General Avraham said, “We were just about to discuss a nuclear attack on the planet of cats.”

“Why would you do that? We know that there are some innocent cats who do not support the war we can not kill them,” I said.

“War calls for some sacrifices,” said General Avraham.

“I will not have the military kill innocent people,” I said. I was getting worked up by then.

“I will not kill innocent people,” I repeated. I could tell by the looks that I was getting from the other Generals and Admirals at the meeting that I was reddening at the ears, which happens to me when I am getting mad.

“It would be barking mad not to plan a nuclear attack on the cat army,” replied General Avraham.

“No. What would be barking mad would be to plan a nuclear attack. There are thousands of innocent cats who didn’t have anything to do with the cat war or what is going on with us and the cat army. We can’t just kill them all,” I said.

This was really getting out of hand. You cannot just go around killing innocent civilians. I thought that when I got home, that I should tell my mom and dad all about this conversation I had with my brother. My mom and dad thought that I was right. They said they would talk to my brother and make him see sense.

Most of the Generals and Admirals agree with me. Now, with the Generals and Admirals at my side, I went to another council meeting. And now the council board finally saw me right and we did not bomb cat world. Little did I know that General Avraham was with his closest members of the army and the CIA right then planning a secret nuclear attack, even though the council had denied his request for a nuclear attack. I did not even notice when he didn’t show up for the next few Council Meetings, I just had too much on my hands.

I’ve been having to think up ways that I can attack the cat army without having to bomb them. I’ve been talking to some of my highest-ranking generals and most of them say that that the best idea would be to do what we were doing then and there: use our army because even if they have more soldiers than us, they are untrained. For instance, General Mcgeorge was saying that we were beating them as it is, why stop now. But my conscience told me that they were going to start training as well.

I was going to visit my brother (We made up. Avraham gave in.) and have lunch with him. We were in the middle of chicken when the phone rang. brrrrrrrrrrrring. “I’ll get it,” said Avraham.

I headed to go to the bathroom. But then I overheard my brother on the phone.

“Okay, we’ll do it next week,” my brother whispered.

There was a pause where I couldn’t hear anything.

My brother answered back, “We will secretly bomb the cat planet two weeks from now.”

I knew what was going on. I had thought that my brother has seen sense, but then again, I should have remembered that he was always a stubborn man.

I grabbed my coat and raced out the door. I got home and quickly informed my closest

colleagues. And we decided we would build a secret bomb shelter for all the normal citizens.

Meanwhile Avraham had not been showing up to work which probably meant he

knew that I knew that he was going to bomb. But I could not deal with that now, because we needed to secretly, as not to be attacked, build a bomb shelter. We sent a team of builders and a good 500 tons of bedrock, tools and supplies. We loaded them all to a big spaceship with a bunch of little capsules because if we took just the big spaceship down, the cat army would definitely see. We had to take the tools in one capsule. The bedrock took up seventy capsules. All the people went in one capsule. I couldn’t think straight. My brother was maddening me. I didn’t see how I could be related to this oppressor.

My Admiral came to me. “I hacked into your brother’s phone calls,” he said. “Your

brother’s plans are going faster than your brother thought would happen.”

“So we have to accelerate,” I said.

“Yes, but that was what I was also going to tell you. Some of our builders also got attacked by the cat army, but they didn’t find out about what we are building.” he said.

“I can not believe it. How did the cat army find out?!” I said.

He did not have time to reply, because we just saw Avraham’s big warship. It was huge and there was a nuclear bomb. Oh-No! He’s attacking! I had an idea. I turned on the microphone. “Avraham surrender or we will open fire!”I say into it.

“No!”I heard Avraham’s voice say.

“I am landing my ship! You will have to kill me, too!” I say while landing my ship!

I waited for Avraham to fire but he didn’t. “I will let you build your bomb shelter and then I’ll bomb.”

I couldn’t believe it.

 

The

End

 

 

 

 

 

The Epic Adventures of Chloe Cochle

The eerie music started to play. That’s how it all started. It was all downhill from there. And then I couldn’t believe what I saw: a piano appeared in the middle of the room. I can’t remember what happened next, but I had a strange vision that an alien came into the room and started playing the piano. I woke up in a hospital bed wearing a blue and white flowered hospital gown in a room with a guy who was wearing a white lab coat and with hair that looked tossed about, like the hair of a mad scientist. Suddenly he started hitting me with questions.

“What is your name?!”

“Where do you live?!”

“Who are your parents?!”

“How old are you?!”

I tried to speak. I really did. But nothing came out.

“Speak!!! Tell me everything!!!”

Then I remembered that I had been taking sign language at Corral Academy for the past three or four years. Corral Academy is a private school specializing in sign language. My grandfather is deaf, and it was the closest sign language school around. And the best.

“Do you speak sign language?” I signed.

And he signed back, “Of course I do. Where do you think you are?! The land of the English-speaking people?! Now, tell me EVERYTHING!!!”

My name is Chloe and I am fourteen years old. My mother disappeared in 3021 when I was 7 years old in a mysterious incident with aliens.  Or maybe it was yesterday. I am not thinking straight right now. Ever since, I have been terrified of aliens and unexpected things. Then it was my turn to ask the questions.

“Where am I? Who are you? Why am I here? Now you have to tell me everything.”

“Please!! Do you know why can’t I talk?” He just stood there, staring at me like I was the craziest person he had ever seen. I stared back at him. Then I went crazy.

“Why aren’t you saying anything about it?!!!!!!!!!!!?!”

I started chasing him around the room with flailing arms.

“YOU PROMISED!!!!!!!!!”

“Yes, but—”

“NO BUTS!! THERE ARE NO EXCUSES!!!”

“Calm. Down.”

“YOU WANT ME TO CALM DOWN?  TELL ME EVERYTHING THEN!!!!!”

“Okay, okay fine.”

“You are at the Inner Galaxy Hospital, address 1563 Inner Galaxy Way, Bunchen, Yilo Galaxy. I am a psychologist, sent by the board of the galaxy.  You are here because the aliens you saw captured you because you saw them at work, trying to get samples of humans to clone them. Your mother came here seven years ago because she saw them as well.”

“So then why didn’t the other people who saw it come here?”

“There were other people who saw it?!  AND YOU ARE ONLY TELLING ME NOW?!!!!!!!!!!!”

“Take over the world.”  He said into a thingy that looked a little like a walkie talkie as he left the room, “And do it quickly.”

 

Ok. I know that there is a possibility that  my mom is somewhere in this building. If she is, she would probably know exactly what to do. I remember when I was little she used to give me all the advice I could ever want. She was the best. Just the thought of getting her back got me  excited… But right now I had other things to think about… I looked out the window, thinking  about the day mom disappeared. It was a really nice day out and I woke up thinking that everything would be perfect. When I got home my mom was nowhere to be found. My dad said that she went to the basement to do the laundry and never came back. The security cameras got fogged up mysteriously, but you could faintly see the shape of  what looked a little bit like aliens, like the ones that I saw. I wonder what mom would say the story was. It would probably be different from her perspective. Why am I thinking so much?! I HAVE TO FIND HEEERRRRRRRR!!!

I started looking  for the psychologist.  I needed him to find out why I couldn’t speak.  Anyway, it felt like there was a wool sweater around my vocal chords. I hated it. I saw the front door that he went through and tried it to see if I could get through it. It was locked. Great. Ohmygosh!!! There was a grate that I could go through maybe if I tried… No, that’s a pathetic Idea. My friend, Violet, taught me how to pick locks once. She said that one day it would come in handy, but at the time I didn’t see how it would ever come in handy. Now I understand what she was talking about. I took out a bobby pin from my messed–up bun and started to fiddle with the lock. This one seemed to be harder than the rest I had done. Maybe it required some other kind of password in addition to a key. Since this was in another galaxy completely different from the one I’m used to living in, maybe they had completely different crazy technology that we do not have so maybe this lock was going to be much harder than all of the rest that I’ve tried. Probably. But I hope not. This would be so easy if I could have just undone the lock, found my mother immediately standing out the door waiting for me, and we could just talk out a plan to escape here and come back to our world. That would just be so much easier. But, unfortunately, this is not a fairytale, where everything turns out perfect in the end and everybody lives happily ever after. There is no such thing as happily ever after to me because there is no such thing as perfect. If only. Click. I heard the sound of the door opening, only to find that there was another door, waiting for me like a prize for getting one door open. Who knows how many other doors there could be. This was going to be a hard thing to accomplish.

“What is your password?” A robotic sounding voice said.

Passwords  are usually something that the person who thought up the password thinks about very often, or something that is close to their heart. Or maybe a number combination, like the address or something. Let’s see. 1563galaxyhospital. Yes. Maybe that would work. Let me try it.

“What is your password?” a robotic voice repeated.

“1563 galaxy hospital,” I said.

“Wrong password,” the robotic voice repeated.  I wondered what the password could be, if that wasn’t it. 1563. Maybe that’s it. Let me try.

“1563.”

“Password correct.”

Great! Now I needed to unlock who knows how many more doors. This door had a keypad on it for a lock with numbers on it. I typed in the numbers 1563 and the door didn’t budge. I knew that it was a four-number combination, definitely. I wondered if it was a word and numbers corresponded to the letters in the word. Let’s see. I knew that the galaxy is Yilo galaxy, whatever that was. The Y is the 25th letter of the alphabet.  The letter I is the 9th. L is The the 12th and O is the 15th. Now I take the first number of each number, and I have my password. Let’s see. 2911. I immediately punch the code to the robotic voice. I silently cheered as I saw the door open. Inside of the small room there was a strange painting done with ultra-color technology. I took it off of the wall to look at it. Beautiful.  I noticed for the first time that there was a small safe that had a clue pinned on it — ”Think of your mother.”

I thought of the nickname that I called her—Mamaw.  I typed her nickname in and it opened and inside there was a note. It said, “I am in a la, come to save me!! If you do not, the whole human race will be in danger!!! – Mamaw.”

Great! Now I had a clue!  I couldn’t wait for the happily ever-after. Inside of the room there was also a keyboard that looked like it had wires that connected to the door.  The door looked like it was unlocked, so I tried it to see if it was open.  No. It was not open.  I turned on the keyboard (I play piano in music class at my school) and started fiddling with it. Suddenly I got an idea. What if you had to play a certain melody on the keyboard and that was the pass code to get through the door?! I thought of the address again. 1563. If A was one, B was two, C was three, and so on, then that could be the key!!!!!! That meant that the melody must be AEFC!!!!!!!!  I played it on the piano. Wow. That is such a strange sounding melody. Yet, it sounds strangely familiar. I was trying to think where I had heard it when suddenly it struck my mind. The sound that played on the piano when they took over my house! I was so happy I found this melody. It was probably the key to open the door I played it over and over again at the fourth time, the door opened. I went through the door to find a small room and in that room there was a boy, about my age, standing there, looking trapped.

He had long black hair, he was tall,  and he was wearing the same gown that I was wearing, except mine was much more dirty and ripped by now.  He hadn’t noticed me at all.  I wondered if he could talk, unlike me.  He looked as if I had seen him before, like the melody on the piano. So strange and familiar, it was scary. I didn’t know what to think, but I better do something.  But what?  I finally decided to get his attention by going in front of him and signing: “Can you talk?” So I did, and he signed back.

“No, I can’t talk.”

“Where are you from?” I asked.

“I’m from here. Aren’t you?” he asked.

“I’m from planet Earth,” I said.

“I heard about that. In my school, they talked about that,” he calmly signed to me.

“How old are you?” I signed.

“54 moons old,” he signed.

“How long is that in years?” I asked.

“I don’t know, but one moon is about 1/4 of a year, I think.”

“Oh cool we are about the same age!!!”

“Cool!”

“How did you get here?”

“It’s a long story. You?”

“It’s a long story.”

There was a door with a metal lock that looked easy to pick. This one looked easier than the rest I had already picked. They probably made it easy to pick because if we got through all the other locks, we would probably get out from this one somehow.

“Do you know how to pick a lock?” Jacob signed.

“Yes. Do you want me to pick this one?” I signed

“Yes.”

“Ok.”

I fiddled with the lock with my bobby pin.

“Uhhhhhhhhhhh… Got it!!!!!!!”

I stared at the vast universe that I could see. It was amazing. It was like standing in the middle of the Universe. It was the most beautiful thing I have ever seen. There were so many colors. It didn’t look like this in all of the pictures that I had seen. It was mostly green. It looked more like the Northern Lights than what it actually was.

I signed to him. “Is this where you lived?”

“Yes, but there’s more to it than that, but I’m not sure if I can tell you. I have to get to know you a little bit better before I tell you.”

My hands hurt from signing all the time. I wished I could have my voice back. It was so weird not to be able to talk. I was starting to forget what it was like to talk.

We started to walk around and look at what was around me instead of the sky. It looked like it would never end, like I was on top of the world. The sky was endless. I was going to find where my mom was. I thought about the clue that my mom had left me.

“Jacob, there is something I have to tell you,” I signed.

“Yes?” he signed.

“My mom is somewhere outside here. In a lab somewhere. She is trapped and she needs my help. You live here, so you should know. Do you know of any labs around here?”

“Yes, I do. There are two in the area. The closest one is about 5 quims away.”

“Okay. That’s not that far. I can do that. Come on let’s go.”

We started walking and walking and finally, we reached somewhere that looked like the end of the Universe. It was fast, black, nothingness. There were hundreds of parachutes stacked next to it.

“You have to jump,” signed Jacob.

“I don’t know if I can do this,” I signed back.

“Here I’ll show you,” and he jumped without a parachute.

“Wait, you forgot a parachute.” I was longing to be able to talk because I didn’t want to lose my companion. We were starting to be friends.

Great, now I had lost two people along my adventure. I guess I had no choice. I had to jump in order to get to the lab and find my mom. I grabbed a lime-green parachute, strapped it on my back, and jumped.

I landed on a tiny island of isolation. There was one teeny building. I suppose that was the lab. It was a 5-foot, modern building, kind of like a teeny, tiny version of the Empire State Building. I circled the building once or twice to try to find a door. There was only one window stretched around it like a band. I decided to try and break in. Hopefully, this was the right lab. I wished Jacob was here. He  might know a better way to get in. Luckily, I had my pen knife with me; I never leave home without it. I used it to cross an x on it and then I broke it with my fist. Ow, that hurt. I wish I hadn’t done that. Maybe my mom would have some ointment or something. The last time she had taken care of me when I was sick or helped me when I wasn’t feeling well was 7 years ago.

There was good-sized hole for me to go through. I climbed through it and the inside was so much bigger than the outside. I was amazed. There was something that looked like a full-size ferris wheel. There was nobody in there. I climbed on the ferris wheel, thinking that maybe it would lead me somewhere. The second I set foot on the first gondola, it started to move, fast. I climbed inside frantically as it was moving. I was hooked on by two-feet, but my head was hanging down. This was the scariest thing I have done, even scarier than the parachute. It stopped when I was at the very top.  For the first time I saw a secret door in the ceiling. I pushed it to see if it would open, and it did. I climbed up there and inside was a room that looked like a lab. Inside strapped up in a chair was… my Mother!!!

 

 

Chapter nine:

 

 

I wanted to scream SOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO BAD!!!

I could see from the look on her face that she could see me. I frantically started  to untie the knots in the rope that was tying her in the chair.  I undid the cloth that was tying her mouth shut. I hope she could talk. “Can you talk?” I signed. My mother went to the same school I go to, therefore she knows sign language.

“No” she signed. She frantically started to sign to the aliens. “Give us our voices back or else I will tell the whole world about your evil plot!!”

“Yeah right. Nice try, but no way.”

“And we are not kidding. I have my all-galaxy cell phone on me.” I signed to them. “I am a close friend with the ruler of the world’s daughter!!” I said to the aliens. I hadn’t told them before because I wanted to know that my mother was safe first. All of a sudden, I didn’t have that feeling like there was a wool sweater around my neck! “Mamaw?” I stood in shock for a moment. I never realized how great it was to be able to talk!! “Come on, Mamaw!!!!!!  Lets get out of here!!!”

And so we ran, faster than the wind, onto the ferris wheel, out through the broken window, and onto the island and the vast, neverending, universe above us.  I strapped into a parachute and I started soaring. “Mamaw, strap into that parachute!” She did, and she quickly caught up to me. “So, mamaw, tell me everything!!!  Starting from when you left, long ago.”

“Some aliens kidnapped me, because I saw them. They made me mute, so that I wouldn’t complain. I then learned, by eavesdropping, that they were going to use me to make evil clones that appeared human but were evil to use against us. They have been trying for years now, without succeeding. I have been messing up their equipment and they have not figured me out. Thank you for coming to get me. I can’t believe you found that note. It was the only time the aliens left me unsupervised.”

I then told her what happened to me, every single little detail. I was so happy. I felt this sort of descending feeling. I looked down and saw planet earth below me. How did the parachutes know where to go? Our city was getting closer and I could see our building.  Suddenly our parachutes disappeared and we were free falling. Finally we landed, safe and sound. We walked up the stairs to the third floor and we went into our apartment. The first thing we saw was my dad.

We automatically all embraced each other in a big hug. “What happened to you guys? It was scary—my wife disappeared and then my daughter—what was I supposed to do? Where did you go?”  So we told him the whole story, and it was a happy ending for everybody.That night was scary though. I put on some music to listen to, and suddenly all that I heard was that creepy melody. I tried to stop the music, but it wouldn’t stop. It just kept playing on and on.  Finally I just threw it out the window and I never heard that melody again.

Now I am 21 years old, and I recently thought of something. What ever happened to Jacob? So I looked his name up on the computer and it said that he was the youngest person ever to go to outer space but disappeared mysteriously. Then they said he recently appeared again, and was asked many questions for that matter, but he refused to answer any of them.  I am glad he is safe. That was what he wanted to tell me.

Annie and the Cat

Once there were two mice. The wife was Japanese and her name was Fumi and the  husband was Nepali and his name was Hasan. They were always arguing about whose culture they should live by. And since they lived in a Buddhist temple, every morning they saw people in the temple who were always dressing in robes.  They wondered what they were doing in the temple. The mice always heard people talking in their native language.

So, one day they went to a library and when they were looking around they saw an abandoned pup (a baby mouse) in a basket! So Fumi freaked out, and said to Hasan “We need to save that little pup, please Hasan please!’

So when Hasan said okay, Fumi jumped up and down, then picked up the pup.

She ran home and started buying a crib, blankets, and toys for the pup at Mice ‘R’ Us. While Hasan was still looking for the books in the library to translate the languages that the people were talking. Fumi loved how the pup looked. She was beige and white.

When Hasan came home with the books (How to Speak Chinese) he said, “Why don’t we keep the baby for a little while and then we give her up for donation?”

“How dare you say that! This is my pup now. You have no say to give it up for donation, especially since she’s a live pup. Not a toy! Why don’t you want to keep the pup?” said Fumi.

“Because it’s too much responsibility. If we do keep it, when it grows up, it’s going to be Nepali, not Japanese.”

“Stop calling her, an it. And she is  going to be Japanese, not Nepali when she grows up,” said Fumi.

“Are you even going to name it?” asked Hasan.

“Yes. She is  going to have a Japanese name, not a Nepali name,” said Fumi.

“How dare you name this pup a Japanese name” and then Hasan just got so mad that he stormed out of their little hole and right into the big temple.

When Fumi saw that Hasan stormed out, she quickly put the pup down in the new crib, that she bought yesterday. Then she ran to Hasan, and grabbed his tiny arm. But as soon as she grabbed his arm, a big person saw them and screamed.

“Ah, a mouse!!!”

So when Fumi heard that she ran back to their hole, still gripping onto Hasan’s arm. When Fumi and Hasan got in their little hole Fumi said, “We have to get out of here so the humans don’t call someone to kill us, and find a new place to live.”

So Hasan started packing his bag, Fumi’s, and the baby’s bag. Hasan and Fumi put on their bags, and Fumi also put the baby’s bag on. He put the baby in the baby carrier on Fumi’s chest. Then they quietly walked out of the temple. then they walked quietly in the shadows so people can’t  see them.  They were trying to find a place in one of their friend’s houses for a little while until they could find a park to make a burrow in to take care of the baby, and live in.

They started to walk to their friend’s house, which was in a grocery stand in Japantown.

“Why do we always have to be in Japantown and not go to my friend’s house who is Nepali?” said Hasan.

“Let’s stop arguing. We have to find some place safe to keep the baby,” said Fumi.

“How about now we just name the baby?” said Hasan.

“Okay. How about we name the baby Chika.”

So Hasan said okay.Then started to get settled in to their friend’s house.Then Fumi said “This is my friend Annie.”

But then Hasan said in a loud voice “Annie only has Japanese things.” Then Fumi said “Stop screaming Chika’s sleeping.”

“Okay,” said Hasan, “why don’t we start unpacking”

“Okay,” said Fumi in a low voice. So they started unpacking. Then Fumi said “You know i think we are going to live in the library.” Right then, a cat heard them squeaking. He stuck his hand inside of the hole and tried to get Annie.

He caught Annie in his paw. Annie screamed for Fumi and Hasan to help her while the cat laughed evilly.

“Help me! The cat’s got me! Fumi! Help me!” Annie screamed.

Fumi picked up baby Chika and put her back in the baby carrier. The baby was crying. Hasan started packing their bag again with their clothes, books, food, papers, blankets, pillows and all of the stuff that they had in their house in the temple.

Instead of Hasan only putting on his backpack, he put on Fumi’s and Chika’s too.

Then, they started running after Annie. Annie was still screaming for Fumi and Hasan to help her. Her screams became faint because the cat had her in his mouth and the cat was going further and further away.

The cat screamed, “You will never get her back. I am going to feed her to my kittens.” Then Fumi screamed “NNNNNNNNOOOOOOOO!!!!!!!”

At the cat’s house, which was a dome made out of a whole bunch of leaves in Central Park, he put Annie in a cardboard box and put a rock on top so that she wouldn’t come out.

“We will have her for breakfast tomorrow,” said the cat to his kittens.

“Why can’t we have her now? I’m hungry. I didn’t like the dinner we had. Robin legs make me nauseous,” said the youngest kitten named James.

“Well, you can have some of the leftover crow from yesterday.”

“Okay, fine,” said James in a sad voice.

“Okay, good because I was planning on making scrambled eggs with mice tomorrow,” said the father.

When Annie heard that, she knew she had to do something. Once she heard that all the cats were sleeping, she chewed a hole that was as big as a dime, squished through it, and ran away. Then in the morning the father cat went to take Annie to make her into scrambled eggs, when he saw she was not there.  Then he saw the little hole she made, and screamed, “Aaaaaaahhhhhhh!”

“Where is that mouse??” said the dad cat.

Then James said, “Dad, we are going to have mice scrambled eggs today yyyaaayyy!!!!!!!!!!” Then the father cat said in a small voice.

“Well the mouse some how ran away”

James said, “Wwwwhhhhhhaaaaattttttttt!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!”

Then the father cat said “James don’t talk to me like that! You’re in time out.”

Then James said, “Okay” in a sad voice.

Now back to Fumi and Hasan.

Now, they were in a library. They looked for Annie for a day, but couldn’t find her. They looked in people’s houses to see if the cat was there. They looked in playgrounds and office buildings.

“I hope it wasn’t my fault that Annie got caught by a cat,” said Fumi. “I hope she is not dead,” said Fumi, holding Chika and rocking her back and forth. Fumi was chirping really loudly.

“I don’t think she is dead. Maybe she escaped somehow and is alive,” said Hasan. “Think of the good stuff that’s happening. No cats can come in the library so no cats will kill us.”

“Okay, but I’m still worried if she is dead or alive. Okay, that makes me feel a little better”said Fumi.

“See, there’s always good in bad times,” said Hasan.

Fumi said “Wow, Hasan you have not said a word about our culture.”

“Oh yah” said Hasan. Just as Hasan said that, Annie’s voice called out, “Fumi, Hasan, can you hear me?!”

“Oh my gosh Hasan, that’s Annie!! Annie! Annie! Annie! Annie! We are here!”

“Fumi, Hasan is that you?” yelled Annie.

“YES! It is me Annie, we are in the library!” So, Annie started running to the library. “Is Chika safe?”

“YES!”said Fumi.

“Hewo” said Chika, as Annie ran into their hole. As Fumi jumped on Annie and hugged her, Hasan said “YAY”.

Then Annie said, “Wow, you guys you have not said anything about your culture”

“Oh yah,” said Fumi and Hasan together. Then they all sat on the sofa and started talking about their adventures.

 

 

THE END

 

The Aldrins

Siblings bring each other closer together

and learn from each other every day, this story is an example of that.

Hope you enjoy.

 

Everyone has a story. Mine starts off in New York City. At a house — my house. My house is cozy and appropriate for four children, my little brother Owen, my older sister Brooke, my oldest brother Logan, my little brown cockerspaniel-poodle doggie named Maggie, and me. We all live together as a family. But there was only one thing missing in our happy, crazy little, well, big family. Our parents.

 

***

The morning started off a usual. Owen complaining to me: “Lilyyy I wanna play, I don’t wanna go to school. Its boring!” he would scream. Then meanwhile Maggie jumped on my lap I would complain to my sister: “Brooke, will you stop brushing your hair? Its already brushed! Help out with the others!” And Brooke would complain to Logan: “Logan. Please don’t be so messy! There are other people in this house look around, this place is a mess!”

And Logan had no one to complain to, so this is what he would say: “ Owen, you will have fun and learn at school, Lily, help Owen get ready since you already are, Brooke please stop brushing your hair and help me clean this house.” So we would do what Logan said, eat breakfast, and head to school. I wonder how it would be if an adult were in charge.

 

***

I get off the cab and head to my school,  John A. Lowan Secondary, I get out my ID card I need to enter my school:

Lily Aldrin

Birthdate: 2-18-01

8th Grade

I hand it over to the secretary, Dawnica, she’s actually pretty nice. Then again, I have no friends so I guess talking my school secretary is the only option left. Although there is this girl, Jennifer Blue, who is nice to me, but she is best friends with this this other girl Emma Greenbaum. Like I care. Okay maybe I am a little jealous.

***

“You are lucky you have Mr. Sheeler,” says Dawnica. as I start to enter the school.

Let me explain. I go to private school.  Ever wonder how we have enough money for that, and for food, and for our apartment? Mr. Sheeler was great friends with our parents. So when my parents left, Mr. Sheeler did not move in with us, but gave us the money that we needed in order to live.  And Dawnica being my “friend,” I told her about him. I smooth-out my uniform: a white blouse, navy blue skirt, and nude tights. I quickly say bye to Dawnica and head to my homeroom.

***

I guess now’s the time I should tell you about my parents. When I was about one year old, my father Theodore Aldrin went off to Haiti to study fossils that were found. Unfortunately, when a tsunami  occurred my father drowned and died, my mother was in a horrible position in life with four children. Things got worse a year later. She found out she had breast cancer. Luckily, it did not affect her too much. Until she found out she was pregnant. When Owen was born my mom died.

***

When I got home, Maggie jumped onto my lap as I sat down and started doing irritating science homework. Soon, when I finished, my brother came into the living room. He dropped his backpack and waved a letter in the air.

“What’s this?” I said.

“It’s my acceptance letter,” he said.

I replied to him “for what?” even though I knew what he was talking about.

“For Yale,” he said.

“Logan, I know this means a lot ot you, but you can’t just leave us here.”

“Lily, I”m not just going to leave you here. You have Brooke and Mr. Sheeler,” he said.

“But we need you!” I said, then stomped to my room.

 

***

When I got to my room, I threw myself on the bed and started crying. First, my two parents are dead and now my oldest brother who is basically like my dad? It’s all so unfair. Why me? Why not some other red-head?

“Ugh, keep the drama to William Shakespeare.,” Brooke whined when she heard me crying.

I sit up on my bed and said, “Brooke, ugh, why do you have to be such a teenager girl? Won’t you for once see how life is for me? For us?”

“Logan’s leaving!” I screamed at her.

Then I broke down into tears.

“He’s going to college!” I sobbed.

Then for the first time, Brooke took her headphones off, looked up from her computer, sat down next to me and hugged me.

***

Friday, December 25th, the day of Christmas, was the day Logan started packing. Most kids would start next September, but Yale invited him to start in the second semester January 5th. Packing would be quick for him. Being himself, Logan packing up means quickly throwing everything in his room into old Fresh Direct Boxes that he found in the basement. Mr. Sheeler had bought us a Christmas tree and bought each of us a present. Owen got a stuffed dinosaur, I got a sock monkey for my collection, Brooke got a pair of headphones, and Logan got a laptop. Of course. Everything was going by so quickly. Logan was leaving in less than a week.

I woke up to the smell of pancakes and Maggie licking my face meanwhile jumping around in my bed.

“Breakfast is ready!” Logan called. When we were all sitting down, Brooke said, “Now, who is going to make our pancakes?”

Logan rolled his eyes, again.

“Aren’t you gowna miss us? Why you woll your eyes?” said Owen playing with his pancakes.

“First, Owen, don’t play with your food, eat it. And second, I wish you guys would understand how exciting is is that I’m going to college. You haven’t even said congratulations once!”

There was silence.

“Congratulations,” said Brooke sarcastically.

***

That night, Mr. Sheeler called. Owen picked up the phone.

“Helwo-o, Who iiis it?”

“It is Mr. Sheeler,” said Mr. Sheeler with his typical German accent.

“I want to play with my stuffed dinosaur. I’ll give it to….Lilyyyy,” Owen yelled.

I rushed to the living room to grab the phone. I grabbed the antique phone sitting on the desk right next to the Christmas tree. Owen would always call my name when Mr. Sheeler called because I was Owen’s favorite. I answered the phone. “Hello Mr. Sheeler,” I mimicked his German accent.

“Hello Lily. I just wanted to let Logan and your family know that I have paid for Yale. And tell him congratulations…”

Quickly, I said, “Okay, bye.”

Usually, I have long conversations with Mr. Sheeler about when he and my father were searching for fossils in Germany…Boring! But this time, I hung up quickly because Logan was leaving in 5 days and I just wanted to get the thought out of my head. I swing into Logan’s room and said, “Sheeler paid for Yale,” then I sat on my bed and thought I’d had enough, I had to get out of here. I put on my shoes, my coat, and went out to Central Park. The snow was falling. I fell onto my back and just rolled around. I looked up and thought about where I was right now. I was thirteen. I had three siblings. My parents died and my oldest brother was going off to college. I started to cry. Then I stopped myself. I mean, I should be grateful that I have three siblings and I have a German man supporting my family financially. And I mean I guess it wouldn’t be so bad if my brother went off to college. Eventually, I’m gonna go to college. I lay there in silence. Then I got up and went home.

 

It was January 4th, the day Logan left. Everyone had said goodbye to Logan and I went with him to Grand Central station. What I felt was so hard to explain. My heart hurt and I felt like I wanted to cry, but when I tried I just couldn’t.

Before I knew it Logan said, “Oh! There’s the train!”

I saw it in him that he felt like jumping around. Meanwhile I just wanted to fall back and pretend that I was in a world where my parents never died and Logan never went off to college…

The sound of the train woke me. I just had to face reality. Then I looked over to Logan, finally I saw the sadness in him I had been waiting for. Logan looked at me. I looked right back at him.

“Logan, um, good luck,.” I said.

He smiled at me. “Thank you, Lil… Ill miss you,” he said softly.

“Ill miss you too,” I said, looking up to hold in my tears.

He hugged me, then picked up his bag and got on to the train. Just as the train left I forgot to say something. I started running after the train. I stopped myself. Then I shouted at the top of my lungs,

“LOGAAN! CONGRATULAAATIONS!”